
Wffl 



i 









nmm 



SIB! 






Hi 






!fl 



Ml 






■-ft 






8 






II 



H 






THE 



HAND-BOOK 



OF 



STANDARD OR AMERICAS 



PHONOGRAPHY. 



IN -FIVE PA11TS. 



BY ANDREW J. GRAHAM, 

OONDTJCTOE OF THE PHONETIC ACADEMY, NEW YORK J AND AUTHOR OF " BEIEF LONG- 
HAND," "A SYSTEM FOR THE RAPID EXPRESSION OF NUMBERS," ETC. 



leto prlt: 

ANDREW J . GRAHAM, 
PHONETIC DEPOT. 



ENTERED, ACCORDING TO ACT OF CONGRESS, IN THE YEAR 1858, BY 

ANDREW J. GRAHAM, 

IH THE CLERK'S OFFICE OF THE DISTRICT COURT OF THE UNITED STATES 
FOR THE SOUTHERN DISTRICT OF NEW TOSZ 



-V 



^ 






V* 



** 



Davikb and L,cberts, Stcreotypcrs, 
113 Nassau Street, New York. 



PREFACE. 



A Standard system of shorthand for the English 
language must combine the following characteristics : 

I. It must be capable of representing with accuracy 
the sounds of the English language, and of the principal 
languages quoted by English writers and speakers. 

II. It must secure considerable speed of writing, 
with ample legibility, so as to answer all the purposes 
for which longhand is employed. 

III. It must secure, for reporting purposes, ample 
speed of writing, without illegibility. 

IV. Order and simplicity must be observed in every 
department. 

Laying aside all exaggeration, and coming down to 
positive demonstration, the system of shorthand pre- 
sented in this work can be shown to comply entirely 
with every one of these requirements, while it may be 
as demonstratively shown that every other system falls 
considerably short of them. 

The English Phonography, the general features of 
which were invented by Mr. Isaac Pitman, and which 



IV PREFACE. 

is the basis of this system, though approaching these 
requirements more nearly than most other systems, is 
nevertheless found wanting in many important par- 
ticulars when weighed in the balance of science. It 
can not express sounds, especially vowel-sounds, with 
such minute accuracy as this system ; nor does it so 
closely follow general principles instead of arbitrary 
rules ; nor can it secure, by from 30 to 50 per cent., so 
great a speed of writing. 

Indeed, many who have perseveringly practiced the 
Old Phonography have been unable to secure by it 
sufficient speed for reporting purposes ; and even of 
those whose natural facility of hand, whose tempera- 
ment, and will, and talents would compensate for many 
a deficiency of a system, there are many w T ho know 
that the English Phonography is inadequate for the 
verbatim reporting of the more rapid speakers ; and if 
it has ever been made to fully answer this purpose, it 
has been by means which would not be recognized as 
a part of that system. 

Mr. Pitman, up to 1852, had made eight Modifica- 
tions or Changes of his original system, which was 
published in 1837, that is, a Change or Eemodeling for 
every alternate year. Deeming his system yet incom- 
plete, he has made still another modification within 
the past year (1857), in making which he has aban- 
doned the Natural and Etymological order of the vowel- 
scale, and in some other respects detracted from the 
value which previously existed in his system. 

These frequent changes, while they show that his 



PREFACE 



Phonography does not comply with what are felt to be 
the proper requirements of a Standard System, have 
subjected those who have employed his method, to 
frequent, inconvenient, and discouraging changes of 
habits of writing, and in several respects for the worse, 
especially of late years. 

It is in view of the Fact that the system here pre- 
sented complies with all the requirements of a stand- 
ard system, and that hence its learners will not be 
subjected to the necessity of frequent and harassing 
changes of their writing in order to avoid the equally 
great inconvenience of having all their writing thrown 
out of fashion, that this system is denominated Stand- 
ard Phonography. If the public generally should be- 
stow upon it that approbation which it has won from 
accomplished writers of the Old Phonography, there 
will be added a third reason for this title, which, how- 
ever (though it would come gratefully to the Author, 
who has labored under many difficulties, and been at 
great expense in the production of this work), would 
still be of less value in the scale of true merit than the 
approbation of the principles of Steno-Phonetic Science. 
In contradistinction from the Old, or English Phono- 
graphy, and in honor of his Country, the author would 
also denominate this system American Phonography. 

That this art might go where the wants of the age 
demand it should go, into all our institutions of learn- 
ing, there has been an endeavor to present it in a 
Scientific Form and Manner, with a Fullness yet Con- 
ciseness of Explanation, and a Completeness of Illus- 



VI PREFACE. 

tration, which should place it, in these respects, upon 
an equal footing with the other arts, and the sciences, 
which are now made branches of education. "While 
the Hand-Book is thus best adapted to the require- 
ments of School-instruction, it is eminently suited to 
the wants of those who are unable to procure or afford 
the assistance of a phonographic teacher. 

All the Stenographic illustrations — which will be 
found superior to the illustrations of all preceding 
shorthand works — were executed by Mr. Chauncey B. 
Thorne, the manifestation of whose genius and taste in 
these little matters indicates in but an inferior degree 
his fitness for the Profession of Art, to which he be- 
longs. 

As an introduction to the study of Phonography, 
there has been presented a description of the principal 
sounds of the language, accompanied by exercises de- 
signed to educate the vocal organs to the accurate and 
facile, and therefore elegant, formation of the com- 
ponents of speech. While this department of the 
work will prepare the reader for the successful study 
of Phonography, it is hoped that it may increase the 
number of those who would not detract from the glory 
of our noble language by a slovenly pronunciation of 
the elements of which it is composed. 

As a means of familiarizing phonographic principles 
and outlines, there is furnished in Part Third an ex- 
tended series of progressive reading exercises, engraved 
by Mr. Thorne. "While these exercises possess fully the 
merit of legibility, they affom an example of the ex- 



PREFACE. vil 

quisitely beautiful phonography produced by an ac- 
complished phonographic penman. By the imitation 
of this engraving the student may at least avoid the 
awkward stiffness of writing which would be induced 
by copying after inferior examples. 

Part Fourth consists of an extended series of writing 
exercises. These, if written through in accordance with 
the directions, will make the student an accomplished 
phonographer, by requiring an exact and thorough 
knowledge of principles, by familiarizing phonographic 
outlines, by practically teaching the general principles 
for the determination of the best forms for words, and 
by requiring a desirable training of the hand. This 
department is so extensive as to constitute for one who 
has learned the plan of its arrangement a valuable 
Phonographic Thesaurus, by reference to which he 
may learn the best forms, as a general thing, for a 
large number of the more frequent words of the En- 
glish language. 

The legibility of the Old Phonography was seriously 
impaired in consequence of the diverse modes of writ- 
ing adopted by different phonographers. This arose 
from the fact that it furnished no settled principles of 
orthography. The very authority that would have in- 
troduced harmony and uniformity failed, partially in 
consequence of its inconsistency with itself, but chiefly 
because of its inconsistency with the principles of 
stenographic orthography, which, indeed, had not been 
determined. In the Fifth Department of this work 
there has been presented a series of principles, con 



Vlll PREFACE. 

stituting an Orthographical Science for Phonography, 
which — while it will secure a uniformity of writing, 
that mere authority never could, enabling the writer 
to dispense with the guidance of either empirical 
practice or authoritative opinion, and determine ac- 
curately for himself the best phonographic outlines — 
affords a test of stenographic criticism, to which sys- 
tems of shorthand, in respect of their speed, must be 
subjected in effect, however much it may be avoided 
in form. 

Since it will be necessary for the student to refer 
quite frequently from one to another of the different 
parts of this work, it has seemed best that they should 
be comprised in one volume instead of several. This 
renders it possible to afford all the parts — every one 
of which will be needed by the student — at a cost con- 
siderably less than would otherwise be possible. 

Finally, with the hope that his countrymen, in the 
cultivation of a just national spirit, will encourage 
American, rather than foreign, authors, especially 
when the works of the former are undeniably superior 
to those of the latter, this work and the system it ex- 
plains are committed by the Author to the care of the 
American People. 

Andrew J. Graham. 

Phonetic Depot, New Yoek, Aug. 26, 1858. 



AN 



INTRODUCTION 



TO 



PHONOTYPY AND PHONOGRAPHY. 



PART FIRST 



or THE 



»ni-§Mk uf ^iattiati lliflwpattlig. 



COPYBIGHT SECURED. 



PREFACE. 



The objects of this treatise are three, namely— 

1. To acquaint the general reader with the needs, objects, advantages, and gea*» 
ral principles of a phonetic representation of language. 

2. To serve as an accompaniment of a chart of the vocal elements of the English 
language. "With this view, there have been given a general description and seve- 
ral examples of each sound. The exercises accompanying the descriptions are de- 
signed to assist the reader in familiarizing the elementary sounds and the mode of 

producing them. 

3. To remove the various obstacles which, with the use of other manuals of 
Phonography, are usually encountered in the study of that art. To this end, 
there have been given— 1. A general statement of the principles and characteristics 
of Phonography. 2. Specific directions for making the sounds denoted by the 
phonographic characters. 3. Exercises in phonetic analysis and synthesis. 

Persons afflicted with stammering or other defects of articulation may make this 
work of decided service to them in overcoming their embarrassing difficulties, in the 

following manner: 

1. Let them learn, by the careful study of §§ 10-64, 115-162, the nature and char- 
acter of each of the sounds, and the method of producing them. 

2. Utter these sounds many times, carefully, deliberately, distinctly, and with vary 
ing degrees of force, and with different inflections. 

3. Repeatedly go through with the exercises in Phonetic Synthesis, in § 162, accord- 
ing to the directions there given. 

4. Frequently repeat the sentences given as vocal exercises, in §§ 10-64. 

By properly directed exercises in Phonetic Analysis and Synthesis, a complete 
cure of stammering may be effected in almost every case-where there are not 
serious organic defects (which is very rarely the case), and when the stammerer 
sufficiently desires a cure, to undertake the necessary practice. 

Thousands who are subjected to the inconveniences and mortification of stam- 
mering, or some other defect in articulation, would not be, should they know that 
the actions of the vocal organs are as determinate, and as much under the contra! 



1V PfiEFACE. 



of the will as the actions of- the arms, hands, fingers, legs, or feet. Speaking is a „ 
ort as mnch as writing. The road to eaeh is through eertain elementary training. 
Mrst, there has to be an idea of what is to be done ; ucondl ; knowledge as to tho 
mode of doing it; thirdly, practice in that mode. 

He who wonld speak well needs but to have, first, a knowledge of the elements 
of the language ; secondly, a knowledge of the vocal operations necessary for thei, 
production; thirdly, well-directed, thorough, energetic practice in producing the 
elements, and combining them into syllables, syllables into words, words into 
clauses, and clauses into sentences. 

Pho^txo Depot, N*w Yo EE , June 2UA, 1858 ****** ' GBAHAlt 



TABLE OF CONTENTS. 



paos 
Definitions 7 

Spoken and "Written Language 8 

Defects of the Common Orthography — 

1. Too many signs to a sound 11 

2. Too many sounds to a sign 12 

Evils of the Common Orthography 13 

The Elements of the English Language 14 

1. Towels, description of, with exercises . 15-1 9 

2. Towel Diphthongs 19 

S. Consonants 21-26 

4. Consonantal Diphthongs 26 

Number of the Tocal Elements 27 

The Phonetic Alphabet 23 

Principles of the Phonetic Alphabet 29 

Specimens of Phonetic Print — 

1. Truth (with distinct types for air, at, h<?r, none, when, and with monotypes 

for the diphthongs) Dr. Channing 29 

2. True Courage (with distinct types for air, at, her, none, when, and with 

double letters for the diphthongs) Dr. Channing 80 

3. Miniature Writing (with single types for the diphthongs, but without dis- 

tinguishing by signs between the vowels of age and air, ash and at, 
met and her, ope and whole, and with hw for wh in when) 31 

4. Ossian's Address to the Sun (with double types for the diphthongs, with 

hw for wh in when, and without distinguishing by signs between the 

vowels of age and air, as7c and at, met and her, ope and wliole) 31 

Specimen of Phonetic Longhand 32 

Specimen of Transition Phonotypy— What Phonotypy Will Do... Dr. Wheedon 32 
Advantages of Phonotypy— 

1. Immediate ■ S3 

2. Prospective , . . , 84 



VI CONTENTS. 



PAGE 



Objections to Phonotypy Answered. 35 

Phonography— a general statement of its principles 37 

Advantages of Phonography 43 

Benefits of Shorthand Gautress 44 

Two Modes of Eepresenting Language Necessary 46 

Specific Directions for making the Elementary Sounds — 

1. Consonants 48 

2. Towels 51 

Phonetic Synthesis Defined 54 

Exercises in Phonetic Synthesis « 54 

Phonetic Analysis 56 

Exercises in Phonetic Analysis 57 



INTRODUCTION 



TO 



PHONOTYPY AND PHONOGRAPHY, 



DEFINITIONS. 

Pho-net'ics, Phon'ics, or Pho-nol'o-gy, noun. 1. A science which 
treats of the elements of language, their modifications, and their rela- 
tions. 2. The science of representing the elements of language. 

Pho-net'i-cize, verb. To give instruction in phonology ; to convert 
to the support of the Phonetic Preform. 

Pho'no-type, noun. 1. A type to be used in printing the sign of 
a vocal element. 2. The sign produced by the type. 

Pho'no-type, verb. To print with phonotypes; to print phoneti- 
cally, that is, with a sign for each element of the voice, — no more, no 
less. 

Pho-not'yp-y, noun. 1. The printing produced with phonotypes — 
printing, in which each element of language is represented by a 
distinct letter or type. 2. The mode or system of printing phonetically. 

Pho'no-graph, noun. The graphic or written sign of a vocal 
element. 

Pho'no-graph, verb. To write with phonographs. 

Pho-nog'raph-er, noun. A writer of phonography. 

Pho-nog'raph-y, noun. 1. The system of representing language 
with phonographs. 2. The writing produced with phonographs. There 
are two kinds of phonography : 

(1.) Phonetic Longhand, or Longhand Phonography, writing 
produced with a phonetic alphabet consisting of most of the ordinary 
script letters and additional ones of the same general character for the 
additional sounds. 

(2.) Sten'o-pho-nog'raph-y, or Phonetic Shorthand : writing 
produced with an alphabet composed of very simple signs. Of this 
there are two kinds : 

(a) Old, or English, Phonography : a system of shorthand, the 
general features of which were invented by Mr. Isaac Pitman, of 



8 SPOKE N AND WRITTEN LANGUAGE. 

England. Its tolerable perfection is clue to the fact that its improve- 
ment has been contributed to by numerous persons who have practiced 
it. This system has not a sufficiency of signs for a perfectly phonetic 
representation, and is defective in other respects. 

(b) Standard, or American, Phonography : a system of short- 
hand writing, which, in its general features, resembles the English 
Phonography, but possesses many advantages over it. 

Roman'ic Print, the printing produced by the Roman types or 
letters. This term applies to the printing of all the European nations 
who use the Roman alphabet. 

Romanic, or Common, Orthography. The ordinary mode of 
spelling, or representing language. — Heterot'yp-y is sometimes used as 
an equivalent term 



SPOKEN AND WRITTEN LANGUAGE. 

2. What may have been the origin of language, it is not the object of 
this treatise to discuss. Whatever might be the speculative ideas of the 
author on that subject, they would not add to the positive knowledge 
of the reader, and would therefore be unprofitable. Whether human 
language originated from a few monosyllables, as ha, he, hi, ho, as 
Lord Monboddo contends in his work on " The Origin and Progress of 
Language ;" whether it was developed, as Dr. Murray supposed, from 
nine monosyllables, ag, bag, dwag, gwag, lag, mag, nag, rag, swag, 
or whether, as Maupertuis thinks, " language was formed by a session 
of learned societies assembled for that purpose" — is a question of no 
practical moment. It is sufficient to know that spoken language exists, 
and is intended for a representative of ideas. 

3. To the reflecting mind it must ever be pleasing to contemplate the 
wonderful process by which we reproduce, to a greater or less degree, 
in the minds of others, the mental sensations we ourselves experience. 
To make by no means an exhaustive enumeration of the links in the 
mysterious chain which connects soul to soul in feeling and thought, — 
we have a certain effect produced upon us by an oration,. say, which 
oration is divisible into sentences, which can be divided into clauses, 
which are composed of words, which are constituted of syllables, which 
consist of indivisible parts of speech. These sounds we get by hearing, 
which is experiencing certain sensations indirectly produced by vibra- 
tions of the different parts of the ear ; which vibrations were produced 
by certain vibrations of the air ; which vibrations were caused by the 
ejection of the air from the lungs through the variously modified pas- 



SPOKEN AND WRITTEN LANGUAGE. 9 

sages of the mouth and nose. We have not yet arrived at the fountain 
of power "which, through various instrumentalities, has set in motion 
the organs of speech, and sustained them in numerous simultaneous, 
and rapid operations while producing the words which have impressed 
us. Not only have the words been delivered, but they have been modi- 
fied by tone, accent, emphasis, modulation, etc., which concur with the 
words in effecting the desired result. Words are the viewless bearers 
of arbitrary meanings, and are variously grouped to suit the purposes 
of the speaker, and are clothed with the curious intertexture of tone, 
accent, emphasis, modulation, etc., furnished by each speaker as he 
sends them on their mission to his auditor. 

Then, how wonderful is written or printed language ! Here we have, 
or should have, certain signs as the representatives of the elementary 
sounds of speech ; which signs being placed in the order of the sounds 
they represent, become the representatives of words, and sustain to the 
light and sight the same relations the words they indicate bear to the 
air and ear. Observe the circuit which a thought ordinarily travels 
in passing from the mind of an author to that of his reader. It passes 
from the brain of the author through his nerves, muscles, fingers, pen, 
and ink, to paper ; then mounting through the eyes of the compositor 
to his mind, it comes back through his brain, nerves, muscles, and fin- 
gers, to types and ink, and then to paper again, whence the rays 
of light transmit it to the eye of the reader, whence it passes on its 
mysterious journey to his soul. 

4. Languages vary in respect of their utility as instruments of com- 
munication. That language which, all things considered, is best, must 
eventually become the general medium of communication, or be the 
immediate predecessor of a universal language. 

Excellence of the English Spoken Language. — The English language 
— which has drawn riches from various sources to answer the demands 
of the numerous and grand experiences of the race who use it — which 
is well adapted to poetry or prose, to science or art, to commerce or 
philosophy, to religion or law, to the delicate ornations of literature, 
or the sternest and most practical life-experiences— will become the 
universal medium of communication, both by reason of the indomitable 
energy of the Anglo-American race in every phase of life, and by reason 
of its superior merits as a spoken language, unless we shall prove blind 
to the anomalous orthography by which it is now represented, and fail 
to provide in its stead (which may be easily done) a scientific mode of 
writing and printing it. — Prof. Grimm, a noted German philologist, has 
paid no unmerited compliment to the English spoken language in the 
following paragraph : 

" The English language possesses a power of expression such as "ever, 

1* 



10 SPOKEN AND WRITTEN LANGUAGE, 

perhaps, was attained by any other human tongue. Its altogether 
intellectual and singularly happy foundation and development has 
arisen from a surprising alliance between the two noblest languages of 
antiquity, the German and Romanesque — the relation of which to each 
other is well known to be such that the former supplies the material 
foundation, the latter the abstract notions. Yes, truly, the English 
language may call itself a universal language, and seems chosen to rule 
in all future times in a still greater degree in the corners of the earth. 
In richness, sound reason, and flexibility, no modern tongue can be 
compared with it, not even the German, which must shake off many a 
weakness before it can enter the lists with the English." 

K. M. Rapp, another noted German philologist, in his " Physiologie 
der Sprache," has given the following testimony in favor of the 
English language : 

"Although the French has become the common language in a diplo- 
matic and social sense, it has never acquired a firm footing in extensive 
regions out of Europe. The English, on the contrary, may pass for the 
universal language out of Europe ; and by its bold fusion and conse- 
quent decomposition of the forms of its Gothic and Roman elements, 
this idiom has acquired incomparable fluency, and powers especially 
destined by nature more than any one of the other living languages to 
undertake that part. Were not the impediment of a bizarre, antiquated 
orthography in the way, the universality of this language would be still- 
more apparent ; and it may perhaps be fortunate for us other Europeans 
that the Englishman has not made the discovery." 

5. Defects of our Written Language. — But we are beginning to make 
the discovery. Read what Sheridan says of it : 

" Such is the state of our written language, that the darkest hiero- 
glyphics, or the most difiicult ciphers ever invented by the art of man, 
were not better calculated to conceal the sentiments of those who use 
them, from all who do not have the key, than the state of our spelling 
is to conceal the true pronunciation of our words from all except a few 
well-educated individuals." 

It is said, in " Chambers' Papers for the People," that " we violate 
every principle of a sound alphabetical system more outrageously than 
any other nation whatever. Our characters do not correspond to our 
articulations, and our spelling of words can not be matched for irregu- 
larity and whimsical caprice." 



DEFECTS OF COMMON OETHOGEAPHY. 11 
DEFECTS OF THE COMMON ORTHOGRAPHY. 

TOO MANY SIGNS FOR A SOUND. 

6. Let it be understood to be a principle of a correct alphabet that 
no elementary sound of the voice should have more than one sign pro- 
vided for its representation, and, in that respect, the common orthogra- 
phy will appear defective. It does not, however, furnish a sufficient 
number of single signs for the elements of the language ; and of those 
provided, so far as the representation of single elements is concerned, c, 
q, and x are redundant ; for c = k or s ; q = k, and not kw, as Dr, 
Latham says ; and x = ks, kz, or z. But let the combinations of let- 
ters (which are used as the signs of single sounds) be regarded as so 
many separate signs, and the proposition that the common orthography 
employs too many signs for a sound can be easily sustained. It is a 
fact, that the number of signs employed to represent about thirty-four 
elements is not less than three hundred; and instead of every sound 
having its uniform representative, as should be the case in a correct 
orthography, not a single element of the language has a uniform rep- 
resentation in the common spelling ! The elementary sound produced 
in naming ' a' is represented by sixteen different signs ; thus, by a in 
mating, a-e in mate, ai in pain, aigh in straight, ao in gaol, au in 
gauging, au-e in gauge, ay in pray, aye in 'prayed, ea in great, 
ei in veil, eig in reign, eigh in weigh, eighe in weighed, ey in they, eye 
in conveyed. 

The elementary sound produced in naming the letter ' e' is repre- 
sented by seventeen different signs ; thus, by e in be, ee in bee, e-e in 
complete, ea in each, ea-e in leave, eg in impregn, ei in conceit, ei-e in 
conceive, eo in people, ey in key, eye in keyed, i in albino, i-e in maga- 
zine, ie in grief, ie-e in grieve, uay, in quay, ui in mosquito. 

The sound heard in naming the letter ' i' has sixteen different signs. 
The sound indicated by ew has nine different representatives. 

The sound of k is indicated by c in can, ch in chasm, ck in back, gh 
in lough, k in kill, Ik in walk, q in quack. 

The sound of t is indicated by bt in debt, ct in indict, cd in lacked, 
phth in phthisic, pt in ptarmigan, t in to, th in Thomas, tt in letter. 

The sound of /as in for is indicated by^* in off, gh in laugh, ph in 
physic, pph in Sappho. 

The sound of s in sin is represented by c in cede, by ps in psalm., sc 
in scene, ss in loss, sch in schism, sw in sword. 

The sound of I in low is represented by // in ball, by hi in kiln, by 
He in castle, llesl in belles-lettres 



12 DEFECTS OF CO MM OK OETHOGEAPHY. 



TOO MANY SOUNDS TO A SIGN. 

7. Let it "be understood that in a perfect alphabet but one sound 
should be given to a letter, and the common orthography, in that re- 
spect, will appear defective ; because very few of the single letters or 
combinations of letters are employed with unvarying powers. 

The insufficiency of the alphabet to represent the elements of the 
language has led to the use of the combinations of letters as single signs, 
and giving several different powers to the single letters and combina- 
tions of letters. To represent thirty-four distinct sounds the common 
alphabet provides but twenty-six signs. To indicate sixteen vowels it 
furnishes but five letters (a, e, i, o, u). A few instances of this defect 
may be given. 

The letter ' a' has eight different sounds, as in the following words : 
mate, many, pare, at, farm, pass, all, what. 

The letter c e' has six different sounds, as in mete, pretty, they, met 
her, there. 

The letter 6 i' has five different sounds, as in machine, if, bird, hind, 
union. 

The letter ' o' has nine different sounds, as in woman, form, hop, ope, 
whole, son, move, women, one. 

The letter ' u' has seven different sounds, as in the following words 
busy, bury, cut, rule, usage, persuade, pull, unite. 

8. Not only are single letters employed with varying powers, but, 
contrary to the principles of a correct orthography, combinations of 
letters have many different significations. If the combination ie, as in 
grief, is used to indicate the sound of ee, the principles of a correct 
mode of language-representation would require it to be used with that 
power invariably; but this combination is employed in the common 
spelling to represent eight different sounds; as in " grief, pitied, friend, 
soldier, lie, medieval, conscientious, science." 

The combination ea represents four different sounds ; as in (C pea, 
great, heart, head." 

The combination eo represents seven different sounds ; as in " people, 
leopard, yeoman, galleon, theology, aureola, MacLeod." 

The couplet 

" Though the tough cough and hiccough plough me through, 
O'er life's dark lough my course I will pursue," 

presents the combination ough with seven different sounds. It has 
another sound in the word ' bought.' If a uniform pronunciation were 
given to the termination ' ough' in each word, the first line of the. 
above couplet would read in some one of the following ways : 



DEFECTS OF COMMON OSTHOGEAPHY. 13 

( Though) Tho the to co and Mcco plo me thro 
( Tough) Thuf the tuf cuf and hiccuf pluf me thrnf 
( Cough) Thof the tof cof and hiccof plof me throf 
(Hiccough) Thup the tup cup and hiccup plup me thrup 
(Plough) Thow the tow cow and hiccow plow me throw 
( Through) Thco the too coo and hiccoo ploo me throo. 

In analogy with one or another of the uses of c ough,' the name 
'•Brougham" may be pronounced "Bro-am, Bruifam, BrofFain, Brup- 
pam, Brow-am, Broo-am, Brock-am, or Braw-ain." It is not surprising 
that the Frenchman should complain of a '« cow [cough] in his box" 
[chest] ; or that Voltaire, upon learning that ague is pronounced as 
two syllables and plague as one syllable, should wish out halt the 
English had the ague and the other half the plague ! 

EVILS OF THE COMMON ORTHOGRAPHY. 

9. The evils of the common ortjiography may be summed up m the 
following manner : 

(1.) Much time is required to learn to read and write by the com- 
mon orthography which would be saved by a correct mode of represent- 
ing language. A vast amount of drilling in reading and spelling is 
now required before the pupil can read or write with tolerable accuracy, 
to say nothing of facility. In consequence of this, children are sent to 
school at an early age and confined to the school-house many hours 
a day, in violation of very obvious physiological laws. The common 
orthography is chargeable with the weakening and ruining of the con- 
stitutions of many children who have been set at the work of mastering 
our anomalous spelling, at a very early age, under the impression that 
children from five to eight years of age will acquire it more readily 
than those who are older. Not only does it result in the waste of much 
time, but in the useless expenditure of large sums of money which 
might be devoted to higher uses, if we had a phonetic orthography. 
The money now required for the education of one million children in 
the arts of reading and writing, would educate three millions of children 
in those arts, if we had a phonetic orthography 

(2.) The common orthography requires that the child at the most* 
impressible age should be trained to read and write in a manner viola- 
ting the dictates of his common sense. The natural effect of learning a 
deceptive, inconsistent, absurd system of representing language is, to a 
degree, to blunt the child's sense of truth, consistency, and rationality. 

(3.) It engenders in the minds of thousands a distaste for study. To 
this may be traced very much of the ignorance of reading and writing 
known to exist in Great Britain and America. 

(4.) So great are the irregularities of the common mode of spelling, 



14 ELEMENTS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 

that no person is able to pronounce a word which he may see printed 
but which he has never heard pronounced. 

(5.) No person can tell the common spelling of any word which he 
has heard pronounced but has never seen written or printed. The 
result of the two last-mentioned defects is, that reading and writing are 
felt to be difficult; whereas, by a correct orthography, they would 
almost " come by nature," — and differences in pronunciation constantly 
increase ; whereas, a phonetic orthography would bring about the most 
accurate and uniform pronunciation. 

(6.) Our spoken language is hindered in, if it shall not be absolutely 
prevented from, becoming the universal medium of communication. 

(7.) The common orthography occasions great difficulties to those who 
endeavor to represent unwritten languages. 

(8.) It occasions much difficulty to elocutionists, etc., in writing con- 
cerning the elements of our language. 

(9.) It results in a general profound ignorance of the elements of 
that language which is in hourly use by millions. 

(10.) It enhances the cost of books, etc., above what they would cost 
with a phonetic orthography, millions of dollars annually. 

All these evils may be replaced with as many important blessings by 
the adoption of a phonetic mode of representing language 



THE ELEMENTS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 

10. An investigation as to the elements of the English language will 
not only serve to lay the foundation for the presentation of a phonetic 
mode of representing language, but will assist the student of Phonog- 
raphy to overcome the difficulties which are sometimes presented in 
this study in consequence of false ideas suggested by the common 
orthography. 

11. By an element of speech is meant an indivisible portion of lan- 
guage. Reference is here had to spoken language ; hence it is not to 
be understood that the letters (a, b, c, d, etc.) or their names (a, be, ce, 
de, etc.) are elements. To illustrate, the lips being rounded in a 
manner indicated by O, and vocalized breath being emitted through 
them, there will be produced an indivisible portion of English language. 
This sound occurs in the word represented by oath. Its sign in the 
common spelling, in this instance, is a combination of letters (oa). The 
NAME of this sign is owe-a. This sound also occurs in the word 
theugh. Its sign, in this instance, is a combination of four letters 
(ough) ! The name of this sign is owe-you-gee-aitch! ! The sound 
represented by x is not an element, for it is capable of being resolved 



ELEMENTS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 15 

into the sounds usually denoted by k and s. Nor is the sound usually 
indicated hyj in join an element, but a double sound. Further illus- 
trations will be seen in the following paragraphs. A general division 
of the elements may be made into consonants and 

VOWELS. 

12. A vowel is a smooth emission of sounding breath, modified but 
not obstructed by the organs of speech. Such are the sounds repre- 
sented by ea in eat, a in ale, a in arm. 

I i (Phonotype) ; X *> (Phonograph). 

13. The sound indicated in Graham's Phonetic Alphabet by the letters 
given above, and by the italic letters in the words c +eat, each, eel," is 
a long vowel. It has, in the common spelling, fourteen different signs, 
ce as in cegis, e as in me, ea as in eat, ee as in bee, eg as in impregn, ei 
as in conceit, eip as in receipt, eo as in people, ey as in key, i as in 
Albino, i-e as in magazine, ie as in grief, nay as in quay, ui as in 
mosquito. 

14. This sound is erroneously regarded as the long sound of the 
vowel of ebb. That it is more nearly related to the vowel of it than to 
the vowel of ebb is proved thus : In passing from the vowel of eat to the 
vowel of ebb, the change in the position of the vocal organs is consider- 
able ; while in passing from the vowel of eat to the vowel of it, the 
change is scarcely appreciable. For this reason ee and l are regarded 
as mates, and have like signs appropriated to them in the phonetic 
alphabet. 

I i ; J*V. 

15. The sound represented by i in it is a short vowel. It is erro- 
neously called the short sound of i in ire. It has twelve different 
signs : i as in if, ie as in duties, ia as in carriage, ea as in guinea, 
ee as in been, ei as in forfeit, ey as in barley, eigh as in Burleigh, o as 
in women, u as in busy, ui as in build, y as in hymn. 

Exercise. — (t Isabella Ingleton inherited an immense incomprehensi- 
ble, inimitable, idiosyncratical imagination. To ignorant ignoramuses 
and impertinent individuals, Isabella Ingleton indifferently indicated 
ineffable indignation. And on the Illuminati, Isabella Ingleton inva- 
riably inflicted her irresistible and inestimable idiosyncratical imagina- 
tions." 

S 8 ; 8 e . 

16. The sound indicated by a in ale is a long vowel. It is errone- 



16 ELEMENTS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 

ously regarded as the long sound of the vowel of at. It more nearly 
resembles the vowel of ebb, with which it is paired in the phonetic alpha- 
bet. It has fourteen different signs: a as m fading, a-e as in fade, 
ai as in pain, aig as in campaign, aigh as in Laight, ao as in gaol, an 
as in gauging, au-e as in gauge, ay as in pray, e as in teie, ei as in 
their, eig as in reign, eigh as in weigh, ey as in they. 

Exercise.— " Amy Amiable owned an ape with eighty-eight aches, 
ailings, and ailments. Amy Amiable essayed to aid her ape with eighty- 
eight aches, ailings, and ailments. But ere Amy Amiable's amiable 
intentions could aid the ape, he ailed and ached, and ached and ailed, 
and ailed and ached, and died." 

Ee; 1? e . 

17. The sound indicated by e in end and ebb is a short vowel. It 
has ten different signs : a as in any, ai as in said, ay as in says, e as 
in ebb, ea as in head, ei as in heifer, eo as in leopard, ie as in friend, 
u as in busy, ue as in guess. 

Exercise.—" Ethelbert Englehart, an emigrant from Essex, encoun- 
tered and engaged an enthusiastic enemy. But this enterprising emi- 
grant embarrassed his exasperated enemy." 

Hi B ; % <se . 

18. The sound of ea in earth and of e in mercy is a short vowel 
This vowel and the vowel of up are supposed to be the same hy many in 
whose pronunciation they are distinct. A difference may be discovered 
by repeating the first syllable of mercy and comparing it with the word 
murmur; thus, mermer, murmur. This vowel uttered alone will b- 
perceived to be the vowel of ebb modified by the tongue in assuming the 
position to pronounce the following r. When the r is united to a° fol- 
lowing vowel, a preceding vowel remains unmodified, as in mr-rry 
In this word two r s are printed to indicate that the preceding e 'is 
" short," but the only one pronounced is joined to the following yowel 
For ordinary printing, an e followed by r in the same syllable Is, per- 
haps, a sufficient sign for the vowel of her. For critical purposes the 
distinct sign for it given above will be necessary. This vowel has four 
different signs : e as in herd, ea as in earth, i as in bird, y as in satyr 

Exercise.- -The mirthful girl Gertrude, the daughter of Herbert 
Werner, is ever observing the birds that perch on the fir-trees. 

E o ; & a . 

19. The sound of ai in air is a long vowel. Words of the class of air, 
fair, dare are variously pronounced : by some, with the vowel of ale • 



ELEMENTS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 17 

and by others, with a lengthened quantity of the vowel of ebb ; but they 
are generally pronounced with a lengthened quantity of the vowel of 
at. In ordinary phonetic printing, this vowel is, perhaps, sufficiently 
indicated by the sign for the vowel of ale followed by r in the same . 
syllable. This vowel has six different signs: a as in daring, a-e as in 
dare, ai as in pair, aye as in prayer, e-e as in there, hei as in heir. 

Exercise. — Blair Hair married the fair heir of a millionaire, and 
care scarce dared to his house repair or ascend his stair till poor 
Blair Hair offended the fair heir of the millionaire by daring to compare 
her to the candle-flare, when the fair heir rushed up stairs, and pulled 
out hi3 hair, and threw it in air, and made him stare and care to be 
somewhere, anywhere but there. 

h 



^ 



ci 



20. The sound of a in at is a short vowel. It is the short quantity 
of the vowel of air. It has three different signs : a as in at, aa as in 
Isaac, ai as in plaid. 

Exercise. — " Adam Adams attacked an antiquated African alligator 
in Abyssinia. This African alligator angrily and acrimoniously at- 
tempted to avenge himself on Adam Adams. But Adam Adams actively 
accumulated additional assistance and accomplished the assassination 
of the angry animal." 

21. Many do not distinguish the vowel of at from the vowel of ask, 
and in ordinary phonetic printing no confusion can arise from repre- 
senting it by ' a,' the sign for the vowel of ask. 



a .6; <j£ 



a 



22. The sound of a in arm- is a long vowel. It has six different signs : 
a as in arm, aa as in baa, ae as in Haerlem, ah as in ah, ea as in heart, 
ua as in guard. 

Exercise. — The Bard of Farven alarmed at the darts of his barbarous 
enemies departed one dark, dark night from Farven and embarked for 
Parma. — There, guarded by the arms of the Czar, the large-hearted 
Bard of Farven by his art charms the farmers of Parma who stroll in 
the parks by starlight. 

A a ; *s&' a . 

23. The sound of a in ask approximates the short quantity of 
the vowel of arm. It ends such words as America, data, Cuba, and is 
heard in the unaccented syllables of about, around, ago, dollar, etc. 
It is the usual sound of the article " a." It is the first element of the 
diphthong indicated by i in find. It has two different signs : 
au as in aunt. 



18 ELEMENTS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 

Exercise. — Pulaski Trask passes away a vast amount of time in 
counting the vast masses of gold lie has by chance and task amassed, 
but alas ! he must pass, at last, from the vast amount of wealth he has 
by chance and task amassed ; and then, I ask, to whom shall pass the 
vast amount of wealth Pulaski Trask by chance and task amassed. 

(Do; u/ o . 

24. The sound of a in all is a long voweL It has nine different rep 
resentativcs in the common print : a as in all, au as in laud, aw as in 
awl, awe as in awe, augh as in aught, eo as in George, o as inform, 
oa as in broad, ough as in bought. 

Exercise. — "All were appalled at the thralldom of Lord Walter 
Raleigh, who was almost scalded in a caldron of water." 

6 Augustus Hauley, the auctioneer, audibly awed an audience all one 
long day in August with his awful voice. The audience all appalled 
with Augustus Hauley's awful voice audaciously hauled Augustus 
Hauley out of the long auction hall with a halter.' 

O o; (Pa. 

25. The vowel of on is regarded by phoneticians generally as the 
short quantity of the vowel of all. It is the first element of the diph- 
thong represented by oi in oil. It has four different representatives : a 
as in what, o as in on, ow as in knowledge, ho as in honor. 

Exercise. — " Oliver Operose occasionally offered to operate on the 
obstreperous Opheclyde. But an obstinate orchestral oligarch opposingly 
obstructed Oliver Operose's occasional offer. The obnoxious objection 
of this obstinate orchestral oligarch offended Oliver Operose's officious 
and obsequious observers." 

& a; & * . 

26. The sound of o in old is a long vowel. It has sixteen different 
signs : aut as in hautboy, eau as in beau, eo as in yeoman, ew as in 
sew, o as in old, oa as in oar, oe as in foe, o-e as in ore, oh as in oh, 
oo as in floor, ot as in depot, ou as in four, ough as in though, ow as 
in snow, owe as in- owe, gh as in Edinburgh ! 

Exercise. — Homer Overly, groaning, openly owned that his old coat 
shone no more as in the days of yore ; and more, a hole in the shoulder 
torn showed his linen below. So Homer Overly slowly strolled over his 
floor, out of his door, and the road o'er, to the tailor More, who sold a 
coat to Homer Overly for his golden ore. Then Homer Overly o'er the 
road strode to his own door and threw his old coat with a hole in the 
ehoulder torn, behind the door, and reposed on his sofa to take a snore. 



ELEMENTS v.* THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 19 

O G ; -& *. 

27. The vowel of whole, none, is the short quantity of the vowel of 
old. These words are better pronounced with the long vowel ; and for 
ordinary phonetic printing, a sign for the short vowel of whole is not 
required. 

U u ; M <t . 

28. The sound of u in up is a short vowel. It is slightly lengthened 
in cur, as most vowels are preceding r in the same syllable. In the 
short phonetic alphabet it is paired with the vowel of old. It has nine 
different signs : o as in son, oe as in does, o-e as in love, oo as in flood, 
ou as in tough, u as in up, ub as in subtle, uo as in liquor, up as in 
cupboard. 

Exercise. — " Ulric Ulithorn had an ugly, uncouth, unintelligible ut- 
terance, utterly unfit to unlock unlearned understandings. Unbending 
umpires took umbrage at Ulric Ulithorn's ungainly, uncommon, uncon- 
scious, undistinguishable, unfathomable utterance. Until Ulric Uli- 
thorn, with unusual urbanity, undertook to unriddle his untoward 
unintelligibility." 

IU Ul ; OP At . 

29. The sound of oo in food is a long vowel. It has nine different 
signs : o as in do, oe as in shoe, o-e as in move, oo as in food, ou as in 
soup, ous as in sous, oux as in billet-doux, ough as in through, wo as 
in two. 

Exercise. — As the moon at noon of night moodily moved on its tour 
to its gloomy tomb, the troops removed the poor drooping youth from 
his gloomy room that he might be soothed by the silver beams of the 
moon before he met his doom. 

U U ; % ec . 

30. The vowel of foot is the short quantity of the vowel of food. It 
is the second element of the diphthongs indicated by the italic letters in 
M now, out; new, mute, due." It has five different signs : o as in wolf, 
oo as in foot, ou as in could, u as in pull, w as in now. 

Exercise. — A cook, with a hook pulled a rook by its foot from a nook 
in the rookery and stood on it till dead, and then put it in sooty wool 
and buried it in the woods. 

VOCAL, DIPHTHONGS. 

31. Two vowels pronounced, together by a single effort constitute a 
focal diphthong. In a strictly phonetic alphabet, diphthengs should bo 
represented by the signs of their elements ; but as some desire single 
signs, they have been provided in Graham's Phonetic Alphabet. 



'20 ELEMENTS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 

Double signs — ai , cu ; OB I , & & — Single signs. 

32. The diphthong represented by the letters given above is composed 
of the vowels of ask and it. It has fourteen different signs : ai as in 
aisle, ei as in eider, eigh as in height, ey as in eying, eye as in eye, 
i as in bind, ic as in indict, ie as in pie, i-e as in fine, igh as in high, 
is as in island, uy as in buy, y as in by, ye as in rye. 

Exercise. — "lamblicus Ideality, the identical itinerant Irish idealist, 
idolized his isolated ideas into an iambic hypothesis, idly identifying 
his idle-headed, high-flown, hyperbolical idealities with wisdom. Fi- 
nally Iamblicus Ideality ended his idling life on an island of ice." 

There are different pronunciations of i in bind besides the general 
one indicated above. Some say "beind;" some, "baind;" some, 
" bnind ;" and others, " boind." 

oi, at — 0e, (p a. 

33. The diphthong represented by the letters presented above is com- 
posed of the vowel of on and it. It has two different signs : oi as in oil, 
oy as in boy. 

Exercise. — Lloyd Floyd was annoyed by noisy boys who enjoyed 
sport devoid of sense ; but Lloyd Floyd, by some toys, decoyed the 
noisy boys into his garden, and counterpoised their senseless joys by the 
" oil of beech," till the noisy boys with dolorous voice assured Lloyd 
Floyd that he should be no more annoyed by their boisterous voices. 

ou, cm — 1$ ^ , ^Ptf . 

34. The diphthong indicated by these letters is composed of the vowels 
of on and pull. Instead of this, the following combinations are heard : 
eu, au, au, uu. This diphthong has six different signs : o as in compt, 
ou as in out, oub as in doubt, ough as in bough, ow as in now, hou as 
in hour. 

Exercise. — Downe, the clown, prowling round about town found a 
brown fowl, which he pronounced an eagle, but which without doubt 
was an owl. When- the brown fowl powerfully plowed his brown 
talons into the hands of the clown Downe, he scowled and threw the 
owl to the ground; but to this hour the clown Downe prowls round 
about town, pronouncing all who announce that he found an owl, foul- 
mouthed owls themselves, and denouncing them as outrageous out-and- 
out doubters of astounding facts — robbers of his renown. 

iu, ta — U \\ , It/ i/ . 

35. The diphthong indicated by these letters is composed of the vowel 
of it and pull. It has twelve different signs : eau as in beauty, eo as in 
feod, eu a3 in feud, cw as in new, ieu as in lieu, iew as in vieiv, u as 



ELEMENTS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 21 

in duty, ue as in due, u-e as in tune, ugh as in Hugh, ui as in juice, 
tii as in puisne. 

Exercise.— Hugh. Newton, the beautiful, dutiful son of the rude Jew, 
Newton, blew on his flute a few new beautiful tunes that drew — be 
assured it is true — a crew of blue-birds to hear ; but they flew when 
they knew Hugh Newton's flute was mute. But Hugh Newton's flute 
and eyes so blue near him drew a beautiful Jewess, who flew not when 
she knew Hugh Newton's flute was mute ; and now the beautiful Jewess 
sings with her Hugh the beautiful tunes the young Hugh Newton blew 
on his flute. 

CONSONANTS. 

36. A consonant is a sound made either by a complete or partial con- 
tact of the vocal organs obstructing the whispered or sonant breath, in 
some degree, varying, from an entire break or stoppage of it (as in pro- 
ducing the sound of p or h), to a simple aspiration (as the sound of h in 
hate). 

Hli; 8@A. 

37. The sound of h in he is a consonant. It has two signs : h as in 
hut, wh as in who. 

Exercise. — His heavy-headed highness held up his shrunk shank, and 
hopping, hied himself home, happy to have his hands, his head, and his 
heart whole. 

Ww; W«*. 

38. The sound of w in way is a consonant. In producing the sound 
of oo, a clear vocal sound is heard. Now, if the lips be compressed 
slightly, the clear vocality ceases, and a hum or buzz (the sound of w) 
is heard. It has three different signs : — as in one, u as in quire, w as 
in we. 

Exercise. — " Weave well the warp of life. The waves wandered with 
the wild and wanton winds that wail and weep." 



Q q; <^y 



39. The sound of wh in when is a whispered consonant related to that 
of w. Strictly phonetic principles demand a character for it, and, in 
Graham's Phonetic Alphabet, q is used as its sign : but for ordinary 
phonetic printing it is best represented by hw — the h preceding w indi- 
cating the aspirated sound of w, or, what is the same thing, the sound 
indicated by q in the phonetic alphabet, and by wh in the common 
spelling. 

Exercise. — A wheezing, whimsical, whimpering, whining whiffler, 
while attempting to wheedle a wharfinger out of some white wheat, 



22 ELEMENTS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 

whalebone, whetstones, whipcords, wheelbarrows, whistles, whisky, 
whey-tubs, and what not, was whipped by the wharfinger with whale- 
bone, whereupon the wheezing, whimsical, whimpering, whining whiffler 
whistly left the wharf. 

Yy; y y . 

40. The sound of y in yet is a sonant or spoken consonant. When the 
organs are in the proper position to produce the vowel of eat, let the 
tongue be raised toward the palate till the clear vocality of the vowel 
ceases — till a murmur or buzz is heard — and the sound of y will be 
produced. This sound has four different signs : i as in union, j as in 
hallelujah, — as in use, y as in yet. 

Exercise. — Yes, you yet use your useless yellow uniforms. Yester- 
day the yawning youngster yelling yielded to the yoke. 

41. The whisper corresponding to the sonant y occurs in the English 
pronunciation of human (which is hyooman), and, perhaps, also in the 
American pronunciation of inhumanity, which is occasionally pro- 
nounced " inhyoomanity." It may be represented by hy. 

L 1; £/. 

42. The sound of I in let is a sonant consonant, produced by trilling 
the sides of the tongue while its tip is pressed against the superior 
incisory teeth. It has six different signs : I as in let, 11 as in ill, In as 
in kiln, lie as in bagatelle, tie as in whistle, llesl as in belles-lettres. 

Exercise. — The long, lean, lank, lolling lubber little likes the "limbs 
of the law," who leave him little leisure. 

Respecting the whispered I see the Phonetic Quarterly, vol. i., p. 14, 
par. 7. 

E r; &>*. 

43. The letter r is used to indicate two sounds — one, the trilled r pro- 
duced by vibrating the tongue against the gums of the upper incisory 
teeth as in pronouncing ray — the other, the smooth r, produced by 
placing the sides of the tongue against the sides of the hard palate and 
emitting sonant breath over the tip of the tongue (which is curled 
upward and backward), as in pronouncing air, hear. They have seven 
different signs : r as in run, rh as in rhetoric, rr as in burr, rrh as in 
myrrh, rt as in mortgage, rps as in corps, wr as in write. 

Exercise. — The rolling, raging, raving, roaring river rushed wrath- 
fully round and round the rough, rugged rocks which rose high in air. 
" A rat in a rat-trap, ran through the rain on a rail, with a raw lump 
of red liver in his mouth." 

The smooth r occurs frequently in the exercises on the vowels of air 
and far, which see. 






ELEMENTS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 23 

Respecting the whisper corresponding to the smooth r, see the Pho- 
netic Quarterly, vol. i., p. 14, par. 8. 

M m ; %yf6 m . 

44. The sound of m in met is a sonant consonant. It has four differ- 
ent signs : m as in me, mb as in dumb, mm as in crammed, mn as in 
condemn. 

Exercise. — The mad musician, Maestro, made magical, massive, 
majestic music with his mammoth melodeon, but Maestro's marked 
mannerisms mortified his musical master, whose mild mournful melo- 
dies many musicians mournfully remember. 

JSTn; J?n. 

45. The sound of n in no is a sonant consonant. It has seven differ- 
ent signs : gn as in gnaw, kn as in know, mn as in mnemonic, mp as 
in compt, n as in no, nn as in sinned, pn as in pneumatic. 

Exercise. — Nineteen nervous nonsensical nobles nodded assent to the 
nominations, but their newly-fangled notions will, for the nonce, be 
knocked into nonentity. 

ITl,; Jfc^. 

46. The sound of ng in si?ig is a sonant consonant It has three 
different signs : n as in think, ng as in sing, ngue as in tongue. 

Exercise. — The young man languidly sung a long song and jingled a 
long string of shining rings which hung from his long strong fingers. 

47. The letters m, n, y represent sounds which are called nasals, 
because the breath is emitted through the nasal passages. With the 
exception that the breath is emitted through the nose instead of the 
mouth, these sounds are nearly the same as the sounds of b, d, g. 
Persons who have a severe " cold in the head" use the latter sounds 
instead of the nasals. 

Respecting the whispered m, n, ng, see the Phonetic Quarterly, vol. i., 
p. 14. 

B b ; 3B/. 

48. The sound of b in be is a sonant consonant. The mode of pro- 
ducing it will be seen in pronouncing bay, rob. It has two different 
signs : b as in be, bb as in ebb. 

Exercise. — The babbling of the blabbing, black-browed, bombastic 
bibber was as bad as the babbling of a Babylonian black-bird. 

P p ; &/L . 

49. The sound of p in pay is a whispered consonant. It is cognate 
with b. It has three different signs : p as in pay, gh as in hiccough, 
pp as in stopped. 



24 ELEMENTS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 

Exercise. — Peter Piper put pen to paper to produce a peerless pro- 
duction, proudly presuming to please princes, princesses, parliament, 
pastors, and people. " Pigmies are pigmies still though perched on 
pyramids " 

D d; m c/. 

50. The sound of d in do is a sonant consonant. It has four different 
signs ; bd as in bdellium, d as in do, dd as in add, ed as in signed. 

Exercise. — Dionysius Didymus delivered dogmatical declamations 
against dangerous dabblers in philosophy whose distempered minds dis- 
turbed dominant doctrinal distinctions. 

T t ; 3Tt 

51. The sound of t in too is a whispered consonant, and closely related 
to the sound of d. It has eight different signs : ct as in Ctesiphon, d 
as in hoped, ed as in lacked, phth as in phthisic, pt as in ptyalism, th 
as in Thomas, tt as in Pitt, tte as in Gazette. 

Exercise. — The temper of the taciturn Titus Ptolemy was terribly 
tried by table-talk of the traveling tradesmen. 

G 8 ; j^/ • 

52. The sound of g in go is a sonant consonant. It has four different 
signs : g as in go, gg as in Hogg, gh as in ghost, gue as in rogue. 

Exercise. — Gabriel Goldfinch giggled at the great green gilded g@g- 
gles his great-grandfather gave to Godfrey Gardner's gardener. 

Kk; &&d. 

53. The sound of c in Coe is a whispered consonant, and closely 
related to the sound of g in go. It has seven different signs : c as in 
can, ch as in chord, ck as in lack, gh as in lough, k as in kill, qu as in 
piquant, que as in pique. 

Exercise. — Catherine Kickshaw kept a cat and kitten to catch and 
kill the crickets that came in her cousin's kitchen. 

V v; W«. 

54. The sound of v in vine is a sonant consonant. It has four differ- 
ent signs : /as in of, ph as in Stephen, v as in vie, ve as in have. 

Exercise. — The ventriloquist was vain, vexatious, vicious, venal, and 
venturesome. 



F f; 

55. The sound of / in fine is a whispered consonant, and closely 
related to the sound of v in vine. It has seven different signs : /as in 



ELEMENTS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. ZO 

for,ff as in off, ft as in often, gh as in cough, //as in calf, ph as in 
phonic, pph as in Sappho. 

Exercise. — The fashionable, fastidious fellow found fiction and far- 
fetched fables of fairies far more favorable to his finical fashions than 
familiar facts. 

ad; % St. 

56. The sound of th in then is a sonant consonant. It has two differ- 
ent signs : th as in then, the as in wreathe. 

Exercise. — Gather together the roses that have withered in this 
rather cool though fine weather. " That is the man that said that you 
saw him. I say that that that that man said is not that that that man 
told him. That that I say is this : that that that that gentle- 
man then advanced, is not that that he should have spoken ; for he said 
that that that that that man pointed cut is not that that that that lady 
said that it was, but is another that." 

Rb; % fi. 

57. The sound of th in thin is a whispered consonant, and closely 
related to the sound of th in then. It has five different signs : h as in 
eight-h, th as in thin, the as in withe, tth as in Matthew, phth as in 
apophthegm. 

Exercise. — Thingumbob Thimbierig thievishly thought to thrive 
through thick and thin by throwing his thimbles about. 

Z z; & *. 

58. The sound of z in zeal is a sonant or spoken consonant. It has 
nine different signs: c as in suffice, cz as in czar, s as in is, sc as in dis- 
cern, se as in raise, ss as in scissors, x as in Xenia, z as \vTzeal, zz 
as in buzz. 

Exercise. — Xenophon Zealous the zoologist zealously sought for zinc 
and zoophytes in the Zuyder Zee. The zany on his zebra resumed his 
zigzag journey through the desert. 

S s; Sfd. 

59. The sound of s in seal is a whispered consonant, and is closely 
related to the sound of z in zeal. It has eleven different signs : c as in 
cider, ce as in fleece, ps as in psalm, s as in see, sc as in scene, see as 
in coalesce, sch as in schism, se as in mouse, ss as in kiss, st as in 
listen, sw as in sword. 

Exercise. — Sally Simper stuttered, stammered, and lisped unceasingly 

from sunrise to sunset. " He boasts he twists the texts and suits the 

several sects. Sam Slick sawed six slim slippery saplings. Amidst 

the mists he thrusts his fists and insists he sees the ghosts.'' 

o 



26 ELEMENTS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 

60. The sound of si in vision is a spoken consonant. It has five 
different signs : ge as in ledge, j as in jet-d'eau, si as in vision, ssi as 
in scission, z as in azure. English orthoepists frequently use zh as the 
sign of this sound. 

Exercise. — Free from seizure, intrusion, obtrusion, invasion, or deri- 
sion, the miser in his inclosure leisurely measures his profusion of 
treasures obtained by usury, and experiences as much pleasure at the 
vision as a vizier. 

C c ; £? c . 

61. The sound of ce in ocean and sh in shall is a sonant consonant, 
and is closely related to the sound of si in vision. It has nine different 
signs : c as in appreciate, ce as in ocean, ch as in etch and chaise, ci as 
in musician, s as in sure, sch as in Schiller, sh as in shall, ss as in 
assure, ssi as in mission. 

Exercise. — " Shun sheepish shame nor wish to shine in transient pas- 
sion." He is an efficient, proficient, judicious, social, conscientious, 
cautious, veracious, patient, dispassionate practitioner, whose judicial 
acquisitions put to shame the pretensions of his unsocial, inefficient, offi- 
cious, superficial, capricious, injudicious, ingratiate, irrational, shallow- 
headed, charlatan opponents. 

CONSONANTAL DIPHTHONGS. 

62. The two consonantal diphthongs requiring notice are those repre- 
sented by ch and j in the common spelling. Double and single signs 
have been provided for them. 

63. The sound represented by these letters, is composed of d and the 
sound represented by si in vision — which last sound is represented by j 
in the phonetic alphabet. Germans usually substitute for this diph- 
thong dc = dsh, saying dcoib = dshob for djob ( job in the common print). 
The analysis given above is intimated in the common spelling of such 
words as ledge, in which ge has the sound of the phonetic j, or, what is 
the same thing, the sound of si in vision. This diphthong has six dif- 
ferent signs in the common orthography : dg as in ledger, dge as in 
ledge, dj as in adjective, g as in gem, ge as in age,j as in join. 

Exercise. — The jovial German judge adjudged the jocose genius 
guiltless, when General John Johnson justified the generous jovial Ger- 
man judge's just judgment. 

tc, tc— ©g, ff. 

64. The consonantal diphthong represented by these letters is com- 



ELEMENTS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 27 

posed of the sound of t and the sound of ce in ocean = sh in shall. It is 
represented in German by tsch, the letters sch representing the sound 
of sh in shall = ch in the French representation, which is tch, as in 
Tchernaia. This analysis is intimated by the common spelling of such 
words as etch, in which ch = ce in ocean = sh in shall = c in the pho- 
netic alphabet. This diphthong has two different signs in the common 
spelling : ch as in chin, tch as in etch. 

Exercise. — " Three chubby children in Richfield were each choked 
with choice chunks of cheese, much of which was purchased of Charles 
Chickering on Chimborazo." 

NUMBER OF THE VOCAL, ELEMENTS. 

65. The number of simple and proximate elements of the English 
language (exclusive of whispered /, m, n, and ng) is forty-six. They 
may be classed as follows : 

a. Simple Vowel Elements. — There are sixteen vowels, which may be 
represented by twelve signs, provided no distinction is made, by means 
of signs, between the vowels of ale and air, ebb and her, at and ask, old 
and whole. 

b. Proximate Vowel Elements. — There are four vowel diphthongs. 
These may be represented by the signs of their elements or by single 
signs. For stenographic reasons, single signs are used in phonetic 
shorthand ; but, for phonotypy, double signs are best. 

c. Simple Consonant Elements. — There, are twenty-four consonants, 
inclusive of whispered w and y, and exclusive of whispered /, r, m, n, 
and ng. If whispered w be represented by hw, and whispered y , by hy, 
the number of distinct consonant signs may be reduced to twenty-two. 
The " Short Phonetic Alphabet" is composed of thirty-four signs, 
namely, twenty-two consonant signs, and twelve vowel signs. 

d. Proximate Consonant Elements. — There are two consonantal diph- 
thongs. In phonotypy they are best represented by the signs of their 
constituents. In phonetic shorthand, for stenographic reasons, they 
are represented by single signs, and classed among the vocal elements. 



ANDREW J. GRAHAM'S 
PHONETIC ALPHABET. 

Note.— The sound of each letter is shown by the italic letter or letters in the word 
opposite or beneath it. The " superiors" refer to the scripts of the new letters. 



I 


ii 


8 


8 2 


a 


£3 


Q 


G* 


O 


0.5 


WxuP 



Long Towels. 
eat, ieav 
ale (air) 
arm. 

all, form 
ope (whole) 
food 



I 


i 


E 


e 


A 


a 








IJ 


n? 


u 


u 



Short Vowels. 
it 

ell (her) 
ask (at) 
not, on 
un, cuv 
foot, fttll. 



Consonants. 



E. b » 
TJ" ijio 
C c 

J i 



££en. 
£&in. 

ocean, ££$11. 
vision, ^7*. 



and in their usual sense, 



b, d, f, g, h, k, 

be, do, foe, go, he, key, 

1, m, n, p, r, s, 

Zet, me, wo, Ujp, roar, so, 

t, y, w, y, z. — 

to, vie, toe, ye, zeal. ■ — 



Diphthongs. 



Double 
letters. 


Single 
letters. 


ai 


£ jll 


oi 


e 12 


on 


IS sis 


in 


Uii" 


dj 


Dg\is 


to 


eg 16 



azsle, find 
oil, bo^ 
oz^t, YLOW 
new, mute 
ed-ge, join 
et-ch, chin. 



E 


Of 

0« 


A 


a 18 


E 


B i? 





e 20 


Q 


q 



Optional Letters. 



air, where 

at, an 

her, bird 

whole 

or hw = wh in when ; 

thus, " qen" or " hwen." 



12Ee3 4 50o6 7 

X^ Se, €e, <&*, 6Tcz, &*, (Pa, W**, TV*, 

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 

%», %& p*/, Jp p p f*, £/> <2B^, 

16 IT 18 A a 19 20 



Transition PHONOTypY.— Phonotypy closely resembling the genuine, may 
be produced, with the common types, by substituting 

j B A or a o h ra u th or dh, th, ng for 
jsBOO-uii) d brj 



SPECIMENS OF PHONETIC PRINT. 29 

PRINCIPLES OF THE PHONETIC ALPHABET. 

G3. The phonetic alphabet presented in this treatise has been 
constructed in view of certain well-denned and obviously correct prin- 
ciples. 

(1.) All the common Roman, italic, and script letters are used as far 
as they can be without violating entirely the analogies of Romanic 
print ; and the phonetic print, therefore, closely resembles the common 
print. 

(2.) The new letters are constructed in accordance with the principles 
of the old letters, and are such as admit of good italic and script 
forms. 

(3.) The old vowel-letters being settled, by their most usual signifi- 
cation, as the signs of the short vowels of pass, pet, pit, pot, put, signs 
resembling the old vowel-letters are appropriated to the long vowels, in 
accordance with the principle that — sounds of a given degree of like- 
ness should be represented by signs of a corresponding degree of like- 
ness. 

(4.) Reference has been had to the wishes of diiferent classes of pho- 
neticians, and the alphabet has been so constructed that while they 
may differ as to the use of signs for the vowels of air, at, her, whole as 
distinct from the vowels of age, ask, met, ope ; or as to the use of 
double or single types for the diphthongs, — they will all agree as to 
the signs for the generally recognized sounds. 

60. In respect of the four particulars above mentioned, no phonetic 
alphabet has been constructed which can compare with the one 
explained in this work. For a chart of all the principal phonetic 
alphabets, and for various matters pertaining to the phonetic reform 
which do not come within the province of this treatise, see Vol. I. of the 
Phonetic Quarterly 



SPECIMENS OF PHONETIC PRINT. 

TRUTH. 

{With distinct signs for the sounds of the italic letters in " air, at, 
her, whole, when;" and with monotypes for the diphthongs.) 

70. Fots ov tot me bi put fer-b tu amas welt) for selfic grati- 
fikscon, tu giv de individyual p^er erver nderz, tu bljnd nderz, 
tu wiv a web ov sofistri, tu kast a des.itful luster on vjs, tu mek 
de wnrs apir de beter koz. But enercji ov ftot scr emplod iz 
sijisjdal. cEe intelekt, in baknmirj a pander tu v£s, a tuil ov de 
paconz, an advokst ov ljz, bikuniz not onli degreded, but disizd. 
It luizez de kapasiti ov distirjgwicirj trvjb from folsliud, gud from 



80 SPECIMENS OF PHONETIC PRINT. 

ivil, rjt from rorj ; it bikumz az wurbles az an [ hwig kanot dis- 
tingwic bitwin kulorz or formz. Wcr tu dat mjnd qic, wonts de 
luv ov trqb ! For wont ov dis, cjinyus haz bikum a skurc] tu de 
wurld ; its breb a pezonns ekshalecon ; its brjtnes a sedujser intu 
padz ov pestilens and deb. Trub iz de ljt ov de Infinit m^nd, 
and de imec] ov God in biz krityurz. JNnbin endijrz but trujb. 
cTe drimz, fikconz, bioriz qic, men wnd substitnj: for it, sum d[. 
Widst its g^dans, efort iz yen, and ho^p bssles. &kordinli, de 
luv ov trub, a dip bBrst for it, a deliberet purpus tu sik it and 
hold it fast, ms bi konsiderd az de veri frsrndscon ov Kidman 
knltyur and digniti. Preens az bot iz, de luv ov trub iz stil 
mar preens ; for widst it, bot wonderz and wests itself, and pre- 
sipitets men intu gilt and mizeri. Dr. Canin. 

TRUE COURAGE. 

{Printed with distinct signs for the sounds of the italic Idlers in 
" air, at, her, whole, when" and with double letters for the diph 
thongs.) 

71. cter iz a vBrtyuns, glorins knredj ; but it hapenz tu bi 
found List in do'z hui Br mast admaird for breveri. It iz de 
knrsdj ov prinsipel, qitc dorz tu dm rait in de fes ov skorn, qitc 
puts tu hazard repyutecon, rank, de prospekts ov advansment, 
de simpabi ov frendz, de admirscon ov de wurld, rader dan 
vaiolst a konvikcon ov diuti. It iz de knrsdj ov benevolens and 
paieti, qitc kounts not laif dir in widstandin eror, siupersticon, 
vais, oprecon, indjnstis, and de maitiest foz ov hiuman impruiv- 
ment and hapines. It iz moral enerdji, dat fors ov wil in adoptirj 
diuti, erver qitc menss and snferin hav no* pouer. It iz de 
knrsdj ov a sol qitc reverensez itself tui mute tu bi grstli mmvd 
about qot bifolz de bodi; qitc bBrsts so* intensli for a piur inward 
laif, dat it kan yild up de animal laif widout fir ; in qitc de 
aiclia ov moral, spirityual, selestyal gud haz bin nnfedded so* 
braitli az tu obskiur ol wurldli interests ; qitc aspairz after 
imortaliti, and, dBrfer, hidz litel de psnz or plejurz ov a ds ; 
qitc haz so- konsenterd its hod pouer and laif in de luv ov God- 
laik vBrtyu, dat it iven faindz a djoi in de perilz and snferirjz 
bai qitc its loialti tu God and VBrtyu me bi apruivd. clis kuredj 
ms bi kold de perfekcon ov hiumaniti, for it iz de eksersaiz, 
rezult, and eksprecon ov de haiest atribiuts ov our netyur. 

Dr. Tcanirj. 



SPECIMENS OF PHONETIC PRINT. 31 

MINIATURE WRITING. 

{Printed with single types for the diphthongs, but without distin- 
guishing by signs between the vowels of age and air, ask and at, met 
and her, ope and whole, and with kwfor wh in when.) 

72. Sisero rekordz dat de bol ov de Iliad ov Homer woz riten 
on a pis ov pBrgment in so* smol a karakter, dat it mjt bi enklazd 
in de kumpas ov a koko-nut-cel ! <Ier woz olso wnn in Kwin 
Elizabeb's tpn hui rot de Ten Komandments, de Krid, de Pater 
Noster, de Kwin'z nem, and de Yir ov -st Lord, widin de knm- 
pas ov a peni ; and gsv Her Macjesti a psr ov spektakelz ov sue, 
an Brtifical niek, dat bj der sd ci plenli dizernd everi leter. 
Annder penman in de miniatyuir stjl, wnn Iransis Aim onus, rot 
de Krid and de ferst fortin versez ov St. Don'z G-ospel in de 
knmpas ov a peni. In de ljbrari ov St. Don'z ILolec], Oksfnrd, iz 
a piktyur ov Csrlz de Ferst dun wid a pen, de ljnz ov liwic 
kontsn ol de Ssmz in a lecjibel band. At Halston, in Cropcir, 
de sit ov de Mitnnz (Myttons), iz preservd a kfirvin ov de port- 
ret 07 Gsrlz de Ferst, ful-fsst, on a pig-ston ; abuv iz a kre>n ; 
biz fes, and klodz, bwig Br Vandjk dres, Br psnted ; on de revers 
iz an igel transfikst wid an aro, and rsnd it dis moto, " >I federd 
dis aro." cEe bol iz admirabli eksekiited, and iz set in gold, wid 
a distaf on ig s£d ; it probabli woz de wnrk ov Nikolas Bjot, a 
gret grever ov de Mint in de tjm ov Gsrlz de Ferst. In de Boa] 
Mqzinm at Kopenhsgen, iz a komon geri-ston, on de snrfes ov 
bwig Br engrevd 220 beds; but dsr smolnes msks dem apir rader 
imperfekt. I*)glic " Fonetik Dnrnal." 

ossian's address to the sun. 
{Printed with double types for the diphthongs, with hw for wh in 
when, and without distinguishing by signs between the vowels of ago 
and air, ask and at, met and her, ope and whole.) 

73. Q dou dat rolest abnv, round az de cild ov mai fsderz ! 
Hwens Br dai bimz, o Sun, dai everlastin lait? clou kumest 
forb in dai oful biuti; de stBrz baid demselvz in de skai; de 
Mum, kold and psl, sinks in de western wsv. But dou daiself 
muivest alon : bui kan bi a kompan}ron ov dai kors. 

<Ie oks ov de mountenz fol : de mountenz demselz deke wid 
yirz ; de ocan crirjks and groz agen ; de Mum herself iz lost in 
Heven; but dou Brt for ever de sem, redjoisiij in de braitnes ov 
dai kors. 



32 SPECIMENS OF PHONETIC PRINT, 

Hwen de wiirid iz dsrk wid tempests, hwen bunder rodz and 
laitnirj flaiz, dou lukest in dai biuti from de kioudz, and lafest at 
de storm. But tn Ocan don lukest in vsn ; for hi bihoddz dai 
bimz nee merr, hweder dai yeler herz fler on de astern kioudz or 
dou tremblest at de gets ov de west. 

(In Phonetic Longhand.) 

X/. 3vaj-J ckott etvt ' Aey-da/i4 datd mt, — -dew a dt^zon : oat 

y-jwa <ut'd dav an ena*. ddott cado dd/./t tn ae ddoaaz / /vested 

ov ae votd ov ae mavntPi. Tydz/j-dt; aen, & dd&m tn oe 

dfoen-ft ov oat y-Atfi / Scd tz a'wd ana* ' Mnd/jvdt : tt tz fat A 

oe adtme#t<n datt ov oe iSt&wrij ditoen tt dtudd fa&c woden 

dtotta'z / ay?zd ae mt&f tz on ae dt'tz, ae ddadt ov oe now ft tz 

on ae Aden, ae faavde^ crtnd>d tn ae mtc/df ov dtz r//Awnt. 

WHAT PHONOTYPY WILL, BO. 

{Printed with the Transition Phonetic Alphabet.) 
75. Fbnotipi sxks sb tu reform our prezent alfabet, bai a £u olterx?- 
conz, az tu ruck our Ingglic speling an uzi and ekzakt salens. Striktli 
spiking, let that bo: dun, and speling wud not hav tu ba gon bver at ol. 
Lern the alfabet, and de prinsipel ov speling-kombinocon, — and ol 
speling kumz ov itself. Hens, ai understand the Tcerok.x Indian, Ges 
(Guess) bai uem, invented for hiz traib an alfabet sb komplat that 
eni ordinari tcaild, after a fiu morningz, kud spel eni wurd in the 
langwudj the ferst taim hi herd it. Nou, w.i njed tu hwip up and bver- 
frek thiz Tcerokiz. But our bArbarizm iz mbr inveterx?t than tlrBrz, 
inazmutc az wj hav a vail, laiing, dementing bid orthografi tu get rid 
ov, bifbr eni uther kan bo: introdiust. Sb our parents must gb on 
clriling tlrcr dArlingz tu deth, or stiupiditi, bai fbrsing intu tliBr tender 
bnmz, in th^r teaildic yirz, a iabbrius, Arbitrari, memoraizd mas ov 
mis-spelingz ov an entair langgwcdj in ditid, ov hwitc hbl langgwedj 
not siksti wurdz Ar speld unekwivbkali and nesesarili rait! Adopt 
fbnotipi, ana ther iz nb nod ov a memoriter dril. The brim task iz 
sp-srd; the inkyubus disipsts. A niu yir or tin ov brait, piur laif iz 
aded tu boikud. Niu rmm iz med for tciri akwizicon. Edyukecon, 
tin, in riding and raiting, iz tcrpend and yuxniversalaizd. Milyonz ov 
anyual edyuk^conal ekspens iz sp"Grd, and milyonz ov ignbrant tcildren 
ov poverti Ar brot intu the p^l ov noledj. The grist obstakel tu the izi 
akwairment ov our langgwcdj bai forenerz iz remuivd, and our spbken 
Ingglic, if simpli and triuli riten, promisez, when bbrn bai komers, 



99 



IMMEDIATE ADVANTAGES OF PHONOTYPY. 66 

konkwest, travel and kolinizscon bver distant lanclz, tu b.ikuni the pre- 
dominant langgwedj ov the wurld. Rev. Dr. Hw.idcn. 



IMMEDIATE ADVANTAGES OE PHONOTYPY. 

76. Phonotypy not only offers benefits to future generations who may 
adopt it, but, as an educational instrument, it is now capable of saving 
at least one half of the time, money, and labor now devoted to the ac- 
quisition of the art of reading by the common orthography. Let a 
child first acquire the ability to read phonotypy (which may be done 
with thirty or forty hours' instruction); let him continue phonetic read- 
ing, say three months — until he becomes familiar with the general 
appearance of words ; and then, by reason of the general resemblance 
of phonotypy to the common orthography, he will be able to make a 
transition to the latter almost at once, in the same manner that the 
reader of the common print makes a transition to phonetic print. 

77. Dr. Latham, author of the "Hand-Book of the English Lan- 
guage," says : 

" The present writer is prepared with facts by which he could verify 
the following position : — that if a child were taught at first on the pho- 
netic princii>le, and, by graduated lessons, brought up to a comprehen- 
sion of the present orthography, his reading would be taught at half 
the time, half the trouble, — and consequently half the risk of having a 
distaste for learning engendered by the difficulties of his first studies- 
involved in the present system." 

78. Another recommendation of the phonetic method of teaching 
reading is that it induces accuracy of pronunciation, and gives the pupil 
a thorough knowledge of the elements of the language, either of which 
(without special instruction) is rarely attained by those who are taught 
the common orthography alone. 

79. The several above-mentioned advantages of phonotypy point to, 
and demand, two things : 1. The use in all our primary schools of the 
phonetic plan of teaching reading. 2. The use of phonotypy by Home- 
Missionary Societies, and by private individuals, in teaching ignorant 
adults the art of reading, at least by a phonetic orthography. 

80. The phonetic system of teaching reading is already in use in a 
considerable number of schools in the United States ; and the results 
justify the expectations of the most ardent phoneticians ; and a large 
number of parents unwilling to subject their children to twelve or 
eighteen months' useless toil in learning to read, with the risk of ren- 
dering study distasteful to them, teach them at home by means of the 



34 ADVANTAGES OF PHONETIC ORTHOGRAPHY. 

Phonetic Readers ; by following the directions in which, the phonetic 
plan of teaching may be used by the most inexperienced. 

81. Phonotypy, by furnishing a sign for each element of the language, 
is a very efficient instrument in the cure of stammering, lisping, and 
other defects of articulation, and in giving instruction to avoid foreign 
accents or other peculiarities of pronunciation. 



ADVANTAGES OF A PHONETIC ORTHOGRAPHY. 

82. Let a phonetic orthography be generally adopted, and the follow 
ing-mentioned advantages may be expected to result from it : 

(1.) Reading and writing will be rendered absolutely certain. In the 
phonetic alphabet, a letter being assigned to each sound, and the sound 
being the name of the letter, the mere rapid naming of the letters in a 
printed word, in their order, will not only tell us how to pronounce it, 
but pronounce it. In writing, the only thing required will be the 
writing, in the order of the sounds to be represented, those letters which 
are named by the sounds. The labor of learning to read will consist in 
merely becoming familiar with the forms and names of the letters, 
which may be done with thirty or forty hours' instruction. Conse- 
quently, phonetic writing and printing will save much of the time, 
money, and labor now lost in learning to read by an anomalous orthog- 
raphy. The school-days of the child will be virtually lengthened, and 
the sphere of his studies enlarged ; and the teacher will be saved from 
a vast amount of drudgery. The art of reading the common orthogra- 
phy is rarely attained without eighteen or twenty months' instruction, 
when the old plan of teaching is followed. And even then, what is prop- 
erly called the art of reading has not been attained. To be able to 
read and write the entire language with facility ani accuracy requires 
years of study, practice, and observation. And who, even after years 
of study of the language, is not under the necessity of referring to a 
dictionary to ascertain the pronunciation of an unusual word ? And 
what good speller even, thinks of writing an article for the press with- 
out consulting a dictionary to verify his orthography. 

(2.) Phonetic writing and printing will eventually settle the 
orthography and pronunciation of every word in the language. Pro- 
vincialisms will disappear ; and the pronunciation of the English 
language, the world over, will be uniform, exact, elegant. 

(3.) The doors of learning will be opened to millions who would never 
learn to read by the common orthography. A large number of adults 
now are unable to read and write ; and many who are said to possess 
the ability rarely read because they can not do so with facility. Adopt 



ADVANTAGES OF PHONETIC O ETHO GRAPH Y. 35 

a phonetic orthography, and the reading public will be increased by 
millions. As there will be no excuse for being ignorant of the art of 
reading, but few, if any, will be. 

(4.) Every one who learns to read by a phonetic orthography will 
possess an accurate knowledge of the elements of the language ; and 
elocutionists and lexicographers will be able to write concerning the 
elements of the language, with the full assurance that they will be 
understood. 

(5.) The business of representing unwritten languages will be ren~ 
dered sure and easy. 

(6.) A phonetic representation of language will most effectually tend 
to a wide diffusion of our language among foreigners, if it should not 
lead to its adoption as a universal medium of communication. 

(7.) It will save millions of dollars in the expense of books, etc., 
annually 

OBJECTIONS ANSWERED. 

83. The principal objections which are made to the adoption of a 
phonetic orthography are: 1. That it will change the venerated English 
language. 2. That it will obscure the origin or etymology of words. 
Both of these objections are founded in ignorance of the nature and 
objects of the phonetic reform ; instead of a change being effected in 
the English language by the adoption of a phonetic orthography, the 
language will be made more permanent than it could be in any other 
way ; for it is not proposed by a phonetic orthography to change the 
pronunciation of a single word, but simply to give a definite, absolutely 
certain representation of whatever pronunciation may be settled as 
best. The principal difference between the phonetic and the common 
orthography is this : — By the common orthography, no one can tell with 
certainty the pronunciation of a single printed word except as he has 
learned it by tradition ; while, by a phonetic orthography, the pronun- 
ciation of every word is indicated with greater certainty than it usually 
'is by the ordinary pronouncing dictionaries. By the common orthog- 
raphy, the man who sits at your elbow can not tell, except he hears you 
utter them, what pronunciation you would give to the words you have 
written ; while by a phonetic orthography, a Chinese, ignorant of every 
word of the English language, but knowing the signification of the 
phonetic letters, could tell, with absolute certainty, your pronunciation 
of words expressed by the phonetic letters. Such is the basis of the 
principal objection brought against the phonetic reform, and considered 
as countervailing all the advantages mentioned in the preceding chapter. 

84. The second objection is like unto the first. It supposes either 
that the present orthography will be inaccessible after the adoption of 
a phonetic mode of representation, or that, to save etymologic fv^rn tho 



86 ADVANTAGES OF PHONETIC OSTEOGRAPHY. 

slight trouble of an additional step in their researches respecting the 
origin of words, children to the end of time should be subjected to the 
waste of millions of years and money in learning our present bar 
barous orthography — an orthography unequaled for its anomaly — in- 
stead of giving them a mode of representing language, with which the 
labor of learning to read and pronounce words with infallible accuracy, 
and to write them with as much accuracy as they might pronounce 
them, would consist in merely becoming familiar with the names and the 
forms of the typic and graphic phonetic letters. If the objection is 
founded upon the latter consideration, it can never avail with the 
masses who have derived so little benefit from the rather uncertain 
speculations and researches of etymologists thus far. Even supposing 
that, after the adoption of a phonetic orthography, the books in the com- 
mon print were to be mostly destroyed, nothing is more certain than that 
all the etymological advantages of the present spelling could be retained 
by simply placing in dictionaries the common spelling after the pho- 
netic spelling. Etymologists would not fail to have this done before all 
the works in the common orthography would disappear. But it is idle 
to suppose that the books in the common print would cease to be printed. 
They would continue to be produced for reasons similar to those which 
give us the works of the principal Greek authors. With the alphabet 
offered by the author, all the types required to produce a book in the 
ordinary spelling would be found in the " case" of the phonetic printer. 
Since, on account of the general resemblance of phonotypy to the com- 
mon print, the phonetic reader would be able, at once — or, at most, 
with a few minutes' study, — to make the transition to the common 
print, all the advantages of the old orthography would be nearly as 
accessible as now — in fact, more so ; — because had we but the common 
orthography, eighteen or twenty months would have to be spent by 
each pupil in learning to read it. On the contrary, a phonetic orthog- 
raphy being first familiarized by two or three months' study, the 
transition to the common spelling is at once made, with a saving of 
from twelve to fifteen months' study. Thus is the phonetic reform im- 
pregnable to all the assaults that can be made upon it, turning out a 
blessing wherever an evil is predicted of it, in accordance with the 
general law of the universe, that blessings always attend the footsteps 
of Truth, while Evil is evil continually 



PHONOGRAPHY; 



OR, 



PHONETIC SHORTHAND. 



85. The Phonetic Alphabet previously explained is admirably 
adapted to the wants of the reader, being both beautiful and legible ; 
but the script forms of these letters, each consisting of two or more 
strokes, do not answer all the wants of the writer. There is required 
a system of shorthand, which to be worthy of general adoption should 
combine the following characteristics : 

1 . It should be capable of expressing all the vocal elements which 
in any way enter into the language to be represented. 

2. It should secure a tolerable degree of speed of writing with 
ample legibility, so that it may answer all the purposes for which 
longhand is employed. 

3. It should secure sufficient speed for reporting purposes without 
illegibility. 

4. It must observe, in every department, order and simplicity. 

86. A system of shorthand which shall fully comply with all of 
these requirements, may justly be regarded as the standard system ; 
and when it shall have appeared, the conditions for the general adop- 
tion of shorthand for all the purposes for which longhand is now 
employed will have been secured. These requirements were more 
fully met by the Old or English Phonography than by any of its pre- 
decessors. It may, however, be shown to fall short, in many import- 
ant particulars, of the requirements of a standard system of short- 
hand. Upon the basis furnished by the English Phonography has 
been constructed a system which is denominated Standard or American 
Phonography. It can be demonstratively shown that this fully com- 
plies with the requirements of a standard stenography, and that 
therefore the long-sought desideratum has been attained. Stand- 
ard Phonography, with its different styles or degrees of contraction, 
is explained in detail in the "Compendium." It is the object of 
this chapter to furnish a general statement of the principles and uses 
of the system. 

87. Phonography, or Phonetic Shorthand, is based upon the pho- 



38 PHONETIC SHORTHAND. 

netic principles heretofore explained, harmonized with certain steno- 
graphic principles, or laws of speed in writing, which it is the purpose 
of a phonographic text-book to explain. No phonographic sign of a 
single sound requires more than one movement of the hand to form 
it ; and it is not unfrequently the case that several sounds are ex- 
pressed by a single stroke of the pen. The characters for the elements 
are formed of the simplest geometrical signs — simple lines for the con- 
sonants, and dots and dashes for the vowels. 

88. As the phonographic characters are explained, it will be ob- 
served that the straight lines are written in four different directions, 
and that the curves are written in eight different positions, in accord- 
ance with the following diagrams : 



tc 1 

-k f 



m 



n 

89. A class of consonants known as Mutes or Abrupts are represented 
in Phonography by straight lines, thus : 

\ \ I I 

p b; t d; kg. 

90. The likeness between several of the signs given above — one 
being light and another distinguished from it, simply by its being 
heavy,— intimates a corresponding likeness between the consonants 
they represent — some sounds being what are frequently designated as 
whispers, and others being what are called sonants or spoken sounds. This 
relation exists between the sounds indicated by 

p, b — t, d — k, g — f, v — b, d — s, z, 
as is intimated by their phonographic signs. The similarity will be 
observed by comparing the initial sounds of the following words : 

Pay, bay— tie, die — Coe, go — fie, vie — thigh, thy — seal, zeal — sure, 
jour (a French word, pronounced zhoor). 

91. By making the simple lines light and heavy, a sufficient num- 
ber of simple signs for all the elements is obtained. After a little 
practice, the writer will find that the heavy signs for the spoken 
sounds will be made without any particular thought or effort — it 
seeming very natural to write a heavy sign for such sounds, while it 
will be felt to be equally natural to write a light sign for a whisper. 
Such is the similarity between the sounds represented by light and 
heavy lines, that if the signs of cognate sounds were to be inter- 
changed by accident, but little difficulty would be experienced in 
arriving at the word intended to be written. The word "Puvalo," 
for instance, in connection with other words of a sentence, would 






PHONETIC SHOETHAND. 39 

readily be understood as meant for "Biifalo ;" so " Vranklin" would 
be seen to be a mistake for " Franklin.' ' 

92. As / / are not required as signs of any simple conso- 
nants, they are employed to represent the consonantal diphthongs, 

g (t-sh) and c] (d-zh). 

93. A class of consonants usually known as Continuants are indicated 
in Phonography by curved lines, thus : 

^ V. ( ( ) ) J J 

f, v; f), d; s, z; c, j c 

94. Two sounds, usually called Liquids (because of their ready coales- 
cence with other consonants), are indicated in Phonography thus : 

f , ^ or •/ 

1, r. 

95. The consonants indicated by the signs / and r in the words low, 
row, are spoken sounds ; and, in accordance with the principles thus 
far observed in the Phonographic Alphabet, they should be represented 
by heavy lines ; but, on the supposition that the corresponding whis- 
pers do not occur in English, the light lines are employed to represent 
them ; and the corresponding 

96. Heavy lines are employed to represent the two sounds frequently 
called Semivowels, thus; 

^ r 

w, y. 

These sounds are sometimes represented by briefer signs, thus : 
c or o = w ; w or n = y. 

97. Three sounds, called Nasals (because, in forming them, the breath 
is expelled through the nose), are represented in Phonography thus : 

^~N v_^y v^^ 

m n rj. 

98. What is known as the aspirate is indicated in Phonography thus : 

when a dot placed before the vowel is not more convenient. 

99. Six of the twelve generally recognized vowels are represented by 
a dot, and six by a dash. The value of either of these signs depends 
upon its position respecting a consonant 



40 PHONETIC SHORTHAND, 

100. A heavy dot, according as it is placed opposite the beginning, 
middle, or end of a consonant sign, signifies 

a, c, b. 

101. A heavy dash, according as it is placed opposite the beginning 
middle, or end of a consonant sign, signifies 

o, &, m. 

1 02. The corresponding short vowels indicated by 

i, e, a, 

O, 13, U, 

are represented by light dots (for the first three) and dashes (for th« 
remainder) opposite the beginning, middle, or end of a consonant. The 
dashes are to be made about the length of a hyphen (-) and are written 
at right angles with the consonant-signs. 

103. Thus two characters are made to represent twelve sounds. 
These signs are placed before or after the consonants, as may be desired. 
As the consonants of a word are first written, and the vowels written 
beside them, the reporter (who reads mainly by consonants) can omit 
the vowels to any desirable extent. It is frequently the case that a 
phonographer in writing a letter, writes merely the consonants of the 
words employed, and inserts the vowels as he revises what he has written. 

104. The four vowel-diphthongs are represented by small angles, for 
the mode of writing which the reader is referred to the Compendium of 
Standard Phonography. 

105. Speed of Phonography. — As soon as the writer becomes sufficiently 
familar with the system to be able to omit most of the vowels, he will 
find, by calculation, that to write a given number of words phono- 
graphically will require but one seventh of the number of strokes ne- 
cessary to write them in the common longhand. Hence a person who 
is able to write by the common longhand twenty-five words per 
minute, can write by phonography 175 words per minute, as soon as 
he has thoroughly familiarized the phonographic letters. The average 
rate of speaking is 120 words per minute. 

106. Arrangement of the Consonant Signs. — When describing the conso- 
nantal elements in the previous pages, the sonant consonants were 
made to precede the whispered consonants, because this is the natural 
order, — the importance of the elements of speech being in the ratio of 
their vocality. In the Phonographic Alphabet, however, the whispers 
are made to precede the sonant consonants, because they are moie 
easily pronounced than the spoken consonants. On the contrary, the 
long vowels which correspond to the spoken consonants precede the 
short vowels, because their pronunciation is easier than that of the 
short ones. 



STANDARD PHONOGRAPHIC ALPHABET 









Consonants 








p 


b 


t 


d 


G=tc 


<M.j 


k 


g 


1 \ 


\ 


| 


i 


/ 


/ 


— 





: V*J 


bay 


to 


do 


etch 


edge 


rain 


oain 


f 


V 


h 


d 


s 


z 


c 


i 
j 


V 


C 


( 


( 


) ° 


)° 


j 


J 


fie 


vie 


thin 


then 


see 


zee 


she 


zhe 


1 




V 


ra 




n 




i] 


r 




^/ 






v^ 




w 


lie 




roar 


ma 


i 


wo 




si?? t <7 


W 


C D 


\ 


r 


<J o 






h 


we 






ye 








he 








Long Vowels. 








i 

•i 


8 


-o 

1 


1 


O 

-1 


er- 


-o 


j 


1 
eat 


■ 

age 


1 
(ah) 


.1 
arm 


1 

all 


ope (whole) 


-1 
food 








Short Vowels . 








i 


e 


-B 

| 


a-Cb 

1 




"1 


n 
1 




u 

1 


1 
it 


edge 


1 
(her) 


.1 

ask (at) 


i 
i 

on 


i 
«p, 


cz^r 


-1 
foot 



Note— The sound of each sign is shown by the phonotype above it, and by the 
italic letter or letters in the word or words beneath it. The vowels of parenthetic 
words are provided with distinct signs, whose use is optional. 



STANDARD PirONOGiiAPIIIC ALPHABET, 



Optional, Vowel- Signs. 
a b 



il 
air 



il 
at 



lier 



whole 



ai = i 



Close Diphthongs. 

ou = s 



01 = o 

A! 



a/sle=zsle oil, hoy out, noiv 



m == ii 
deic=due 



£51 Gl 



.11 



Open Diphthongs. 

ei ai ae oa 



mi 



aye sawing Deity clayey snoivy Owen Isoah luouis 



W with Vowels. 
i. i s e tb o a js a oo o'Oiiuiuj o "5" 



c c 1 



>\ <\ 3 



Y with Vowels. 
iizenovtRSiaocronmvLio* 



A fV O 



HI Hi v I 



Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1857, by ANDREW J. GRAHAM, in the 

Clerk's Office of the District Court of the United States for 

the Southern District of New York. 



ADVANTAGES OF PHONOGRAPHY. 43 

ADVANTAGES OF PHONOGEAPHY. 

GENERAL STATEMENT. 

107. Upon each individual who learns it, Phonography confers, 
doubtless, some advantage peculiarly adapted to his individual circum- 
stances. Upon the reporter it confers the power of taking the exact 
words of a speaker, even at the rate of 180 or 200 words per minute. 
It enables the student of a foreign language to visualize its pronuncia- 
tion — to put down on paper, as it were, the voice of his teacher. To 
him who aims to be a public speaker it is of inestimable value, on 
account of its turning his attention to pronunciation. Phonographers 
are said to pronounce the English language better than any other 
class of persons. To the clergyman it is of peculiar value, as it 
enables his pen to keep pace with his powers of composition, and saves 
him five sixths of the manual labor required in the use of the common 
longhand. It is exceedingly serviceable to the lawyer in taking notes 
of testimony, decisions, and rulings of a court, and in rough-sketching 
business papers of every description. The principal of a commercial 
establishment may conduct the largest correspondence in a fraction 
of the time ordinarily required (thus saving much time and energy 
for other important duties) by dictating his letters, even with the 
rapidity of speech, to a competent phonographer, who would after- 
ward write them out and prepare them for the mail. Ministers who 
use Phonography claim that they can read it better than longhand, 
and with more of the freedom of extemporaneous delivery. Authors 
whose ' ' living flocks of thoughts trudge it slowly and wearily down 
the pen and along the paper, hindering each other as they struggle 
through the strait gate of the old handwriting" — whose "kind and 
loving thoughts, warm and transparent, liquid as melted from the 
hot heart," now "grow opaque, and freeze with a tedious dribbling 
from the pen," can not fail to duly appreciate Phonography, which 
enables them to write at "breathing ease." The Rev. Dr. Raffles, of 
Liverpool, says : "Phonography is a railroad method of communica- 
ting thought ; a railroad by reason of its expedition— a railroad by 
reason of its ease." 

It is hardly necessary to speak further upon the peculiar advantages 
of shorthand, since the bare mention of the art is sufficient to suggest 
many benefits, even in addition to those general ones which it bestows 
upon all, in correspondence, writing literary compositions, in keeping a 
diary, in book-keeping, in copying letters, in making memoranda, in 
sketching lectures and sermons, in making abstracts of, and quotations 
from, books read. For these and all other purposes for which writing 



iti ADVANTAGES OF PHONOGEAPHY. 

is available, it requires but a tithe of the time, labor, and space needed 
in the use of longhand. 

, BENEFITS OF SHORTHAND. 

108. The following testimonial as to the benefits of shorthand is from 
the pen of Mr. Gawtress, the publisher of an improved edition of By- 
rorus system. Of course, whatever advantages could be predicated of 
the old systems of stenography, undoubtedly belong to Phonography, 
the best system of stenography yet given to the world. 

109. " Shorthand is capable of imparting so many advantages to 
persons in almost every situation of life, and is of such extensive utility 
to society, that it is justly a matter of surprise that it has not 
attracted a greater share of attention, and been more generally 
practiced. 

" In England, at least, this art may be considered a national bless- 
ing, and thousands who look with the utmost indifference upon it, are 
daily reaping the fruits of its cultivation. It is scarcely necessary to 
mention how indispensable it is in taking minutes of public proceedings. 
If all the feelings of a patriot glow in our bosoms on a perusal of those 
eloquent speeches which are delivered in the senate, or in those public 
assemblies where the people are frequently convened to exercise the 
birthright of Britons— we owe it to shorthand. If new fervor be added 
to our devotion, and an additional stimulus be imparted to our exer- 
tions as Christians, by the eloquent appeals and encouraging state- 
ments made at the anniversaries of our various Religious Societies — we 
owe it to shorthand. If we have an opportunity, in interesting judicial 
cases, of examining the evidence, and learning the proceedings with as 
much certainty, and nearly as much minuteness, as if we had been 
present on the occasion — we owe it to shorthand. In short, all those 
brilliant and spirit-stirring effusions which the circumstances of the 
present times combine to draw forth, and which the press transmits to 
us with such astonishing celerity, warm from the lips and instinct with 
the soul of the speaker, would have been entirely lost to posterity, and 
comparatively little known to ourselves, had it not beeri for the facili- 
ties afforded to their preservation by shorthand. Were the operations 
of those who are professionally engaged in exercising this art, to be 
suspended but for a single week, a blank would be left in the political 
and judicial history of our country, an impulse would be wanting to 
the public mind, and the nation would be taught to feel and acknowl- 
edge the important purposes it answers in the great business of life. 

' ' A practical acquaintance with this art is highly favorable to the 
improvement of the mind, invigorating all its faculties, and drawing 
forth all its resources. The close attention requisite in following the 
voice of the speaker, induces habits of patience, perseverance, and 



ADVANTAGES OF PHONOGRAPHY. 45 

watchfulness, which will gradually extend themselves to other pur- 
suits and avocations, and at length inure the writer to exercise thern 
on every occasion in life. When writing in public, it will also he ab- 
solutely necessary to distinguish and adhere to the train of thought 
which runs through the discourse, and to observe the modes of its 
connection. This will naturally have a tendency to endue the mind 
with quickness of apprehension, and will impart an habitual readiness 
and distinctness of perception, as well as a methodical simplicity of 
arrangement, which can not fail to conduce greatly to mental superi- 
ority. The judgment will be strengthened, and the taste refined ; 
and the practitioner will, by degrees, become habituated to seize the 
original and leading parts of a discourse or harangue, and to reject 
whatever is commonplace, trivial, or uninteresting. 

"The memory is also improved by the practice of stenography. The 
obligation the writer is under to retain in his mind the last sentence 
of the speaker, at the same time that he is carefully attending to the 
following one, must be highly beneficial to that faculty, which, more 
than any other, owes its improvement to exercise. And so much are 
the powers of retention strengthened and expanded by this exertion, 
that a practical stenographer will frequently recollect more without 
writing, than a person unacquainted with the art could copy in the 
time by the use of common-hand. 

"It has been justly observed, 'this science draws out all the powers 
of the mind ; — it excites invention, improves the ingenuity, matures 
the judgment, and endows the retentive faculty with those superior 
advantages of precision, vigilance, and perseverance.' 

The facility it affords to the acquisition of learning ought to render it an 
indispensable branch in the education of youth. To be enabled to 
treasure up for future study the substance of lectures, sermons, etc., 
is an accomplishment attended with so many evident advantages that 
it stands in no need of recommendation. Nor is it a matter of small 
importance, that by this art the youthful student is furnished with an 
easy means of making a number of valuable extracts in the moments 
of leisure, and of thus laying up a stock of knowledge for his future 
occasions. The pursuit of this art materially contributes to improve 
the student in the principles of grammar and composition. While 
tracing the various forms of expression by which the same sentiment 
can be conveyed ; and while endeavoring to represent, by modes of 
contraction, the dependence of one word upon another, he is insen- 
sibly initiated in the science of universal language, and particularly 
in the knowledge of his native tongue. 

"The rapidity with which it enables a person to commit his own 
thoughts to the safety of manuscript, also renders it an object pecu 



46 MODES OF REPRESENTING LANGUAGE. 

liarly worthy of regard. By this means many ideas which daily strike 
us, and which are lost before we can record them in the usual way, 
may be snatched from destruction, and preserved till mature delibera- 
tion can ripen and perfect them. 

"In addition to these great advantages, Science and Religion ' are 
indebted to this inestimable art for the preservation of many valuable 
lectures and sermons, which would otherwise have been irrecoverably 
lost. Among the latter may be instanced those of Whitfield, whose 
astonishing powers could move even infidelity itself, and extort admi 
ration from a Chesterfield and a Hume, but whose name would have 
floated down-the stream of time, had not shorthand rescued a portion 
of his labors from oblivion. With so many vouchers for the truth of 
the remark, we can have no hesitation in stating it as our opinion, 
that since the invention of printing, no cause has contributed more to 
the diffusion of knowledge and the progress of refinement, we might 
also add, to the triumphs of liberty and the interests of religion, than 
the revival and improvement of this long-neglected art. 

"Such are the blessings which shorthand, like a generous bene- 
factor, bestows indiscriminately on the world at large. But it has 
additional and peculiar favors in store for those who are so far con- 
vinced of its utility as personally to engage in its pursuit. The ad- 
vantages resulting from the exercise of this art are not, as is the case 
with many others, confined to a particular class of society ; for though 
it may seem more immediately calculated for those whose business it 
is to record the eloquence of public men, and the proceedings of popu- 
lar assemblies, yet it offers its assistance to persons of every rank and 
station in life — to the man of business as well as the man of science — 
for the purpose of private convenience as well as of general informa- 
tion." 



TWO MODES OF REPRESENTING LANGUAGE NECESSARY. 

110. A consideration of the different wants of the reader and writer 
makes it apparent that two different systems of representing language 
are required: — 1. A system combining a tolerable degree of facility 
of execution with very great legibility. 2. A system combining toler 
able legibility with the greatest facility of execution. — Phonetic print 
is an example of the former. Phonography is an example of the 
latter. The use of a phonetic alphabet based upon the common 
alphabet is seconded by various considerations besides those of legi- 
bility. At the same time that we are furnished by it, with phonetic 
printing which can be equaled by no other system in respect of beauty 



MODES OF REPRESENTING LANGUAGE. 47 

and legibility, there is required the least possible expenditure of money 
and time in procuring new types ; and all that has been invested in the 
ordinary types will be saved. Furthermore, the transition from the new 
to the old spelling is rendered so easy that all who learn to read phonetic 
print can read works in the old orthography without any instruction in 
it. This will be possible on account of the general resemblance of the 
new to the old print. In consequence of this, all the advantages of the 
old orthography in respect of etymology, etc., will be nearly as accessible 
as they are now. Moreover, the reader of the common print can, with 
a very few minutes' instruction, make the transition to the new spell- 
ing ; and phonetic print will encounter far less opposition than it would 
if an entirely new alphabet were to be employed, to read by which 
would require considerable study. Then the use as an educational 
instrument of a phonetic orthography closely resembling the common 
print will be a powerful aid in securing the prevalence of phonetic 
spelling — an aid, without which the phonetic reform might struggle 
in vain for centuries to come — but with which it is destined to have a 
speedy triumph. 

111. The unbounded admiration for phonetic shorthand, entertained 
by those who have recently learned it, frequently leads them to desire 
that Phonography should supplant all other modes of representing 
language ; and makes them opponents, rather than promoters, of pho- 
netic printing. It is presumed that, in forming their opinions, they 
have overlooked the above-mentioned considerations, which demand a 
system of printing differing from their favorite system of shorthand; 
and they are, perhaps, not aware of the apparently insuperable obsta- 
cles in the way of printing phonography from letter-press. Thus far 
phonographic works have had to be produced by processes three or four 
times as costly as the ordinary letter-press printing. Even if there 
were some process as cheap as letter-press printing for producing pho- 
nography just as it should be written, yet, not being as legible as pho- 
notypy, phonography could not take its place in respect of legibility ; — 
nothing being said of the fact that Phonography could not secure several 
important advantages which would be obtained by phonotypy. Let 
Phonography supplant other modes of representing the language, and 
the ability to read the old orthography could be attained only by the 
present tedious processes. 

It is earnestly to be hoped that all phonographers will lend the 
printing department of the phonetic reform that aid which it merits at 
their hands 



SPECIFIC DIRECTIONS FOR MAKING THE ELEMENTARY 

SOUNDS. 

112. The reader will scarcely have reached this point in this treat- 
ise, without having acquired a definite knowledge of the method 
of forming each of the elements of the English language. 

113. The purpose of the exercises which have been given on each 
element, has been to render it distinct, by placing it in a great variety 
of situations, and by rendering it very prominent by the frequency of 
its occurrence. However, lest the student should fail to acquire from 
the preceding account an accurate knowledge of the vocal elements, it 
is deemed advisable to furnish specific directions for their formation. 

114. By way of introduction to these directions, it is well that the 
reader's attention should be called to the principal distinguishing 
characteristics of vocal utterance. Then, first, let it be observed that 
the term Voice is here used to denote all the different sounds heard in 
speech. When the breath is so emitted as to call into action the vocal 
ligaments, a species of musical sound is produced, which if unimpeded 
constitutes a Vowel; if impeded, as in the production of the spoken 
consonants, a sort of murmur is produced, which may be termed an 
Undertone, or subvocal sound. . 

115. When the breath is emitted without a distinct vibration of the 
vocal ligaments, and is simply impeded by entire or partial contacts of 
the organs of speech, an effect is produced, which may be termed a 
Whisper. Instances of such whispers occur in the formation of those 
consonants which have heretofore been described as whispered consonants. 
The sonant or spoken consonants differ from the whispered conso- 
nants, principally by their having a subvocal sound in connection with 
a whisper. The sound of b, for instance, requires that there should be 
made a contact in almost the same manner as for the production of 
the sound of p ; but in sounding b, it will be observed that the under- 
tone, or subvocal sound, is heard previous to the sudden separation 
of the lips, which is required for the completion of the sound. 

1. DIRECTIONS FOR PRODUCING THE CONSONANTS. 

116. To produce the sound indicated by \ close the lips, and 
suddenly force them apart with the breath. Or, gradually separate 
the sounds of the syllable "op, 'and finally drop the sound denoted by 

a; thus, a-p, a-p, a— p, — p, P. 



DIRECTIONS FOK MAKING THE SOUNDS. 49 

117. To produce the sound indicated by \ close the lips, produce 

the undertone — a sort of murmur in the throat, — and suddenly force 
apart the lips by the breath at the moment of the cessation of the 
undertone. Or, having distinctly pronounced the syllable ob several 
times, gradually separate the two sounds, and finally drop the sound 
denoted by o, when the desired sound, denoted by b, will remain ; 
thus, 6b, o-b, o-b, 5 — b, — b, B. Or, having deliberately pronounced 
the word bay several times, gradually separate the two sounds, and 
finally omit the sound denoted by ay; thus, bay, b-ay, b-ay, b — ay, 
b— , B. 

118. To produce the sound indicated by separate the sound of 
t from eat or tea; thus, eat, ea-t, ea-t, — t, T: tea, t-ea, t-ea, t — ea, 
t-,T. 

119. To produce the sound indicated by gradually separate 

the sound of d from that of o in do, and finally drop the sound of o ; 
thus, do, d-o, d-o, d — , D. Or, separate the sound of d from the 
word aid; thus, aid, ai-d, ai-d, ai — d, — d, D. 

120. To produce the sound indicated by / separate the sound 

of ch from chin, or the sound of tch from etch; thus, chin, ch-in, ch-in, 
ch — in, ch — , Ch: etch, e-tch, e-tch, e — tch, — tch, Tch = Ch. Or, 
rapidly unite the sounds of t and ch. This process may be represented 
by phonotypes thus : 

t c t c t c tc g. 

121. To produce the sound indicated by / separate the sound 
of j from the word joy, or the sound of doe from edge; thus, joy, j-oy, 
j-oy, j— oy, j— , J: edge, e-dge, e-dge, e— dge, —dge, Dye = J. Or, 
rapidly unite the sounds of d and si (as in visian) . This process may be 
represented by phonotypes thus : 

d j a j <J j clj §■ 

This sound, as previously explained, is not a simple, but a proximate, 
element. 

122. To produce the sound indicated by , separate the sound of 

k from ken or oak; thus, ken, k-en, k-en, k — en, k — , K: oak, oa-k, 
oa-k, oa— k, — k, K. 

123. To produce the sound indicated by , separate the sound of 

#from go or egg ; thus, go, g-o, g-o, g— o, g— , G: egg, e-gg, e-gg y 
*—gg,—gg, Gg = G. 

124. To produce the sound indicated by \^_ separate / from foe or 



50 DIRECTIONS FOE MAKING THE SOUNDS. 

if; thus, foe, f-oe, f-oe, f— oe, f— , F: if, i-f, l-f, 1— f, — f, F. To 
produce this sound, the upper teeth are required to be placed upon 
the lower lip. 

125. To produce the sound indicated by ^_ separate the sound of 

v from vie or eve; thus, vie, v-ie, v-ie, v — ie, v — , V: eve, e-ve, 
e-ve, e — ve, — v, V. 

126. To produce the sound indicated by ( separate the sound of 

th from thin or earth ; thus, thin, th-in, th-in, th — in, th — , Th : earth, 
ear-th, ear-th, ear — th, — th, Th. 

127. To produce the sound indicated by C place the tongue 

against the crowns of the upper front teeth, so that breath may be 
slightly emitted at the time of the production of the undertone, and 
then suddenly withdraw the tongue from the teeth. Or, separate the 
sound of th from tlien or with ; thus, then, th-en, th-en, th — en, th — , 
TH: with, wi-th, wi-th, wi— th, — th, TIL 

128. To produce the sound indicated by ) separate the sound of 

s from see, or that of ss from hiss; see, s-ee, s-ee, s — ee, s — , S: hiss, 
hi-ss, hi-ss, hi — ss, — ss, SS=S. 

129. To produce the sound indicated by ) separate the sound of 

? from zeal, or that of zz from buzz; thus, zeal, z-eal, z-eal, z — eal, 
z — , Z: buzz, bu-zz, bu-zz, bu — zz, — zz, ZZ—Z. 

130. To produce the sound indicated by _J separate the sound of 

sh from show or hush; thus, show, sh-ow, sh-ow, sh — , SH: hush, 
hii-sh, hii-sh, — sh, SH. 

131. To produce the sound indicated by _y separate the sound of 

j from the French jour (pronounced zhoor), or the sound of ge from 
rouge (pronounced roozh) ; thus, jour, j-our, j-our, j — , J=ZII: rouge, 
rou-ge, rou-ge, — ge, GE=ZH. This sound is represented by#e in 
edge = edzh = phonetic edj. 

132. To produce the sound indicated by f , separate the sound of 
I from low or ail ; thus, low, 1-ow, 1-ow, 1 — , L : ail, ai-1, ai-1, — 1, L. 

133. To produce the sound indicated by ~^ or / , separate the 
sound of r from ray or air ; thus, ray, r-ay, r-ay, r — , R : air, ai-r, 
ai-r, — r, R. 

134. To produce the sound indicated by /— n, close the lips, emit the 

undertone through the nose, and suddenly separate the lips, at the 
moment of the cessation of the subvocal sound. Or, separate the 



DIRECTIONS FOR MAKING THE SOUNDS, 51 

sound of m from may or aim; thus, may, m-ay, m-ay, m — , 31; aim, 
ai-m, ai-m, — m, 31. 

135. To produce the sound indicated by^y, separate the sound of 

n from no or own ; thus, no, n-o, n-o, n — , N: own, ow-n, ow-n, — n, 
N". The production of this sound requires the emission of the under- 
tone through the nose. 

136. To produce the sound indicated by \^s , separate the sound of 

ng from sing ; thus, sing, si-ng, si-ng, — ng, NG. This sound com- 
mences no syllable in the English language. Its production requires 
that the undertone should be emitted through the nose. 

137. To produce the sound indicated by "^ , separate the sound of 

w from wall ; thus, wall, w-all, w-all, w — , W. Or, while prolonging 
oo, gradually compress the lips till the clear vowel sound is destroyed, 
and the sound of w will be the result. Some phonologists consider 
this sound and that of oo identical ; but to be convinced of their error, 
they have but to pronounce woo-woo-woo ; and observe the varying 
position of the lips, and the changes in the character of the sound. 
Students of phonography should avoid naming the sign of this sound 
Double- U. When mentioned in conversation, it should be called Wd. 

138. To produce the sound indicated by f separate the sound 

of y from yawl ; thus, yawl, y-awl, y-awl, y — , Y. Or, while prolonging 
the sound of ee, elevate the tongue, till the clear vowel sound is de- 
stroyed, and until a murmur is heard, and the sound of y will be the 
result. The pronunciation of ye-ye-ye will serve to illustrate the mode 
of arriving at the sound of y from the sound of ee, and also demon- 
strate that these sounds are not identical, as some phonologists have 
thought. The sign for the sound of y should not be called Wt. 
When mentioned in conversation it may be named Yd. 

139. To produce the sound indicated by / , separate the sound of 

h from hall ; thus, hall, h-all, h-all, h — , II. Or, emit the breath sud- 
denly with all the organs open. The sign of this sound should not be 
called Aitch. When mentioned in conversation, it may be named lid 
or Ilaitch. 

2. DIRECTIONS FOB, PRODUCING THE VOWELS. 

140. To produce the sound indicated by pronounce the com- 
mon name of the letter e. Or, pronounce the word eat distinctly 
several times ; and finally leave off the sound indicated by t. 

141. To produce the sound indicated by | , deliberately pro- 
nounce the word it several times, and finally omit the sound indicated 



52 DIRECTIONS FOR MAKING THE SOUNDS. 

by t. Or, speak the word if, as nearly as possible, without bringing 
the under lip in contact with the upper teeth. 

142. To produce the sound indicated by «| pronounce the com- 
mon name of the letter a. Or, pronounce the word aid several times, 
and finally omit the sound denoted by d. Or, pronounce the word ape, 
as nearly as possible, without the contact of the lips. Or, having dis- 
tinctly pronounced pay several times, dwelling upon the sound denoted 
by ay, finally omit the sound denoted by p. 

143. To denote the sound indicated by •[ , speak the interjection eh! 

Or, having distinctly pronounced the word ell several times, finally 
omit the sound indicated by 11. Or, pronounce the word ebb, as nearly 
as possible, without a contact of the lips. 

144. To produce the sound indicated by il , distinctly pronounce 

the word earth a number of times ; and finally omit the sound indicated 
by rth. 

145. To produce the sound indicated by | , deliberately pronounce 
the word air several times, dwelling upon the sound of ai, and finally 
omit the sound denoted by r. 

146. To produce the sound indicated by I , deliberately pronounce 
the word at several times, and finally omit the sound denoted by t. 
Or, pronounce the syllable ap — as nearly as possible without bringing 
the lips into contact. 

147. To produce the sound indicated by , distinctly pronounce 
the word arm a number of times, and finally omit the sounds repre- 
sented by rm. Or, pronounce the word ah 1 Or, distinctly pronounce 
the word are, several times, and finally omit the sound denoted by re. 

148. To produce the sound indicated by having distinctly pro 
nounced the word ask several times, omit the sounds denoted by the 
letters sk. This vowel is not that of at. Observe, by the aid of a 
looking-glass, that the vowels of air and at require that the tongue 
should be elevated in the middle, — to assume a position which is very 

well indicated by ^. On the contrary, in producing the vowel of 
ask, the tongue is nearly straight. An exercise on this vowel will be 
found at paragraph 23. 

149. To produce the sound indicated by "| , pronounce the word 
awe. 

150. To produce the sound indicated by | , forcibly pronounce the 
word on several times, and finally omit the sound denoted by n. Or, 



DIRECTIONS FOR MAKING THE SOUNDS. 53 

pronounce the syllable op, as nearly as possible, without bringing the 
lips together. Observe that the vowel of arm requires that the corners 
of the mouth should be slightly drawn back. On the contrary in 
producing the vowel of on, the mouth is more open than in pro- 
nouncing ah, and the corners of the mouth are not retracted. 

151. To produce the sound indicated by -I , pronounce the common 

name of the letter o, or the word oh ! Or, pronounce the word owe. 
Or, pronounce the word ope, as nearly as possible, without closing the 
lips. 

152. To produce the sound indicated by \| , pronounce the word 

only several times ; and finally omit the sound indicated by inly. Thi3 
vowel occurs in the common pronunciation of whole, most, and none. 

153. To produce the sound indicated by -I , pronounce up, as nearly 
as possible without a contact of the lips. The vowel of the word cur 
is precisely the same in quality as that of up. This sound must not be 
confounded with the vowel of her, earth, or bird. 

154. To produce the sound indicated by | , distinctly pronounce 

the word ooze several times, dwelling upon the sound indicated by oo, 
and finally omit the sound denoted by ze. Or, pronounce the word do 
several times, and finally omit the sound indicated by d. 

155. To produce the sound indicated oy , having pronounced 

the word foot several times, omit the sound of / ; and finally omit 
the sound denoted by t, when the desired sound will be heard. 

156. To produce the sound indicated by v j , pronounce the name 

of the letter i. Or, pronounce the word eye. Or, unite the vowel of 
ask and it. 

157. To produce the sound indicated by A [ , pronounce the word oil 

several times, and finally omit the sound denoted by I. Or, blend 
the vowels of on and it, accenting the first. 

158. To produce the sound indicated by A | , pronounce the word 

out several times, and finally omit the sound denoted by t. Or, unite 
the vowels of on and full, accenting- the first. 

159. To produce the sound indicated by I , pronounce the word 

dew, and finally omit the sound denoted by d. Or, unite the vowels 
of it and full, accenting the first. This sound is a pure vowel-diph- 
thong, and must not be confounded with the sound denoted by you in 
the word youth, or by u in the word unit. 



64 



PHONETIC SYNTHESIS 



PHONETIC SYNTHESIS. 

169. Phonetic Synthesis, or spelling by sound, consists in uniting 
vocal elements so as to form words. To name separately the sounds 
of p and ay, and then pronounce them in rapid succession, in other 
words, to say pay, is to spell this word by its sounds, or to perform an 
act of Phonetic Synthesis. 

161. Practice in Phonetic Synthesis will serve three useful purposes. 
1. It will render the student thoroughly familiar with the different 
elements of the English language. 2. It will tend to produce a dis- 
tinct and elegant pronunciation. 3. It will be of material service as 
a preparation for reading phonetic shorthand. 

162. In making use of the following exercises, the reader should be 
careful to remember that he is to deal with sounds and not with 
letters, except as they are representatives of sounds ; and that the 
only names that should be given to the letters are the sounds they 
denote. 

Exercise in Phonetic Synthesis, No. 1. 






b-s 


n-o 


i-rj-k 


o-n 


bay 


gnaw 


ink 


on 


b-* 


&-& 


e-l-m 


f-u-t 


bough 


though 


elm 


foot 


b-e 


W-8 


B-r-b 


n-o-n 


boy 


weigh 


earth 


none 


§-e 


C-6 


b-73-r-d 


h-o-l 


joy 


shah 


bird 


whole 


c]-o 


v-u 


a-s-k 


k-n-p 


jaw 


view 


ask 


cup 


k-i 


f-o-r 


a-n-t 


t-n-f 


key 


fair 


aunt 


tough 


m 


k-o-r 


a-n-t 


o-d 


chew 


care 


ant 


awed 


g-s 


d-o-r 


p-a-b 


H 


gay 


there 


path 


eyed 


m-i 


k-ux 


p-a-t 


*-l 


my 


coo 


pat 


owl 



PHONETIC SYNTHESIS 



55 



Exercise in Phonetic Synthesis, No. 2. — Grouped Consonants. 

Note.— The first time through this exercise, pronounce each element separately. 
The second time through, pronounce the consonants in groups, as is indicated by 
the grouping of their signs. 



r-8-z 


1-B-rd 


st-o-r 


sw-B-rv 


raise 


lard 


stair 


swerve 


pr-8-zd 


bl a-nks 


st-B-rts 


bw-a-kt 


praised 


blanks 


starts 


thwacked 


kr-D-sts 


fl-B-rt 


sk-s-n 


bw-Q-rt 


crusts 


flirt 


skein 


thwart 


tr-a-nst 


kl-a-sps 


sf-i-r 


bw-e 


tranced 


clasps 


sphere 


buoy 


fr-e-nd 


g[-& 


sl-i-t 


kw-o-rt 


friend 


glow 


slight 


quart 


br-rj-sts 


gl-i-nd 


sm-o-1 


d-e-lvd 


thrusts 


gleaned 


small 


delved 


cr-^-nz 


spl-i-n 


sn-i-r 


tw-e-lfb 


shrines 


spleen 


sneer 


twelfth 


dr-i-mz 


kl-i-vd 


sw-i-rjz 


m-u-nbs 


dreams 


cleaved 


swings 


months 


s.pr-8 


kl-e-dd 


sw-o'-rn 


br-ed-bs 


spray 


clothed 


sworn 


breadths 


str-8-nd 


kl-a-mp 


tw-B-rl 


si-ks-bs 


strained 


clamp 


twirl 


sixths 


skr-i-mz 


sp-ui-lz 


dw-o-rf 


8t-bs 


screams 


spools 


dwarf 


eighths 


h-B-rps 


u-r^d 


f-er-rtli 


b-6-rnz 


harps 


urged 


forth 


barns 


o-rbz 


w-H-rkt 


f-B-rst 


b-rj-rnd 


orbs 


worked 


first 


burned 


c-o-rd 


t-u-ri 


h-B-rc 


st-o-rmd 


shared 


turf 


harsh 


stormed 


e-rgt 


k-B-rvd 


B-rlz 


f-Q-rmz 


arched 


carved 


earls 


forms 


h-e-lps 


m-i-lg 


tw-e-lvz 


8-lz 


helps 


milch 


twelves 


ails 


kw-i-lts 


b-D-l^ 


li-e-lb 


W-e-lc 


quilts 


bulge 




Welsh 


h-er-ldz 


b-H-lk 


e-ls 


e-lm 


holds 


bulk 


else 


elm 



56 



PHONETIC ANALYSIS 



Exercise in Phonetic Synthesis, No. 3. — Syllabication. 

Note.— The first time through this exercise, sound each element separately, and 
unite them into syllables, and finally into words. The second time through, speak 
the elements in syllables, and then unite them into words. This exercise should 
be repeated till both processes become easy. 

bi-kum ner-ter-ri-us 

men-i sprst-ed 

ol-redi fab-yu-list 

do-ter kin-dred 

o-burn pev-ment 

en-du^r sub-di-v^d 

eks-pel eks-pian-8-con 

mod-est kom-pend-i-um 

smuid-li kon-trak-con 

kron-ik suk-ses-ful 

kri-e-con am-big-yu-us 

sit-yu-s-ted meb-od-i-kal 



fc-no-graf-ik 

yui-ni-vers-al 

in-tro-duk-con 

ad-i-coH-al 

m^-zi-nni 

kar-ak-ter 

im-pBr-fekt 

fe-net-ik 

il-us-trst-ed 

kor-ekt-nes 

pros-tre-con 

kon-di-con 



PHONETIC ANALYSIS. 

163. Phonetic Analysis, the precise opposite of phonetic synthesis, 
consists in dividing words into their vocal elements. Phonetic analy- 
sis is useful because of its directing the attention to pronunciation and 
leading to an appreciation of the finest shades of sound. It is espe- 
cially serviceable to the student, as a preparation for the study of 
phonography ; since the phonetic analysis is invariably required before 
any word can be phonographically represented. 

164. To combine the elements into words, when they are repre- 
sented by phonetic types, is comparatively easy. Phonetic analysis is 
rather more difficult, especially when words are represented by the 
common spelling ; for if the student allows himself to be guided to any 
extent by the common bewildering and chaotic orthography, he will 
be very likely to be led astray. He should, therefore, entirely disre- 
gard the suggestions of the common spelling, and seek to analyze the 
spoJcen word. Most persons unaccustomed to phonetic analysis are led 
to infer the presence of the sound of I in such words as walk, talk, etc. , 
because they observe the letter I in the common spelling of these 
words. But analysis of the spoken words indicated by this orthogra- 
phy, will show them their error. Further illustration of these points 
is unnecessary, since by the preceding portions of this treatise the 



PHONETIC ANALYSIS. i/i 

reader must have discovered that the common orthography is very far 
from being a certain index of the sounds of words. If the combina- 
tion ough occurs in the common spelling, care must be taken, before 
attempting to write its phonetic equivalents, to ascertain whether it 
represents the sound of o as in though, of vf as in tough, of of as in cough, 
of up as in hiccough, of oil as in bough, of oo as in through. It must be 
remembered, that each common vowel letter has several different 
values, which must be distinguished by reference to their pronuncia- 
tion. A, for instance, has eight different sounds, it representing "e" 
as in mate, ' e' as in many, ' o' as in pare, ' a' as in it, ' u' as in. farm, 
i a' as in pass, ' ©' as in all, i o' as in ivhat. Which one of these sounds 
a represents in any particular word, the student must determine by 
carefully analyzing the spoken word. An analysis of the word repre- 
sented by farm, for instance, discovers that the letter a has a sound 
entirely different from the sound given it in naming the letter. 

165. The correct pronunciation of the words in the following exer- 
cises having been ascertained either by knowledge of the pronunciation 
of good speakers, or by reference to a pronouncing dictionary, they 
should be deliberately and distinctly pronounced several times, and 
then divided into their elements. Assistance will be derived from 
representing the analysis by means of phonetic longhand or shorthand 
signs. 

Exercise in Phonetic Analysis. 

166. Eesolve into their elements the following words : 

Aid, ail, air, ought, aught, eyed, owed, talk, food, height, shawl, 
edge, phthisic, Ptolemy, Thomas, George, John, sew, so, sow, Wright, 
rite, right, write, ail, ale, know, no, faint, feint, air, heir, bard, 
barred, all, awl, claws, clause, key, quay, meed, Mede, mead, caught, 
enough, sight, cite, site, limb, pique, bdellium, condemn, tongue, 
schism, I'll, aisle, isle, Xenia, czar, who, rode, rowed, road, hue, hew, 
Hugh, honor, ghost, chaise, side, sighed, wait, weight, chord, guard, 
quart, cent, scent, sent, sleigh, lack, brow, three, eighth, ease, aunt, 
weighed, straight, essay, buy, though. 

167. Key to the Preceding Exercise. 

S-d, 8-1, o-r, ©-t, Q-t, j-d, er-d, t-o-k, f-m-d, h-j-t, c-o-1, e-(j, 

tizik, Tolemi, Tomas, JDorc], X)on, s©\ ser, ser, E£t, rjt, rjt, rjt, el, 

el, n&, ner, fent, fent, or, or, bfird, burd, ©1, ©1, kl©z, kl©z, k.i, ki, 

mid, Mid, mid, kot enni, s£t, s[t, sjt, lim, pik, delyum, kondem, 

trirj, sizm, i'h jl, jl, Zinia, zer, hui, red, red, red, Jiil, Hi],, onor, 

gerst, cez, s^cl, s£d, wet, wet, k©rd, gord, kw©rt, sent, sent, sen 

sle, lak, brs, bra, etb, iz, ant, wed, stret, ese, bi, do-. 

3« 



THE 



COMPENDIUM 



OF 



STANDARD PHONOGRAPHY, 



PART SECOND 



OF THE 



]$ ani-i0ffk jorf StwtiarlJ $l]ffncrp!t|)l]3}« 



OOPTEIGHT 6ECU£*D. 



PREFACE. 



It ia believed that this Work presents the -principles of Standard Phonography ia 
§uch a form and manner as to place the art within the reach of every person who 
may desire to be possessed of the valuable advantages and benefits it is capable of 
conferring. 

The principal features of this Work are the following : 

1, It presents in coarse print only those matters which must necessarily be learned 
in order to write phonography at all. Thus is furnished the shortest possible course 
of phonographic study, while the entire work in connection with the other por* 
tions of the Hand-Book furnishes a course of study as thorough as can be desired, 
and one which is calculated to make of the student an accomplished phonographer. 

2. It is amply illustrated with phonographic letters and words, which have been 
cut with great accuracy and finish, and the imitation of which will tend to beauty 
of writing. 

8. It presents a system of phonographic Nomenclature, which furnishes the 
means of indicating, with the utmost precision, phonographic outlines, and their 
vocalization and position, and enables the pupil to avail himself of his experience 
in deriving the powers of letters from their names, as in the common spelling, and 
obviates the discouraging inconvenience and delay of learning to spell by making 
the separate sounds of the elements. 

4. It so classifies the principles, and presents them in such a manner, as both to 
facilitate their comprehension and materially assist the memory in their retention. 

5. It is nearly if not quite free from the ambiguities and the absolute errors of ex- 
pression which abounded in the works on the Old Phonography to such an extent 
as to discourage many a person from the study of the art they were intended to 
teach. 

6. It furnishes a series of carefully-considered questions on the text, which, whilo 
they adapt the work to the requirements of schools, make it a complete self- 
instructor. 

The Appendix furnishes a new and natural analysis of vocal elements; which 
analysis lays the. foundation for an orderly and convenient phonetic representation 



IV PREFACE. 

(shorthand, typic, and longhand), not only of foreign consonants and the minutest 
distinguishable divisions of vowels, but of many sounds of the voice, which, while 
they enter in some form into language, have not previously been provided with 
signs, nor furnished a place in a scientific inventory of vocal elements. . Not only 
does this department of the work, in connection with the explanation of Phonogra- 
phy as applied to the representation of English, furnish the linguistic student with a 
very valuable means of familiarizing more thoroughly than would otherwise be 
possible the pronunciation of a foreign language, by enabling him to give that pro 
nunciation a complete representation, as it were an embodiment, thus distinguish- 
ing it from the misleading orthography or dress,— but the very classification of the 
sounds is such that by means of it, and by a knowledge of the elements of his own 
language, he is enabled to attain (though it may be with considerable practice) the 
accurate pronunciation of foreign elements, whose correct pronunciation is rarely 
acquired, without the guidance of phonetic science, even under the instruction* 
of a mtive teacher. 

The Appendix also exhibits a plan for producing by means of the common types 
a very fair phonetic representation of English and the foreign languages, so that 
every author or printer who chooses may become a phonetic printer without the 
expense of phonotypes. 

ANDEEW J. GRAHAM. 

Fhokktio Depot, New Tokk, August 25YA 1858. 



ANALYSIS OF CONTENTS. 



PAGE 

Preface , , 3 

Introduction , 8 

Phonetic Alphabet 15 

Phonographic Alphabet 16 

SIMrLE-CCNSONANT SIGNS 19 

Mnemonic Assistance in Learning the ConsonantrSigns 20 

Manner of "Writing the Consonants 22 

Joining the Consonant-Strokes 24 

Brief Signs for S, Z, St, Str 26 

Word-Signs 29 

VOCALIZATION— SIMPLE TOWELS 35 

Towel-Signs 36 

Method of Placing the Towels in respect to the Order of Reading 40 

Position of Words 41 

Tocalization of Consonant-Strokes with Circles or Loops Attached 43 

Towel "Word-Signs 45 

Quality and Quantity of Unaccented Towels 4S 

PUNCTUATION, ACCENT, NUMBEKS, ETC. 

Punctuation 49 

Accent— Emphasis — Capitals 50 

Numbers , 51 

Initials— Titles— Proper Names 51 

Marks of Eeference, etc , 52 



VI ANALYSIS OF CONTENTS. 

PAGB 

VOCALIZATION-DIPHTHONGS. 

Definition, Enumeration, and Classification 53 

Close-Diphthong Signs 55 

Open-Diphthong Signs 56 

Diphthong Word-Signs and Contractions 57 

Method of Placing Vowels between Consonant-Strokes 59 

Method of Eeading "Words of Several Consonants 60 

Prefixes and Affixes — con, com, accom, ing, ings 61 

DIFFEEENT SIGNS AND DIEECTIONS. 

I. Different Modes of Expressing W and Y — 

1. By Strokes 63 

2. By Brief Signs Joined 64 

3. By Brief Signs in the Vowel-Places 66 

4. By a Eight Angle in the Vowel-Places ifO 

"Word-Signs and Contractions 70 

II. Different Modes of Expressing Aspiration 72 

1. Of Simple Vowels and Diphthongs 73 

2. Of the Way-Stroke 74 

3. Of the Brief Way 74 

Uses of the Hay-Stroke 75 

III. Different Modes of Expressing S and Z 76 

IV. Different Modes of Eepresenting E 76 

V. Different Directions of the Stroke for L 77 

VI. Different Directions of the Stroke for Sh 78 

GEOUP-CONSONANT SIGNS. 

There are five modes of modifying the primary letters to form Group- 
Consonant Signs: 1. By an initial hook ; 2. By a final hook ; 3. By wid- 
ening ; 4. By lengthening ; 5. By halving. 

I. Initial Hooks. 

1. The El-Hooks 79 

2. The Ar-Hooks 80 

3. The In-Hook 85 

4. The Eeporting Ler and Eel Hooks 86 

Initial-Hook Word-Signs and Contractions 86 

II. Final Hooks. 

1. Small Hooks for F, V, and N 89 



ANALYSIS OF CONTENTS. Vll 

PAGE 

2 Large Hooks for Shon and Tiv 92 

3. Small Hook for Shon 94 

III. Widening 98 

IV. Lengthening 99 

Y. Halving. 

1. To Add either T or D 101 

2. To Add T to a Light, or D to a Heavy, Sign 102 

Use of the Halving Principle , 105 

Half-Length "Word-signs 106 

Half-Length Contractions 108 

CONTEACTIONS AND EXPEDIENTS. 

I. Imperfect Expression. 

1. Word-Signs and Contractions 109 

2. Contracted Prefixes 109 

8. Contracted Affixes ,. „ . s 116 

4. Omission of Consonants 120 

5. Omission of Towels 123 

II. Joining Parts of Words. 

1. Certain Towel-Signs Joined to Consonants 124 

2. Joining Affix and Prefix Signs 125 

III. Joining Words— Phrase-Writing 125 

Position of Phrase-Signs. 

1. Determined by the First Word 126 

2. Determined by the Second Word 128 

IT. Omission of Words 128 

LISTS OF WOED-SIGNS AND CONTEACTIONS OF THE COEEE- 
6PONDING STYLE. 

List of Word-Signs 182 

List of Sign Words 136 

List of Contractions 144 

Exercise on the Word-Signs and Contractions 145 

THE EEPOETING STYLE 147 

The Eeporter's Eule of Position 147 

Enlarged Way and Yay 149 

Lengthened Straight Lines 150 



Vlll ANALYSIS OF CONTENTS. 

PAGE 

Eeporting Word-Signs— Arranged for the Use of the Eeader 152 

Eeporting Sign-Words— Arranged for the Use of the Writer 170 

Eeporting Contractions 183 

Distinctions 194 

"Words Distinguished by Difference of Outline or Position 195 

Eeporting Word-Sign for « I > 198 

The THer-Tick 198 

Phrase-Writing 198 

Numbers 193 

Eeferences, Eepetitions, Omissions, Doubt, Punctuation, Materials for 
Writing 199 

APPENDIX. 

Excursus A.— An Extended Phonetic Alphabet— Stenographic, Script, 
andTypic S03 



INTRODUCTION. 



INTRODUCTION TO PHONOGRAPHY AND PHONOTYPY. 

In order to remove the usual difficulties which arise in the study of 
phonography in consequence of incorrect ideas induced by the com- 
mon imperfect orthography, the Author of this treatise has prepared a 
work entitled Introduction to Phonotypy and Phonography, which the 
student is advised to peruse carefully before commencing the study of 
this volume. Those who may not be possessed of that work should 
the more carefully read what may be said in these pages about the 
elementary sounds and the mode of arriving at their separate pro- 
nunciation. 

STENOGRAPHIC AND PHONOGRAPHIC ALPHABETS. 

Most of the old systems of stenography provided signs corresponding 
to the letters of the present imperfect alphabet. On the other hand, 
the system of phonetic shorthand, explained in the subsequent pages, 
entirely dispenses with both the common alphabet and the imperfect 
mode of spelling resulting from its employment, and furnishes a 
series of the simplest possible signs, exactly corresponding to, and co- 
extensive with, the simple and proximate elements which a careful 
analysis discovers in the English language. 

SIMPLE AND PROXIMATE ELEMENTS. 

A searching analysis reveals the fact that the large number of words 
constituting the English language are made up of about thirty-eight 
simple, indivisible sounds, or elements. Six double sounds or diph- 
thongs increase the number of simple and proximate elements to forty- 
four ; for the representation of which the common alphabet provides 
but twenty-six letters. The phonographic and phonotypic alphabets, 
>n the other hand, contain a distinct letter for each element. 

FAMILIARITY WITH THE ELEMENTS AND THEIR PHONOGRAPHIC SIGNS. 

The first business of the student of phonography is to become ac- 
quainted with the phonographic signs and the sounds they represent. 

1* 



X INTRODUCTION. 

However easy it may be to pronounce the elements of speech when 
connected in words, to most persons who have not been accustomed to 
vocal analysis, the separate pronunciation of the elements is quite 
difficult. 

A knowledge of the distinct sounds of the language, and the mode 
of producing them, is best acquired by the aid of oral instruction. 
However, when this aid can not be procured, no serious difficulty will 
be experienced in attaining the necessary knowledge, if the student 
will carefully observe the distinction between signs and the sounds 
they represent — bear in mind that the phonographic signs in the fol- 
lowing phonographic alphabet do not stand for the italic letters in the 
words beneath them, but for the sounds indicated by the italic letters in 
those words ; and that these signs or their equivalents occur invariably 
for these sounds, however they may be represented in the common 
orthography. To arrive at these sounds, the student, having carefully 
pronounced the illustrative words and observed the mode of producing 
the particular sound required, should drop all the sounds but the one 
indicated by the italic letter or letters. To illustrate more particularly : 
To . arrive at the sound indicated by J , the word ' to ' having been 
distinctly and slowly pronounced, and the mode of producing the 
sound indicated by t observed, the other element should be gradually 
separated from the t ; and, finally, being entirely dropped, the separate 
sound of t will be heard. Now be it especially observed that the phono- 
graph | , or its equivalent, represents this sound, however it may be 
denoted in the common orthography ; whether by tt as in Pitt, ct as in 
indict, ed as in looked, th as in Thomas, phth as in phthisic ; pt as in ptyalism, 
or cht as in yacht. It is better to name this sign by its sound rather 
than by the syllable Tee. So also the sign ( — ) is best named by the 
sound of g in gain ; but if a syllable-name is applied at all, it should be 
Gay, and not Jee, which would lead to error. 

MATERIALS FOR WRITING. 

Euled paper should always be employed for phonographic writing. 
In his early practice, the double-line paper will afford the pupil 
assistance in determining the proper length and proportion of the 
letters. A good steel pen is usually preferred to gold pens for fine 
phonographic writing. The Author has made use of the finest steel 
pens, for a number of years, even for reporting purposes. The student 
is recommended to make use of a pen from the very commencement 
of his writing, as it leads to an accuracy and beauty of writing that 
would very rarely be acquired with the use of the pencil. Contrary 
to what is generally supposed, a pen is to be preferred to a pencil, 
for rapid writing, especially by those who accustom themselves to 



INTRODUCTION. XI 

the use of a pen on all convenient occasions. Occasional practice 
with a pencil, however, is recommended, for the purpose of accustom- 
ing the hand to its use, as the writer may sometimes be so situated 
that the employment of pen and ink would be exceedingly incon- 
venient. "When pencils are employed, they should be of a fine quality 
of drawing-pencils.. Faber's No. 3, it is believed, is best adapted 
to phonographic writing. Soft and rather rough paper should be em- 
ployed for pencil practice. Very much of the beauty of phonographic 
manuscript depends upon the quality of the ink employed. Pale 
and corrosive inks are to be avoided. 

METHOD OF HOLDING THE PEN. 

The best and most rapic phonographic writers, for the most part, 
hold the pen the same as for ordinary writing. Some, however, 
have supposed that ease of phonographic writing is best secured by 
holding the pen or pencil between the first and second fingers, the 
thumb being employed in controlling the pen, as in the ordinary 
mode. Whether this is the best method or not, the occasional use of 
it will serve to relieve the muscles when they become fatigued in 
holding the pen in the ordinary position. The position given to the 
pen and hand in backhand writing, seems best adapted for the easy and 
graceful formation of phonographic characters. The pen should be 
held very loosely, so that the nib may be readily turned and suited to 
the execution of characters made in various directions. 

METHOD OF STUDY. 

The student, having familiarized the phonographic consonant signs 
by repeatedly copying them from the following alphabet, and by 
availing himself of the mnemonic assistance contained in a following 
chapter, entitled "Aid in Learning the Consonant Signs," is advised 
to adopt the following method of study : Having learned, by reference 
to the first exercise in the Phonographic Beading Exercises, what sec- 
tions of the Compendium are referred to as preparatory to the use of 
that exercise, turn to those sections and make yourself thoroughly 
conversant with all the statements contained in the coarse print, 
testing your knowledge by means of the questions at the bottom of 
each page. As soon as all the questions referring to the coarse print 
can be readily and certainly answered, read, several times through, 
the whole portion (including the fine print) to which reference is made. 
Then answer all the questions referring to the sections read. Next 
turn to the first phonographic reading exercise, and read it several 
times through, seeking to have a perfect understanding of every thing 
therein contained. If any difficulty is experienced here, the student 



Xll INTRODUCTION. 

should attribute it to his failure to comply strictly with the preceding 
instruction ; and, if he will accept advice of vital importance to his 
success in the study of phonography, he will carefully review the 
sections referred to, and assure himself, once for all, that their prin- 
ciples are thoroughly fixed in his memory. The exercise having been 
read several times, should be repeatedly copied, care being taken to 
make the signs as nearly as possible like those of the exercise, rather 
than to write rapidly. Next turn to the first writing exercise, and re- 
peatedly write in phonography the letters and words there given. The 
same course should be pursued with all the subsequent exercises. 
Previous, however, to commencing another exercise, benefit will be de- 
rived from a careful review of the sections to which the first exercise 
refers. 

Phonographic teachers should assign sucn a number of these exer- 
cises for each lesson as will be necessary to bring all the principles they 
propose to teach, within the course of lessons. The most rapid pro- 
gress will be made by assigning brief lessons at the commencement of 
the course, and until the pupil has become thoroughly grounded in the 
fundamental principles of the system, when his lessons may be made 
to embrace a greater number of exercises. There should never be an 
attempt to embrace more principles in a series of lessons than the pupil 
can perfectly master. Eather, lay the foundation for his further suc- 
cessful study of phonography in private, by teaching only as many 
principles as can be thoroughly familiarized in the proposed course of 
instruction. Otherwise the pupil will become confused, and hindered 
in his progress, if not discouraged from the further study of the art. 

The course of study here recommended is such as will result in the 
attainment, in the shortest possible time, of a thorough knowledge 
of phonography, and the ability to use it with freedom and accuracy. 
The chief benefits of phonography can be secured only by becoming 
entirely conversant with its principles and the established phono- 
graphic outlines for words. This requires considerable study and 
practice ; yet, if the pupil will follow the directions of this work, he 
will find himself possessed of an art which he will deem almost in- 
valuable, and that, too, with considerably less study than is required 
for the attainment of any one of the usual branches of education, 
which would be of inferior service. 

The present work has been written with the view of placing a 
thorough knowledge of this very valuable art within the possession of 
every person who is willing to make an effort any way proportionate 
to the good he desires. While the Author has endeavored to remove 
every needless difficulty in the attainment of phonography, and 
labored to provide the student with every assistance which the ex- 



INTRODUCTION. Xlll 

tensive practice and teaching of phonography have suggested to him, 
he has had no hope of making it so simple and easy as to bring it 
within the comprehension of that pitiable class of minds, who are so 
averse to intellectual exertion that nothing is acquired by them which, 
so to speak, may not be comprehended at a glance ; and who, even 
though they may be so fortunate as to possess considerable natural 
brilliancy of talent, prove entirely deficient when compared, by a just 
standard, with those who have not perhaps been fortunately endowed 
by nature with any remarkable intellectual ability, but who have had 
the spirit to work perseveringly with the moderate talent which has 
fallen to their lot, for the accomplishment of whatever object may 
have seemed to them desirable ; and whose mental acquisitions will 
eventually give them a power and intellectual position which genius, 
however brilliant, unaccompanied by mental application, can not hope 
to equal. 

DEFINITIONS. 

Pho-net'ics, Phon'ics, or Pho-noi/o-gy, noun. 1. A science which 
treats of the elements of language, their modifications, and their rela- 
tions. 2. The science of representing the elements of language. 

Pho-net'ic, adj. Denoting sounds, as phonetic writing or printing. 
Pertaining to phonetics, as phonetic journals or books. 

Pho-net'ic- al-ly, adv. In a manner expressive of sounds or letters, 
as to write or print phonetically. 

Pho'no-type, noun. 1. A type to be used in printing the sign of a 
vocal element. 2. The sign produced by the type. 

Pho'n6-type, verb. To print with phonotypes ; to print phonetic- 
ally, that is, with a sign for each element of the voice, — no more, no 
less. 

Pho-not'yp-y, noun. 1. The printing produced with phonotypes — 
printing, in which each element of language is represented by a 
distinct letter or type. 2. The mode or system of printing phonet- 
ically. 

Pho'no-graph, noun. The graphic, or written sign, of a vocal element. 

Pho'no-graph, verb. To write with phonographs. 

Pho-nog'raph-er, noun. A writer of phonography. 

Pho-no-graph'ic, adj. 1. Belonging, or pertaining, to phonogra- 
phy, as a phonographic sign, exercise, book, or journal. 

Pho-nog'raph-y, noun. 1. The system of representing language 
with phonographs. 2. The writing produced with phonographs. There 
are two kinds of phonography : 

(1.) Phonetic Longhand, or Longhand Phonography, writing pro- 
duced with a phonetic alphabet consisting of most of the ordinary 



XIV INTRODUCTION. 

script letters and additional ones of the same general character for the 
additional sounds. 

(2.) Sten'o-pho-nog'raph-y, or Phonetic Shorthand : writing pro- 
duced with an alphabet composed of very simple signs. Of this there 
are two kinds : 

(a) Old, or English, Phonography : a system of shorthand, the 
general features of which were invented by Mr. Isaac Pitman, of 
England. Its tolerable perfection is due to the fact that its improve- 
ment has been contributed to by numerous persons who have prac- 
ticed it. This system has not a sufficiency of signs for a perfectly 
phonetic representation. 

(b) Standard, or American, Phonography : a system of shorthand 
writing, which, in its general features, resembles the English Phonog- 
raphy, but possesses many advantages over it. 

Romanic Print, the printing produced by the Roman types or let- 
ters. This term applies to the printing of all the European nations 
who use the Roman alphabet. 

R031ANIC, or Common, Orthography. The ordinary mode of spelling, 
or representing language. Eeiero1fyp-y is sometimes used as an equiv- 
alent term. 






ANDREW J. GRAHAM'S PHONETIC ALPHABET. 



Note.— The sound of each letter is shown by the italic letter or letters in the word 
opposite or beneath it. The " superiors" refer to the scripts of the new letters. 



I 


a 1 


e 


8 * 


a 


ii 8 


o 


Q* 


a 


0.5 


uj 


Ul 6 



Long Vowels. 
eat, lear 
ale (air) 
arm 

all, form 
ope (whole) 
food 



1 

!l 


i 


B 


e 


A 


a 








U 


dT 


u 


u 



Short Vowels. 
ft 

e]l (her) 
ask (at) 
not, on 
un, cur 
foot, full 



CONSONANTS. 



I E. b 9 

ttrjio 
C c 

J i 



tfAin. 
siwgr. 

ooean, s/iall. 
visf'on, z7*. 



and in their usual sense, 



b, d, f, g, h, k, 

be, do, foe, go, he, Jcej, 

1, m, n, p, r, s, 

let, me, no, vp, roar, so, 

t> v, w, j, z. — 

to, vie, we, ye, zeal. — 



Diphthongs. 



Double 
letters. 


Single 
letters. 


ai 


* i n 


01 


e e 12 


ou 


"S"** 


iu 


xjh 14 


dj 


X»^5 


tc 


5 16 



aisle, ffnd 
ofl, hoy 
out, now 
new, mute 
ed-ge, join 
et~ch, chin. 



E 


Op 
17 


A 


a is 


E 


B 19 





e 20 


Q 


q 



Optional Letters. 



air, where 

at, an 

her, b/rd 

whole 

or hw =s wh in when ; 

thus, " qen" or " hwen." 



12Ee3 4 50o6 7 

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 

%b %A p?, ff, <Pp V*, %Sf, £&£ 

IT 18 A a 

& &j tS& at, ^Sr a, 

Transition Phonottpy.— Phonotypy closely resembling the genuine, may 
be produced, with the common types, by substituting 

j 13 A or a o b ui v th or dh, th, ng for 

iefioeruin d brj 



1G 



19 20 



STANDARD PHONOGRAPHIC ALPHABET. 









CoNh 


ON" A NTS 








p 


b 


t 


cl 


Cj=*C 


<]=4i 


k 


g 


\ 


\ 


1 


1 


/ 


/ 





— 1 


pay 


fay 


to 


do 


etch 


edr/e 


ram 


yam ! 



f 

1 

r 

fie 



v t) 

^ ( 
vie thin 

r 
roar 



d s z c 

( )° )• J 

then see zee she 



J 

zhe 



m 



me 



no 



sing 



ice 



J 
2/g 




h 

he 



c-o 



Long Vowels. 
r» o 



cr-0 



ui 



eat age (air) arm. 



ohe (whole) food 



e-B 



Short Vowels 
a-a o 



u 



it edge (her) ask (at) on tip, cur foot 



Note— The sound of each si^n is shown by the phonotype above it, and by the 
italic letter or letters in the word or words beneath it. The vowels of parenthetic 
words are provided with distinct signs, whose use is optional. • 



STAND AH D PHONOGRAPHIC ALPHABET, 



Optional. Vowel-Signs. 

o a b o 

,1 ,1 'I ^1 

air at her wliol< 



Close Diphthongs. 



ai= i 


oi = e 


OU = "S" 


v l 


A 1 


J 


a/sle=^sle 


oil, hoy 


out, now 




Open Dj 


PHTHONGS. 


Bl oi 


ii ci 


ai ere 



1U = ii 



de«>=d 



we 



era un 



<?ye sowing Deity clayey snowy Owen "Noah ~Louis 



W with Vowels. 



.i i b e b o a b a o o o* o jj ui u j o *s 

c l 1 -I =1 "I d J J d 3 I 1 H H H J ,1 1 1 ,1 



Y with Vowels. 
a i 8 e b o a c a oo aouinujo^ 

I 1 1 »l H -I J J 1 1 J 



Eutered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1857, by ANDREW J. GRAHAM, iu the 

Clerk's Office of the. District Court or the United States for 

the Southern District of New Yoik. 



THE COMPENDIUM. 



SIMPLE-CONSONANT SIGNS. 

§ 1. A Consonant may be defined as a sound made either by a com- 
plete or partial contact of the vocal organs, obstructing the whispered 
or sonant breath, in some degree, varying from an entire break or stop- 
page of it (as in producing the sound of p or b) to a simple aspiration 
(as the sound of h in hate). 

Rem. 1. It is convenient as well as usual to employ the term Consonant to denote 
both a certain kind of sound and its sign, though, in strictness, the sign of a conso- 
nant should be called a Consonant-sign. 

Rem. 2. The proximate elements ch (=t-sh), j (=d-zh) are, for stenographic 
reasons, treated as simple elements, and provided with simple signs. 



CLASSIFICATION OF THE 


CONSONANTS. 








§ 2. The characteristics and relationships of the consonants 


are exhibited 


in tho 


following table. 










Group. Utterance. Labial. 


Dental. Palatal. 


Guttural. 


_ . _ j Whispered p 
Explodents \ Sonant b 


t 

d 






k 
S 


_ . j Whispered . . f th 
Continuants j gonant .. v Tn 


s 
z 


sh 
zh 






Liquids Sonant 


1 


r 






Nasals Sonant m 


n 






ng 


_ , S Whispered wh 
Semi-vowels 1 _ \ 

I Sonant w 




(ny) 

y 






Aspirate Whispered 








h 


Rem. 1. The Explodents are so named because of their 


explosive 


character 


They are sometimes termed Abrupts. 











§ 1. What is a consonant ? What is the sound of p? tt Jc? s? I ? If these sounds 
are consonants, how are they determined to be such ? [Remarks.] How is tho 
term Consonant usually employed ? What, in strictness, should the sign of a conso- 
nant be called ? What proximate elements are provided with simple signs ? What 
are the elements of the sounds of ch and j t 

§ 2. How many Explodents are there in the English language ? How many Con- 
tinuants? Liquids? Nasals? Semi-vowels? How many Sonants ? How many Con- 
tinuants are whispered ? Are the liquids whispered or spoken ? Are the sounds of 
n, m, n g, whispered or spoken? Are. the sounds of w and y whispered or sonant? 
Produce the whisper corresponding to the sonant wt How many Labials aro 



20 



THE COMPENDIUM 



Eem. 2. The Continuants are so called because they are capable of being pro* 
longed ; as, for instance, the sound of ss, as in 7riss. These sounds are sometimes 
denominated Semi-vowels, but very improperly. 

Eem. 3. The third group of consonants are called Liquids, because of the readi- 
ness with which they unite with other consonants, as va. play, pray, flee, free, etc. 

Eem. 4. The Nasals derive their name from the fact that, in their production, the 
breath is required to be emitted through the nose (Latin nasus). 

Eem. 5. Semi-vowels are so named because they possess nearly perfect vocality. 

Eem. 6. The Aspirate derives its name from the fact that its production requires 
the full emission of the breath, the word Aspirate being a derivative from the Latin 
asjriro, to blow 

Eem. 7. The term Sonant is employed to denote those consonants which are 
spoken, or which require an undertone, or murmur, in their production. 

Eem. 8. "Whispers are those consonants which require the breath simply, to be 
emitted in their production. 

Eem. 9. The terms Labial, Dental, Palatal, Guttural, in the preceding table, 
denote that the consonants arranged under them are produced by contacts at the 
lips, teeth, palate, and throat. 



MNEMONIC ASSISTANCE IN LEABNING THE CONSONANT- 
SIGNS. 

§ 3. The student will be assisted in committing the consonant-signs to memory 
by supposing, with reference to the following diagram : 




\\rdi //— k 



v. ■ V. ( ( ) ) J U 



F 



Th TH 



SH ZII. 



there? What are they? How many Dentals ? Pronounce them. How many Palat- 
als? Pronounce them. How many Gutturals? Pronounce them. [Eem.] What 
kind of consonant is denoted by the term Explodents ? What kind, by the term 
Continuants? by the term Liquids? by the term Nasals? by the term Semi-vowels? 
"Why is the sound of h called an Aspirate ? What kind of consonants is denoted by 
the term Sonants ? What kind, by the term Whispers ? 
§ 3. Why do the signs of p and & proceed, in the Diagram, from the lips ? Why 



SIMPLE-CONSONANT SIGNS. 21 

1. P and B.— That the signs of P and B proceed from the lips, because their 
sounds are produced by a contact of the lips. 

2. T and D.— That the signs of T and D are placed upright at the teeth, because 
these sounds are produced with a contact of the Tongue and Teeth. 

3. CH and J.— That the signs of CH and J are inclined midway between T and K, 
because in part formed with a contact midway between the T and K contacts. 

4. K and G.— That the signs for K and G are placed at the throat, because these 
sounds are produced with a contact at that point. 

5. F and V. — That the signs of F and V are written in the same direction as the 
sign for P, because their sounds are produced in part with the lips. 

6. Th and S.— That the signs for Th and S are written in the direction of the sign 
for T, because the sounds of Th and S are produced by a partial contact at the 
teeth. 

7. SH and ZII.— That the signs of SH and ZH are written in the direction of the 
signs for CH and J, because these sounds are the final elements of these compound 
sounds. See § 1, Pern. 2. 

§ 4. L and E. — The curve signs for L and E may be regarded respectively as the 
Left and Eight portions of an arch : 




§ 5. "W.— The stroke and brief signs of W may be regarded as portions of a script 
"W, as in the following figures ,* 



CV./- "-\A/0 



§ 6. Y.— The stroke and brief signs of Y may be regarded as portions of a script 
Y in its natural and inverted positions, as in the following figures : 



a 



§ 7. T and D.— The signs of T and D may be regarded as the upright straight 
lines of 

T, D. 



are the signs of t and d placed upright at the teeth ? "Why are the signs of eh and,?' 
inclined midway between the signs of t and k ? "Why are the signs for &, g placed 
at the throat? Why are the signs of /and v written in the same direction as the 
sign for p ? Why are the signs for th and s written in the direction of the sign for t ? 
"Why are the signs for sh and zh written in the direction of the signs of ch and J t 

§ 4. How may the curve-signs for I and r be remembered ? 

§ 5. How may the signs for %o be remembered ? 

§ 6. How may the signs for y be recalled ? 

§ 7. Of what common letters may the signs for i and d be considered a portion? 



22 THE COMPENDIUM. 

§ 8. CH and J. -The sign of J may be regarded as an abbreviated J. The sign 
of CH, the kindred sound, should, of course, be written by a light sign in the same 
direction. 



MANNER OF WRITING THE CONSONANTS. 

§ 9. Each stroke consonant-sign is to be written in the direction 
of one of the lines of the following diagram : 



the lines in the first and third directions being inclined midwaj 
between a vertical and a horizontal line. 

§ 10. Perpendicular letters, and those inclined to the left, are al- 
ways written downward. 

§ 11. Horizontal letters are written from left to right. 

§ 12. Of signs inclined to the right, some are written downward, 
and some upward. 

1. / ch, / j, f y, and _J zh are always written down- 
ward. 

2. (a) When standing alone, _J sh is always written downward. (6) 
When joined with other stroke-signs it may be writen upward or 
downward, as may be most convenient ; thus _y] shd, J__ shk. 

3. (a) When standing alone, f~ 1 is always written upward, (b) 

§ 8. What letter abbreviated gives the phonograph for Jt 

§ 9. In how many, and in what, directions are the consonant-signs written ? How 
much are those in the first and third directions inclined ? 

§ 10. How are perpendicular letters, and those inclined to the left, to be written ? 
How should you write the stroke for p? ft wt How should the curve for r be 
written ? the sign for vt dt 

§ 11. How are the horizontals written ? 

§ 12. How are the signs inclined to the right to be written ? How is ch to be 
written ? zh ? j ? the stroke for y ? How is the sign for sh to be written ? Is it 
ever written upward? In what cases may it be written upward? How is it to be 
written when standing alone ? Write some outline with the upward sh. Write sh 
downward, and join it with£> — with Jc. How is the sign for I to be written ? Is it 
ever written downward ? When must it be invariably written upward ? How is it 
to be written when standing alone? When joined with other strokes, may it be 
written downward ? How is the straight sign for r to be written ? At what incli- 
nation is it to be written, when standiDg alone? How is it distinguished from ch, 
when joined, with other signs? How, waen standing alone? Show how r-p is 



SIMPLE-CONSONANT SIGNS. 23 

When joined with other stroke-signs, it may be written upward or 
downward, according to convenience ; thus. f\ Id, ^^ lm, (~ lng. 

4. (a) The straight sign for r is invariably written upward, — and, 
when standing alone, at an inclination of thirty degrees, (b) It is thus 

distinguished from / ch, which, when standing alone, is written at 

an inclination of sixty degrees, (c) When ch and the straight line for r 
are joined to other stroke-signs, they are distinguished by their direc- 
tions ; ch being always written downward^ while r is invariably writ- 
ten upward ; thus, yi rch, J/ chr, /\ rt, f cht. 

5. The h-stroke is invariably written upward. 

Rem. 1. A sign is always to be regarded as standing alone, unless it is joined 
with some other sign by which its direction may be determined. 

Eem. 2. There is but one exception in Phonography to the rule that all heavy 
perpendicular and sloping strokes must be written downward. 

Eem. 3. No difficulty is experienced in giving different inclinations to ch and up- 
ward r; because the common writing has accustomed the hand to making the up- 
ward strokes more inclined than the downward ones. 

PHONOGRAPHIC GEOGRAPHY. 

§ 13. Benefit will be derived from describing geographically the direction of the 
straight lines and the direction of the convexity of the curves. To illustrate, the 
Teacher may say P, and the Student answer, South-east, light. Teacher— i?. Stu- 
dent—South-east, heavy.— Teacher — F. Student (describing the direction of the 
convexity) — South-west, light. The h-stroke may be described as ' North east, 
hooked.' 

NAMES OP THE CONSONANT-SIGNS. 

§ 14. From first to last, the learner who wishes to make the surest and most rapid 
progress, should name the signs by their sounds, or by the following syllables : Pee, 

distinguished from ch-p. Show how p with the straight r joined, is distinguished 
from p-ch. How is the h-stroke written ? [Rem.] When is a sign to be regarded 
as standing alone ? In what direction, as a general rule, are the heavy sloping 
strokes to be made ? Why is it easy to make an upward r more sloping than the 
sign for ch ? 

§ 13. Describe, geographically, the direction of the straight-line signs, and the 
direction of the convexity of the curves. What is the direction of p t ch ? of 
upward rt of t? of ht What is the direction of the convexity of ft mt ngt sh? 
1 1 downward r t 

§ 14. What are the best names for the phonographic signs ? What syllable- 
names are recommended to be used when the signs are not named by their sounds ¥ 
What is the name for the sign of I when written upward ? What sign is denoted by 
the syllable Ray ? by Lay ? Write Pee, Ef, Zee, Chay, Ish, Lay, Gay, lng, Ith, 
Zee, Way, Hay, Yay. [Rem.] How is the brief sign for w to be distinguished, by 
name, from the stroke-sign ? Write Weh. Write Wuh. What is the name for the brief 
sign of yt Write Yeh — Yuh. What is the name of the s-circle ? How is it named 
when joined at the beginning of Pee? How should it be named when written at 
the end of Eay ? How must it be named when joined at the beginning of Bee ? 



21 THE COMPENDIUM. 

Bee, Tee, Dee, Chay, Jay, Kay, Gay, Ef, Yee, Ith, Thee, Es, Zee, Ish, Shay (for up- 
ward sh), Zhay, El (for the downward 2), Lay (for the upward I), Ar (for the 
downward r), Eay (for the upward r), Em, En, Ing, Way, Yay, Hay. 

Eem. 1. The brief sign for w may be named Weh. If it is deemed advisable to 

distinguish by name between c and :> , the first may be named Weh, and the 

second, Wuh. 

Eem. 2. The brief sign for y may be named Teh. If it should seem desirable to 

distinguish « from ^ by name, the first may be called Yeh, and the second 
Yuh. 

Eem. 3. The circle for s and z may be named Iss, when its sound can not be con- 
veniently spoken in one syllable with the name of the stroke to which it is joined. 
For example, Pee with Iss joined at the beginning may be called Spee ; Chay wiih 
Iss joined at the end, may be named Chays ; but Bee with Iss at the beginning, 
must be named Iss-Bee, because it would be difficult to say Sbee. 

SIZE OF THE CONSONANT-STROKES. 

§ 15. The learner should make the consonant-strokes about one sixth of an inch 
in length, as in these pages. The practiced phonographer may advantageously 
reduce them to one eighth of an inch, as in the Phonographic Eeading Exercises. 
(b) Beauty of phonographic writing requires that the light lines should be very 
light; that the heavy lines should be barely distinguishable from the light signs; 
that the heavy curves should gradually taper to a fine line. — (c) To lay the foundation 
of good phonographic penmanship, it is necessary that the phonographs should, 
for a considerable time, be written with the utmost care. Do not attempt, at first, 
to write rapidly, but well. Speed in phonographic writing is the result principally 
of familiarity with phonographic letters and principles. 



JOINING THE CONSONANT-STEOKES. 

§ 16. All the consonants in a word should "be written without tak- 
ing off the pen, the second sign commencing where the first ends, the 
third being continued from the end of the second, and so on ; thus, 

\__ pk, ^^V nv, / rg, V' nj, ^f kml. 

CONSONANT-SIGNS REPEATED. 

§ 17. Two consonant-strokes of the same kind occurring together 
are written thus : 

gg, ^-v^ mm, ww nn. 

§ 15. What length should the learner make the consonant-strokes ? To what 
length may they be reduced by the practiced writer ? For beauty of writing, how 
should the light lines be made ? the heavy lines ? the heavy curves ? 

§ 16. Eepeat the directions for writing the consonants of a word. Should the pen 
be taken off in making the consonants of a word ? Where should the second con* 
sonant of a word begin ? 

§ 17. Write m-m, n-n, k-k, j-j, p-p, t-t, f-f, b-b. 



SIMPLE-CONSONANT SIGNS. 25 

POSITION OF WORDS. 

1. With Perpendicular or Sloping Strokes. 

§ 18. The first perpendicular or inclined stroke of a consonant out- 
line should rest upon the line of writing ; thus, 

/\ *p, .ZZ k J> -^^]- nvt, "\_ rg. 

2. Composed entirely of Horizontal Strokes. 

§19. Until otherwise instructed, the learner should write upon the 
line all words composed entirely of horizontal consonants. 

CAUTION. — ORDER OF READING THE STROKES. 

§ 20. It will sometimes happen that a stroke which is further along 

than another in the line of writing must be read first ; thus, 1 is 

i-ch and not r-t. 

(b) Tee is known to be the first letter, because, according to § 18, the first perpen- 
dicular or sloping stroke should rest upon the line ; and the second sign is known 
to be Chay and not Eay, because as Tee must be made downward, and Eay up- 
ward, they could not be joined as above without violating the'rule of § 16. 

MODE OF JOINING CERTAIN STROKES. 

§ 21. There should always be an angle between Ef and En, Yee and En; and in 

similar combinations ; thus, v_^_y vn. 

§ 22. The novitiate phonographer will generally make an angle between Pee and 
En, Ith and En, and in similar cases ; but the advanced writer will unite these 
letters without an angle. In his writing Ef will flow, as it were, into Kay ; Tee into 
Ef , Lay into Ar ; and Lay into the downstrokes Es and Ish. The correct mode 
of making these combinations is exhibited in the following examples : 

I r^ o o 

pn, thn, fk, df, lr, Is, lsh. 

§ 18. Where should the first perpendicular or inclined stroke of an outline rest ? 
"Which stroke of Eay-Gay should rest upon the line ? of Em-Zee ? of Em-Chay ? 
Of Lay-Kay, where must Kay be written ? — on or above the line ? Where must Em 
be written, in writing Em-Ray, in order to have the sloping stroke rest upon the 
line ? 

§ 19. Where, till further instructions are given, should words composed entirely of 
horizontal strokes be written ? Should Em-Kay be written on or above the line ? 
If on the line, why ? Where should En-Kay be written ? En-Em ? 

§ 20. Which stroke of a word should be read first ? Write Chay-Tee ? Which 
should be read first, Chay or the Tee ? How do you know that the Tee is not made 
first, and therefore to be read first ? How do you know the upper stroke is not Eay, 
instead of Chay ? 

§ 21. What is said in respect of the junction of Ef and En, of Pee and En, of Ith 
and En? How should the practiced writer unite Pee and En and Ith or En ?- 
with or without an angle ? 

§22. Write, according to directions, Ef-Kay ; Tee-Ef; Lay-Ar; Lay-Es; Lay-Ish. 

2 



26 THE COMPENDIUM. 

§ 23. Heavy and Light Lines Joined.— k. heavy line when joined, without a dis- 
tinct angle, to a light line, should taper toward the point of union, and be so joined 
that no precise point of junction shall be discernible ; thus, 

d*i X X pb, V fg. 

§ 24. Heavy Curves Joined to Heavy Straight Lines.— A heavy curve joined, 
without a distinct angle, to a heavy straight line, should not taper toward the point 
of junction, but should be written as in the following examples : 

\^ bn S> V. Vg, I dv. 

§ 25. Variation of Inclination and Curvature.— {a) The inclination of the sloping 
consonants may be considerably varied in order to secure an easy junction with a 
preceding or following stroke, (b) The ease of junction between signs joined at an 
angle is in proportion to the acuteness of the angle. Hence, the junction becomes 
easier between Pee and Tee, or Tee and Pee, by giving more than ordinary inclina- 
tion to Pee ; between Kay and Pee, or Pee and Kay, by inclining Pee less than 
usual, (c) The acuteness of the angles and consequent ease of junction in words 
containing curves, is considerably affected by variations in the curvature of the 
uirve-signs ; thus, the junction between Em and Tee is rendered easier by making 
Em nearly straight ; while Em requires to be considerably curved for ease of junc- 
tion with a preceding or following Kay. 



BRIEF SIGNS FOE S AND Z.— LOOPS AND LARGE CIRCLE. 





§ 26. On account of the frequent occurrence of the sounds of s, z, 
they are furnished with brief signs, o , o , which are particularly 
convenient for joining. 

§ 23. How is a heavy line to be made, when joined, without a distinct angle, to a 
light line ? "Write, according to directions, Dee-Tee ; Tee-Dee ; Kay-Gay ; Bee- 
Pee ; Gay-Ar; Ar-Dee; Ith-Gay ; Em-Bee; Dee-Ef; Chay-Jay; Bee-En. 

§ 24. How is a heavy curve-sign to be written, when joined, without a distinct 
angle, to a heavy straight line ? "Write, according to directions, Bee- Ing ; Vee- 
Gay; Dee-Vee. 

§ 25. Is it allowable to vary the inclination of a sloping stroke ? For what pur- 
pose is the inclination ever varied? How else is the ease of junction increased? 
How is the ease of junction between two consonants joined at an angle measured ? 
Is the curvature of the curve-signs ever varied ? If so, for what purpose ? In 
joining Em and Tee, should the Em be made straighter or more curved than usual, 
for convenience of junction? In joining En and Kay, would you make the En 
straighter or more curved than usual, for convenience of junction ? Why would 
you make it more curved ? 

§ 26. Make the brief signs for s and z. Why are brief signs provided for the 
sounds of s and z? For what are these signs particularly convenient? [Item.] 
Does any confusion result from employing a light circle for s and zt When a dis- 
tinction is desired between s and s, how may it be made, with the use of the circle? 



SIMPLE-CONSONANT SIGNS. 27 

Eem. No inconvenience or confusion, except in rare cases, is found to result 
from the common practice among phonographers of employing the light circle for z 
&s well as s ; because we are already accustomed to this confusion of signs in the 
common print. "When necessary, as in distinguishing ' the loss of a kingdom' from 
* the laws of a kingdom,' the circle may be made heavy on one side for s. 

ON JOINING THE CIRCLE. 

§ 27. The circle is joined 

1. To the Straight Lines — by a motion contrary to that of the hands 
of a clock ; thus, 




sps, sts, s-cliSj sks, srs, hs. 

2. To the Rook of R— by making the hook into a circle ; thus, ^ eh. 

3. To Curves — by following the dkection of the curve ; thus, 

^ sfs, C sis, °^ srs, <r - b sins. 

4. Between two Strokes — by turning the circle in the most convenient 
manner; thus, J tsk, ^P pst, f rsg, ^s — msk, 

v_^<r^ nsm, \=> fsl, Kj^ fslt, v _^| nsld. 

Eem. 1. To distinguish Iss-Eay from Iss-Hay, observe that in the former case the 
circle is on the left side of the stroke, and on the contrary side in the latter case. 
See § 14, and Eem. 3. 

Eem. 2. Iss-Hay Is distinguishable from Chays by the latter being less inclined 
than the former. 

Eem. 8. Iss-Hay should never be employed instead of Ish for the sound of sh In 
shade. 

Eem. 4. The Circle between Curves. — In cases like nsm, fslt, nsld, the circle 
should be written on the back of the first curve ; in cases like msn, msth, on the 
concave side of the first curve. 

§ 27. How is the circle joined to straight lines? to the hook of ht to curves? 
How is the circle written between two strokes ? Join a circle at the beginning of Pee, 
Gay, Eay, Jay, Dee. Join a circle to the end of Hay. "Write a circle at the begin- 
ning of Hay. Write a circle at the beginning and end of Vee, Ish, Lay, "Way, Yay, 
Ing. "Write a circle between Kay and Tee ; Em and Chay ; En and Tee ; Eay and 
Kay; Em and Lay; En and El; En and Lay; "Way and Kay; Tee and Pee. 
[Eem.] How is Iss-Eay distinguished from Iss-Hay ? On which side of the stroke 
is the circle in Iss-Eay ? on which side, in Iss-Hay ? How is Iss-Hay distinguished 
from Chay-Iss? "Which is the more inclined, Iss-Hay or Chay-Iss? Is Iss-Hay 
ever employed to represent the sound of sh in shade ? On which side of En is the 
circle to be made in the combination En-Iss-Em ? on which side of Ef in Ef-Iss- 
Lay ? on which side of En in En-Iss-Lay ? on which side of Em in Em-Iss-En? in 
Em-Iss-Ith? 



28 THE COMPENDIUM. 

THE LARGE CIRCLE. 

§ 28. The circle may be enlarged for s-s (ses, sez, zes, or zez) ; thus, 
— * ks, __d ks-s, V^ % Ko fs " s * 

Eem. 1. When great precision is required, one side of this circle may be made 
heavy when one or both of the sounds denoted by it is z, as in races, causes. 

Eem. 2. Syllable-Name of the Large Circle.— -The large circle may be named 
Sez or Ses. 

THE ST AND STR LOOPS. 

§ 29. To express t following 5 (as in lost, most) or d following z (as in 
amazed, raised), make the circle into a small loop; thus, f° Is, 
f* 1st, /> rz, S rzd, f st, f stt. 

Eem. 1. When great accuracy of representation is required, the loop may be 

made heavy for zd; thus, y? rzd. 

Eem. 2. Name of the Small Loop.— The small loop may be named Steh when ita 
Bound can not be conveniently spoken in one syllable with the name of the stroke 
to which it is attached. Ef with the small loop at the beginning may be called 
Stef ; but Chay with Steh at the beginning must be named Steh-Chay'. Kay or Bee 
with Steh at the end maybe named respectively Kayst, Beest; butEf with Steh 
added must be called Ef-Steh ; or Ef may be changed to Fee, when the sound of 
Steh can be added, forming Feest. 

§ 30. Large Loop. — To express tr following s (as in pastor, Chester, 

Lester), make the circle into a large loop ; thus, X^ ps, \^ pst, 

\> pstr, {* Is, f° 1st, f> lstr. 

§ 28. Is the circle ever enlarged ? for what purpose ? [Eem.] How can it be 
denoted that one of the sounds represented by a large circle is z ? What is the syl- 
lable-name of the large circle ? 

§ 29. Is the circle ever made into a loop ? for what purpose ? How may t follow- 
ing s be expressed ? d following z f Give some word in which t follows the sound of 
8; — some words in which d follows the sound of z. [Eem.] How may si be dis- 
tinguished from st, with the use of the loop ? What is the syllable-name of the small 
loop ? Is this syllable-name always to be employed ? How is Ef with the small 
loop at the end to be called ? How is Ef with the small loop at the beginning to be 
named ? How is Chay with the small loop at the beginning to be named ? Write 
Steh-Pee. Write Steh-Dee, Steh-Chay, Steh-Kay, Steh-Eay. Write Steh at the be- 
ginning of all the curves. Write Steh at the end of all the straight lines. 

§ 30. Is the circle ever made into a large loop ? if so, for what purpose ? How 
may tr following s be expressed ? Give some words in which tr follows 8. > Write 
a large loop at the end of the curves ; at the end of the straight lines. [Eem.] Is 
the large loop ever employed for str at the commencement of a word ? What is 
the syllable-name of the large loop ? How is its name to be pronounced in connec- 
tion with the preceding syllable-name ? What is the name of Bee with the large 
loop joined at the end ? What is the name of Kay with the large loop joined at the 
end ? What is the name of Lay with the large loop joined at the en4 ? 



SIMPLE- CONSONANT SIGNS. 29 

Beat. 1. Caution. — The large loop is never employed for str at the commence- 
ment of a word. 

Eem. 2. Name of the Large Loop.— The large loop may be named Ster. To dis- 
tinguish it from the name of another letter, it should form, with the name of the pre- 
ceding letter, a single word, which should be accented on the first syllable. For 
example, En, Bee, Kay form with Ster the words En'ster, Bee'ster, Kay'ster. 

LOOPS AND LARGE CIRCLE IN THE MIDDLE OF WORDS. 

§ 31. The loops and large circle may be used occasionally in the 
middle of a word, as in * testify, distinguish, Chesterfield, necessary, 
necessity.' 

S ADDED TO LOOPS AND THE LARGE CIRCLE. 

§ 32. Soi Zm&y be added to a loop or large circle ; thus, \^ psts, 
V>> pstrs, 0, ksrszz. 



WOED-SIGNS. 

§ 33. Certain words of frequent occurrence (called Sign-Words or 
Grammalogues) are indicated in Phonography by one or more of their 
important letters. These contractions are denominated Word-Signs 
or Logograms. 

Eem. It is found, by careful calculation, that certain words of frequent occurrence 
(most of which are provided with word-signs requiring each but one movement of 
the pen) constitute nearly two thirds of spoken and written English ; that is, in every 
ten thousand words of a book, sermon, or lecture, about six thousand words will be 
found to consist of the words which in Phonography are represented by word-signs. 
By one estimate it appeared that, in ten thousand words, taken from twenty books 
(five hundred from each), it occurred 119 times ; for, 121 ; is, 136 ; that, 133 ; a, 150 ; 
in, 214 ; to, 228, of, 396 ; and, 413 ; and the, 675 times. A slight contraction then in 
words of such frequent recurrence results in a great saving of the time and labor of 
writing ; and when familiarized, they are more easily read than the uncontracted 
outlines. 

§ 34. Double Letters, etc. — In the lists of word-signs, a word is occa- 

§ 31. Ar^e the loops ever employed in the middle of a word ? Eecite the words 
given as instances of such use. Is the large circle ever employed in the middle of 
a word ? 

§32. How can s and z be added to the loop or large circle? "Write Pee-Steh- 
Iss— Eay-Sez-Iss— Kay'-Ster-Iss— Ef-Ster-Iss. 

§ 33. What are those words called, which are denoted by one or more of their 
important letters? What is an equivalent name for sign^icordf What name is 
given to the imperfect representation of the sign-words t What word is synony- 
mous with word-sign t * 

§ 34. What, in the list of word-signs, does a double letter indicate? What does 
the printing of a word with a hyphen denote ? When a word-sign represents more 
than one word, how is it determined which word is intended in any case ? 



30 THE COMPENDIUM. 

sionally printed with a hyphen, thus, give-n ; or with a double letter ; 

thus, tiff ; to intimate that the corresponding word-signs represent 

give and given ; thee and thy'. The context will readily show which word 
is intended. 

§ 35. Dot-Lines. — The dot-lines which appear in this work in con- 
nection with certain words, serve to indicate the position of those 
words with respect to the line of writing, (b) All word-signs whose 
position is not thus indicated, should rest upon the line of writing. 

§ 36. Method of Learning the Word'Signs.—K knowledge of the word-signs and 
sign-words may be readily acquired according to the following plan. 1. Cover a 
line of the word-signs with a slip of paper or card, and write the proper signs for 
sign-words. After becoming familiar with one line, pursue the same course with 
all the succeeding ones. 2. Cover the sign-words and speak the words for which 
the word-signs stand. 

§ 37. LIST OF SIMPLE-CONSONANT WOKD-SlGNS. 

\ -K- < :V v \ vi i -•!- 

up, hope, by, be, to be, subject, [subjected], it, at or out, 

I -I- I -I- -/- / ■/- / 

Its, itself, do, had, each, which, much, advantage, 

common, kingdom, [commonly] come, because, give-n, together, 

if, for, few ever, have, however, several, think, thank-ed, 

1. ( •(- .L C <■ 

th^ e , the™, though or thou, these, this, those or thus, 

6 .1 ) -)■•• ) ■)- ~°- 

this]^ or themselves, see, so, us, use (noun), was, use (verb), is, 
..?.. O d? J... 



o -o 

as, [his, has,] is ^, his jf. as , as^ s 3 , has^, first, wish, she 

j j r .-r- n ~v^ V A 

sha!*, usual-ly, wil{, whole, he™ or her, are, our, her| elf * 

§ 85. What is denoted by the dot-lines in connection with the word-signs ? "Where 
should all word-signs rest, whose position is not indicated by the dot-lines ? 



SIMPLE-CONSONANT SIGNS. 31 

-> -> .C ^ 'Ol ^ 

our self> ourselves, m®, am, may, or him, myself, himself, 

.^r. ^ ej ii -~. ^ ^.. 

in or any, no or know, own, influence, thing, language, why, 

"S -> r c c / 

way, away, your, yourg elf> yourselves, he. 

Hem* 1. His and lias.— His and Has may be expressed by placing the h-dc-t 
before the signs for is and as. No confusion, however, results from the common 
practice of omitting the aspirate, the context enabling the reader to distinguish 
very readily between is and his, as and has. 

Eem. 2. (a) Are when written separately, is usually represented by Ar. (ft) A 
slight advantage results from employing Eay as the sign for are in case the prece- 
ding word ends on, or below, the line of writing, and the following word com- 
mences above the line, (c) Eay is frequently the most convenient sign for are 
when joined, without lifting the pen, to other words. 

Eem. 3. When a word-sign represents two or more words, they are of different 
parts of speech, or have some other difference by which in connection with the 
context they may be readily distinguished. 

PLURALS, POSSESSIVES, ETC. 

§ 38. The small circle may be added to word-signs to indicate 
1. The plural number, or possessive case, of a noun ; thus, ^T^ 
thing, ^ 9 things; ^7_ kingdom, ^zf_ kingdoms or kingdom's. . 

§ 37. Cover the word-signs and write the signs for the sign-words. Next cover 
the sign-words and speak the words denoted by the signs. [Eem.] How are his and 
has expressed ? Does any confusion result from using the signs for is and as, for hie 
and has ? How is are usually represented when written separately ? "When may 
Eay be employed as a sign for are? When is Eay frequently used as a sign for 
the word are ? "When a sign represents more than one word, how are the words 
distinguished ? 

§ 38. For what purpose may the small circle be added to word-signs ? How may 
■is or has be added, to pronoun word-signs ? How may is or his, as or has, be added 
to conjunctions, adverbs, etc. ? How may his be added to the signs for* preposi- 
tions ? How may the addition of self to the sign of a pronoun, be indicated ? "Write 
kingdom's, things, hopes, advantages, uses, influences, languages, ways, why's. 
Write gives, subjects, comes, wishes, thinks, thanks, uses (ywzez). Write, in 
accordance with § 33, 3, it is or has ; each is or has ; which is or has ; he is or has ; 
she is or has ; if his; so as; much as. Write in accordance with § 38, 4, by his, 
at his, if his, for his, in his. Write in accordance with § 38, 5, myself, himself, thy- 
self, yourself our self, herself. [Eem.] How may thy self bz written ? What change 
should be made in a verb word-sign ending in a circle, in order to denote the third 
person, singular, of the present tense, or the perfect participle ? Write influence t 



32 THE COMPENDIUM. 

2. The third person, singular, of a verb in the present tense ; thus, 
come, — o conies. 

3. The addition of is or his, as or has, principally to pronouns, con- 
junctions, and adverbs ; thus, it, it is or it has, *v_o if his, 

^ so as. 

4. The addition of his to prepositions ; thus, ^_ for, ^ for his. 

5. The addition of self to pronouns ; thus, ^-^ him, ^— b himself. 

Rem. 1. Thyself may be indicated by adding a circle to the sign for thy. 

Rem. 2. Thikd Person Singular and Perfect Participle.— "When a word-sign 
representing a verb ends in a circle, the third person, singular, of the present tense, 
is indicated by enlarging the circle ; the perfect participle, by making the circle 

into a small loop ; thus, influence, ^-P influences, ^~~^ influenced. 

Rem. 3. Selves.— The large circle is attached to signs of pronouns to indicate 
the addition of selves, as to the sign for them, for themselves ; to the sign for our, for 
ourselves. 

Rem. 4. Is, His, As, Has Added. — The circle for is or his and as or has may be 
enlarged to indicate the addition of is or his, as or has. (jb) Is or has may be 
added to the sign for this or thus by enlarging the circle. 

POSITION OF -WORD-SIGNS. 

§ 39. By the preceding list of word-signs it will appear that the 
word-signs are written in three different positions. 

1. The First Position, for horizontals, and vowel-signs, is the 
height of a Tee stroke above the line of writing ; (b) and, for all other 
consonant-signs, half the height of a Tee stroke above the line. 

2. The Second Position, for any kind of sign, is on the line of 
writing. 

3. The Third Position, for horizontals, is below the line ; (5) for 
half-length sloping and perpendicular signs, commencing on the line 
or slightly below it ; (c) for all other signs, through the line. 

Rem. 1. "With double-line paper, for the first position, horizontals are made to 
touch the lower edge of the upper line ; perpendicular and sloping full-length letters 
are 'written half above and half below it ; and half-length sloping and perpendicu- 
lar letters commence upon it and descend half the distance to the lower line. The 
second and third positions are the same as with single-line paper. Full-length per- 
pendicular signs in the second position extend from line to line. 

influences, and influenced. How may the addition of selves to the sign of a pro- 
noun be indicated ? For what purpose is the circle for is or his, as or has, enlarged ? 
In accordance with this principle, write is his, is as, as is, as has, as his, has Ids. 
Write this is, it is as, it has his, which is as, which has his, much as is, this has as, 
ih.us is, he has his, he is as. 

§ 39. In how many different positions are the word-signs written ? What is the 
first position for horizontals? for all other consonant signs? what i3 the second 
position ? What is the third position for horizontals ? for half-length sloping and 





SIMPLE-CONi 


SONANT 


SIGNS. 1 


£ 40. LIST OF 


WORDS REPRESENTED W THE 


SIMPLE-CONSONANT SIGNS. 


A. 


has 


M. 


think 


advantage 


has as § 38, E. 4. 


may 


this 


am 


has his § 38, E. 4. 


me 


this has, § 33, E. 4. 


any 


have 


much 


this is, § 38, B. 4. 


are 


he 


my 


those 


as 


hear 


myself 


thou 


as lias § 33, E. 4. 


her 




though 


as h-is § 38 E. 4. 


here 


N. 


thus 


at 


hers 


no 


thy 


away 


herself 


_ 


thyself, § 38, B. 1. 




him 


O. 


to be 


B. 


himself 


our 


together 


be 


his 


ours 




because 


his has § 38. E. 4. 


ourself 


U. 


by 


his is § 33, E. 4. 


ourselves 


up 


C. 


hope 


out 


us 


come 


however 


own 


use (noun) 


common 






use (verb) 


[commonly] 


I. 


S. 


usual 




if 


see 


"usually 


D. 


in 


several 




do 


influence 


she 


W. 




influences, § 33, E. 2 


. shall 


was 


E. 


influenced, § 38, E. 2. shalt 


way 


each 


is 


so 


which 


ever 


is as, § 38, E. 4. 


subj ect 


whole 


F. 


is his, § 33, E. 4. 


[subjected] 


why 


few 
first _ 


it 
its 


T. 


wil{ 


for 


itself 


thank 


wish 




thanked 




G. 


K. 


thee 


Y. 


give . 


kingdom 


them 


your 


given 


know 


themselves 


yours 






these 


yourself 


H. 


L. 


they 


yourselves. 


had 


language 


thing 





33 



Eem. 1. In the preceding list the sign-words are presented in alphabetical order, 
so that, by reference to it, the writer may at once determine whether or not a given 
word is to be represented by a contracted outline. If it should be found in this list, 
and the sign should not be remembered, reference must be made to § 37, where the 
sign will be found. This list may also be made of service in learning the word- 



perpendicular signs ? for all other signs ? [Eem.] With double-line paper, where 
are the first-place horizontals written ? How are first-place perpendicular and slop- 
ing letters written with respect to the upper line ? How are half-length sloping and 
perpendicular letters written with respect to the upper line ? What are the second 
and third positions, with the use of double-line paper ? 
§ 40. Write the word-signs for the words given in the list of § 40. 

2* 



34 THE COMPENDIUM. 

signs, by writing from memory the sign for each word as tne list is read through. 
This practice should be continued till each word of the list instantly suggests the 
correct sign. 

Eem. 2. Derivatives from Sign-words.— To represent a derivative from a sign- 
word, add to the sign of the primitive the additional consonant or consonants of tho 
derivative, usually joining them if the last consonant of the primitive is represented 
in its sign ; but generally disjoining the additional consonant, if the last consonant 
of the primitive is not represented in its sign. Hence, since the last consonant of 
advantage is represented in its sign, write advantageous by joining Ess, the addi- 
tional consonant, to Jay, the sign of the primitive. In like manner, write advan* 
tageously, by joining Lay, the additional consonant, to the last letter of advantageous 
But, since the last consonant of subject is not represented in its sign, write subjected, 

by disjoining Dee, the additional consonant of the derivative ; thus, \ 1 sub- 
jected. 

Eem. 3. Important Advice. — It is very desirable that the word-signs should be so 
thoroughly fixed in the memory that they shall be suggested the instant the sign- 
words are seen or heard ; and the pupil who would take those steps which most 
surely lead to rapid writing, will apply himself diligently and patiently till he has 
acquired a complete mastery of this department of the phonographic art. A valu- 
able means of acquiring the desired thorough knowledge of the word-signs, is, while 
reading any work, to note the sign-words, calling to mind their signs. Until the 
word-signs are familiarized, do not hesitate to copy dozens of pages, writing the 
proper phonographic signs for the sign-words, and, for the present, writing the 
others in longhand. This plan should at once be adopted in all writing for the stu- 
dent's own use ; and if he will thus continue to apply phonographic principles as ho 
acquires them, his longhand will soon be entirely displaced by the brief and beauts 
fill characters of Phonography. 



VOCALIZATION — SIMPLE VOWELS. 35 



VOCALIZATION-SIMPLE VOWELS. 

§ 41. Vocalization. — In Phonography, the term Vocalization is em- 
ployed to denote the act of indicating, in accordance with established 
principles, the vowels of a word. 

Rem. The consonant expression of a word is called a Skeleton, Word-form, Con- 
sonant-Outline, or simply Outline. Outlines may be vocalized, that is, have the 
vowels placed beside the consonants, as explained in subsequent sections. The 
advantage of this mode of vocalization is that the outlines used by the reporter need 
rarely differ from those used by the correspondent, the vocalization of a phono- 
graphic report being nearly sufficient to reduce it to the simplest style of phonog- 
raphy. 

§ 42. Vowel Defined. — A vowel may be defined as a smooth emission 
of sounding breath, modified but not obstructed by the organs of 
speech. Such are the sounds represented by ea in e&t, a in ale, a in 
arm. 

Rem. Convenience sanctions the common use of the term Towel to denote both 
a certain kind of sound and its sign, though in strictness the sign of a vowel should 
be called a VoweUSign, 

NUMBER OF THE VOWELS. 

§ 43. By a careful analysis, the English language is found to contain sixteen vow- 
els, seven long and nine short. They are denoted by the italic, letters in the fol- 
lowing words : 

"Long Vowels — ear, <zle, ain, czrm, awe, owe, food. 
Suoet Vowels — £r, eLL, H6B, «t, ose, on, whole, -wp, toot. 

SHORT VOWEL-ALPHABET. 

§ 44. For all of the vowels, Standard Phonography provides appropriate signs, 
more or less of which may be used according to the writer's purposes, ability to dis- 
tinguish sounds, taste, etc. But for ordinary purposes the vowel-alphabet may be 
reduced to twelve signs, in the following manner : 

1. The sign of the vowel of ell may (without confusion) be employed to represent 

§ 41. "What is the term vocalization employed to denote ? What is the consonant 
expression of a word denominated ? "What is a consonant-outline ? What advan- 
tages result from the phonographic mode of vocalization ? 

§ 42. What is a vowel ? What kind of sound is denoted by ea t Is or is not the 
sound denoted by owe a vowel ? What kind of sound is that heard in the pronunci- 
ation of the word ah t If these several sounds are vowels, how are they determined 
to be such ? [Rem.] What is the term Yowel commonly used to denote ? What in 
strictness should the sign of a vowel be called ? 

§ 43. How many vowels are there in the English language ? how many long ? 
how many short ? what are they ? 

§ 44. For ordinary purposes, how many vowels is it necessary to recognize? 
How may the vowel of her be represented ? If represented by the sign of the vowel 



36 THE COMPENDIUM. 

also the vowel of her, it being observed that the former never occurs before r not 
followed by a vowel, nor even before r followed by a vowel in certain derivatives— 
as preferring from prefer — in which the vowel of her is retained from the primitive. 

2. The sign of the vowel of ale may (without confusion) be employed to represent 
also the vowel of air, it being observed that the former rarely occurs before r not 
followed by a vowel, nor even before r followed by a vowel in certain derivatives— 
as caring from care — in which the vowel of air is retained from the primitive. 

3. The vowel of at (which to many ears is not different from the vowel of ask) 
may be represented by the sign for the vowel of ask. Little difficulty can result 
from this practice, because the same practice of confusing these sounds under one 
sign (namely, 4 a') obtains in the common orthography. It may be observed that 
the vowel of ask occurs principally before the sounds of/, th, s, and in the unac- 
cented syllables of about, ago, Cuba, America, and similar words. 

4. The vowel of whole may be represented by the sign for the vowel of owe, it 
being observed that the latter occurs rarely, if ever, in unaccented syllables, and 
that the former occurs under the accent, in but few words, as whole, none, etc. 

§ 45. The vowels being divided with considerable accuracy into 
two groups — Lingual Vowels and Labial, or Lip, Vowels — the reduced 
vowel-scale may be presented thus : 
First Group — Linguals. 



Long- 
Short- 



e 


a 


ah 


eat 


ale (aii) 


arm 


l 


e 


a 


it 


ell (her). 


(at) ask. 



Second Group — Labials. 
au 6 65 

awe owe (whole) food 

6 u 66 

on tip foot. 

Eem. 1. The Lingual Towels are so named because the tongue (Latin, lingua) is 
principally concerned in the formation of the apertures requisite for their produc- 
tion. 

Eem. 2. The second-group vowels are named Labial, or Lip, Towels, because in 
the formation of the peculiar apertures required for their production, the lips are 
chiefly concerned. 



VOWEL-SIGNS. 

§ 46. (a) Of the generally-recognized vowels of the English language, 
six (Linguals) are represented by a dot, and six (Labials) are denoted 
by a dash, each made heavy and light to correspond to long and short 

of met, how is it to be distinguished from the latter sound ? In what manner may 
the use of a distinct sign for the vowel of air be avoided ? How is this vowel dis- 
tinguished from that of mate, when no distinct sign is used for it ? How may the 
use of a distinct sign for the vowel of ask be avoided ? Why does no confusion 
result from employing the same sign for the vowels of ask and at t What are the 
principal cases in which the vowel of ask occurs ? How may the use of a distinct 
sign for the vowel of whole be avoided 1 

§ 45. How many vowels are there in the First Group ? how many in the Second 
Group ? How many Linguals are there ? how many Labials ? [Eem.] Why are 
the first-group vowels denominated Linguals ? Why are the second-group vowels 
denominated Labials? 

§ 46. How are the Linguals represented ? How are the Labials denoted ? 



VOCALIZATION SIMPLE VOWELS. 37 

vowels, and, in order to distinguish between the vowels, placed at three 
different points beside the consonant, namely, at the Beginning (or 
the point at which the pen commences to make the consonant), the 
Middle, and the End (or the point at which the pen ceases in the 
formation of the consonant). 

(b) To particularize : 

1. OF THE UNGUALS. 

Write, beside the qonsonant, for the vowels 

e — i | ( in the First Place, or at the Beginning 

a — e >■ a DOT -j in the Second Place,' or at the Middle 
ah — -a ) (in the Third Place, or at the End. 

2. OF THE LABIALS. 

Write, beside the consonant, for the vowels 

( in the First Place, or at the Beginning 
a DASH -J in the Second Place, or at the Middle 
( in the Third Place, or at the End. 

(c) This plan of representing the vowels is illustrated in the follow- 
ing scheme, in which the vowels are placed by an upright stroke, or 
letter Tee, to show their respective positions, namely, opposite the 
beginning, middle, or end of the consonant. 

§ 47. STANDARD VOWEL-SCHEME. 




FIRST GROUP — LINGUALS. 

Long— - | .1 



Short- 



eat ale (air) arm 



ii ell (her) (at) ask. 



SECOND GROUP — LABIALS. 



awe owe (whole) food 



on ftp, cur foot. 



Rem. 1. The scheme given above is called the Standard Towel-Scheme, because 
it is the one usually employed by phonographers. Another vowel scheme (whose 
use is optional) will be given in a subsequent section, in which distinct signs will 
be provided for thSe vowels of the words inclosed in curves in the preceding table. 

Rem. 2. TJie Dot and Dash Vowels.— The first-group vowels being denoted by a 

How are the long-vowel signs distinguished from the short-vowel signs? How 
are the long vowels represented ? the short vowels ? How are the different vowels 
distinguished, by means of the signs ? In how many places beside the consonants 
are the vowels written? What is the beginning of a consonant? what is the end? 
How are the vowels e and I represented? a and if ah and at au and 6? 6 and ii? 
do and 66 ? What is the First Place for a vowel ? what is the Second Place ? what 
is the Third Place? 

§ 47. For what purpose is the upright stroke, or letter Tee, employed in the 
vowel-scheme? How is the vowel of air denoted? of her? of at? of whole? 
[Rem.] Why is the Standard Yow el-Scheme so named ? Why are the first-group 



38 THE COMPENDIUM. 

dot, are called Dot-Vowels; while, for a corresponding reason, the second-group 
vowels are denominated Dash- Vowels. 

Eem. 3. The vowel -signs should be written at a little distance from the consonants 
by which they are placed. If allowed to touch, they would occasion mistakes. 

Eem. 4. The dashes should generally stand at right angles with the consonants* 
Slight variations, however, from such a position are occasionally convenient and 
allowable. They frequently add to the beauty of phonographic writing. But when 
the " Optional Vowel-Signs," to be subsequently explained, are employed, the dash 
for l u' at least must be written at a right angle with the consonant, lest it should be 
mistaken for the vowel of whole, which is written at an oblique angle with the con- 
sonant. 

Eem. 5. Mnemonic Assistance. — The following mnemonic lines may be of service 
to the student in fixing in the mind the order and representation of the vowels : 



FIRST GROUP — DOT-VOWELS. 

Long — "Near eight palms 

Slwrt — Which said lad 

Beginning. Middle. End. 



SECOND GROUP— DASH-VOWELS. 

Saw bo blooming 

Hobb's hut stood 

Beginning. Middle. End. 



In these lines, palms should be pronounced as if written pahms. 

Eem. 6. The pupil will derive additional assistance in remembering the order 
of the vowels, from observing the order of the positions assumed by the organs in 
producing the long vowels — e, a, ah, au, 6, 66. Commencing with a close position 
for e, the lower jaw and the tongue are gradually depressed till ah is arrived at ; then 
commencing with an open position for au, the lower jaw is gradually elevated, and 
the lips brought gradually nearer each other, until do is produced. These changes 
may be indicated by the following diagram : 

e..\ X..66 



To produce this series of vowels, the mouth is required to be gradua% opened 
and closed, the vowel-apertures being produced chiefly by the tongue, when open- 
ing the mouth ; and by the lips, when closing the mouth. 

CAUTIONS. 

Eem. 7. Observe that the first-place vowels— e, i, au, 6— are always written oppo- 
site the beginning of the consonant ; and that the third-place vowels— ah, a, 66, 66 — 
are always placed at the end. Hence, before writing a first-place, or third-place 

vowels denominated Dot- Vowels ? Why are the second-group vowels called Dash- 
Vowels ? Why must the vowels be written at a little distance from the consonants ? 
How should the dashes stand with reference to the consonant ? Is it allowable to 
vary the direction of the dash-vowels in reference to the c nsonants ? When the 
optional vowel-signs are employed, how must the dash it be written ? Eepeat the 
lines given as an assistance in remembering the order and representation of the 
vowels. What lines correspond to the dot-vowels ? What lines correspond to the 
dash-vowels ? What lines contain the long vowels ? What lines contain the short 
vowels ? How should the word palms be pronounced in these mnemonic lines ? 
What is said with reference to the movements of the mouth when pronouncing tho 
long vowels in the order of the vowel-scheme ? Which vowel requires the closest 
position ? which the most open position ? At what point beside the consonants are 



VOCALIZATION SIMPLE VOWELS. 39 

vowel, the direction of the consonant must be determined; and the student should, 
therefore, make himself familiar with §§ 10, 11, and 12. As Eay is always written 
upward (see §12, 4 a), its beginning is, of course, at the bottom, and the end, at 
the top ; but not so in respect to the phonograph for I, for that is not always written 
upward : it may be, and sometimes is, written downward when joined with other 
signs by which its direction may be determined. It should be observed that sh is 
usually, out not always, written downward. As Eay is always written upward, a 
first-place vowel in connection with it must always be placed at the bottom, and a 
third-place vowel, at the top. Horizontal consonants being written from left to right, 
first-place vowels must be placed opposite their left extremity ; a third-place vowel, 
opposite their right extremity. Carefully-peruse §§ 10, IX, and 12 ; and then ob- 
serve the method of placing the vowels in the following phonographic words : 

Downstrolces. 

c 

long. 



\ 


\- 


1 /* 


C 


C 


J- J 


Pea, 


baa, 


add, jaw, 

Upstrokes. 


fee, 


thaw, 


Shaw, ash, 

Horizontals. 


C 


r 


C < 


■ 




r 


Lea, 


la, 


law, raw, 


shawl. 




Key, coo, 



gnaw. 
OPTIONAL VOWEL-SCHEME. 

§ 48. In the Standard Vowel-Scheme (§ 47), the signs of the vowels 
of 'ale, ell, ask, owe,' are used to represent also the vowels of l aiv, 
her, at, whole.' For a perfectly phonetic representation, however, the 
latter vowels require distinct signs, as in the following scheme : 

1 -I ,1 .1 1 -i J 

eat ale air arm awe owe food 

"I -I 'I ,f .1 1 H -I J 

it ell her at ask on whole up foot. 

Eem. 1. The sign of the vowel of whole should be written at an oblique angle 

the first-place vowels always written ? Before writing a first-place or third-place 
vowel beside -a consonant, what is first to be considered ? For vowels written beside 
Eay, what is the first place ? what is the third place ? For vowels written beside 
any upstroke consonant, what is the first place ? what is the third place ? What is 
the first place for vowels in connection with Eay ? What is the first place and third 
place for vowels in connection with horizontal consonants ? Why, in the phono- 
graphic words given at the close of Eem. 7, is the vowel au written opposite the 
top of El in the word long, and opposite the bottom of Lay in the word law ? 
Why is the vowel au placed at the top of Jay in the word jaw, and at the bottom 
of Eay in the word raw ? Why is au placed at the top of Ish in the word shaio, 
and at the bottom of Shay in the world shawl? Why is ah at the bottom of Bee in 
the word oaa, and at the top of Lay in the word la ? Why is the vowel e placed at 
the top of Pee in the word pea, and at the bottom of Lay in the word lea ? 

§ 48. In the optional vowel-scheme, what is the sign provided for the vowel of 
airt for the vowel of herf for the vowel of at? for the vowel of whole? How, 
with this scheme, is the vowel of ask represented ? [Eem.] How should the vowel 



40 THE COMPENDIUM. 

with the consonant. The signs of the vowels of air, at, her, should be written 
parallel with the consonant. 

Rem. 2. The distinct signs for the vowels of her, air, at, whole, are denominated 
Optional Yowel-Signs, because their use is optional. 

NAMES OF THE VOWEL-SIGNS. 

§ 49. The vowel-signs should be named by the single sounds which they 
represent, and not u double- e, long-d, a-eye, a-aitch, a-you, long-o, double-o, 
short-l," etc. (b) For convenience of conversation, the vowels of her, 
ask, whole, may be named er, of, bl : these syllables being pronounced 
as er in her, off in staff, ole in whole. 



METHOD OF PLACING THE VOWELS IN KESPECT TO THE 
OKDER OF READING. 

§ 50. (a) When a vowel is placed 

above a horizontal consonant, or 
to the left of any other, it is read 
before the consonant ; thus, _^_ ache, •! aid. 
(b) When a vowel is placed 

below a horizontal consonant, or 

to the right of any other, it is read 

after the consonant ; thus, — — gay, I . day. 

MODE OF WRITING SINGLE VOWELS. — NOMINAL CONSONANT. 

§ 51. A consonant-sign which is not to be pronounced, but which 
is used merely to show the place of a vowel — as in writing initials of 
names, indicating single vowels, and in writing words composed en- 
tirely of vowels — should be canceled — 

(a) Either by striking an oblique line through it at any convenient 
point ; thus, \_ e, f a, V|- Eah. 

of whole be written with respect to the consonant ? the vowels of air t at ? her ? 
What are the Optional Yowel-Signs ? Why are they thus named ? 

§ 49. How are the vowel-signs named ? For convenience of conversation, whaf 
name is provided for the vowel of her ? of ask ? of whole t 

§ 50. On which side of a consonant-sign should a vowel be written, when it is to 
be read after the consonant ? On which side of horizontal consonant-signs is a 
vowel to be placed, when it is to be read before a consonant ? on which side, when 
it is to be read after the consonant ? On which side of all other consonants should 
a vowel be placed, when it is to be read after the consonants ? on which side is it 
to be placed when it is to be read before the consonant? 

§ 51. How may it be indicated that a consonant-sign is not to be pronounced ? 
For what purpose may a consonant-sign be canceled ? How may a consonant- 
eign be canceled ? How, when a dot-vowel is to be written beside it ? How, wheu 



VOCALIZATION SIMPLE VOWELS. 41 

(b) Or by writing the vowel-sign, if a dash, through it at a right 
angle ; thus, awe, 6, -(- u, 65. 

Rem. 1. As a canceled consonant has no value as the sign of a sound — that is, has 
the form, but not the power, of a consonant, — it is denominated a Nominal Conso- 
nant. 

Rem. 2. Single vowels are usually written to a letter Tee ; but any other conso- 
nant may be employed which may be more convenient, provided, of course, that 
it should be canceled. 

Rem. 3. The letter Tee may be employed as a nominal consonant, even without 
cancellation, in all cases, as in the preceding vowel-schemes, when no confusion 
would be likely to result from such use. 

Rem. 4. The words ah I and eh ! may be written thus : f ah, £ eh. "When 
these words are forcibly spoken, the aspirate is actually heard, and is therefore 
properly indicated. However, the sign may be regarded as simply serving to show 
the place of the vowel, and not requiring cancellation. 

Rem. 5. The optional vowel-signs, when written singly, should be placed beside 
a canceled Tee. 



POSITION OF WORDS. 

1. WORDS COMPOSED ENTIRELY OF HORIZONTAL CONSONANTS. 

§ 52. Words composed entirely of horizontal consonants should be 
written above the line, when their accented vowel is first place ; other- 
wise, on the line. Hence, ' gnaw, key, in, me, my' are written above 
the line, while * know, go, gay, am, coo' are written on the line. 

2. WORDS HAVING PERPENDICULAR OR INCLINED STROKES. 

§ 53. Words having perpendicular or inclined strokes should be 
written in the second position ; that is, so that the first perpendicular 
or inclined stroke shall rest upon the line of writing. 



it serves to denote the place of a dash-vowel ? [Rem.] What is a canceled conso- 
nant called? What is a Nominal Consonant? How are single vowels usually 
written ? What consonant-sign is sometimes used for a nominal consonant, even 
without cancellation ? How may the words ah and eh bq written ? When is the 
sound of h heard in these words ? If not heard, how is the stroke-sign for h to be 
regarded ? 

§ 52. Where, that is, in what position, should words composed entirely or hori- 
zontal consonants be written ? When should such words be written above the line ? 
when on the line? Where should you write gnaw? key? scheme? sick? sake? 
sum ? sane ? awn ? Why should me, awn, key, gnaw, sing, song, scene be written 
above the line? Why should neigh, snow, son, some, same, coo, sang be written 
on the line ? 

§ 53. Where, that is, in what position, should words containing perpendicular or 
sloping strokes be written ? What is the second position for such words ? 



42 THE COMPENDIUM. 

THE REPORTER'S RULE OF POSITION. 
§ 54. "With few exceptions, the reporter subjects all words of few consonants 
(horizontals or not) to the reporter's rule of position, placing them, not in two posi- 
tions only, as in the corresponding style of phonography, but in three different 
positions, according as their accented vowel is first-place, second-place, or third- 
place. "Words with first-place accented vowels are written in the first position (see 
§ 39, 1) ; those with second-place accented vowels are written in the second position 
(§ 39, 2) ; and those with third-place accented vowels are written in the third posi- 
tion (§ 39, 3). By observing this rule of position, the reporter is enabled, for the 
most part, to dispense with vocalisation, the mere position of words pointing out 
very nearly the accented vowel— which is one of the most important prerequisites 
in deciphering reporting outlines. These three positions are partially recognized 
in the word-signs of the corresponding style of phonography (the style explained in 
this work). They are specified in § 39. The student will now be able to understand 
why the sign for at is written through the line (that is, in the third position) ; why 
the signs for if, give, me, common, are written above the line (that is, in the first 
position) ; while the signs for Gome, together, so, and they are written on the line 
(that is, in the second position). 

§ 55. EXCEPTIONS TO THE RULE OF POSITION FOR WORD-SIGNS. 

(a) Position Changed to Avoid Confusion. — It is necessary to write a 
few word-signs out of the position denoted by their accented vowel, 
to prevent their being confounded with other words (of the same 
consonants) which, according to the rule, would occupy the same 
position. The sign for any, for example, is written above the line, 
to prevent its being mistaken for no ; while the sign for him is written 
on the line, so that it may not be mistaken for me. For the same rea- 
son, the sign for own is written in the third position, though it strictly 
belongs to the second. 

H (b) Position Changed for the Convenience of the Write}-. — Some word-signs 
which properly belong to the first or third position, are put in the sec- 
ond position, because that is the most convenient for the writer. Do 
and be, for this reason, occupy the second position, though do properly 
belongs to the third position, and be to the first. 

§ 54. "What is the reporter's rule of position ? How many different positions does 
the reporter recognize for words of few consonants ? In what position does he write 
such words when their accented vowel is first-place ? when it is second-place ? 
when it is third-place ? How does this rule benefit the reporter ? In the Eeporting 
Style, what does the position of a word serve to point out ? Are the three positions 
of the Eeporting Style recognized to any extent in the Corresponding Style ? Why 
is the sign for at written through the line, that is, in the third position ? 

§ 55. Are word-signs ever written out of the position denoted by their accented 
vowel ? and if so, why ? Why is the sign for any written in the first position ? 
Why is the sign for 7ii*n written on the line ? Why is the sign for oicn written be- 
low the line ? What is the most convenient position for writing words ? Are 
word-signs which strictly belong to the first or third position ever put in the second 
position ? Give some examples. 



VOCALIZATION--SIMPLE VOWELS. 43 

VOCALIZATION OF CONSONANT-STROKES WITH CIKCJ^ES OR 
LOOPS ATTACHED. 

CIRCLE OR LOOP AT THE BEGINNING OF A STROKE. 

§ 56. A circle or loop at the beginning of a consonant-stroke is read 
before the consonant-stroke or any vowels placed beside it ; thus, 

X ope, 5\ s-oap, 'X st-eep ; ,/^eel, j£ &-eal, #( f~st-eal; 

| - toe, f- s-tow ; - fZ low, (\ s-16w ; ^ no, ^-^ s-now. 

§ 57. In other words— In reading a consonant-stroke with a circle or loop at the 
beginning, read the circle first ; and then read the consonant-stroke and the vowels 
beside it (if any) precisely as though no circle or loop were attached ; thus, " s-oap, 
st-eep, s-eal, st-eal, s-tow, s-16w, s-now." 

RULES FOR REPRESENTING S AND Z AT THE BEGINNING OF A WORD. 

§ 58. (a) The small circle should usually be employed to represent 
s at the beginning of a word ; as in the examples in § 56 ; 
(b) Except— 

1. When two vowels follow, as in Y^ science.-^ 

2. When another $ follows, as in J) cease, P^ system. 

Eem. The object of the first exception is to provide two strokes, between which 
the vowel-signs may be conveniently divided, instead of being written in a confused 
manner beside one stroke, as would be necessary if the s in such cases were repre- 
sented by a circle. 

§ 59. The sound of z at the commencement of a word is always rep- 
resented by a z-stroke, as in ^y~ zeal. 

EEat: This rule results in a clear distinction between words commencing with s 
and those commencing with s, as seal, zeal. 

CAUTION. 

§ 60. The sound of s or z following an initial vowel should be de- 
noted by a stroke, as in .) ask, Y/-Ezra, •) ace, -) owes. 

Eem. This is necessary, because, according to § 56, a vowel can not be written so 
as to read before a circle, at the commencement of a word. Hence, a, — : is not 
ask, but sack ; 0/ y / - is not Ezra, but Sera. 



§ 56. How is a circle or loop at the beginning of a consonant-stroTce read ? 

§ 57. How should a consonant-stroke with a vowel or vowels beside it be read, 
when a circle is joined at the beginning of the stroke ? 

§ 58. Eepeat the rule for representing initial s. How is initial $ represented when 
two vowels follow it ? when another s follows it, as in cease, system ? [Eem.] What 
is the object of using Ess for initial s followed by two vowels? 

§ 59. How is initial z represented ? [Eem.] What is the object of this rule ? 

§ 60. How should you represent s or z following an initial vowel, as in ask, e:sy, 
Ezra ? [Bern.] Why is it necessary in such cases to write the stroke-sign for s or 
/ Why may not the s in ask be represented by Iss ? 



41 THE COMPENDIUM. 

CIRCLE OR LOOP AT THE END OF A STROKE. 

§ 61. A circle or loop at the end of a consonant-stroke is read 
after the consonant or any vowels placed beside it ; thus, X^. pa-ss, 
\q- pa-sses, \^. pa-st, \y pa-stor, ^ ope-s, "^)* arrc-st, 
s~^' ama-ssed. 

§ 62. In other words — In reading a consonant-stroke with a circle or loop a f , Iho 
end, read the consonant-stroke with the vowel or vowels beside it, as though no circle 
or loop were attached, and then add the circle or loop ; thus, pa-s, pa-sez, pa*st, 
pa-str, 6p-s, are-st, ania-st. 

RULES FOR REPRESENTING S AND Z AT THE END OF A WORD. 

§ 63. (a) The small circle should usually be employed to represent 
the sound of s or z at the end of a word ; as in the examples in § 61 ; 
(b) Except — 

1. When two vowels precede it, as in 'A chaos. 

2. When another s precedes it, as in ^) access, ^-^^ amaurosis, 

CAUTION. 

§ 64. The sound of s or z preceding a final vowel should be denoted 
by a stroke ; thus, )" see, _(^)- also, /^\ rosy. 

Rem. This is necessary, because, according to § 61, a vowel can not be written sc 
as to be read after a circle at the end of a word. Hence _^C D is not also, but aulos. 

VOCALIZATION OF THE LARGE CIRCLE. 

§ 65. The large circle is used to represent a syllable containing the 
vowel e. (b) It may be vocalized for other vowels by writing their 

signs within the circle ; as in — '-£> exist. 

USES OF THE LARGE CIRCLE, 

§ 66. The large circle is used in the following cases : 

1. To express two s-sounds at the end of a word — principally in the 

§ 61. When is a circle or loop at the end of a consonant to be read ? Should it be 
read before or after a vowel following the consonant-stroke ? 

§ 62. How should a stroke with a vowel or vowels beside it be read, when a circle 
or loop is joined at the end of the stroke? 

§ 63. Eepeat the rule for representing final s. How should final s be represented 
when two vowels precede it ? when another s precedes it, as in access, an%aurosi^ ? 

§ 64. How should you write s followed by a final vowel ? Why may not s in such 
cases be represented by Iss ? Write see, essay, rosy, massy, lessee, Vesey, Asa, 
racy, also. 

§ 65. What kind of a syllable is the large circle employed to represent ? How 
may it be vocalized for other syllables, as in exist, exliaust, insist, Crassus? 

§ 66. Eepeat the rule for the use of the large circle. Is it ever used in the middle 



VOCALIZATION — SIMPLE VOWELS. 45 

representation of such words as passes, causes, faces; rarely in writing 
such words as Crassus, amaurosis, exercise. 

2. Occasionally in the middle of a word ; as in ^_q/ necessary, 
— ^r exhaust. 

3. Occasionally at the beginning of words, for such syllables as sus, 
■sis, in such words as sustain, sister, system, suspect. 

Eem> Cat, lion-. — A third-place vowel preceding the syllable denoted by the large 
circle, should not be placed within the circle, because a vowel thus written should 
be read between the two s-sounds denoted by the circle, and not before them. 

RULE FOR VOCALIZING A STROKE WITH A CIRCLE OR LOOP ATTACHED. 

§ 67. In vocalizing a consonant-stroke which has a circle or loop 
attached, place the vowel-sign before or after the stroke, according as 
the vowel precedes or follows the consonant, precisely as though no 
circle or loop were attached. 

(b) For example, in vocalizing Iss-Jay for siege, determine, in the first place, 
whether the vowel e precedes or follows the sound of j heard in the word. If it pre- 
cedes, write it before the Jay ; if it follows that consonant, write it after the sign 
Jay ; and do not give yourself any trouble as to whether or not the circle will be 
read before or after the vowel. Place the vowel correctly with reference to the 
strokes, and the correct reading of the circle will be found to be governed by rules 
given in §§ 56, 5T, 61, 62. 



VOWEL WORD-SIGNS. 



§ 68. The vowel dots and dashes are employed in different positions 
as signs for certain words of which they constitute a portion. 

Rem. 1. Some of the vowel-dashes are written in different directions to distinguish 
between their different uses. For example, au as the sign of all takes a south- 
eastern direction ; as the sign of already, a southern direction ; and as the sign of 
ought, a south-western direction. The dash for 6 is written south-east, south, or 
south-west, as a sign, according to the direction, for of, or, on. 

of a word ? ever at the beginning of a word ? Give some examples of its use at the 
end, beginning, or middle of words. Write passes, causes, noses, insist, necessity, 
accessory, necessary, exist. [Rem.] Should third-place vowels preceding a large 
circle be written within it ? If not, why not ? 

§ 67. Eepeat the rule for vocalizing a consonant-stroke to which a circle or loop 
has been attached. Write siege, sage, mass, ax, side, sake, sack. In writing the 
last three words, should the vowels be written above or below the Kay ? If above, 
why ? In sick, how is it known that the vowel should not be read before the circle ? 
See §§ 56, 57. 

§ 68. Are the vowel-signs employed as word-signs ? [Rem.] How can you distin- 
guish the different uses of the vowel-dashes when they are employed as word-signs ? 
In how many different directions is au written when employed as a word-sign ? 
"What is the direction of p-u when it represents all ? when it represents already f 



46 THE COMPENDIUM. 

Eem. 2. Position of the Dashes and Dote.— As but two positions (above and on the 
line) can be conveniently recognized for the dots and dashes when not written be- 
side a consonant-stroke, the second-place dots and dashes, when used as word- 
signs, have to be carried up to the first place or brought down to the third place. 
For example, the dashes for 6 and u are brought down to the third place, and used 
as signs for oh ! and out ; while the dot for e is carried up to the first place, and 
employed as a sign for the. The is usually pronounced the, especially before conso- 
nants ; thus, the man, the booh. Some, however, regard the word-sign for the as i. 

§ 69. LIST OF VOWEL WORD-SIGNS. 





e 


a 


a 






the, 


a, 




an-d, 






s au l au 


' au 




N 5 


1 


*' 6 


all, already, awe, 


ought, 




of, 


or, 


on. 


N 65 ,5 


/ 55 




N 56 


r a 


, 65 



two, too, oh, owe, who-m, to, but, should. 

Eem. 1. The, when emphasized, may be denoted by the dot for e Written above 
the line. 

Eem. 2. In rapid writing, a is rarely distinguished from an-d ; and yet no diffi- 
culty is experienced on this account in reading phonographic notes, the correct 
word being very readily determined by means of the context. 

Eem. 3. "Whose may be written by adding a circle to the sign for who; 

thus, ^ whose. No confusion results from writing -who is or lias in the same 

manner. 

Eem. 4. Zee may be vocalized for owes ; Dee, for oiced; and owing may be rep- 
resented by the word-sign for owe, with a small dot below it. 

'the' joined by a tick. 
§ 70. The may be joined to a preceding or following word, by a tick 
written upward or downward in the direction of Pee \ or Chay / ; 
thus, V for the, ^~^ f in the, /^ is the, / which the, > of 



when it represents ought ? How many positions can be conveniently recognized 
for the vowel dots and dashes when written alone ? Where must the second-place 
vowel-signs be written ? "Where is e written when used as a sign for the ? How 
do some regard the light dot when used in the first position as a word-sign for the ? 

§ 69. Cover the word-signs and write the proper signs for the words in the List 
of Vowel Word-Signs. What is the direction of 6 when used as a sign for oft or t 
on t What is the direction of oS when used as a sign for to t- should t What is the 
direction of do when used as a sign for too t two ? who t whom t What is the direc- 
tion and position of u when used as a sign for but? of b when used as a sign for oh, 
owe t [Eem.] How may emphasized the be denoted ? How may a be distinguished 
from an or and, when, in rapid writing, the dot for a happens to be made light ? 
How may whose be written ? How may owes, oiced, and owing be written ? 

§ 70. What is the direction of the tick for the ? May it be written either upward 



VOCALIZATION — SIMPLE VOWELS. 47 

the, ^ to the, ' on the, ^ or the, ^ but the, ^ should 

the, ^7 the first, ^N the way. 

Eem. 1. The ease of writing or the and but the is slightly increased by inclining 

the dashes for or and but; thus, or the, ^ but the. 

Eem. 2. The joining of the to a following word is of comparatively rare occur- 
rence in the writing of the best phonographers. 

'a-n-d' joined by a tick. 

§ 71. A, an, or and may be joined to a preceding or following word, 
by a horizontal or perpendicular tick ; thus, v ^ 1 in a, ^ __. is a, 

L or a-n, L but a-n, _^ and the, and a-n, to a-n, ^ of 

a-n, "L and for a-n, "^ i and in a-n. 

Eem. 1. A-n-d is joined nearly as often to a following as to a preceding word. 

Eem. 2. (a) Observe that in and but the last stroke rests upon the line ; while in 
and a-n the first stroke rests on the line, and the second (perpendicular) stroke ex- 
tends below the line. {b) And should is distinguished from and the in a corre- 
sponding manner. ^ 

DIRECTION OF ' ON' AND * SHOULD.* 

§ 72. On and should are generally written downward, when standing 
alone ; (b) when joined with other words, the upward direction is 
usually the most convenient. 

POSITION OF THE DASH WORD-SIGNS OF THE FIRST PLACE. 

§ 73. The first-place dashes, when used as word-signs, should be commenced the 
height of a Tee above the line of writing. "With double-line paper, they commence 
on the upper line. 

§ 74. LIST OF WORDS REPRESENTED BY SIMPLE- VOWEL SIGNS. 

a-§ 68, E. 2 ; § 71 and-§ 71 

all awe 

already but— § 68, E. 2 ; § 71, E. 2, a. 

an— § 71 of 



or downward ? [Eem.] What is the advantage of varying slightly the direction of 
or and but in writing or the and but the ? "What is said of joining the by a tick to a 
following word? Write 'for the, if the, by the, on the, of the, all the, in the, is the, 
as the, it is the, this is the.' 

§ 71. What are the directions of the tick for a-n-d ? [Eem.] What is said of join- 
ing a-n-d by a tick to a following word ? How is and but distinguished from and 
a*n ? Write ' and a, is an, as a, it is a, it has a, or a, but an, of a, on a, and in a, 
and for a, should a, by a, if a, give a, and may a, and may the, and the, and it, and 
should, and the, and because a, and give, a common.' 

§72. How are on and should generally written when standing alone? when 
joined with other words? 

§ 73. Where should the first-place dash-wordsigns be commenced? where, wilh 
iouble-line paper? 

§ 74. Write the proper signs for the words in this list. 



48 THE COMPENDIUM. 

oh !— § 68, It. 2 to 

on— § 72 too 

or two 

ought who 

owe— § 69, It. 4 whom 

should— § 72 whose— § 69, E. 3. 

the— § 69, E. 1 ; § 70 ; § 71, E. 2, o. 



QUALITY AND QUANTITY OF UNACCENTED VOWELS. 

§ 75. "Without guidance of rules, it is frequently difficult for the phonographic 
writer to determine satisfactorily the quality and quantity of vowels without a 
primary or secondary accent ; as the vowels denoted by italic letters in the follow- 
ing words : c among, define, retain, prefer, metal, tailor.' Good phonographers are 
now quite generally agreed, as shown by their practice, that a correct, distinct pro- 
nunciation supports the following rules : 

1. TO DETERMINE THE QUALITY OF AN UNACCENTED TOWEL. 

§ 76. Generally, when the precise quality of a vowel without a primary or sec- 
ondary accent can not be readily determined, regard it as the short sound of the 
letter used to represent it in the common spelling, unless another sound is indicated 
by the analogy of some related word. Hence, write ' define, refer, prefer, metal, 
sailor,' but * disposition' instead of ' disposition,' because of 4 dispose.' 

Ebm. i. The ordinary pronunciation of a word is occasionally changed, in order 
to distinguish it from some other word of similar sound ; as, " I did not say precede 
but proceed ; not declaim but reclaim ; not defer but refer." In such cases, write 
the distinguishing, instead of the ordinary, pronunciation — writing ' precede, de- 
claim, reclaim, defer, refer,' instead of the common pronunciation, 4 precede, de- 
claim', reclaim', defer', refer'.' 

Eem. 2. Some writers regard e as the vowel of the unaccented prefixes, o3e, re, 
pre, and usually write them with this vowel in primitive words, though a change 
to e in the derivatives is almost invariably necessary ; thus, ' define, definition ; re- 
fer, reference ; prefer, preference. The correct rule is to write these prefixes with 
e, whenever the sound is clearly heard in a proper, deliberate pronunciation, as in 
re-seat, re-bound, re-form ; and when a vowel immediately follows the prefix, as 
in re-enter, pre-emption ; but write e whenever the vowel is obscurely pronounced, 
as in reform, defer, prefer. The observance of this rule secures a distinction in 
writing, corresponding to the difference in speech, between such words as re-seat, 
receipt; re-dress (to dress again), redress (to amend); re-form (to form anew), 
reform (to correct) ; re-bound (to bound again), rebound (to spring back) ; and also 
secures in the primitive the vowel which generally appears distinctly in the deriva- 
tive ; thus, define, definition ; refer', reference ; relate', rel'ative ; prefer, prefer- 
ence. 

2. TO DETERMINE THE QUANTITY OF AN UNACCENTED VOWEL. 

§ 77. Generally, when the quality of a vowel is clear, but the writer doubts 
whether to empldy the long or short vowel of any particular pair, the short vowel 
should be employed in preference to the long one ; thus, 6 instead of au in ' reforma- 
tion ;' a instead of ah in ' peculiar ;' e instead of a in ' certam, capt'Kn ;' b instead 
of o in ' obey ;' 66 instead of 66 in ' to-day.' 



PUNCTUATION, ACCENT, NUMBERS, ETC. 49 



PUNCTUATION, ACCENT, NUMBERS, 

ETC. 

PUNCTUATION. 

§ 78. The marks of punctuation employed in Phonography are the 
following : 



Period , ♦ . x or / 

Colon : 

Semicolon ; 

Comma , 

Exclamation 

Wonder or Irony (!) 

Grief | 

Interrogation § or 2 



Doubt (?) 

Pleasantry % 

Hyphen ^ 

Parenthesis f \ 

Brackets [ 

Obsolescent p j 

Dash ^ 



PERIOD. 

Eem. 1. (a) The first mark of a period should be made quite small. It is em- 
ployed, in preference to any other sign, in the Corresponding Style. It has a neat 
appearance when properly made, and is readily distinguished from phonographic 
words, (b) The second sign of a period is employed chiefly by reporters. It may 
be occasionally used instead of a colon or semicolon, (c) Instead of the long sigu 
for a period, some reporters employ this sign y^ It is, however, inferior to the 

long stroke in two important respects : it is not so readily made, and is not so dis- 
tinct and conspicuous. 

Eem. 2. Period after Common Letters.— 'When a period is required immediately 
after common letters, as in writing titles, etc., write very near to them the common 

8ign(.); thus, ^ M, U6.-®., JZ& @). 

INTERROGATION. 

Eem. 3. The first mark of interrogation given above should be employed only 
when the writer prefers to place the sign of a question at the beginning, instead of 
the end, of the interrogation. There is not sufficient advantage, however, to justify 

§ 73. "What marks of punctuation are employed in Phonography ? How many 
are the same as in common print ? [Rem.] What sign is most generally employed, 
in Phonography, as the sign of a period ? How should it be made ? For what is 
the long sign employed ? How do reporters occasionally indicate a colon or semi- 
colon ? What sign do some reporters employ instead of the long sign for the period ? 

Which is the best? How is a period immediately after common letters to be 

written ? W T hen should the first mark of interrogation be employed ? What is 

said as to the advantage of a change from the usual mode of indicating a ques 

3 



50 THE COMPENDIUM. 

the change from the usual practice of placing the Interrogation at the end of a 
question. In most cases, the form of an interrogative sentence or clause is of itself 
sufficient to indicate its character. 

DOUBT. 

Eem. 4. Doubt is indicated, as in common writing and printing, by an Interroga- 
tion inclosed in curves ; thus, (?). Doubt of the accuracy or propriety of remarks 
quoted from the writings of another, is denoted by introducing, at the required 
place, an Interrogation inclosed in brackets ; thus, [?]. 

IRONY—WONDER. 

Eem. 5. An Exclamation within parenthetical curves is employed in Phonog* 
raphy, as in common writing, to denote wonder, irony, contempt ; as, " This accu- 
rate scholar (!), who went to Eton and graduated at Cambridge, has actually made 
a dozen grammatical mistakes within the compass of one short paragraph." Won- 
der at, or contempt of, the remarks quoted from the writings of another, is indicated 
by introducing, at the proper place, an Exclamation inclosed in brackets ; thus, [!] 

PLEASANTRY. 

Eem. 6. In writing, pleasantry may be denoted by the sign given above. In 
printing, an appropriate sign is secured by inverting the common mark of interro- 
gation ; thus, £. 

OBSOLESCENT. 

Eem. 7. The Obsolescent is used to inclose words in the common spelling. Some 
phonographers very improperly employ the Obsolescent instead of the Parenthesis. 

DASH. 
Eem. 8. In Phonography, the dash must be made wave-like, to prevent its being 
mistaken for a phonographic Kay. 



ACCENT— EMPHASIS-CAPITALS. 

§ 79. The Accent of a word may be shown by writing a small cross 
near the accented vowel ; thus, ^' arrows, ~y* arose, (b) It is 
best, however, in marking accents, to use phonetic longhand. 

§ 80. Emphasis is indicated, as in longhand, by one, two, or more 
lines drawn beneath the word or words to be emphasized, (b) A single 
line under a single word should be made wave-like, to prevent its 
being mistaken for Kay. 

tion v How is doubt indicated ? How is it indicated in a quotation ?— — How is 

pleasantry denoted ? How may it be indicated in common printing ? What is 

the Obsolescent ? and for what purpose is it employed ? For what is it improperly 

use( i ? How is the dash distinguished from Kay ? 

§ T9. How is accent indicated ? Write essay, essay' ; affix, affix ; Au'gust, august ; 

arrows, ar6se. 
§ 80. How is emphasis indicated ? When must a single subscript, or underwrite 



PUNCTUATION, ACCENT, NUMBERS, ETC. 51 

Eem. In longhand "copy" for the printer, a single subscript line denotes 
italics; two lines, small capitals; three lines, CAPITALS. Minute directions 
for preparing copy for the printer, and for correcting "proofs," are given in the 
Author's work entitled " Brief Longhand." 

§ 81. A capital letter is denoted in Phonography by two short lines 
under the letter ; thus, ~\~^ Rome, (b) This is generally unneces- 
sary. 



NUMBERS. 

§ 82. Numbers may be expressed phonographically, or by the som - 
mon figures. 

Eem. 1. One, Two, and /Sice.— The numbers one and two are most easily written 
in Phonography; thus, ^_^ one, s two. (The sign for one, as will be subse- 
quently learned, is wn.) The figures 1 and 6, when written singly, will not be 
liable to be mistaken for phonographic characters, if formed thus, J_ (j, 

Eem. 2. Phonographic Numerals. — A mode of expressing numbers more rapidly 
than by the common figures, has been devised by the Author, and is explained in a 
phonographic work entitled "Phonographic Numerals: A System for the Eapid 
Expression of Numbers." 



INITIALS— TITLES— PROPER NAMES. 

§ 83. The initials of names should be written in the common hand, 
or such phonographs employed as will surely indicate the correct long- 
hand initials. 

Eem. 1. If Philip should employ a phonographic Ef for the initial of his 

name, his correspondent will infer therefrom that the initial of his name is F. rather 
than P. ; and, if Philip should fail to get a response to his communication, it will, 
in all probability, be due to his not having written the initial of his name in the 
common hand, or with such a phonograph (namely, Pee) a^s would surely indicate 
the initial letter of his name in the common spelling. George should not employ 
Jay for the initial of his name, for this would indicate ' J' instead of • G.' Gay, 

ten, line be made wave-like ? and for what purpose ? [Rem.] In longhand, what 
is denoted respectively by one, two, and three subscript lines ? 

§ 81. How is a capital letter denoted in Phonography ? Is it generally necessary 
in Phonography, to indicate capitals ? 

§ 82. How, in Phonography, may numbers be expressed ? [Rem.] How is it 
best to write one, two, and six ? What is the form, in Phonography, for the com- 
j mon figures 1 and 6 when written separately ? Why is it necessary to give them 
this particular form ? 

, § S3. How should the initials of names be written ? [Rem.] Carefully read Be- 
I marks 1 and 2. 



52 THE COMPENDIUM. 

however, would surely indieate ' G.' The Chauneeys and Charleses may employ 
Chay for their initials, for this unmistakably iudieates 'C, he common-hand 
initial of their names. The Theodores may employ Ith for the mihal of then- name, 
be auseths U r ely indicates a name commeueing withT. The Cyruses must be 
carefu not to write Es for their initial, for that iudieates SV and the Calebs must 
be equally cautious not to employ Kay for the iuitial of their name, for that would 
suffsest'K.' as the longhand initial. ;».«.„_ 

Rem. 2. The voweWetter initials are best written in the common hand they 
may, however, be indicated phonographically according to the method explamed 
Z t i 61 When the phonographs are employed, it is better to denote by them tho 
names rather than the various sounds of the common vowel-letters used as initials; 
that is, phonographically write a for ' A.,' whether this letter should be he initial 
of Alfred, Augustus, Arthur, or Aaron. In like manner, phonographically, write e 
for 'E ' whether this letter should be the initial of Edith, Ebenezer, Ernest, or 
Eurydice. ' U.' must be written in longhand, or have its name (Yoo) phonograph- 
ically expressed. 

§ 84 The initials of titles should usually be written in the common 

longhand ; thus, ^M., 22M., &.&. 

PROPER NAMES. 
S 85 When the pronunciation of a proper name is doubtful, it should be written in 
the common hand. (6) When a word is written in the common longhand it should 
be inclosed in an Obsolescent, if there could otherwise be doubt as to whether the 
letters were used with their phonetic or with their common value. 

OTHER MARKS USED IN PHONOGRAPHY. 

§ 86. The following signs may be used in Phonography as in the 
common hand : 

Quotation Points "" The Asterisk * 

The Caret A The Obelisk, or Dagger f 

The Index, or Hand - %y= The Double Dagger f 

The Paragraph <£ The Parallels || 

The Section ^ 

Rem 1. For phonographic writing, the Caret should be made quite acute, and 
with strokes sufficiently long to distinguish it from the sign for the diphthong^. 
(See the Phonographic Alphabet, under ' Close Diphthongs.') 

Rem 2 Five of the above illustrations have been cut especially for this work, 
in order to furnish the student with graceful writing forms for the printing signs for 
the Caret (a), Index (&&-), Paragraph (U Section (§), and Asterisk (*). 

Rem. 3. No Apostrophe (') is required for phonographic writing. 

§ 84 How should the initials of titles usually be written ? 

§ 85. How should a proper name be written when its pronunciation ifr doubtful? 
[Rem ] When should longhand words be inclosed in an Obsolescent ? 

§ 86 Make the Quotation Points, the Caret, the Index, the Section, the Asterisk, 
the Paragraph, the Parallel, the Double Dagger, the Obelisk. [Rem.] How, in 
Phonography, must the Caret be made to distinguish it from the angular sign for 
out la any sign required, in Phonography, for the Apostrophe ? 






VOCALIZATION — DIPHTHONGS. 53 



£ I & 



VOCALIZATION-DIPHTHONGS. 

DEFINITION, ENUMERATION, AND CLASSIFICATION. 

§ 87. A Diphthong may be denned as a coalition or union of two 
simple vowel-sounds, pronounced in one syllable ; as in oil, out, feud. 

Eem. 1. The vowels composing a diphthong are called its elements. 

Eem. 2. The word Diphthong does not necessarily denote a peculiar union of vow- 
els only. It may be appropriately applied to corresponding combinations of two 
consonants, as of d and zh, as in edge—edzh. The term, however, is usually and 
conveniently employed, without a restrictive word, to denote vowel-diphthongs 
only. When reference is made to similar combinations of consonants, the words 
consonantal diphthongs' should be employed. 

Eem. 3. Diphthong is derived from the Greek bity&oyy og (dlphthonggos), a word 
cc mposed of dig (double) and (pQoyyog (fthonggos) a sound. The etymology of the 
word, therefore, indicates dif thong as its correct pronunciation. 

Eem. 4. Dr. K. M. Eapp, a profound phonologist, in defining the conditions 
necessary in order that two vowels should constitute a diphthong, says : " First, the 
diphthong must constitute a single syllable ;" and secondly, "the accent must fall 
upon the first of the two component vowels. " 

§ 88. The diphthongs may be divided, with reference to the inti- 
macy of the connection of their elements, into Close, and Open, diph- 
thongs. 

1. Of the Close Diphthongs. 

§ 89. The close diphthongs are those denoted by italics in z'sle, oil, 
out, new. 

Eem. 1. It will be seen, by reference to the Phonographic Alphabet, that the ele- 
ments of the close diphthongs are short vowels ; while only one of the elements of 
the open diphthongs is short. 

§ 87. "What is a diphthong ? Give some examples of diphthongs. [Eem.] "What 
are the sounds composing a diphthong called ? May the word Diphthong be appro- 
priately applied to close combinations of two consonants ? Give some examples of 
consonantal diphthongs. "What is the general use of the term Diphthong ? From 
what Greek words is the word Diphthong derived ? What is its correct pronuncia- 
tion ? "What conditions are defined by Dr. Eapp as necessary for the formation of 
a diphthong ? 

§ 83. How may the diphthongs be divided with reference to the intimacy of the 
connection of their elements ? 

§ 89. What are the close diphthongs ? [Eem.] What is said in respect to the 
quantity of the elements of the close diphthongs ? How, in respect of the quantity 
of their elements, do they differ from the open diphthongs? 



L L 

i 



54: THE COMPENDIUM. 

§ 90. I. — The diphthong denoted by i in isle and ice, and by ai in aisle, is com- 
posed of the vowel of ask (not at) and it, the voice accenting the first and gliding 
to the second. 

Rem. Various peculiar pronunciations of i are heard, namely, ei, ai, ui, very rare- 
ly 6i, and 6i (o denoting the vowel of whole).— See Introduction to Phonotypy and 
Phonography, § 32. 

§ 91. 01. — The diphthong represented by oi in oil, and by oy in boy, is composed 
of the vowel of on (o) and it (i), the voice accenting the first and gliding to the 
Becond. 

§ 92. OU.— The diphthong represented by ou in out consists of the vowels of on 
(o) and foot (u), the voice accenting the first and gliding to the second. 

§ 93. EW.— The diphthong represented by ew mfeio, and u in duty, is composed 
of the vowels of it (i) and foot (u), the voice accenting the first and gliding to the 
second. 

Rem. In English Phonography, this pure diphthong is represented by a sign 
equivalent to yoo. Hence duty, tube, are spelled dyooty, tyoob, insteady of duty, 
Mbe, This is pronouncing u by its name (Yoo) instead of its proper sound. 

§ 94. From the preceding remarks we arrive at the following 

Table of Close Diphthongs. 

Common Symbols— I, 01, OU, EW. 

Phonetic Symbols— ai, oi, ou, iu. 

Examples— isle, aisle, eye oil, toy owl, out feud, dew, due, -pure, 

2. Of the Open Diphthongs. 
§ 95. The principal open diphthongs are those represented by 
italics in the following words : aye, drawing, deity, clayey, mowy, Owen, 
"Noah, Jjouis. 

Rem. 1. The open diphthongs differ from the close diphthongs in having a long, 
instead of a short, initial element, and, as a consequence, greater quantity, and a 
less intimate connection of their components. 

Rem. 2. The open diphthongs are intermediate between perfect, close diphthongs, 
and a dissyllabic connection of two vowels. They are imperfect diphthongs. Com- 
pared with the close diphthongs, they appear dissyllabic ; but when contrasted with 
undoubted vowel dissyllables, they appear diphthongal. On the one hand, compare 
oMwith*; aye with eye ; aul with the close diphthong oi. On the other hand, 
contrast e'i as in deist with e-V in deistic ; o'e in poet with d-e' in poetic. 

§ 90. "What are the elements of I ? Which element is accented ? Contrast the 
correct pronunciation of i with the diphthong formed by a union of the vowels of 
Vt and it. [Rem.] Give the various incorrect pronunciations of i. 

§ 91. What are the elements of oi ? Which element is accented ? 

§ 92. What are the elements of ou ? 

§ 93. What are the elements of ew ? Which is accented ? [Rem.] In English 
phonography, what sounds are written instead of this pure diphthong ? 

§ 94. Separately pronounce the close diphthongs. 

§ 95. What are the principal open diphthongs ? Give some words in which they 
occur. [Rem.] How do the open diphthongs differ from the close ones ? How do 
they appear when compared with dissyllabic unions of vowels ? when compared 
with perfect diphthongs ? 



VOCALIZATION DIPHTHONGS. 



55 



§ 96. The elements of the open diphthongs are indicated by the phonetic symbols 
in the following 



Table of Open Diphthongs. 

Common Symbols— • ahi, aui, ei 

Phonetic Symbols — £i, oi, 



Examples — 



aye. 



11, 



drawing, deity, 



al, 

ei, 
clayey. 



Common Symbols — oi, 
Phonetic Symbols — ei, 
Examples — snotoy, 



oe, 

ere, 
Owen 



oa, 

era, 

23oa7i, 



Ull. 
"Louis. 



I. CLOSE-DIPHTHONG SIGNS. 



§ 97. The four close diphthongs are represented by small angular 
marks, whose direction and place are indicated by the following illus- 
trations : ^ 
I OI OU EW 



isle, m"sle 



oil 



A| 

out 



dew, dwpe. 



Eem. 1. The diphthong-signs should be written in an invariable direction, what 
ever may be the direction of the consonant to which they are placed ; that is, the 
sign for I should always open upward ; that for oi and ou, downward ; and that of 
ew, to the right. 

Eem. 2. Both of the strokes of the close-diphthong signs are made light, to corre- 
spond to the short elements composing the diphthongs which they denote. 

Eem. 3. Each of the close diphthongs is written in the place of its last element; 
hence, ai (I) and oi are written in the first plaee, because this is the place of i ; 
while ou and iu (ew) are written in the third place, because this is the place of 
u (do). 

Eem. 4. The sound of ew in new never begins a syllable. 



§ 96. Pronounce separately the open diphthongs. Give their elements sepa- 
rately. 

§ 97. How are the four close diphthongs represented ? "What, as shown by the 
illustration, is the direction of I ? of oi t oi out of ew ? What, as shown by the 
illustration, is the place of I ? of oi t of ou ? of ew ? Write i, oi, ou, ew, I, ou, oi, ew. 
[Eem.] What is said with reference to the direction of the diphthong-signs when 
written beside consonants of different directions ? How should the sign for I inva- 
riably open— upward or downward ? the sign for oi f for ou ? How should the sign 
for ew invariably open ? Why are both of the strokes of the close-diphthong signs 
made light ? How is the fact that both of the elements of the close diphthongs are 
short indicated by their signs ? How is the place of each of the close diphthongs 
determined ? Why are I and oi written in the first place ? Why are ou and ew 
written in the third place ? Does ew ever begin a syllable ? 



56 THE COMPENDIUM 



II. OPEN-DIPHTHONG SIGNS. 

§ 98. The open diphthongs are represented by angular marks, whose 
form, place, and direction are shown by the following illustrations : 

ahi am ei ai 61 oe 6a 061 

v f A l 1 1 H H <l H 

si oi ai si ei ere era uii 

aye drawing deity clayey snowy Owen Noah "Louis. 

Examples. — *C^^^s solfaing (present participle of solfa, to 
sing), /£"]' laity, ^^ being, * Caughey, ^ snowy, ^^ Ow- 
en, ^_^ Noah, ^" Louis. 

Eem. 1. The preceding list of open diphthongs does not include all the open diph- 
thongs of even the English language ; but the additional ones— such as e'a, au'a, 
66'a, 66'e — are so easily represented by the signs of their elements, that distinct 
signs for them are not required in the representation of English. 

Eem. 2. The open-diphthong signs are made heavy on one side or the other, 
according to the convenience of the writer, to indicate that one of the elements (the 
first) of the diphthong represented, is long. As the chief difference between ahi 
and ai (I), or aui and oi, is in respect to the quantity of their elements, this fact is 
indicated by a corresponding difference between their signs in respect of the heavi- 
ness of their strokes. Turn to the Phonographic Alphabet, and compare the signs 
for ahi and ai ; aui and oi. 

CONCURRENT VOWELS WRITTEN WITH SEPARATE SIGNS. 

§ 99. When two vowels occurring together are represented by sepa- 
rate signs, that which is heard next before or after the consonant 
should be written nearest to the consonant-sign ; thus, -I iota, 
v |* idea. 

Eem. 1. The open diphthongs presented in the preceding section may be repre- 



§ 98. How are the open diphthongs represented ? What, as shown by the illus- 
tration, is the place and direction of ahi ? aui ? ei ? ai ? 61 ? oe ? 6a ? 661 ? What is 
the place of ahi? aui? ei? ai? 61? oe? 6a? 661? Write * solfaing, being, deity, 
Caughey, Ow'en, No'ah, Go r a, Geno'a, Louis, la'ity, snowy.' [Eem.] Does this list 
of open diphthongs include all the open diphthongs in the .English language? 
If not, give some words containing other open diphthongs. How may the additional 
open diphthongs be represented ? Why is one stroke of the signs for the open diph- 
thongs made heavy ? Which stroke should be made heavy ? How does the sign 
for ahi differ from that for I ? How does the sign for aui differ from that for oi ? 

§ 99. When two vowels occurring together are to be represented by separate signs, 
how are they written so as to determine which is to be read first? Which vowel is 
written nearest the consonant-stroke ? [Eem.] May the open diphthongs be repre- 



VOCALIZATION DIPHTHONGS. 57 

sented, in accordance with this principle, by the signs of their elements ; thus, 
* — «" Noah. 

Eem. 2. When two vowels occur together between two consonants, one should be 
written to each eonsonant-sign, if that can be done conveniently ; thus, ^=- vowel, 

V-^ poem; otherwise, both should be written to the same consonant-sign; 
thus, \y~ duel, J/— towel. 

§100. Names of the Diphthong-Signs.— -The diphthong-signs should be named 
by the sounds they represent, and not " long I, owe-eye, owe-you, e-double-you, 
a-aitch- eye, a-you-eye," etc. 

CERTAIN DIPHTHONG-SIGNS JOINED. 

§ 101. When the junction would be easy, initial I or oi may be 
joined to a following stroke, (b) and ou or iu (ew), to a preceding one ; 

thus, ] eyed, /" oil, \^ bow, ^ cue. 



WORD-SIGNS AND CONTRACTIONS. 

1. DIPHTHONG WORD-SIGNS. 

§ 102. The signs for ahi, l, and ou are employed as signs for the fol- 
lowing words : 

v v -v 

A 



ay, aye I, eye [high] how. 

Eem. 1. The sign for eye may be joined to Zee for eyes; to Dee for eyed; and to 
Ing for eying. 

Eem. 2. No confusion results from writing high the same as eye, that is, without 
the h-dot. (b) The I may be joined to En-Iss for highness; to Tee for height; 
to Ar for higher, (c) The first stroke of the I may be joined to Lay for highly. 



sented by the signs of their elements, in accordance with this principle ? Write, 
in accordance with this principle, the words 'No'ah, Go'a, Owen.' When two 
vowels occur together between two consonants, how should they be written ? When 
they can not be conveniently divided between the two consonants how should they 
be written ? Write ' vowel, poem, duel, towel.' 

§ 100. How should the diphthong-signs be named ? 

§ 101. When may I or oi be joined to a following stroke ? When may ou or iu 
(eio) be joined to a preceding stroke ? Join the diphthongs in writing ' eyed, eyes, 
eying, height, highness (§ 102, Eem. 2), oily, ire, ivy, vow, Dow, bough, cue.' 

§ 102. For what word is ahl employed as a sign ? What words are represented 
by 1 1 How is high represented ? What word is represented by the sign for ou t 
[Eem.] Write eyes, eyed, eying. How may high be written? Write highness— 

3* 



58 THE COMPENDIUM. 

Rem. 3. The word ay r or aye, when signifying yes, yea, certainly, is pronounced 
oM. (&) The word aye, signifying always, ever, is pronounced a. This may be 

written thus, •J, (c) Ahi may be joined to Zee for ayes. 

Eem. 4. Position of Aye and I. — The signs for these words, as indicated above, 
should be written in the first position (§ 39, 1 a) ; that is, with double-line paper, 
so that they will barely touch the lower side of the upper line ; with single-line 
paper, so that their tops will just touch an imaginary line running, at the height of 
Tee, above the line of writing. 

ABBREVIATED 1 JOINED. 

§ 103. The pronoun 2* is sometimes joined to a following word, by 
one stroke of the sign, written, according to convenience, in the direc- 
tion of Pee, Tee, or Chay ; thus, N ^ s I am, I do, f I think. 

Eem. The reporter does, and the practiced writer of the Corresponding Style 
may, join / to a preceding word, or between two words, by one stroke of the sign, 

written, according to convenience, in the direction of Tee or Kay ; thus, ^-, if I, 

^— ^ may I. 

2, CONTRACTIONS WITH DIPHTHONGS. 

§ 104. A single stroke of the signs for %, ou, and ew may be joined to 
the phonographs Lay and En for the following words : 

£.. — v_ 

highly, I will now new, knew. 



new, in the second (see § 39, 2). 

Eem. 2. Contraction and Word-Sign. — For the sake of distinction, the term 
Contraction is employed to denote an imperfect representation consisting of two or 
more strokes (whether consonant or vowel strokes) ; while the term Word-Sign is 
applied to an imperfect representation containing but a single stroke, with or with- 
out a hook, loop, or circle. Hence, the imperfect representations for highly, now, 
and new are contractions ; while those of I, how t subject, this is,, etc., are word- 
signs. 

higher— height— highly. How should you write ay, or aye, signifying yes, cer- 
tainly f How should you write aye when it signifies always, ever t "Write ayes 
(the plural of aye). What is the position of the signs for ay and eye ? 

§ 103. How is the pronoun / sometimes expressed in connection with a following 
word ? In such cases, in what direction is the single stroke written ? [Rem.] In 
what direction is the abbreviated I written, when / is joined to a preceding word ? 
Write, in accordance with the principles of this section, 'I do, I shall, I wish, I am, 
if I, had I, shall I, may I.' 

§ 104. What is the contraction for highly t for now f for new or Jcnevi ? [Eem.] In 
what position should highly be written ? In what position should now and new be 
written ? What is denoted by the term Contraction ? What is denoted by the term 
Word-Sign ? Is the sign for now a contraction or a word-sign ? If it is a contrac- 
tion, how is it determined to be such ? Are the signs for / and how word-signs or 
contractions ? If word-signs, how are they known to be such ? 



VOCALIZATION. 59 

METHOD OF PLACING VOWELS BETWEEN CONSONANT 

STKOKES. 

§ 105. Vowels, whether simple or compound, occurring between 
two consonant-strokes, are written thus : 

1. All first-place, and 

long second-place, vowels are written 
after the first consonant. 

Examples. — S_^ beam, : ^^ king, [ : tick, y \f ball, p"~ doll, 
^-^/ mire, >C/^ boil, ^r> — make, ~^£-^ roam. 

2. All third-place, and 

short second-place, vowels are written 
before the second consonant. 

Examples. — ~^ car, ^ bat, /) rouge, / — L rook, /] rude, 

\?~ pull, ^^-^ neck, ( ^\^ love. 

§ 106. In other words— 

1. First-place Vowels are written after the first consonant. 

2. Second-place Vowels when long are written after the first consonant ; when 
short, before the second consonant. The length of a second-place vowel is thus de- 
termined by position, if it should not be indicated by size. 

3. Third-place Vowels are written before the second consonant. 

Eem. The object of this rule is to insure uniformity of writing and to avoid the 
ambiguity which has been found to result frequently from its non-observance. The 
effect of the rule is to take the vowel from the angles, where it would be doubtful 
with what stroke it should be read. If in writing rack, for example, the vowel were 

to be placed after the Eay ; thus, /~* rack ; instead of before Kay, as the rule 

would require, it would be doubtful whether the vowel, unless written with great 
care, should be read as a after Eay, or as i after Kay. But, on the other hand, 
the strict observance of the rule would, in some cases, bring the vowel into an angle, 
and thus result in the very ambiguity which the rule generally avoids. Hence, the 
following rule. 

§§ 105, 106. Eepeat the rule for placing vowels between two consonant-strokes. 
Where, in such case, should you write the first-place vowels? the long second-place 
vowels ? the short second-place vowels ? all third-place vowels ? When occurring 
between two consonant-strokes, to which stroke should e be written ? If written 
after the first stroke, why ? To which should au or 6 be written ? "Why ? Should 
■ah be written after the first or before the second ? and why ? Should e or u be 
written after the first stroke or before the second ? If before the second, why ? 
Should a or o be written after the first stroke or before the second ? If after the 
first, why ? [Eem.] What is the object of this rule ? What is the effect of the rule ? 
If, in writing rack, the vowel were placed after Eay instead of before Kay, how 
would the vowel be liable to be read, unless written with great care? Would not 
| the observance of the rule in some cases result in ambiguity ? 



60 THE COMPENDIUM. 

§ 107. Occasionally, in writing words of more than one syllable, 
greater clearness will result from a non-observance of the rules re- 
lating to the first-place and third-place vowels ; as in y*-^ 1 ar- 
senic, s -<C calmly. 

Eem. The parts of compound words should be vocalized the same, if possible, as 
when separate, even though this should require the violation of the rule of § 105. 
For instance, in vocalizing En-Zee for uneasy, it seems better to place e before Zee 
rather than after En, because, by so doing, we secure the natural syllabication of the 
word ; thus, un-easy. 

CAUTION. 

§ 108. In such words as J: — task, <£ — desk, jZ_ dusk, it should be observed 

that the vowels do not occur between two long consonants ; but between two conso- 
nants, the second of which is represented by a circle ; hence the rule of § 105 does 
not apply, and the vowels of whatever place must be written by the stroke next 
which they are heard. If, in these cases, the vowels were placed before the Kay, 
the words would have to be read tsak, dsek, dsuk. See §§ 56, 61. 

DIVIDING CONCURRENT VOWELS BETWEEN TWO STROKES. 

§ 109. When two vowels occur between two consonant-strokes, one 
vowel is written to each consonant, if that can be conveniently done ; 

otherwise, both vowels are written by one ; thus, \^ poem, S^- 
vowel, but 1^ duel, VA towel, ^^ power. 



METHOD OF BEADING WORDS OF SEVERAL CONSONANTS. 

§ 110. In reading words composed of more than one consonant- 
stroke, read the first stroke (with the vowel or vowels beside it, if 
any) as though it were a single word ; then read the next in the same 
manner; and so on till the word is completed. Thus, ^/ ~ = 

^_^ am, ^ eri, — rka = America. \q_p = \o biz, ^_p ness = 

business. \0' = "\ P°> C 1*» ) si =po-li-si = policy. 

§ 107. Does any advantage ever result frofn the non-observance of the rules for 
placing the first-place and third-place vowels ? [Rem.] How should the parts of 
compound words be vocalized ? "Why, in vocalizing En-Zee for uneasy, does it 
seem best to place the e before the Zee ? 

§ 108. "When only one of the consonants between which a vowel occurs is repre- 
sented by a stroke, how must the vowels be written? Where must the vowel of 
dusk be written ? of tush ? of -desk ? 

§ 109. How are two vowels occurring between two consonant-strokes to be writ- 
ten ? In case they can not be conveniently divided between the two strokes, how 
should they be written ? 

§ 110. "What method of reading is recommended in reading words composed of 



VOCALIZATION. 61 

Eem. 1. It will be of very great advantage to the student to adhere strictly to this 
method of reading, for by it the longest words may be read as easily as words hav- 
ing but a single consonant. 

Eem. 2. Caution.— Do not acquire the pernicious habit of reading a portion of a 
word and ' guessing' the remainder. Do nothing by guess-work. Shirk no labor 
requisite for advancement in knowledge ; determine to enjoy the pleasure of over- 
coming the obstacles to your progress. 



PREFIXES AND AFFIXES. 

PREFIXES l CON' OR ' COM' AND * ACCOM/ 

§ 111. A light dot placed at the commencement of a word signifies 
con or com; (b) a heavy dot, accom ; thus, J conscience, com- 

mit, ' accommodate, \v accompany. 



Eem. 1. The writer should accustom himself to writing the-signs for these pre- 
fixes before commencing the remainder of the word. 

Eem. 2. The practiced reporter usually omits the signs for con, com, or accom ; 
and experiences no difficulty therefrom in reading his notes. 

AFFIXES ING, INGS. 

§ 112. The affix ing may be expressed by a light dot at the end of a 

word ; (b) the affix ings, by a heavy dot ; thus, | v dying, doings. 

(c) Instead of the heavy dot, Ing-Iss, \j , is generally employed, 

when it can be conveniently joined ; thus, K sayings. 

Eem. The dot should not be employed for ing or ing 8 when it is not an affix; 
that is, when a complete word does not remain when ing or ings is omitted. Hence 
the dot must not be employed for ings in ring, sing, kings, wings. (&) As a gene- 
ral rule, the affix ing, when it forms part of a noun, is best written with the stroke 
Ing, when it can be conveniently joined ; as in a casing, the raising, an etching, etc. 



more than one consonant-stroke ? [Eem.] What is the advantage of the method 
recommended ? 

§ 111. How is the prefix com and con denoted ? What is indicated by a heavy 
dot at the commencement of a word ? by a light dot ? In writing a word with a 
prefix con, com, or accom, which should be written first— the prefix? or the remain- 
der of the word ? What is said as to the omission of these prefixes by the reporter ? 

§ 112. How may the affix ing be expressed ? What is denoted by a heavy dot at 
the end of a word? by a light dot? When is ings represented by Ing-Iss ? Write 
sayings. [Rem.] When should not the dot be employed for ing or ings ? Should 
the dot be employed for ing in sing, ring, king t How can ing be determined to 
be an affix ? What is said with regard to writing ing when it forms a portion of a 
noun ? Give some nouns ending in the affix ing. 



62 THE COMPENDIUM. 

-ING THE. 

§ 113. The affix ing and a following the may be expressed by writing 

the tick for the — namely, N or / according ta convenience, in the 

place of the dot for ing; thus, J^ showing the, \>- passing the. 

Ebm. Of the two directions of the tick for the, that one should be chosen which is 
most variant from the direction of the preceding stroke. 

-ING A-N-D. 

§ 114. The affix ing and a following a, an, or and, may be expressed 
by writing the tick for a-n-d— -namely, _ or j according to conve- 
nience — in the place of the dot for ing ; thus, *| eating a-n-d, "™" 1 giv- 
ing a-n-d. 

Eem. Of the two directions of the tick for a-n-d, that one should be chosen which 
is most variant from the direction of the preceding stroke. 

§ 113. How may the tick the be written to express a preceding ing t How, for 
this purpose, should the tick^for the be written ? Write showing the, passing the, 
doing the, gvoing the, [Rem.] What direction of the tick is best for ing the T 

§ 114. How may the tick for a-n-d be written to express a preceding ing f Write 
eating a-n-d, giving a-n-d. [Bern.] What direction of the tick is best for mg a-n-d t 



DIFFERENT SIGNS AND DIRECTIONS. 63 



DIFFERENT SIGNS AND DIRECTIONS. 

§ 115. By providing two or more signs for several sounds, and by allowing cer- 
tain signs to be written in different directions, Phonography not only avoids many 
difficult forms and junctions which would otherwise be required, but affords oppor- 
tunity, in many cases, for distinguishing, by difference of outline merely between 
words of the same consonants, which must otherwise be written alike. 

I. DIFFERENT MODES OF EXPRESSING W AND Y. 



1. W AND Y EXPRESSED BY STROKES. 

§ 116. The strokes for w and y are ~^\ , f~~ \ which the student 

will be assisted in remembering by observing that tney are respect- 
ively portions of the capital scripts for 

W and Y. 

Rem. These strokes, if named by syllables, should be called Way, Yay. See § 14. 

USES OF THE WAY-STROKE. 
§ 11T-. The Way-stroke is usually employed in the following cases : 

1. In all words except we, in which w is the only consonant; as in ~^* weigh, 
"^ woe. 

2. When initials is followed by s; as in ~^* weighs, ""^ waste, dt wasp. 

3. When initial $w are the only consonants, or when they are followed by any 
other consonant (except r) which can be conveniently joined to the Way-stroke; 

as in ^ sway, J sways, ^ sweep, ^V^" swallow, ^^-^ swim, 

°\^, swing. 

4. When w follows an initial vowel ; as in j* awoke. 

\ 

§ 115. What advantages does Phonography secure by providing several signs for 
certain sounds, and by writing several signs in different directions ? 

§ 116. What are the stroke-signs for w and y t How may they be fixed in the 
memory ? [Rem.] What is the syllable-name of the stroke for w? for y t 

§ 117. In what cases is Way employed ? Write * weigh, woe, weighs, waist, 
1 wasp ; sway, sways, sweep, swallow, swim, swing ; awoke, awake.' 



64 



THE COMPENDIUM. 



USES OF THE YAY-STROKE, 
§ 118. The Tay-stroke is employed principally in the folic wing cases : 

1. In all words, except ye and you, in which y is the only consonant ; as in 
(• yea, (^ yew. 

2. In the words yes, yeas, yeast, yews, and a few others in which initial y is fol- 
lowed by *. 



3. When y follows an initial vowel ; as in ^C oyer. 



2. W AND Y EXPRESSED BY BRIEF SIGNS JOINED. 

§ 119 For convenience and speed of writing, brief signs have been 

provided for the sounds of w and y, namely, c or > for w, and u or 

ry for y. 

Eem. For convenience of conversation, and to avoid the injurious practice of 
calling these signs Double- Yoo and Wy, the names "Wen and Wuh have been pro- 
vided for the brief signs of w ; and Teh and Yuh for the brief sign of y. They may 
be called Brief Way and Brief Yay, though these names do not indicate the direc- 
tion of the curvature of the signs. See § 14, Eems. 1, 2. 

JOINING THE BRIEF WAY. 

§ 120. The brief Way may be joined at the beginning of consonant- 
strokes — 

1. As a Hook — to Lay, El, Ray, Em, or En ; thus, *(~ wail, ^/ 

wore, c ~ i ^ we may, ^L^ wine ; in which case it is called the Way- 
Hook. 

2. At an Angle — to all other letters ; thus, -1 wet, •] weighed, 

/ wedge, * — week, , i woke, ^_ wave. 
Eem. When brief Way is joined at an angle with a stroke, either Weh or Wuh 



§ 118. Eepeat the rule for the use of Yay. Are ye and you written with Yay ? 
Write ' yea, yew, yes, yeast, yews, yeas, oyer.' 

§ 119. Make the brief sign for w and y. For what purpose are these signs pro- 
vided ? [Eem.] What are the syllable-names of the brief signs for w and y f. What 
may they be called besides Weh and Yen ? 

§ 120. How may brief Way be joined at the beginning of Lay ? El ? Eay ? Em ? 
En ? How may it be joined to all other letters ? Join it to Tee, Jay, Ef, Kay, Thee, 
Ing. Write 'wail, wine, wore, wear, wire.' Write 'weave, wedge, weighed, 
wake, watch, web.' [Eem.] When brief Way is joined at an angle, with reference 
to what is the choice of Weh or Wiih made ? When brief Way is joined as a hook, 



DIFFERENT SIGNS AND DIRECTIONS. 65 

may be used, according to convenience of joining. (5) Brief "Way joined as a hook 
takes the direction of the stroke. 

Rem. 2. Em, En, Lay, and Ray in connection with the Way-hook may be named 
Wem, Wen, Wei, Wer. 

JOINING THE BRIEF YAY. 

§ 121. The brief Yay must always be joined at an angle; thus, 
v^s yawn, y Yale, .^ Yates, ^ yore, n j_ yoke, /C yel- 
low, ^ yarrow. 

Rem. When brief Yay is joined, either Yeh or Yah may be chosen, according to 
convenience of joining. 

METHOD OF READING BRIEF WAY OR YAY JOINED TO A CONSONANT-STROKE. 

§ 122. In reading a consonant-stroke with a brief "Way or Yay 
joined at the beginning, read the "Way or Yay first, and next, the con- 
sonant-stroke with the vowel or vowels beside it, precisely as though 
no Way or Yay were joined; thus, .1 = w- at = weight ; V^~ = 

y-aul = yawl ; • U S = w-eri = weary. 

USES OF THE WAY-HOOK. 

§ 123. The Way-hook should usually be employed in the following cases : 

1. For w at the commencement of a word, when I, r, m, or n is the second con- 
sonant ; as in § 120, 1. 

2. When initial sw is followed by r ; thus, gV swore. 

3. Whenever the hook can be conveniently used for w between two consonant- 
strokes, the second of which is Lay, Ray, Em, or En ; thus, J^ twain, i^ Ed- 
win, -$/ acquire. 

USES OF THE BRIEF WAY JOINED AT AN ANGLE. 

§ 124. The brief Way joined at an angle is employed — 

1. Usually for an initial w followed by any consonant except I, r, m, n, or final 5 
ore; asin§ 120,2. 

2. Occasionally in the middle of a word ; as in ^^J unweighed. 

what direction is given to it ? Which is most convenient for joining with Bee— We*h 
or Wuh ? Which is most convenient for joining with Kay ? with Ish ? with Chay ? 

§ 121. How must the brief Tay be joined ? Join it to En, Ar, Lay, Ray, Tee, Kay, 
Em. Write ; yawn, yellow, Yates, yore, yoke, yarrow, yam.' [Rem.] With refer- 
ence to what is the choice made between Yeh and Yuh, when brief Yay is joined ? 

§ 122. Repeat the directions for reading brief Way or Yay joined at the beginning 
of a consonant-stroke. After the brief Way or Yay has been read, how should the 
following consonant-stroke and the vowels beside it be read ? Write weight, yawl, 
weary. 

§§ 123, 124. Specify the cases for the use of the Way-hook. Specify the cases for 
the use of brief Way joined. [Rem.] How may the reporter, without lifting the pen, 
express the ensonants of sweet, switch, etc. V 




66 THE COMPENDIUM. 

Rem. In order to secure the complete consonant-expression of such words as sweety 
switch, without lifting the pen, the reporter may prefix a circle to the brief Way ; 

using, for instance, Iss-Weh-Tee | as an outline for sweet, sweat, etc. 

USES OF THE BRIEF TAY JOINED. 
§ 125. The brief Tay joined to a consonant-stroke is employed to a limited extent 
for an initial y followed by any consonant except final sots; as in § 121. 

3. W AND Y EXPEESSED BY BKIEF SIGNS IN THE VOWEL 

PLACES. 
§ 126. It is occasionally desirable to write the brief Way and Yay, 
the same as the vowel-signs, beside the consonant-strokes, the follow- 
ing vowel being indicated without writing it, according to the method 
explained in the following sections : 

Brief Wat Written in the Vowel-Places. 

§ 127. W Followed by Dot, or First-Group, Vowels.— The particular first- 
group vowel following w may be indicated by writing c Weh (the 
first part of C \V" ) in that vowel's place, making this sign heavy, if 
the vowel is long ; light, if the vowel is short ; thus, c f sweet, y 
switch, <f swayed, cf 5 sweat. 

§ 128. W Followed by Dash, or Second-Group, Vowels.— -The particular 

SECOND-group vowel following w may be indicated by writing > Wuh 

(the second part of ~\*f> ) in that vowel's place, making this sign 

heavy, if the vowel is long ; light, if the vowel is short ; thus, — walk, 

Y watch, J wooed, J wood. 

§ 125. "What is said of the use of brief Tay joined ? 

§ 126. Is brief Way or Yay ever written in the vowel-places ? If so written, how 
is the following vowel indicated ? 

§127. When brief Way is written in the vowel-places, how is it indicated that" a 
first-group, or dot, vowel follows the w f What kind of vowel is denoted by Weh 
written in the vowel-places ? If a Weh so written indicates a dot-vowel, how is the 
particular vowel, as e, a, or ah, indicated ? How is it indicated that a long or short 
vowel follows ? In what place must Weh be written to indicate that the following 
vowel is e or I ? if e, should it be made heavy or light ? How should it be made if 
the following vowel is I ? Write < sweet, switch, swayed, sweat.' 

§ 128. When brief Way is written in a vowel-place, how is the particular second- 
group, or dash, vowel following the w denoted ? Which of Weh or Wuh written in 
the vowel-places denotes that a dash-vowel follows ? In what vowel-place must 
Wuh be written to indicate a following au or 6 ? How should it be made when a 
long dash-vowel follows ? when a short dash-vowel follows ? Write ' walk, watch, 
wooed, wood.' 



DIFFEBENT SIGNS AND DIRECTIONS 



67 



Brief Yat Written in the Vowel-Places. 

§ 129. Y Followed by Dot, or First-Group, Vowels. — The particular first- 
group vowel following y may be indicated by writing ^ Yeh (a part 
of [ ^\ in its first, or natural, position) in the place of that vowel, 
making this sign heavy, if the vowel is long ; light, if the vowel is 
short ; thus, ^ year, ^f Yale, y^ yell, ^-^ yam. 

§ 130. Y Followed by Dash, or Second-Group, Vowels. — The particular 
SECOND-group vowel following y maybe indicated by writing h Yuh 
(a part of yia its second, or inverted, position £', ) in the place of that 
vowel, making this sign heavy, if the vowel is long ; light, if the vowel 
is short ; thus, ~a\ yore, <—/ yon, ^^ young, ( youth, ^j unite= 
yoonite. 

§ 131. table showing brief way and tay written in the places of 

THE DIFFERENT DOT-VOWELS. 



Long— # | .J J 



Short- 



Si 



WJ 



Wl 



W8 



we 



c I 
W£ 



wa 



y* J & 



J 
y-B 



y 1 



ye ya 



§ 132.„ TABLE SHOWING BRIEF WAY AND YAY WRITTEN IN THE PLACES 0* 
THE DIFFERENT DASH-VOWELS. 



Long — 



Short— 



G 



UI 



u 



wo 



wo 



-1 


>l 


WOP 


WU1 


3 


J 


WD 


WH 



yo ya* yui 



yo 



yn yu 



§ 129. How must brief Yay be written to indicate, without writing it, the particu- 
lar vowel of the first group following the yt How must it be written to indicate 
the particular dash-vowel following the y t Which of Yeh or Yuh is used in the 
vowel-places to indicate dot-vowels ? Write l year, yell, Yale, yam.' 

§ 130. Which of Yeh or Yuh written in the vowel-places is employed to indicate 
a following dash- vowel ? How is the particular dash-vowel following Yuh indi- 
cated ? In what place must Yuh be written to indicate a following au or 6? o or 
tit door 66 ? How should it be made when a long vowel follows ? when a short 
vowel follows ? "Write ' yore, yon, young, youth, unite.' 

§§ 131, 132. Observe how we, wa, wah— ye ya, yah, correspond, in respect of theii 



68 THE COMPENDIUM. 

BRIEF WAY AND YAT JOINED TO THE OPTIONAL VOWEL-SIGNS. 

§ 133. The brief Way and Yay are joined to the optional vowel- 
signs at an angle ; thus, 

J .1 ^1 «l 

wo wa we wo 



yo ya vb yo 

Rem. When brief Way or Tay is joined to a vowel-sign, either Weh or "Wuh, 
Yen or Yuh, may be employed, according to convenience of joining. 

BRIEF YAY JOINED TO THE ANGLES FOR I, 01, OU. 

§ 134. The brief Yay may be joined to the signs for i, oi, ou, thus : 



n ye y^ 

USE OF THE BRIEF WAY AND YAY DETACHED. 

§ 135. (a) The brief Way or Yay is usually employed where previous rules (§§ 117, 
118, 123-125) would not authorize the use of a stroke, or a brief sign joined. (&) Brief 
Way detached, is usually employed in the following cases : 

1. For the sound of w between an initial s and a following t, d, ch, j, f, or «? ; as 
in | sweet, c /° switch, *\ swayed. 

2. For the sound of w between two stroke-consonants, if in such case it would not 
be allowable or convenient to represent it by the Way-hook; thus, y^~ dwell, 

twig, - 1 quake, - — ' quill ; but >yS acquire, .J^ Edwin. 

YA USED FOR 1A. 

§ 136. The sound of y in connection with a vowel so nearly resembles e or ! in a 

position, with e, a, ah. In this respect, compare wi, we, wa— yi, ye, ya, with i, e, a. 
Observe also that Weh and Teh, which are written in the vowel-places to denote a 
following first-group vowel, have in their names the vowel e, which is one of the 
first-group vowels ; while u, one of the second-group vowels, is contained in the 
names of Wuh and Yuh, which are written in the vowel-places to denote following 
second-group vowels. Compare, in respect of their position, wau, wo, woo — yau, 
yo, yoo, with au, 6, 66 ; also, wo, wu, woo — yo, yii, yoo, with 6, u, 66. 

§ 133. How are brief Way and Yay joined to the optional vowel-signs? Join 
brief Way to the signs of the vowels of air, at, earth, none. Join brief Yay to the 
same. [Rem.] Which of Weh or Wuh, Yeh or Yuh, is chosen when brief Way or 
Yay requires to be joined to a vowel-sign ? 

§ 134. Join brief Yay with the signs for I, oi, ou. 

§ 135. Specify the cases for the employment of brief Way and Yay detached. 
Write 'sweet, switch, swayed, dwell, twig, quake, quill, acquire, Edwin.' 



DIFFERENT SIGNS AND DIRECTIONS. G9 

similar situation, that no confusion, but considerable convenience, is found to result 
from employing 

ya, yo, yo, yu,> etc., 



Hence we may write 



for ea, ed, 


eo, eu, 


or la, 10, 


16, iu, etc. 


Armim/an for Armin^n 


inferior 


" inferior 


theology 


" theology 


Arabia 


" Arabia 


odyus 


" odious , 


opyate 


" opiate. 


' DISTINGUISHED FROM 'EW.' 



'TOO 

§ 137. The student should carefully distinguish between the different uses, in 
the common spelling, of u, eu, ew, ue, etc. They sometimes represent in (eio), a 
pure diphthong (§ 93), and sometimes represent a combination of a consonant, y, 
with a vowel, do or 66 — usually do in accented syllables, and 66 in unaccented sylla- 
bles. To avoid error in these cases, the writer has only to observe a correct pro- 
nunciation carefully, and then accurately represent it. Observe and compare the 
following words : < 

Ew. Too, Y66. 

mute = mewt union = yoon'ion unite = y o^siW 

dew = dew Ewing = Yoo'ing nephew =ner h'yoS 

feud = fewd euphony = yoo'phony euphonic = yodphon'ic. 

Rem. 1. The diphthong eio never begins a syllable. 

Rem. 2. Euphonic Changes from Ew to Too, or from Too to Ew. — The pure 
diphthong ew (iu) seems to require the primary accent to sustain it; and having 
lost that in the course of derivation, and having been brought at the beginning of a 
syllable, it falls into yoo ; that is, its first element is changed into the c T .osely related 
consonant y. Hence the ew (iu) of refuse', repute' = phonetic refiuz', repiutf, be- 
comes yoo (yu) when it loses the accent in refuse, rep'utable = pho.ietic refyu*, 
rep'yutabel. (b) On the other hand, yoo seemingly will not admit, except at the 
beginning of a word, of a primary accent, though it sometimes takes a secondary 
accent ; hence, when, in the course of derivation, it falls under the primary accent, 
yoo becomes ew (iu), that is, the consonant y is changed to the closely related vowel 
I. Hence the yoo (yu) of fu'ture, distribute = phonetic fiut'yur, distril/yut, be- 
comes ew {iu) when it comes under the accent in futu'rity, distribu/tion = pho- 
netic fiuUu'riti, distribiu'eon. 

§ 136. For what may ya, yo, etc., be employed ? What may be written for Ar- 
minian? inferior? theology? Arabia? odious? opiate? 

§ 137. What is the difference between ew and yoo ? In what kind of syllables 
does yoo occur ? yoo ? "What sound is denoted by u in mute ? in union ? in unite ? 
"What sound is represented by eio in dew? in Ewing ? in nephew ? What sound is 
denoted by eu in feud ? in euphony ? in euphonic ? [Rem.] Does the diphthong 
ew ever begin a syllable ? What change does ew undergo when it loses the primary 
accent and comes at the beginning of a syllable ? Give some examples of such 
change. What change does yoo suffer when it takes a primary accent ? Give 
some examples of such change. Does yoo ever take the secondary accent ? 



70 THE COMPENDIUM. 

4. W SOMETIMES EXPEESSED BY A EIGHT ANGLE. 
§ 138. It is sometimes convenient to indicate that w is prefixed to 

V | i. 1 «, SJ | 

by opening their signs to right angles ; thus : 

L |wi, n |we, n|w3," 

as in £" twice, ^ V^_ quoif. 

Eem. Instead of employing the angular sign for initial wi, as in wife, wide, etc., 
the reporter will find it more convenient to omit the expression of i, and to repre- 
sent the why a brief Way joined to the following consonant. 

Wi, Ya, and Yoo Joined. 
§ 139. Whenever tho junction would be convenient, it is allowable 
to join 

1. Initial Wl — to a following stroke ; thus, 1 wide. 

2. Final Yd or Too — to a preceding stroke ; thus, ^-^^ ammo- 
nia, ^"^^ nephew. 



WOED-SIGNS AND CONTEACTIONS. 

§ 140. LIST OP WAY AND YAT WORD-SIGNS 

3_ ^ -S- r c c 

why way away your yourjjj elf yourselves 



we with were what would ye yet beyond you 

.£. c /_ y s~ C. .^ ^ 

while, we will well we are where aware we may when one 

Eem. 1. No difficulty will be experienced in distinguishing between while and 
we will, notwithstanding both are represented by the same sign. 

§ 188. How is it convenient at times to indicate that w is prefixed to % oi, ou t 
Write ; twi, twoi, twou.' "Write ' twice, quoif.' [Rem.] What, for the reporter, is the 
best mode of representing initial w followed by I ? 

§ 139. Specify the cases for joining wi, ya, and yoo. 

§ 140. Cover the word-signs with a card, and write the signs for the words below. 
Cover the sign-words, and speak the words denoted by the signs above. [Eem.] 
Are while and we will confusible if written by the same sign ? How does the re- 
porter write with me or with my ? How does he write with Mm t we know ? 






DIFFERENT SIGN'S AND DIRECTIONS 



71 



Rem. 2. The reporter employs ¥em above the line for with me or with my as well 
as for we may ; on the line for with him. (b) He also writes Wen above the line for 
we know as well as for when. 

Rem. 3. You is generally pronounced yoo, and is therefore properly represented 
Dy the sign of that sound. (&) This sign made heavy — in other words, the sign for 

yoo a may be employed as a correct representation of this word when emphasized. 
§ 141. LIST OF WORDS REPRESENTED BY WAY AND YAY. 



aware 




where 


away 




while 


beyond 




why 


one 




with 


way 




with me— § 140, R. 2. 


we 




with my— § 140, R. 2. 


we may 




would 


we will 




ye 


we are 




yet 


well 




you— § 140, R. 3. 


we know- 


-§ 140, R. 2, o. 


your 


were 




yours 


what 




yourself 


when 




yourselves 



§ 142. LIST OP CONTRACTIONS. 

7 — . V_ > y. . ■ V 

Acknowledge, anything, become, disadvantage, familiar-ity, forever, 



r 



V 



^- ^ 



highly, irregular-ity, knowledge, never, nevertheless, new, now, 

-k N N n>v v_ A. 

notwithstanding, object, objected, objector, peculiar-ity, refer-red, 

Ao /— /\ /\| *-— ^\ 

refer| nce , regular-ity, represent, represented, something, whenever, 

A. 

Wherever. 

§ 141. Write the signs for the words in this section, till the words instantly sug- 
gest the correct word-signs. 

§ 142. Cover the phonographic characters, and write the contractions for the 
words below. Next cover the words, and read the phonographic contractions. 
[Rem.] What is the contraction for object ? What is said of the omission of the 



72 THE COMPENDIUM. 

Rem. 1. Object— The sign given above for object is ; 6b.' The reporter always 
omits the vowel ; and it may be safely omitted even in the Corresponding Style, 

Rem. 2. No confusion arises from having a contracted outline stand for two 
words, as regular and regularity ; for the context at once indicates whether the 
outline should be read as an adjective or as a noun. 

Rem. 3. Derivatives— Signs for regularly, irregularly, peculiarly, and famil- 
iarly may be formed by writing Lay near the end of the last stroke of the signs for 
regular, etc. Derivatives from other contracted words may be written in accord- 
ance with § 40, Rem. 2. (6) References is written by enlarging the circle of refer* 
ence. 

§ 143. LIST OF WORDS REPRESENTED BY CONTRACTED OUTLINES. 

Acknowledge object— § 142, Rem. 1. 

anything , objected 

become objector 

disadvantage peculiar 

familiar peculiarity 

familiarity refer 

forever reference 

highly— § 104. referred 

irregular refers 

irregularity regular 

knowledge regularity 

never represent 

nevertheless represented 

new— § 104. something 

now— § 104. whenever 

notwithstanding wherever 






II. DIFFERENT MODES OF EXPRESSING H— ASPIRATION. 

§ 144. The word Aspiration (derived from the Latin Aspiro, to blow) 
signifies the forcible expulsion of the breath denoted by the letter h in 
heat, hope. Secondarily, it denotes the marking of such action by means 
of determined signs. To aspirate a vowel is to sound h before it, or to 
write the sign of aspiration before a vowel-sign. In Phonography, 
four different methods of denoting aspiration are employed : 1. By a 
stroke. 2. By a light dot. 3. By a tick. 4. By widening a Way- 
hook. The different modes of aspiration may be treated under three 
heads : 1. Aspiration of the Simple and Double Vowels. 2. Aspira- 
tion of the Way-Stroke. 3. Aspiration of the Brief Way. 



vowel of this sign ? Does any confusion result from using Kay-Gay for recjular and 
regularity ? Why not ? 

§ 143. Repeatedly write the contracted outlines for the words in the list of § 143. 

§ 144. What is signified by the word Aspiration ? Prom what is it derived ? 
What does it signify secondarily ? What is meant by the aspiration of a vowel ? 
How many different methods of aspiration are employed in Phonography ? 



DIFFERENT SIGNS AND DIRECTIONS. 73 

1. ASPIRATION OF SIMPLE VOWELS AND DIPHTHONGS. 
§ 145. The simple vowels and the diphthongs may be aspirated by 
writing a light dot before them ; thus, -*^ hear, : hack, ~ — hawk, 

1 hide. See §101. 

MANNER OF PLACING THE HAY-DOT. 

§ 146. The Hay-dot should be written beside the dash- vowels ; 
thus, y\ hope, ^(^ hall, (b) It should be so written by the dot- 
vowels that a line drawn through the two dots shall be at right angles 
with the consonant ; thus, I not :| for head; *\ heap. 

Rem. 1. The Hay-dot may be distinguished by name from the stroke, by calling 
it Heh or Hetch ; (&) but when reading phonography, it should always be read in 
connection with the following vowel ; thus, he, ha, hah, etc. 

Rem. 2. The Hay-dot is never mistaken for a short dot-vowel sign, for a short 
vowel never occurs in English before another vowel in the same place. 

Rem. 3. The reporter almost invariably omits the Hay-dot, even when he deems 
it necessary to write the vowel following it. The writer of the Corresponding Style 
may, without endangering legibility, omit the dot in writing the words Ms, has, 
high, highly, height, and a few other similar words. 

Rem. 4. H-Tick. — It is sometimes convenient, especially in the Reporting Style, 
to represent A by a joined tick, written, according to convenience, in the direction 

of Pee or Chay ; thus, / hedge, '^ horse, ^-^ hem. (l>) This mode of writing 
h, as will appear from a subsequent section, is sometimes employed for the aspira- 
tion of the Way-stroke ; thus, ^" hwa = whey. 

Rem. 5. T7ie H-Tick used for He in the Reporting Style.— {a) In the Reporting 
Style, he is represented by a tick, on the line, written downward in the direction of 

Pee, but usually upward or downward in the direction of Chay; thus, / he, 
i^~~^ he may, f~ he will. (&) "When joined to a preceding word, it assumes the 



position required for the junction ; thus, v^ for he, _^ and he, ^ Dut ne > ...... i s 

he, or he. (c) Practice shows that the different uses of this tick for he and the 

can be readily distinguished. 

§ 145. How are the simple vowels and the diphthongs aspirated ? Write ' hide, 
hack, hawk, Hague.' 

§ 146. How should the Hay-dot be written by the dot-vowels ? by the dash-vowels ? 
( Write ' hall, hop, head, heap, heat, hitch, hack.' [Rem.] How is the Hay-dot dis- 
tinguished by name from the Hay-stroke ? How should it be read ? How is Heh 
distinguished from a short dot-vowel? What is said of the omission of Hen by the 
reporter ? From what words may it be omitted by the writer of the Corresponding 
Style ? Is h ever conveniently written by a tick ? How is the h-tick joined to the 
following stroke ? Write ' hedge, hem, horse, whey.' How is he represented in the 
Reporting Style ? 

4 



Y4 THE COMPENDIUM. 

2. ASPIKATION OF THE WAY-STROKE. 
§ 147. There are two modes of aspirating the Way-stroke : 

1. By a small tick joined at the beginning ; thus, SJ whey, ^y" 

awhile. . 

2. By a Hay-dot placed before the following vowel ; thus, ^ whey. 
Bem 1 This last method of indicating whispered w corresponds precisely with 

the method of the common orthography, in which the aspiration of w is denoted by 
niacins- h after it : as in when, where. 

P Kem 2. The second mode of aspirating w is to be preferred by those intending 
to acquire the Reporting Style. 



3. ASPIRATION OF THE BRIEF WAY. 

§ 148. The brief Way is aspirated— 

1. When Written in the Vowel's Place- -by placing a dot before it ; 

thus, c \ whip, "I wheat, ( L | white). 

2. When Joined at an AngU,-(a) either by prefixing the h-tick, (b) or 
by placing a dot before the following vowel; thus, ') or-] wheat. 

3. When Joined as a Hook -{a) either by placing the Hay-dot before 

the following vowel, (b) or by making the hook heavy ; thus . #( f or 

9 f for wheel, (c) or by prefixing the h-tick; thus, *-" whine, "^ 

whim. 

Eem. 1. When initial' brief Way is to be aspirated, and it can not be Joined aa a 
hook, it is best, in the Corresponding style, to write it in the vowes place. 0) But 
Snce in the Keporting Style the aspiration of the w may be omitted, the reporter 
W^A in almost all cases, join an ^™T"*^™£^ 
stroke. He will, for instance, write Weh-Tee for wheat or white ; Weh-Tee-Lay for 
Whateley or whitlow; Wuh-Gay for Whig. 

S 147 How is the Wav-stroke aspirated ? Write whey, aspirating Way with the 
tick. Write whey, aspirating Way with the Hay-dot. Where is the Hay-dot writ- 
ten when employed to aspirate Way ? [Kern.] Which mode of aspirating w .is to be 
preferred by those intending to acquire the Keporting Style ? To what m the com- 
mon orthography does the second mode of aspiration correspond ? 

S 148 How is the brief Way aspirated when written in the vowel-places ? Write, 
with brief Way detached, the following words: 'whip, wheat, white,Whig, whit- 

low 5 How is the brief Way aspirated when joined at an angle ? Write whip, 

wheat Whig ' with the brief Way joined, and aspirated by the h-tick. Write the same 
words again, aspirating the brief Way by the Hay-dot before the vowel.— How is 
the brief Way aspirated when joined as a hook ? Apply these different modes in 
writing « whine, whim, wheel, whale, wherry, whence.' [Rem.] How is it best, in the 
Corresponding Style, to write an aspirated brief Way when it is initial and can not be 
S7 M .!u»k ? How is it written, in such cases, in the Keporting Style ! How 



DIFFERENT SIGNS AND DIRECTIONS. 75 

Rem. 2. The Way-hook on Lay and Ray is aspirated conveniently by making the 
liook heavy. (o) But the Way-hook on Em and En is aspirated most conveniently 
by writing a dot before the following vowel, or by prefixing the h-tick. (c) In 
either case, however, the reporter makes no attempt to indicate aspiration ; (d) and 
reporting habits and forms in this respect, will be most easily attained by those 
writers of the Corresponding Style who either adopt the plan of aspirating the Way- 
hook by writing a dot before the following vowel, or who accustom themselves to 
dispensing with every mode of expressing aspiration in these cases. 

Rem. 3. Wi, Woi, Won.— The angular signs for wi, woi, wou may be aspirated by 
writing the Hay-dot before them, as in § 148, 1. 



USES OF THE HAY-STROKE. 



140. The Ilay-stroke is used principally in the following cases : 

1. In all words except who, high, how, in which h is the only consonant, or the 

only one that can be conveniently represented by a stroke; as in / s Ohio, 
f. hay, / ah ! j/ eh ! ^ s Yahoo. 

2. Next following an initial vowel ; as in f\ ahead. 

3. For initial h preceding a consonant which is followed by a vowel; as 
in f\ haughty. 

4. When s follows an initial h; thus, f A house, /T^"^ hasten. 

5. When p, t, ch., or k follows h in the past tense of monosyllabic verbs ; as 
in hoped, heated, heeded, hedged, hooked. 

Rem. 1. Ah ! Eh /—As previously remarked, when ah ! eh I are forcibly uttered, 
the aspirate is heard following the vowels, and is therefore properly indicated; 
otherwise, the Hay-stroke serves merely as a nominal consonant. 

Reji. 2. // followed by p, t, ch, or k in the present tense of such monosyllabic 
verbs as hopt, heap, heat, heed, is represented by a Hay-dot. The stroke is em- 
ployed in the cases mentioned in subsection 5 for the purpose of availing, without 
vocalization, of the advantage of the halving principle (to be subsequently ex- 
plained). 



does the reporter write wheat, Whig, Whateley ? What is the best mode of aspirat- 
ing the Way-hook on Eay and Lay ? on Em and En ? Is it the practice of the re- 
porter to indicate the aspiration of the brief Way ? How may the angular sign for 
wi, woi, wou be aspirated ? 

§ 149. How is the aspirate expressed in words containing no other consonant ? 
Specify the other cases for the use of the Hay-stroke. Write ■ Ohio, ah ! hay, eh ! 
Yahoo, ahead, haughty, house, hasten.' [Rem.] When the aspirate is not pro* 
nounced in ah I and eh I what purpose does the Hay-stroke serve ? now is h rep- 
resented in the present tense of such verbs as heap, heat t Why is it represented 
by the Hay-stroke in the past tense of such verbs ? 



76 THE COMPENDIUM. 

HI. DIFFERENT MODES OF EXPRESSING S AND Z. 
• § f °- D j r i ections for th e use of several different modes of represent- 

""I Z to » e b6en giv6n in P reced ing sections of the Compendium, 
bee §§ 58-60 for Rules for representing S and Z at the beginning of 
a word. b ° 

See §§ 63 and 64 for Rules for representing S and Z at the end of a 

word. 

See §§ 65 and 6Q for the uses of the large circle. 



IV. DIFFEEENT MODES OF EEPKESENTING E. 
§ 151. The sound of r, as previously explained, is represented by 
two different signs, namely, ^ Ar, / Eay. The means of distin- 
guishing Eay from Chay were pointed out in § 12, 4. It now only 
remains to specify the cases for the use of each of these signs. 

USES OF AR— THE DOWNWARD SIGN TOR R. 

§ 152. Ar is usually employed in the following cases: 

1. For r following an initial vowel; as in ~^__ ark; except when the junction 
of Ar with a following consonant would be comparatively difficult, in such words, 
for instance, as arsenic, arch, arrayed, earth, erroneous. ' 

2. At the end of words— 
Except- 
Ca) After Em or Ith ; as in ^J? mar, ^/ Thayer. 

(b) Sometimes when the derivative would require Eay; as in ^> future, 
from which \\/\- futurity is derived. 

(c) When Ar would run too far below the line ; as in Ji^y Shakspeare. 

USES OF RAY — THE UPWARD SIGN FOR R. 

§ 153. Eay is usually employed in the following cases: 

1. For r next preceding a final vowel ; as in X ray, V^> f uiy . 

2. For r at the beginning of a word ; as in ^ race, /\ reap ; unless the 



§ 150. Answer the questions on §§ 58-60; 63-64; 65-66 

! ]%' ^ hat f ar + t the two / trokes *>* rt How is Eay distinguished from Chay? 

Ar a t L P f 7 , Tr ^ the USG ° f Ar ' What are the exceptions to the use of 

mar ThaveT fuZ r \ TX^ ^^ "^ ^ "^ earth ' e ™> 
Tyer., y ' Utoe ' fUtUntj ' Shaks P ea ™> bear, fear, dare, jeer, gore, shore, lore, 

§ 153. Specify the cases for the use of Eay. Write < rays, fury, race, reap, roam, 



DIFFERENT SIGNS AND DIRECTIONS. 77 

second consonant is m, or some other consonant or consonants which can not bo 
easily joined to Eay; as in "^-^ roam, ^r~ ^ resume. 

3. For r next following an initial vowel when Ar could not be so conveniently 
employed ; as in yy arch, // urge, y^\ arrayed, /^ earth. 

4. For final r in the cases specified at paragraphs cr, 5, and c under § 152, 2. 

5. (a) For both of two r's at the end of a word ; as in / rare, >^^ rarer, 



terror; (b) unless Ar is required for the first r ; when the second is repre- 
sented by Eay or Ar, according to preceding rules; thus, *^\/ aurora — see 
§ 153, 1 ; y^ error— see § 152, 2. 



V. DIFFERENT DIRECTIONS OF THE STROKE FOR ii. 

§ 154. As previously explained, the stroke for I may be written up- 
ward or downward. The sign written upward is called Lay ; El, when 
written downward. The best direction in any particular instance may 
usually be determined by the following specifications. 

USES OF LAY. 

§ 155. Lay should be employed in the following cases : 

1. Always for I when it is the only stroke-consonant in the word ; thus, m f~ ale, 
/T 3 less. 

2. For I at the commencement of a word ; as in /" like, f~^~^ lime : un- 

less El would secure an easier junction with a following consonant ; as in the words 
lion, long, lessen. 

3. Usually for I next preceding a final vowel ; as in \J^~ folly, ^^ v rely ; 

unless it is preceded by some letter after which El is more conveniently written than 
Lay ; as in only. 

4. Usually for finaH; as in \f pull, \^ ball, y~ doll, _ /quill; un- 
less preceded by some letter or letters, as Ef, Iss-Kay, or En, after which El is writ- 
ten more conveniently than Lay. 

Eem. En requires El after it in order to prevent the change of the circular move- 
ment of the pen ; En and El being arcs of circles struck in the same direction. For 
a similar reason, Iss-Kay requires El after it. On the other hand, Em requires Lay 

resume, urge, arrayed. earth, arch, mar, Thayer, future, Shakspeare, rare, rarer, ter- 
ror, aurora, error.' 

§ 154. In how many different directions may the sign for El be written ? What is 
it named when written upward ? when written downward ? 

§ 155. Specify the cases for the use of Lay. Write ' ale, less, lime, like, lion, long, 
lessen, folly, rely, only, pull, ball, doll, quill, feel, skull, nail.' [Rem.] Why does 



78 THE COMPENDIUM. 

after it ; for El after Em would demand a change of the circular movement of the 
pen ; Em and El being arcs of circles written in different directions. 

USES OF EL. 

§ 156. El is usually employed in the following cases : 

1. For I next following an initial vowel, and followed by 7c or m; thus, j v 

alike, .^X^ alum. 

2. For I initial, when followed by some letter before which El is more conve- 
niently written than Lay ; thus, (V^ lion, (V long, ^\y lessen. 

3. ForfinaH; as in ^>~ vowel, "f scale, y^ nail; unless preceded by some 
letter, as Pee, Tee, Chay, Kay, Ar, to which Lay is joined more conveniently than El. 

Rem. The preceding rules for the use of El and Lay, when preceded by another 
consonant-stroke, may, for purposes of reference, be presented thus: 

(a) After Ef, Yee, Bay, Yay, write Lay or El, according as I is, or is not, followed 
by a vowel. 

(Jj) After En, Ing, Ish, Zhay, and Iss-Kay, write El, whether a vowel follows or 
not. 

(c) In all other cases write Lay, whether a vowel follows or not. 



YI. DIFFEKENT DIEECTIONS OF THE STROKE FOE SH. 

§ 157. As previously explained, the stroke for sh may be written 
downward or upward. In the former case it is called Ish ; and Shay 
in the latter case. Whether this sign is best written upward or down- 
ward in any particular instance, may usually be determined by the 
rules of the following section : 

§ 158. USES OF ISH AND SHAY. 

1. Use Ish for the sound of sh when it is the only stroke-consonant in the word. 

2. Usually write Shay for s7l preceding I; thus, _y shawl, /^ shallow. 

3. Usually write Shay for sh when final and preceded by I; thus, \r^ polish. 

4. Usually write Shay for sh after Tee and Dee ; thus, \jj dash. 

5. Ish is almost invariably used in all other cases. 



En require El rather than Lay after it ? "Why does Iss-Kay take El instead of Lay 
after it ? Why does Em demand a following Lay rather than El ? 

§ 156. Specify the cases for the use of El. Write < alike, alum, lion, long, lessen, 
vowel, scale, nail.' [Eem.] After what strokes is the sign for l to be written upward 
or downward according as a vowel does, or does not, follow ? After what strokes is 
it to be written downward whether a vowel does, or does not, follow ? In what 
other cases should it be written upward whether a vowel does, or does not, follow ? 

§ 157. In what direction may the stroke for sh be written ? What is it named 
when written upward ? when written downward ? 

§ 158. Specify the cases for the use of Ish and Shay. Write ' show, ash, Shah, 
Bhawl, shallow, polish, relish, dash, tissue, push, cash, gnash, mush.' 



GEOUP-CONSONANT SIGNS. 79 



GROUP-CONSONANT SIGNS. 

§ 159. Phonography obtains over most other systems of shorthand a decided and 
very important advantage, in respect of brevity, facility, and legibility, by providing 
signs for the expression of certain groups of consonants, such as ' pi, fr, pn, fshn, 
ktv, pt, pnt, pin, prf,' etc. With the use of these signs it is possible and easy, in very 
many instances, to express with a single stroke of the pen what would require from 
two to five strokes in the old systems of stenography. 

§ 160. If, to express groups of consonants, letters were to be devised which would 
bear no obvious relation to the consonant-signs previously explained, the labor 
of learning such new signs would be much more than that required to become 
acquainted with the simple-consonant alphabet. But let the new signs be formed 
by regular modifications of the simple-consonant letters, and the student can readily 
familiarize a large number of virtually distinct signs, merely by learning the prin- 
ciple of the modification. There are five modes of modifying the primary letters to 
form group-consonant signs : 

1. By an initial hook. 4. By lengthening. 

2. By a final hook. 5. By halving. 
8. By widening. 



I. INITIAL HOOKS. 



1. THE EL-HOOKS. 

§ 161. (a) A small hook on the circle-side (§ 27, 1, 3), and at the 
beginning of any consonant-stroke (except I, r, m, n, ng, s, z, w, A), 
indicates that an I follows it ; thus, 

\ pi f tl / chl ^_ kl 

^_ fl ( thl J shl r yi 

(b) Shel and Zhel never stand alone, have their hooks at the bot- 
tom, and are always written upward. 

§ 159. "What is the advantage of signs for groups of consonants ? 

§ 160. What modes of modifying the simple signs, to form group-consonant signs, 
are employed in Phonography ? 

§ 161. "What consonant-strokes take the small El-hook ? "With hook-signs, write 
* pi, tl, chl, kl, fl, vl, thl, shl, yl.' Do Shel and Zhel ever stand alone ? In what direc- 



80 



THE COMPENDIUM, 



Eem. 1. The sentence "No MeEEy SoNGS[Z] We'LL HeaE," contains all the 
consonants whose signs do not take the small El-hook. 

Eem. 2. El-hooTc on Em, En, Bay.— The reporter uses a large initial hook on Em, 



En, Eay for I; thus, c~~\ ml, Q^ nl, £X rl. (o) The El-hook must be made 
large in these cases, to distinguish it from the "Way-hook. 

Eem. 3. The object of the rule to write Shel and Zhel upward, and not to use them 
alone, is to secure a distinction between these letters and the group-signs for shn, 
zhn ; slir, zhr, to be subsequently explained. 

Eem. 4. The student will be assisted in remembering the side for the El-hook on 
the straight lines, by observing that if the Zeft hand, with the first finger bent, be 
held up in the directions of Kay, Pee, Tee, Chay, the outlines for kl, pi, tl, clil will 
appear; thus, 



CITL 





2. THE AR-HOOKS. 



§ 162. Signs to indicate the combination of r with a preceding con- 
sonant (except s, z, I, r, m, n, ng, w, y, h), are obtained by turning over 
sidewise the corresponding El-hook signs, except Shel, Zhel, which are 
turned over endwise ; thus, 



\ pi f tl / chl <z _ kl 
*\ pr ] tr J chr <= — kr 



^_ fl ( thl J shl 
^ f r ) thr J shr 



(b) Sher and Zher have their hook at the top, and are always writ- 
ten downward. See § 161 b, and Kern. 3. 



tion are they always written? [Eem.] "What sentence contains the consonants 
whose signs do not take the small El-hook ? On what consonant-strokes does the 
reporter write a large hook for 1 1 Why must the hook for Mel, Nel, Eel be made 
large ? How is the El-hook on Em, En, Eay distinguished from the "Way-hook ? 
Why must Shel and Zhel be written upward and joined to some other stroke ? How 
may the side for the El-hook on straight lines be remembered ? 

§ 162. How are signs obtained to express r in connection with certain preced- 
ing consonants ? What consonant-signs do not take an Ar-hook ? How are Sher 
and Zher formed, and in what direction are they written ? 



GEOUP-CONSONANT SIGNS. 



81 



R ADDED TO EM AND EN. 

§ 163. R may be added to Em and En by a small initial hook, pro- 
vided they are widened ; thus, <r^ mr, ^^ nr. 



Kem. 1. The widening of Em and En when they take the Ar-hook serves to dis- 
tinguish mr and nr from wm and wn. See § 120, 1. 

Kem. 2. As Ar, Es, Ing, Way do not take the Ar-hook, fr, thr, nr, vr can not be 
mistaken for rr, sr, ngr, icr. 

Kem. 3. Sher and Zher, having their hook at the top, and being always written 
downward, are readily distinguished from Shel and Zhel, which have their hook at 
bottom, and are always written upward. 

Rem. 4. The sentence " IliS eKEiNG WiLL You See" contains all the conso- 
nants whose signs do not take the Ar-hook. 

Kem. 5. The student will be assisted in remembering the side for the Ar-hook on 
the straight lines, by observing that if the iZight hand, with the first finger bent, be 
held up in the directions of Kay, Pee, Tee, Chay, the outlines for kr, pr, tr, chr, 
will appear ; thus, 



CHR 





kr C 



IMPERFECT EL OR AR HOOKS. 

§ 164. In some cases when an El or Ar hook sign is joined to a pre- 
ceding letter, the hook can not be perfectly formed ; as in yS\ re- 
ply, ^/ explore, L^ dimmer, V^^ farmer, T tiger. 

Kem. 1. In such cases, a slight onset of the pen serves instead of the hook, (b) In 
slow writing, the hook may be added, in some cases, after lifting the pen. 

Kem. 2. Ter or Der following Ray. — Tee or Dee following Kay may be made 

into Ter or Der by rounding the junction ; thus, ,/[ write, // writer. 



§ 163. "What signs are widened when they take the Ar-hook ? "With hook-signs, 
write mr, nr. [Kem.] Why must Em and En be widened when they take the Ar- 
hook ? Why can not the sign for fr be mistaken for rr ? thr for sr t nr for ngr ? 
vrfoTwrt How are Sher and Zher distinguished from Shel and Zhel? What 
sentence contains all the consonants whose signs do not take the Ar-hook ? 

§ 164. Is an El or Ar hook ever imperfectly formed ? Write ' reply, explore, 
dimmer, farmer, tiger.' [Kem.] In these cases, what serves instead of the hook ? 
How may Tee or Dee following Kay be made into Ter or Der ? Write ■ write, 
writer.' 



4* 



82 THE COMPENDIUM, 



SYLLABLE-NAMES. 

§ 165. The EI and Ar hook signs should not be called ; Pee-El, Pee-Ar,' etc., but 
should be named by the final syllables of such words as ' sam-ple, ta-per, set-tie,' 
etc., or by syllables containing the vowel e ; thus, Pel, Per ; Tel, Ter ; Chel, Cher, 
etc. ; (b) and are to be regarded as indivisible signs, (c) The series of El and Ar 
hook signs may be spoken of as the " Pel and Per Series of Signs," or as the " Pel 
and Per Signs." 

USE AND VOCALIZATION OP THE PEL AND PER SIGNS. 

§ 166. General Use. — The El-hook and Ar-hook signs are used prin- 
cipally for such close combinations of I and r with a preceding conso- 
nant as occur at the commencement of clay, fly, pray, fry, etc. ; 
(b) and in cases where I is separated, by a slight, unaccented vowel, 
from the consonant preceding in the same syllable ; as in ' Bible, sober, 
able, Abel, novel, river, awful, labor, evil/ (c) In these cases the ex- 
pression of the obscure vowel is unnecessary. 

Rem. In the cases specified above, it is occasionally better, when an El or Ar hook 
sign can not be conveniently joined to a preceding sign, to write in its stead its 
equivalent simple signs ; as Bee-Lay instead of Bel for the last syllable of sensible, 
forcible, or admissible; Tee-Ray instead of Ter for the last syllable of ministry. 

§ 167. General Rule of Vocalization. — A vowel written beside an El- 
hook or Ar-hook sign should not be read between the two consonants, 
but before or after both, according as it is written before or after such 

sign; thus, \ apple, ^ plea, goffer, ^ free, '] eater, 1* tree. 

§ 168. Special Use. — Long and inconvenient outlines are occasionally 
avoided by the employment of El-hook and Ar-hook signs, even when 
there occurs between the consonants indicated by them a clear, 
accented vowel, as in 'term, charm, corner.' (The principal words 
in whose representation this use is convenient will be given in the 
Phonographic Writing Exercises.) In these cases, if the word is not 
sufficiently legible without vocalization, the vowel may be written so 
as to read between the two consonants, by the following rule. 



§ 165. How are the El and Ar hook signs named ? 

§ 166. "What is the principal use of the El and Ar hook signs ? [Rem.] "When, in 
the cases specified, should the equivalent simple signs be written instead of the 
group-sign ? How is it best to write the last syllable of sensible, forcible, admissi- 
ble, ministry ? 

§ 167. In what order is a vowel read when written beside an El or Ar hook sign ? 
On which side of a Pel or Per sign should a vowel be written when it is to be read 
before both of the consonants ? on which side, when it is to be read after both the 
consonants ? 

§ 168. Is it ever allowable to employ an El or Ar hook sign to represent two con- 
sonants with a clear accented vowel between them ? 



GROUP-CONSONANT SIGNS. 83 

§ 169. Special Rule of Vocalization. — Vowels to be read between the 
consonants denoted by an El-hook or Ar-hook sign are written thus : 

1 . Dots are made into circles, and written 

(a) Before the group-sign, if the vowel is long ; thus, o 1_ _ dark. 

(b) After the group-sign, if the vowel is short ; thus, j^ term. 

(c) Either side of the group-sign, when the preceding rules {a and b) 
can not be conveniently applied ; thus, ^^^ engineer, *\/° para- 
lyze. 

2. Dashes Written Parallel with the Consonant are made into small ellipses 
and written beside the group-sign in the same manner as the small 

circles ; thus, Jo germ, ,. n ^. calcine. 

3. Dashes Written at an Oblique or Right Angle with the consonants 
are written through the group-sign ; thus, ^-^ course, **]. por- 
tray, ^Xi burst, (o , school, d | correct. 

4. Angles or Semicircles are written through the group-sign ; or, if more 
convenient, for the first place, at the commencement — for the third 

place, at the end, of the group-sign ; thus, /^ require, ^j feature, 

'* V quality, ^_j n figures. 

ISS PREFIXED TO AN EL-HOOK SIGN. 

^.170. Iss may be prefixed to an El-hook sign; thus, ^ sup- 
ply, '^ civil, e — cycle, P saddle, i-o disclose. 

Rem. Caution.— It should be particularly observed that a loop or a large circle is 
never prefixed to an El-hook sign. 

§ 169. Can a vowel be written so as to be read between the consonants denoted by 
an El or Ar hook sign ? For this purpose, how should you write a long dot-vowel ? 
a short dot-vowel ? When is the vowel-circle written before the group-sign ? when 
is it written after ? May it, in any case, be written on either side, without regard to 
the length of the vowel ? Give some words in which it is not convenient to place 
the vowel-circle before the group-sign, for a long vowel ; or after the group-sign, for 
a short vowel. "Write ' dark, term, engineer, paralyze.' How should a parallel-dash 
vowel be written so as to read between the consonants denoted by an El or Ar hook 
sign ? "Write ' germ, calcine.' How should a vowel-dash standing at an oblique or 
right angle with the consonant-stroke be written so as to read between the conso- 
nants denoted by an El or Ar hook sign ? How, for this purpose, should an angle 
or semicircle be written ? When an angle or semicircle of the first or third plaee 
can not be conveniently written through the group-sign, how else may it be writ- 
ten ? Write * portray, burst, school, correct, require, feature, quality, figures.' 

§ 17C. Can Iss be prefixed to an El-hook sign ? Write ' supply, civil, cycle, sad- 
dle, disclose.' [Rem.] Is it allowable to prefix a loop or a large circle to an El-hook 
sign? 



84: y/ THE COMPENDIUM. 

IS8, SES, AND STEH PREFIXED TO AN AR-HOOK SIGN. 

§ 171. (a) Making an Ar-hook into a small circle, prefixes 5; — into a 
large circle, prefixes ss — 

1. To any one of the straight-line Ar-hook signs when preceded by 
no stroke ; thus, ^ spray, *5\ sober, " straw, v "] cider, cr7 ^\ 
scrape, ^ sister. 

2. To any one of the straight-line Ar-hook signs preceded by a 

stroke in the same direction ; thus, ^V prosper. J a destroy, 
^~\ execrable, q disaster. 

3. To Ker or Ger preceded by a straight stroke in the direction of 
Pee, Tee, or Chay ; thus, %, — v subscribe, I — ^ describe, 1 ■ dis- 
agree. 

4. To Per or Ber preceded by a straight stroke in the direction of 
Chay or Jay ; thus, S Jasper. 

(b) In all other cases, the circle is prefixed by writing it distinctly 
within the hook ; thus, ""^x^ express, ~^1^ extreme, ^) is there, 

^~s sinner. 

Eem. 1. Sylldble~Names of the Per-Signs Preceded ly the Circles and Loop. — 
(a) Per, Ber, etc., in connection with a preceding Iss, may be named by prefixing 
to their names the syllable Iss, or, if convenient and certain, the sound of s; thus, 
Iss-Per or Sper, Iss-Ber, Iss-Ger, etc. (&) In connection with a preceding Ses, by 
prefixing the syllable Ses; thus, Ses-Per, Ses-Ter, Ses-Cher, etc. (c) In connection 
with a preceding Steh, by prefixing the syllable Steh ; thus, Steh-Per, Steh-Ger, 
Steh-Ter, etc. (d) The Ar-hook signs preceded by Iss, Ses, or Steh, when spoken 
of as a class, may be denominated respectively the Iss-Per, Ses-Per, and Steh-Per 
signs. 

Eem. 2. The junction of Iss-Ker and Iss-Per with the strokes to which it is allow- 
able to attach them, is effected by joining the circle on the right-hand side of the 
preceding stroke, and then writing, from the point at which the circle is completed, 
the stroke of the Ker or Per. 

Eem. 3. It is the common practice of good phonographers to omit r from scribe 
in * describe, subscribe, prescribe, proscribe, superscribe,' and from scrip- in their 
derivatives, ' descriptive, subscription,' etc. 

§ 171. To what signs may s or ss be prefixed by making an Ar-hook into a small 
or large circle ? How must the circle be written in other cases ? How and when 
may Iss or Sez be prefixed to any one of the straight-line Ar-hook signs ? v "Write 
4 spray, sober, straw, cider, scrape, sister, prosper, destroy, execrable, disaster, sub- 
scribe, disagree, Jasper, express, extreme, is there, sinner.' [Eem.] How are the 
Per-signs named when Iss is prefixed ? when Ses is prefixed ? when Steh is pre- 
fixed ? How are the signs named, when spoken of as a class ? How is Iss-Ker 
joined to a preceding straight stroke in the direction of Pee, Tee, or Chay ? How 
is Iss-Per joined to a preceding straight stroke in the direction of Chay or Jay ? 
How do good phonographers frequently contract describe, etc. ? 






GROUP-CONSONANT SIGNS. 85 

CAUTION. 

§ 172. (a) The Ster-loop is never prefixed to an Ar-hook sign ; 
(b) and the Steh-loop is prefixed, only to the straight-line Ar-hook 
signs when preceded by no stroke, by making the hook into a small 
loop ; thus, ^ stupor, •/ stager. 

SPER. DISTINGUISHED FROM SPEE, 

§ 173. The use of the loops and circles to imply an Ar-hook may be 
readily distinguished from their ordinary use, by observing that in 
the former case they are required on the side of the stroke contrary to 

that for the simple circles and loops ; thus, °\ spr, \^ sp ; ^V. pspr, 

\ psp ; *\ stpr, \ stp ; C\ sspr, 9^ ssp ; \ 3 _ pskr, \ 

psk ; [ tskr, J tsk ; ^ chspr, ^ chsp. See §§ 27, 28, 29. 



3. THE HOOK FOR IN, UN, OR EN. 

§ 174. The syllable in, en, or un may be expressed by a back hook — 

1. At the beginning of a straight-line Iss-Per sign ; thus, ^ insep- 
arable, % \ inscribe, 3 \^ unscrupulous, £__ unscrew, T, un- 
strung, g ^ insecure. 

2. At the beginning of any other stroke, to avoid turning a circle 
on the convex side of En ; thus, s /^\ insoluble, -%-»{7 unseemly, 

/•\^ enslave. 

Eem. 1. Name— This hook may be called the In-hook. 

Eem. 2. The In-hook may be used for the syllable on in onslaught. 



§ 172. Is it allowable to prefix a Ster-loop to an Ar-hook sign ? To what Ar-hook 
signs may the*Steh-loop be prefixed ? "Write ' stupor, stager.' 

§ 173. How may Iss-Per signs be distinguished from the Iss-Pee signs ? Make 
and compare Iss-Per, Iss-Pee— Pee-Sper, Pee-Spee — Steh-Per, Steh-Pee— Ses-Per, 
Ses-Pee— Pee-Sker, Pee-Skay— Tee-Sker, Tee-Skay— Chay-Sper, Chay-Spee. 

§ 174. In what cases may the syllable in, en, or un be expressed by a back hook ? 
"Write ' inseparable, inscribe, unscrupulous, unscrew, unstrung, insecure, insoluble, 
unseemly, enslave. , What is avoided by the use of the back hook in writing ' insol- 
uble, unseemly, enslave V [Eem.] How may this hook be named ? In what word 
may it be used for the syllable on t 



86 THE COMPENDIUM. 

4. EEPOETING LEE AND EEL HOOKS. 

§ 175. The reporter occasionally enlarges the small El or Ar hook, to add to an 
El-hook sign the sonnd of r— to an Ar-hook sign the sound of I; thus, \ bl, 

\ blr, N. pr, ^\ prl ; r 3 - secular, d — *\ corporal. 

Eem. 1. This principle can not be employed to add r to Mel, Nel, Eel ; for the 
hooks of these signs are already large, and it would not be allowable to make them 
still larger. 

Eem. 2. Syllable-Names.— (a) The enlarged Ar-hook may be called the Eel- 
hook; (&) the enlarged El-hook maybe called the Ler-hOok. (c) The Eel-hook 
signs may be named Prel, Trel, Krel, etc. ; (d) and the Ler-hook signs, Pier, Tier, 
Kler, Pier, etc. (e) "When spoken of as a series, they may be named the Pier and 
Prel signs. 

VOCALIZATION OP THE PLER AND PREL SIGNS. 

§ 176. (a) A vowel is read before all the consonants indicated by a Pier or Prel 
sign, if written before it ; (b) but if written after such sign, it is read before the I or r 

added by the enlargement of the hook; thus, c . ocular, | V trial. 

PLER AND PREL SIGNS PRECEDED BY ISS. 

§ 177. S may be prefixed to a pier or Prel sign by writing a circle within the 
hook; thus, <£— 7 scholar, ) # sideral. 



WOED-SIGNS AND CONTEACTIONS. 

§ 178. LIST OF INITIAL-HOOK WORD-SIGNS. 

\ f -f- / ^ _ 

able, t?ll or it will, until, at all, which will, call or equal-ly, difficult-y, 
full, [fully,] value, they will, princip^, surprise, member, remember, 



§ 175. What is added to an El-hook sign by enlarging the hook? to an Ar-hook 
sign ? "Write ' bl, blr, pr, prl, secular, corporal.' [Eem.] Why can not this principle 
be employed to add r to Mel, Nel, Eel ? What is the name of the enlarged Ar-hook ? 
of the enlarged El-hook ? What are the names of the Eel-hook signs ? of the Ler- 
hook signs ? 

§ 176. Eepeat the rule for vocalizing a Prel or Pier sign. Where does a vowel 
read when placed after a Prel or Pier sign ? when placed before ? Write ' ocular, 
trial.' 

§ 177. How can Iss be prefixed to a Pier or Prel sign ? Write c scholar, sideral.' 

§ 178. Cover the word-signs given in § 178 and write the proper signs for the 
words below them. Cover the sign-words and read the word-signs. [Eem.] Write 



GROUP-CONSONANT SIGNS. 87 

[remembered,] number-ed, truth, dear, during, care, from, over, 

^ ) 1 ) 4- J J 

every or very, through, either, the]^, they are, other, sure-ly, pleasure, 



Mr., mere, remark, [remarked,] more, near, nor, manner. 

Rem. 1. Derivatives. — Derivatives from the words of this list may be written ac- 
cording to the principle of § 40, Eem. 2. For example, join Lay-Iss to Care for care- 
less;, Bel to Remark and Pleasure for remarlcabl-e-y, pleas^rabl-e-y ; En-Iss or 
Ar to Full for fullness, fuller ; Lay to Mere for merely ; El to Near for nearly 
(§ 156, 3) ; En-Iss to Near for nearness ; Ar to Near for nearer. 

Rem. 2. Distinctions.— {a") If it is deemed necessary, equal-ly may be distin- 
guished from call by writing e in equal and I in equally ; (b) very from every by 
writing I in the former ; surely from sure by writing Lay near sure for surely, 
(c) With very little practice in reading phonography, these distinctions become en- 
tirely unnecessary. 

Rem. 3. Miss, Misses, Mrs., Messrs.— ~M.\ss is written with Em-Iss ; Misses, with 
Em-Ses, in the first position, (b) Mrs., pronounced Missess, is written with Em* 
Iss-Ess, in order to distinguish it from Misses, the plural of Miss, (c) Messrs. is 
written with Em-Iss-Ray-Iss. 

Rem. 4. All, Will Added.— On the principle of adding will to the sign for they, 
and all to the sign for at, the reporter prefixes an El-hook to the simple-consonant, 
and dash-vowel, word-signs, and to the horizontal and-tick, to add all or will; 

thus,_\ by all, ^_ for all, ^ of all ^ to all, /> who will, c_ and all, 
or and will, (b) The reporter occasionally adds all or will to a full-length Ar-hook 
sign, by enlarging the hook ; thus, J there will or they are all, — | during all. 

Rem. 5. Are, Our Added.— In the reporting style, are or our may be added to 
the simple-consonant, and the dash-vowel, word-signs, and to the horizontal and- 

tick, by prefixing an Ar-hook ; thus, \ by our, ^ of our, c\ to our, c- and 
are or and our. (b) The reporter occasionally adds are or mir to a full-length, 

small-Elhook sign, by enlarging the hook ; thus, \_ for all are or for all our. 
(c) To these signs self may be added by a small circle ; selves, by a large circle ; 

thus, <^ to ours or to ourself, *nd to ourselves, No by ourself, >D by our- 
selves. See § 38, 5. (d) The circles added to the dashes should, of course, be prop- 
erly proportioned to the size of those signs. 



1 careless, remarkable, remarkably, pleasurable, pleasurably, fullness, fuller, merely, 
nearly, nearness.' How may equal-ly be distinguished from call t very from every t 
surely from sure ? To what signs may will be added by an El-hook ? What word 
may the reporter add to a full-length Ar-hook sign by enlargement of the hook ? 
To what signs may are, our be added by an Ar-hook ? by enlarging a hook ? How 
may self or selves be added to signs thus formed ? 



88 



THE COMPEKDIUM. 



§ 179. It is found convenient to contract six words containing Pel 
or Per signs ; namely, 



S^ capable 


^J 


influential 


'^X^ remarkable 


~~\ capability 


"x 


probab!f ity 


r \ D transgress. 


§ 180. LIST OF WORDS REPRESENTED BY 


INITIAL-HOOK SIGNS. 


A. 




M. 


s. 


able 




manner 


sure 


at all 




member 


sure-ly 






mere 


surprise 


C. 




more 




call 




Mr. 


T. 


care 






tell 






N. 


their 


D. 




near 


there 


dear 




nor 


they are 


difficult 




number 


they will 


difficulty 




numbered 


through 


during 






till 






0. 


truth 


E. 




other 




either 




over 


U. 


equal— § 1T8, E. 1. 






until 


equally— do. 




P. 




every— § 178, E. 2. 




pleasure 


V. 






principal 


value 


P. 




principle 


very 


from 








full 




E. 


"W". 


[fully] 




remark 


which will. 






[remarked] 




I. 




remember 




it will 




[remembered] 




(5) WORDS MENTIONED IN REMARKS 


UNDER § 178. 


and all 




merely 


remarkable 


and will 




Messrs. 


remarkably 


by all 




Miss 


there will 


by our 




Misses 


they are all 


by ourself 




Mrs. 


to all 


by ourselves 




nearer 


to our 


careless 




nearly 


to ours 


for all 




nearness 


to ourself 


for all are 




of all 


to ourselves 


for all our ' 




of our 


who will. 


fullness 




pleasurable 




fuller 




pleasurably 





179. Eepeatedly write the contractions containing Pel or Per signs. 

180. Eepeatedly write the proper signs for the words of this list. 



GKOUP-CONSONANT SIGNS. 89 

II. FINAL HQOKS. 



1. HOOKS FOE F, V, AND N. 

§ 181. On the Straight Lines. — F, v, or n may be added to any straight 
line (with, or without, an initial hook, loop, or circle), by a small 
final hook ; written for / or v, on the circle side (§ 27, 1), and for n, 
on the contrary side ; thus, \^ puff, \^ pun ; [^ deaf, J • den ; 

/> chafe, yl chain ; _^ cave, — ^> cane ; y^ rove, /^ roan "» 

</ heave, /"< hewn; S^ brief, ^ brain ; %^ bluff, V blown ; 

f- stove, f- stone ; V strife, ]• strain. 

Eem. When preciseness of representation is required, the Ef-hook may be made 
heavy for v ; thus, *\f proof, *\/ prove. 

§ 182. K Added to Curves. — N may be added to any curve-sign by a 
small final hook on the concave, or circle, side ; thus, V^, fine, ^ 

flown, ^ A frown, ^^ main. See § 27, 3. 

Eem. (a) The Ef-hook is never written on the curves, except in the Reporting 
Style, (fr) The reporter derives advantage occasionally from representing /or v on 
the circle-side of a curve by a small final hook, made, for the sake of distinction, 

somewhat longer than an En-hook ; thus, (^ they have. 

SYLLABLE-NAMES OF THE SMALL FINAL HOOKS. 

§183. Hook for F or V.—(a) This hook may invariably be called the Ef-hook, 
notwithstanding it frequently represents the sound of n. In those instances, how- 
ever, in which it represents v, it may be properly denominated the Vee-hook. 
(b) The signs with an Ef-hook, when spoken of as a class, may be called the Ef- 
hook signs, (c) The simple, or group, signs, with an Ef-hook, are named by pre- 
fixing the sounds they represent to the syllable Ef, if this can be done conveniently; 
if not, add the sound of / to the syllable-name of the stroke ; thus, Pef, Chef, Kef, 
Tlef, Tlef or Telf, Chref or Cherf, Prelf, Plerf, Chlerf. 

§ 181. "What sounds may be added to straight lines by a small final hook? On 
which side is the hook for/ or v written ? On which side is the hook for n written ? 
To what signs may the Ef-hook be added ? To what straight lines may the En-hook 
be added ? Write ' puff, pun, deaf, den, chafe, chain, cave, cane, rove, roan, heave, 
hewn, brief, brain, bluff, blown, stove, stone, strife, strain.' [Eem.] How, with the 
use of a hook, may v be distinguished from ft Make this distinction in writing 
* proof, prove.' 

§ 182. What sound is added to a curve-sign by a small final hook ? On which side 
of the curve-sign should the hook be written? Write 'fine, flown, frown, main. 
[Eem.] Is a hook for / or v ever written on a curve-sign ? When used on curves, 
how can it be distinguished from the En-hook ? 

§ 183. What is the hook for / and v called ? How arc the Ef-hook signs named ? 



90 



THE COMPENDIUM. 



§ 184. Hook for m—(a) This hook is named the En-hook. (&) The signs with 
the En-hook, when spoken of as a class, are called the En-hook signs, (c) The 
iimple, or group, signs with the En-hook, are named by prefixing the sounds they 
represent to the syllable En, or, if more convenient, by prefixing the syllable-name 
of the stroke to the syllable En or to the sound of n, the accent being placed upon the 
name of the stroke; thus, Pen, Ken, Plen, Chlen or Chelen, Pren, Chren, Cherm 
Prelen, Plern, Chlern. 

VOCALIZATION OF THE EF AND EN HOOK SIGNS. 

§ 185. (a) A vowel after a stroke with an Ef or En hook, is read be- 
fore the hook; thus, J- den, \ pun. (b) Hence, a stroke-sign 
must be employed for /, v, or n, whenever it is followed by a vowel 
which can not be written before a following consonant ; as in ^v^/ 
penny, ^-^j^ money, [/V^ terrify, ^S^ profess. 

ISS ADDED TO THE EF-HOOK SIGNS. 

§ 186. 8 or z may be added to an Ef-hook sign by a small circle, 
written within the hook ; thus, %>" proves, ^ strifes, Y^ scoffs. 
Eem. A loop or the large circle is never added to the Ef-hook. 
ISS, SES, STEH, AND STER ADDED TO STRAIGHT-LINE EN-HOOK SIGNS. 

§ 187. Making the En-hook on a straight line — 

1. Into a small circle, adds s; thus, ^ pens, J- tense, J- dense, 
J chance, — ? cans, ^<° runs. 

2. Into a large circle, adds ss ; thus, J- condenses. 

3. Into a small loop, addss^; thus, I condensed. 

4. Into a large loop, adds str; thus, \( punster. 

Eem. 1. To signs thus formed, it is allowable, especially in the reporting style, to 
add a stroke, provided the circle or loop would not thereby be placed in the position 

§ 184. What is the name of the hook for n ? How are the En-hook signs named ? 

§ 185. Where does a vowel read when placed after an Ef or En hook sign ? 
Write ' den, pun.' How must /, v, or n be expressed when followed by a vowel 
which can not be written before a following stroke ? Why may not the hook be used 
in such a case ? Write ; penny, money, terrify, profess.' 

§ 186. How, with the use of a circle, may s or e be added to ah Ef-hook sign ? 
Write ' proves, strives, scoffs.' [Kem.] Is it allowable to add a loop or a large cir- 
cle to an Ef-hook ? 

§ 187. What is added, to a straight-line En-hook sign, by making the En-hook into 
a small circle ? into a large circle ? into a small loop ? into a large loop ? How may 
5, ss, st y str be added to a straight-line En-hook sign ? To what final-hook signs 
may s, ss, st, str be added by making the hook into a circle or loop ? Write ' pens, 
tense, dense, chance, cans, runs, condenses, tenses, chances, condensed, chanced, 
punster.' [Eem.] When may a stroke be affixed to signs formed by making an 



GKOUP-CONSONxlNT SIGNS. \)1 

of a simple circle or loop ; or, an Ens or Enses circle, in the situation of a circle 
including the Ar-hook. See Eem. 3, below. The reporter, for instance, writes 

P for begins a; — •<-=> for against tlie. (b) It is sometimes more convenient, 

when a stroke follows, to write the circle distinctly within the hook : thus, / <sr_ 

ransom, Vj 5 gainsayed. (c) S or z may be added to the Enses-circle, and the 
Enst and Enster loops, by a circle turned on the opposite side of the stroke ; thus, 

^ punsters. 

Eem. 2. Syllable-Names.— (a) The En-hook made into a small circle is called the 
Ens-circle; into the large circle, the. Enses-circle; into the small loop, the Enst- 
loop ; into the large loop, the Enster-loop. (b) The signs formed by the attach- 
ment of these circles and loops may be named Pens, Penses, Penst, Penster ; Plens, 
etc. ; Prens, etc. 

Eem. 3. Caution.— The Ens and Enses circles are never used between crossing 
lines, or between straight lines in the same direction ; for, between crossing lines, 
they are in the situation of simple Iss and Ses; and if used between straight lines in 
the same direction, the second line would be read, in connection with the circle, as 

an Iss-Per or Ses-Per sign. Hence, \ is psk, not pnsk (see § 27, 4) ; — ^ kssr^ 

not knss-r; <x^ p-spr, not pns-p (see § 171, a, 2) ; C] d-sstr, not dnss-t. 
IS3 ADDED TO THE EN-HOOK ON CURVES. 

§ 188. S or z may be added to an En-hook on a curve, by a small 
circle written distinctly within the hook ; thus, (^ lines, / »~^ means. 
Eem. A loop or the large circle is never added to an En-hook on a curve. 
THE HOOKS FOR P AND N IN THE MIDDLE OF WORDS. 

§ 189. The Ef and En hooks, when more convenient than a stroke, 
are occasionally used in the middle of a word ; thus, \^^ define, |^ 
contrivance, N^_L_ provoke, \y\ proverb, \j >< _ s> defense, ^ fur- 
nish, ^> punish, ^y finish. 

Eem. 1. The Ef-hook in the Middle of Words.— The following is a partial list of the 

En-hook into a circle or loop ? "Write ' begins a, against the.' Is it ever more 
convenient to write the circle within the En-hook of a straight line ? Write * ran- 
som, gainsayed.' How may a small circle be added to the group-signs for pnst, 
pnstr, pnses, etc. ? "Write * punsters.' "What is the name of the En-hook made into 
a small circle ? into a large circle ? into a small loop ? into a large loop ? "What 
are the signs for pns, etc., called ? May or may not the Ens-circle be used between 
strokes ? If not, why? Write ' psk, kssr, pspr, dsstr.' 

§ 183. How, with the use of a circle, may 8 or z be added to an En-hook on a 
curve-sign ? Write l lines, means.' [Rem.] Is it allowable to join a loop or the 
large circle to an En-hook on a curve-sign ? 

§ 189. May or may not an En or Ef hook be used in the middle of a word ? Write 
* define, contrivance, provoke, proverb, defense, furnish, punish, finish.' Write tho 
words given in the lists in § 189, Ecms. 1, 2. 



92 THE COMPENDIUM. 

words in which the Ef-hook may be advantageously employed between two sti Dkcs : 
Paver, prefer, proffer, perverse, briefer, braver, believer (Blef-Kay), befog, soporific 
(Spref-Kay), province, profane, buffoon, prophet, profit, diver, driver, contriver, de- 
liver (Delf-Eay), traffic, extravagance, advance, defense, divinity, divide, devote, 
deviate, chaffer, juvenile, river (Kef-Kay), rougher, rover, reverence, reveal (Kef- 
Lay), rival, cover, discover, coffer, giver (Gef-Kay), graver, clever, heaver (Hef-Kay). 
(b) The sound of r after an Ef-hook is almost invariably represented by Kay, be- 
cause it can be usually employed in this case more conveniently than Ar. 

Rem. 2. The En-hook in the Middle of Words.— The following is a partial list of 
the words in which the En-hook may be advantageously employed between two 
strokes: Banish, finish, gainsay, vanish, convenience (con- Yen-Ens), finance, lonely, 
linear, replenish, French, furniture (Fren-Tee-Kay), Francis, princess (Pren-Ess- 
Iss), finery, keen-eyed, openness (Pen-Ens), evenness (Ven-Ens), thinness (Then- 
Ens), vacancy, millennium (Em-Len-Em), millionaire, turnkey (Tee-Ken-Kay), 
Spanish, pecuniary. 



2. LARGE HOOKS FOE SHON AND TIV. 

§ 190. Short and Tiv Added to Straight Lines. — The syllables short and 
tiv may be added to any straight line (with or without an initial hook, 
loop, or circle) by a large hook ; written for Shon on the circle-side ; 
and on the contrary side, for Tiv ; thus, X^ passion, \ t combat- 
ive, /\^ operation, 'Ny operative, """^L intrusion, ^~r]* nutritive, 
\J_3 provocation, \J provocative. 

Kem. The hook for shon may be used for any syllable of similar sound, however 
spelled, as for the final syllables of * magician, Persian, tertian, suspicion, fashion, 
passion (phonetic^aco??), derision (ph. derijori), flexion (ph. flelccori)? (ft) Care must 
be exercised lest the spelling should lead to the employment of this hook for sylla- 
bles whose consonants are not shn or zhn, as for the tion of question = Jcwesty vn. 

§ 191. Shon Added to Curves. — The syllable shon may be added to 
curve-consonants by a large final hook on the concave, or circle, side ; 
thus, ^j^> motion, ^ fashion, (^ allusion. See § 27, 3. 

Kem. 1. If it should be thought necessary or desirable to distinguish, with the use 

§ 190. "What syllables may be added to straight lines by a large final hook ? On 
which side of the straight line is the hook for shon written ? On which side of the 
straight line is the hook for tiv written ? Which of the Tiv or Shon hooks is writ- 
ten on the circle-side of straight lines ? which on the contrary side ? Write ' pas- 
sion, combative, operative, intrusion, nutritive, provocation, provocative. [Rem.] 
What syllables besides shon may be represented by the Shon-hook V When is it 
disallowable to represent the syllable tion by the Shon-hook ? Give some word in 
which the consonants denoted by tion are not shn or zhn. 

% 191. What syllable may be added to a curve-sign by a large final hook ? On 
which side of the curve-signs is the Shon-hook written ? Write ' motion, allusion, 
fashion, vision,' [Kem.] How, with the use of the Shon-hook, may zlwn be dis- 



GROUP-CONSONANT SIGNS. 93 

of the hook, between zhon and s7ion, the hook may be made heavy for the former ; 
thus, y^) delusion. 

Eeai. 2. Shon Represented by Shen. — Shon or a similar syllable is usually repre- 
sented by Shen in the following cases : 

(a) When this syllable contains the only consonants in a word ; as in ^ ocean. 

(b) "When this syllable is preceded by initial s only ; as in ^"session. 

(c) "When this syllable is preceded by two vowels in a word requiring to be dis- 
tinguished by outline from another of the same consonants ; as in Con-Tee-En-Shen, 
continuation, which requires to be distinguished from ' contention.' 

(d) In derivatives from words ending with Ish, as in diminution from diminish. 

Rem. 3. Tiv Following Curves.— The Tiv-hook is never written upon a curve- 
consonant, (b) The syllable tiv, when it can not be represented by a hook, is 
usually best represented by Tef. Hence, write En-Tef for ' native,' Em-Tef for 
1 motive,' Yee-Tef for ' votive,' En-Kays-Tef for ' inquisitive.' 

SYLLABLE-NAMES OF THE LARGE FINAL HOOKS. 

**• 

§ 192. The Uoolc for Shon.— {a) This hook is named the Shon-hook, or simply 
Shon. (b) The strokes with the Shon-hook, when spoken of as a class, are called 
the Shon-hook signs, (c) The simple, and group, consonants, with a Shon-hook, 
are named by adding the syllable Shon to the syllable-names of the strokes; thus, 
Pee'shon, Dee'shon, Eay'shon, Pel'shon, Per'shon, Pler'shon, PreFshon, Wer'shon, 
Eel'shon. 

§ 193. The Uooh for Tiv.—TW% hook is denominated the Tiv-hook, or simply 
Tiv. (b) The strokes with a Tiv-hook, when spoken of as a class, are called the 
Tiv-hook signs, (c) The simple, or group, consonants, with a Tiv-hook, are named 
by adding the syllable Tiv to the syllable-names of the strokes ; thus, Pee'tiv, Dee 7 - 
tiv, Chay'tiv, Pel'tiv, Eel'tiv, Per'tiv, Cher'tiv, Pler'tiv, Prel'tiv. 

ISS ADDED TO SHON AND TIV. 

§ 194. S or z may be added to the Shon or Tiv hook by a small 
circle written within the hook ; thus, \^ passions, '*\. operatives, 
Vc^ fashions. 



tinguished from shon ? Make that distinction in writing ' delusion.' Specify the 
cases in which Shon or a similar syllable should be represented by Shen. Write 
1 ocean, session, continuation, contention, admonish, admonition, diminish, diminu- 
tion.' Is it allowable to write a Tiv-hook on a curve-consonant? How, for the 
most part, should tiv be represented, when it can not be represented by a hook ? 
Write ' native, motive, votive, inquisitive.' 

§ 192. What is the name of the hook for shon t How are strokes with that hook 
attached, named ? What are such signs called, when spoken of as a class ? Make 
'Peeshon, Eayshon, Pelshon, Pershon, Wershon, Eelshon.' 

§ 193. What is the name of the hook for tiv? How are strokes with that hook, 
named? What are such signs called, when spoken of as a class? Make 'Peetiv, 
Deetiv, Peltiv, Pertiv, Wertiv.' 

§ 194. How, with the use of a circle, may s or z be added to Shon or Tiv ? Write 
passions, operatives, fashions.' 



94 THE COMPENDIUM. 

SHON AND TIV IN THE MIDDLE OF WOKDS. 

§ 195. The Shon and Tiv hooks are sometimes used in the middle 
of a word ; thus, X^f visionary, i s< ^ auctioneer, Li attract- 
iveness, ~p activity. 

Eem. The junction between Shon and a following stroke is sometimes rendered 
easier by an incurvation of the point of the hook ; thus, \f~ conditional. See 
§ 25, c. 

VOCALIZATION OF THE SHON AND TIV HOOK SIGNS. 

§ 196. A vowel after a stroke with a Shon or Tiv hook is read be- 
fore the hook ; thus, \j condition, ^-^ notion, -q-^ consecutive. 

Eem. 1. When a third-place vowel and a large final hook occur on the same side 
of a stroke, the vowel may be written within the hook. See in § 190, 'passion, in- 
trusion, provocative;' in §191, 'fashion, allusion;' in §194, 'passions, fashions;' 
in § 196,' consecutive.' 

Eem. 2. A vowel after Shon or Tiv must be written before a following stroke ; as 
in ' visionary, auctioneer, activity,' in § 195 ; (&) or written after a stroke for the 
final consonant of shon or tiv. 



3. SMALL HOOK FOR .SHON. 
§ 197. The syllable shon may be added by a small hook — 

1. To a Circle or Loop; thus, I- decision, \J> position, "V, posses- 
sion, ^o c persuasion, ^ transition, j^ condensation, \^ ^ adminis- 
tration. 

2. To an Ef-Hook ; thus, [^ division, [^, devotion, [^ diffusion. 

Eem. 1. This hook may be named the Small Shon-hook ; or, for the sake of dis- 
tinction, and with reference to its being always preceded by a vowel, it maybe 
called the Esh'on-hook, or simply Esh'on. 

Eem. 2. The principle of writing f-shn with two small hooks is of but little serv- 
ice comparatively, and should be very sparingly used, since most words ending 

§ 195. May or may not Shon or Tiv be used in the middle of a word ? Write 
1 visionary, auctioneer, attractiveness, activity.' [Eem.] How may the joining of Lay 
and Shon be rendered easy ? Write ' conditional.' 

§ 196. Where does a vowel read when placed after a stroke vith a Shon or Tiv 
hook ? Write ' condition, notion, consecutive.' [Eem.] When may a third-place 
vowel be written within a large hook ? Write ' fashion, intrusion, provocative, de- 
lusion, passions, fashions, consecutive.' How must a vowel be written when it oc- 
curs after shon or tiv f Write ' visionary, activity, auctioneer, conditional.' 

§ 197. To what signs may the syllable shon, etc., be added by a small hook ? 
Write ' decision, position, possession, persuasion, transition, condensation, admin- 
istration.' [Eem.] What is the name of the small hook for shon ? What is said of 
the use of two small hooks for f-shn ? What usually is the best mode of writing /or 
t> followed by shon t Write ' diffusion, privation, devotion, division.' How, with 



GROUP-CONSONANT SIGNS. 95 

with these consonants are more easily written, more legible, and can be more dis- 
tinctly and readily vocalized, when written with an Ef or Yee stroke ; thus, 

privation, I diffusion ; than when written with two small hooks. 

Eem. 3. The Eshon-hook may be made heavy for zhon; but this is not considered 
necessary in practice. 

Eem. 4. The reporter derives advantage occasionally from omitting one or more 
consonants preceding Iss-Eshon, or the consonants occurring between Iss and the 
syllable shon; writing ' tasation,' for instance, for ' taxation ;' * spesation' for ' speci- 
fication;' 'jusation' for 'justification ;" transition' for 'transaction;' ' prosution' for 
* prosecution.' In accordance with this principle is formed the contraction for 'in- 
vestigation,' which is given at § 202. - 

VOCALIZATION OF ESHON. 

§ 198. Eslion may be vocalized — 

1 . When Joined to a Circle or Loop — by writing a first-place vowel be- 
fore the hook ; a second-place or third-place vowel, after the hook. 
See 'decision, transition, persuasion, administration,' in § 197, 1. 

2. When Joined to an Ef-Hook — by writing the vowel, of whatever place, 
beside the hook. See 'division, devotion, diffusion,' in § 197, 2. 

Eem. 1. A third-place vowel never occurs before Eshon, except in some contrac* 
tions made in accordance with the principle of Eem. 4 under the preceding section. 

Eem. 2. The Eshon-hook after a loop or circle may usually be left unvocalized 
without endangering the legibility of the writing. 

ISS ADDED TO ESHON. 

§ 199. Iss may be added to the Eshon-hook, thus, "V, posses- 
sions, - ^g physicians. ^N^J) - 

ESHON IN THE MIDDLE OF WORDS. 

§ 200. Eshon may occur in the middle of a word ; thus, \/~ tran- 
sitional, y devotional, <C> V^" conversational. 

Eem. Words of the class of conversational, transitional, devotional, etc., will 
be found sufficiently legible, even though the vocalization in some cases should be 
purposely or necessarily imperfect. 

the use of a hook, may shon be distinguished from shon ? How does the reporter 
sometimes contract words ending in shon preceded by Iss, with or without an inter- 
vening consonant ? Write the reporting contractions for • taxation, specification, 
justifiction, transaction, prosecution.' What contraction of the Corresponding 
Style is formed in accordance with this principle ? 

§ 198. How is Eshon vocalized when it is joined to a circle or loop ? when joined 
to an Ef-hook ? 

§ 199. Is it allowable to add Iss to the Eshon-hook ? Write ' positions, physicians, 
transitions, administrations, persuasions.' 

§ 200. May the Eshon-hook be used in the middle of a word ? Write ' transitional, 
conversational, devotional.' [Eem.] What is sail with respect to the legibility of 
the words of the class of ' conversational,' etc. ? 



96 THE COMPENDIUM. 

WORD-SIGNS AND CONTRACTIONS. 

§ 201. LIST OF FINAL-HOOK WORD-SIGNS. 

\» \ t I \ / ■■ — 

Before, [above,] whatever, differ-^* e , truthful-ly, whichever, careful-ly, 

— JL«i_ \ \ % J -J- 

gave, I have, whoever, upon, been, remembrance, done, down, 
general-ly, can, again— -Li ten, phonography*— Standard Phonography, 

..^. 1. C -i- r a - ~ 

even, within, then, than, alone, men, man, opinion, 

v>. . . \> . ■"> "\a ' \ 

none, known, objection, objective, subjection, subjective. 

Rem. 1. Often, Even.— Often is written in the second position, notwithstanding its 
accented vowel is first-place, in order to distinguish it more certainly from even, 
with which, in rapid writing, it is found to conflict, if both are written in the same 
position. 

Rem. 2. I have. — These words are usually written with the first form given for 
them in the preceding list. 

Rem. 3. Derivatives. — (a) ' Objectionable,' objection with Bel disjoined, or, what 
is better, with Bee joined ; (&) 'generalize,' general with Zee disjoined; 'general- 
ization,' general with Zee'shon disjoined, or, what is preferable, with Iss-Eshon 
joined; (c) 'objectively, subjectively,' objective, subjective, with Lay disjoined, or 
with El joined. Other derivatives may be formed in accordance with the prin- 
ciple of § 40, Rem. 2. 

Rem. 4. Have, Of, and If Added.- the principle of adding have to the abbre- 
viated I (see § 103), and ever to the signs for which and who, — have or of may be 
added, by an Ef-hook, to any full-length straight-line, to the dash-vowel word-signs, 

and to the horizontal and'tick; thus, "\" out of; [ it will have; ( each of ; 
all of, all have; ^ to have; or of, or have; i, but of, but have; 



I who have, who of ; & should have; _^ and of, but not and have. This is 
a principle of the corresponding style, and may be freely and advantageously used. 

§ 201. Cover the sign-words of § 201 and read the word-signs above. Cover the 
word-signs and repeatedly make the proper signs for the words below. [Rem.] "Why 
is often written in the second position? How is even distinguished from often t 
What is the usual form for ' I have ?' Write ' objectionable, generalize, generaliza- 
tion, objectively, subjectively.' To what signs may have or of be added by an Ef- 
hook ? Write ' out of, it will have, each of, all of, all have, to have, or of, or have, 
but have, but of, who have, who of, should have, and of.' Is it allowable, in the 



GROUP-CONSONANT SIGNS 



97 



[b) The reporter does, and the advanced writer of the corresponding style mai/ f 
apply this principle for the addition of if, when it can not be more conveniently ex- 
pressed by its usual sign. For example, the sign for or and but, with the Ef-hook, 
may be used respectively for or if, but if. 

REPORTING PRINCIPLES. 

Eem. 5. ' Nop Added. — The reporter adds not to the signs for out and or, by an 

En-hook ; thus, j but not, J or not, but are not. 

Eem. 6. What or Would Added.— The reporter joins a brief "Way like an En-hook 
to the dash-vowel word-signs in the direction of Pee, and to the horizontal and-tick, 

to add what or would ; thus, of what, ^ to what, all would, and 

what, -=> and would. (5) This hook may be made into a circle, to add s ; thus, 

^ to what is, to what has, etc. See § 88, 3. (c) What or would may be added to 

any curve by a small hook turned on the convex side ; thus, V^ for what, for would. 

Eem. 7. Own Added. — Own may be added by an En-hook (when the stroke is 

not more convenient) to the full-length consonants expressing our; and to the 

dash-vowel word-signs, and the horizontal <z?ic?-tick, to w r hich our has been added 

by an Ar-hook ; thus, ^> by our own, of our own, c-o and our own. 

Eem. 8. ■ Than* added to Comparatives.— Any comparative without a final hook, 
loop, or circle may have 'than' added to it by an En-hook. Mem, for instance, 
may be written for ' more than ;' Iss-Xern for ' sooner than.' 

2. LIST OF CONTRACTIONS CONTAINING FINAL-HOOK SIGNS. 

§ 202. It is found convenient to contract five words wk-Ose outlines 
contain final-hook signs ; thus, 

^^<p investigation 



\^ phonographer V^ phonographic 

/X^ representation /N^ representative. 

§ 203. LIST OF WORDS REPRESENTED BY FINAL-HOOK SIGNS. 



[above] 


done 


- objection 


than 


again 


down 


objective 


then 


alone 


even 


often 


truthful-ly 


before 


gave 


opinion 


upon 


been 


general-ly 


phonography 


whatever 


can 


I have 


remembrance 


whichever 


careful-ly 


known 


Standard Pho- 


whoever 


differ 


man 


nography 


within. 


difference 


men 


subjection 




different 


none 


subjective 





Eeporting Style, to add if by an Ef-hook ? Write ' or if, but if.' "With the use or 
the reporting principles explained in Eems. 5, 6, 7, and 8, write ' but not, or not, but 
are not, or are not, of what, to what, all would, and what, and would, to what is, to 
what has, for what, for would, by our own, of our own, and our own, our own, more 
than, sooner than.' 

§ 202. Eepeatedly write the contractions containing final-hook signs. 

§ 203. Eepeatedly write the proper signs for the words in § 203. 

5 



93 



MPENDIIJM. 



III. WIDENING. 

P OR B ADDED TO EM. 

§ 204. Em may be widened ; thus, ^^ ; to indicate the addition of 
the sound of p or b; thus, ^ < lamp, °^\^^ swamp, ~n icmp, 

■s^ impose, <^> impostor, ^yf embezzle, ^ i humbug, <^> 

ambition, (b) This sign may take an En or Shon hook, but no initial 
hook. 



Rem. 1. JSyllable-27ame— The widened Em may be called Emp, when it repre- 
Bents mp; and Emb, when it represents mb. 

Eem. 2. Mer, <?~^ (in which the stroke is widened, to distinguish Mer from 
Wem), can not be mistaken for Emp or Emb with an Ar-hook, for this sign never 
takes an initial hook. 

Bem. 3. The advanced writer may use Emb in the second position as a sign lor 
' may be.' 

Eem. 4. P Omitted. — P is usually omitted when immediately preceded by m and 
immediately followed by tf, s7t, or Jc; as in temptation, consumption, pumpkin; 
for words of this class are sufficiently legible without the expression of the .p. 

VOCALIZATION OF EMP OR EMB. 

§ 205. A vowel written beside Emp or Emb should not be read be- 
tween the two consonants, but before or after both, according as it 
is written above or below ; thus, ^-^ imposed, v ^ Impost, >"~*s im- 
pugn. See 'ambition, embezzle,' in § 204. 

§ 206. WORD-SIGNS CONTAINING EMP. 



import^, 



le 



improve-ment, impossibjg t 



Eem. Derivatives.—' Improved,' improve with Dee below it. The advanced 
writer, however, usually omits the Dee, 'improved' being readily distinguished 
from ' improve,' by reference to the context, (b) ' Impossibilities,' Empses. 



§ 204. For what purpose may Em be widened ? How, without joining Pee or Bee, 
may its sound be added to Em ? What hooks does the sign for mp or mb take ? 
Does it take an initial hook ? What final hooks does it take ? Write ' lamp, swamp, 
romp, impose, impostor, embezzle, humbug, ambition.' [Eem.] What is the name 
of the sign for mp f for mb ? How is the widened stroke of Mer to be distinguished 
from Emp or Emb ? How may the advanced writer write may be ? Specify the 
cases for the omission of p. (Jive some words from which p may be omitted. 

§ 205. Where does a vowel written beside Emp or Emb read? Write 'impose, 
impost, impostor, impugn.' 

§ 206. Wr»te ' important, importance, improve, improvement, impossible, impos- 
BibilHy ' Wvite 'improved.' How is this word written by the advanced welter » 




GEOUP-CONSONANT SIGNS. 99 

IV. LENGTHENING. 

LENGTHENED CURVES. 

§ 207. Doubling the length— 

1. Of Tag, adds kr cr gr ; thus, C „ thinker, 
(^ ^ longer. 

2. Of any other curve, adds tr % dr, or ihr; thus 
winter, /^~~ older, ^-p^ mother, V . father. 

Eem. 1. Syllable- Fames. — The lengthened curves may be named by prefixing tho 
syllable-name of the stroke to the sound denoted by its lengthening ; thus, Lay'ter, 
Way'ter, Wen'ter, En'ther, Fel'ther, Feather, Fler'ther, Frel'ther, Ing'ker. 

Eem. 2. The reporter may distinguish words, in which a vowel precedes a length- 
ened curve, as in old-er, from words in which a vowel follows, as in later, by mak- 
ing the stroke, in the former case, considerably curved ; and less curved, in the latter 

case; thus, f older, elder, etc., later, letter, etc. *• 

Eem. 3. In the Eeporting Style, it is allowable to lengthen a final Ing, to add 

their, they are, or there; thus, ^ — ^ _ ^ among their. 

Eem. 4. The past tense or perfect participle of a verb ending in Lay'ter, En'ter 

or Ing'ker, is usually formed best by adding Dee to the primitive; thus, f I 

slaughtered, /^~^\ rendered, i anchored. 

Eem. 5. Shel'ter, if written quite slanting, may, unlike Shel (§ 161, o), stand alone 
and be used with advantage for shelter, shoulder. (J?) Dee may be added for sheU 
tcred, shouldered. 

VOCALIZATION OF TIIE LENGTHENED CURVES. 

§ 208. (a) Sounds added by lengthening a curve should be read — 

f 

1. After the vowel following the stroke; thus, A water, ^ — y 

neither. 



§ 207. What sounds are added to Ing by doubling its length ? "What sounds are 
added to any other curve-sign by lengthening it ? Write ' thinker, longer, letter, 
winter, older, mother, father.' [Eem.] How are the lengthened curves named? 
How, in the Eeporting Style, may words in which a vowel precedes a curve, as 
older, be distinguished from words in which a vowel follows a lengthened curve, as 
in later t Write ' older, elder, later, letter, latter.' What is said of adding their to 
a final Ing ? How is it best to form the past tense or perfect participle of verbs end- 
ing in Lay'ter, En'ter, or Ing'ker ? Write ' slaughtered, rendered, anchored.' May 
Shelter stand alone ? Write ' shelter, shoulder, sheltered, shouldered.' 

§ 208. Are the sounds added by lengthening read before or after a vowel after the 
lengthened stroke ? before or after a sound expressed by a final hook, loop, or cir- 
cle ? Write ' water, neither, modern, lanterns.' What is said as to the expression 
of a vowel following the sounds added by lengthening ? Write 4 alteration, eccen- 
tric, angry, ultra.' 



100 THE COMPENDIUM. 

2. Before any sound expressed by a final hook, loop, or circle; 
thus, < ^ modern, f< — > lanterns. 

(b) Hence a vowel following the consonants denoted by lengthening 
nrust be omitted, as in ^fj alteration; written before a following 
stroke-consonant, as in -i-^A- ™^™ ; or written after an 
Ar-hook sign ; thus, ^_^— angry-, ^f\, ultra. 

POSITION OB LENGTHENED CURVES. 

5 209 In determining the position of a lengthened curve, regard 
the second half as a distinct sign, and place the first half in its proper 
position, according to the rules previously given. See §§ 52, 63. 

m ft a lengthened "Way, for example, is to be written in the second position, let 
the fllsYhalf o^ay propel, rest on the line, and the addition for «r, *, or thr ex- 
tend below the line. See examples in the next section. 

§ 210. LIST OE LEXGTHENED-CURVE WORD-SIGNS. 

— ' entire ^-^ another ^ matter 

^-■rather -^-whether -^v- father. . 

v *W„ WtiUHal-Ui -Entirely is formed from the sign for entire, it 

acc—tut^^ 

for matter, by adding Lay. 

'THEIR,' 'THEY ARE,' OE ' THERE 1 ADDED. 

§ 211. A curve-sign without a final hook, loop, or circle may be 
lengthened to add their, they are, or there; thus, ^ = ^_ in there, or in 
their ; V if there, if their, or if they are ; A^. for there, for 

their,'*' for they are ; _AA. when there, when their, or when they 
are . A. through there, or through their. 



Eem. Own Added.-Own may be added to these or any other signs exprcs^ng 
flJfrlVan En-hook, when the stroke for own is not more convenient; thus, 



from their own. 



§ 209. How is the position of a lengthened curve determined ? 

1 210. Eepeatedly write and read the lengthened-curve word-Signs. [Bern.] How 
are entirety and materially written? «^wi«'* 

§211. To what signs may their, they are, or there** ^*%%*^™£L 
Write 'in there, in their, if there, if their, if they are, for there, for the r for they 
are when there when their, when they are, through there, through their.' [Bern.] 
Ho; may ol 'be added to signs expressing theirt Write 'from then- own, for 
their own, in their own.' 



GPwOCJP-CONSONANT SIGNS. 101 

V. HALVING. 



1. HALVING TO ADD EITHER T OR D. 

§ 212. Either t or d may be added to certain signs, by halving them : 

1. To Any Unhooked Consonant- Stroke, except El, Lay, Em, En, Ar, 

Ing, "Way, Yay, Emp or Emb ; thus, \ pay, n^ pate, paid, 
^ bee, ^ bead, beat, *<_ vie, C" vied, __ get, ^ bowed, 
k doubt, /S rapid, <r— i credit. 

2. To Any Hooked Consonant- Stroke ; thus, *\^ pray, ^ prayed, prate, 
] v dry, 1 V dried, \^ play, ^. played, plate, c glow, c_ glowed, 

gloat, /A^ reply, y^ replied, ^ wind, <^ went, 'f wield, 
^ ward, wart, X drift, V contrived, ^ paint, pained, \^ bent, 

i v 

bend, — -> gained, ^ find, \^ patient, ^ ancient. 

PcEM. 1. Way, Tay, Emp, and Ing are never halved for any purpose; but El, 
Lay, Em, En, and Ar are sometimes halved, as will appear from § 213. 

Eem. 2. Hooked Way, Yay, Emp, unlike simple Way, Yay, Emp, may be halved ; 

thus, °^* swooned, _ yield, ^ impugned. 

Hem. o. T Distinguished from D. — If it should be deemed desirable, d, when 
added b) halving to an Ef, En, or Shon hook sign, may be distinguished from t, by 

widening the hook ; thus, <n^ proved, v pained, V^> fashioned. (I) But this 

distinction is, for the most part, unnecessary. 

Kem. 4. In other cases, when t and d would not be sufficiently distinguished if 
both were added to the same kind of line, t should not be added by halving, except 
to a light line ; nor d, except to a heavy line. If, for instance, bead requires to be 
distinguished from beat, write Bed for the former and Bee-Tee for the latter. For 
corresponding reasons, write Pret for prate, but Per-Dee for prayed; Gled for 
glowed, but Gel-Tee for gloat; Wert for wart, but Wer-Dee for ward; Bred for 

§ 212. To what signs by halving them may either t or d be added ? What un- 
hooked consonant-strokes do not admit of halving for the addition of either t or d ? 
Write 'pay, pate, payed, bee, beat, bead, vie, vied, get, doubt, rapid, credit, pray, 
prayed, prate, dry, dried, play, played, plate, glow, glowed, gloat, reply, replied, 
wind, went, wield, ward, wart, drift, contrived, paint, pained, bent, bend, gained, 
find, patient, ancient.' [Rem.] What unhooked consonant-strokes are never halved 
for any purpose ? May El, Lay, Em, En, and Ar be halved for any purpose ? Do 
Wayn, Yel, and Emp'en admit of halving? Write 'swooned, yield, impugned.' 
How may d, if it is deemed desirable, be distinguished from t when it is added by 
halving to an Ef, En, or Shon hook sign? Is this distinction often needed ? Write 
' proved, pained.' In what case should not a t be added by halving to a heavy line, 
nor d to a light one ? How, if it were necessary, could you make a distinction be- 
tween ' bead, beat ; prate, prayed ; glowed, gloat ; ward, wart ; bride, bright ; broad, 



102 THE COMPENDIUM. 

"bride or broad, but Ber-Tee for bright or brought, (b) But when the aid of tlie 
context can be availed of, these distinctions are seldom required. 

Eem. 5. Ret, Bed. — The shortened Eay is never used alone ; hence, ' rate, root, 
wrought, write, wrote, etc.,' are written with Eay-Tee; and 4 reed, rod, road, rode, 
red, read, rood, rude,' etc., are written with Eay-Dec. 

Eem. 6. Past Tense, etc.— The syllable ted terminating adjectives and the past 






jense or perfect participle of a verb, is usually written with Ted ; thus, \^ part, 
V/J parted, (b) The vowel of this syllable may usually be omitted without im- 
pairing the legibility of the writing. 



2. HALVING TO ADD T TO A LIGHT, OR D TO A HEAVY 

SIGN. 

§ 213. By halving the curve-signs for I, m, n, or r, — t or d is added, 
according as the shortened letter is made light or heavy ; thus, ^ It, 

r Id ; ^ mt, ^ md ; w nt, ^ nd ; -^ rt, -^ rd ; ^ late f 

£ loud, ^ meet, ^ mode, ,w need, v^ night, -^ art, -^ erred, 

s^j. candidate, ^U. undoubted, < -^ indicate, K ^^ T ~ ] , indicated , 

(b) Let (- when standing alone, is invariably written upward, and 

usually, when joined to other strokes, (c) Eld f is always written 
downward. 

Eem. 1. Final rd. — Final rd preceded by Kay, Gay, Ef, Vee, or Lay, as in 
* cured, cord, geared, fired, ford, veered, lured, lard,' may be written with Ard by 
careful writers ; but for the majority of writers, and especially in rapid writing, it 
will be more convenient in these cases to write rd with Red, that is, with a short- 
ened Eay. 

Eem. 2. The strokes of shortened Wem and Wen must not be widened when d is 

added ; for these signs could not then be distinguished from <r\ Merd and ^ 
Nerd. See § 163, Eem. 1. 

brought ?' "What is said as to the use of these distinctions when the aid of the con- 
text can be had ? Is shortened Eay ever used alone ? Write ' rate, root, wrought, 
write, wrote, reed, rod, road, rode, red, read, rood, rude.' What is said as to the 
mode of writing the syllable ted ? Write ' part, parted.' Is it allowable to omit 
the vowel of this syllable ? 

§ 213. For what purpose may the curve-signs for I, on, n, and r be halved ? 
When is t added to these shortened letters ? When is d added to them ? Write, 
with shortened signs, ''It, Id, mt, md, nt, nd, rt, rd; late, loud, meet, mode, need, 
night, art, erred.' Write ' candidate, undoubted, indicate, indicated.' (b) What is 
the direction of Let ? of Eld ? [Eem.] What is said as to the mode of writing final 
rd preceded by Kay, Gay, Ef, Vee, Lay ? Write, first with Ard, and then with Eet, 
the following words : ' cured, cord, geared, fired, ford, veered, lured, lard.' Is it 
allowable to widen the strokes of Wem and Wen when halved for the addition of d f 



GROUP-CONSONANT SIGNS. 103 

Rem. 3. Since Yay, Emp, Ing, "Way ar6 never halved, Eld can not be read for 
yd ; Med for mpt ; Ned for ngd ; Ard for ivd. 

Eem. 4. In a very few cases when Eld can not be conveniently used, Let is em- 
ployed for Id; as in 'muzzled, embezzled.' 

Eem. 5. The words 'undoubted ; indicate, indicated,' in § 213, illustrate the prin- 
ciple of §212, Eem. 6. 

SYLLABLE-NAMES OF THE SHORTENED LETTERS. 

§ 214. The halved letters, when spoken of as a class, may be called Shortened, or 
Short Letters; Half-Length Signs or Letters; x>r simply Half-Lengths. (5) The 
different half-lengths are named by adding the syllable et or ed to the sound of the 
fall-length, except when it is more -convenient, or better for distinction's sake, to 
add the sound of t or d to the syllable-name of the full-length ; thus, Pet or Ped, Bet 
or Bed, Let, Eld, Met, Med, Net, Ned, Art, Ard, Eet, Wemt or Wemd, Wert or 
Wferd, Plet or Pled, Elet or Bled, Tlet or Teld, Deft or Deld or Died, Pret, Bred or 
Bret, Mert or Merd, Pee'shont or Pee'shond, Dee'shond, etc. 

§ 215. BEADING AND VOCALIZATION OF SHORTENED LETTERS. 

1. Read a shortened letter (with the vowel or vpwels beside it, if 
any ; but without a final circle or loop) precisely as though it were a 
full-length sign. 

2. Add the sound denoted by halving. 

3. Add the sound of the circle or loop, if any. 

Thus: 1°" tau-t = taught, ^- fee-t = feet, tauk-t = talked, 

b drif-t-s = drifts, ^. plan-d = planned, *^ complain- t-s = com- 
plaints, p studen-t-s = students, -^ ar-t = art, ^ mi-d-st= midst, 
.p stat-d = stated. 

Eem. Prom the preceding paragraph the following propositions are derived: 
(a) A shortened letter is vocalized precisely as though it were a full-length, (b) The 
t or d added by halving reads before a final circle or loop, but after all the conso- 
nants of the shortened sign, and after the vowels, if any, beside it. Ileace the fol- 
lowing rule respecting 

A YOWEL AFTER T OR D. 

§ 216. When a vowel occurs after a consonant which may be added 
by halving, the vowel must be omitted ; as in o^. anticipate ; (b) 

written before a following stroke-consonant ; as in c *^ wisdom ; (c) or 

Why not ? Why can not Eld, Med, Ned, Ard be read as 4 yd, mpt, ngd, wd ?' Is 
Lot ever employed for Id ? " Write * muzzled, embezzled.' 

§ 214. How are the shortened letters named ? 

§ 215. What is the proper method of reading a shortened letter ? Write ' taught, 
feet, talked, drifts, planned, complaints, students, art, midst, stated.' [Eem.] Like 
what is a shortened letter vocalized ? Where does the t or d added by halving read ? 

§ 216. What is said as to a vowel occurring after a consonant which may be added 
by halving ? Write ' anticipate, wisdom, unity, notice.' 



101 THE COMPENDIUM. 

the consonant must be expressed by a stroke, and the vowel written 
after it ; as in Js - > T unity, ^tT notice. 



OF JOINING SHORTENED LETTERS. 

§ 217. A shortened letter must not be joined to another stroke, ex- 
cept when it would be easy, by reference to their junction, length, 
width, curvature, or some other particular, to distinguish the joined 
signs from any other letter or letters ; as in ^ . portrait, ^\ hated, 
'"^Y midnight, ^^ sentiment, ^_^ named, s^z_^ maiden. Hence, 
write ^ — h not - ^ • for effect ; f I not f for liked. 



Rem. It is not allowable to join a shortened Kay to Ef or Lay, or to make similar 
junctions of a straight line with a curve-sign, one or the other being short ; for such 
forms would be liable to be mistaken for lengthened curves, or for curves with a 
full-length straight line joined. Nor would it be allowable to join a half-length 
straight sign to another straight sign in the same direction ; for the two letters could 
not be certainly and readily distinguished from a single straight line or from two 
straight lines. (/>) It should not be inferred from the example of named in the pre- 
ceding paragraph, that a light full-length and a light half-length may be similarly 
joined, except by a very careful writer ; for, unless the half-length were heavy, the 
joined letters would be more readily mistaken for two fall-length strokes. If Met, 
for instance, were joined to En, the two letters might very easily be mistaken for 
En-Em. 

SHORTENED LETTERS DISJOINED. 

§ 218. When it would not be allowable to join a shortened letter, 
it is occasionally better to detach it than to write its equivalent full 
lengths; as in |? dated, || treated, ] , dreaded, ^ . freighted. 

Rem. In a few cases, when it would be inconvenient to join a downward Est to a 
preceding hook, the inconvenience of disjoining a letter, or of a change of outline 

may be avoided by writing Est upward ; thus, ^-3 opinionist, V__^d factionisfc 

POSITION OF WORDS WITH HALF-LENGTH LETTERS. 

§ 219. Y/hen the first, or only, inclined or perpendicular stroke of a 
word is a half-length letter, that letter should be written — 

1 . Half the height of a Tee above the line, that is, in the first posi- 
tion, when the accented vowel is first-place ; as in *V-^ esteem, v— ^ 

bottom, ^~~1 needed, 1 v tried, J^- void. 

§ 217. When may a shortened letter be joined to another stroke? [Rem.] May 
£et be joined to Ef or Lay ? a shortened straight sign, to another straight sign in the 
ame direction? Met to En? 

§ 218. Does an advantage sometimes result from disjoining a short letter ? "When, 
and for what purpose, may Est be written upward ? 

§ 219. Repeat the rule for the position of words whose first, or only inclined con- 
sonant is a half-length. "Write, in proper position, * esteem, bottom, needed,' eta 



GKOUP-COHSONANT SIGN'S. 105 

2. On the line, that is, in the second position, when the accented 

vowel is second-place or third- place ; as in ^ fate, ^ estimate, 

N^ abundant, Q ^ sent, t7 loud, <J< knowest. 

Eem. "Words composed entirely of horizontal consonants, -whether full-length or 
half-length — one or many— are, of course, written in accordance with § 52 — 

1. The height of a Tee above the line, that is, in the first position, when the ac- 
cented vowel is first-place ; as in * meet. 

2. On the line, that is, in the second position, when the accented vowel is second* 

place or third-place; as in ^, met, ■ "\ impugned. 

J. 
USE OF THE HALVING PRINCIPLE. 

§ 220. T or d, when it can not be allowably and more conveniently 
expressed in some other manner, may be added by halving to any con- 
sonant which it is allowable to shorten. 

(b) Except usually in the following cases : 

1. When the t or d is followed by a vowel whicri/Can not be safely 
omitted or written before a following stroke ; as in ' motto, needy, 
notice, equity, veto, into, window.' 

2. When the t or d is final, and is preceded by a vowel and a con- 
sonant which follows an initial vowel; as in 'unite, avowed, abed, 
acute.' 

3. When the d is preceded by Z, r, or n, preceded and followed by a 
vowel ; as in ' hallowed, allied, elude, solid, rallied, married, bor- 
rowed, narrowed, torrid, tarried, moneyed, monad, renewed, annoyed, 
accompanied.' (b) This rule does not apply to t in a similar situation. 

4. When thei or d is preceded by two vowels ; as in * quiet, poet, 
Jewett, naiad.' 

5. When the only consonant preceding the t or d is initial r ; as in 
1 write, rate, root, wrought, reed, road, red.' See § 212, Eem. 5. 

G. When it would not be allowable to join a half-length, nor advan- 
tageous to detach it ; as in ■ liked, effect, cooked, gagged, judged, 
roared.' 

Eem. 1. The effect of the above rule and the first exception is to distinguish by 
outlines between such words as 'need, needy; wind, windy; might, mighty ; fat, 
fatty.' 

Eem. 2. The effect of the above rule and the second exception is to distinguish 
by outlines between such words as ' void, avoid ; bed, abed ; foot, afoot' 

Eem. 3. The preceding rule and the third exception secure a distinction by out- 

[Eem.] Eepeat the directions for determining the position of words composed en- 
tirely of horizontal signs. Write, and place according to directions, the following 
words : ' meet, mate, mode, night, need, indicate.' 

§ 220. Eepeat the general rule for the use of the halving principle. Specify the 
general exceptions. "Write the words given to illustrate the exceptions. 

5« 



106 THE COMPENDIUM. 

lines between such words as 'fold, fallowed; lied, allied; sold, solid ; rolled, ral- 
lied ; marred, married ; barred, borrowed ; tarred, torrid ; tired, tirade ; ruined, 
renewed.' 

Eem. 4. The above rule and the fourth exception secure a distinction between 
certain words of a single syllable, a3 quite, and other words of two syllables, as 
quiet. So also ' Jude, Jewett.' 

§ 221. LIST OF HALF-LENGTHS USED FOR WORD-SIGNS. 

-v -s- Z. _ ." _ .^.. . .L .L 



put, about, quite, could, God, good, if it, after, thought, that, 

< l ) X > ->■- X. r 

without, astonish-^ ent , establish-^ ent , is it, h-as it, used, wished, let, 
let us, world, Lord, read, heard, word, might, imniediate-ly, 

<TN V" ...w__ Q^ 

/m ^ v_^ ( -^y q_y 

made, somewhat, not, nature, [natural-ly,] under, is not, h-as not, 

tL .1. r -r- r.. -q, ^. 



want, till it, told, until it — called, equaled — valued, particular-ly, 
opportunity, spirit, toward, according-ly, cared, great, throughout, 

~ ± j -J-- jL j Z 



in order, did not, do not, had not, gentlemen, gentleman — kind, cannot, 



account, will not, we will not, are not, we are not, were not, 

^ ^ ^ s </> 

mind — may not, am not — we may not, it will not, which will not. 

Eem. 1. When all the consonants of a regular verb are expressed by a full-length 
word-sign, the past tense should be indicated by that word-sign made half-length. 
For example, see use in § 37; equal, value, and care in § 178, and the past tenses— 

§ 221. Cover the word-signs in § 221, and repeatedly write the proper signs for the 
words below them. Next cover the sign-words and repeatedly read the signs above 
them. [Rem.] How is the past tense of a verb to be expressed when all the conso- 
nants of the present tense are expressed by a word-sign ? Write i use, used ; 
equal, equaled ; call, called ; value, valued ; care, cared.' Is the halving principle 



GROUP-CONSONANT SIGNS. 



107 



used, equaled^ valued, and cared — in the above list, (b) The halving principle 
may be employed, in some other cases, to add a t or d, to form a derivative from a 
word-sign or contraction ; but very rarely, unless the word-sign or contraction con- 
tains the last consonant of the primitive word ; hence, Mer, the sign for remark, 
should not be halved to add t for remarked ; but, if preferred to writing a disjoined 
Dee, Ber, the sign for remember, may be halved, to add d for remembered. 

Eem. 2. Derivatives.— Derivatives from the sign-words of the preceding list may 
be written in accordance with the principles of § 40, Eem. 2. Thus : to the sign for 
World add El for worldly ; El-En-Iss for worldliness ; to the sign for Bead add Ar 
for reader, and the ing-dot for reading ; to the sign for Nature add El for natu* 
raUly ; El-Steh for naturalist; to the sign for Spirit add Lay for spiritually, 
Lay-Tee for spirituality; to the sign for Great add Lay for greatly ; Eay foi 
greater ; Steh for greatest; En-Iss for greatness; to the sign for kind add Lay for 
kindly ; En-Iss for kindness; and prefix En for unkind ; below the sign for Aston- 
ish of Establish write the ing-dot for astonishing, establishing ; near the sign for 
Particular write Tee or Zee for particularity, particularize; near Lord or Gen- 
tleman write Lay for lordly, gentlemanly. 

Eem. 3. Distinctions. —If it should be deemed desirable to distinguish by signs 
between particular and particularly, etc., Lay may be written near the end of the 
signs for ' immediate, particular, according,' for ' immediately^particularly, accord- 
ingly.' 

Eem. 4.—' It, Had, What, Would, Not? Added.— The reporter occasionally short- 
ens a stroke to add it, had, what, or tcould; thus, in it or in what; "j"' had 

it or had had : 



" it would, it had, at it, at what; --(-- they had, they would. 
(b) To signs thus formed for it would or it had; they would, they had, etc., the 
word not may sometimes be added by an En-hook ; thus, —J- it would not, it had 
not ; •-•(,— they would not, they had not. 



§ 222. LIST OF 


WORDS REPRESENTED BY HALF-LENGTH SIGNS. 


about 


can not 


good 


according-ly 


cared 


great 


account 


could 


had not 


after 


did not 


has it 


am not 


do not 


has not 


are not 


equaled 


heard 


as it 


establish-ed 


if it 


as not 


establishment 


immediate-ly 


astonisb-ed 


gentlemen 


in order 


astonishment 


gentleman 


is it 


called 


God 


is not 



employed in other cases to add t or d to form a derivative ? "Write, with the use 
of that principle, the word ' remembered.' How may ' particularly' be distinguished 
from * particular V i immediately' from ' immediate ?' ' accordingly' from * accord- 
ing ?' What words does the reporter occasionally add to others by the use of the 
halving principle ? "Write ' in it, in what ; had it, had had ; it would, it had ; at it, 
at what; they had, they would.' To signs thus formed how may not be added? 
"Write ' it would not, it had not ; they would not, they had not.' 
§ 222. Eepeatedly write the contractions given in § 222. 



108 



THE COMPENDIUM 



it will not 


put 


valued 


kind 


quite 


want 


let 


read 


we are not 


let us 


somewhat 


we may not 


Lord 


spirit 


we will not 


made 


that 


were not 


may not 


thought 


which will not 


might 


throughout 


will not 


mind . 


till it 


wished 


nature 


told 


without 


[natural-ly] 


toward 


word 


not 


under 


world. 


opportunity 


until it 




particular-ly 


used 





§ 223. LIST OF CONTRACTED WORDS CONTAINING HALF-LENGTHS. 

acknowledged, afterward, forward, inconsistent, indiscrirninat? onT 

A 7 v < 'I 

indispensable, intelligence, intelligent, intelligible, interest, 



.le 



^ 



3-v ■ W ^ 

manuscript, onward, practicabjf it , transcript, understand, understood. 

Eem. 1. Derivatives. — {a) l Aclcnoicledgmentf Kay-Jay-Ment ; (b) ''forwarded? 
Ef-Wer-Ded; 'forwarder,' Ef-Wer-Der; (c) 'inconsistency,' Enses-Ten-Ess ; 'in- 
consistently,' inconsistent with Lay disjoined, or with El joined ; (d) ' indiscrimi- 
nately,' indiscriminate with Lay written near the end of the Kay ; (e) ' intelli- 
gencer,' Net-Jay-Iss-Ar ; ' intelligibility,' Net-Jay, with Bee written near the Jay ; 
'intelligently,' intelligent with Lay disjoined, or with El joined; (/) 'interested,' 
Net-Stet (see § 221, E. 1, b) ; ' disinterested,' Dees-Nets-Ted ; ' disinterestedness,' 
disinterested with Ens joined, or with the beginning of Ens written under the Ted. 
{g) ' Transcribe-r, transcription, understanding, interesting,' and other derivatives, 
may be formed in accordance with the principle of § 40, Eem. 2. 



§ 224 

acknowledged — § 223, E., a 

afterward 

forward— § 223, E., d. 

inconsistent— do., c. 

indiscriminate — do., d. 

indiscrimination 

indispensable 

indispensably 

intelligence— § 223, E., e. 

intelligent — do. 



LIST OP CONTRACTED WORDS CONTAINING HALF-LENGTHS. 

221, E. 1, b. intelligible— § 223, E., e, 
interest— do., f. 

manuscript 
onward 
practicable , 
practicability 
transcript 
understand 
understood. 



§ 223. Write frequently the signs for the words of § 223. 
§ 224. Eepeatedly write the words given in § 224. 



CONTRACTIONS AND EXPEDIENTS. 1C9 



CONTRACTIONS AND EXPEDIENTS. 

§ 225. Aside from the most advantageous use of stenographic materiel for the 
expression of sounds— speed and ease of writing are derived chiefly from the use of 
certain expedients, and principles of contraction, which may be presented under 
four heads : 

1. The imperfect expression of words. 

2. Joining parts of words. 

3. Joining words— Phrase- writing. 

4. Omission of words. 



I. IMPERFECT EXPRESSION. 



1. WORD-SIGNS AND CONTRACTIONS. 

§ 226. For the sake of uniformity of practice and for ease of reading it is estab- 
lished that certain words, because of their frequent occurrence, or for other sufficient 
reasons, shall be expressed by a portion of their signs. These contractions, for the 
sake of distinction, are divided into Word-Signs and Contractions, as explained at 
§ 104, Eem. 2. 

For the partial lists of contractions and word-signs, and the remarks concerning 
them, see the portions of this work which are indicated by the following references : 
§33-40; 54-55; 6S-74; 102-104; 140-143; 178-180; 201-203; 206; 210; 221-224. 

Complete lists of the contractions and word-signs presented in preceding sections 
vnil be furnished in a subsequent portion of this work, and accompanied by a 
*T*iopsis of the principles pertaining to them. 



2. CONTRACTED PREFIXES. 



§ 227. The labor of writing may be materially diminished by the 
employment of contractions for those prefixes which it won Id be diffi- 
cult or tedious to write in full, (b) The contractions are called Prefix- 
Signs, and the prefixes represented by them are denominated Sign- 
Prefixes. 

§ 227. "What is a prefix-sign ? "What is a sign-prefix ? 



110 THE COMPENDIUM. 

§ 228. LIST OE PREFIX-CONTRACTIONS. 

1. Accom — expressed by a lieavy dot written at the "beginning of the 
remainder of the word ; thus, ' accommodate, \^, accompany. 

2. Circum — indicated by Iss written beside the first stroke of the re 
mainder of the word ; thus, °J circumstances, X^° circumference 

3. Con, Com, Cog — denoted by a light dot written at the beginning 
of the remainder of the word ; thus, J conscience, j commit, 
'^ comply, -^ cognate. 

4. Contra, Contro, Counter. — When these prefixes can not be more con- 
veniently expressed otherwise, they may be indicated by a tick written 

at the beginning of the remainder of the word ; thus, | contradict, 
\^y controvert, 1< £- / countersign. 

5. Decom, IHscon, Discom — expressed by Dee written near the remain- 
der of the word ; thus, | N^ decompose, I \^, discomfort, | [^ 
discontinue. 

6. For-e. — When this prefix can not be more conveniently written 
otherwise, it may be expressed by Ef written near the remainder of the 

word ; thus, \^~~f foreknowledge. 

7. Incon, Incom, Incog — expressed by En written above the line, and 
near, or partially over, the remainder of the word ; thus, V ~"J > . incon- 
stant, ^"< incomplete, ^"^"1- incognito. 

8. Inter, Intro — expressed by Net written in any position before the 
remainder of the word ; thus, ^^-/ interchange, ^^ introduce. 

9. Irrecon — expressed by Ar written near the remainder of the word ; 
thus, "~^v^\ irreconcilable. 

10. Magna, Magni — expressed by Em written over the remainder of 
the word ; thus, ^^-^ magnanimous, '"v^ magnify. 

11. Miscon, Miscom — expressed by Em-Iss written above the remain- 
der of the word ; thus, ^[7* misconduct, ^"^ miscompute. 



§ 228. How is accom- expressed ?— con, com, cog ? — contra, contro, counter ? — de- 
com, discon, discom ?— for-e ? — incon, incom, incog ?— inter, intro? — irrecon?— 
magna, magni ?— miscon, miscom ?— noncon, noncom ?— recon, recom, recog?— 



CONTRACTIONS AND EXPEDIENTS. Ill 

12. JVo?ico?i, Nbjiccm — expressed by Ken written over or through the 
first stroke of the remainder of the word ; thus, ^""j. noncontent, 

v 4f nonconducting, ^~1X noncommittal. 

13. Recon, Recom, Recog — expressed by Ray written near the remain- 
der of the word ; thus, X^X rec oncilable, /<s recommend, 

/C-p recognize. 

14. Self — expressed by Iss written beside the first stroke of the re- 
mainder of the word ; thus, /\^_ self-respect, °J selfish, ol self- 
hood. 

15. Uncon, Uncom — expressed by En written on the line, near the 
remainder of the word ; thus, ^<3~ uncontrolled, Vv _^ uncombined. 

16. Unreeon, Unrecom, Unrecog — expressed by Ner written partly over 
the remainder of the word ; thus, ^""y^ unreconciled, <; ~ < v unrecom- 

pensed, ^^ unrecognized. 

Rem. 1. Licenses in the Use of the Prefix-Signs.— {a) One or more initial syllables 
resembling a prefix given in the preceding list, may be represented, if it can be ad- 
vantageously, by the sign of such prefix. Hence, (o) enter may be expressed by 

the sign of inter; thus, w J e entertain ; (c) incum or encom, by the sign oiincom ; 
thus, >* incumbent ; (d) recum by the sign of recom ; thus, /n> recumbent ; 
(e) cen= cong, by the sign of con; thus, c conquer=congker; (/) magne, by 

the sign of magna; thus, J— ^ magnetism, _y magnesia. 

Rem. 2. Prefixed Syllables.— When any one of the prefixes given above is pre- 
ceded by a syllable, as in or un, such syllable may be expressed by the proper let- 
ter or letters joined to, or written near, the prefix ; thus, ^ \ uncircumscribed, 
^-?J unselfish, |\^ undecomposed, L uncontradicted, ^N unin- 

terrupted, "\^--^ unforeseen, t_J\ disencumber, lo disinterested, v_^ ^ 

unaccomplished, (5) The prefixed sjilable, in such a case, may usually be left un 
vocalized, (c) To preserve lineality of writing, it is occasionally necessary that a 
prefix-sign, when joined to a preceding syllable, should be brought out of its usual 
position ; as in ' disencumber.' 

self ?— uncon, uncom ?— unreeon, unrecom, unrecog ? [Rem.] How may initial sylla- 
bles resembling a prefix be represented ? How may enter be represented ? incum ? 
encom? recum? con = cong? magne? "Write ' entertain, incumbent, encompass, 
recumbent, conquer, magnetism, magnesia.' — How may a syllable be prefixed to a 
prefix-sign? "Write 'uncircumscribed, unselfish, undecomposed, uncontradicted, 
uninterrupted, unforeseen, disencumber, disinterested, unaccomplished.'— From 



112 THE COMPENDIUM. 

Eem. 3. Accom. — The reporter usually omits the dot for accom from ' accomplish, 
accompany,' and their derivatives ; but it should usually be inserted in ' accommo- 
date, accomplice,' and their derivatives. 

Eem. 4. Circum. — {a) The advanced writer of the Corresponding Style may omit 
the sign for circum in writing * circumstance' and its derivatives, (b) The prac- 
ticed reporter may omit it in writing * circumscribe, circumspect,' and their deriva- 
tives, (c) In the Eeporting Style, ' circumference' and its derivatives may be writ- 
ten without the sign for circum, or, what is better, with that sign joined to the 
remainder of the word, (d) The experienced reporter will join the sign for circum 
in writing 'circumnavigate, circumvent,' and their derivatives. 

Eem. 5. Cog. — (a) The sign for cog should never be omitted, (b) "When it is de- 
sired to distinguish this prefix- from con, the latter is written with the dot, and cog 
with Kay-Gay. But this distinction is considered wholly unnecessary. 

Eem. 6. Con, Com, Concom.—{a) The reporter usually omits the sign of con or 
com from most common words, (b) Con, com in the following words and their de- 
rivatives is best written in the manner indicated by the syllable-names: — conic, 
Kay-En-Kay — comity, Kay-Em-Tee — commissary, Kay-Ems-Eay — commiserate, 
Kay-Ems-Eet — commotion, Kay-Emshon— commerce, Kay-Mers — comrade, Kay- 
Merd. (c) Concom occurs in concomitant and its derivatives. It may be represent- 
ed by two light dots, one above the other, or, if more convenient to the writer, these 

dots may be united to form a perpendicular dash; thus, j . or j. concomitant, 
id) The writer should accustom himself to make the sign for 'accom, cog, con, 
com, concom,' before commencing the remainder of the word. 

Eem. 7. Con, Com, Cog, Contra, etc., Preceded by In— {a) The prefix con, com, 
or cog is sometimes expressed in connection with the preposition in, by the sign for 

incon, etc. ; thus, /— > in conjunction, \/~~" ^ n comparison, (b) The re- 
porter may indicate this prefix, in other cases, by commencing the remainder of the 
word, when convenient, under the last stroke of the preceding word ; thus, <*_, 

common consent, (c) The prefix contra, contro, or counter may, in like manner, 
be expressed in connection with the preposition in, by the sign for uncontra (see 

Eem. 2, above) ; thus, \>S> in contradistinction. 

Eem. 8. Contra, etc.— The sign for contra may be used by way of license for con- 
tri in contribute and its derivatives, (b) But this prefix should not be employed 
for contra or contro when it is not a prefix, as in contract, control, (c) The tick 
for contra, etc , is usually best written at right angles with the following stroke ; but 
any slight variation from that direction, which may seem convenient, will not impair 
the legibility of the writing. 

what words may the sign for accom be omitted by the reporter ? in what words 
should it be inserted ? From what words may circum be omitted by the ad- 
vanced writer of the Corresponding Style ? by the reporter ? In what words may 
the reporter join it ? May the sign for cog be omitted ? How may cog be distin- 
guished from cont Make the distinction in writing cognate, connate. Is this dis- 
tinction usually necessary ? May the reporter omit the sign for con, com ? Write 
the words mentioned in Eem. 6, b. How may concom be expressed ? "Write con- 
comitant. How may con, coon, or cog be expressed in connection with a preceding 
in? How may the reporter express this prefix in connection with a preceding 
word? How may contra, etc., be expressed in connection with a preceding in? 
How may contri be sometimes expressed ? Write contribute. What is the usual 



CONTRACTIONS AND EXPEDIENTS. 11 



o 



Eem. 9. For-e. — (a) "When the junction would be easy and the outline formed 
distinct, it is sometimes allowable to join Ef, the sign for for-e, to the remainder of 

the word ; thus, V_^/ forward, ^^ forever. (b) This prefix is invariably joined 
when represented by other signs, (c) Ef, as a sign for for-e, is joined in the follow- 
ing words and their derivatives : Forever, forewarn, forsooth, forswear, forward — 
by the reporter in the following words : Foreclose, forefather, foreknow, forenamed, 
foresee, foreshow, forethought, forgery, (d) Write for-e with Fer in the following 
words : Foretell, forgave, forget, forsake ; with Ef-Ar in the following words : Fore- 
land, forelock, foreman, foremast, foremost, forerun, foresale. 

Rem. 10. Inter, Intro, Enter. — (a) The advanced writer very frequently joins the 

sign for these prefixes to the remainder of the word ; thus, _ interdict, [< intro- 

duce, J« entertain, intercourse. (Jj) It may be joined in the following 

words and their derivatives : Enterprise, entertain, interchange, intercourse, inter- 
dict, interest, interfere, interjacent, interjection, interpolate, interpose, interpret 
(Xet-Pret), interrogate, interrupt (Net-Pet), intersect, intertwine (Net-Tee-Wen), 
interval, intervene, interview, interweave (Net-Weh-Yee), introduce, introspect, 
introvert. 

Rem. 11. Incon, Incom.—{ci) The sign for this prefix is occasionally joined to the 

remainder of the word ; thus, j inconsistent, """^ incomplete, ~\^^ in- 
convenient. (Jj) Incom-n or in com-n is sometimes joined to a following stroke by 

an In-hook ; thus, J inconsiderable or in considerable, (c) The sign for in-con 

or in-com may be joined in the following words : Incompetent, incomprehensible, 
inconceivable, in consequence (Ens-Kens), inconsiderable, inconsistent, inconve- 
nient. 

Rem. 12. Miscon, Iliscom. — The sign of this prefix may be joined to the remain- 
der of the word in writing 'misconduct, misconjecture,' and their derivatives. 

Eem. 13. Noncom. — (a) The sign for this prefix is never joined, (b) Non, writ- 
ten as it frequently is with Nen, is distinguished from Noncom, by being written 
near but not over the first stroke of the remainder of the word. 

Rem. 14. Self, Self-contra.—{a) The reporter very frequently joins the sign for 

self to the remainder of the word ; thus, > s self-esteem, ) selfish, (b) Self 
may occasionally be joined by the reporter to a following Iss, by enlarging it ; 

thus, £p\ self-same. ' Self-sufficient,' etc., may be written in like manner, (c) 
Self-con-m may be expressed by writing the sign for self- in the place for the con or 

o 

com dot ; thus, * f self-conceit, (d) Sdf-ccntra may be expressed by the sign for 

contra with Iss prefixed. 

Eem. 15. Uncon, Uncora.- ('/) The experienced wriler may join the sign for this 

direction of the tick for contra ? When is it allowable to join Ef as a sign for for-e t 
Write 'forward, forever.' Write the words mentioned in Eem. 9, c and d.— May 
the sign for inter, intro, etc., be joined to the rest of the word ? Write the words 
beginning with enter, inter, etc., in Eem. 10 b. — May the sign for incom- be 
joined ? Write the words beginning with incom-n- in Eem. 11.— Is it allowable to 
join the sign for miscon-m ? — How is non- distinguished from noncon-m t — Does the 
veporter ever join self to the remainder of the word ? How may he join it to a fol- 



114 



THE COMPENDIUM. 



prefix in the following words, and their derivatives : Unconcern, unconditional, un« 
constitutional (Ens-Teeshon-Lay, the first t being omitted, according to § 236, 3). 
(£•) Uncon or uncom, like incom, may sometimes be joined to a following stroke by 
an In-hook. 

Rem. 16. Unrecon, Unrecom, Unrecog. — (a) The practiced writer always joins 
the sign for this prefix to the remainder of the word, (b) The sign for unrecon may 
be used disjoined for in and a following prefix recon, recom, recog, or recum. 

WORD-SIGNS USED FOE, PREFIX-SIGNS. 

§ 229. Word-signs are sometimes used as signs for prefixes ; thus, 

^^7" altogether, £ although, v^s/C to-morrow, -x_> to-night, 

w /] underrate, ^]< undertake, ^ understand, w-j- undergo, 

^^^ afternoon, 

Rem. 1. Position of Word-Sign Prefixes.— {a) All word-signs (except under)) 
tchen used as prefix-signs, always retain the position they have a3 word-signs. 
(&) In a few words, under, when joined, adapts its position to that of the remainder 
of the word ; as in * undertake, understand.' 

Rem. 2. ' All, To, After, Under^ Joined. — Whenever the junction would be con- 
venient and allowable, the signs for ' all (al-) to, after, under' may be joined to the 
remainder of the word; as in 'altogether, although, almighty, almost, all-sufficient, 
to-day, to-night, to-morrow, afternoon, afterthought, undertake, undersigned, under- 
stand, undergo,' etc. (&) All is represented by Lay in ' also, alway, always,' be- 
cause in these words that prefix can be more readily written with Lay than with the 
word-sign for all. These words are sufficiently legible without vocalization. 

§ 230. LIST OF SIGN-PREFIXES. 



Accom 


incog 




recom 


after 


incon 




recum 


circum 


in con, etc. 


self 


cog 


incontra, 


etc. 


self-con 


com 


in contra 


etc. 


self-contra 


con 


incom 




uncon 


con = cong 


incum 


- 


uncom 


concom 


inter 




under 


contra 


intro 




unaccom 


contro 


irrecon 




unci r cum 


sounter 


magna 




uncontra 


iecom 


magne 




undecom 


discom 


magni 




unfore 


discon 


miscon 




uninter 


disencum 


miscom 




unself 


disinter 


noncon 




unrecog 


encum 


noncom 




unrecon 


enter 


recog 




unrecom. 


for-e 


recon 

/ 






[owing Issf How 


may self-con be expressed? 


self-contra t May the sign for 



uncon-m be joined ? "Write the words beginning with uncon-m in Rem. 15. 

§ 229. Are word-signs ever employed as prefix-signs ? Write ' altogether, although, 
to-morrow, to-night, underrate, undertake, understand, undergo, afternoon.' [Rem.] 



CONTRACTIONS AND EXPEDIENTS 



.115 



OTHER, PREFIXES AND THEIR USUAL SIGNS. 

Rem. 1. The prefixes and initial syllables in the following list are always joined 
to the remainder of the word, and it is usually most convenient to write them with 
the signs indicated by the syllable-names placed after them : 



Prefix. 


Usual Sign. 


Examples. 


Amb, ambi 


Emb or Em-Bee ambiguous, ambition, ambulate 


ante 


Net 


antedate, antecedent, antepast 


ant, anti 


Net 


antidote, antipathy, antagonist 


astro 


Est-Ray 


astrology, astronomy 


bene 


Bee-En 


benefit, benevolent, benediction 


cata 


Ket 


catalogue, catalysis 


cent, centi, centu 


Isa-Net 


centiped, centage, centennial 


chiro 


Ker 


chirography, chirology, chironomy 


col 


Kel 


collect, college, colleague 


cor 


Ker 


correct, corrupt, correspond 


hepta 


Pet 


heptachord, heptarchy 


hydro 


Der 


hydropathy, hydrometer 


hyper 


Hay-Per 


hyperbole, hypcrcritic 


juris 


Jer-Iss 


jurisdiction, jurisconsult 


meta 


Met 


metathesis, metaphysics 


multi 


Em-Let 


multiply, multitude 


octo, octa, oct 


Ket 


octennial, October, octant 


philo, phil 


Eel 


philippic, philosophy 


para 


Per 


paragraph, paradox 


per 


Per 


perfection, perfume 


peri 


Per 


periphery, periscopic 


poly 


Pel 


polyglot, polygamy 


retro 


Art-Ray 


retrospect, retrograde 


stereo 


Ster 


stereotype, stereometer 


subter 


Sbed-Ray 


subterfuge, subterranean 


super, supra 


Sper 


superfine, superlative, supramundane 


sus 


Ses 


suspect, sustain, susceptible 


sys 


Ses 


system, systole, systemize 


with 


Thee 


withdraw, withhold, withstand. 



Rem. 2. Trans and Post. — These prefixes may usually be contracted to tras and 

pos; thus, J_ transact, ^<^ postpone. 

Rem. 3. Trans- in the following words and their derivatives is written with Ters, 
unless otherwise noted : Transact, Transalpine, transanimate, Transatlantic (Ters- 
Lent-Kay in the Reporting Style), transcend, transcendant (Ters-Ned-Net in the 
Corresponding Style; in the Reporting Style, Ters-Nent, that is, ' tras-enant'), 
transcribe (Ters-Kay-Bee), transfer (Ters-Ef in the R. S.), transfigure, transfix, 
transform, transfuse, transgress, tranship (Ter-En-Ish-Pee), transient (Tershont, 

"What is the position of word-signs when used as prefix-signs ? Does under ever 
adapt its position to that of the remainder of the word ? Write l understand, under- 
stood.' What word-sign prefixes are sometimes joined to the rest of the word ? 
"Write ' almighty, almost, all-sufficient, to-day, after-thought, undertake, under- 
signed,' etc. Write the words in which all is written with Lay? 

§ 230. Write the words given in § 230, Rem. 1, with the usual signs for the pre- 
fixes, as explained. IIow are trans- and post- usually written ? Write ' transact, 
postpone.' 



THE COMPENDIUM. 

that is tret shenl), transit, transition-al (Trens-Eshon-Lay), translate, translucent 
(Ters-Els-XeU, transmarine, transmigrate, transmit, transmute, transparent, trans- 
pire, transplant, transplendent, transport, transpose, transubstantiation (Ters-Bees- 
Tee-En-Shayshon ; in the E. S., Ters-Bee), transverse (Ters-Yee-Ar-Iss). 



3. CONTRACTED AFFIXES. 



§ 231. The speed and ease of writing are considerably increased by 
the employment of contractions for certain affixes which it would be 
inconvenient and tedious to write in full, '(b) The contractions are 
denominated Affix- Signs ; and the affixes which they represent are 
called Sign- Affixes. 

§ 232. LIST OP AFFIX-CONTRACTIONS. 

1. Bl 6 — expressed by Bee joined, when Bel can not be conveniently 
employed ; thus, q ^\ sensibly, c< \ profitably, (b) Lay may be 
added to the Bee, when the legibility of the writing seems to re- 
quire it. 

2. JBleness, Fulness — expressed by a small circle written at the end of 

the preceding part of the word ; thus, c y\ S) serviceableness, J teach- 

o 

ableness, C J" questionableness, ^\ indispensableness, I doubtful- 

o ° " o 

ness, ^° mindfulness, c carefulness, f faithfulness. 

o 

3. For-e — expressed by Ef, joined whenever it can be conveniently, 
to the preceding part of the word ; thus, ) therefore. 

4. Ing — expressed by a light dot at the end of the preceding part of 
the word ; thus, " | eating, • \ keeping, | v dying. For the uses 
of this affix-sign, and the mode of expressing -ing tlie and -ing a-n-d, see 
§§ 112-114. 

5. Ingly — expressed by a heavy tick written in the direction of Pee 

or Chay, at the end of the preceding part of the word ; thus, f\^ lov- 
ingly, v_^% knowingly. 

6. Figs. — When this affix can not be more conveniently written with 
Ing-Iss, it is expressed by a heavy dot at the end of the preceding 
part of the word ; thus, ^ # meetings, doings, ^\- prancings. 






§ 231. "What is an Affix-Sign ? What is a Sign- Affix ? 

§ 232. "What is the sign for -ble or ~lly? bleness, fulness? for-e ? ing, ing a-n-d, 



CONTRACTIONS AND EXPEDIENTS. 117 

7. Lessness — expressed by a large circle written at the end of the pre- 
ceding part of the word ; thus, c q carelessness. 

8. Lty, Rty — with any vowel preceding or following the I or r — may 
be added to any simple, or group, consonant sign, by disjoining it 
from the preceding part of the word; thus, ^~fv instability, 

^^"^ formality, \v^" popularity, *\\ prosperity. 

9. Ly. — When this termination can not, be more conveniently writ- 
ten by an El-hook ; as in ' nobly, feebly ;' or by an El or Lay joined ; 

as in ^Kf homely, *> completely ; it may be expressed by Lay 

written near the end of the preceding part of the word ; thus, 

^-^r' manly. 

10. Mental, Mentality — expressed by Ment written near the end of the 
preceding part of the word ; thus, | instrumental or instrument- 
ality, ^^ fundamental. 

11. Ology. — Jay written partially under, or joined to, the preceding 
part of the word, may be used as a sign for ology, when it can not be 

more conveniently expressed otherwise ; thus, )j zoology, so physi- 
ology, ( theology. 

12. Rty. — See subsection 8, above. 

13. Self, Selves. — Self is usually expressed by a joined Iss ; Selves, by 

a joined Ses; thus, / "~~ b myself, ^^ himself, Q thyself, - A- our- 

self, ~™*-- ourselves, £~ yourselves, (q themselves, (b) But when 
the junction would be inconvenient or disallow able, the circle should 
be written beside the last stroke of the preceding part of the word ; 
thus, ^^ man's self, .TX©.. our own selves. 

14. Ship — expressed by Ish written near the preceding part of the 
word, or joined, if it can be conveniently, and without sacrifice of 

legibility ; thus, ~^J lordship, 7> friendship. 

15. Sameness — expressed by a small circle written at the end of the 
preceding part of the word ; thus, ~\__ irksomeness. 

16. Soever — usually expressed by Iss-Yee joined ; thus, L what 
soever, ^"\^_ whensoever, ^-^_ whenccsocver, ly A^_ whereso- 

ing the ? iiigly ? ings ? lessness ? How may it be indicated that -Uty -r-ty is to be 
added to a sign ? What is the sign for ly t mental, mentality ? ology ? self, selves ? 



118 



COMPENDIUM 



ever, £ whosoever ; (6) but when it would be inconvenient or dis- 
allowable to join Iss-Vee, -soever is represented by Iss written beside 
the last stroke of the preceding part of the word ; thus, ~^\ whith- 
ersoever, <f whosesoever, Ao howsoever. 

Eem. 1. Bleness, Fulness, Someness, etc. — No confusion results from employing 
the same sign for -bleness, -fulness, and -somen ess ; -self and -soever; -ment and 
-mentality ; ly and Irty. (Jb) The sign for -bleness, -fulness, and -someness may be 
regarded as Iss— the sign of their last sound, (c) The sign for -lessness is Ses, repre- 
senting the final sounds of the two syllables. 

Eem. 2. Derivatives.— Derivatives from -ology, rlty, -rty, etc., may be expressed 
by adding to the primitive the proper signs for the additional sounds of the deriva- 
tive ; thus, to Jay, the sign for ology, add Kel, to express ological-ly ; and add Steh 
to express ologist. (b) To express Ities or Hies, add Iss to the sign which is dis- 
joined to denote the addition of Ity or rty. 

Eem. 3. Ly. — This termination is usually expressed by an El-hook in words like 
'feebly, nobly, visibly, sympathetically, legally;' (b) and in other words by Lay or 
El joined ; as in ' homely, completely, mostly (Ems-Lay), sweetly, bodily, rudely, 
actually (Ket-Lay), honestly (Ens-El), suddenly (Sden-El), wantonly (Went-En-El).' 

(c) In many cases when ly can not be conveniently or allowably joined, it may bo 
omitted without endangering the legibility of the writing ; as in ' actively, object- 
ively, subjectively, carefully, usually, surely.' 

Eem. 4. Lty, Rty, Joined. — The signs formed, according to § 232, 8, for -bility, 

-perity, -parity, etc., may be joined occasionally; thus, ^v possibility, ^~\ 

sensibility, i disparity. 

Eem. 5. Mental Joined. — Ment for -mental may usually be joined to the preced- 
ing part of the word ; thus, Snet-Ment, ' sentimental.' (jb) The reporter writes Ment 
on the line for the words ' mental' and ' mentality ;' writing, for instance, Ment- 
Kayshon for ' mental action.' 

Eem. 6. Alogy. — The termination alogy in 'genealogy, mineralogy,' etc., maybe 
expressed by Jay written the same as for ology. 

Eem. 7. Self, Selves. — (a) Self may be added to a word ending in Iss not joined 

to a hook, by enlarging the circle; thus, <^__9 one"s-self ; (b) but since Is3 in the 

word man's is joined to an En-hook, it would not be allowable to enlarge it for the 
addition of self See § 188, Eem. (c) Self might be added to ' our own' by a small 
circle joined ; but since it is not allowable to join a large circle to the En-hook, ' our 
own selves,' and similar phrases, must be written with the sign for selves disjoined. 

(d) Self and selves, even when separate words, are usually best written with the 
affix-signs. Self occurs as a separate word in the following sentence from Pope : 



ship ? someness ? soever ? [Eem.] How may the sign for Neness, fulness be regard- 
ed? the sign for lessness t How are derivatives from ology, Ity, etc., formed? 
May the sign for ly be omitted ? If so, in what cases ? Is it ever allowable to join 
the signs for bility, perity, etc. ? Write ' possibility, sensibility, disparity.' Is the 
sign for -mental ever joined ? How does the reporter write the words mental, men- 
tality? How may -alogy in mineralogy, etc., be indicated ? When and how may 
the sign for self be added to a preceding circle ? Why must ' our own selves' be 
written with a disjoined selves ? How are self and selves usually written when 



CONTRACTIONS AND EXPEDIENTS. 119 

"A man's self may be the worst fellow to converse with in the world ;" — and in such 
phrases as the following: 'our own self, my own self, his own self, my single self 

Eem. 8. -Ful-ly. — The advanced writer may frequently add -ful-ly to a full- 
length straight-line consonant by an Ef-hook ; thus, [, truthful-ly, c ^ carefuMy. 

(I) If legibility should seem to require it, ly may be added by a disjoined Lay. (c) 
But in such cases, when it seems necessary to distinguish by signs between -ful and 
-fully, it is better to write the Ef-hook for -ful, and Fel for -fully. 

Eem. 9. Tive-ly.— When it can not be added by a Tiv-hook, the termination tive 
is usually best written with Tef; thus, En-Tef, 'native;' Pees-Tef, 'positive;' 

(b) and the termination tively, with Tef, with El -joined, or with Lay disjoined. 

(c) The advanced writer, however, usually writes -tive for both -tive and -tively. 
Eem. 10. 'Ancyf etc., Implied by a Disjoined Letter.— The advanced writer may 

sometimes disjoin a letter to express -ancy, -ency, -idiiy, etc. ; thus, V^£ — vagran- 
cy, I \^ despondency, \^J_ validity, | Christianity, ^\ verbosity. 

WORD-SIGN AFFIXES. 

§ 233. A word-sign maybe used as an affix-sign ; thus, ~^\ here- 
after, *) thereto, *) / thereon, ^ x thereof, ^~"\__ when- 
ever, ( /\^_ wherever. 

Eem. 1. After may be joined to ' there' for ' thereafter.' 

Eem. 2. To.— The word-sign for to may be joined to Wer for whereto ; to ' hither' 

A 

for hitherto ; and to 'on,' thus, , for onto, which sometimes occurs, (h) To is 

expressed by Tee joined to the preceding part of the word in ' into, hereinto, there- 
into, whereinto ; unto, hereunto, thereunto, whereunto ; thitherto.' (c) ' Into, here- 
into,' etc., may usually be left without vocalization; but, for the sake of distinction, 
' unto' and its compounds should have the vowel of its first syllable inserted. 

Eem. 3. On. — The advanced writer may join on by an En-hook, in writing the 
following words : Hereon (Am in the first position), thereon (Thern 2 ), whereon 
(YVern 2 ), hanger-on (Ing-Arn), looker-on (Lay-Kren).' 

Eem. 4. Of. — (a) Of is joined by an Ef-hook in ' whereof.' (b) It is written with 
the disjoined sign for of in the following words : ' Untalked-of, unheard-of, hereof, 
thereof, unthought-of.' 

Eem. 5. In. — This affix is usually written with Enjoined ; being thus distinguished 
from on, which i3 usually added by an En-hook. (I) In may be added by an En- 
hook in ' herein, hereinafter, hereinbefore,' etc. 



separate words ? Write ' man's self, our own selves.' — How may ful-ly be added to 
a full-length straight line ? Write ' truthful-ly, careful-ly.' How, if desired, in 
such cases, may fully be distinguished from ful t — How is -tive best written when it 
can not be written with a Tiv-hook ? How does the advanced phonographer write 
-tively ? — How may the advanced writer imply the terminations ancy, idity, etc. ? 
§233. May a word-sign be employed as a sign for an affix? Write 'hereafter, 
thereto, thereon, thereof, whenever, wherever.' [Eem.] Write ' whereto, hitherto, 
onto,' and the other words ending with to, in Eem. 2, b. How are words ending 
with unto distinguished from those ending with into? Write the words ending 
with on, in Eem. 3. How is added in usually distinguished from added on ? Hov* 



120 



THE COMPENDIUM. 



Eem. 6. Mer.-TUe affix ever is always joined to the preceding part of the 
word ; usually with an Ef-hook, as in 'whatever, whichever, whoever* but wUh 
Vee m whenever, wherever, forever,' and a few other words. 



Alogy— § 232, E. 6. 

ancy— § 232, E. 10. 

bility— § 232, E. 4. 

ble 

bleness — do., E. 1. 

bly 

ency— § 

fulness- 

ful-ly— do., E. 8. 

for-e 



232, E. 10. 
232, E. 1. 



§234. 



ing 


ES. 

parity— § 232, E. 4. 


mg a-n-d— § 114. 


perity— do. 


mg the— § 113. 


rfy— do. 


ingly 


self— § 232, E. 7. 


mgs 


selves— do. 


lty— § 232, E. 4. 


someness— § 232, E. 1. 


mental— do., E. 5. 


soever — do. 


mentality— do., E. 5. 


sty— § 232, E. 10. 


ology 


tive-ly— § 232, E. 9. 


nty— § 232, E. 10. 





4. OMISSION OF CONSONANTS. 

§ 235. The omission of consonants may be treated under the heads of Syn'co-pe 
Apher'esis, and Apoc'o-pe. * p ' 

Syri/co-pe is the elision of some of the middle letters of words : as < desk-ibe' for 
'describe;' < in-tial' for < influential.' ' 

Apher'esis is the elision of some of the initial letters of a word ; thus « -ber' for 
member, remember ;' '-plish' for < accomplish ;' '-stance' for < circumstance > 

A-poCo-pe is the elision of some of the final letters of a word ; as ' tr-' for « tmth • 
^Z^^°^ fOT ' im P-^' possibility;' • pract-' for « practical 

W 2? M 'J7 °! m ° re °* these Principles may be employed in writing the same 
*ord , as of apheresis and apocope in writing '-cul-> for < difficulty;' of apheresis 

^*^^f^^ * i »— -•- of apocope^dsyncoyin 

1. SYNCOPE. 

§ 236. Of medial consonants, it is allowable to omit— 

1. P— when it is immediately preceded by m, and immediately fol- 
lowed by t, sh, or k; as in [^ tempt, consumption, pumpkin. 

2. K-wben it occurs between ng and * or z; or between ng and sh; 
as in ^- anxiety, ^ anxious, ^ sanction. 

3. T— when it occurs between s and another consonant ; as in 
mostly ; (b) also in a few words with a vowel between the t 



.-n>- 



may in be joined in < herein,' etc. ?-How is -ever joined to the preceding part of the 

§ 235. What is Syncope ? Apheresis ? Apocope ? 
_ § 236. When is it allowable to omit p t k ? t ? Write < tempt, consumption, anx- 
iety, anxious, sanction, mostly, mistake, domestic.' What is the general rule for 



CONTRACTIONS AND EXPEDIENTS. 121 

and the following consonant ; as in '""^ mistake, domestic, desti- 
tute. 

4. Generally, any consonant whenever its expression would necessitate a tedious 
or difficult outline, and its omission would not endanger legibility ; as — 

K — from 'instruction, construction, destruction, refraction, infraction, restric- 
tion.' 

L— from ' intelligence, intelligent, knowledge.' 

N — from ' aio?iement, husbandman, transpose, merchandise, demo?istrate, iden- 
tical.' 

P — from * capable, capability.' v 

E — from ' describe, surprise, transcribe, manuscript.' 

TG-— from ' investigation.' 

For instances of the omission, in the Eeporting Style, of various consonants pre- 
ceding Shon or Iss-Eshon, see § 197, E. 4. 

Eem. 1. Trans. — The n may usually be omitted from this syllable. The mode of 
writing it in most of the words in which it occurs, is indicated at § 230, Eem. 3. - 

Eem. 2. In the Corresponding Style, when an En-hook has been omitted, as in 
writing ' atonement, attainment' (Tee-Ment), the hook may be added after lifting the 
pen. 

Eem. 3. The contractions for the following words are instances of syncopation : 
acknowledge, disadvantage, capable, influential, transgress, subjection, subjective, 
investigation, nh.onograp7ier, representation, intelligence. 

2. APHEHESIS AND APOCOPE. 

§ 237. It is occasionally allowable to omit some of the initial or final 
consonants of a word ; thus, *\ remember, / advantage, ^' re- 



mark, _ / ^" b impossible, ^"^ indispensable, ._!\ practicability. 

• Eem. 1. The advanced writer may, in a few cases, extend the practice of apheresis 
and apocope beyond the established word-signs and contractions for the Corre- 
sponding Style ; writing, for instance, ' Stens' for ' circumstance,' Ef-Eet for ' com- 
fort,' Pel-Ish for ' accomplish' (see § 223, Eems. 3 and 6), Eay-Spens, for ' responsi- 
ble,' Pers-Dee for 'proceeding,' Eayses-Tee for 'resisting,' Pee-Bee for 'public' 
(b) An affix-sign, especially when it can not be conveniently joined, may be omitted 
by the reporter, whenever its omission would not seriously endanger the legibility 
of his writing ; thus, corn-Ens, ' coraraenceme?ii' — Eay-En-Jay, ' arrangement — 
Ned-Stend, ' understanding' — Iths 3 -Gay, ' thanksgiving' — Fer-Gay, ' forgivi?ig' — 
Lev-Kend, 'loving kindness' (see § 182, E. 1, o). 

Eem. 2. Special Contractions. — (a) Sometimes a contraction which is suggestive 
and legible in one kind of subject-matter would not be legible, and therefore not 
allowable, in another kind. The practical reporter, understanding this, not unfre- 



omitting medial consonants ? "Write the words given as examples of the rule of 
§ 230, 4. [Eem.] When must the n of trans- be written ? "What is said as to writ- 
ing an En-hook in ' atonement,' etc. ? 

§ 237. Give some examples of the omission of initial or final letters. [Eem.] What 
is said as to the use of the principles of apheresis and apocope by the advanced 
writer of the Corresponding Style ? What is the reporter's practice as to the omis- 
sion of affixes? What is said as to contractions for special uses ? With reference 

6 



122 THE COMPENDIUM. 

quently, to meet the wants of the occasion, devises, for words and phrases of fre- 
quent occurrence, contractions which, though legible and proper for his present 
purposes, would not be legible, and would not therefore be used, in reporting of a 
kind differing materially from that for which such contractions were devised. He 
will, for instance, when reporting an anatomical lecture, use such contractions as 
Skel for ' spinal column,' En-Yee-Kay for ' inferior vena cava,' Pet-Em or Pel for 
' pulmonary,' Lay-Ster-Tees for ' lower extremities,' Lay-Em for ' lymphatic,' Dees- 
Eshon for ' dissection ;' — when reporting a sermon or theological lecture, such con- 
tractions as Jays-Ef for 'justification by faith,' Sel 3 -Sel for 'salvation of the soul,' 
Jay-Cher for 'Jewish Church,' Jers-Em for 'Jerusalem,' En-Jays-Em for 'New Je- 
rusalem,' Trets-Em for ' Trinitarianism,' Yers-Em for ' Universalism,' Spers-Em'for 
' Spiritualism,' Ar-Kay for ' Koman Catholic,' Wers-Ged for ' works of God ;' — most 
of which contractions it would obviously be unsafe to employ for the same words and 
phrases when introduced rarely, and as it were casually, into discourses of a differ- 
ent kind, (b) The experienced reporter's favorite mode of forming contractions for 
long compound names or phrases of frequent occurrence, is to join one or two let- 
ters (usually the initial ones) of two or more parts of the name or phrase ; thus, En- 
Ems-Kay, ' United States Mail Steamship Company' — En-Eel, ' New York and Erie 
Eailroad'— Ens-Eel, ' New York Central Eailroad' — Layter-Iss-Per, ' literal sense 
of prophecy'— Sper-Bee, ' Supreme Being'— En-Pee-Spet-Ter, 'in the popular ac- 
ceptation of the term'— En-Yee-Kay, ' inferior vena cava'' — Met-Pels-Yayn, ' may 
it please your Honor' — Met-P els-Kay, ' may it please the Court'— Pees-Kay-Pee, 
'party of the second part' — Jers-Kay, 'jurisdiction of the Court' — En-Dees-Kay- 
Kret, 'in the discretion of the Court'— Pers-Em, 'President's Message'— Kay-Ef- 
Eels, ' Committe on Foreign Relations'— Pee 3 -Iss-Tee, ' patent suit'— Ish-Ner-Pee, 
' Commissioner of Patents'— En-Enses-Pee-Efs, ' in the United States Patent Office' 
— Iss-Dent, 'substantial identity'— Dees-Em, 'defendant's machine' — Plets-Em, 
'plaintiff's machine' — Yee-Jet-Kay, 'vegetable kingdom.' 

Rem. 3. Hoiv to Form a Contraction.— (a) When it seems necessary or desirable 
for any reason to shorten the expression of a word, the best contraction for it is to 
be devised with reference to four particulars, which are here stated in the order of 
their importance : 

1. Distinctness and suggestiveness, that is, legibility. 2. Brevity, and ease of 
formation. 3. Convenience of forming the derivatives from it. 4. The convenience 
of joining it with other words. 

Eem. 4. Legibility of Contractions. — In cases of contractions settled and memor- 
ized as the signs of words, the requirement of suggestiveness is not so imperative as 
in other cases. Ber, for instance, though not of itself very suggestive of remember, 
becomes sufficiently suggestive and legible when memorized as a sign for that word. 
Sometimes a contraction, which is not sufficiently distinct from other outlines, when 
placed in a given position, may meet the requirement for distinctness when written 
in some other position, though it should be one not indicated by the accented vowel 
of the word. (&) The legibility of several adjacent contractions is frequently in- 
creased by joining them ; because, in this manner, peculiar outlines are usually 
secured, which are easily distinguished from outlines for other words or phrases. 

Eem. 5. The importance and frequency of the use of the three principles of con- 
traction— Apheresis, Syncope, and Apocope— in forming phonographic contrac- 
tions, is nearly in the proportion of 8, 22, 70. 

Eem. 6. Eor remarks respecting the omission of sign-prefixes (which comes under 

. . 

to what considerations should a contraction be formed ? What is said respecting 
the legibility of contractions ? 



CONTRACTIONS AND EXPEDIENTS. 123 

apheresis), refer to § 22S, Rems. 3, 4, 6, 14. For remarks as to the omission of sign- 
affixes (which comes under apocope), see § 232, Eems. 3, 8, 9. 



5. OMISSION OF VOWELS. 



§ 233. Since the majority of words are distinct from others in their consonant- 
sounds, and since in most cases where this distinction and that of the context are 
not sufficient, an equivalent one is provided, namely, that of outline or of position — 
it is evident that as soon as the phonographer has become familiar with the outlines 
of words, the vocalization may, to a considerable extent, be dispensed with, without 
materially diminishing the legibility of the writing. And there are several reasons 
which should induce phonographers to hasten to acquire such a familiarity with 
phonographic outlines as will enable them to omit the majority of the vowels. 
These reasons may be stated as follows : 

1. The unvocalized style will secure advantages, in respect to the speed of writ- 
ing, over the fully vocalized style, nearly equaling those secured by the latter style 
over the common longhand. 

2. Judging of words by reference to the context, as is necessary to some extenf 
when reading unvocalized phonography, leads to a careful observation of the gram- 
matical relations of words, the construction of sentences, the signification of words 
and phrases, and the natural sequence of ideas ; and thus are secured mental bene- 
fits which could hardly be obtained so well in any other manner. 

3. Having acquired the ability to read unvocalized phonography, you will be 
able to release your correspondents from the drudgery and loss of time imposed by 
full vocalization. Remember that to save time is to lengthen life ; — that to save un- 
necessary labor is to contribute in effect to the spiritual and material wealth of the 
human race. 

4. The practice of omitting most of the vowels in writing the Corresponding 
Style will cultivate habits which are of great importance to the successful use of 
Phonography for reporting purposes. 

§ 239. After the student has become conversant with the principles 
of vocalization, and tolerably familiar with consonant-outlines, he 
may omit — 

1. Unaccented vowels ; as from ' rotary, captain, capital, doubtkss, 
anatomy, wndoubted.' 

2. Even accented vowels from words of peculiar outlines ; as c beau- 
tiful, distinction, necessary, intended, always, certain, convenience, 
exercise, better.' 

Rem. 1. Usually the need of vocalization is inversely proportioned to the number 
of the consonants. (I) Words containing a single consonant with a vowel before 
and after it, should, if possible, have both vowels written ; at least the accented one ; 

thus, /\ or \^ for obey, 

% 233. What are the advantages of the unvocalized style of Phonography? 
§ 239. What vowels may the practiced writer omit ? [Rem.] To what is the need 
of vocalization inversely proportioned? Upon what principle may un vocalize! 



124: THE COMPENDIUM. 

Eem. 2. Towels may usually be omitted with entire safety from outlines whose 
syllable-names make the required words, or closely resemble them; as Irom Kayses 
for cases, Es-Ebs for essence, Lay-Ber for labor, Lay-Dee for lady Kay-Dee for 
rm^,Deest-Ingshon for distinction, Wed for dread,!*?** for later, Enter far 
enter, (b) The vocalization of a portion of a word may be omitted in like case; as 
from the syllables denoted by italics in the following words : ' Science, pre-emption, 
argument, conquer, evil, intention? 

Rem. 3. A final unaccented vowel, especially i, may usually be omitted with en- 
tn e safety, when preceded by Lay, Eay, or any consonant which, if not followed by 
a vowel, would be expressed by a hook, loop, or circle, or by lengthening or short-, 
ening; as the final vowels of 'fancy, rosy, penny, many, chaffy, bevy, body, pity, 
mighty, hungry, angry, entry, ultra, needy, windy.' ^ 

Eem 4 An initial vowel may usually be omitted, whether accented or not, when 
the form of the word implies an initial vowel; as from ' ask, assign, awake, oyer, 
argue, alum, older, avoid, annoyed.' See § 60 ; 117, 4 ; 118, 3 ; 152, 1 ; lo6, 1 ; lto , 
207 E 2 • 220 E 2. (&) And in other cases, an unaccented initial vowel may usually 
be omitted, Unless needed to distinguish the word from another not commencing with 
an initial vowel ; as in immeasurable, to distinguish it from measurable^ tmmaie- 
rial, to distinguish it from material, (c) Words of the classes just mentioned are 
usually distinguished, in the Exporting Style, by difference of position, when they 
can not be distinguished by difference of outlines. _ ^ 

Eem 5. A simple vowQl-sign may usually be omitted with greater safety than a 
diphthong or detached Way or Yay ; and the latter, therefore, are rarely omitted, 
and are sometimes inserted in preference to an accented simple vowel; as in 

1 



idea, " > argue. 



II. JOINING PARTS OF WORDS. 

1. CERTAIN VOWEL-SIGNS JOINED TO CONSONANTS. 

§ 240. Whenever the junction would be convenient, it is allowable, 
and usually advantageous, to join— 

1. Initial I, Oi, Wi—to a following stroke ; thus, ] eyed, ] hide, 
£ highly, f oil, \ wide. See §101; 104; 139,1. 

2. Final Ew, Ow, Yd, Too— to a preceding stroke ; thus, — ^ cue, 
_ glue, _, new, \, bow, v bowed, u doubt, ^ now, 
^_ ammonia, v '\_ nephew. See § 101; 104 ; 139, 2. 

Eem In writing the derivatives from such words as 'cue, doubt, new, nephew' 
-for instance, 'cues, doubtful, news, newly, nephews'-the vowel-sign must bo 
written separately. ^ i 

Lay-Dee be written for lady, Eay-Dee for ready t What is said as to the omission 
of a final vowel occurring after a consonant which might be expressed by a hook", 
loop, or other mode of abbreviation ? What is said as to the omission of an initial 
vowel ? as to the omission of diphthongs and detached Way or Yay ? 

8 240 What initial vowels are joined to a following stroke ? what final ones to a 
preceding stroke ? How are the final joined vowels written in derivatives ? 



C0NTKACT1OHS AND EXPEDIENTS. 125 

2. JOINING AFFIX AND PREFIX SIGNS. 

§ 241. The speed of writing is considerably increased by joining prefix or affix 
eigns, whenever it would be allowable, to the other part of the word. The general 
cases in which such junctions are allowable have already been specified in the 
chapters treating of the prefix and affix signs. 

Eem. Several of the contractions given in preceding sections were formed by 
uniting a prefix or affix sign to the other portion of the word ; as, c understand, 
understood, inconsistent, forward, afterward.' 



III. JOINING WORDS— PHRASE- WRITING. 

§ 242. The speed and legibility of writing may be considerably in- 
creased by the judicious use of Phrase- writing, that is, by joining 
words occurring together in phrases or clauses ; as, ' it-is-quite-neces- 
sary, we-are-very-sure, we-may-be-told, it-is-not-so.' 

Eem. The novitiate writer should, for a considerable time, confine his use of 
phrase-writing to joining sign-words. Experience will gradually teach him in what 
cases he may safely depart from this limit. < 

§ 243. Phrase-Sign, Sign-Phrase. — Two or more word-forms joined are 
termed a Phrase-Sign, or Phra/se-o-gram ; (b) and the words represent- 
ed by such sign are denominated a Sign-Phrase, or Phra/se-o-graph. 

CAUTIONS. 

§ 244. To guard against the disadvantageous use of phrase- writing, 
the following cautions are given : 

1. Do not join words which are not united in a phrase or clause. 

2. Do not join words when the junction would be difficult or disal- 
lowable. 

3. Do not employ phrase-signs which extend an inconvenient dis- 
tance above or below the line of writing. 

4. Do not employ phrase-signs of inconvenient length. 

Eem. 1. The object of Caution 3, above, is to guard against the use of phrase- 
signs whose advantage would be more than counterbalanced by the loss of time in 
the pen's return to the line of writing, and by their interfering with the writing 
above or below. 

Eem. 2. Caution 4, above, would apply to a phrase-sign like that for the following 
phrase : ' I wish you could make some other arrangement.' This phrase would re- 
quire a sign of inconvenient length ; and it should, therefore, be divided into con- 

§ 242. What is phrase-writing ? [Rem.] To what extent should it be carried by 
the novitiate writer ? 

§ 243. What is a phrase-sign ? a sign-phrase ? What is an equivalent term for 
phrase-sign ? for sign-phrase ? 

§ 244. What cautions are given as to phrase-writing? [Rem.] What is the object 



126 THE COMPENDIUM. 

i > 

venient parts ; thus, ' I-wish-you-could-make some-other-arrangement,' or I -wish 
you-could-make some-other-arrangement.' 

Kem. 3. General Rules for Joining Words. — For the purpose of reference, a few 
general rules for joining words are here stated: 

1. A common substitute, or a noun of frequent occurrence, is frequently joined to 
a following verb ; thus, ' he-had, it-may, they-were, they-shall, we-think, you-are, 
each-may, such-can, who-make.' 

2. A defining, limiting, or modifying word is usually joined to the word defined, 
limited, or modified ; thus, ' a-man, that-time, this-day, no-one, some-one, long-ago, 
recent-date, as-well-as (Iss-Lay-Iss), as-soon-as (Ses-Ens), so-as, great-advantage, 
as-great-as, as-much-as, very-much-more, a-very-important-matter, enter-upon, 
go-forward, come-into.' 

3. A simple or compound auxiliary verb, with or without not, is frequently joined 
to the principal verb ; thus,. * shall-be, will-have, will-be-seen, will-not-be-seen, 
may-not-be-seen, does-know, does-not-know, may-be-expected.' 

4. A common verb is occasionally joined to a common word following it ; thus, 
' does-it, givc-me, give-some, do-this, make-it.' 

5. A preposition is usually joined to a following word ; thus, 4 to-the, to-him, of- 
my, for-this, in-that, in-which, by-which, upon-that, from-this.' 

6. A common conjunction or adverb is usually joined to a following word of fre- 
quent occurrence; thus, 'when-shall, if-this, if-they, if-we, since-that, since-then, 
since-this, when-the, so-as, nor-is-it, nor-can, neither-this, as-well-as, and-this, be- 
cause-it-is, though-they, there-are.' 



POSITION OF PHRASE-SIGNS. 

1. DETERMINED BY THE EIRST WORD. 

§ 245. Usually the first word of a phrase-sign is written in its proper 
position, and the other word or words follow without regard to posi- 
tion ; thus : 

... and a-n ^ hut the — § 70, R. 1. 

...^... and the -^^ could not 

O as h-is, etc.— § 38, R. 4. V^ for a-n 

so as the V^ for h-is 

o_ as a V^ for the 

£~* as well as "V* has "been 

0_y as soon as ^"^ I am, I may 

L hut a-n ] I do 

of Caution 3 ? How and why should be divided this phrase : " I wish you could 
make some other arrangement ?" Eepeat the general rules for joining words. 

§ 246. By what usually is the position of a phrase-sign governed ? [Kem.] How 
Is the tick a~n-d written in phrase-signs ? 



CONTRACTIONS AND EXPEDIENTS 



127 



( 


I think 


/j 


on a-n 


£.. 


I will 


^ 


on account of 


..^~\. 


if a-n 


^ 


on the 


..^.. 


if his 


V 


on the contrary 


^! 


in a-n 


L 


or'a-n-d 


v_9 


in his 


V 


or the— § 70, R. 


H 


in order that 


-v 


should be 


<^v 


in order to 


1 


should do 


>^ 


in the 


A 


should a-n 


n 


into a-n 


St 


should the 


"1 


into the 


(o 


that h-is 


a_ 


is a-n 


1 


to a-n 


o 


is as, etc.— § 38, E, 4. 


> 


to the 


/O 


is the 


V_ 


we have 




is to 




we have no 




it is 


U-, 


we have seen 


1 


it is not 


/ 


which the 


t> 


it is said 


— , 


you can 


1 


it is the 


^ 


you may 


k 


it should be 


r^~^ 


you must 


"i 


of a-n 


^w 


you must not 


n 


of course 


r 


you will, 


Vo 


of his 


n 


you will do. 


> 


of the 







Rem. 1. (a) The tick for a-n-d, when joined to a following tick a, an, or the, is 
* written on the line, (b)rln other cases, it is adapted to the position of the following 
word* as provided in the next section. 



128 THE COMPENDIUM. 

2. DETERMINED BY THE SECOND WORD. 

§ 246. The position of a phrase-sign is determined by the second 
word in the following cases : 

1. When the first word is represented by a dash, or by a horizontal 
stroke, of the first position, and it can be joined to the second word 
without being brought down to or below the line ; thus, ^X i n these, 

~X in this, „^r/L- in those ; so also ' of these, of this, of those ;' ' of 
each, of which, of much ;' ' I did not, I do not, I had not.' 

2. When the tick for a-n-d or the is the first portion of the phrase- 
sign, and the second word is not the or a-n-d; thus, and it, \ and 

for a, -j and but, 7 and should, ~^~^ and in a, *# the first, "^ the 
way. 

3. Occasionally, to distinguish one phrase-sign from another ; as, 
-£- his own, thus distinguished from Q ^ y is no. 

4. Occasionally, when the legibility of the second word depends 
considerably on its position ; as, '^_ as if, —j-- as much as. 

Eem. 1. The effect of the rule of § 245, Eem. 1, and of § 246, 2, is to secure a dis- 
tinction by position between ' and a' and ' and but' — • and the' and * and should.' 
Bee § 71, Eem. 2. 

Eem. 2. The position of the signs for lam and Twill are determined by the first 
word, because the J could not be adapted to the position of the second word, with- 
out being brought down to the line. (&) For this reason I will is distinguished from 
he will; lam, etc., from he may; the latter commencing on the line, and the for- 
mer commencing above it. See § 146, Eem. 5. 



IV. OMISSION OF WOEDS. 



§ 247. The speed of writing may be considerably increased, without 
sacrifice of legibility, by omitting certain words, which may be inti- 
mated by the manner of writing the adjacent words, or readily supplied 
by a reference to the context. 

' of the' omitted. 
§ 248. Of the, connecting words, may be omitted, a,nd be intimated, 

§ 246. In what cases is the position of a phrase-sign governed by the second word ? 
[Eem.] How is and the distinguished from and should t and a from and butt 
How is I will distinguished from the reporting phrase-sign for he will? 

§ 248. "When may ' of the' be omitted ? When omitted, how are these words inti- 



CONTRACTIONS AND EXPEDIENTS 129 

usually by writing the adjacent words near to each other; thus, 
<^\* close of the day; but occasionally by joining them; thus, 
<^^ one of the most. 

Beu. Of the is usually represented by _ when it is preceded or followed by a 
vowel-wordsign, as that for eye or aice ; lest such vowel-wordsign should be mis- 
taken for the vocalization of the word near which it is placed. 

' have' omitted. 
§ 249. Have preceding been and done in phrase-signs, maybe omitted, 
when it can not be mere clearly or easily expressed by an Ef-hook ; 

thus, sr shall have been, - V to have been J , can not have 
done ; but, ^ I have been, ^ which have been. 

OMISSION OF WORDS IN THE REPORTING STYLE. 

§ 250. The reporter, and the advanced writer of the Corresponding Style, may 
omii other words, as specified below • 

1. Of may be omitted when it occurs between two nouns which can be joined to 

indicate the omission ; thus, y — "Word of God, ^ kingdom of heaven. 

2. To may be omitted when followed by an infinitive which can be joined to the 
preceding word, to indicate the omission ; thus, ' ^\ I intend to be. 

8. Generally, it is allowable, in the Eeporting Style, to omit any other word 
which must, and may readily, he supplied, to complete the sense or construction ; 
as — 

A— from signs for such phrases as the following: 'for a moment, such a one, in a 
word, for a long time, in such a case.' 

And— as in N\ by and by ; or, with the adjacent words joined, ~^_ wise 

and good ; Mer-Mer, ' more and more ;' Yer-Yer, ' over and over ;' Yer-Bee-Yee, 
4 over and above;' Eay-Chay-Pee-Ar, 'rich and poor; Ther-Ther, 'through and 
through.' 

From— to— as in writing 1 1 ■ from day to day ; i i from time to time ; or, some- 

;imes with the adjacent words joined ; thus, Ar 3 -Ar, ' frum hour to hour ;' Pels-Pels, 
from place to place.' 

In— as in writing ^^ hand in hand. 

On the— us in writing ^ on the one hand, [) on the other hand ; Wens 2 -Dee, 
on the one side 

mated ? [Eem.] How usually should ' of the' be written when one of the adjacent 
words is a vowel-wordsign ? 

§ 249. What is the rule for the omission of have ? 

§ 250. What is the rule for omitting and implying to and of in the Reporting Style ? 
What is the general rule for omitting words in the E. S.? Give examples of the 
omission of ' a, and, from— to, in, on the, or, or the, to, oV [Hem.] How may a 



130 THE COMPENDIUM. 

Or— as in writing ^^f* more or less ; Sner-Lay'ter, * sooner or later :' Gret- 

Lays, ' greater or less.' 

Or the— as in writing Wen 2 -THer, 'one or the other.' 

The— as in [/ on the contrary ; En J -Eld, 4 in the world.' 

To— as in writing ' according' for ' according to ;' ' in relation' for ' in rela- 
tion to ;' ' in regard' for ' in regard to ;' Tecs-Ems-Em, ' it seems me,' for ' it seem3 
io me ;' Tees-Med-Em, ' it seemed me,' for 4 it seemed to me.' 

With — as in writing <^> ' in conjunction,' for ' in conjunction with? 

Eem. 1. Of— Instead of omitting of and implying it by joining the adjacent 

words, it is sometimes better to express it by an Ef-hook ; thus, v/[^D variety 

of causes. 

Kem. 2. To. — The omission of to, when it precedes a stro*ke to which it could not 
properly be joined, may be intimated, in the Eeporting Style, by commencing that 

stroke at the line of writing ; thus, \ to us, or to say ; provided, that the word so 

written would not be liable to be mistaken for some other word in the third position. 
(5) It is safe to write ' you, whom, him, come' under the line to indicate a preceding 

to; thus, ----- to you, "/" to whom, -^^- to him, -^:- to come. 

word be written to imply a preceding to, when it could not properly be joined ? 
"Write, according to the principle stated, ' to us, to say, to you, to whom, to him, 
to come.' 



LISTS 



OP 



WORD-SIGNS AND CONTRACTIONS. 



132 



THE COMPENDIUM. 



§251 


. LIST 


OF WOKD-SIGNS. 




P. 




>, 


objective 


I 


«Jiff<nJe 


\ 


up 


S 


subjective 


J 


done 


•H- 


hope 


"\" 


about. 


■-}- 


down 


\ 


princip^ 
surprise 
upon 
put 


T. 


it 

at, out 


j 

j 
-j - 


did not 
do not 
had not. 


«\ 


particularly 


1 


ita 


CII. 

z 




*N 


opportunity- 


.. ' ... 

b 


itself 


each 


<N 


spirit. 


r 


tfll, it will 


/ 

■;/■: 


which 


B. 




1 .. f . 


until, at all 


much 


\ 


by 


1 


truth 


/' 


which will 


\ 


be 


i 


whatever 


whichever 


V 


to be 


\ 


truthful-ly 


iS 


which will not. 


\ 


subject 


r 


till it 


J. 




\ 


able 


r 


told 


/ 


advantage 


N 


member, remember 




until it 


/ 


general-ly 


N 


numbcr-ed 


1 


toward 


<s 


gentlemen 


N. 


before 


j_ 


it will not. 


J 


gentleman. 


"V 


above 


D. 




K. 




\ 


been 


I 


do 





kingdom, common 


% 


remembrance 


I- 


had 


7" 


commonly 


X 


objection i 


1 


dear 


— 


come 


V 


subjection 


•1 


during 


D 


because 







LIST OF 


WOKD-SIGKS. 


Y6\ 




^ 


call, equal-ly 


^_ 


fully 


TH. 




/ 


«=— 


difficult-y 


^ 


from 


1. 


K 




c 


care 


■^ 


Phonography, often 


( 


the- 




— — -r> 


can 


No 


Standard Thon. 


■(- 


though, thou 


• 


— 


careful-ly 


\ 


farther 


.L 


these, thyself 






quite 


i:.. 


if it 


C 


this 




— 


could 


v_ 


after. 


~C~ 


those, thus 




c 


called, equaled 


v 




6 


themselves 






according-ly 


v_ 


ever 


C 


they will 




c — 


cared 


^_ 


have 


) 


either 







can not, kind 


V 


however 


J 


the^, they are 




-=■ 


account. 


L. 


several 


-')- 


other 




G. 




*t 


value 


( 


within 




— 


give-n 


^\ 


over 


C 


then 




— 


together 


^ 


every, very 


-(- 


than 




— 


gave 


..k 


even 


( 


that 




— » 


again 


..£.. 


valued. 


< 


without 




"— 


God 












— 


good 
great. 


Th. 

( 


think 
thank-ed 


s. 

^ 
J 


see 
so 




F. 

1 


if 

for 

few- 




3 


through 
thought 
throughout. 


-)- 
) 

) 


us, use =* ytus 
astonish- n ? ent 
establish-^. 






full 











134 



THE COlll'EKDIUM. 













z. 




r° 


let us 




myself 


) 


was 


r 


world 


f~~h 


himself 


..)... 


use = yui3 


r 


will not 


fH 


we may 


) 


is it 


'O 


we will not. 


L, ^^ 


Mr., mere, remark 


) 


h-as it 


E. 




^ 


more 


...)... 


used 




j 


' ij 


men 


o 


is, his 


i 


her, he£ 


^ 


man 






S/ 


are 






o 


as, has 






.-^l 


important 


^ 


first. 


-v 


our 




improve-^ eilt 






H. 


hers, herself 


^^ 


SH. 

J 


wish, she 


a 


ours, ourself 


// "~~b 


impossibly 






O 


ourselves 


y *" ^\ 


matter 


J 


shal} 


'<£ 


we are 


^ 


might 


J 


sure-ly 


y 


where 


<5^N 


somewhat 


J 


wished. 


, 




C"\ 








~y~ 


aware 




immediate-Iy 


ZH. 




•^- 


rather 


/~S 


made 


J 


usuaMy 


■^ 


Lord, read 


s~~$ 


mind 


J 


pleasure. 


■^ 


heard 


S~Z> 


may not, am not 






</ ^ 


word 


<r^. 


we may not. 


L. 




^ /> 


are not 






r 


wilj 


c^ 


we are not 


N. 




-f- 


whole 






^^ 


in, any 




t/> 


were not. 






.£. 


while, we will 






^— ' 


no, know 


c 


well 


M. 




„ 


own 


r 


alone 


^ 


me, my 


- — p 


influence 


r 


let 


^ 


am, may, him 


^ 


when 



LIST OF WOED-SIGSS 



135 



1 c 


one 


-~Y 


away 


• 


an, and 


!r^ 


near, nor 


-y 


whether 


s 


all 


«^ 


manner 


c 


we 


\ 


of 




d 












opinion 




with 


\ 


too, two 


^ 


none, known 


c 


were 


\ 


to 


^ 


not 


> 


what 


1 


awe, already 


- 


nature 


) 


would. 


i 


or 


T 


naiuralAy 


Y. 




I 


owe, oh 


^ — ' 


entire 


r 




1 


but 






your 






*^-> 


another 


c 


yours, yourself 


/ 


ought 


S-^ 


under 


er 


yourselves 


/ 
— ^ 


on 




is not 


V 


ye 


/ 


who, whom 


<^v 


h-as not 




yet 


i 


whose 


<^_^ 


want 


r\ 


beyond 


C 


whoever 


^ 


in order. 






/ 


should 






r\ 


you. 






NG. 










ay, aye 


™. 


thing 


H. 




V 


I, eye, high 


Vw>* 


language. 


/ 


he. 


A 


how 
I have. 


W. 




Vowels. 








^ 


why 


• 


the 






A 


way 


• 


a 







136 



THE COMPENDIUM 



§ 252. LIST OF SIGN-WORDS. 




A. 


-f- 


at all 


• 


a— § 71 ; 114 


-y- 


aware 


\ 


able 


: "=v 


away 


___ 


about 


i 


awe 


"v. 


above 


V 


ay, aye— 102, E. 3. 


c 


according-ly 




B. 


— 


account 


\ 


be 


/ 


advantage 


. ... 


because 


v_ 


after 


\, 


before 


— » 


again 


\ 


been 


\ 


all— 178, E. 4. 


r\ 


beyond 


r 


alone 

j 


1 


but 


i 


already 


\ 


by. 


^ 


am 




G. 


^> 


am not 


* 


call 


. 


an-d-71; 114; 246,2 

• 


C — 


called 


^_^ 


another 


— ^> 


can 


•— ' 


any 


-= 


can not 


^\/ 


are— 37, E. 2 


e— 


care 


"i ^ 


are not 


<r~ 


cared 


o 


as— 252, E. 7 


c— 


careful-ly— 232, E. 8 


) 


as it 





come 


Q_>» 


as not 





common 


) 


astonisli-2! ellt — 221. E. 2 


~r 


commonly 


-1- 


at 


— 


could. 



LIST OF SIGN-WOKDS. 



137 



1 


D. 


^ 


from 


1 


dear 


<L_ 


full 


J 


did not 


^_ 


fully. 


I 

1 


differ- 6 ' 1 * 

eiice 

difficult-y 




G. 

gave 


1 


do 


/ 


general-ly— 201, E. 3, ~b 


J 

J 

-J- 


done 
do not 
down 
during 




gentleman— 221, E. 2 
gentlemen — do. 
give-n 
God 


/ 


E. 

each 


— 


good f 


1 


either 


— 


great— 221, E. 2. 


^— - 


entire- 210, E. 1 
equaled 


..].. 


H. 
had— 221, E. 4 


c — • 


-— 


equaHy— 178, E. 2, a 


...j... 


had not 


) 


establish-**^— 221. E. 2 


o 


has— 37, E, 1 


..^.. 


even 


) 


has it 


Sr-„ 


ever 


<i_^ 


has not 


^ 


every 


^ 


have— 1S2, E. 1 ; 201 E. 4. 


V 


eye. 


/. 


he— 146, E. 5 


,.-Y 


F. 
farther 


1. 


hear 
heard 


-V 


few 


A 


her, here 





first 


.1. 


hers, herself 


V. 


for 


V 


high— 252, E. 8 



138 



THE COMPENDIUM. 



/~b 



v_J> 



^^ 



liim 




K. 




himself 


..... 


kingdom 




his— 8T, E. 1 ; 252, E. 8 


"^ 


kind 




hope 


— 


know 




how 


^ 


known. 




however. 




L. 




I. 


^ 


language 




1—103 


r 


let 




I have— 201, E. 2 


r° 


let us 




if 


■^ 


Lord. 




if it 




M. 




immediate-ly 


/-s 


made 




important 


^ 


man 




impossibJf ity — 206, E. 1, & 


'w' 


manner 




improve-^— 206, E. 1, a 


— 


may- 




in 


/*-> 


may not 




influence 


^ 


matter 




in order 





me 




is— 252, E. 7 


N 


member 




is it 




men 




is not 


<T^ 


mere— 1T8, E. 1 




it— 221, E. 4 


do. 


Mr.— 178, E. 3 




its 


/"-x 


might 




itself 


S~3t 


mind 


« 


it will 


^ 


more 




it will not. 


../. 


much 





LIST OF SIGK-WOEDS 



139 



a 


my 


""a" 


ourselves 


T* 


myself 


-|- 


out 




N. 


^ 


over 


- 


nature 




own-201, E. 7; 211, E. 1. 


7 

i 


naiuralAy 




P. 


!^ 


near— 178, E. 1 


*\ 


particular-ly— 221, E. 3 


— 


no 


\»' 


phonography 


^ 


none 


J 


pleasure 


..™. 


nor 


\ 


princip^ 


•-' 


not-201, E. 5 ; 221, E. 4 


"\" 


put. 


\- 


number-ed— 252, E. 6. 




Q. 




0. 




quite. 


\i 


objection— 201, E. 3, a 




E. 


>b 


objective-201,E.3,c; 232,E.9 




rather 


\ 


of— 201, E. 4 


^ 


read— 221, E. 2 




often— 201, E. 1 


iT^ 


remark 


1 


oh, owe— 252, E. 5, c 


N 


remember 


/ 


on 


% 


remembrance. 


<^ 


one 




S 


^ 


opinion 


.). 


see 


*s 


opportunity 


<L 


several 


1 


or 


J 


shal| 


-)•• 


other 


J... 


she 


/ 


ought 


/ 


should 


-V 


our— 173, E. 5 


) 


so 


.^.. 


ours, ourself 


0~N 


somewhat 



140 



THE COMPENDIUM 



c \ 


spirit— 221, E. 2 


) 


through 




lo 


Standard Phonography 


■) 


throughout 




\ 


subject— 252, E. 5 


--(• 


thus 




\s 


subjection 


.L 


thy 




s 


subjective- 201, E. 8, c 


.£. 


thyself 




n 

l 
/ 


sure-ly— 178, E. 2, 1 ; 232, R. 
[3,c 


f 


till 




No 


surprise. 


J.... 


till it 






T. 


\ 


to— 229 




[ 


tell 


V 


to be 




-c- 


than— 201, E. 8 


— 


together— 229 




-(--'■ 


thank-ed 


r 


told 




< 


that 


1 


toward 




• 


the— 70, 113 


1 


truth 




..(.. 


thee 


I 


truthful-ly— 232, E. 


8 


( 


them, they 


\ 


too, two. 




■> 


the;.;;, they are— 211 




u. 




6 


themselves 


^^' 


under 




( 


then 


-h 


until 




c 


these 


-r- 


until it 




( 


they will 


\ 


up 




^^ 


thing 


\ 


upon 




( 


think 


-)•■ 


us 




c 


this— 252, E. 7, h 


J 


usual-ly— 232. E. 3, 





-e 


those . 


-)- 


use == yucs 


V 


•■(- 


thou, though- 229 


...)... 


use = ymz 




r 


thought 


•■•)••• 


used. 





LIST OF SIGN-WOEDS 



141 



" 


.... 

Y. 


/ 


which will 




-Cs 


value 


</' 


which will not 


- 


~t 


valued 


r 


while 




S 


very— 178, E. 2, &. 


/ 


who-m 






w. 


c 


whoever 




<^> 


want 


I 


whose— 69, E. 3 




) 


was 


' 7 ^- 


whole 




^ 


way 


71_ 


why 




c 


we 


r 


wilj 




jS 


we are 


/r> 










I 


will not 




c^ 


w e are not 


J... 


wish ^ 




<r ^ N 


we may — 140, E. 2 








<r^> 


we may not 


J 


wished 




£ 


we will— 140, E. 1 


c 
I. 


with 
within 






we will not 


( 


without 




r~ 


well 












6/ ~> 


word 




c 


were 


r 


world 




cS 


were not 












5 


would— 201,E.6,c, 


221, E.4. 


i 


what— 201, E. 6, c ; 221, E. 4 








t 






Y. 




whatevei 


U 


ye 




.™ 


when 


- 


yet 




*/ 


where— 233, E. 2 3 4 


r\ 


you— 140, E. 3 




-^ 


whether 


r 


your 




/ 


which 


c 


yours, yourself 




/ 


whichever 


f 


yourselves. 








142 THE COMPENDIUM. 

Rem. 1. Word-Signs and Contractions Distinguished. — For the distinction be« 
tween word-signs and contractions, see § 104, Eem. 2. 

Rem. 2. Double Terminations, etc.—\n the lists of word-signs and contractions, a 
word is occasionally printed with a hyphen ; thus, give-n, h-as; with double termina- 
tions ; thus, the]! e ; or with a hyphen and double terminations ; thus, differ-^ ce ; to 
intimate that the corresponding signs represent give and given; an and lias; their 
and there; differ, different, and difference. 

Rem. 3. Dot-lines, etc. — The dot-lines in the lists of word-signs and contractions 
indicate the line of writing, and serve to show the position of the accompanying 
word. When a word-sign or contraction is printed without such a line, it is under- 
stood to belong to the second position. 

Rem. 4. Italics, etc. — Words not strictly belonging to the list of sign-words, but 
whose signs are inserted to guard against incorrect modes of writing, or for some 
other reason, are printed with italics. In the partial lists they were inclosed in 
brackets, (p) ' Object,' if written without the vowel ' 6,' belongs to the list of word- 
signs. 

Rem. 5. Derivatives. — (a) One or more sounds prefixed or affixed to a word to 
form a derivative may be denominated a formative sound, or simply a formative, 
(b) A derivative from a word-sign may almost invariably be formed by adding, by 



some convenient sign or mode of writing, the formative sound ; thus, f com- 
monly, uncommon, >•[ remembered, | eyed, ' owing, _^_ things, 
kingdoms, — ° comes (see § 38, 1 and 2), -■"^- ours, ^ whose, c*= great- 
est, ^-^ influences, influenced (see § 38, Rem. 2), c 3 careful, <_ cared, 

Q^. valued, (c) Some of the derivatives from sign-words denoted by a voweJ- 
sign— as ' awes, awful ; owes, owed'— must be written with the proper consonant- 
signs vocalized, precisely as though they were not derived from sign- words ; for in- 
stance, vocalize Zee with au for awes; Dee with au for awed; Zee with b for owes; 
Dee with b for owed. See § 69, R. 3 and 4 ; § 102, R. 1 and 2. (c7) The sign of tho 
formative is usually disjoined when any of the sounds adjoining the formative aro 

not indicated in the word-sign ; as in \| subjected, \"~^ objector, \| ob- 
jected : but "Y^ " naturally, (e) In other cases, the formative is usually joined, if 
it can be conveniently. (/) For convenience of reference, several derivativo 
word-signs are included in the preceding list. Such are the signs for ' ours, our- 
self, themselves,' etc. 

Rem. 6. Past Tense and Perfect Participle.— When a verb is represented by a 
word-sign, and an additional stroke is necessary to write the past tense or perfect 
participle— as 'remembered, subjected, objected'— the advanced writer may employ 
the primitive word-sign for both the present and past tense ; the tense or time in 
most cases being readily distinguished by a reference to the context. 

Rem. 7. 'Is, His, As, Has 1 Added.— Any word denoted by the circle-wordsign — 
is, his, as, has— may be added — 

(a) To any word-sign not terminating with Iss, by adding a circle ; thus, [" it 
is, it has ; "" [""' at his, at as ; y that h-is, that h as ; Vj if his, if as ; V^> for 
h-is, for h-as ; in his, in as ; J so h-as, \ upon his. 



LIST OF SIGN-WOEDS 



143 



(&) To the circle-wordsign, and to word-signs terminating with Iss, by enlarging 
the circle; thus, ^ is his, is as, his is, his has; o as h-is, as has, has his, has 

S3; (3 this is, this has ; 777^. because his. 

Eem. 8. Distinctions. — If deemed desirable or necessary for sake of distinction, 
his, 7ias, and high, when written separately, may be written with an h-dot before 
the signs for is, as, and eye. See § 146, Eem. 3. For remarks as to other distinc- 
tions, see § 178, Eem. 2 ; 201, Eem. 1 : 206, Eem. 1, a; 221, Eem. 3. 

Eem. 9. For the different classes of the word-signs, and for various remarks con- 
cerning word-signs and their derivatives, see the portions of the Compendium indi- 
cated by the following references : 



List of Simple-Consonant Word- 
Signs §3T 

List of Vowel Word-Signs .69 

List of Diphthong Word-Signs 102 

List of Way and Yay Word-Signs . . 140 
List of Initial-Hook Word-Signs .... 178 

List of Final-Hook Word-Signs 201 

List of Emp Word-Signs 206 

List of Lengthened-Curve Word- 
Signs 210 

List of Half-Length Word-Signs. ... 221 

Positions of Word-Signs 39 

Exceptions to the Eule for Position 

of Word-Signs 55 

How to Learn the Word-Sign3. . 40, E. 3 

A»n-d added by a tick 71 

A 11 added to Word-feigns 178, E. 4 



Are addled to Word-Signs 178, E. 5 



Be 

Had 

Have 

!f 

It 

Not 

Of 

Our 

Own 

Than 

What 

Will 

Would 



do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 



204, E. 3 

221, E. 4 

201, E. 4 ; 182, E. 1 

201, E. 4 

221, E.4 

201, E. 5; 221, E.4 

201^4 

178, E. 5 



201, E. 7; 211, E. 1 

201, E. 8 

201, E. 6, c; 221, E.4 

178, E. 4 

201, E. 6, c; 221, E.4 

The added by a tic* 70 

Ang a-n-d— mode of expressing — 114 
Ang the— <fo. 113 



1M 



THE COMPENDIUM. 



§ 253. LIST OF CONTRACTIONS. 



~~7 



\ 



0>" 



aeknowledge— § 223,E.l,a 

acknowledged — 221 E.l,fr 

afterward 

anything 

become 

capable 

capability 

disadvantage 

familiar-ity 

forever 

forward 

highly 
inconsistent 

indiscriminate 
indispensable — 231, 2 
influential 

intelligence— 223, E. 1, e 
intelligent — do. 
intelligible 
interest— 223, E. 1, / 
investigation — 197. E. 4 
irregular-ity — 152, 1. 
knowledge 
manuscript 
never 



^ 



% 



A. 

/\ 






nevertheless 
new — 104 
now — 104 
notwithstanding 
object— 142, E. 1 
onward 
peculiar-ity 
phonographer 
phonographic 
practicable 
probab]* y 
refer-red 



«*<*. 



regular-ity— 153, 2 

remarkable 

represent 

represented 

representation 

representative 

something 

transcript 

transgress 

understand— 229, R. 1, 5 

understood — do. 

whenever 

wherever 



LIST OF SIGN-WOEDS. , 145 

Eem. 1. The derivatives from contractions are formed in accordance with a rule 
substantially the same as that for writing derivatives from word-signs (see § 252, 

Eem. 5); thus,'/ \| represented, \~^ objector, \| objected — Kay-Jay-Ment, 

4 acknowledgment,' J interested, Lp disinterested— En-Kay-Bel, 'incapable.' 

Hem. 2. Past Tense, etc. — Eather than add a stroke to a verb-contraction, to form 
the past tense or perfect participle, the advanced writer will employ the primitive 
contraction for either the present or past tense ; as, Eay-Pee for represent or repre~ 
sen ted ; depending upon the context for distinction between the tenses or times. 

Eem. 3. Object, if written without the vowel (see § 142, Eem. 1), is properly 
classed with the word-signs. 

Eem. 4. Whatsoever, etc. — A number of contractions are formed by the use of the 
affix-signs for soever, which are not included in the preceding list. See § 232, 1G. 

Eem. 5. For partial lists of the contractions, and for various remarks as to con- 
tractions and their derivatives, see the portions indicated by the following refer* 
ences : 

Contractions with Diphthongs § 104 

Simple-Consonant Contractions 142 

Contractions with Initial-Hook Signs 179 

Contractions with Final-Hook Signs 202 

Contractions with Half-Length Signs 223 

Contractions Distinguished from Word-Signs 104, E. 2 

Formation of Derivatives from Contractions \. . 221, E. 1, & 



§ 254. EXERCISE ON THE WORD-SIGNS AND CONTRACTIONS. 

1. Word-Signs.— Be, each, language, under, ye, quite, good, beyond, already, call, 
careful, could, do not, gave, may not, together, yourselves, who, until, rather, let, 
member, because, alone, common, differ, give, has it, let us, man, one, over, she, 
remembrance, toward, told, we will, whole, wish, well, thyself, they will, thank, 
Standard Phonography, thanked, too, on, matter, if, I, his, kingdom, Lord, can, of, 
out, to be, want, we are, world, either, are not, been, heard, given, different, estab- 
lish, may, we, yet, tell, none, even, advantage, pleasure, opinion, nor, during, man- 
ner, was, yours, in order, cared, another, carefully, is it, remark, not, way, yourself, 
me, even, farther, a, full, immediate, no, than, till, valued, whose, your, might, 
called, had, equaled, if it, naturally, remember, why, natural, gentlemen, who, 
would, somewhat, immediate, word, will not, first, about, entire, further, objection, 
made, is not, however, the, two, we may, you, which, until it, themselves, subjective, 
in, men, it will, no, number, own, put, Mr., I have, it will not, or, ours, were not, us, 
those, surprise, subject, often, oh, kind, word, up, will, opportunity, itself, estab- 
lished, care, but, am not, dear, myself, is, read, himself, objective, other, are, great, 
did not, ay, aware, has not, commonly, near, nature, phonography, ourselves, its, 
ourself, improve, immediately, my, particular, shall, our, near, shalt, every, before, 
fully, do, again, awe, down, God, from, eye, hear, come, any, few, her, general, 
difficult, away, first, here, herself, difficulty, at all, difference, above, for, high, gen- 
tleman, done, establishment, had not, by, an, have, and, he, able, according, known, 
accordingly, principal, ought, more, it, how, am, see, mind, account, much, all, im- 
proved, particularly^' after, should, impossible, so, as it, influence, as not, impossi- 
bility, truth, we will not, these, sure, value, would, usual, thing, astonish, truthful 

7 



146 THE COMPENDIUM. 

very, then, astonished, were, usually, astonishment, till it, their, subjection, thy, at, 
we will, whether, as, they, surely, to, we are not, equal, with, thus, equally, when, 
use=yuiz, that, spirit, him, hers, generally, principle, hope, important, numbered, 
importance, thee, we may not, them, where, use=yras, they are, whatever, truth- 
fully, wished, there, what, used, think, particularly, improvement, this, whichever, 
thou, aye, though, which will, thought, within, has, which will not, through, while, 
whom, throughout, will not, without, whoever, wilt. — Advantages, cares, has his, 
goods, if his, truths, thinks, manners, is as, because his, as it is, minds, tells, uses, 
wishes, wants, spirit's, man's, men's, improvements, out of, each of, eyed, uncom- 
mon, whose, influences, subjected, upon his, greatest, influenced, owing, in his, so as» 
this is, that is, at his, for his, it is. 

2. Contractions.— Onward, influential, transgress, refer, disadvantage, forever, 
represented, transcript, highly, intelligible, indispensable, inconsistent, peculiar, 
become, new, representation, knowledge, afterward, object, representative, phono- 
graphic, familiar, intelligent, capability, something, wherever, never, familiarity, 
phonographer, refers, forward, capable, practicable, peculiarity, understood, intelli- 
gence, any thing, investigation, regular, nevertheless, irregular, interest, acknowl- 
edge, acknowledged, manuscript, represent, understand, practicability, notwith- 
standing, indiscriminate, irregularity, reference, regularity, whenever, probable, 
referred, probability, indiscrimination. 

Rem. 1. Let the preceding exercises be written till the Words can be expressed 
with their correct signs, and in their proper position* as rapidly as they would be 
uttered by a good reader. 






THE EEP0ETIK6 STYLE. 147 



THE REPORTING STYLE. 

§ 255. The Corresponding Style contains, in germ at least, nearly every principle 
of the Reporting Style. The latter is distinguished from the former, principally by 
its extension of the use of three positions for outlines ; its additions to the word- 
signs and contractions of the Corresponding Style; and its use, to the utmost ex- 
tent consistent with legibilky, of the other lime-and-labor-saving expedients ex- 
plained in the chapter entitled " Contractions and Expedients." 



THE REPORTER'S RULE OP POSITION. 

§ 256. (a) The reporter writes all words of distinct outlines in the 
positions assigned them in the Corresponding Style ; (6) but when a 
word is not sufficiently distinguished by outline, the entire word, if 
composed wholly of horizontal lines — in other cases, its first perpen- 
dicular or sloping stroke — is written in the first, second, or third of the 
positions defined in the following sections, according as the word's 
accented vowel is first, second, or third place. 

THE FIRST POSITION. 

§ 257 . The first position is — 

1. For Horizontals and Vowel-Signs — the height of a Tee-stroke above 
the line of writing ; thus, s all, ' already, c we, ^^ my, 

V in, ^-^ sign, ^^ honor, ~° cause, f^ seem, ^" sing, song, 

meek. 

2. For All Other Signs — with the bottom half the height of a Tee- 
stroke above the line of writing ; thus, \ by, _/ each, V_ if, 

/ chief, ^ void, j try, i v tried, C— ^ bottom, 5^-n esteem, 

i *~~1 needed, I talk. 

Eem. With double-line paper, for the first position, horizontals and vowel-signs 
should be written so that they will barely touch the lower side of the upper line ; 
(6) perpendicular and sloping full-lengths are written half above and half below it ; 
(c) and half-length sloping and perpendicular letters commence at the lower side 
of the upper line and descend half the distance to the lower line. 

§ 255. What are the principal characteristics of the Eeporting Style? 

§ 256. What is the reporter's rule of position ? 

§ 257. What is the first position for horizontals and vowel-signs ? for all other 
signs ? [Eem.l How are signs of the first position written, when double-line paper 
Is used ? 



148 THE COMPENDIUM. 

THE SECOND POSITION. 

§ 258. The second position for signs of any kind is on the line of 
writing; thus, ( but, m a, , owe, c were, A how, ^~ N may, 

v__^ no, _^ one, go, ^^ none, ^n came, day, 

(^ low, lay, ail, / ray, row, _J show, |^~ dwell, /\ rate, 
wrote, y rogue, rug, ^^f~ male. 

THE THIRD POSITION. 

§ 259. The third position is — 

1. For Horizontals and Vowel- Signs — just below the line of writing ; 

thus, coo, ..„.. act, --^^ mew, -«. soon, --™« mount, ~y~ to 

whom. 

2. For Perpendicular and Inclined Half- Lengths — through or just below 

the line of writing ; thus, o valued, \... used, ...^ v .. proud, — ^-- put, 
--^--- about, --,-- doubt. 

3. For All Other Signs — through the line of writing ; thus, --| - dew, 
.../.. hue, -■■/■- chew, — ?-- sat, soot, -Q^- value, —1— true, --]-- drew, 
..*\„. prow, / --- cool, -T3].. acute, - s v^- badly. 

Rem. 1. Straight perpendicular and straight inclined half-lengths, without attach- 
ments, and of the third position, are usually best written just oelow the line of writ- 
ing, as they are thus more certainly distinguished from the dash-vowel word-signs 
of the second position. (5) A careful writer, however, may safely write such half- 
lengths through the line. 

Rem. 2. Position of Lengthened Curves. — In determining the position of a 
lengthened curve, regard the second half as a distinct sign, and place the first half 
in its proper position, according to the rules just given. See § 209. 

POSITION DENOTED BY FIGURES. 

§ 260. The figures 1, 2, 3 may be used to denote respectively the 
first, second, and third position ; as in the lists of Keporting word- 
signs and contractions. To illustrate, "Pel — 1 comply, 3 apply"— 
indicates that Pel in the first position represents comply ; in the third 
position, apply. These figures are sometimes printed with "superior" 
types ; thus, Ten 1 , Ten 2 , Ten 3 , (b) The figure 4 may be employed to 
indicate that the sign denoted by the syllable-name is to be written in 

§ 258. What is the second position ? 

§ 259. "What is the third position for horizontals and vowel-signs ? for perpendicu- 
lar and inclined half-lengths ? for all other signs ? [Rem.] "What perpendicular or 
sloping letters are usually written just below the line ? How is the position of a 
engthened curve determined ? 

§ 260. What position is denoted by the figure 1?2?8?4? 



THE REPORTING STYLE. 149 

the position to imply a preceding to, according to § 249, R. 2 ; for in- 
stance, Es 4 indicates Es commencing at the line of writing ; thus, ) 
to say. 

EXCEPTIONS TO THE RULE OF POSITION. 

§ 261. A violation of the rule of position is occasionally necessary for 
the sake of distinction in some cases when the strict observance of the 
rule would have the effect to place in the same position two or more 
words of the same outline ; thus, Pee 2 -Tee, piety — Pee 2 -Tee, pity; Ned 1 - 
Kayshon, indication — Ned 2 -Kayshon, induction ; En 1 , any — En 2 , no — ■ 
En 3 , own ; Per^Met, prompt — Per 2 -Met, permit — Per 3 -Met, promote. 

Rem. 1. {a) In such cases, it is usually best to write the most frequent word in 
the position it would have in the Corresponding Style, and the other word or words 
in some other position, either arbitrarily ; according to the ordinarily accented 
vowel, or according to the distinguishing accent (that is, the accent which some 
words take when contrasted with words from which they are to be distinguished ; 
as, 4 * I did not say ' portion,' but ' ^'portion ;' not ' prove,' but ' rtji/prove") ; thus, 
Peeseshon 2 , position — Peeseshon 1 , opposition — Peeseshon 3 , possession; Per'shon 2 , 
operation— Per'shon 3 , oppression; Sper'shon 2 , separation— Sper'shon 3 , suppres- 
sion; Per 2 -Met, permit— Per 1 -Met, prompt— Per 3 -Met, promote; En 2 , no— En 1 , 
any— En 3 , own ; Perf 2 , prove — Perf 3 , approve; Fel 2 -Ent, fluent — Fel 3 -Ent, afflu- 
ent, (b) "When, for the sake of distinction, a derivative must be written out of its 
natural position, and that position is different from that of the primitive, it is usu- 
ally best to write the derivative in the position of the primitive ; as, Ned^Kayshon, 
indicd'tion (in the position of indicate, Ned'-Ket), in order to distinguish it from 
induction, Ned 2 -Kayshon ; Kayseshon 3 , accusd'tion (in the position of accuse, 
Kays 3 ), in order to distinguish it from accession, Kayseshon 2 . 

Eem. 2. Derivatives Following the Position of the Primitive. — Legibility de- 
mands that in most cases a primitive word-sign depending considerably on position 
for legibility should, when a formative sign is added, retain its position, without 
regard to the general rule; hence, Net 2 , nature — Xet-~E\, not Net-ii"/ 2 , natural; 
Preft 1 , pr6phet— Preft l -Kay, not Prefl^-Kay, prophetic; Ken 2 , question— Ken" 2 
Bee,~not Ken-Pee 2 , questionable. 



ENLARGED WAY AND YAY. 

BRIEF WAY ENLARGED.. 

§ 262. A brief Way may be enlarged — 

1. In its Natural Direction — to add a Brief- Way sign- word ; thus, c= ... 
we were, we would, ^ with what, c were we, p__ what we-re, 
what would, p would we. 

§ 2G1. When is a violation of the rule of position necessary? [Rem.] In such 
cases, where is the most frequent word written ? How is the position of the other 
word or words determined ? What usually should be the position of a word-sign, 
when a formative sign is added ? 

§ 262. What is the effect of enlarging brief Way in its natural position ? inclined 



150 . THE COMPENDIUM. 

2. Inclined In the Direction of Clmy — to add any Brief- Yay sign- word ? 
thus, &. with you, q would you. 

Eem. 1. Name.— Brief Way enlarged may be called Enlarged Way ; or, when 
opening to the east, Weh'weh ; to the west, Wuh'wuh ; to the north-east, Weh'yeh ; 
to the south-west, Wuh'yuh. (b) l Way' may be substituted for the first syllable of 
these names, if the sign is heavy ; for instance, the first illustration in § 262, 1, may 
be called Way'weh. 

Eem. 2. If it is deemed desirable for distinction's sake, the use of enlarged Way 
may be restricted to its substitution for two semicircle-signwords whose signs can 
not be easily joined ; as for we %could, what we-re, you were, but not for we wer^, 
what would, you would. (b) For the practiced Eeporter, howerer, this distinction 
is unnecessary. 

Eem. 8. Weh'weh Joined as a Hook. — Weh'weh may be joined as a hook to 

Eent, thus .._. » for toe were 'not. 

BRIEF YAY ENLARGED. 

§ 263. Brief Yay may be enlarged, in its natural direction, to add 
a Brief- Way sign-word ; thus, u ye were, ye would, u you were, 

o you would. 

Eem. 1. The Brief Yay enlarged may be called Enlarged Yay ; or, when opening 
upward, Yeh'weh; when opening downward, Yuh'wuh. (b) When the sign is 
heavy, ' Yay' may be substituted for the first syllable of these names ; for instance, 
the sign for ye would may be called Yay'weh. 

Eem. 2. 6 Have, Ever, Of, If> Added. — A hook may be written within an enlarged 

Way or Yay to add have, ever, of, or if, when not better expresed otherwise ; thus, 

G 



LENGTHENED STKAIGHT LINES. 

§ 264. The reporter may derive great advantage from doubling a 
full-length straight line, without a final attachment, to add thr for 
there, their, or they are ; the heavy lines being tapered toward their ter- 



mination ; thus, 



till thr, 



had thr. 



in the direction of Chay ? [Eem.] What are the syllable-names for these enlarged 
signs ? How may a distinction be made between we icere and we would, etc. ? To 
what sign may Weh'weh be joined as a hook ? 

§ 263. What is the effect of enlarging brief Yay in its natural direction ? [Eem.] 
What are the syllable-names of the enlarged Yay ? What words may be added to 
an enlarged Way or Yay by an Ef-hook ? 

§ 264. For what purpose besides repeating a consonant may the reporter double 
a straight line without a final attachment ? How are the heavy lengthened lines to 
be written ? Write ' till thr, had thr.' [Eem.] How are the lengthened straight 



THE EEPOETINO STYLE. 151 

Rem. 1. The lengthening of a straight line to repeat a consonant, especially in the 
Reporting Style, is of rare occurrence. On the contrary, the lengthening of a 
straight line to add thr, can he made of frequent service and decided advantage to 
the reporter ; and since the repeated lines, as Bee-Bee, may be readily distinguished, 
by the context and by occasional vocalization, from the lengthened lines, as Bee'- 
ther— the propriety of the use of the latter is sufficiently established. 

Rem. 2. A antes and Position. — The lengthened straight lines are named by add* 
ing ther to the syllable-name of the stroke lengthened ; thus, Bee'ther, Tee'ther, 
etc. Place the first half of a lengthened straight line in the required position. 
Sec § 209 ; 259, R. 2. 

Rem. 3. * Other 9 Added to Lengthened. Curves or Straight Lines.— Certain Nu- 
meral and Pronominal Adjectives, and Pronouns— as, 'one, three, four, five, eight, 
any, each, enough, every, few, many, only, several, some, such, sundry, which, my, 
our, your, their — rarely if ever followed by their, and whose final sign is a curve or 
straight line, may have other added to them, by lengthening such sign ; thus, Wen'- 
ther 2 , one other, one another— Esther 1 , any other— En'thern 1 , any other one— Es- 
ther 3 , no other tin the third position, to distinguish it from another, En' ther 2 )— Ver'- 
ther 2 , every other — Iss-Yce'ther 2 , several other — Sem'ther 2 , some other— Chay'ther 1 , 
each other— Iss-Chay'ther 2 , such (an)other— Em'ther 1 , my other— Archer 3 , our other 
— Yay'fher 2 , your other, (b) In a few other cases, to secure a special advantage, 
other may be added by lengthening a curve ; as in En / ther 1 -'Y7erds, in other words. 

Rem. 4. Wit7d)i Thr, Been Thr, etc. — As a sign with a final attachment cannot 
be lengthened, the addition of thr to the signs for been, within, etc., is precluded ; 
but the advantage of the principle may be secured to add thr (= there, their, they 
are) to ' upon, been, done, down, can, within, then, than,' aricl a few other words, 
by omitting the En-hook; thus, Pee'ther 2 , upon thr (up thr, Pee'ther 2 , voc. with ii) 
— Bee'ther 2 , been thr — Dee'ther 2 , done thr — Dee'ther 3 (voc. with ou), down thr — 
Kay'ther 2 , can thr— Thee'ther 1 , within thr— Thee'ther 2 (voc. with e), then thr — 
Thee'ther 3 (voc. with a), than thr. 

Rem. 5. To a lengthened straight line there may be added — 

1. Oxen, Not, or One — by an En-hook ; thus, Tee'thern 3 , at their own— Dee'thern 3 , 
had there not — Kay'thern 2 (when Kay'ther-Net is not better for phrase-writing), 
can there not— Iss-Chay'thern 2 , such (an)other one. 

2. Have, Ever, Fore, or Of— by an Ef-hook ; thus, Kay'therf 2 , can there have, 
can there ever, can therefore— TeFtherf 3 , until they are of. 

Rem. 6. To a lengthened curve— 

1. Expressing Their — Own may be added by an En-hook ; thus, Ef'fhern 2 , for 
their own. 

2. Expressing Tliere— -fore may be added by an Ef-hook; thus, Em'Therf 2 , 
may therefore. See § 1S2, R. 1, b. 

Rem. 7. To Tlieir— may be advantageously written with Tee'ther 2 , as it is thus 
written in analogy with of their, Yee'ther 1 — within their, Thee'ther 1 — with their, 
Way'ther 1 . 

Rem. 8. * T/ir 1 Added to Verbs. — A t or d sound expressed by halving may be 
omitted in many cases, principally from verbs, to permit the use of the lengthening 

lines named ? To what words may other be added by the use of the lengthening 
principle ? "Why can not a sign with a final attachment be lengthened to add thr ? 
See § 208, 2. How may thr be added to been, done, etc. ? How, to a lengthened 
straight line, may Own, One, or Not be added ? Have, Ever, Fore, Of? When and 
how may own be added to a lengthened curve ? When and how may -fore be added 
to a lengthened curve ? How may to the r be best expressed ? How may thr be 



152 



THE COMPENDIUM. 



principle, to add thr; thus, Kays^Deether, reside(d) thr— Dee-Peether, adopt thr- 
Steh-Teether 2 , state(d) thr. 

Eem. 9. Consonant-Strokes Trebled.— The reporter may occasionally treble a 
stroke, to add thr-thr; thus, Way'therther 2 , whether thr— Chay'therther 1 , each 
other thr— Wen'therther 2 , one (an)other thr. 



REPORTING WORD-SIGNS AND CONTRACTIONS. 
§ 265. All the word-signs (except that for he), and all the contrac- 
tions, belonging to the Corresponding Style, are employed without 
change in the Reporting Style ; and, in addition, those indicated in 
the following lists of Reporting word-signs and contractions. Special 
word-signs and contractions may be devised in accordance with the 
principles of § 237, Rems. 2 and 3. 



P. 

Pee . . . 
Pees . . 
Peeses 

Peest . 
Spee . . 



Ses-Pee 



Steh-Pee-Steh, 
Pel 



Spel . 
Spels. 
Spier. 
Per .. 



Pers 



§266. REPORTING WORD-SIGNS. 

3 patent-ed (Pee 3 -Bel, patentable), party, happy 

1 possible-ility, 2 posterior 

1 possibilities, 2 possess (Pee'ses-Tee, possessed— Pee - 
ses-Vee, possessive— Pee'ses-Ray, possessor) 

3 happiest 

1 speak (Spee'-Ker, speaker— Spee'-Bel, speakable), 
superior-ity, 2 expect-ed-ation (En-Spee, unex- 
pected), 3 special- ty-ity (Es ? -Pee, especial) 

1 suspicion, suspicious, 2 suspect-ed, 3 exasperate-a 

ation 

2 step by step 

1 comply, 2 people-d, 3 apply (PeP-Kay, applicable- 

ility) 

2 supply 

1 explicit-ness, 2 supplies 

2 explore-d-ation 

1 appear, proper, propriety (Em-Per 1 , improper, im- 
propriety), 3 practice, practica (Per 3 -Ket, prac- 
ticable-ility) 

1 appears, 2 present, 3 practices 



added to such words as 'adopt, resided?' For what purpose may the reporter 
treble a stroke? Write « adopt their, resided there, each other their, whether they 
are, one another their, etc. 
§ 265. Are the word-signs of the C/S. employed in the R. S. ? 



THE EEPORTING STYLE. 



153 



Perst 3 

Sper 1 

Spers 1 

Sperst 1 

Prel 1 

Bperl 2 

Pef 1 

Pen 2 

Pens 2 

Spen 1 

Spens 2 

Ses-Pen 2 

Spee'shon 2 

Pees-Eshon .... 1 

Plens 1 

Splcn 2 

Pref 1 

Pren 1 

Prens 1 

Spren 3 

Sprens 2 

In-Sprens 2 

Pel'shon 1 

SpePshon 2 

Per'shon 1 

Sper'shon 1 

Spers-Eshon ... 1 

Pee'ther 2 

Iss-Pet 2 

Steh-Pet 3 

Plet 1 

Pret 1 

Pent 2 

Spent 1 

Ses-Pend 2 

Steh-Pend 2 



practiced 

spiritual-ity (Spers^Em, spiritualism— Spers^Kay, 
spiritualistic), 2 supreme, supremacy 

express-ive, spiritualize, 3 suppress 

expressed, spiritualist 

preliminary, 2 parallel, 3 parliament-ary 

superlative-ness 

poverty, 3 hopeful-ness, hope to have 

punish-ed-ment 

punishes-ments, 3 happiness 

spoken, 2 expensive-ness, 3 expansion-sive 

expense, 3 expanse-ible,(Spees 3 -Bee, expansibility) 

suspension-sive 

exception-al (Spee'shon ? -Bee, exceptionable) 

opposition, 2 position, 3 possession 

compliance, 3 appliance 

explain, explanatory, explanation (Splen-Bee, ex- 
plainable) 

perfect (Perf J -Ket, perfected), 2 Professor, prove, 
proof, 3 approve -al > 

pernicious-ness, 2 comprehensive-sion, 3 apprehen- 
sive-sion 

appearance, 2 comprehensible-ility, 3 apprehensible- 

ility 

supernatural-ness (Sprenst 3 , supernaturalist — 
Spers 3 -Em, supernaturalism) 

experience (Sprenst, experienced) 

inexperience, in (the) experience 

completion, 2 complexion, 3 application 

supplication 

perfection, 3 oppression 

expression, 3 suppression 

spiritualization 

upon thr, up thr (voc. with u) 

except-ed, 3 accept-ed-ation (Spet 3 -Bel, acceptable) 

stupid-ity 

complete (Plet J -El, completely), complied, 3 applied 

appeared, 2 pretty 

upon it 

spontaneous-ity, 2 expend-iture (Spen 2 -Ded, ex- 
pended), 3 expand (Spen 3 -Ded, expanded) 

suspend (Ses-Pen 2 -Ded, suspended) 

stupend nis-ness 
7* 



154: 



THE COMPENDIUM. 



Plent ... 

Splent . . 
Preft. . . . 

Prent . . . 

Sprent . . 

B. 

Bee .... . 

Iss-Bee . . 
Yuh 2 -Bee 
Bel 
Iss-Bel . . 

Ber 

Ben 

Yuh 2 -Ben 
Sbee'shon 

Blef 

Bel'shon 
Bee'ther . 
Bet .... . 

Sbet .... 

Bled 

Bred .... 

Beft 

Bend.... 

T. 
Tee 



Teest . . , 
Iss-Tee . 
Ses-Tee., 
Steh-Tee 
Ter 

Iss-Ter . 



1 compliant, 2 plaintiff {sometimes Plet in phr.), 

plenty-iful, 3 applicant 

2 explained, splendor, 3 supplant 

1 profit-ed-able, prophet (Preft^Kay, prophetic), 2 

provident-ce (Preft 2 -En, providential-ly) 

2 comprehend (Pren 2 -Ded, comprehended), 3 appre- 

hend (Pren 3 -Ded, apprehended) 

3 superintend-ed-ence-ent 



2 object— see § 142, R. 1 

1 subordinate-d-ion 

you be— see Rem. 2 

1 belong-ed, by all, 2 believe-d, (Blef 2 -Ray, believe]) 

1 sublime, sublimity 

1 liberty, by our, 3 brother-hood (Bren 3 , brethren) 

1 combine, combination, 3 to have been 

you have been — see Rem. 2 

1 exhibition 

2 belief, able to have 
2 obligation 

2 been thr— § 264, R. 4 

1 by what, by it, body (voc), 2 be it, be had, 

beauty-iful 
1 exhibit-ed 
1 build-ing, built, 2 bold-ness, behold, beheld 

1 a-broad, 2 remembered — see § 221, R. 1, b 

2 before it— § 221, R. 4 

1 combined, behind, 2 be not, abundant, abundance, 
3 bounty -iful 

1 time (usually Tee-Em in phr.), 2 take (Tee 2 -Ket. 
take it — Vert*-Kay, overtake — Pret 2 -Kay, par- 
take — Ned-Tee 2 , undertake — Art 2 -Kay, retake — ■ 
Bed 2 -Kay, betake — Ems^Kay, mistake), 3 took 
(but it "j"), 4 to it 

3 at first 

1 citizen, 3 satisfy-ied, satisfactory, as to it (Iss 2 -Tee) 

1 consist, 2 system-atic (Ses-Tees 2 , systemize), exist 

2 state (sometimes Stet in phr.) 

1 internal, 2 contract-ed (contract, Ter 2 -Ket — Ter'- 

tiv 2 , contractive), 3 it were, at our, attract-ed 
1 external-ivy, 2 construct-ed, extreme (Ster 2 -Tee, 



THE REPORTING STYLE. 



155 



Ses-Ter 2 

Ins-Ter 2 

Tier 2 

Trel 1 

Tef 1 

Iss-Tef 1 

Ten 1 

Tens 3 

Iss-Ten 1 

Iss-Tens 2 

SeS-Ten 1 

Ses-Tens 1 

Tee'shon 1 

Stee'shon 1 

Steh-Tee'shon.. 2 

Steh-Tee'tiv ... 2 

Telf 2 

Tien 3 

Tlem 2 

Tlerns 2 

Tref 1 

StreiY. 2 

In-Stref 2 

Tren 2 

Stren 1 

Ter'shon 2 

Ster'shon 2 

In-Ster'shon ... 2 

Tee'ther 2 

Tet 1 

Iss-Tet 1 

Ses-Tet 1 

Steh-Tet 1 

Teft 1 

Tent 1 

Iss-Tent 1 

Ses-Tent 1 

Steh-Tent 1 



extremity), 3 extract-ed (Ster'tiv 3 , extractive), 
as it were (Iss 2 -Ter) 

sister 

instruct-ed, (In-Ster-Ter, instructor) 

tolerate-d-ion (Tier-Bel, tolerable — Net-El 1 , intol- 
erable) 

trial, 2 control-led 

it ought to have, 3 it would have 

set off, 2 set forth 

contain, 2 taken, 3 attain (Tee 3 -Ment, attainment 
— Ten 3 -Bee, attainable), at one 

at once 

constancy, 2 extension-sive, 3 circumstantial 

extensible (Stees 2 -Bee, extensibility), 3 circumstance 

consistency, 2 sustain 

consistence, 2 existence 

tuition 

situation, 2 station, 3 satisfaction 

constitution-al ^ 

constitutive 

twelve-fth, it will have— § 201, K. 4 

at length 

tolerant (intolerant, Net-EP-Rent) 

tolerance 

contrive-ance, 3 attractive 

constructive-ness, 3 extra vagant-ce 

instructive-ness 

eternal, eternity, 3 at our own 

extrinsic-al, 2 strange-ness (Ster 2 -Jer, stranger) 

contraction, 3 attraction 

construction, 3 extraction 

instruction, in (the) construction 

to their (Steether 2 , as to their) 

it ought, 3 it had, it would, at it — § 221, R. 4 

as it ought, 2 stood, 3 as it would, as it had 

consisted, 2 existed 

constitute-d, 2 stated 

it ought to have had, 3 it would have had 

it ought not, contained, 2 it not, tend-ency, 3 at- 
tained, it had not, it would not 

constant, 2 extent, extend (Sten 2 -Ded, extended) 

consistent, 2 sustained, existent 

constituent 



156 

TLef t .... 
Treft .... 
Ter'shont 

D. 
Dee 

Yuh 2 -Dee 
Deest . . . 



Ses-Dee . 

Del 

Der 

Sder .... 
In-Sder . 
Def 

Sdef .... 
Ses-Def . . 

Den 

Yuh 2 -Den 
Sdens . . . 
Dee'shon 

Dlen 

Dlens . . . 

Dref 

Dren 

Drens . . . 
Der'shon , 
Sder'shon 
Dee'ther , 

Ded 

Yuh 2 -Ded 

Diet 

Dred 

Sdred 

In-Sdred . 



THE COMPENDIUM. 

2 it will have had 

1 contrived 

2 transient 



1 dollar, contradict-ed (Dee^Ket, contradictory — En- 
Dee 1 , uncontradicted), 2 defendant, 3 adver- 
tise- d-ment 

you do, you had 

1 contradistinct-ion (Deest^Ing, contradistinguish-ed 

— Deest 1 - Yee, contradistinctive — En-Deest 1 , in 
contradistinction), 2 distinct, distinction (Deest 2 - 
Ing, distinguish-ed — Deest 2 - Ing-Bee, distinguish 
able — Deest 2 - Yee, distinctive) 

2 is said 

1 idle-ness, 2 deliver-ed, delivery 

1 doctor, 2 direct-ed (Der-Ket, directory — Der-Ter, 

director), 3 dark 

2 consider-able-ness 
2 inconsiderable-ness 

1 divine-ity (Def ! -Ray, diviner — Def ! -Est, divinest — 

Def^Eshon, divination), 2 defense-sive, 3 ad- 
vance-d (Dees 3 -Ment, advancement) 

2 said to have 

2 is said to have 

1 denominate-d, denomination 
you have done — see R. 2 

3 saddens, sadness 

1 contradiction, 2 condition-al, 3 addition-al 

1 delinquent-cy 

1 delinquents, delinquencies, 2 deliverance 

1 derive, derivation 
3 darken-ed 

2 directness, 3 darkens, darkness 

1 derision, 2 direction, 3 duration 

2 consideration (In-Sder'shon, in (the) consideration) 
2 done thr, 3 down thr (voc. with ou) 

1 did, 3 had had, had it— § 221, R. 4 

you did, you had had — see R. 2 

1 delight ed 

1 deride-d, 2 dread-ed, 3 during it 

1 considered, considerate-ness 

1 inconsiderate-ness 



THE REPORTING STYLE 



157 



Sdent 

Yuh 2 -Dent... 
Dee'shond . . . 
Dreft 

CH. 
Chay 

Chel 

Cher 

Scher *. . 

Chler 

Chef 

Iss-Chef 

Chen 

Schen 

Cherf 

Iss-Chay'ther 

Chet 

Iss-Chet 

Chelt 

Chert 

Cheft 

Iss-Cheft 

Chent 

Iss-Chent 

J. 
Jay 

Jays 

Jayst 

Jay'ses 

Iss-Jay 

Jel 

Jels 

Jer 



2 accident-al 

you did not, yon do not, you had not- -see R. 2 

1 conditioned 

1 derived, derivative 



2 change-d, (Chay 2 -Bel, changeable) 3 charge-d 

(Chay 3 -Bel, chargeable) 
1 each will, 2 children, 3 much will 

1 cheer, each are, 2 chair, which are, 3 which were 

2 such are, 3 such were 

3 bachelor 

1 which ought to have, 2 which have, 3 which would 

have 
1 such ought to have, 2 such have, 3 such would have 

1 each one, 2 which one 

2 such a one 

1 cheerful-ness, 2 which are to have, which are of, 

3 which were to have, which were of 

2 such (an)other— § 264, R. 3 

1 which ought, which it, 3 which had, which would 

1 such ought, 3 such would, such had 

1 child-hood, which will it 

1 cheered, 2 which are had, 3 charity-able 

1 which ought to have had, 2 which have had, 3 

which would have had 
1 such ought to have had, 2 such have had, 3 such 

would have had 
1 which ought not, 3 which would not — (when Chet- 

Net would not be more convenient) 

1 such ought not, 3 such would not, such had not — 

(when Iss-Chet-Net would not be better) 

2 Jesus, 3 large (En- Jay 3 , enlarge-ment — En- Jed 3 , en 

larged) 

1 religious (Ar^Jays, irreligious) 

2 just-ice (sometimes Jays in phr.) 3 largest 
2 just as 

2 suggest-ed, suggestion 

2 angel (Jel-Kay, angelic — Ar 2 -Jel, archangel), 3 

evangel-ical 

3 evangelize 

2 danger (En- Jer, endanger), 3 larger, jury 



158 



THE COMPENDIUM 



Jers 


2 dangers-ous, jurisdiction 

1 Jehovah, 2 Jove, 3 juvenile-ity 

2 suggestive-ness 

1 religion (Ar^Jen, irreligion), 3 junior, imagine-nry- 

ation (Jen 3 -Bee, imaginable — En-Jen 3 , unimagin- 
able) 

2 generalize 


Jef 


Iss- Jef 

Jen 


Jens 


Jenst , . 


1 religionist, 2 generalized 

2 generation (Dee- jay'shon, degeneration — Kay-Jay'- 

shon, regeneration) 

3 imaginative-ness (En-Jay'tiv 3 , unimaginative) 
2 exaggeration 

2 exaggerate-d (Sjert Q -Eay, exaggeratory) 

3 imagined (En-Jend 3 , unimagined) 
2 justification 

2 generalization 

2 country, 3 to come 


Jay'shon 

Jay'tiv 

Sjer'shon 

Sjert 


Jend 


Jays-Esh'on . . . 
Jens-Esh'on . . . 

K. 
Kay 


Kayst 


1 commonest, 2 exterior 


Skays 


1 exquisite-nesg, 3 excuse-able 


JSkay'ses 

Kel 


2 success-ful 

3 calculate-d-ion (Kel 3 -Bel, calculable) 


Kels 


3 conclusive-ness 


Skel 


1 skill, 2 scale, 3 school 


Skels 


2 exclusive-ness, 3 seclusive, secluseness 


Ker 


1 correct-ed-ness, 2 occur, 3 cure, accuracy 


Kers 


1 corrects, 2 occurs, course, 3 cures, curious 


Sker 


1 scripture-al, describe-d, 3 secure 


In-Sker 

Kler 


1 inscribe-d, 3 insecure 

1 clear-ed-ness, 2 clerk (Kler-Kel, clerical), color-ed 

1 scholar, 2 secular 


Skier 


Ken 


2 question-ed (Ken 2 -Bee, questionable), countrymen, 

3 countryman 
1 consequential-ness 
1 consequence 

1 we can — see B. 2 

2 cover-ed 


Sken 


Skens 


Weh-Ken ..... 
Kef 


Skay'shon 

Kay'tiv 

Kays-Esh'on . . . 
Kief 


3 exaction 

3 active-ity 

1 acquisition, 2 accession 3 accusation 

1 call forth 


Sklef 


1 skillful 



THE KEPOKTING STYLE. 



159 



Kref 

Skref 

In-Skref 

Kren 

Krens 

Klerf . . . . 

Kershon 

Skel'shon 

Ker'skon 

Sker'shon 

In-Sker'shon . . . 

Ker'tiv 

Kay'ther 

Sket 

Weh-Ket 

Klet 

Sklet 

Kret 

Skret 

In-Skret 

Kent 

Skent 

Weh-Kent 

G. 

Gay 

Sgay 

Wen-Gay 

Gel 

Gels 

Sgler 

Ger 

Gef 

Weh-Gef 

Gen 

Gens 

Sgen 

Weh-Gen 

Sgay'shon 



1 corrective 

1 descriptive-ness 

1 inscriptive 

1 Christian-ity 

1 Christians-ize, 2 occurrence 

1 clairvoyant-ce, 2 colorific 
3 conclusion 

2 exclusion, 3 seclusion 
1 correction, 2 creation 
1 description 

1 inscription 

2 creative 

2 can tnr— § 264, R. 4 ; could thr (voc.)— § 264, R. 8 

2 sect-arian (Skets-Em, sectarianism), 3 exact-ed-ness 
1 we could — see R. 2 

1 quality -a tive, 3 conclude (Kel 3 -Ded, concluded) 
1 skilled, 2 exclude (Skel-Ded, excluded), 3 schooled, 
seclude (Skel 3 -Ded, secluded) . ^^^ 

1 creature, 2 occurred, court (sometimes Kay in phrase- 

writing), 3 cured, accurate-ness 

3 secured-ity 

3 unsecured, insecurity 

2 county (sometimes Kay in phr.), 3 countenance-d 
1 consequent 

1 we can not — see R. 2 



2 go, ago, 3 to go, to give 
1 signify-ied, significant-ce 

1 we give, we have given, we go (voc.) — see R. 2 

2 glory, glorify-ied 
2 glorious 

1 singular-ity 

1 degree 

2 goVern-ed-ment (Gef 2 -Ray, governor) 
1 we gave — see Rem. 2 

1 begin-ning, organ (Gen*-Kay, organic), 2 begun, 
3 began, to have gone 

1 organs-ize (Genst 1 , organized — Gen^Iss-Em, organ- 
ism— § 185, R. 1, b) 

1 significancy 

1 we have gone 

1 signification 



160 

Sgay'tiv . . . . 
Gens-Esh'on 
Gefshon . . . 

Glet 

Gret 

Geft 

Grend 

P. 

Ef 

Fel 

Eels 

Fler 

Fer . . . , . 



Frel 

Fen 

Ef shon . 

Flen . . . , 

Fren 

Fefshon 
Fer'shon 

Fet 

Fet-Steh 
Flet 

Fret . . . , 
Fend... 
Frent . . , 

V. 

Vee 

Vees 

Iss-Yee . , 



THE COMPENDIUM. 

1 significative 

1 organization 

2 glorification 
1 guilt-y 

1 degreed 

2 gave it 

3 grand-eur 



2 fact, 3 half, affect-ed (effect- ed, Ef a -Kay) 

1 feel, fall, fill, follow-ing, 2 fail, fellow, for all, 
3 fool 

1 false 

1 if all are, if all our, follower (FeP-Ar, feeler), 2 fail- 
ure, for all are, for all our, fuller 

1 if our, form-ed (Fer 2 -Ar, former-ly — Fer^Lays, 

formless — Fer 1 with the cow-dot, conform-ed — 
Fer^Bee, conformable — Fei a -Lay, formal-ity — 
En-Fer 1 , inform-ed-ant — Kay*-Fer, reform-ed — ■ 
En-Fer 3 , uniform-ity — Dee^Fer, deform-ed-ity — 
Per 2 -Fer, perform-ed-ance — Ters 2 -Fer, transform- 
ed), 2 free (Fer 2 -Lay, freely — FredVEm, free- 
dom), 3 for our 

2 from all 

1 if one, 2 for one 

1 fiction, 2 fashion (Efshon 2 -Bee, fashionable), 3 af- 
fection-ate 
1 fallen, fall in, 2 fell in, 3 philanthropy-ic-ist 
1 frequency, 2 from one, furnish-ed, furniture 
1 affliction, 2 flexion 
1 formation, 2 fraction, 3 fruition 
1 feature, 2 for it, for what (§ 221, K. 4), 3 future-ity 

3 footstep 

1 fault-y, filled, followed, feel it, 2 failed, felt, for all 

it, for all had 
1 from what (from it, Fer 2 -Met) 
3 found-ed-ation 
1 frequent 



3 halve 

1 visible-ility (En-Yees 1 , invisible-ility) 

2 Savior 



THE REPORTING STYLE. 



161 



Yuh 2 -Vee 

Ver 

Vers 

Yen 

Vee'shon 

Vren 

Ver'shon 
Vee'ther 
Ved . . . . 

Vert 

Vent 

Th. 
Ith , 

Iss-Thest 
Yuh 2 -Ith , 

Thef 

Thren... 

Thet 

Thret . . . 

TH. 

THel 

THrel . . . 
THef .... 



Iss-Tnen 
THlef . . . 
THref . . , 

Tnrelf . . 

Tiiet . .. 
Tared . 



you have — see E. 2 

3 favor-ed (Ver 3 -Bee, favorable — Ef 2 -Vert, favorite) 

1 converse-ant, 2 universe-al (Vers 2 -Tee, university 

— Vers 2 -Em, Universalism) , 3 averse 
1 evening, 2 have-ing been (when have preceding been 

can not be omitted according to § 249) 

1 conviction (with the con-dot), 2 vocation, 3 avocation 

2 every one 

1 conversion, 2 version, 3 aversion 
1 of thr 

1 of it, a-void-ed-ance, 2 have had, have it, evi- 
dent-ce, 3 halved 

1 over it (§ 221, R. 4), convert-ed, 2 virtue (Vert 2 - 

Lay, virtually — Vert 2 -Es, virtuous — Verts 2 -Lay, 
virtuously), 3 avert-ed 

2 have not (when Vee 2 -Net is not better) 



3 thousand-th ^ 

2 south-east (Iss-ThesVRen, south-eastern) 
you think — see R. 2 

3 thankful-ness 
2 through one 
2 think it 

1 authority-ative, 2 through it 



3 thou wilt 

2 there will, they are all 

1 they ought to have (THef ^Dee, they ought to have 

had) 2 they have (THef 2 -Dee, they have had), 
3 they would have (Tnef 3 -Dee, they would have 
had) 

2 southern (Iss-Tnen 2 -Ray, southerner) 
2 they will have, 3 thou wilt have 

1 there ought to have (Tnret^Ben, there ought to 

have been), 2 they are to have, there have 
(Tner 2 -Ben, there have been), 3 there would have 
(Tnred 3 -Ben, there would have been) 

2 they are all to have, there will have (THrel 2 -Ben f 

there will have been) 
l'they ought, 3 they would, they had, though it 
1 there ought, 2 there it, 3 there would, there had 



162 

Tnent .. 

THlent . . 
Tnrent . . , 

Tnee'tHer 



Tiiee'tHern 

B. 

Es-Steh 

Yuh 2 -Es 

Es'ef 

Ess-Iss-Eshon 

Est 

Es'tern 

Z. 

Zef 

Zee'ther 

Zed 

Zeft 

SH. 
Ish 

Yuh 2 -Ish .... 
Slier 

Shef 

Isht 

Shred 

Sheft 



ZH. 

Zher . 
Zherd 



THE COMPENDIUM. 

1 they ought not, 2 then it, then had, S *he"< would 
not, they had not, than it (221, E. 4) 

1 they will not, 3 thou wilt not 

1 on either hand, there ought not, 2 on th othe* 
hand, 3 there would not, there had not 

1 within thr, that thr (voc. with a), 2 the other, th*» 

thr (voc. with e), 3 than thr (voc. with a) wit> 
out thr (voc. with ou) 

2 the other one 



2 assist-ed-ance (Es 3 -Stent, assistant) 
you see, you say (voc.) — see E. 2 

3 useful-ness 

2 cessation, 3 secession 
1 east, 2 so it, so had 
1 eastern 



2 was to have, 3 used to have 

1 is thr, 2 was thr, 3 h-as thr 

2 hesitate-d-ation 
2 was to have had 



3 issue (Ish s -Dee, issued) 

you shall— see B. 2 

1 wisher, she were, 2 assure (SherVEns, assurance), 

3 share (Sher 3 -Ar, sharer) 
1 wish to have, she ought to have (Isht^Ben, she 

ought to have been), 2 shall have (Ish 2 -Ben, 

shall have been), 3 she would have (Isht 3 -Ben, 

she would have been) 

1 she ought, wish it, 2 shall it, 3 she would, she had 

2 assured, 3 shared 

1 she ought to have had (Isht^Net, she ought not), 
2 shall have had (Ish 2 -Net, shall not), 3 she 
would have had (Isht 3 -Net, she would not) 



3 measure (Em-Zher 3 , immeasurable) 
3 measured (En-Zherd*, unmeasured) 



THE REPORTING STYLE 



163 



L. 

Lay 

Iss-Lay 

Lef 

Welf 

Lay'ther . . , 

Let 

Iss-Let 

Iss-Led 

Welt 

Lay'shon . . . 

R 

Wer 

Eel 

Eels 

Eef 

Werf 

Sarn 

Wern 

Ray'shon . . . 

Een-Esh'on . 

Ard 

Iss--Ret 

Wert 

Reft 

Sarnd 

Weh'wernt . 
Arder 

Em 

Iss-Em 

Wem 

Mel 

Mer 

Merl 

Smen % 



2 will-rug 1 

3 salvation 

2 will have, willing to have (sometimes love-ing in 
phr. ; as Lef-Ged, love of God — Lef-Kend, lov- 
ing-kindness) 

1 we will have 

2 let thr— 264, R. 8 

1 little, 2 will have had 

1 as little 

2 seldom 

1 while it, we will have had 

2 revelation, 3 revolution 



2 work-ed, 3 with our 

1 real-ity, 2 relate-d-ion-ive (Rel'tive for relative when 

a noun), 3 rule-d (Rel 3 -Ray, ruler) 
1 realize 
1 arrive-al, reveal-ecl, 2 are to have, are of, revolve-d 

1 we are of, we are to have, 2 whereof, 3 aware of 

2 concern (sometimes Iss-Ren in phr.) 

1 we are in, 2 workman, 3 with our own 

1 irrational -ity, 2 reformation (RayVFer, reform-ed), 

3 ration-al-ity 
1 ornamentation 

1 ordinary (Ster 2 -Ard, extraordinary) 

2 certain- ty (sometimes Iss-Art in phr.) 
2 were it, where it, where had 

1 arrived, 2 hereafter 

2 concerned (sometimes Iss-Rend in phr.) 
1 we were not v 

1 order (sometimes Aid in phr.) 



3 home (Em 3 -Lay, homely), to him 
1 similar-ity, 2 some, 3 consume 
1 with me, with my, 2 with him 

1 million- th, 2 promulgate-d-ion, 3 family 

2 mercy -iful 

1 immoral-ity, 2 moral-ity 

2 examine-ation (Ker 2 -Smen, cross-examine-ation), 

some one 



164 



THE COMPENDIUM. 



Wem/en 


1 women, we mean, 2 woman 


Em'shon 


2 mention (Wem/shon 1 , we mention) 


Iss-Em/shon . . . 


2 consumption 


Emb 


2 may be 

1 simple-icity (Iss-Emp^Eay, simpler — Iss-Emst 1 , 


Iss-Enip 




simplest), 2 somebody, exemplify-ied-ication, 




3 example 


Stemp 


2 extemporaneous-ness (extemporary, Stemp 2 -Eay- 




Eay — extemporize, Stemp 2 -Eays) 


Wemb 


1 we may be 


Emb'en 


2 may have been 


Wemb'en 


1 we may have been 


Emp'shons 


2 impatience 


Em'ther 


1 might thr— § 264, E. 8 


Sem'tiier 


2 some other 


Sem/tiiem 


2 some other one 


Met 


1 might-y 

2 some time 


Smet 


Smed 


3 consumed 


Wemt 


1 we might, we met, we made, 2 were made, were met 


Mert 


1 immortal-ity (Mert-Lays 1 , immortalize), 2 mortal- 

ity 




Merit 


2 amount-ed, mental-ity, 3 movement 
2 examined (Ker 2 -Sment, cross-examined) 


Sment 


Wem'ent 


1 we may not, we meant, 2 were meant 


Em'shond 


2 mentioned 


Wem'shond .... 


1 we mentioned, 2 were mentioned 


Emp'end 


1 imponderable-ility, 2 impenetrable-ility 


Emp'shont 


2 impatient, 3 impassioned (Emp-Ish 3 , impassionate) 


En 


1 never — see Eem. 15 


Ens 


2 commence-ment 


En'ses 


1 United States, 2 commences-ments, necessary 
1 instinct-ive, 2 commenced, next (sometimes Ens in 
phr.) 


Enst 




Steh-En 


2 stenography- er-ic 


Ses-En 


1 season-ed, 2 as soon 


"Wen 


1 we know, with no, 2 were no, were any (voc.) 


Nel 


1 in all, 2 only, 3 annual 


Nels 


1 unless, 2 only as, no less 


Ner 


3, owner, in our 


Nerl 


1 nearly, nor will 



THE REPORTING STYLE. 



165 



Nen 

Sneii , 

Wen'ea . . . . , 

En'shon 

Nerns 

En'ther 

Wen'j^er 

En'J h ern 

Net 

Nets-Eshon . . 

Ned 

Went 

Neft 

Yv r en / ent 

Nernt 

ITG. 
Ing 

Iss-Ing 

Ing 'en 

Iss-Ing'en . . . 

Ing'ger 

Ing'end 

W. 

Wayf 

"Way'ter 

Way'therther 

Waynd 

Way'weh . . . . 
Weh/weh . . . 
Wuh/wuh . . . 

"Way 'y eh . . . . 
Weh'yeh . . . . 
Wuh'yuh.... 

Y. 

Yeh 



in one, any one, 3 no one 

synonyni-ous, is known (none), 2 has known (none) 

we have known, we have none, 2 were known, 
were none, 3 were no one 

information (En-Fer 1 , inforrn-ed-ant) 

ignorance 

any other, 2 another, 3 no other — § 264, Pv. 3 

wonder-ful, one (an)other 

intrinsic-al, any other one, 2 another one, 3 no 
other one 

in it, in what, interior (Net-El 2 , interiorly), 3 an- 
terior 

intercession 

hundred- th, 3 owned 

when it, when had, 2 went, one would, one had 

innnite-ty {infinitude, Neft 1 with Dee disjoined) 

on (the) one hand 

ignorant 



1 English, 3 a-long, length (Ing 3 -Ith, lengthy) 

1 single-d, 2 as long (see § 245) 
3 lengthen 

2 sanguine (Iss-Ing'en-Ray, sanguinary) 

3 longer 

1 England, 3 lengthened 



1 why have 

1 water, with thr 

2 whether thr— § 264, R. 9 

3 wound (to hurt) 

1 we were, we would, we with 

1 with what, 2 were we, were with, were what 

1 what we-re, what with, what would, 2 would we, 

would what 
1 we yet, 

1 with you, 2 were you, were yet 
1 what you, what yet, 2 would you, would yet 



1 year-s 



166 

Yeld ... 
Yuh .... 
Yay'weh 
Yeh'weh 
Yuh'wuh 
Hay .... 



h-tick 

C (downward) 
s (upw'd) or i 

Vowels. 



Si 



THE COMPENDIUM. 

1 yield-ed 

2 you (sometimes Yen in phr.), 3 to you 

1 ye were, ye would 

2 you were 
2 you would 

2 eh, 3 ah, holy (Hay 3 -Ray, holier — Hayst", holies* 

Hay 3 -Ens, holiness) 
2 he— see § 146, B. 5 
2 he have 
he would 



to a 

as to a-D ( o- as a-n) 

and all, and will — 178, R. 4 

and are, and our — 178, R. 5 

and of, and if— 201, R. 4 

and what— 201, R. 6 

and would — do. 

and our own — 201, R. 7 

to the 

as to the ( ^ as to) 

as the 

all of, all have— 201, R. 4 

all would— 201, R. 6 

of all— 178, R. 4 

to all — do. 

of our— 178, R. 5 

to our — do. 

to ours — 178, R. 5, e 

to ourselves — do. 

to have 

6fwhat-201,R. 6 



THE EEPOETIKG STYLE 



167 



I 
I 





to what— 201, E. 6 

to what h-is, to what has— 201, R. 6, b 

of our own— 201, E. 7 

awful-ness, awe of — 201, E. 4 

or of, or have, or if — 201, E. 4 

but of, but have, but if— 201, E. 4. 

or not— 201, E. 5. 

but not — do. 

but are not — 201, E. 5 

who will— 178, E, 4 

who are — 178, E. 5 

ought to have — 201, E. 4 

who have, who of — 201, E. 4 

on all— 178, E. 4 

on our — 178, E. 5 

should have— 201, E. 4. 



Rem. 1. In the Corresponding Style, a number of word-signs are formed by the 
omission of vowels simply ; but, in the Reporting Style, in which the omission of 
vowels is the general rule, such imperfection is not regarded as constituting a word- 
sign ; and no word is properly included in the list of sign-words, whose sign has not 
some imperfection of consonant expression, or peculiarity of outline or position. 
Tor 1 for tree or try, unlike Ter 1 for internal, is not a word-sign, but merely an un- 
vocalized outline. A principle of classification which would include, in the list of 
word-signs, Jen 3 for June, Pen 3 for happen, Jay 1 for joy, would very unnecessarily 
enlarge the list. A large number of word-signs, such as those for ' by all, for their, 
more than,' etc., might have been indicated in the preceding list; but it has seemed 
best to omit such signs, except when their insertion was required for special rea- 
sons. For the principles governing the formation of such signs, see the portions of 
the Compendium indicated by the following references : § 178, E. 4 and 5 ; 201, E. 
4-S ; 211 ; 221, R. 4 ; 232, 13. It has also seemed best to omit many signs which, in 
due time, the student will naturally form in analogy with some of the signs of this 
list. For instance, in analogy with Pef 3 for hopeful-ness, hope to have, the reporter 
will naturally write Tref 2 for truthfuUness, Tref x for try to have, Tref 3 for it were 
to have, Jef x for joyful-new, Kref 2 for careful-ness. For the principles governing 
the formation of derivatives from word-signs, see § 252, E. 5. 

Eem. 2. ' You? Joined as a Hook.— {a) In phrase-writing, the sign for you may 
sometimes be joined as an initial hook on the left-hand side of a descending letter; 
thus, J Nr you have been, '" 1" you do, you had, --^— you shall, -V- you have, 

mmJ 7— you think, (p) When ymi commences a phrase, its sign, according to § 245, 



168 THE COMPENDIUM. 

rests on the line, and thus serves to distinguish the Tuh-hook signs, when standing 
alone or commencing a phrase-sign, from the Ar-hook signs. In Yuh-Vee and 
Yuh-Ith there is an additional distinction arising from joining the hook on the con- 
vex side of the curve, (c) Even when a Yuh-hook is taken from the position on 
the line ; as in such phrase-signs as Ef ^Yuh-Ben, if you have been ; Ef i-Yuh-Dee, 
if you do ; it is easily distinguished from the Ar-hook by a reference to the context 
and the other portions of the phrase-sign. 

Eem. 3. ' Wt y Prefixed by a Hook.— (a) It is allowable in a few cases to represent ice 
by joining Well as a hook to Kay and some other horizontal letters which, accord- 

ir.g to the general rule, would not take the "Way-hook ; thus, _ _ we can, wo 

could, we give, we have given, ' we go, ' we may be. Signs thus 

formed do not in practice conflict with corresponding El and Ar hook signs. (?/) We 
is generally joined by the Way-hook to a following word commencing with Em, En, 
Lay, or Eay ; thus, Wer^Ker, we require — Wens^Eay, we answer— WeP-Kay, we 
like— Wemst 1 , we must. 

Eem. 4. Eshon Added to the En-Hook. — The reporter occasionally adds Eshon to 
an En-hook ; as in Een^Eshon, ornamentation. 

Eem. 5. Termination Ly.—An adjective-sign word may usually be written for an 
adverb formed from it by the addition of ly ; as spiritual for spiritually ; partic- 
ular for particularly ; unless the expression of the termination is found to be 
necessary for the sake of distinguishing between different words, as in writing inte- 
riorly to distinguish it from not. 

Eem. 6. The Ef-IIook on Curves. — In several of the word-signs of the preceding 
list it is indicated that an Ef or Vee hook should be written on a curve ; as in the 
signs for ' thankful-ness, they ought to have, they will have, was to have, will have,' 
etc., and the student should carefully distinguish Thef, Shef, Neft, etc., which indi- 
cate single signs, from Ith-Ef, Ish-Ef, En-Fet, etc., which denote two signs joined. 

Eem. 7. Art, Hast, Wert, Shalt, etc., belonging to what is called' the solemn style, 
may be expressed the same as the corresponding are, has, were, shall, etc., belong- 
ing to the usual style of speech. 

Eem. 8. Past Tense. — It is usually allowable and advantageous for the reporter, 
when a stroke or more can be saved thereby, to represent the past tense of a verb 
by the form of the present tense ; writing, for instance, Ses-Pend instead of Ses- 
Pen-Ded, for suspended ; Stend, instead of Sten-Ded, for extended; and depend- 
ing upon the context for the distinction between the tenses, {o) This principle may 
be employed in very many cases in representing the past tense of verbs not belong, 
ing to the list of sign-words ; as in writing JSTet^Met for intimate'!, Ent 2 -End for 
intended, Ter 2 -Ment for tormented, Eay 2 -Gerd for regarded, Kay 2 -Net for ac- 
quainted, Eays-Eet for resorted. 

Eem. 9. Distinctions. — (a) A word whose outline, when unvocalized, would be 
liable to be mistaken for a word-sign, should have at least its accented vowel insert- 
ed, (b) As a sloping or perpendicular half-length can be written through or just 
below the line, a distinction may be made between 'it had,' 'it would.' etc., by 
writing the signs for ' it had, they had,' etc., through the line, and the signs for ' it 
would, they would,' etc., below the line. For the practiced reporter, however, such 
a distinction is unnecessary. 

Eem. 10. In, In As, In His, etc., Prefixed.— {a) The In-hook may frequently be 
joined to a word, in its natural position, to prefix in (and sometimes in the or in 
a~n); thus, In-Sem 1 , in similar— In-Sem 2 , in some -In-Spret 1 , in (the) spirit — In- 
Skret 1 , in (the) secret— In-Semb 2 , in (an) exemplification, (b) In his or in as may, 



THE REPORTING STYLE. . 169 

in a few cases, be prefixed by an In-hook and the circle ; thus, Ins-Ker'shon 2 , iD 
his creation— Ins-Prens 1 , in his appearance— Ins-Gret 2 , in as great. 

Rem. 11. ' One'' Added.— One may be added to a considerable number of words, 
by an En-hook ; thus, Smen 2 , some one— Nen 1 , any one— Nen 3 , no one (in the third 
position, to distinguish it from none, Nen 2 )— Ten 3 , at one— Thee'thern 2 ,' the other 
one— En'thern 2 , another one— En'thern 3 , no other one— En-Ten 2 , into one— Bet 1 - 



Wen'en, between one— Bee 2 -En-Then, beneath one. 

Eem. 12. Hooks Omitted. — The hook of the signs for been, can, there, their, they 
are, or other may be omitted when, if written, it would prevent the formation of a 
desired phrase-sign ; thus, Tees 2 -Bees-Dee, it has been said — Ment 2 -Ther (like 
Ment 2 -Zee), may not thr — Tee 2 -Kay-Nel, it can only — Bee-Bel, been able — Bef 2 - 
Ther (like Bef-Zee), before their, at** before other. (b) A hook is occasionally omit- 
ted from other outlines, to secure a special advantage in phrase-writing ; thus, 
Thee^Yuh, within you — Art 3 -Yuh, around you— Em 3 -Slay, human soul-Em 3 - 
Mend, human mind — Men 3 -Kay-Kay, instead of Men Ker 2 -Kay, human character. 

Rem. 13. 'It Ought to Have, It Would /Rive,' etc.— (a) The outlines Tef x , Tef 3 , 
for ' it ought to have,' ' it would have,' are regarded as unvocalized Tauv, Twoov ; 
in the first case, it being represented by t; ought by au ; and have by v ; to being 
omitted, according to § 250, 2. In the case of Twoov, it is represented by t; would 
by icdo ; and have by v. Upon the same principle are formed the signs for ' they 
ought to have, they would have ; which ought to have, which would have,' etc. 
(b) Did have, which occurs rarely, may, in like manner, be written with Def x , that 
is, ' di' have.' (c) Coidd have may be written Kef 2 when Ked-Vee is not better, as 
in ' could have had,' Ked 2 -Yed ; or as in ' could have been,' Ked 2 -Ben. 

Eem. 14. ' TV Added by Halving.— Bled may be written for 4 able to;' as pre- 
ceding 'understand ;' when to can not be better implied according to § 250, 2 ; as in 
writing ' able to be,' Bel-Bee— able to make, Bel 2 -Em— able to have, Blef 2 . 

Eem. 15. Never.— {a) In phrase-writing, never may always be represented by En, 
being written in the first position when it commences a phrase-sign ; thus, Wen 1 - 
Ben, we never have been — Ken 2 -En-Bee, can never be — Ther 2 -En-Ken, there never 
can — En 1 -Ish, never shall— En 1 -Ken, never can. (b) Even when never, for any 
reason, is written separately, it may be represented by En 1 , instead of En-Yee 2 , in 
the writing of the practiced reporter. 

Eem. 16. Forth. — Forth, when following a verb ending in a straight full-length 
line, may be represented by an Ef-hook; thus, Steh-Pef, step forth — Kief 1 , call 
forth, (b) In other cases, it may be written with Ef-Ith ; thus, Kels^Ef-Ith, calls 
forth— Send 2 -Ef-Ith, send forth, (c) The practiced reporter, in many cases, when 
forth can not be expressed by an Ef-hook, will not hesitate to represent it by Ef, 
trusting to memory and the context to distinguish it from for. 

Eem. 17. Tor D Omitted. — A t or d sound expressed by halving may be omitted 
in some cases, principally from verbs, to secure advantages which would otherwise 
be lost ; as of adding have by an Ef-hook ; thus, Tref l for ' tried to have' as well as 
1 try to have;' the difference of time being distinguished by the context. 

Eem. 13. Ef-IIook on JBrif Way and Fay.— The careful writer may, if he pre- 
fers, add ' have' to a brief Way or Yay, by an Ef-hook ; as, TVehf *, we have— Wehf 2 , 
were to have— Yuhf 2 , you have. Of or If may be added in the same manner ; aa, 
Wehf 2 , were of- Wuhf 1 , what if— Yehf 2 , yet if. 

Eem. 19. Sign- Words /Sometimes Written in Full.— A sign-word is sometimes 
written in full, if the full form secures a convenience in phrase-writing which could 
not be secured otherwise ; thus, Em 2 -En -Tee-Ems, many times — Yer 2 -Em-Chay, 
very much— Def Mvay'ses-Tens, divine existence. 

Eem. 20. Order of the Word-Signs. — The preceding list of word-signs is calcu- 

8 



170 



THE COMPENDIUM 



lated for the use of the reader, while the following one is designed for the use of the 
writer. In the preceding list, the word-signs are presented in the following general 
order: — 1. Simple Signs. 2. Simple Signs with their various modifications in tho 
order of their explanation in the Compendium ; namely, Circles, Loops, Yuh and 
"Wen Joined, Initial Hooks, Final Hooks, Widening, Lengthening, and Halving. 

Rem. 21. In the preceding and the following list, " phr."= "phrase-writing;" 
and " voc." (= vocalize) is used to denote the insertion of the vowel of the word, or, 
of several vowels, the most prominent one. 



§267. BEPOBTTNG SIGN-WOBDS. 



A. 

able to — § 266, E. 14 
able to have, Blef 2 
abroad, Bred 1 
abundant-ce, Bend 2 

V accept-ed-ation, Spet 3 
acceptable, Spet 3 -Bel 
accession, Kays 2 -Eshon 
accident-al, Sdent 2 

\ accuracy, Ker 3 
accurate-ness, Kert 3 
accusation, Kays 3 -Eshon 
acquisition, Kays^Eshon 

V active-ity, Kay'tiv 3 
addition-al, Dee'shon 3 

\advance-d, Def 3 
advancement, Dees 8 -Ment 
advertise-d, Dee 8 
advertisement, Dee 8 
affect-ed, Ef 3 

effect-ed, Ef 2 -Kay 
affection-ate, Ef shon 3 
affliction, Fel'shon 1 
ago, Gay 2 
ah, Hay 3 

all have, all of, Y _ 

all would, ^ 

along, Ing 3 
amount-ed, Ment* 

and all, and will, e_ 
and are, and our, <r - 
and if, and of, __, 
and our own, „ 

and what, 



and would, -, 

angel, Jel 2 

archangel, Ar a -Jel 
angelic, Jel 2 -Kay 
•|. annual, Nel 3 

another one, En'thern 2 

no other one, En'thern 9 
anterior, Net 3 
any one, Nen 1 
any other, En'ther 1 
any other one, En'thern 1 
appear, Per 1 
appearance, Prens 1 
appeared, Pert 1 
appears, Pers 1 
appliance, Plens 3 
applicable-ility , Pel 3 -Kay 
applicant, Plent 3 
application, Pel'shon 8 
applied, Pelt 3 
apply, Pel 3 
apprehend, Prent 3 
apprehended, Pren 3 -Ded 
apprehensible-ility, Prens* 
apprehension, Pren 9 
apprehensive, Pren 8 
approval, Pref 3 
approve, Pref 3 
are of, Bef 2 
are to have, Bef 2 
arrive-al, Bef 1 
arrived, Beft 1 
as it had, Iss-Ted 3 
as it ought, Iss-Tet 1 
as it were, Iss 2 -Ter _ > 
as it would, Iss-Ted 3 
as little, Iss-Let 1 
as long, Issuing 



THE EEFOKTING STYLE 



171 



as soon, Ses-En 2 
as thr, Zee'ther 3 

o& to a, -p- 

as a-n, o_ 

as to it, Iss 2 -Tee 

as to the, .--^~ 

as to, o N 

as the, so 

as to their, Iss-Tee'ther 2 
assistance, Es 2 -Steh 
assistant, Es 2 -Stent 
assist-ed, Es 2 -Steh 
assurance, Sher 2 -Ens 
assure, JSher 2 
assured, Shert 2 
at first, Teest 3 
at length, Tien 3 
at one, Ten 3 
at once, Tens 3 
at our, Ter 3 
at our own, Tren 8 
at it, Tet 3 
attain, Ten 3 
attainable, Ten 3 -Bee 
attained, Tend 3 
attainment, Tee 3 -Ment 
attract-ed, Ter 3 
attraction, Ter'shon 3 
attractive, Trei 3 
authoritative, Thret 1 
authority, Thret 1 
averse,- Vers 3 
aversion, Ver'shon 3 
avert-ed, Vert 3 
avocation, Vee'shon 3 
a-void-ed-ance, Ved 1 
aware of, Werf 3 

awe of, l 

awful-ness, do. 

B. 

bachelor, Chler 3 
be had, Bed 2 
be it, Bet 2 
be not, Bent 2 
teauty-iful, Bet 2 
been thr, Bee'ther 2 



before it, Beft 2 
began, Gen 3 
begin-ning, Gen 1 
begun, Gen 2 
behind, Bend 1 
beheld, behold, Beld 2 
belief, Blef 2 
believe-d, Bel 2 
believer, Blef VEtay 
belong-ed, Bel 1 
body, Bed 1 (voc.) 
bold-ness. Bled 2 
bounty-iful, Bent 3 
brethren, Bren 3 
broad, Bred 1 
brother-hood, Ber 3 
build-ing, Bled 1 
built, Blet 1 

but are not, 3 

but have, but if, but of, L 

but it, T" 

but not, j 

by all, Bel 1 
by it, Bet 1 
by our, Ber 1 
by what, Bet 1 

C. 

call forth, Kief 1 

calculable, Kel 3 -Bel 

calculate-d-ation, Kel 3 

can thr, Kay'ther 2 

certain-ty, Iss-Ret 2 ; sometimes 

Iss-i^rt in phr. 
cessation, Ess 2 -Iss-Eshon 
chair, Cher 2 
changeable, Chay 2 -Bel 
change-d, Chay 2 
charge-d, Chay 3 
chargeable, Chay 3 -Bel 
charitable, Chert 3 
charity, Chert 3 
cheer, Cher 1 
cheered, Chert 1 
cheerful-ness, Cherf ] 
child, Chelt 1 
childhood, Chelt 1 
children, Chel 2 
Christian-ity, Kreu 1 



172 



THE COMPENDIUM. 



Christians-ize, Krens 1 

circumstance, St ens 3 

circumstantial, Sten 3 

citizen, Stee 1 

clairvoyant-ce, Kierf l 

clear-ed-ness, Kler 1 

clerical, Kler 2 -Kel 

clerk, Kler 2 

color-ed, Kler 2 

colorific, Klerf 2 

combination, Ben 1 

combine, Ben 1 

combined, Bend 1 

commence, Ens 2 

commenced, Enst 2 

commences, Enses 2 

commencement, Ens 2 

commencements, Enses 2 

commonest, Kayst 1 

complete, Plet 1 

completely, Plet^El 

completion, Pershon 1 

complexion, Pershon 2 

compliance, Plens 1 

compliant, Plent 1 

complied, Plet 1 

comply, Pel 1 

comprehend, Prent 2 

comprehended, Pren 2 -Ded 

comprehensible-ility, Prens 2 

comprehension-ive, Pren 2 

concern, Iss-Arn 2 ; sometimes Iss- 

Ren 2 in phr. 
concerned, Iss-Arnd 2 ; sometimes 

Iss-Rend in phr. 
conclude, Kled 3 
concluded, Kel 3 -Ded 
conclusion, KePshon 3 
conclusive-ness, Kels 3 
condition-al, Dee'shon 2 
conditioned, Dee'shond 1 
consequence, Skens 1 
consequent, Skent 1 
consequential-ness, Sken 1 
consider-able-ness, Iss-Der 2 
considerate-ness, Iss-Dred 1 
consideration, Iss-Dershon 2 
considered, Iss-Dred 1 
consist, Ses-Tee 1 
consisted, Ses-Ted 1 
consistence, Ses-Tens 1 
consistency, Ses-Ten 1 



consistent, Ses-Tent 1 
constancy, Iss-Ten 1 
constant, Iss-Tent 1 
constituent, Steh-Tent 1 
constitute-d, Steh-Tet 1 
constitution-al, Steh-Tee'shon 2 
Constitutive, Steh-Tee'tiv 2 
construct-ed, Ster 2 
construction, Ster'shon 2 

in (the) construction, In-Ster'- 
shon 2 
constructive-ness, Stref 2 
consume, Iss-Em 3 
consumed, Iss-Med 3 
consumption, Iss-Em'shon 2 
contain, Ten 1 
contained, Tend 1 
contract-ed, Ter 2 
contract, Ter 2 -Ket 
contraction, Ter'shon 2 
contractive, Ter'tiv 2 
contradict-ed, Dee 1 

uncontradicted, En-Dee 1 
contradiction, Dee'shon 1 
contradictory, Dee^Ket 
contradistinct-ion, Deest 1 

in contradistinction, En-Deest 4 
contradistinctive, Deest ! -Vee 
contradistinguish-ed, Deest ! -Ing 
contrive-ance, Tref 1 
contrived, Treft 1 
control-led, Trel 2 
converse-ant, Vers 1 
conversion, Ver'shon 1 
convert-ed, Vert 1 
conviction, Vee'shon 1 with the con 

dot 
correct-ed, Ker 1 
correction, Ker 'shon 1 
corrective, Kref * 
correctness, Ker 1 
corrects, Kers 1 
could have— 268, R. 13, c 
could thr, Kay'ther 2 , voc. 
countenance-d, Kent 3 
country, Kay 2 
countryman, Ken 3 
countrymen, Ken 2 
county, Kent 2 ; sometimes Kay in 

phr. 
course, Kers 2 
court, Kert 2 ; sometimes Kay in phr 



THE EEPOETING STYLE. 



173 



cover-ed, Kef 2 
creation, Ker'shon 2 
creative, Ker'tiv 2 
creature, Kret 1 
cure, Ker 3 
cured, Kred 3 
cures, Kers 3 
curious, Kers 3 

D. 

danger, Jer 2 

endanger, En-Jer 2 
dangers-ous, Jers 2 
dark, Der 3 
darken-ed, Dren 3 
darkens, Drens 3 
darkness, Drens 3 
defendant, Dee 2 
defense, Def 2 
defensive, Def 2 
degree, G-er 1 
degreed, Gred 1 
delight-ed, Diet 1 
delinquent, Dlen 1 
delinquency, Dlen 1 
delinquents-cies, Dlens 1 
deliver-ed, Del 2 
deliverance, Dlens 2 
delivery, Del 2 
denominate-d, Den 1 
denomination, Den 1 
deride-d, Dred 1 
derision, Deration 1 
derivation, Dref 1 
derivative, Dreft 1 
derive, Dref 1 
derived, Dreft 1 
describe-d, Sker 1 
description, Sker'shon 1 
descriptive-ness, Skerf l 
did, Ded 1 

did have— 2G6, E. 13, b 
direct-ed, Der 2 
direction, Der'skon 2 
directness, Drens 2 
director, Der 2 -Ter 
directory. Der 2 -Ket 
distinct-ion, Deest 2 
distinctive, Deest 2 - Vee 
distinguish-ed, Deest 2 -Ing 
distinguishable, Deest -Ing-Bee 



divination, Def^Eshon 

divine-ity, Def 1 

diviner, Def x -Eay 

divinest, Def X -Est 

doctor, Der 1 

dollar, Dee 1 

done thr, Dee'ther 2 

down thr, Dee'ther 3 , voc. with ou 

dread-ed, Dred 2 

duration, Der'shon 3 

during it, Dred 3 



E. 

each are, Cher 1 
each one, Chen 1 
each will, Chel 1 
east, Est 1 
eastern, Es'tern 1 
eh! Hay 2 
England, Ing'end 1 
English, Ing 1 
eternal, Tren 2 
eternity, Tren 2 
evangel-ical, Jel 3 ^ 
evangelize, Jels 3 
evening, Yen 1 
every one, Vren 2 
evidence, Ved 2 
evident, Ved 2 
exact-ed, Sket 3 
exaction, Skay'shon 3 
exactness, Sket 3 
exaggerate-d, Sjert 2 
exaggeratory, Sjert 2 -Eay 
exaggeration, Sjer'shon 2 
examine-ation, Smen 2 

cross-examine-ation, Ker 2 -Smen 
examined, Sment 2 

cross-examined, Ker 2 -Sment 
example, Iss-Emp 3 
exasperate-d-ion, Ses-Pee 3 
except-ed, Spet 2 
exception-al, Spee'shon 2 
exceptionable, Spee / shon 2 -Bee 
exclude, Skelt 2 
excluded, Skel-Ded 2 
exclusive-ness, Skels 2 
exclusion, Skershon 2 
excuse-able, Skays 3 
exemplify-ied-ication, Iss-Emp 2 
exhihit-ed, Sbet 1 



174 



THE COMPENDIUM 



exhibition, Sbee'shon 1 

exist, Ses-Tee 2 

existed, Ses-Ted 2 

existence, Ses-Tens 2 

existent, Ses-Tent 2 

expand, Spend 3 

expanded, Spen 3 -Ded 

expanse-ible, Spens 3 

expansibility, Spees 3 -Bee 

expansion-sive, Spen 3 

expect-ed, Spee 2 

unexpected, En-Spee 2 

expectation, Spee 2 

expend-iture, Spent 2 

expended, Spen 2 -l)ed 

expense, Spens 2 

expensive-ness, Spen 2 

experience, Sprens 2 

inexperience, In-Sprens 2 

in (the) experience, In-Sprens 2 

experienced, Sprenst 2 

explain, Splen 2 

explainable, Splen--Bee 

explanation, Splen 2 

explanatory, Splen 2 

explained, Splend 2 

explicit-ness, Spels 1 

exploration, Spier 2 

explore-d, Spier 2 

expressed, Sperst 1 

express-ive, Spers 1 

expression, Sper'shon 1 

exquisite-ness, Skays 1 

extemporaneous, Stemp 2 

extemporary, Stemp 2 - Ray-Kay 

extemporize, Stemp ? -Eays 

extend, Iss-Tend 2 

extended, Iss-Ten 2 -Ded 

extensibility, Iss-Tees 2 -Bee 

extensible, Iss-Tens 2 

extension-si ve, Iss-Ten 2 

extent, Iss-Tent 2 

exterior, Kayst 2 

external-ity, Ster 1 

extract-ed, Ster 3 

extraction, Ster'shon 3 

extractive, Ster'tiv 3 

extravagant-ce, Stref 3 

extreme, Ster 2 

extremity, Ster 2 -Tee 

extrinsic-al, Stren 1 



F. 

fact, Ef 2 

fail, Fel 2 

failed, Flet 2 

failure, Fler 2 

fall, FeP 

fallen, Flen* 

fall in, Flen* 

false, Fels 1 

family, Mel 3 

fashion, Efshon 2 

fashionable, Efshon 2 - Bt>e 

fault-y, Fleti 

favor-ed, Ver 3 

favorable, Ver 3 -Bee 

favorite, Ef 2 -Vert 

feature, Fet 1 

feel, FeP 

feeler, Fel*-Ar 

feel it, Fleti 

felt, Flet 2 

fell, Fel 2 

fell in, Flen 2 

fellow, Fel 2 

fiction, Efshon 1 

fill, FeP 

filled, Fleti 

flexion, Fel'shon 2 

folio w-ing, Fell 

followed, Flet 1 

follower, Fler 1 

fool, Fel 3 

footstep, Fet 3 -Steh 

for all, Fel 2 

for all are, Fler 2 

for all had, Flet 2 

for all it, Flet 2 

for all our, Fler 2 

for it, Fet 2 

for one, Fen 2 

for our, Fer 3 

for what, Fet 2 

form-ed, Fer 1 

conform-ed, cow-dot-Fer 1 
conformable, Fei a -Bee 
deform-ed-ity, Dee^Fer 
inform-ed-ant, En-Fer 1 
perform-ed-ance, Per 2 -Fei 
reform-ed, Bay 2 -Fer 
transform-ed, Ters 2 -Fer 
uniform-ity, En-Fer 3 



THE KEPOETIInU STYLE. 



175 



formal-ity, Fer^Lay 
formation, Fer 'shorn 1 
former-ly, Fei^-Ar 
formless, Fer^Lays 
forth— 266, R. 16 
found-ed, Fend 3 
foundation, Fend 3 
fraction, Fer'shon 2 
free, Fer £ 
freedom, Fred-'-Em 
freely, Fer 2 -Lay 
frequency, Fren 1 
frequent, Frent 1 
from all, Frel 2 
fuller, Fler 2 
from one, Fren 2 
from what, Fret 1 

from it, Fer 2 -Met 
fruition, Fer'shon 3 
furnish-ed, Fren' 3 
furniture, Fren 2 
future, Fet 3 
futurity, Fet 3 

g. 

gave it, Geft 2 

generalize, Jens 2 

generalized, Jenst 2 

generalization, Jens 2 -Eshon 

generation, Jay'shon 2 

degeneration, Dee 2 -Jay'shon 
regeneration, Kay 2 - Jay'shon 

glorified, Gel 2 

glorification, Gel'shon 2 

glorify, Gel 2 

glorious, Gels 2 

glory, Gel 2 

go, Gay 2 

govern-ed-ment, Gef 2 

governor, Gef 2 -Eay 

grand-eur, Grend 3 

guilt-y, Gleti 

H. 

had had, Ded 3 
had it, Ded 3 
half, Ef 3 
halve, Vee 9 
halved, Ved 3 
happy, Pee 3 



happiest, Peest 3 

happiness, Pens 3 

has known (none), Snen 2 

has thr, Zee'ther 3 

have-ing been, Yen 12 , when have 
preceding been can not be omit- 
ted according, to § 249. ' 

have had, Ved 2 

have it, Ved 2 

have not, Vent 2 , when Vee 2 -Net is 
not better 

he, h- tick— see § 146, R. 5 

he have, c downward 

he would, x , (upward) or ^ 
hereafter, Eeft 2 
hesitate- d, Zed 2 
hesitation, Zed 2 
holier, Hay 3 -Kay 
holiest, Hayst 3 
holiness, Hay 3 -Ens 
holy, Hay 3 
home, Em 3 
homely, Em :? -Lay 
hopeful-ness, Pef 3 
hope to have, Pef^ 
hundred-th, Ned 2 

I. 

idle-ness, Del 1 
if all are, Fler 1 
if all our, Fler 1 
if one, Fen 1 
if our, Fer 1 
ignorance, Kerns 1 
ignorant, Nernt 1 
imaginable, Jen 3 -Bee 

unimaginable, En-Jen 8 
imagine-ary-ation, Jen 3 
imaginative-ness, Jay'tiv 3 

unimaginative, En- Jay'tiv* 
imagined, Jend 3 

unimagined, En- Jend 3 
immoral-ity, Merl 1 
immortal-ity, Mert 1 
immortalize, Mert-Lays 1 
impassioned, Emp'shond 3 

impassion ate, Emp-Ish 3 
impatience, Emp'shons 2 
impatient, Emp'shont 2 
impenetrable, Emp'ent 2 



176 



THE COMPENDIUM 



impenetrability, Emp'ent 2 

impoiiderable-ility, Emp'ent 1 

in all, Nel 1 

in (the) consideration, Ins-Dershon 2 

in contradistinction , En-Deest 1 

in it, Net* 

in one, Nen 1 

in our, Ner 3 

in what, Net 1 

inconsiderable-ness, In-Sder 2 

inconsiderate-ness, In-Sdred 1 

infmite-y, Neft 1 

infinitude, Neft 1 Dee disjoined 

information, En'shon 1 

inform-ed-ant, En-Fer 1 

inscribe-d, In-Sker 1 

inscription, In-Sker'shon 1 

inscriptive, In-Skref 1 

insecure, In-Sker 3 

insecurity, In-Skret 3 

instinct-ive, Enst 1 

instruct-ed, In-Ster 2 

instruction, In-Ster'shon 2 

instructive-ness, In-Stref 2 

instructor, In-Ster 2 -Ter 

intercession, Nets 2 -Eshon 

interior, Net 1 

interiorly, Net-El 2 

internal, Ter 1 

intrinsic- al, En'tern 1 

irrational-ity, Kay'shon 1 

is done, Sden 2 

is known (none) , Snen 1 

is said, Ses-Dee 2 

is said to have, Ses-Def a 

is thr, Zee'ther 1 

issue, Ish 3 

issued, Ish 3 -Dee 

it had, Ted 3 

it had not, Tent 3 

it not, Tent 2 

it ought, Teti 

it ought not, Tent 1 

it ought to have, Tef 1 

it ought to have had, Teft 1 

it were, Ter 3 

it will have, Tlef 2 

it will have had, Tleft 2 

it would, Ted 3 

it would have, Tef 3 

it would have had, Teft 3 

it would not, Tent 3 



Jehovah, Jef 1 

Jesus, Jay 2 

Jove, Jef 2 

junior, Jer 3 

jurisdiction, Jers 2 

jury, Jer 3 

just as, Jay ses 2 

just-ice, Jayst 2 ; sometimes Jays 

in phr. 
justification, Jays 2 -Eshon 
juvenile-ity, Jef 3 

L. 

large, Jay 3 

enlarge, En-Jay 3 

enlarged, En-Jed 3 

enlargement, En-Jay 3 
larger, Jer 3 
largest, Jayst 3 
length, Ing 3 
lengthen, Ing'en 3 
lengthened, Ing'end 3 
lengthy, Ing 3 -Ith 
let thr, Lay'ther 2 — 264, E. 8 
liberty, Ber 1 
little, Let 1 
long, Ing 3 
longer, Ing'ger 3 
love-ing, sometimes Lef in phr. ; 

as, Lef 2 -Ged, love of God — Lef 2 - 

Kend, loving kindness 

M. 

may be, Emb 2 

may have been, Emb'en 2 

measure, Zher 3 

immeasurable, Em-Zher 3 
measured, Zherd 3 

unmeasured, En-Zherd 3 
mental-ity, Ment 2 
mention, Em'shon 2 
mentioned, Em'shond 2 
mercy-iful, Mer 2 , 
might thr, Brother 1 — 264, E. 8 
might-y, Met 1 
million-til, Mel 1 
moral-ity, Merl a 
mortal-ity, Mert 2 






THE KKPOSIIHG STYLE 



177 



movement, Ment 3 
much will, Chel 3 

N. 

nearly, K'erl 1 

necessary, Enses 2 

never, En'— 260, R. 15 

next, Enst? ; sometimes Ens in phr. 

no less, Nels 2 

no one, Nen 3 

no other, En'ther 3 

another, En'ther 2 
no other one, En'thern 3 

another one, En'thern 2 
nor will, Nerl 1 



0. 

object, Bee 2 — 142, E. 1 
obligation, Bel'shon 2 
occur, Ker 2 
occurred, Kred 2 
occurrence, Krens 2 
occurs, Kers 2 

of all, * 

of it, Vet* 

of our, ^ 



of our own, 

of thr, Vee'ther 1 

of what, ^ 

on all, ' 

on either hand, Tnrend 1 

on our, J 

on the other hand, Tnrend 2 
on (the) one hand, Wen'end 2 
one (an) other, Wen'ther 2 
one had (would), Went 2 
only, Nel 2 
only as, Nels 2 

unless, Nels 1 
opposition, Pees^Eshon 
oppression, Per'shon 3 
order, Arder 1 ; sometimes Ard in 

phr. 
ordinary, Ard 1 

extraordinary, Ster 2 -Ard 
organ, Gen 1 



organic, Gen ! -Kay 

organism, Gens ! -Em — 185, R. 1, b 

organization, Gens^Eshon 

organize, Gens 1 

organized, Genst 1 

organs, Gens 1 

or have, or if, or of, ** 

ornamentation, Ren 2 -Eshon 

or not, J 

ought to have, c 

over it, Yert 1 
OAvnedJ Ned 3 
owner, Ner 3 



P. 

parallel, Prel 2 

parliameht-ary, Prel 3 

party, Pee 3 

patent-ed, Pee 3 

patentable, Pee 3 -Bel 

people-d, Pel 2 

perfect, Perf 1 

perfected, Perf ] -Ket 

perfection, Per'shon 1 

pernicious-ness, Pren 1 

philanthropic, Flen 3 

philanthropist, Flen 3 

philanthropy, Flen 3 

plaintiff, Plent 2 ; sometimes Plet 

in phr. 
plenty-iful, Plent 3 
position, Pees--Eshon 
possess, Pee'ses 2 
possessed, Pee / ses 2 -Tee 
possession, Pees 3 -Eshon 
possessive, Pee / ses 2 -Vee 
possessor, Pee / ses 2 -Ptay 
possible, Pees 1 
possibility, Pees 1 
possibilities, Pee'ses 1 
posterior, Pees 2 
poverty, Pef l 
practicable-ility, Per 3 -Ket 
practical, Per 3 
practice, Per 3 
practices, Pers 3 
practiced, Perst 3 
preliminary, Prel 1 
present, Pers 2 



8* 



178 



THE COMPENDIUM. 



pretty, Pret 2 
professor, Pref 2 
profit-able, Preft 1 
profited, Preft 1 
pronmlgate-d-ion, Mel 2 
proof, Pref 2 
proper, Per 1 

improper, Em-Per 1 
prophet, Preft 1 
prophetic, Preft^Kay 
propriety, Per 1 

impropriety, Em-Per 1 
prove, Pref 2 
provident-ce, Preft 2 
providential-ly, Preft 2 -En 
punish-ed-ment, Pen 2 
punishes-ments, Pens 2 



Q. 

quality-ative, Klet 1 
question-ed, Ken 2 
questionable, Ken 2 -Bee 

E. 

ration-al-aiity, Eay'shon 3 
real-ity, Eel 1 
realize, Eels 1 
reform-ed, Eay^Fer 
reformation, Eay'shon 2 
relation, Eel 2 
relative, adj., Eel 2 
relative, noun, Eel'tiv 2 
relate-d, Eel 2 
religion, Jen 1 

irreligion, Ar J -Jen 
religionist, Jenst 1 
religious, Jays 1 

irreligious, Ar ] -Jays 
remembered, Bred 2 — 221, E. 1, b 
reveal-ed, Eef l 
revelation, Lay'shon 2 
revolution, Lay'shon 3 
revolve-d, Eef 2 
rule-d, Eel 3 
ruler, Eel 3 -Bay 



S. 
saddens, Sdens 3 



sadness, Sdens 8 

said to have, Sdef 2 

salvation, Slay 3 

sanguine, Iss-Ing'en 2 

sanguinary, Iss-Ing'en 2 -Eay 

satisfaction, Stee'shon 3 

satisfactory, Stee 3 

satisfy-ied, Stee 3 

Savior, Iss-Vee 2 

scale, Skel 2 

scholar, Skier 1 

school, Skel 3 

schooled, Sklet 3 

scripture-al, Sker 1 

season-ed, Ses-En 1 

secession, Es 3 -Iss-Eshon 

seclude, Skelt 3 

secluded, Skel 3 -Ded 

secluseness, Skels 3 

seclusion, SkePskon 3 

seclusive, Skels 3 

sect-arian, Sket 2 

sectarian ism, Ske ts 2 -Em 

secular, Skier 2 

secure, Sker 3 

secured, Skret 3 

security, Skret 3 

seldom, Iss-Led 3 

set forth, Iss-Tef 2 

setoff, Iss-Tef 1 

shall have, Shef 2 

shall have been, Ish 2 -Ben 

shall have had, Skeit 2 

shall it, Isht 2 

shall not, Ish 2 -Net 

share, Sher 3 

shared, Sherd 3 

sharer, Sher 3 -Ar 

she had, Isht 3 

she ought, Isht 1 

she ought not, Isht J -Net 

she ought to have, Shef l 

she ought to have been, Isht ] -Ben 

she ought to have had, Sheft 1 

she were, Sher 1 

she would, Isht 3 

she would have, Shef 3 

she would have been, Isht 3 -Ben 

she would have had, Sheft 3 * 

she would not, Isht 3 -Net 

should have / downward 



THE EEPOKTING STYLE. 



179 



significance, Sgay 1 
significancy, Sgen 1 
significant, Sgay 1 
signification, Sgay'shon 1 
significative, Sgay'tiv 1 
signify-ied, Sgay 1 
similar-ity, Iss-Em 1 
simple-icity, Iss-Emp 1 
simpler, Iss-Emp ! -Ray 
simplest, Iss-Emp'est 1 
single-d, Iss-Ing 1 
singular-ity, Sgler 1 
sister, Ses-Ter 2 
situation, Stee'shon 1 
skill, Skel 1 
skilled, Sklet 1 
skillful, Sklef 1 
so had, Est 2 
so it, Est 2 
some, Iss-Em 2 
somebody, Iss-Ernb 2 
some one, Smen 2 
some other, Sem'ther 2 
some other one, Sem/thern 2 
some time, Smet 2 
south-east, Iss-Thest 2 
south-eastern, Iss-Thes 2 -Ren 
southern, Iss-Then 2 
southerner, Iss-Then 2 -Ray 
speak, Spee 1 
speakable, Spee 1 -Bel 
speaker, Spee^Ker 
special-ty-ity, Spee 3 

especial, Es 2 -Pee 
spiritualism, Spers 1 -Em 
spiritualist, Sperst 1 
spiritualistic, Spers ] -Kay 
spiritual-ity, Sper 1 
spiritualize, Spers 1 
spiritualization, Spers^Eshon 
splendor, Splend 2 
spoken, Spen 1 
spontaneous-ity, Spent 1 
state, Steh-Tee 2 ; sometimes Stet 

in phr. 
stated, Steh-Ted 2 
station, Stee'shon 2 
stenography-er-ic, Steh-En 2 
step by step, Steh-Pee 2 -Steh 
stood, Iss-Ted 2 
strange-ness, Stren 2 
stranger, Ster 2 -Jer 



stupendous-ness, Steh-Pend 2 

stupid-ity, Steh-Pet 3 

sublime-ity, Sbel 1 

subordinate-d-ion, Sbee 1 

success-ful, Iss-Kay'ses 2 

such a one, Schen 2 

such (an) other, Iss-Chay'ther 2 

such are, Iss-Cher 2 • 

such had, Schet 3 

such had not, Iss-Chent 3 , when 

Schet 3 -Net is not better 
such have, Iss-Chef 2 
such have had, Iss-Cheft 2 
such ought, Iss-Chet 1 
such ought not, Iss-Chent 1 , when 

Iss-Chet !-Net is not better 
such ought to have, Iss-Chef 1 
such ought to have had, Iss-Cheft 1 
such were, Iss-Cher 3 
such would, Iss-Chet 3 
such would have, Iss-Chef 3 
such would have, had, Iss-Cheft 3 
such would not, Iss-Chent 3 , when 

Iss-Chet 3 - Net is not better 
suggest-ed-ion, Iss-Jay 2 
suggestive-ness, Iss-Jef 2 
superintend-ed-ent-ence, Sprent 3 
superior-ity, Spee 1 
superlative-ness, .Sprel 2 
supernatural-ness, Spren 3 
supernaturalist, Sprenst 3 
supernaturalism, Spers 3 -Em 
supplant, Splent 3 
supplication, SpePshon 2 
supplies, Spels 2 
supply, Spel 2 
suppress, Spers 3 
suppression, Sper'shon 3 
supreme-acy, Sper 2 
suspect-ed, Ses-Pee 2 
suspend, Ses-Pend 2 
suspended, Ses-Pen 2 -Ded 
suspension-si ve, Ses-Pen 2 
suspicion-cious, Ses-Pee 1 
sustain, Ses-Ten 2 
sustained, Ses-Tend 2 
synonym-ous, Snen 1 
system-atic, Ses-Tee 2 
systemize, Ses-Tees 2 



180 



THE COMPENDIUM 



take, Tee 2 
take it, Tee 2 -Ket 

betake, Bed 2 -Kay 

mistake, Ems^Kay 

overtake, Vert ] -Kay 

partake, Pret 2 -Kay 

retake, Art 2 -Kay 

undertake, Ned-Tee 2 
taken, Ten 2 
tend-ency, Tend 2 
thankful-ness, Thef 3 
than it, THent 2 — 221, E. 4 
than thr, THee'ther 3 , voc. with a 
that thr, THee'ther 1 , voc. with a 
the other, THee'ther 2 
the other one, THee'them 2 
then had, then it, Tnent 2 
then thr, THee'ther 2 , voc. with e 
there had, Tnerd 3 
there had not, THrend 3 , when 

THerd 3 -Net is not better 
there have, THerf 2 
there have been, THer 2 -Ben 
there it, Tuert 2 
there ought, Tiiert 1 
there ought not, Tirrent 1 , when 

THret^Net is not better 
there ought to have, THref 1 
t/iere ought to have been, THret^Ben 
there will, THrel 2 
there will have, THrelf 2 
there will have been, THrel 2 -Ben 
there would, THerd 3 
there would not, THrend 3 , when 

Trired 3 -Net is not better 
there would have, THerf 3 
there would have been, Tnerd 3 -Ben 
they are all, Tnrel 2 
they are all to have, THrelf 2 
they are to have, THref 2 
they had, Tued 3 
they had not, Tuent 3 
they have, Trief 2 
they have had, THef 2 -Dee 
they ought, THet 1 
they ought not, THent 1 
they ought to have, THef 1 
they ought to have had, THef ] -Dee 
they will have, THelf 2 
they will not, THlent 1 



they would, Tned 3 

they would have, Tnef 3 

they would have had, THef 3 -.T)ee 

thev would not, Tnent 3 

think it, Thet 2 

thou wilt, THel 3 

thou wilt have, THelf 3 

thou wilt not, THlent 3 

though it, THet 3 

thousand- th, Ith 3 

through it, Thret 2 

through one, Thren 2 

time, Tee 1 ; usually Tee-Em in phr, 

to a, — j— 

to all, ^ 

to come, Kay 3 
to give, Gay 3 
to go, Gay 3 

to have, ^ 

to have been, Ben 3 
to have gone, Gen 3 
to him, Em 3 
to it, Tee 4 

to our, c\ 

to ours, <so 

to ourselves, <no 

to the, -\- 

to their, Tee'ther 8 

to what, ^ 

to what h-as (h-is), ^ 

to you, Yuh 3 

tolerable, Tler 2 -Bel 

intolerable, Ent-El 1 
tolerance, Tlerns 2 
tolerant, Tlern 2 

intolerant, Ent-EP-Eent 
tolerate-d-ion, Tier 2 
took, Tee 3 

transient, Ter'shont 2 
trial, Trel 1 
tuition. Tee'shon 1 
twelve-fth, Telf 2 



U. 

United States, Enses 1 
universe- al, Vers 2 
Universalism, Vers 2 -Em 



THE KEPOKTING STYLE 



181 



university, Yers 2 -Tee 
unless, Nels 1 

only as, Nels 2 
unsecured, In-Skret 3 
upon it, Pent 2 
upon thr, Pee'ther 2 

up thr, Pee'ther 2 , voc. with u 
used to have, Zef 3 
useful-ness, Es'ef 3 

V. 

version, Yer'shon 2 
virtual, Yert 2 -Lay 
virtue, Yert 2 
virtuous, Yert 2 -Es 
virtuously, Yerts 2 -Lay 
visible-ility, Yees 1 

invisible-iiity, En- Yees 1 
vocation, Yee'shon 2 
void-ed-ance, Yed 1 

W. 

was to have, Zef 2 

was thr, Zee'ther 2 

was to have had, Zeft 2 

water, Way'ter 1 

we are in, Wern 1 

we are of, Werf 1 

we are to have, Werf 1 

we can, Weh-Ken 1 

we can not, Weh-Kent 1 

we could, Weh-Ket 1 

we gave, Weh-Gef l 

we give, "VYeh-Gay 1 

we go, Weh-Gay 1 , voc. 

we have given, Weh-Gay 1 

we have gone, Weh-Gen 1 

we have known (none), Wen'en 1 

we know, Wen 1 

we made, Wemt 1 

we may be, Weh-Emb 1 

we may have been, Weh-Emb'en 1 

we may not, Wem'ent 1 

we mean, Wem'en 1 

we meant, Wem'ent 1 

we mention, Wem'shon 

we mentioned, Wem'shond 1 

we met, Wemt 1 

we might, Wemt 1 

we were, Way'weh 1 



we were not, Well' wemt 1 

we will have, Welf 1 

we will have had, Welt 1 . 

we with, Way'weh 1 

we would, Way'weh 1 

we yet, Way'yeh 1 

went, Went 2 

were any, Wen 2 , voc. 

were it, Wert 2 

were known, Wen'en 2 

were made, Wemt 2 

were meant, Wem'ent 2 

were mentioned, Wem/shond 2 

were met, Wemt 2 

were no, Wen 2 

were n5 one, Wen'en 3 

were none, Wen'en 2 

were we, Weh'weh 2 

were what, Weh'weh 2 

were with, Weh'weh 2 

were you, Weh'yeh 2 

were yet, Weh'yeh 2 

what we-re, Wuh'wuh 1 

what with, Wuh'wuh 1 

what would, Wuh'wuh 1 

what you, Wuh'yuh 1 

what yet, Wuh'yuh 1 

when it (had), Went 1 

whereof, Werf 2 

where it (had), Wert 2 

whether thr, Way'therther 2 

which are, Cher 2 

which are had, Chert 2 

which are of, Cherf 2 

which are to have, Cherf 2 

which had, Chet 3 

which had not, Chent 3 , when 

Chet 3 -Net is not better 
which have, Chef 2 
which have had, Cheft 2 
which it, Chet 1 
which ought, Chet 1 
which ought not, Chent 1 , when 

Chet^Net would not be better 
which ought to have, Chef 1 
which ought to have had, Cheft 1 
which one, Chen 2 
which were, Cher 3 
which were of, Cherf 3 
which were to have, Cherf 3 
which will it, Chelt 1 
which would, Chet 3 



182 



t ii i: c oil p e » d i u m . 



which would have, Chef 3 
which would have had, Cheft* 
which would not, Chent 3 , when 

Chet 3 -Net would not be better 
while it, Welti 
who are, ? 
who have, who of, c 
who will, /> 

why have, Wayf 1 

will-ing, Lay 2 

will have, Lef 2 

will have had, Let 2 

willing to have, Lef 2 

wisher, Sher 1 • 

wish it, Isht 1 

wish to have, Shef 1 

with him, Wem 2 

with me (my), Wem 1 

with no, Wen 1 

with our, Wer 3 

with our own, Wera 3 

with thr, Way'ther 1 

with what, Weh'weh 1 

with you, Weh'yeh 1 

within thr, THee'ther 1 

without thr, Tiiee'ther 3 , voc. with 

ou 
woman, Wem/en 2 
women, Wem/en 1 
wonder-ful, Wen'der 2 



work-ed, Wer- 
workman-en, Vv'crn 9 
would we, Wuh /wuh 2 
would what, Wuh'wuh 2 
would you, Wuh'yuh 2 
would yet, Wuh'yuh 2 
wound (to hurt), Waynd 3 

Y. 

year-s, Yeh 1 

ye were, Yay'weh 1 

ye would, Yay'weh 1 

yield- ed, Yeld 1 

you, Yuh 2 ; sometimes Yeh in piir. 

you be, Yuh 2 -Bee 

you did, Yuh 2 -Ded 

you did not, Yuh 2 -Dent 

you do, Yuh 2 -Dee 

you do not, Yuh 2 -Deht 

you had, Yuh 2 -Dee 

you had had, Yuh 2 -Ded 

you had not, Yuh 2 -Dent 

you have, Yuh 2 -Vee 

you have been, Yuh 2 -Ben 

you have done, Yuh 2 -Den 

you say, Yuh 2 -Es, voc. 

you see, Yuh 2 -Es 

you shall, Yuh 2 -Ish 

you think, Yuh 2 -Ith 

you were, Yeh/weh 2 

you would, Yuh 7 wuh 2 



Rem. 1. All Thr, Witlb All, etc. — In analogy with the mode of writing ' of thr, 
of it, for all, for all it,' Layther 1 may be written for ' all thr ;' Let 1 , for ' all it ;' Tnel 1 , 
for 'with all;' Tidet 1 , for 'with all it;' Tnel'ther 1 , for 'with all thr;' Tnlef 1 , for 
'with all of;' Ish'ther 3 , for ' should thr;' Isht 3 , for 'should it;' En'ther 2 , voc., for 
'under thr;' Ar'ther 1 , for 'or thr, or (the) other, or another;' Art 1 , for 'or it, or 
had (would) ;' Arf 1 , for ' or would have ;' THet 1 , for ' with it ;' Tnret 3 , for ' thou art.' 

Eem. 2. ' Us' Added. — 'Us' may usually be best joined to a preceding word by a 
circle or by enlarging a circle; thus, Gays 1 , give us — Gay'ses 1 , gives us — Pens 2 , 
upon us— Bel'ses 2 , bless us— Es 1 -Ses, sees us — Tee 1 -Chay / ses, teaches us. 

Eem. 3. (hir, in phrase- writing, may be written with Bay, when it can not be 
more conveniently expressed otherwise ; thus, Thee / ses 2 -Bay, this is our. 

Eem. 4. ' Is, As, 1 etc., Prefixed. — (a) A circle-signword may frequently be pre- 
fixed to a word commencing with a circle, by enlarging the circle ; thus, Ses 2 -En, 
as soon — Sesi-Emp, is simply — Ses 1 -Mets,ls sometimes— 8es 2 -Mets, has sometimes 
— Ses^Lays, his soul's — Ses^En, is his own. (&) The sign-word thus prefixed usu- 
ally determines the position of the sign, in accordance with § 245. 



THE R£POETIx\G STYLE 



183 



§ 268. REPORTING CONTRACTIONS. 



A. 



abridge-ment, Ber^Jay 
abrupt-ness, Bee 2 -Ray-Pet 

abstinent-ce, Bee 2 -Sten 
abstract-ed, Bee 3 -Ster 
abstraction, Bee 3 -Ster / slion 
absurdity, Bees--Ard 
abject, Bee 2 - Jay 
acceptable, Spet 3 -Bel 
acquaint-ed-ance, Kay 2 -Net - 
admeasurement, Dee 2 -Zher 
administer, Dee 3 -Iss-Ter 
administration, Dee 3 -lss-Tcr'shon 
admit- ted- tanee, Dee^Met 
admonisb-ed-tion, Dee 3 -Men 
advancement, Dees 3 -Ment 
adventure-d-r, Def 3 -Enter 
agency, Jay 2 -Ess 
aggrandize -ment, Grend-Zee~ 
aggregate-d-ion, Ger 2 -Gay 
agriculture, Ger 2 -Kel 
allegory -ical, El 2 -Ger 
aimighty-ness, 'All' -Met 1 
ambiguity, Emb ] -Gay 
ambitious-ly-ness, Emb-Ish 1 
America, Em 2 -Kay 
American, Enr-Ken 
Anglo- Saxon, Ings 2 -En 
animal kingdom, En 2 -Kay 
animal nature, En 2 -Net 
animal world, En 2 - Eld 
anniversary, Vers 2 -Ray . 

antagonism, Ent 3 -Gays-Em 
antagonist-ic, Ent 3 -Gay 
anticipate-d, Ents-Pet 1 
anticipation, Ents-Pee 1 
antique-ity, Enti-Kay 
any body, En J -Bed 
approach- able, Per 2 -Chay 
approximate-d-ion, Per 1 -Kays 
arbitrary, Ar 3 -Bet 
archangel, Ar 2 -Jel 
archbishop, Ray 2 -Chay-Bee 
architect-ure-ural, Ar 2 -Ket 
aristocracy-tic, Ar 2 -Stee 
arithme tic-al-ian , Ray 2 -Ith-Me t 
arrange-ment, Ray 2 -En-Jay 



artinclal-ity, Ret 1 -Ef 
ascend-ed-ancy, Es 2 -End 
ascendant, Es 2 -Nent 
ascribe, Es 2 -Ker 
ascription, Es-Ker'shon 
aspect, Es 3 -Pee 
aspire-ation, Es 2 -Per 
assemble -y-ed, Es 2 -Em 
assignment, Es 2 -Ment 
assimilate-d-ion, Es^Em 
astronomy-ical-er, Est 2 -Ren 
Atlantic Ocean, Tee'-'-Lent-Kay'- 

shon 
atmosphere-ic-ical, Tees 2 -Fer 
atonement, Tee 2 -Ment 
attainment, Tee 3 -Ment 
attraction of gravitation, Ter 3 -Ger 
augment-ed-a,tion, Gay 2 -Ment 
auspicious- ly-nelss, Es^Pee 
authentic, Thent 2 -Kay, or Thent 2 
authenticity, Thent 2 -Est, or Thent" 
avenge, Vee 2 -Jay 
average, Vee 3 -Jay 

B. 

back, Bee 3 -Kay, or Bee 3 
backgammon, Bee 3 -Gay-Men 
background, Bee 3 -Grend 
bankable, Bee 3 -Ing-Bee 
bank-rupt-cy, Bee 3 -Ing 
baptize-d-ist-ism, Bee 2 -Pee 
barbarity, Ber 2 -Bret 
barometer-rical, Ber 2 -Emter 
beginner, Gen J -Ar 
benefaction, Ben 2 -Efshon 
benefactor, Ben 2 -Ef 
benefactress, Ben 2 -Ef-Rays 
beneficent-ce, Ben 2 -Ef 
beneficial, Bee 2 -Ef 
benevolent-ce, Bee 2 -En-Vee 
benignant, Bee 2 - En-Gay 
Benj amin, Bee 2 -En- Jay 
bespeak, Bee ] -Spee 
bigot-ed-ry, Bee ! -Get 
billingsgate, Bels'-Get 
biograpliy-er-ic-al, Bee 2 -Ger 
bishop-ric, Bee^Ish 



184 



THE COMPENDIUM 



blindfold, Bled^Fled 
blind man, Bled ] -Men 
British America, Bret 1 -Em 
broken-hearted, Ber 9 -Ken-Ret 
burdensome, Bcr : -Dees-Em, or 

Berds' ? -Em 
burning-glass, Bee 2 -Ray-Gels 
busybody, Bees 1 -Bed 

C. 

calculable, KeP-Bel 
California-n, Kief-Ray 1 
canon-ical, Kay 2 -Nen 
capacious-ty, Kay-Pee 2 
capricious-ly-ness, Kay-Per 1 
carpenter-ry, Ker-Pent 2 
casuist-ic-ry, Kays-Est 2 
category-ical, Ket'-Ger 
catholic-ism, Kay-Ith 3 
celestial, Slay 2 -Es 
certificate, Iss-Ret T -Ef 
challenge-d, Chel 2 -Jay 
challenger, Chel 2 -Jer 
chamber, Chay ? -Ber 
changeable, Chay-Bel 
chapter, Chay 3 -Pet, or Chay 3 
character, Ker 2 -Kay 
characteristic, Ker 2 -Kayst 
characteristics, Ker 2 -Kay'ses 
characterizes, do. 

chargeable, Chay 3 -Bel 
chaste-ity, Chayst 2 
chemical-ly-istry, Kay 2 -Em 
cMmera-ical, Kay ] -Mer 
chirography-ical, Kei^-Ger 
collateral , Kay-Lay'ter 2 
collect-ed-ion, Kel' 2 -Kay 
comfort- ed-able, Ef 2 -E,et 
commercial, Kay 2 -Mer 
conformable, Fer-Bee 
conjecture-d-al, Jay 2 -Kay 
conjunctive-ure, Jay 2 -Ing 
conscientious-ly-ness, Ish'-'-En 
conservative, Iss-Ray 2 -Vee 
conspicuous-ly-ness, Spee 2 -Kays 
constitutionality, Steh-Tee'shon 2 - 

Tee 
contaminate-d-ion, Tee 2 -Men 
contemplate-d-ion,/ Tee 2 -Emp 
contiguity, Tee 2 - Gay 
contingency, Tee ? -En-Jay 



contradictory, Dee^Ket 
contradistinctive, Deesfr-Vee 
contradistinguish-ed, Deest T -Ing 
contumacious-ly-ness,Tee 2 -Em-Ish 
criminate- d-ion-al, Ker ] -Men 
cross-examination, Ker--Smen 
cross-examined, Ker--Sment 
culpable-ility, Kel-Pec 
cupidity, Kay-Pet 1 

D. 

debenture, Dce 2 -Bee 
debilitate-d-ion, Eee^Blet 
debility, Dee' -Bee 
decapitate- d-ion, Dee°-Kay-Pet 
December, Dees"'-Em 
deceptive-ion, Dees 2 - Pee 
declairn-ation-atory, Dee~-Kel 
declare-d-ation, Dee 2 -Klcr 
declension, Dee°-Klen 
decline-able-ation, Dee'-Klen 
declivity, Dec'-Kcl 
defamatory, Dee 9 -Ef-Met 
deficient-cy, Dee 2 -Ef-Shay 
deform-ed-ity, Dee^Fer 
degeneration, Dee 2 -Jay / shon 
degradation, Dee 2 -Gred 
deject-ed-tion, Dee 2 - Jay 
delicacy, DeP-Kay 
delicate-ness, Del'-Ket 
democracy- tic, Dee 2 -Em 
Denmark, Dee 2 -Em-Ray-Kay 
denunciatory-ion, Dee-Ken 
depart-ed-ment, Dee 2 -Pret 
depend-ed-ence-ency, Dee 2 -Pend 
deplorable, Dce'-Pler 
deponent, Dee 2 -Pen 
depravity, Dee -Prof 
deprecate-d-ion, Dee -Per 
deprivation, Dee 2 -Pref 
depth, Dee -Pee 
derange-ment, Der 2 -En-Jay 
derogation, Der 2 -Gay 
derogatory-ily, Der 2 -Get 
descendant, Dees 2 -Nent 
deserve-d, Dees 2 -Ray 
desideratum, Dees 2 -Dret 
designate-d-ion, Dees 2 -Gay 
desirable, Dees 2 -Ar 
despicable-ness, Dees 2 -Pee-Kay 
despondent-cy, Dees 2 -Pend 



THE EEPOBIIKG STYLE 



185 



despot-ic-ical, Dees-Pet 
despotism, Dees 2 -Pets-Em 
destructible, Dee 2 -Ster 
destruction, Dee 2 -Ster'shon 
destructive-ness, Dee--Stref 
deterinine-able, Dee 2 -Tren 
deterrnined-ly, Dee 2 -Trend 
deterriiination, Dee-Ter'shon 
detest-ation, Dcds : -Tce 
detract-or, Dee 3 -Ter 
detraction, Dee 3 -Ter'shon 
detriment-al, Dee" 2 -Ter 
develop-ment, Def 2 -Pee 
devolve, Def 2 -Vee 
dianieter-rical, Dee 2 -Emter 
dictionary, Dee'shon 2 -Bay 
differential, Def --Ren 
dignify-fied-ty, Dee 2 -Gay 
dilapidate- d- ion, Del 2 -Pet 
diminish-ed-ution, Dee --Men 
diplomat-ic, Dee--Pel-Met 
director, Der 2 -Ter 
directory, Der 2 -Ket 
disadvantage, Dees --Jay 
disagree-able-ment, Dees^Ger 
disappoint-ed-rnent, Dees 1 -Pent 
disbelieve, Dees^Bel 
discharge, Dees 2 -Cbay 
disclairn-ed, Dees 2 -Kel 
discord-ant, Dees^Kret 
discountenance-d, Dees 3 -Kent 
discover-ed-y, Dees 2 -Kef 
discrepancy, Dees 2 -Kay-Pee 
discriminate-d-ion, Dees 2 -Kay 
disdain-ful, Dees 2 -Den 
dishonor-able, Dees^Ner 
disinterested-ly-ness, Dees 2 -Ents- 

Ted 
disjunctive, Dees'--Jay-Ing 
disorganization, Dees 2 -Gens'eshon 
disparage-ment, Dees 2 -Pee-Jay 
displeasure, Dees 2 -Zher 
disqualify-ication, Dees^Kel 
dissatisf y-ied-fac tion , Dees 3 -Tee 
disseminate- d-ion, Dees 2 -Men 
dissimilar-ity, Dee / ses 2 -Em 
distinctive, Deest 2 -Vee 
distinguished, Deest--Ing 
distinguishable, Deest 2 -lng-Bee 
distract-ed-er, Dees 3 -Ter 
distraction, Dees 3 -Ter 



distribute- d, Deester 2 -Bet ; or Dee- 

ster 2 
distribution, Deester—Bee'shcn, or 

Deester 2 
District of Columbia, Dees 2 -Kel 
divination, Def ] -Eshon 
Divine Being, Def ^Bee 
diviner, Def J -Ray 
divinest, Def *-Est 
divulge, Def 2 - Jay 
doctrine-al, Dren 1 
domestic, Dee 2 -Ems-Kay 
dominate- d-ion-ant, Dee^Men 
downcast, Dee 3 -Kayst 
downfall, Dee 3 -Fel 
down-hearted, Den 3 - Art 
downright, Dee 3 -Ret, voc. with I 
clowntrod-den, Dee 3 -Tred 
downward, Dee 3 -Ard 
dramatic, Der 3 -Met 
dwelling-house, Dee 2 -Lay-Hays 
dwelling-place, JDee 2 -Lay-Pels 
dyspeptic-sia, Dees 2 -Pee-Pee 

E. 

eccentric-ity, Kays 2 -Enter 
ecclesiastic-al, Kel'ses-Tee 2 
economy-ical, Ken^Em 
effect-ed, Ef 2 -Kay 
effeminate-ness-acy, Ef 2 -Men 
efficacious-ly, Ef 2 -Kay-Ish 
efhcient-cy, Ef 2 -Shay 
electro-ic-ity, El 2 -Kay 
emblematic, Em-Bel 2 -Met 
emphatic-al, Em-Fet 2 
endanger, En-Jer 2 
engagement, En-Gay-Jay 2 
enlarge-ment, En-Jay 3 
enlarged, En-Jed 3 
enormity, Nei^-Em 
entangle-d-ment, Ent 2 -Ing 
entertainment, Ent-Tee 2 -Ment 
enthusiast-ic-m, En-Ith 2 -Ses 
envelope, En-Vee 2 -Pee 
episcopai-ian-cy, Pees 2 -Kay 
equinoctial, Kay ] -En-Kay 
equivalent-ce, Kay-Vee 2 
escape-d, Es 2 -Kay 
especial-ly, Es' v -Pee 
essential-ly, Es 2 -En 
eternal existence, Ter 2 -Ses-Tens 



186 



THE COMPENDIUM. 



eternal life, Tren 2 -Ef 
eternality, Tren 2 -Tee 
evaporation, Vee 2 -Pee 
eventual-ly-ity, Vee 2 -Net 
everlasting, Vee^Lays 
exaggeratory, Sjert 2 -Bay 
excellency, Kays 2 -Len 
exceptionable, Spee'sh on 2 -Bee 
exchange-d, Kays-Chay 2 
exchanger, Kays-Chay 2 - Jer 
exchangeable, Kays-Chay 2 -Bel 
exchequer, Kays-Chay 2 
exchequer bill, Kays-Chay 2 -Bee 
exclaim-ed, Kays 2 -Kel 
exclamation-ory, Kays 2 -Kel 
excluded, Skel-Ded 2 — 266, E. 3 
executor, Kays 2 -Bay 
executrix, Kays 2 -Kays 
expanded, Spen 3 -Ded — 266, E. 8 
expansibility, Spees 3 -Bee 
expedient-ce, Kays-Pet 1 , or Spet 1 
expeditious-ly, Kays-Pet «-Ish 
expended, Spen 2 -Ded— 266, R. 8 
experiment-al, Sper 2 -Ment 
extemporary, Stemp 2 -Ray-Eay 
extemporize, Stemp 2 -Eays 
extended, Sten 2 -Ded 
extensibility, Stees 2 -Bee 
extenuate, Sten 2 -Tee 
extenuation, Sten 2 -Shen 
exterminate-d-ion, Ster 2 -Men 
extinction, Kays-Tee 2 
extinguish-ed, Kays 2 -Tee 
extraordinary, Ster 2 -Ard 
extremity, Ster 2 -Tee 

F. 

facetious-ly-ness, Efs 2 -Shay 
factious-ly-ness, Ef 3 -Kay 
faculty, Ef 2 -Klet 
fainthearted-ness, Fent 2 -Bet 
falsification, Fels ] -Eshon 
fanatic-al, Efs-Net 
fanciful, Ef 2 -Ens-Ef 
fashionable, Ef shon 2 -Bee 
fastidious-ness, Efs 2 -Ted 
fantasm, Fent 2 -Zee 
fantastic-al, Fent 2 -Est 
favorable, Ver 3 -Bee 
February, Ef 2 -Bee 
financial, Fen 2 -En 



flexible-ility, Fels 2 -Bee 

for instance, Ef 2 -Stens 

forge-ry, Ef 2 -Jay 

forger, Ef 2 -Jer 

formal-ity, Fer ] -Lay 

former-ly, Fer ! -Ar 

formless, Fer ] -Lays 

fortune-ate-ateness, Ef *-Ret 

fragment- ary, Fer 2 -Gay 

frank-ness, Fer 3 -Kay 

frankly, Fer 3 -Kel 

Franklin, Fer 3 -Klen 

frantic- ness, Fert 3 -Kay 

fraternal- ity, Fret 2 -Ren, orFer'tern 5 

frigid-ity, Fer T -Jed 

frontispiece, Frets 2 -Pees 

Fugitive Slave Law, Ef 2 - Jays-Lay 

G. 

genera-ic, Jay 2 -Ner 
genteel, Jefr-El 
gentile, Jet 2 -El 
gentility, Jet 1 -El t 
gentle-ness, Jay 2 -Net 
geography-ical-er, Jay 2 -Ger 
geometry, Jay 2 - Met 
geometrical, Jay 2 -Emter 
governmental, Gef 2 -Ment 
governor, Gef 2 -Ray 
gracious-ly-ness, Ger-Ish 2 
grandchild, Gred 2 -Cheld 
granddaughter, Gred 2 -Ter 
grandson, Gred 2 -Sen 
gravitate -d-ion, Ger-Ved 2 
gravity, Ger-Yed 2 
Great Britain, Gret 2 -Bret 
Great Britain and Ireland, Gret 2 - 
Bret-Eel' end 



H. 

habeas corpus, Hay 2 -Ker 
hazard- ed-ous, Zee 2 -Ard 
henceforth, Ens-Ef 2 
heretofore, Bet 2 -Ef 
hieroglyph-ic-ical, Ai^-Glef 
history-ical, Est ] -Ray 
holier, Hay 3 -Eay 
holiness, Hav 3 -Ens 
Holy Ghost, "Hay 3 - Gay 
horticulture, Art*-Kel 



THE EEPOJiTIXG STYLE. 



is r 



House of Lords, Hays°-Lay 
houses of Parliament, Hay'ses 3 -Pee 
House of Representatives, Hays 3 - 

Ray i 
hypocrisy, Pee'-Ker 
hypocritical, Pee T -Krct 

I. 

identical', Ded ] -Kel 
identification , D ent " l -Ef shoii 
idiosyncrasy- tic, Dees 1 -En 
ignorainy-ious, Gen^Em 
iilegal-ity, El 2 -Gel 
illegible-ility, El 2 -Jay 
illegitimate-cy, El 2 - Jet 
illiberal- ity, El 2 -Brel 
illogical-ness, El 1 -Jay 
imaginable, Jen 3 -Bee 
immeasurable, Em-Zher 3 
impassionate, Emp-Ish 3 
imperceptible-ility, Em-Pers 2 -Pet 
imperfection, Em-Per'shon 1 
imperfectly, Em-Perf 1 
implacable-ility, Em-Pel : -Kay 
implicit-ness, Em-Pels 1 
impoverish-ed-ment, Emp-Ver 2 
impracticable-ility, Em-Per 3 -Ket 
impregnate-d-ble-ion, Em-Per-- 

Gay 
improper-ly-riety, Em-Per 1 
in the words of my (the) text, En 1 - 

"Werds-Teest 
in reference, Nei^-Ef 
in regard, Ner ] -Ged 
in respect, Ner'-Spee 
in so far as, Ens ] -Efs 
in the first place, En*-Ef-Pel(s) 
in the second place, Ens 1 -Kay - 

Pel(s) 
in the mean time, En 1 Men-Tee 
inartificial-ity, Nert-Ef 2 
inauspicious-ly-ness, Ens-Pee 2 -Ish 
inclement-cy, En-Kel 2 
ineline-ation, En'-Klen 
incombustible-ility, ' incom' :Beest 2 
incredible-ility, En^Kret 
indefatigable, End-Fet 2 
indefinite-ly-ness, End-Ef 2 
indemnify-ity, End' -Em 
indemnification, End^Ern'shon 
indenture, End 2 -Ent 



independent-ce, End-Pend 2 
indescribable , Ends-Kay-Bel 2 
indifferent-ce, En-Def 2 
indignant-ly-tion-ity, End 1 -Gay 
individual, End-Ved 1 
individuality, End 1 : Yed 
indivisible-ility, End-Vees 1 
indoctrinate-d-ion, En-Dren 1 
indulge, End- Jay 2 
infer- red, En-Ef 2 
infers-ence, En-Efs 2 
inferential, En-Fen 2 
inferior-ity, En-Ef 1 
infidelity, En-Fet 1 
infiniteness, Neft^Ens 
infinitesimal, Neft^Es 
infinitive, Neft^Vee 
infinitude , Net t l : D ee 
mfirm-itv, En-Fer 2 
infiict, En-Fel 1 
infliction, En-FeFshon 1 
inform-ed-ant, En-Fer 1 
informal-ity, En-Fer^Lay 
infraction, En-Fer 'shon 3 
infringe-d-ment-er, En-Fren 1 
ingredient, En-Gred 1 
inhabit-ed-ant, En-Bet 2 
inquire-y, En-Wer 1 
inscribable, In-Sker-Bel 2 
insignificant, Ens-Gay 1 
insolvency, In-Slayi-Ven 
inspect-ed-ion, En-Spee 2 
inspire -at ion, In-Sper 1 
instructor, In-Ster 2 -Ter 
integrity, Ent 2 -Gret 
intellect-ual-ity, Enfr-Ket 
intelligible-ility, Ent-Jay 2 
intemperate-ance, Ent 2 -Emp 
interdiction, Ent-Dee'shon 1 
interiorly, Ent-El 2 
intermingled, Ent^Em-Ing 
interpret-ed-ation, Ent-Pret 2 
intestate, Ents-Tet 2 , voc. with ?. 
intestine, Ents-Ten 2 
intimidate-d-ion, Ent 1 -Med 
intolerable, Ent-Ei 1 
introduction, Ent-Dee'shon 2 
iiitrospect-ion, Ent-Spee 2 
invent-ed-or, En- Vent 2 
invention, En-Ven 2 
invisible-ility, En-Vees 1 - 
invite-ation, En- Yet 1 



188 



THE COMPENDIUM. 



involve, En-Vee 1 
irrecoverable-ness, Ar 2 -Kef 
irrefragable-ility, Ar 2 -Fer 
irrelevancy, PeP-Yen 
irreligion, Ar T -Jen 
irreligious, Ar ] -Jays 
irresistible-ility, Ar 2 -Ses-Tee 
irrespective-ly, Ar 2 -Spef 
irresponsible-ility , Ar 2 - Spens 



January, Jay 2 -En 
Jefferson, Jay 2 -Fer, or Jef 
Jesus Christ, Jay --Kay 
Jesus of Nazareth, Jay 2 - Ens 
joint stock, Jed'-Stee-Kay 
judicature-ory, Jed 3 -Kay 
judicial, Jedi-Ish 

judiciary, Jed-Sher 
judicious-ly-ness, Jed^Shay 
jurisconsult, Jers 2 - Kays -Let 
jurisprudence, Jers 2 -Pce 
justify- iable, Jays--Ef 
juxtaposition, Jays^Pces'eshon 

K. 

kingdom of Christ, Kef *-Kay 
kingdom of God, Kef X -Ged 
king's bench, Kays-Bee 2 

L. 

labyrinth, Lay 2 -Ber-Ith 
landscape, Lends 2 -Kay 
languish, El 2 -Ing-Ish 
laughing-stock, Lay 2 -Efs-Tee-Kay 
.learned counsel, Lay 2 -Ar-Kay 
learned judge, Lay 2 - (Ar-) Jay 
legal-ity, Lay^Gel 
legendary, Lay 2 -Jed-Kay 
legislate-d-or-ion, Lay 2 - Jay 
legitimate-d-ness, Lay 2 -Jet 
lengthwise, Ing 3 -Ways 
lengthy, Ing 3 -Ith 
Leviticus-al, Lay^Yet 
lexicography- er-ic, Lays 2 -Kay-Ger 
liberal-ity, LayJ-Brel 
libertine, Lay^Bret 
libertinism, Lay^Brets-Em 
looking-glass, Lay 3 - (Kay-) Gels 



loving kindness, Lef 2 -Kend 
luscious-ness, Lay 2 -Ish 

M. 

machine, Em- Mi 2 ; sometimes Em 

in phr. 
machinery, Em-Ish 2 -Eay 
machinist, Em-Ish 2 -Sfceh 
magnet-ic-ism, Em 2 -G-en 
magnificent-ce, Em 1 -Gray 
majesty-ic, Em- Jay 3 
majority, Em Jert 1 
malevolent- ce, Mel-Vee 2 
malformed-ation, Mel-Fer 2 
malicious-ly-ness, Mel-Ish 2 
malignant- ce, MeP-Gay 
manufacture-r-ory, Em-En-Ef 2 
manifest -ed-ation, Em T -Ens 
Massachusetts, Ems-Chay 3 
materialism, Emters 2 -Em 
materialistic, Emters 2 -Kay 
materiality, Em/ter 2 -Let 
maxim -um, Ems 2 -Em 
meanwhile, Em ! -Nel 

in the mean time, En^Men-Tee 
mechanic-al, Em 2 -Kay 
mechanism, Em 2 - Kay 
Mediterranean, Med-Tren 2 
melancholy, Mel 2 -Kel 
memory-a-ndum, Em 2 -Em 
merchandise, Em-Kay 2 -Chet-Zee 
merchantable, Em-Kay 2 -Chet-Bel 
messenger, Ems-Jer 2 
metaphysical, Met-Efs 2 
method-ical, Em-Thed 2 
Methodist-ic-ical, Em-Thet 2 -Steh 
metropolitan, Em/ter-Pel 1 
Mexico, Ems 2 -Kay 
microscope, Ems-Kay-Pee 2 
mingle-d, Em^Ing 
minimum, Men^Em 
ministerial, Em-Ens-Tee 2 
minority, Em^Nert 
misconj ecture-d, Ems- Jay 2 - Kay 
misdemeanor, Ems- Dee 2 
misfortune, Ems-Fret 1 
modification, Med-Efshon 2 
monstrous- si ty, Mens-Tees 3 
mortgage, Mer ] -Gay 

mortgagee, Mer-Gay-Jay 2 
mortification, Mert-Efshon 2 



THE REPORTING STYLE 



189 



my part, Emp-Bet 
mystification, Erns^-Esh'on 

N. 

needful, Ned-Ef l 
neglect, En 2 - Gay 
neglectful, En 2 -Gef 
negligent- ce, En 2 -Gel 
New Foundland, En-Fed 2 -Erend 
New Jersey, En 2 - Jay 
New Testament, Net 2 -Steh 
New York, En 2 -Yay 
New York City, En 2 -Yays 
New York State, En 2 -Yay-Steh 
nobody, En 2 -Bed 
nocturnal, En 2 -Ket-Een 
nomenclature, En 2 -Em-Klet 
nonconformist, NenfEfst 2 
nonconformity, NenfEf 2 
nondescript, Nends^Kay 
non-essential, Nen-Es 2 -En 
North America, Ner 2 -Em 
North Carolina, Ner'-Ker 
nothing, En-Ith 2 
notification, Net-Efshon 2 
nourish- able-ment, Ner-Ish 2 
Nova Scotia, En-Skay-Ish 2 
November, En-Vee 2 
noxious-ly-ness, En-Kay-Ish 2 

0. 

obligatory, Bel 2 - Get 
obscure-ity, Bees 2 -Kay 
observant -ce, Bees 2 - Ray 
observe-d-ation, Bees 2 -Eay 
obstruct-ed, Bee 2 -Ster 
obstruction, Bee 2 -Ster / shon 
obstructive, Bee 2 -Stref 
octangular, Ket 2 -Ing 
oificious-ness, Ef J -Ish 
oftentimes, Fent^Ems 
ofttimes, Fet'-Ems 
Old Testament, Eldst 2 
Old and New Testament, Let 2 -Netst 
oligarchy-ical, El 2 -Ger 
omnific, Men-Ef 2 
omnipotent-ce, Men-Pee 2 
omnipresent-ce, Em-Per 2 
omniscient-ce, Men-Ish 2 
organic, Gen '-Kay 



organism, Gen^Iss-Em 
original, Ar'-Jen 
orthodox, Bay^Ith 
ostentatious-ly-ness, Est^Ent 
overwhelm-ed, Ver 2 -El 



paganism, Pee 2 -Gays-Em 

painful, Pen 2 -Ef 

panegyric, Pee 2 -Jer 

pantomime-ic, Pent 2 -Em 

partial-ity, Per 2 -Shel 

party of the first part, Pee 3 -Efs- 

Pee 
party of the second part, Pee 3 - 

Skay-Pee 
passenger, Pees 2 -Jer 
patentable, Pee 3 -Bel 
paternal-ity, Pet 2 -Ren 
patronage, Pet ::! -Bay-Jay 
pecuniary-ily, Pee 2 -Ken 
pedant-ic, Pee 2 -Dent 
pedantry, Pee ? -Ded-Eay 
pedobaptist, Ped 1 :Bee 2 -Pee 
peevish-ly-ness, Pef 2 -Shay 
penetrable-ility, Pent 2 -Bee 

penetrate, Pent 2 -Eet 
penitential, Pent 2 -En 
Pennsylvania, Pees 2 -Lay-Vee 
perfected, Perf X -Ket 
perform-ed-ance, Per 2 -Fer 
permanent-ly-ce, Per 2 -Men 
perpendicular-ly-ity, Per 2 - Pen 
perpetual-ate-ion, Pee 2 -Eay-Pet 
person, sometimes Pers in phr. 
persons, sometimes Perses in phr. 
personification, Pers 2 -En-Efshon 
perspective, Pers 2 -Pef 
perspicacious - ly - ness, Pers 2 - Pee • 

Kay-Ish 
perspicuity, Pers' 2 -Pee-Kay 
pertinacious-ly-ness, Pee 2 -Eet-En« 

Ish 
pestilential, Pees 2 -Len 
phenomena-on-al, Fen 2 -Em 
Philadelphia, Flet 2 -Ef 
philosophy-ic-ical, Fels 2 -Ef 
photography-ic-ist-er, Fet ] -Ger 
physical world, Efs°-Eld 
physiognomy, Efs 2 -Gay 
piquancy, Pee 1 -Ken 



190 



THE COMPENDIUM. 



platform, Plet 2 -Fer 
placable-ility, PeP-Kay 
plenipotentiary, Plen'-'-Pee 
polygamy-ous, PeP-Gay 

ponderous, Pend^Rays 

ponder, Pend ] -x\r 
ponderable-y, PencP-Bee 
pontiff-ical, Pent^Ef 
popularity, Pee ! -Pee 
potential-ity, Pee 2 -Ten 
powerful-ness, Pee 3 -Ref 

power, Pee 3 -Ray 
precious-ness, Per 2 -Ish 
precipitate-d-ion, Pers^Pet 
predestinarian, Pred 2 -Stee-Nern 
predestinate-d-ion, Pred--Sten 
predestine-ation, Pred-'-Sten 
predetermine-ation, Pred 2 -Tren 
predicabie, Pred 2 -Kay 
predorninate-d-ion, Pred^Men 
predominant-ce, Pred J -Men 
preflgure-d-ation, Pref 2 -Gay 
prejudice-d, Per 2 - Jed 
prejudicial, Per 2 -Jed-Isli 
prepare-ation-atory, Per 2 -Pee-Ray 

prepared, Per 2 -Pee-Ret 
prerogative, Per 2 -Ray-Gay 
presbytery-ian, Pers 2 -Bet 
presbyterianism, Pers 2 -Bets-Em 
prescribe-d, Per ] -Skay 
prescription, Per^Skay'slion 
prescriptive, Per ] -Skef 
present-ed-ation, Pers 2 -Ent 
preserve-d-ation, Pers 2 -Ray 
presidential, Pers 2 -Ben 
pretension-si ve, Per 2 -Ten 
pretension, Per 2 -Ten 
priestcraft, Pers^Keft 
prima facie, Per*-Ef 
prime minister, Pei^-Em-Enster 
primogeniture, Per 2 -Em-Jay 
problematical, Per ^Bel-Met 
X^roclaim-ed-er, Per 2 -Kel 
proclivity, Per ] -Kel 
prodigious-ness, Pred'-Jay 
product, Per ? -Dee 
productive-ncss, Per 2 -Def 
proficient, Per--Ef 
prognosticate-d-ion, Per ] -Gay 
project, Per 1 -Jay 
project-ed-ion, Per 2 - Jay 
prominent-ce, Per -Men 



property, Pei^-Pce 
propitious-ness, Per 2 -Pee-Shay 
pronortion-ed, Per 2 -Pee'shon 
proportionate - ly - ness, Per 2 - Pee'- 

shon-Tee 
proscribe, Per 2 -Skay 
prospect-ed, Pers^Pee 
prospective-ly, Pers'-Pef 
prostitute-d, Pers- ; -Tet 
protestant-ism, Pret ! -Stent 
protract-ed, Per 3 -Ter 
protraction, Per 3 -Ter'shon 
pro tractive, Per 3 -Tref 
providential, Preft 2 -En 
provincial, Pref 2 -En 
prudential, Per 2 -Den 
public-ation-isk-islied-isher, Pee 2 

Bee 
pugnacity-ous-ly, Pee 2 -Gay 
pulpit, Pel 2 -Pee 
punctual-ity, Pee 2 -Ing 
punctilious-ly-ness, Pee 2 -Ing-Ket 
pungency, Pen 2 -Jay 
purgatory-ial, Per 2 -Get 
pusillanimous-ity , Pees 3 -Len 

Q. 

quadrangular-ity, Ket 2 -Ray-Ing 
qualifications, KeP-Efshons 
questionable, Ken 2 -Bee 
questioner, Ken 2 -Ar 

R. 

radiancy, Ray 2 -Ben 
ramification, Ar 2 -Em-Efslion 
rapacious-ness, Ray 2 -Pee-Shay 
rapid-ity, Ray 2 -Pet 
ratification, Ret 2 -Efsnon 
rebutting evidence, Bay 2 -Bet-Ved 
recapitulate-d-ion, Ray 2 -Kay-Pet 
reciprocate-d-ion, Bay 2 -Sper 
reclaim-ed, Ray 2 -Kel 
reclamation, Ray 2 -Kel 
recollect-ed-ion, Ray 2 -Kel-Kay 
recover-y-ed-able, Ray 2 -Kef 
rectification, Ray 2 -Ket-Efshon 
redound-ed, Red 2 -End 
reduction, Ray 2 -Dee / shon 
redundance-y, Red 2 - End 
redundant-ly, Red 2 -Nent 



THE EEPOKTING STYLE 



191 



reflect-ed-ion, Eay 2 -Ef-Kay 
reform-ed-atory, Ray ! -Fer 
refract ed-ion, Ray :3 -Fer 
refractory, Ray 3 -Fer-Ket 
refute-d-ation, Ray 2 -Fet 
regenerate-d, Ray 2 -Jen 
regeneration, Ray 2 -Jay'shon 
regenerative, Ray-- Jay'ti v 
reject-ed-ion, Ray --Jay 
relevancy, Rel--Ven 
relinquish-ed-ment, Rei s -Ing 
reluctant-ce, Rel 2 -Ket 
remit-ted-tance, Ai^-Met 
remonstrate-d, Ar 2 -Em-Strct 
repeat-ed-tition, Ray J -Pet 
repent-ed-ance, Ray 2 -Pent 
replenish-ed-ment, Ray ? -Plen 
reprehensible-ility, Ray 2 -Prens 
reprehensive-sion, Ray 2 -Prcn 
reproach-able, Ray' 2 -Per-Chay 
republic-ation-ish-ished, Ray 2 -Pee- 

Bee 
republican, Eay 2 -Pee-Ben 
repugnant-ce, Ray 2 -Pee-Gay 
repute-d-ation, Ray 3 -Pet 
resemble-d-ance, Ar 2 -Sem 
reserve-d ation, Rays 2 -Ray 
resignation, Rays 2 -Gay 
respect-ed-ing-ful, Rays ? -Pee 
respectable-ility, Rays 2 -Pee-Bee 
respective, Rays 2 -Pef 
resplendent- ence, Rays 2 -Plent 
respond-ed-ent-ence, Rays 2 -Pent 
responsive, Rays 2 -Pen 
responsible-ility, Rays 2 -Pens 
restrict-ed, Ray 2 -Ster 
restriction, Ray 2 -Ster / shon 
restrictive, Ray 2 -Stref 
resurrection, Rays 2 -Ray 
retract-ed, Ray 3 -Ter 
retraction, Ray 3 -Ter'slion 
retractive, Ray 3 -Tref 
retrospect-ion, Art 2 -Rays-Pee 
retrospective, Art 2 -Rays-Pef 
revenge-d, Ray 2 -Vee-Jay 
revengeful-ness, Ray 2 -Vee-Jef 
Rev. Dr., Raj^-Vee-Der 
reverential, Ref 2 -Ren 
revive-d-al, Ray ] -Vee 
revivify, Ray'-Vee-Ef 
revivification, Ray 1 - Yee- Ef shon 
rhetor-ic-al, Art 2 -Ray 



Romanism, Ar 2 -Ems-Em 
Roman Catholicism, Ar 2 -Kay-Ith, 
or Ar 2 -Kay 

S. 

sagacious-ness, Sgay-Ish 2 
sanctify-ied-ication, Iss-Ing 2 -Ket 
sanctimony-ious-iousness, Iss-Ing 2 - 

Em 
sanguinary, Iss-Ing'en 2 -Ray 
sanguify, Iss-Ing-Ef 2 
Secretary of State, Skrets 2 -Tet 
Secretary of War, Skret 2 -Wer 
scientific, Es ] -Ent 
scoundrel-ism, Sked^-Rel 
sculptor-ure, Skel-Pet 2 
sectarianism, Skets 2 -Em 
sedentary, Sdet 2 -Ray 
sentimentalism, Sent' 2 -Mets-Em 
sentimentalist, Sent 2 -Ment -Est 
September, Spet 2 -Em 
Shakspeare, Ish 2 --Spee 
signature, Sgay ! -Net 
simpler, Semp'-Ray 
simplify, Semp-Ef 2 
simplification, Semp-Ef "shon 2 
skeptic-al-ism, Skay-Pet 2 
slumber, Slay 2 Ber 
so far as, Es 2 -Efs 
sober-minded-ness, Sber 2 -Mend 
solvency, Slay 1 -Yen 
somnambulist-m, Smen-Bee 2 
South America, Iss-Ith 2 -Em 
South Carolina, Iss Ith 2 -Ker 
south-eastern, Iss-Thes 2 -Ren 
southerner, Iss-THen 2 -Ray 
south-western, Sways 2 -Ren 

south-west, Swayst 2 
spa.cious-ness, Spee 2 -Ish 
speakable, Spee x -Bel 
specify-ic, Spees^Ef 
specious-ness, Spee 2 -Ish 
speculate- d- or- ory, Spee 2 -Klet 
spendthrift, Sped 2 -Ther 
spiritualism, Spers^Em 
spiritualistic, Spers ] -Kay 
standard, Sted 2 -Ard 
stepping stone, Steh-Pee 2 -Sten 
stopping-place, Steh-Pee^Pels 
straightforward-ness, Stref 2 -Ret 
stranger, Ster 2 -Jer 



192 



THE COMPENDIUM 



stratify -icat ion, Ster 3 -Tee-Ef 
strength, Ster 2 -Ith 
strengthen, Ster--Then 
structure-al, Ster 2 -Ter 
subjugate-d-ion, Sbee 2 -Jay 
subserve -d-ient-ience-iency, 

Sbees 2 -Ray 
substantial-ity, Sbee -2 -Stee 
substantiate-d-ion, Sbee 2 -Sten 
substantive-ly, Sbee 2 -Stent 
substitute-d, Sbees 2 -Tet 
subtract-ed-ion, Sbee 2 -Ter 
subtrahend, Sbee 2 -Trend 
succinct-ly-ness, Ses-Ing ] -Ket 
sufficient-cy-ly, Iss-Ef 2 -Shay 
suffocate -d-ion, Iss-Ef 2 -Kay 
suit in chancery, Sten 3 -Chay 
supererogation-tory, Sper 2 -Bay- 

G-ay 
superficial-ity, Sper 2 -Ef 
superincumbent, Spren 2 -Bent 
supernaturalism, Spers 3 -Em 
superscribe-d, Sper 2 -Skay 
superscription, Sper 2 -Iss-Kay / shon 
superstitious-ness, Sper 2 -Stee 
superstructure, Sper 2 -Iss-Ter 
Supreme Being, Sper 2 -Bee 
surreptitious-ly-ness, Iss-Eay 2 -Pet 
survive-d-r, Iss-Ray^Vee 
swindle-d-r, Swayi-Del, or Iss- 

Waynd 1 
sympathetic-al, Iss-Emp-Thet 2 

T. 

tabernacle, Tee 2 -Ber 
tachygraphy-ic, Tee 2 -Kay-Ger 
taciturnity, Tees 2 -Tren 
tangible-iiity, Tee 2 -En-Jay 
tantamount, Tet 2 -Ment 
technical-ity, Tee 2 -Kay 
telegraph-er-ic, Tel' 2 -Ger 
telescope-ic, Tel 2 -Skay 
temperament-al, Tee 2 -Emp- (Ment) 
temperate-ance, Tee 2 -Emp 
temperature, Tee 2 -Emp / ter 
tenement, Tee 2 -Ment 
terminate-d-ion, Ter--Men 
testament, Tees 2 -Ment 
testamentary, Tees 2 -Ment-Ray 
testification, Tees 2 -Eshon 
testify, Tees 2 -Ef 



testimony, Tees 2 -Em 
testimonial, Tees' 2 -Em-Nel 
Texas, Tee'ses 2 
texture, Tee 2 -Ster 
thanksgiving, Thes 3 -Gay 
thankworthy, Ith 3 -Wer-Tnee 
thenceforth, Thees 2 -Ef 
thenceforward, Thees 2 - Ef- Wert 
theoretical, Ith 2 -Ret 
thermometer-rical, Ther 2 -Ein 
thunder-storm, Ith 2 -En / derst 
timidity, Tee 2 -Med 
to become, Bee 3 -Kay 
torpid-ity, Ter ] -Ped 
tragedy-ic-ical, Ter 2 -Jay 
tranquil-ity, Ter 3 -En, or Terming 
transatlantic, Ters 2 -Lent-Kay 
transcend-ed, Ters 3 -End 
transcendent-al-ism, Ters 2 -Nent 
transcribe -d-r, Ters T -Kay 
transcription, Ters^Kay'shon 
transfer-red, Ters 2 -Ef 
transfers ence, Ters 2 -Efs 
transform- ed-ation, Ters 2 -Fer 
transparent-cy, Ters 2 -Pee 
transubstantiation, Ters 2 -Bee 
trigonometry-ical, Ter^Gen 
tympanum, Tee 2 -Empen 
typography- er-ic, Tee 2 -Pee-Ger 
tyrannic-al, Tee 2 -Ren 

U. 

unclaim-ed, En 2 -Kel 
uncontradicted, En-Dee 1 
undecided-ly, Ends-Ded 1 
undignified, En-Dee 2 -Gay 
undiscoverable, Ends 2 -Kef 
unexpected, En-Spee 2 
uniform- ity, En-Fer 3 
unimaginable, En -Jen 3 
unimaginative, En-Jay'tiv 3 
unimagined, En-Jend 3 
unimportant-ce, En^Emp 
unimproved, En 2 -Emp 
United States of America, Ins-Ein> 
Universalism, Yers 2 -Em 
universality, Yers 2 -Lay 
university, Vers 2 -Tee 
unmeasured, En-Zherd 3 
unquestionable, En 2 -Ken-Bee 
unquestioned, En 2 -Ken 



THE EEPOETING STYLE 



193 



unwilling-ness, En-Lay 2 
utilitarianism, Tel' 2 -Ters-Em 

Y. 

vacancy, Vee 2 -Ken 
vainglory, Vee 2 -G-el 
valediction, Yel 2 -Dee'shon 
valedictorv, Yel 2 -Dee 
valid-ity, Vee 2 -Eld 
vegetable-rian, Vee 2 -Jet 
vegetarianism, Vee 2 -Jets-Em 
vegetate-d-ion, Yee 2 -Jet 
vengeance, Vee 2 -Jens 
vexatious-ly-ness, Yee 2 -Kays 
vice versa, Yee 2 :Yer 2 
vicious-ness, Yee'-Shay 
virgin, Yee 2 -Jen 



Virginia, Yee 2 -Jay 
viva voce, Yee 2 :Yee 2 

W. 

icarrant-ed-able, Wernt 1 
worship-ed, Wer 2 -lsk 
worshiper, Wer 2 -Ish-Ar 
wretched-ness, Ray 2 -Chet 

Y. 

yes, sir, Yay'ses 2 

yesterday, Est 2 -Dee, or Es'ter 2 

Z. 

zigzag, Zees 2 -Gay 
zoography, Zee 2 -Ger 



Eem. 1. From the preceding list there have been excluded many contractions 
which might, and will in due time, be formed by the reporter, in accordance with 
the general principles of § 237, K. 3 ; and also a large number of contractions for 
past tenses or perfect participles, which will be formed in accordance with the 
principles of § 2G6, E. 8. Numerous contractions which are formed by the omis- 
sion of prefixes or affixes, have, for a corresponding reason, been excluded. On 
the other hand, several phrase-signs, such as Jay-Ens for ' Jesus of Nazareth,' have 
been included, because of their involving principles of contraction. The practiced 
reporter will form, in accordance with § 237, Eems. 2 and 3, numerous special con- 
tractions, as they may seem to be demanded. 

Eem. 2. Primitive Words Sometimes Inserted. — In many cases in the preceding 
list, where a contraction for a derivative word has happened to be the complete out- 
line for a primitive word, such word has been inserted to indicate that fact ; thus, 
4 En- Yet 1 ,' the contraction for 'invitation,' is the complete outline for 'invite ;' and 
this word has therefore been inserted. 

Eem. 3. In devising the contractions for the words in the preceding list, there has 
been kept constantly in view the principle of making like contractions for like 
words ; so that one contraction, familiarized, is an index, in almost every instance, 
of the contractions for words of similar terminations. To illustrate — learning the 
contraction for ' gracious-ly-ness,' is in effect learning the contractions for the words 
of similar terminations, as, ' ambitious-ly-ness, contumacious-ly-ness ;' except in a 
few instances where still farther contraction may be made, as in the signs for 
' capricious-ly-ness, conscientious-ly-ness.' The contractions for ' permanent-ce, 
dominant-ce, independent-ce, correspond-ent-ence, superintend-ent-ence, repent- 
ant-ance,' and words of similar terminations, are all formed in analogy. Contrac- 
tions for words ending in ' graphic-al,' as a general rule, follow the analogy of 
' geography-ic-al.' This general rule being borne in mind, not only may the large 
number of contractions presented in the preceding list be more readily learned 
than a few abbreviations formed without reference to general principles, but the 
principle of these contractions being familiarized, the reporter will readily form 
numerous others as they are needed. 

Eem. 4. 'Distract* and 'Administer* Distinguished. — 'Administer' may be dis- 
tinguished from 'distract' by writing the circle distinctly within the Ar-hook in the 

9 



194: THE COMPENDIUM. 

sign for the former word, and by implying the Ar-hook in the sign for the -latter 
word, by turning the circle on the left-hand side of the Deo. 

Eem. 5. Derivatives from contractions are generally formed by prefixing or affix- 
ing the proper signs for the formative; thus, to the contraction for 'applicable,' 
prefix En for ' inapplicable ;' to the contraction for ' changeable,' prefix En for ' un- 
changeable.' See § 252, E. 5. 

Eem. 6. Letters Disjoined, etc.— {a) To indicate that a sign is to be written dis- 
joined near the other portion of the word, it is preceded or followed by a colon; 
thus, 'En:Beest' indicates that the sign for ' incom' should be written separate, 
according to § 228, 7 ; and in ' Neft : Dee' it is indicated that Dee should be disjoined, 
and written partially under the Neft. (&) The dagger (t) is printed between two 
signs to indicate that the character following it is to be written through the preceding 
one; thus, 'En+Ef indicates that the Ef is to be written through the En. (c) By 
inclosing one or more letters in curves, it is indicated that the writer may, if he 
choose, dispense with the sign,, or signs, for such letters : thus, in ' En-Ef-Pel(s),' it 
is indicated that the circle for the s may be omitted. 

Eem. 7. The contraction for a verb may, as a general rule, be employed as a 
sign for the actor; thus, the contraction for 'interpret' may be employed as a 
contraction for ' interpreter;' the contraction for ' conjecture' may be employed as a 
contraction for ' conjecturer ;' the contraction for ' discover,' as a contraction for 
' djc-coverer.' 

Eem. 8. '£' Sometimes Omitted.— -When several Es-sounds occur together, one or 
more may be omitted to secure the advantage of a phrase-sign ; thus, Thees 2 -Tens, 
this circumstance — Theeses 2 -Tens, this existence. 

Eem. 9. -Ful-ness. — These terminations may be expressed by Ef joined, when 
the Ef-hook or a joined Fel can not be conveniently employed ; thus, Sen^Ef, sin- 
ful— Pen 2 -Ef, painful-ness. 

Eem. 10. Reference, Preference. — In the Corresponding Style, Eay 2 -Ef was given 
as a contraction for 'refer,' and Eay-Efs for 'reference.' The example of that 
abbreviation was followed in providing contractions for ' inference, in reference,' 
etc. ; but the reporter may omit the Iss from all these words. He will thereby secure 
the advantage of lengthening the Ef to add thr, and of shortening it to add it. See 
§§ 211 ; 221, E. 4. 

Eem. 11. Mode of Learning the Word-Signs and Contractions.— -The word-signs 
and contractions may be most readily learned in the following manner : — 1. Care- 
fully read the lists through several times. 2. Having familiarized a small portion, 
say one or two pages, have a reader or fellow-student read the words, while you 
give the name and position of the sign. 3. When the names and position can be 
accurately given, have the contracted words read to you many times, while you 
write the signs therefor. This practice should be continued until the word-signs 
and contractions can be written as fast as the words can be properly spoken by the 
reader. 



DISTINCTIONS. 

§ 269. Words of similar or different meanings, and containing the 
same consonants, are distinguished — 

1 . By difference in the mode of representing the first consonant ; thus, 
Ray-Spens, responsible — Rays-Let, resolute (see § 153, 2) ; Ar-Spens, 
irresponsible — Ar-Iss-Let, irresolute (see § 152, 1). 



THE EEPOETISG STYLE. 195 

2. By some other difference of outline ; thus, Em'der-Tee 2 , moder- 
ate — Med-Eet 1 , immoderate; Pers^Ket, prosecute — Pee 2 -Rays-Ket, 
persecute ; Bee 2 -Ray-Ith, berth — Ber 2 -Ith, breath. 

3. By difference in position; thus, Per 2 -Met, permit— Per ] -Met, 
prompt — Per 3 -Met, promote ; EmP-Kay'shon, indication — End 2 -Kay'- 
shon, induction. (See § 261.) 

4. By the vocalization of one or more of the words to be distin- 
guished ; thus, Em 2 -Gret, emigrate — Em^-Gret, migrate— lEm^-Gret, 
immigrate. 

Rem. The mode of distinguishing several of the sign-words has already been ex- 
hibited in the table of reporting word-signs. The following table will be useful for 
reference, and as an extended illustration of the principles of this section. 



§ 270. WORDS DISTINGUISHED BY DIFFERENCE OF OUTLINE 

OR POSITION. 
Arranged according to the Phonographic Alphabet. 

Pee 2 -Tee, pity— Pee*-Tee, piety— § 261, B. 1. 

Pet 2 -Ben, paternal-ity — Pet 3 -Ben, patron, pattern 

Pee 2 -Slay, apostle — Pee ] -Slay, epistle 

Pee'shont 2 , patient — Pee / shon 2 -Tee, passionate 

Pee 2 -Pees, purpose — Per 2 -Pees, perhaps, propose 

Per^Pee, property — Per 1 , proper-riety — Per 2 -Pret, appropriate 

Per 2 -Pershon, appropriation — Per 2 -Peeshon, proportion — Per*-Pee- 
Ray, preparation 

Per 2 -Peeshon, proportioned — Per 2 -Peeshon-Tee, proportionate. 

Per^-Beeshon, prohibition — Per 2 -Beeshon, probation— Per 3 -Beeshon, 
approbation 

Pret 2 -Kayshon, protection — Per 2 -Deeshon, production 

Pee 2 -Ret-En, pertain — Per 2 -Ten, appertain 

Per^Sket, prosecute-or — Pee 2 -Ray-Sket, persecute-or 

Per^Skay, prescribe- d— Per 2 - Skay, proscribe- d 

Pers 2 -Ar, oppressor— Pee 2 -Ray-Es-Ar, pursuer 

Per 3 -Ish, Prussia — Pee 2 -Ray-Ish, Persia 

Pershon 3 , Prussian — Pee 2 -Rayshon, Parisian — Pee 2 -Ray-Shen, Per- 
sian 

Pershon 2 , operation — Pershon 3 , oppression 

Pee 2 -Rayshon, portion — Pee 3 -Rayshon, apportion 

Per 2 -Ems, promise— Per^Ems, premise 

Per 2 -Met, permit — Per^Met, prompt — Per 3 -Met, promote 

Per^Men, prominent — Per 2 -Men, permanent — Per 2 -Men-Ent, pre- 
eminent 



196 THE COMPENDIUM. 

Pels 2 -Dee, placid — Pee 2 -Lays-Dee, pellucid 

Bet 2 -Ef, beautify— Bee 2 -Tee-Ef, beatify 

Bee^Slet, obsolete — Bee 3 -Slet, absolute 

Bee 2 -Ray-Ith, birth— Ber 2 -Ith, breath 

Bend 2 , abundant — Ben 2 -Dend, abandoned 

Tee 2 -Arter, tartar— Ter 2 -Ter, traitor— Tred 2 -Ar, trader 

Ter 2 -Lay, utterly— Ter 3 -Lay, truly 

Tren 2 , train — Tee 2 -Ben, turn 

Ten 3 -Bee, attainable — Tee 2 -En-Bel, tenable 

Dee 2 -Ter, editor — Dee^Ter, daughter 

Ded J -Ar, auditor — Ded ] -Ray, auditory — Ded 2 -Ar, debtor — Ded 3 -Ar, 
doubter 

Dee 2 -Let-(Ray), adultery — Dee 2 -Layter, idolater-ry 

Dees 2 -Ten, destine — Deest 2 -En, destiny 

Deeses 1 , disease-d — Dees 2 -Es, decease 

Dees 2 -Let, desolate — Dees 2 -Elt, dissolute 

Dees 2 -Layshon, desolation — Dees 2 -Elshon, dissolution 

Dee 2 -Layshon, adulation — Dee 3 -Layshon, dilution, delusion 

Del 1 , idleness — Dee 2 -Lay-Ens, dullness 

Dee 2 -Ems-Tershon, demonstration — Dees 3 -Tershon, administration 

Dee 2 -Men, diminish-ution — Dee 3 -Men, admonish- ition 

Dee^Men, domination — Dee 2 -Em-Enshon, condemnation— Dee 3 -Em 
Enshon, damnation s 

Dershon 1 , derision — Dee 2 -Rayshon, adoration — Dershon 8 , duration 

Jay 3 , large — h-tick-Jay 3 , huge (see § 146, R. 4) 

Jay 2 -Net, agent — Jent 2 , gentleman 

Jay 2 -Net, gentle — Jet ! -El, genteel — Jet 2 -El, gentile 

Kayst 1 , cost— Kays-Dee 1 , caused 

(Kay-)Ster 2 -Ket, extricate — Ster 3 , extract 

Kays^Eshon, acquisition — Kays 2 -Eshon, accession — Kays 3 -Eshon, 
accusation 

Sten 2 , extension — Sten 2 -Shen, extenuation 

Kelshon 1 , collision — Kay-Layshon 1 , coalition — Kay-Layshon 3 , collu- 
sion 

Ker-Prel 2 , corporal — Ker-Pee 2 -Rel, corporeal 

Kred 1 , accordance — Ker-Dens 1 , credence 

Ged 1 , God— Gay-Dee 1 , guide 

Gret 2 -Lay, greatly — Gred-Lay 3 , gradual-ly 

Ver 3 , favored— Ef 2 - Vert, favorite 

Efs 2 -Kel, physical— Efs 2 -Kay-El, fiscal 

Fel 2 -Ent, fluent— Fel 3 -Ent, affluent 

Ef ^Ar-Iss, fierce — Ef 3 -Eays, furious 

Ef 2 -Werd, forward — Fer 2 -Ard, froward 



THE EEPOETINO STYLE. , 107 

Fer 2 -Em, af-finn— Fer 1 , form— Ef 2 -Ar- Era, farm 

Ef 2 -Em-Lay, female—Mel 3 , family 

Ved 1 , avoid — Yed 2 (voc. with a), or Yee 2 -Dee, evade 

Vel 3 -Bel, valuable — Yee 2 -Lay-Bel, available 

Yee^Layshon, volition — Vee 2 -Layshon, violation — Yee 3 -Layshon, 
evolution — Yelshon 3 , valuation 

Y"ee 2 -Lent, violent — Yee-EFent, valiant 

Ith 2 -Steh, atheist— Iths°-Tee, theist 

Ithst 2 -Kay, atheistic — Iths 2 -(Tee-)Kay, theistic 

Spee 3 , special-ly — Es 2 -Pee, especial-ly 

Spee 2 -Ret, support-ed — Spret 2 , separate-d 

Stee 3 (voc. with u), suit — Stee 3 , satisfy 

Steh-Dee 2 , steady, study — Sted 2 , staid 

Stee 2 -Bel, stable— Stee 3 -Bel, suitable 

Est 2 -Dee, or Ester 2 , yesterday — Stee 2 , or Stee 2 - (Kay-) Dee, Saturday 

Lays 2 , less— Lays 2 (voc), else 

Lay 2 -Bred, labored — El 2 -Bret, elaborate 

Let 2 -Tet, latitude — Let 2 -Tee-Dee, altitude 

Lay^Kay, like — El ! -Kay, alike ^ 

El 2 -Kay-El, alcohol— El 2 -Kel, alkali 

Lay^Kel, likely — Lay 2 -Kay-Lay, luckily 

Lay^Em, lime — El 3 -Em, alum 

El 2 -Ment, element— El 3 -Ment, aliment 

Lends 1 , islands — Lends 3 , lands — Lends 1 , with the first part of 1 joined, 
highlands 

Ray ] -Ter, writer — Ard*-Ar, or Ar'der 1 , reader — Ar 2 -Ter, orator — Art' 2 - 
Ray, rhetor 

Emp'shont 2 , impatient — Emp'shond 3 , impassioned — Emp-Ish 3 , irn- 
passionate 

Em-Bel 2 , amiable — Em-Bel 3 , humble 

Ray 3 -Ned, ruined — Ray 3 -En-Dee, renewed 

Em^Gret, migrate — lEm^-Gret, immigrate — Em 2 -Gret, emigrate 

MeP-Bayshon, melioration — Mel 3 -Rayshon, amelioration 

Men ] -Net, imminent — Men 2 -Net, eminent 

Eni-Ef, in fact— En^Ef-Kay, in effect 

En^Bed, anybody — En 2 -Bed, nobody 

En-Ded 1 , indeed — En 2 -Det, no doubt 

End^Kayshon, indication — End 2 -Kayshon, induction 

En-Yee 2 -Shayn, innovation — En-Yeeshon 2 , invasion 

End-Ted 1 , indicted— End-Ted 2 , indebted— End-Ted 3 , undoubted 

End-Ef i, needful— End-Ef 2 , indefinite— En-Defi-End, undefined 

End ] -Els, needless — End 2 -Els, endless 

En-Jay 2 -Ens, ingenious — En-Jay 2 -En-Es, ingenuous 



198 THE COMPENDIUM, 

En-Yed^Bel, unavoidable — En-Vet 2 -Bel, inevitable 
In-Sper^Bel, inseparable — In-Sper 3 -Bel, insuperable 
En^Zee, noisy — En 1 : Zee 1 , uneasy 



REPORTING WORD-SIGN FOR 'I.' 

§ 271. In the Reporting Style, the pronoun /, when standing alone, 
may be represented by the abbreviated 1, written in the direction of 

Tee ; thus, J___ . See § 103. 

Rem. (a) I commencing phrase-signs, invariably occupies the first position, and 
is thus distinguished from lie, which, when commencing phrase-signs, always rests 
upon the line of writing, (b) I and hs following other words in a phrase-sign, are 
distinguished by difference of direction of their signs ; the tick for J, in such case, 
being vertical or horizontal, while the tick for he is inclined. See § 103 and § 146, 
R. 5. 



THE THER-TICK. 



§ 272. Thr = i there, their, they are,' when it can not otherwise be 
conveniently expressed in a phrase-sign, may be denoted, if the writer 
choose, by a heavy tick written in the direction of Bee or Jay ; thus, 
"^ since thr ; . > . would thr. 

Rem. 1. The experienced reporter may use the same tick for other; as in 
writing * since other, around other,' etc. . 

Rem. 2. This Ther-tick may take an En or Ef hook, or a circle, for the purposes 
for which they are added in similar cases, as previously specified— as to add 'own, 
not, have, ever, fore, his, is,' etc. 



PHRASE- WRITING. 

§ 273. For the principles of phrase-writing, see § 242-250. 

Rem. 1. If the pupil will familiarize and apply the principles of phrase-writing, 
which have been, for the first time, presented in this book, while he will save him- 
self from the burden of much empirical and imitative practice, he will find that the 
largest list of phrase-signs ever published will appear meager indeed as compared 
with the phrase-signs which he will naturally, easily, and readily form under the 
guidance of these few and simple principles. 



NUMBERS. 

§ 274. (a) Instead of writing two or more ciphers in succession, 
phonographically express the denomination they would represent; 

thus, 2 -(- = 2,000 ; 4 w = 400 ; 6 £^ = 6,000,000. 



THE BEPOHTIInG STYLE. 199 

(b) When convenient, the termination ' ty' in the numbers 20, 30, 
etc., may be expressed by an upward line written from 2, 3, etc. ; thus, 



z/ y 



20 30 40 50 GO 70 80 90 

Rem. Phonographic numerals will be found of decided service to the reporter, 
and they should be thoroughly familiarized. 



REFERENCES, REPETITIONS, OMISSIONS, DOUBT, ETC. 

§ 275. References. — In making references to the larger and smaller 
divisions of a work of any kind, write the number of the greater divi- 
sion in the first position, and of the minor divisions in lower positions, 

1 
according to their grade ; thus, 2 = 1st book, 2d chapter, 3d sec- 

3 

tion ; or, 1st epistle, 2d chapter, 3d verse ; or, 1st volume, 2d book, 
3d chapter. 

§ 276. Repetitions. — (a) A clause upon which other clauses or portions 
of sentences are made to depend, after being written once, may be 
substituted in the following portions of the sentence by a long straight 

dash; thus, "He aspired to be above the people the authorities 

the laws his country" = "He aspired to be above the people ; 

he aspired to be above the laws ; he aspired to be above his country. ' ' 

(b) A comma may be substituted for the long dash when but few 
words are repeated. 

(c) When a word of two or more strokes is repeated, with some 
word intervening wiiich may be readily supplied, write the first sylla- 
ble of the first word, and near that, or joined to it, write the repeated 
word in full ; as, Dee'^Dee^Per, deeper and deeper —St er 2 - St er-Ing'ger, 
stronger and stronger — Bel 3 -Bel-Ker, blacker and blacker — Der J -Der- 
Pee, drop by drop— Sen^-Sen-Tee-Bay, century after century — Kay 1 : 
Kay l -Ker, quicker and quicker— Gret 2 -Gret-Bay, greater and greater — 
Tee 3 :Tee 3 -Bay-Jay, outrage upon outrage. 

(d) In a corresponding manner, write words composed of similar 
parts, and also similar words occurring together, or separated by a 
word which may be safely omitted ; as, Pee^Pee-Ket, pickpocket — 
Ef i-Ef-Del, fiddle-faddle— Tee'-Tee-Tel, tittle-tattle— En 2 : Vee 2 -Lens, 
nolens volens. 

§ 277. Omissions. — (a) When one or more words have been omitted, 



200 THE COMPEiTDITJM 






leave a blank proportionate to the number of words omitted, and write 
a caret below the line. 

(b) When the omission extends to the end of the sentence, write a 
long period just before the commencement of the next sentence. 

§ 278. Punctuation. — It is very essential to the correct and easy read- 
ing of reports, that the period should be denoted either by greater 
space than usual between words, or, what is better, by the long mark 
of the period. Other pauses are usually omitted. See § 78, R. 1, b. 

Rem. In reporting testimony, an answer should be separated from the preceding 
question by a long vertical straight line, and from the following question by the 
long period, or by commencing a new paragraph with the following question. 

§ 279. Doubt. — When, as it sometimes happens, the reporter fears 
that he has misheard a word, a letter d, made thus, <§", may be written 
under the doubtful word, to express his doubt. This character may 
be written instead of any word which the reporter has entirely failed 
to catch. Such words may usually be supplied, when transcribing the 
notes, by reference to the context. 

§ 280. Materials for Writing. — Various remarks with reference to 
pens, pencils, reporting paper, the manner of holding the paper, the 
turning of leaves, and many other matters of use and interest to the 
phonographer, may be found in the first volume of the ' ' Phonographic 
Intelligencer." 

Questions. — § 269. How may words of similar or different meanings and the 
same consonants be distinguished ?—§ 271. How may 'I' be represented when 
standing alone? [Rem.] How are I and he commencing phrase-signs distin- 
guished? How are they distinguished when following other words? — § 272. What 
kind of a tick may be used to represent thr when it can not be conveniently ex- 
pressed otherwise? "Write 'since thr, w ould thr.' [Rem.] May the Ther-tick be 
sometimes employed for other? For what purpose may the Ther-tick take an Ef- 
hook? an En-hook? a circle ?— § 274. How is a numeral denomination, denoted by 
several ciphers, to be written ? "Write 2,000 ; 400 ; 6,000,000. How may the termina- 
tion ' ty' in 20, 30, etc., be written ?— § 275. How may the greater and smaller divi- 
sions of a book be expressed ?—§ 276. How may a repeated clause be denoted? 
May a comma be sometimes substituted for repeated words ? How are repeated 
words, separated by a word which may be omitted, to be written ? "Write ' deeper 
and deeper, century after century,' etc. "What other words are written in a corre- 
sponding manner ? Write ' pickpocket, fiddle-faddle, nolens volensS — § 277. What 
is to be done to denote the omission of one or more words ? when the omission ex- 
tends to the end of the next sentence ? — § 278. What is said as to punctuation in 
reporting? How is an answer to be separated from questions? — § 279. How ia 
doubt expressed ? 



APPENDIX. 



A. 

AN EXTENDED PHONETIC ALPHABET— STENOGRAPHIC, 
SCRIPT, AND TYPIC. 

§ 1. The vocal elements may be divided into two species : 

1. Yoicels — sounds produced by modifying the current of the voice ; as, a, au, 
oo, 6. ^ 

2. 6b?? sonants— sounds produced by a greater or less interruption of the current 
of the voice (whispered or sonant) ; as, p, b, 1, r, h. 

VOWELS CLASSIFIED. 

§ 2. Of vowels, viewed with respect to the number of the organic conformations 
required for their production, there are two species : 

1. Simple Vowels— those produced principally by the conformation of the tongue 
or the lips ; as, e, a, 6, oo. 

2. Composite Vowels— those produced by the concurrent conformation of the 
tongue and the lips; as the German 6 and ii, and the English u. 

§ 3. Of vowels, considered with regard to the manner of their emission, there are 
two species : 

1. Oral Vowels — those emitted entirely through the mouth ; as, a, 6, au, i, a. 

2. Orinasal Vowels — those emitted through the mouth and nasal passages simul- 
taneously ; as the French en, in, on. 

Eem. 1. For several reasons depending upon the representation of the vowels, it 
seems preferable to regard Nasalization as an accident of the vowels rather than as 
the differentia or characteristic of any species. 

§ 4. Of the simple vowels there are two species : 

1. Lingual Vowels — produced principally with the tongue (Lat lingua) ; as, e, 
a, ah. 

2. Labial Vowels — produced principally with the lips (Lat. labia) ; as, au, 6, 66. 
Eem. 1. In producing au there is required the modifying action of the cheeks as 

well as the lips; but the term 'labial' describes it with sufficient accuracy, since the 
sound is dependent principally upon the conformation of the lips. 

§ 5. (a) Vowels, viewed with reference to their property of quantity, may be di- 
vided into — 

Long Voirels—RS, e, a, au, 6, 66. 

Short VoweJs—as, i ; e, a, 6, 66. • 



202 APPENDIX. 

(6) Viewed with respect to the property of quality, Into pairs ; as, 6 (old), ' 
6 (whole) ; a (patte, Fr.), 6 (pot). 

§ 6. Vowels may be variously divided with reference to their accidents : with ref- 
erence to the language in which they occur, into— 1. Native. 2. Foreign. With 
reference to the manner of their representation, into Dots, Dashes, Parallels, etc. 

§ 7. Composite Voicels. — These vowels are produced by the concurrent conforma- 
tions of the lips and tongue ; that is, by the synchronous utterance of a lingual and 
labial vowel, as of e and 66 to produce the German u=French u ; of 6 and e, to pro- 
duce the Grer. 6 = Fr. eu = Eng. e (earn) ; and of ah and au, to produce the Eng. G. 

§ 8. Order and Relation of the Simple and Composite Vowels. — The Simple 
Vowels are divisible into two species— Linguals and Labials— approaching each 
other most closely, in likeness, or relationship, of sound, at ah and au (the most 
perfect vowels) ; the former series being connected with the consonants by the rela- 
tionship of e (the weakest of the lingual vowels) and y (the weakest of the lingual 
consonants) ; and the latter series being connected with the consonants by the re- 
lationship of 66 (the weakest of the labial vowels) and w (the weakest of the labial 
consonants). The natural order and relationship of the Simple Vowels may then 
be presented in the following manner: 

(y) e, a, ah | au, 6, 66 (w) 
Let the first series be represented by a dot, and the latter series by a dash. Now if 
these signs are written by the consonants, in the order of the sounds of the different 
series, a natural representation will be secured. See Compendium, § 47. Let the 
Composite Vowels be arranged in the order of the lingual vowels which enter into 
their composition ; thus, u, 6, ii. 

Eem. 1. Order of the Vowels Mechanically Determined.—" Professor TVillis, in 
experimenting on the nature of sound, discovered that in placing a reed in a com- 
mon organ pipe, the length of which could be varied at pleasure, and forcing the 
air through it with a pair of bellows, he obtained, according to the length of the 
pipe (beginning with the one expressed by the shortest, and proceeding to the one 
given by the longest), the following series of sounds, as expressed by the italicized 
vowels of the given words, viz.: 1, me; 2, mote; 3, mar; 4, maw; 5, mow; 
6, m?/rrh ; 7, mood ; and that, continuing to lengthen the pipe, the same sounds 
were still heard, but in an inverse order, 7, 6, f>, 4, 3, 2, 1 ; and that, still farther 
increasing its length, the same identical sounds again occurred, but in the first 
order; and so on throughout."— CumbriJge Philosophical Transactions, vol. iii., 
pp. 231-262. 

Eem. 2. "The natural order of the primary vowels, as determined mechanically, 
is I E A O TJ or U A E I [= e a ah 6 66 or 66 6 ah a e], as heard in the 
English words field, vein, far, owe, ooze. This order should be so well impressed 
upon the memory that the vowels may be repeated fluently in either direction, as it 
will be found useful in studying the inflections of words ; and on this account the 
elements are here treated according to the order of their affinities."— Ha ldemari>s 
Latin Pronunciation, § 59. 

In the following section Prof. Haldeman says substantially, that the closeness of 
e and 66 approximates them to the nearest consonants, into which they are apt to 
fall, the first into the semivowel y, and the last into the semivowel w. a and 6 ex- 
hibit, in a less degree, the tendency to become consonants; while ah, from its 
openness, and its want of relation to the extreme vowels, is farthest removed, from 
the consonants, and is consequently the type and most noble of the vowels. 

Eem. 3. From Professor Haldeman to the Author.— "The run of your vowel- 
ecale is close to nature', especially as you do not put urn [u] near the labial vowels 
owe and ooze [66]. Its improper position [between 6 and 66] arose from the inter- 



APPENDIX. , 203 

pretation Prof. "Willis put on his experiments, determining ^rn to be the natural 
vowel of a vocal tube, without giving a guarantee of the accuracy of his ear." 

§ 9. Stenographic Representation of Foreign Vowels. — A convenient representa- 
tion of the foreign vowels, without disturbing the representation of native vowels, 
is secured thus : 

1. Eepresent a foreign lingual vowel by an Arrow-Point ( v ), made heavy or 
light (according as the vowel is long or short), and in the place of its native mate. 

2. Eepresent a foreign labial vowel, or the lengthened ii, by a Lance-Point ( v ), 
made heavy or light (according as the vowel is long or shorty and in the place of 
its native mate, or nearest relative. 

3. Eepresent a foreign composite vowel (except lengthened u) by a parallel dash, 
written in the place of the lingual vowel which enters into its composition ; thus, 

J ii, I 6. See § 7, above. 

Eem. 1. The lengthened ii, though a composite vowel, is indicated after the man- 
ner of representing a foreign labial vowel : thus, — | , so that its sign may corre- 
spond to the settled sign for the native mate, ii. 

Eem. 2. The mate of au, though not previously recognized as an English sound, 
occurs in such words as lost, long, cross, etc. ; and may therefore, instead of being 
represented by a light lance-point in the place of au, be denoted by a light dash, 
written in the first vowel-place, at an oblique angle with the consonant, in analogy 
with the method of representing 6 (whole), the mate of 6 (old). See Compendium, 
§48. 

§ 10. Typic and Script Representation of Foreign and Shade Vowels.— Eegard 
the vowels as a descending series from e to 66 ; and let an acute accent (') be placed 
over a type to make it a sign for a sound next higher in the scale ; and let a grave 
accent ( v ) be placed over it, to make a sign for a vowel next lower in the natural 
scale ; as, i for the e of befall, a. short vowel next above i (it) ; 8^ for the French 6, a 
long vowel next below 8. (b) If two vowels occur between any two vowels repre- 
sented by distinct types, depress the upper type to represent the higher one of the 
intermediate vowels, and elevate the lower type to represent the lower of the inter- 
mediate vowels. To illustrate — say that two vowels occur between 8 and ; write 
8* for the higher, and o' for the lower, of the two intervening vowels. The same 
plan of indicating foreign or shade vowels may be pursued in longhand. 

Eem. 1. For convenience of conversation, let those sounds which are provided 
with a distinct phonotype be called Type-Sounds or Sig*-S*unds, and let the others 
be called Typeless Sounds. 

Eem. 2. In some cases in this Appendix, an accent is, in consequeace of a lack 
of the proper types, placed after, instead of over, the type affected by it. 

§ 11. Nasalization of Vowels. — A Nasalized or Orinasal Vowel is produced by 
partially opening the nasal passage, while the correct position for the production of 
an oral vowel is assumed by the tongue or lips. 

Eem. 1. Prof. Haldeman, in his " Latin Pronunciation," § 100, says : " A nasal 
vowel, like a nasal consonant, is made by pronouncing the letter with the nasal 
passage open." 

§ 12. Stenographic Representation of Orinasal Vowels. — (a) In phonetic short- 
hand, denote the nasalization — 

1. Of a Dot- Vowel — by a comma-tail appended to the dot ; thus, ( ' ). 

2. Of a Dash-Vouel— by waving the dash; thus, ( ~ ). 

8. Of an Arrow-Point Voicel — by curving the point downward ; thus, ( ** ). 



204 APPENDIX. 

4 Of a Lanee-Point Vowel— by curving the point upward ; thus, ( ^ ). 

(5) Or the nasalization of the Dash, Arrow-Point, and Lance-Point, Yowels may 

be denoted by a small circle written beside their signs ; thus, N^- = Fr. bon. 

§ 13. Typic and Script Sign of Nasalization. — In typography and longhand, let 
the nasalization of a vowel be denoted by a circle or by a comma-like sign after or 
below it ; thus, e< — a<. 

VOWEL-DIPHTHONGS. 

§ 14. Diphthongs may be divided into Vowel and Consonantal Diphthongs. 

Rem. 1. For a definition of diphthongs and the condition of their production, see 
the Compendium, § S7. 

§ 15. Vowel-Diphthongs may be divided, with reference to their stenographic 
signs, into two classes : 

Class I. — the first element shown by the direction, and the second element, by the 
position of the sign. 

Class II. — the first element shown by the general direction, and the second ele- 
ment, by the particular direction or form of the angular sign. 

Rem. 1. Class I. may be subdivided into two sections : — Section 1 — the direction 
of whose signs is north or east, and whose first sounds are common elements of 
diphthongs. Section 2— the direction of whose signs is north-east or south-east, and 
whose first sounds are denoted by parallel dashes, and are rarely elements of diph- 
thongs. 

CONSONANTS. 

§ 16. A consonant is a sound produced by the obstruction, to a greater or less de- 
gree, of the current of the voice ; as, p, b ; f, v ; s, z ; w, wh. 

§ 17. Consonants may be divided, with reference to the direction of the breath — 
expired or inspired— into two species: 

1. JExpirates— as, p, b, and most, if not all, other elements of speech. 

2. Inspirates—as the sounds produced by sipping, swallowing, snoring. 

Rem. 1. Expirate consonants are always to be understood as denoted by the term 
* consonants,' or by a consonant-sign, unless it is otherwise specified or indicated. 

§ 18. Consonants may be divided, with reference to the kind of voice emitted or 
inspired, into two species : 

1. Spoken, or Sonant, Consonants— &&, b, d, zh, z, g. 

2. Whispered, or Surd, Consonants — as, p, t, sh, s, k. 

§ 19. Consonants may be divided, with reference to the organs by which, or the 
points at which, they are produced, into four species : 

1. Labial Consonants— V. Outer ; as, f, v ; 2'. Middle ; as, p, b ; 8'. Inner ; as, 
w, wh. 

2. Lingual Consonants- -1°. Dentals (1'. Outer; as,th; 2'. Outer-middle; as, dh; 
8'. Inner-middle ; as, t, d ; s, z ; 4'. Inner, as, sh) ; 2°. Palatals (1'. Outer ; as, smooth 
r; 2A Middle; as, y ; 3'. Inner; as, ch in Ger. Ich); 3°. Gutturals (K Outer; as, k, 
g; 2'. Inner; as, k\ g x ). 

3. Glottal Consonants— as, h, coughing, growling, groaning. , 

4. Nasal Consonants — as the sounds of sneezing, snorting, snoring. 

Rem. 1. The term * Nasal Consonants' is here employed to denote certain conso- 
nants produced in the nose, in contradistinction from certain oral consonants which 
have the accident of nasalization or twanging, and which are properly termed 
Nasalized Consonants or Twangs. Let the term Narals (formed from the Latin 



APPENDIX. 205 

Kares, nostrils) or the word Hyc'trals (formed from the Greek |U/u)C7"/;p, a nose) be 
used to denote the consonants produced in the nose, and then the term Nasals may- 
be employed as usually heretofore to denote the twangs. 

Eeai. 2. A class of sounds, which may be called Lingua-Labials, may be pro • 
duced by placing the tongue near the lips, or in complete or partial contact with 
them. Spitting, for instance, is speaking a lingua-labial t, which is probably de- 
noted by the first two letters of the Greek KTbU), to spit. These lingua-labials may 
be denoted by a p or b (to denote the point of obstruction), followed by a smaller 
dental letter, to denote the kind of obstruction ; thus, p f , b^ ; p^', bz' 1 ; p*, b*. In 
Stenography, the second letter may be written through the first near the end ; thus, 
PeetTee, the sound produced by spitting. See the Comp., § 268, E. 6, b. 

§ 20. Consonants may be divided, with reference to the kind of sound produced, 
into the following species : 

1. Mutes, or Expladents — as, p, b ; t, d ; k, g. 

2. Hough Sibilants, or Hushes— as, f, v ; th, dh ; sh, zh. 

3. Smooth Sibilants, or Hisses — as. s, z, ph = Gr. (p, bh = Ger. w. 

4. Liquids, or Hums — as, w, wh ; 1 ; r ; h. 

5. Jarring Consonants, or Trills— as, the snarling of a dog ; the interjection of 
contempt produced by the trepidation of the lips ; a deep growl ; hawking ; loud 
snoring. 

6. Orinasals, Nasalized Consonants, or Twangs — as, m, n, ng. 

Eem. 1. (a) The phonetic student should carefully observe what kind of contact 
or relation of the organs is required for the production of the different kinds of con- 
sonants specified above, (b) The Explodents require the organs to be brought into 
complete contact, or forced from that position, according as the sound is final or in- 
itial; and with greater or less suddenness and force, according as the sound is 
whispered or spoken, (c) The Eough Sibilants, or Hushes, require sueh an appulse 
of the organs that the voice may be forced through, in a broad, thin sheet, as it 
were ; as in producing sh, zh ; f, v. (d ) The Smooth Sibilants, or Hisses, require the 
voice to be forced through a small aperture, as it were a small tube decreasing in 
diameter toward the outer extremity, (e) The Hums, or Liquids, require the organs 
to -be in the most open position consistent with the formation of a consonant. 
(g) Trills require the voice to be expired or inspired between the appulsed or ap- 
proximated organs with sufficient force to cause them to vibrate with greater or less 
rapidity, according as the sound to be produced is a surd or a sonant, (h) The Ori- 
nasals, Nasalized Consonants, or Twangs, require the current of voice through the 
mouth to be partially or completely obstructed, and partially or fully expired or in- 
spired through the nose, according as the sound to be produced requires a complete 
contact or an approximation of the lips or of the tongue. 

§ 21. Of the Expression of Sibilants, etc. — The letter h has been extensively used 
in Eomanic print to express sibilation or aspiration ; thus, kh, gh, to denote the sib- 
ilants of k, g; sh, zh, to denote the rough sibilants corresponding to the smooth 
sibilants, s, z ; wh, rh, mh, to express whispered w, r, m. In stenography, h (ex- 
pressed by a dot, or by a tick joined at the beginning or written through between 
the vowel-places) may be used for the same purpose, when it would not be better 
answered by swelling a light line or tapering a heavy line ; thus, 

^ ^ ■« r r ^ -* r ( 

w wh; y yh; ng ngh; k kh; g gh; 1 lh. 

§ 22. Expression of Trilling .—Let trilling be denoted— in typography, by an in- 



206 



APPENDIX 



verted colon ( : ) before the letter; thus, : b;— in stenography, by a -wave-like sigi; 
written through the stroke ; thus, \ = : b. 

§ 28. Expression of Inspiration. — To indicate that a letter is to be inspired— in 
typography, place a small circle before it ; thus, °wh ; in stenography, write a per- 
pendicular ellipse before it; thus, >^ = °wh = the sound of sipping. 

§ 24. AN EXTENDED ALPHABET. 



Lingual Vowels. 
























1 2 


3 


4 


5 


6 


7 


8 


9 


10 


ii 


12 


13 


14 15 16 :- 


1 1 


r 


i 


e 


e 


e' 


e 





a 


& 


a 


G 


a' 6 V =Q 


A, . 


# 


• 


& 


• 


. 


e 


0. 


&■ 


. 


a 


ec 


* 



Labial Vowels. 


















17 18 19 


20 


21 


22 


23 


24 


25 


26 


27 28 


o o x O" 





ec 


G 


tf 


o 


VOL 


u 


ui u N 


^ . 


. 


o> 


& 


, 


• 


• 


u 


X^f . 



Composite Vowels. 

29 30 31 32 33 34. 

ua u ce b id u 



Consonants — Labials. 
35 36 37 38 



39 



40 



41 



42 



43 



I - - 



46:— 



b p 


V 


i 


bb pb 


w q=wH 


= b 


'•P 


m 


mh 


Bee Pee 


Vee 


Ef 


\ \ 


Way 


^ 


:Bee 


• Pee 


Em 


Emh 


Dentals. 




















47 48 


49 


50 


51 52 


53 


54 


55 


66 


57 


58 


d t 


d 


b 


J c 


Z 


3 


1 


lh 


= d 


•t 


Dee Tee 


The* 


\ Ita 


Zhay Ish 
Palatals. 


Zee 


E« 


El 


r 


•'Dae 


:Tee 


59 60 


61 


62:— 


63 64 


65 


66 


67 


68 


69 


70:- 



iihnnli ax J 5 rrhyyli 

'At :Rhay En Enh Dee Tee / / Ar, Ray Arb, Rhay Yay Ykay 



Gutturals. 
71 72 

g k 

Gay Kay 

83 84 85 86 87 88 

r N rn. x n nh -g -k 

Ar, Ray Arh, Rhay Ar,Ray Arh,Rhay :Gay :Kay 



73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 

g' k g=gh x=kh g> x N r rh r' rfr 

Gay Kay ■— — Ghay Khay Ghay Khay Ghay Khay 

85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 :— 

:Gay :Kay Ing Ingh 



APPENDIX 



207 



Glottals. 














93 94 


J5 96 


97 


9S 


99 


100 


101 :— 


jl r 


rh ai 


u 


@8 


h 


: r 


: A 


Nasals. 














102 103 10-J 


105 106 


107 




108 


109 


110 111. 


n a im 


nn h' 


: H 


dj= 


=3= J 

Jay 


tc=g 

Caay 


dy tyh. 


Close Vowel-Diphthongs. 












Class L — Section 1. 












Section 2. 


112 113 


114 115 


116 


117 


118 


119 :— 


120 121 


ii iu=q, 


ei eu 


ai=i 


au 


6i=e ou=^ 


ui uu 


. . y 


• • 


• f 


• 


• ? 


r 


• • 


1 1 


> l 1 


v l 


1 


AI 


1 


1 1 


1 <l 


1 >l 


1 


v| 


' 


a| 


1 A 




Class II. 










122 128 124 


125 :— 126 


127 


128 


129 


130 131 


132 133.^ 


Bi Bii ai 


au ei 


e3i 


ee 


eu 


ni uu ui ua 


1 ,1 1 


,1 >l 


<l 


H 


<, 


i f \ 

V A 


H *l 


Open Vowel-Diphthongs. — For the distinction between the 


open and close 


vowel-diphthongs, and the mode of distinguishing them stenographically, see 


the Compendium, 


§§88; 95; 93, 


E. 2. 











Eem. 1. Transition Symbols.— -"When setting from the ordinary cases of types, 
for the new letters of the preceding alphabet, other letters may be substituted ; thus, 



1 


5 7 


9 10 13 


15 17 21 


22 27 


29 


1 


13 e=i3 


93 a=a a=a 


a=o =a n 0=6 0=0 


0=O UT=U 


ii 


so 


31 32 


33 34 49 


50 75 89 108 


109 113 


11G 


U 


o=ce e 


v u dh= 


tH th 9 ng=Tj j 


9 V 


T 



At Nos. 120, 121, it was necessary to use transition symbols for the first element 
of the diphthongs, from lack of the proper phonotypes. Some of the transition sym- 
bols are formed by inverting types, as will be discovered by turning the page up- 
side down. No. 22 is formed from b (inverted q,. 6 is a well-settled sign for No. 
21 ; but the use of 6 for the vowel of not is as well established. Therefore, to avoid 
as far as possible the confusion and misunderstanding which would result from a 
diverse use of letters, o, o, instead of 6, 6, have been given as the optional signs of 
Nos. 21 and 22. No. 79 may be formed from a small-capital f. 

Kem. 2. Caution.— In the Compendium it was found convenient to mark the 
vowels of < her, ask, whole' thus, e, a, 6. The different use of these letters in the 
extended alphabet should be carefully noted. 

Eem. 3. Inverted~Type Letters.— Several of the letters of the preceding alphabet 
are produced by inverted types, as those for Nos. 59, 93, 94, 98. 

Eem. 4. Long Vowels.— The preferable way of representing the long vowels is by 



208 APPENDIX. 

types distinct from short-vowel types ; but when such types can not be procured, a 
long vowel may be represented by a short-vowel type with the macron over it ; thus, 

1 5 is 27 

I e a u 

(&) In English printing, if the author or printer would depart so much from pho- 
netic principles, e, a, I, u may be employed for j, v, i, n, that is, for the vowels of 
Dee, day, die, dew. 

Eem. 5. Doubtful Quantity. — When the quantity of a vowel is doubtful, it is best 
to use a short-vowel type. In printing English it will be unnecessary to distinguish 
between the long and the short quantity of ii ; and thus an inconvenience which 
might arise from lack of the type of the long quantity, will be avoided. 

Eem. 6. Optional Types.— {a) For the monotypes X), c], and their scripts, there 

may be substituted, if deemed preferable, the following types and scripts: o J> 
($■ /. The type cj has the merit of being a combination of dj, the phonotypes 

for the elements of the diphthong denoted by that monotype ; but j has the advan- 
tage of being a simpler and more agreeable type, and also of having a good sub- 
stitute ( j, an inverted f ) in the common " case." The line crossing j may be re- 
garded as the lower tick, or serif, of d, that is, as a vestige of d, just as the dots of 
the German ii are regarded as the vestiges of an e. (I s ) Sounds Nos. 65 and 66 may 
be represented by J N j% O c% or, to avoid so far as possible the use of diacritic ac- 
cents, by J v j, C % c. 

Eem. 7. Type-Capitals. — The type-capitals for the composite vowels and conso- 
nant No. 75, are the following : 

29 30 31 32 33 34 75 

ixc, u ge % in n s 

Eem. 8. Scripts— (a) In the preceding alphabet, scripts have been given for every 
new distinct vowel-type. This having been done, it was of course unnecessary 
to furnish the scripts of the accented letters. In four instances the scripts of old 
letters have been given, to show the distinction between them and some of the new 
scripts, (b) The writing letter (small or large) for No. 31 is formed of the scripts of 
Nos. 21 and 8 closely joined as are the two letters composing the type, (c) The 

script-capitals for Nos. 29, 80, and 33 are respectively Ud^ , uh ', #-• (d) The 
scripts of most of the new consonant-types have been presented in the English 
Phon. Alph. (see Comp., p. 15). The scripts for Nos. 66, 75, and 93 may be the fol- 
lowing : 

C6 75 98 

(e) The small writing letter for the type No. 79 may be ***,' with the de- 
scending stroke running below the line. If preferred, the type ' r,' descending like 
a ' p,' might be substituted for r, while T should continue to be used for the capital. 
(g) If thought necessary to distinguish between Nos. 59, 67 ; and a better type than 
that presented above is desired for No. 59,— a reversed r may be substituted for i, 
with a large and small ^ for the large and small script, and with 1 as the type- 
capital. The scripts of E r will then be &o #. The large and small script for n 

(the guttural r) may be the script sometimes employed for r, namely, /I/ (h) The 
scripts for the remaining new types may be rude copies of the types, as A for j, 
T for r. 



APPENDIX. ■ 209 

Eem. 9. Phonographs— (a) The consonant-phonographs have been indicated so 
far as possible by their syllable-names. (&) When the mark of trilling ( : ) is placed 
before a syllable-name, it is indicated that the stenographic sign of trilling should 
be written through the phonograph denoted by the name, (c) In several instances 
it was deemed unnecessary to make in stenography as many distinctions as were 
made in typography. For instance, Tee and Dee may be used for t\ d N and x, a, 
two different varieties of t, d ; a knowledge of the language in which these occur 
rendering a distinction by signs unnecessary. So, also, it was deemed unnecessary 
to make any stenographic distinction between Nos. 71, 72 and 73, 74 ; or between 
Nos. 75, 76 ; 77, 78 ; 79, 80. (<2) The signs of Nos. 46, 62, 92 are respectively Emh, 
Enh, Ingh; that is, Em, En, Ing, with an h-tick written through near the end. 
Arh, Ehay may be either Ar or Ray, swelled toward the end, or with an h-tick writ- 
ten through near the termination, (e) For ordinary purposes no distinction is re- 
quired to be made by stenographic signs between Nos. 59, 60, 67, 68 ; and any mode 
of expressing r may be employed for either of them ; the reader depending upon 
the relation of the sound, and a general knowledge of the language, for distinctions 
which have not generally been made in typography, (g) A considerable conve- 
nience may be secured, in writing German, by using instead of the signs given 
above for bh and ph the different signs for w and wh. No error in reading can re- 
sult from this, if the reader will bear in mind that w and wh, though closely resem- 
bling bh and ph, do not occur in that language, (h) "Where no stenographic sign 
has been provided for a sound which has been furnished with a type, it has been 
supposed that a stenographic sign was unnecessary, as there-would be no occasion 
in stenographic writing to represent such sounds, or that the printing sign (abridged 
if possible) might be used as a stenographic letter. (£) The second element of Nos. 
110 and 111, and similar combinations, as ny (omon), ly (Wi^'am), may be expressed 
by brief Yay joined to the sound of the first element, when no vowel follows; or 
written in the place of a following vowel. 

Eem. 10. Brief Way or Yay in the Vowel-Places.— When it is desired to write 
m or y in the vowel places, lengthen one horn of Weh or Yey to indicate a follow- 
ing arrow-point vowel— of Wuh or Yuh, to indicate a following lance-point vowel ; 
and join at an angle to the brief Way or Yay the signs of vowels denoted by parallel 
or oblique dashes ; thus, 

1 1 H H ,1 J J J i -| H 

wi wi we we W89 wa wa' wa wa wo wo' 

1 "I j l j J J J J J 1 'I H 

yi yi ye ye y& ya yA' ya ya yd yb' 

H ( H *l H J J % \ 1 'I <l 

wo' wu wb v wo x win' wu wu wii wo we 



*l 1 l ? ! 7 i ij ■ i! I I M l M l 
yo' yu yb v yo v yra' yu yii yu yo ye 

Eem. 11. Accent.— The arrow-points (' K ) being required for diacritical pur- 
poses, the accent may be denoted by lance-points placed after the accented sylla- 
ble, and to denote the different inflections, written in different directions ; thus, 



210 



APPENDIX. 



N falling inflection, ' rising inflection, I rising circumflex, ' failing cireum- > 
flex. These signs may be placed in different positions with reference to the line, to 
denote the different pitches of the voice ; say slightly above, even with the top and 

bottom, and slightly below, the small letters ; thus, a a 7 a, a . Instead of lance- 
points, straight light lines might be employed for accents ; the signs of the falling 
and rising inflection being joined to denote the circumflex ; thus, a rising circum- 
flex ; v falling circumflex. The inverted period ( ■ ) may be employed as an indif- 
ferent mark of accent ; that is, to denote stress, but not the inflection, of the voice. 
Rem. 12. The Diastole. — When combinations of two letters (as dh, th, lh, mh, ng) 
which are sometimes or frequently used for single sounds, are employed for two 
sounds, the letters may be separated by a diastole ( . ) ; thus, fut.hold, in.got. If the 
accent should be on the syllable ending with the first of the two letters, the mark 
of accent will serve the purpose of the diastole ; thus, foot-hold. Experience with 
the common print shows that- it is generally unnecessary to insert the diastole; 
and it may therefore be usually omitted in phonetic print, the reader being pre- 
sumed to be sufficiently well acquainted with the language to determine the words 
in which the diastole, or separation, occurs, even when its sign is omitted. 



§ 25. TABLE OF EXAMPLES AND DESCRIPTIONS OF THE VOCAL ELEMENTS. 

28. loc. E. look, foot ; I., Sp., G., Hu., 
sh. u ; Gr. u in diphthongs. 

29. G. il 1. ; Fr. 1. u ; L., Sw., D., 1. y ; 
Gr. u 1. 

30. G. u sh.; Fr. sh. u; L., Sw., D., sh. 
y; Gr.'u sh. 

31. firm ; G. 1. 6 ; Fr. 1. eu ; Sw. 1. oe. 

32. her, earth, s£r ; G. sh. o ; Fr. sh. eu ; 
Sw. sh. oe. 

33. long quantity of No. 34. 

34. up, cur. 

35. m. la. so. exp. — Say. 

36. m. la. wh. exp.— pay. 

37. o. la. so. hush— -me. 

38. o. la. wh. hush— /ie ; L. f ; G. v and f. 

39. m. la. so. hiss— L. J = Gr. F (digam- 
ma) ; Heb. Bheth. 

40. m. la. wh. hiss— L. PH; Gr. (p. 

41. i. la. so. hum— way ; L. v ; Gr. ou fol- 
lowed by a vowel. 

42. i. la. wh. hum — whey, why. 

43. m. la. so. trill — a sound made to babies. 

44. m. la. wh. trill— an interjection of con- 
tempt. 

45. m. la. so. twang— we, aim. 

46. m. la.wh. twang— tempt ; Fr. schiswe ; 
W. mh. 

47. i.-m. d. so. exp. — do, add. 

48. i.-m, d. wh. exp. — to, at. 

49. o.-m. d. so. hush — then, breat7te ; m. 
Gr. 6 ; Heb. Dhaleth. 

50. o. d. wh. hush— ^Ain, breath; Gr. Sr. 

51. i. d. so. hush — Zhay ; Fr. j. 

52. i. d. wh. hush— she ; Fr. ch ; G. sch ; 
P. x, ch. 

53. i.-m. d. so. hiss — Zee, is, buzz. 



8. 



eel ; Fr., G., L., Gr., 1. i. 
belong ; do., sh. i. 

ear. 

ale ; Fr. el.; G. e 1. ; I., G., 1. cl. e ; 
L. e 1. ; Gr., y\. 

Sunday; Fr. e sh. ; I., G., sh. cl. e ; L. 

sh. e. 
loc. E. bear; Fr. e (meme); L, Sp., 
G., 1. open e ; G., Sw., 1. a ; YV. e. 1. ; 
Gr. r} (?). 
ell ; Fr. open e unaccented ; L, Sp., sh. 
op. e ; G., Sw., sh. a ; "W. e sh. ; Gr. s. 
care, bear, fair, there ; "W. 1. a (bach, 
little). 
at ; W. sh. a (bach, a hook). 
, half, alms ; loc. pa, ah. 
ago, ask. 

arm, ah ; Fr., I., G., Gr., L., 1. a. 
, harrow; AUaJi; Cuba; aisle; Fr., 
I., G., Gr., L., sh. a. 
Fr. a (pate). 
, pot, not, dot. 
. all, form ; Ga. a. 
. lost, log, dog, forbid, oil. 
. loc. E. mourn ; I. 1. open o. 
. I. sh. open o. 
old, oh ; L. o 1. ; Gr. w ; Fr. au, and 
1. open o ; G., D., "W., 1. o. 
. none, obey ; L. sh. o ; Gr. o ; Fr. sh. 

open o ; G., D., W., sh. o. 
. loc. E. sowl ; I., Sw., 1. cl. o ; Hu. 6. 
. I. sh. cl. o ; Hu. sh. o. 
. long quantity of No. 26 ; soon, 
fwll, could, new, now; Fr. sh. ou; 
W. sh. w. ' 

. food, fool ; Fr. 1. ou ; I., G., 1. u ; W. 
1. w. 



APPENDIX. 



211 



54. i.-m. d. wh. hiss— see, hiss, 

to. i.-m. d. so. 1mm — Zaw, Ml; B£y. 

56. i.-m. d. wh. hum — ply ; "W. 11 {Linn- 

elly). 

57. i.-m. d. so. trill — 

58. i.-m. d. wh. trill— 

59. i. d. so. trill— trilled r ; L. r ; Gr. p. 

60. i. d. wh. trill— trilled rh ; L. rh ; Gr. p. 

61. i.-m. d. so. twang — «o, on. 

62. i.-m. d. wh. twang— cents; W. nh. 
Go. o. p. so. exp. — Arabic Dad. 

64. o. p. wh. exp.— Arabic Ta. 

65. i. p. so. hush — G. g (konig). 

66. i. p. wh. hush— G. ch (Ich, welc-7ien) ; 

the hiss of a goose. 

67. o. p. so. hum — ear, breach. 

68. o. p. wh. hum — p/'each. 

69. m. p. so. hum — you ; L., G., j. 

70. m. p. wh. hum— inAwmanitv ^see L P. 

P., §41); L. hj(HjeroK" 

71. o. g. so. exp.— go, egg ; L. g. 

72. o. g. wh. exp.— key ; L. c ; Gr. x. 

73. i. g. so. exp.— a so. corresp. to No. 72. 

74. i. g. wh. exp.— Ar. Qaf ; Heb. Qoph. 

75. o. g. so. hush— G. g in Tag; Heb. 

Ghimel. 

76. o. g. wh. hush— G. ch in Dach ; L. 

ch ; Gr. p^; Heb. Khaph; TV. c. 

77. i. g. so. hush — produced farther back 

than No. 73, and requiring the re- 
traction of the tongue. 

78. i. g. wh. hush— Ir. gh in \oug7i. 

79. o. g. so. hiss— probably the m. Gr. y. 

80. o. g. wh. hiss — 
8!. i. g. so. hiss — 
82. i. g. wh. hiss— 
S3, o. g. so. hum — 

84. o. g. wh. hum— 

85. i. g. so. hum — the London r. 

86. kg. wh. hum — 

87. o. g. so. trill — gargling. 

88. o. g. wh. trill — hawking. 

89. i. g. so. trill— Newcastle burr (?) ; Fr. 

provencal r (?). 

90. i. g. wh. trill -hawking. 

91. o. g. so. twang— sing; G.^ung; L. n 

prec. c (q, x), g, ch ; Gr. y prec. y, 

x ' £• X- 

92. o. g. wh. twang— siwks ; TV", ngh. 

93. gl. wh. exp.=coughing; the sudden 

stoppage of the voice ; or sudden 
expulsion after its retention. 

94. gl. so. hush— groaning from excru- 

tiating pain. 

95. gl. wh. hush— wh. groaning. 

96. gl. so. hiss — gentle vocal groaning. 

97. gl. wh. hiss— a forcibly uttered h. 

93. gl. so. hum — very gentle groaning— 

an indifferent vowel. 
99. gl. wh. hum— he ; a gentle jerk of the 

breath. 



10 0. gl. so. trill— gentle croaking. 

lul. gl. wh. trill— a sound produced by 
stammerers. 

102. n. wh. exp.— sneezing. 

It3. n. wh. hush — inspired, gentle snor- 
ing. 

104. n. wh. hiss — forcible inspiration; 

snufiing. 
If 5. n. so. hum— an indifferent vowel ut- 
tered through the nose. 

106. n. wh. hum— nasal h. 

107. n. so. trill — inspired— loud snoring : 

snorting. 

105. so. cons. di. — edge, jest, gem. ; I. g 

bef. e or i. 

109. wh. cons. di. — etch, chest; G. ts3h ; 

Fr. tch ; I. c. before e or i ; Sp. ch ; 
Hu. ts. 

110. so. cons, di.— verdure = verdyoor ; 
,-h Hu. dj, dy, gj, gy. 

111. wh. cons. ai. — naiure=ncityoor ; Hu., 

Sw., tj, ty. 

112. cl.— see Eem. 9. Open— being. 

113. cl.— new, dew, due; Sw. u (V); L. 

primitii/s ; TV. Duw. 

114. cl.— loc. E. day—dei; L ei; Gr. si ; 

G. ei, ey (?) Open— laity ; Gr. 7J. 

115. cl. — loc. E. iioic = neu; L. eu; Gr. 

gu. Open— Tlr. r\u ; I. jE'wropa. 

1 1 6. cl. — aisle, eye, fine, buy ; L. ae ; 

Gr. ai ; Du. y ; G., D., ai. Open- 
aye ; Gr. a. 

117. cl. — loc. E. now=nau ; L., G., D., 

au ; Gr. civ ; P. and old L. ao. 
Open— I. \aude. 

118. e\.—oi\, boy; G. oi, oy. Open — 

drawing. 

119. cl.— now, out; D. ou. 

120. cl.— Fr. \ui (Ellis). 

121. Perhaps this occurs in E. wh^c. 

122. cl.-Fr. ceil (Ellis). 

123. cl.— 

124. cl.— loc. E. sky; TV. ai. 

125. cl.— loc. E. now; the pronunciation 

usually typified by ' eow ;' " heow." 

126. cl. — loc. E. by, going; L. di ; Gr. 0J. 

Open — snowy; Gr. O). 

127. cl.— loc. E. snow; L. ou; Gr. ou. 

Open — Gr. gju. 

128. cl.— Gr. OS. Open— Zoe; Gr. 6)S. 

129. cl. — Gr. oot. Open— Noa/i/ Gr. wa. 
13'. cl.— loc. E. eye,\iuy ; G. eu. 

131. cl.— loc. E. now. 

132. cl.— loc. E. doing ; L. fii (hui). 

Open— "Louis ; G. pfui (Ellis). 

133. cl.— \j\ua. 



bef. 


before 


cl. 


close 


cons 


. consonant-al 


D. 


Danish 


d. 


dental 


di. 


diphthong 


Du. 


Dutch 


E. 


English 


exp. 


explodent 


Er. 


French 


G. 


German 



g- 


guttural 


Ga. 


Gaelic 


gl. 


glottal 


I. 


Italian 


i. 


inner 


Ir. 


Irish 


L. 


Latin 


1. 


long 


la. 


labial 


loc 


local 


m. 


middle 



212 APPENDIX. 

Eem. 1. Abbreviations.— The following abbreviations have been employed in ? 
the preceding part of this section. 

m.-G. modern-Greek 

n. nasal 

o. outer 

op. open 

P. Portuguese 

sh. short 

so. sonant 

Sp. Spanish 

Sw. Swedish 

W. Welsh 

wh. whisper-ed. 

(5) The term "local English" is employed with some latitude of meaning to 
denote a local, vulgar, peculiar, or individual pronunciation in contradistinction 
from what is regarded as the general and correct pronunciation. 

Eem. 2. Yowel-JSIates. — The vowels of each pair differ in quantity, but not the 
slightest in quality. Pronounce a long vowel quickly, staccato, and you produce its 
short mate. Prolong a short vowel, and you produce its long mate. By this method 
of experiment may be demonstrated the contrary of the following statements, which 
are substantially made in Mr. Ellis' Alphabet of Nature : 

1. That No. 1 and No. 4 are exact mates, 

2. That No. 4 and No. 3 are not exact mates. 

3. That No. S and No. 5 are exact mates. 

4. That No. 7 and No. 8 differ in quality. 

5. That No. 13 and No. 10 are mates. 

6. That No. 12 and No. 13 are of the same quality. 

7. That No. 16 and No. 17 are exact mates. 

8. That No. 18 and No. 20 are mates. 

In other words, by this method of investigation it may be demonstrated that Mr 
Ellis has failed in almost every instance to pair the vowels correctly. Having so 
done, the difficulty of disposing of the true short quantities led to his unfounded and 
unsupportable distinction of ' long, short, and stopped,' and the bigamous relation 
of some of the vowels necessarily left others unmated. 

Eem. 3. Broadened or Deepened Voioels— The vowel-sounds produced with cer- 
tain positions of the lips or tongue may be modified by drawing back the soft palate, 
or by otherwise enlarging the cavity back of the vowel-aperture. This modification 
of the sound may be called deepening, or rather broadening— for deepening refers 
rather to pitch, which is not affected by broadening. This modification may be in- 
dicated by some diacritic sign, say by the macron ( " ), or by a point, under the sign 
of the vowel modified ; thus, £ as a sign for broadened or broad u. No. 15 is really 
No. 13 broadened ; but as it is generally considered a partially developed au (No. 
17), it is accordingly represented by a depressed ah (No. 13) or an elevated au (No. 
17). Nos. 15 and 16 then appear merely varieties of Nos. 13 and 14; and, indeed, 
many who do not attend to the broadening pronounce such words as ' God, not, 
pot,' etc., with the true short quantity of No. 13, as if spelled Gahd, naht, paht, that 
is, with No. 14 ; while others, mistaking this broadened a (No. 14) for No. 17 or 18, 
pronounce ' Gaud,' etc. 

Eem. 4. Of the Vowels.— {a) An instance of No. 7 is afforded when ; bear, fair, 
care, there,' etc., are pronounced with the long quantity of the vowel of ell (No. 8), 
These words as usually pronounced, contain the long quantity (No. 9) of the vowel 



APPENDIX. 213 

of at (No. 10). An old Athenian poet, Cratinus, is quoted as saying that the cry of 
the sheep is Rr r " Yarro considers [the Latin] e the vowel in the cry of the sheep 
(Bee), so that it can not be the English e." (Haldeman's Latin Pron., § 56.) Neither 
can it be the sound of No. 5, but rather No. 7 ; and this probably was^the sound of 
the Gr. r\ ; that is, the long quantity of Epsilon, as is indicated by the old form of 
the letter, and by its substitution for double Epsilon. "While it is very probable that 
the Latin and Greek vowel-letters were employed to represent each a certain grade 
of sound, it is equally probable that they were not used invariably for precisely the 
same qualities. Hence, while the L. e or the Gr. 7) may have represented at times 
No. 5, it may also have been used to represent Nos. 7 and 9. 

(b) An example of No. 11 is afforded when ah ! is pronounced with a slender, 
treble sound, closely approaching No. 9. For the position assumed by the tongue 
for the production of this vowel, see I. P. P., § 146. 

(c) No. 19 is not unfrequently pronounced' instead of No. 17, by persons who 
neglect to properly open their mouths in pronouncing all, Gaul, etc. The word 
mourning, in some mouths, closely approximates morning, or, what is the same 
thing, is pronounced with No. 17 instead of No. 21. 

1 (d) No. 23 is produced by placing the lips midway between the positions for 
Nos. 21 and 27. The author has heard several public speakers substitute this sound 
for No. 21. 

(e) The French eu is represented by some phonologists as having two sounds — 
one of which is No. 31, which is described as close; and another, which is described 
as open. The latter, we presume, is composed of Nos. 9^and 21, instead of Nos. 7 
and 21. The open eu may then be represented by ce\ This open sound is not dis- 
tinguished in French orthography, if it is in pronunciation, and a separate steno- 
graphic sign seems unnecessary. It might be represented by a lance-point in the 
second vowel-place. 

(g) The long quantity of No. 44 occurs perhaps in urn, and similar words. 

Eem. 5. Of the Consonants. — (a) The sounds 39 and 40 are produced by emitting 
hissing voice (sonant or surd) between the lips approximated as if about to produce 
b, or as in whistling with the lips kept close to the teeth. In Spanish, b between 
two vowels has the sound No. 39. 
~ (b) Americans generally pronounce r, rh (Nos. 67 and 68) where the English, 
Irish, and other Europeans pronounce i, ih (Nos. 59 and 60), trilled with greater or 
less force. The thick-tongued Londoners either omit r (that is, smooth r) ending a 
syllable, or substitute for it a guttural hum (n), that is, r produced with the root, in- 
stead of the tip, of the tongue, which sound has generally been mistaken for a or jj. 

(c) As w is to ra, so is y to a, and so is £ to n. 

(d) Dr. Eapp says in substance, ' To fix the sound of the m.-Gr. Gamma (sup- 
posed to be No. 79), pronounce g mute (No. 74), and substitute a soft aspirate,' 
which is to say, that m.-Gr. Gamma is a smooth sibilant formed at the point for k ; 
in other words, that it is ' an o. g. so. hiss.' He distinguishes this sound from the o. g. 
so. hush (gh) and hum (r x ). He also regards it as belonging to the class of h slightly 
aspirated, that is, a, which is a smooth sibilant. 

(e) The glottis having been closed by the epiglottis, there will be no opportunity 
for the resonance of the sonant breath prior to the breaking up of the perfect con- 
tact thus formed, and hence there is no sonant sound corresponding to a (No. 93). 
A grunt, which was at first supposed by the author to be the sonant of a, was found 
to be l L9 !' Laughter is a rapid enunciation of syllables composed of some one of 
the glottal consonants followed by o, a, j, or some other vowel, according to the 
taste of the performer. Laughter which commences vigorously and gradually sub- 
sides may be represented thus: AAiAiAUAHe.aa.ha.ho.o.a.o.o. 



214: APPENDIX. 

(g) The glottal sonant hum is believed by the author to be that indifferent unac- 
cented vowel which occurs in the fiual syllables of ' able, people, river, paper, open, 
schism,' and which, in careless or hurried pronunciation, is substituted for most of 
the unaccented vowels; 'metal, cotton, evil, awful,' for instance, being pronoiinced 
c metal, kotan, ivel, ofal.' In ordinary printing it will be sufficiently accurate to rep- 
resent this sound by the sign of the vowel of met (e), which vowel more frequently 
than any other falls into this obscure sound. The sound denoted by h is the sub- 
stratum of all the whispered consonants ; and q is the substratum of all the sonant 
consonants. In other words, the different obstructions of the current of voice 
represented by h produce the different whispered consonants; and the different 
obstructions of o produce the different spoken consonants. The different modifica- 
tions of the current of voice denoted by o produce the different vowels ; and the 
different modifications of the current denoted by h produce all the vowels whis- 
pered. 

(h) The ordinary gentle breathing, when through the mouth, may be represented 
by o ; when through the nose, by g. As such breathings are not sufficiently audible 
for any purposes of speech, they are not placed among the vocal elements. When 
the breathing is more or less violent, it produces the sound of some one of the con- 
tinuous glottal, or nasal, wh. consonants. 

Eem. 6. Varieties of the Dental Explodents and Sibilants.— Several varieties of 
the dental explodents and sibilants may be produced by making the required kinds 
of contact back or in front of the points for t, d ; th, dh ; s, z ; c, j. These varieties 
may be distinguished, if it should be deemed necessary or desirable, in accordance 
with the principle of § 10. Th% dh are mates, and the hushes of I' and d', of 
which s' and z r are the hisses, or ' lisps,' more properly ' lis'ps.' A strengthened s 
and z, which may be represented by s v and z\ are produced with a hiss-contact back 
of the point for s and z. The true hushes of s v and z y are the sounds denoted by the 
phonotypes c, j. The true hushes of s and z may be denoted by c r , j', or by sh, zh ; 
to produce which, the upper surface of the tongue, very near the tip, and not the 
tip itself, must make a sibilant contact with the gums at the point for s. These 
sounds are very probably those denoted in Polish by s / and z'. They are a delicate 
c and j. In the production of c, j, says Dr. Eapp, 'the tongue is broadened and 
seemingly endeavors to fill the whole palate.' As s and z are to s v and z s so are c r and 
y to c and j. If the varieties of c and j were to be distinguished by types, the ele- 
ments of ch in cheer and j in jeer would be given as tc', dj'. But this would be 
entirely unnecessary, because the attempt to produce c and j in such connection 
naturally develops their varieties, c' and j v . Two varieties of t and d are produced 
by contacts back of that for t; namely, t v % d v % produced by bringing the tip of the 
tongue in contact with the outer portion of the hard palate ; and V and d\ produced 
by a contact midway between the points of contact for t and t*\ As t VN and d VN 
would be inconvenient signs, there have been provided in their stead new types, 
i, a. An inspired x (°x) is the cluck of a hen. 

Eem, 7. Varieties of L. — A variety of 1, which may be denoted by T, may be pro- 
duced by bringing the tongue in contact with the palate at the point for y. This 
sound in connection with a following y is the Fr. 1 mouille ; of which more will be 
said in the following Eemark. This I mouille exists in French in theory only ; for in 
practice the sound of the 1 is always suppressed, and, by many speakers, that of the 
y also. (?>) If the tongue is placed in contact with the teeth at the point for th or dh. 
and the voice be emitted along the sides of the tongue, a variety of 1 will be pro- 
duced, which may be represented by V. This sound is supposed to occur in Polish, 
where it is represented by 1 crossed lite t or f. (c) A trill of 1, or lh rather, may be 
produced in this manner: Having placed the sides and tip of the tongue in close 
contact with the upper teeth, force the inspired or expired breath between one side 



APPENDIX. 215 

of the tongue and the teeth. The inspired trill of lh, that is, °lh, somewhat resem- 
bles the cluck of a hen, and is well known to most persons, being frequently used 
in driving horses. 

Eem. 8. Liquid or Softened Consonants.— {a) A sonant or surd y combines with 
most of the other lingual consonants so readily as to develop consonantal diphthongs. 
These combinations have usually been mistaken for simple elements, especially 
when occurring in languages in which orthographical expedients, as gl, 11, gn, lh, 
etc., have been necessarily resorted to for their representation, or for the purpose of 
distinguishing a diphthongal from a non-diphthongal relation of the elements, 
(o) The term Liquid, or rather Softened, may be usefully applied to a consonant 
when it has combined with y to form a diphthong ; but if so used, the term may be 
applied as appropriately to t or d as to 1 or n. (c) There may be several modes of 
distinguishing between the diphthongal and non-diphthongal relation of elements. 
Some mode is occasionally required, as in distinguishing at times between the diph- 
thongal and non-diphthongal relation of y to a preceding consonant. Almost any 
method would be preferable to having separate types for diphthongs. To show 
that a y follows a letter in diphthongal relation to it, various plans have been re- 
sorted to ; thus, the liquid 1 is represented by 11 in Spanish, lh in Portuguese, gl in 
Italian. Softened n is denoted by n in Spanish, by n' in Polish, and by gn in 
Italian. Mr. Ellis proposes to affix an apostrophe in certain cases to liquid letters ; 
thus, 1', t', k\ (d) But the best mode, for all purposes, of distinguishing between 
the diphthongal and non-diphthongal relation of sounds, is to represent the two 
elements by their separate sign3, and of the two cases of a diphthongal or non- 
diphthongal relation distinguish the rarer from the more frequent by the diastole. 
To illustrate — the diphthongal relation of tc being more frequent than the other, let 
tc represent a diphthong when not separated by the diastole (t.c). On the contrary, 
y rarely forming a diphthong with preceding consonants, let its relation with them 
be understood to be non-diphthongal unless followed by the diastole ; thus, to dis- 
tinguish the Italian from the English pronunciation of bagnio^ write ' bany.o' for the 
former and * banyo' for the latter. 

Eem. 9. Of the Diphthongs.— (a) It is doubted that ii, oe, oa, ua comply in every 
respect with the conditions of a vowel-diphthong; at least, the relation between 
these elements is not so close as between 6i, ou, iu, etc. (o) The stenographic sign 
for ii may be employed for ii as in ' earring'— in which case the sounds represented 
do not constitute a diphthong— or for the diphthong constituted by ii or ii. Some 
of the other diphthongs may be employed with a like latitude. Phonotypes in the 
representation of diphthongs in ordinary printing may be employed to represent 
specific and not individual vowel-qualities ; thus, ei may be either ei=L. ei=loc. E. 
ay as in day=dei; or it may be ei=ei=Gr. Sl=G. ei, ey (?)=the slender, pusillani- 
mous pronunciation sometimes given to the English long i. So eu may be eu=the 
L. eu, or eu=eu=Gr. sv. The diphthongs of oil, aisle (=isle=I'll), though strictly 
6i, ai, may be represented in ordinary printing by oi, ai. However, when individual 
vowel qualities are to be denoted with precision, and distinguished, every vowel 
should be denoted by its exact sign, (c) In the Introduction to Phonotypy and 
Phonography, and some other works, the author has spoken of the vowel of ask as 
being the first element of the English long I, and as the vowel denoted by a in after, 
Cuba, particular, etc. Such statements have been made with the knowledge that 
they were not the exact truth, but the nearest approximation to it possible without 
a vocal analysis so discriminating as not to be generally received in the present 
state of phonological knowledge and education 

EXPRESSION OF ASriRATION. 
§ 26. In the Introduction to Phonotypy and Phonography, and in the Phonetic 



216 APPENDIX. 

Quarterly, the author has employed the combination hw to express the aspirate of 
w ; but upon a careful review of the questions involved, it seems best that h, when 
used as a diacritic sign, should always be placed after the letter affected by it. If 
Jiw be used for the aspirate of ic, consistency requires hi instead of tli for the aspi- 
rate of t. 

Kem. {a) If preferred, the Greek spiritus asper (**), an abbreviation of II, may be 
employed instead of the diacritic h, placed over or after a letter ; thus, p^, b 1 *, I) r . An 
inverted comma ( ' ) may be used for the same purpose when the type for the spiritus 
a3per is not " in case." (b) The whispered ng may be denoted, in transition pho- 
notypy, by n ; and u simply may be used for ng or ngh, as in the common print, 
whenever its situation is equivalent to a diacritic mark or a distinct letter ; as in 
1 sink, sankcon, sinks.' In such cases, a law of euphony requires a guttural instead 
of a dental twang before the k. 



— Ci 



^%m^&ip]& iiS? 



k? 







^S^S* 



EXERCISE I. C. 1-25. 

i. \.__.:Z I I \_ .../ \.// "//\ 

v_ j. l. j ._£:;.^ <f.3 w...:.:^.. ^ _( ..) ....( ) 

2. X ^...^.L_ ...^ I | | .. <±. ~l 



, 5j sw, t ...(. w 



:\ z^ _~z 

k_\ u L U 



^ jZN. ^7 U A. 



-1 



J 



( 



-o ....V. 



o... c...c u 



^ ^ ^ 

v C=s 



^ y. ^' ^' ,0\ -V' 



5. [12,4, <?.] 



-/ ^/ 



// ^ /\ Y A 

c^:.a..y<^ 



4 


EX. II. C. 26-32. 


1 


1. 1 


t> I k . i t t f I| t> -l i i I 


{ 


/ (, i 


t f -^ _p -^ — _o _*»/,/ / 


9 


/ /: 


r x r p ^ ^ ^ Vo ^ c ) ^ 


r~& 


/-^> -^Ci 


S_^ v_p « v£p ^-P ^ 0. d h O 6 


f > 


S S I 


' x r xx ^ > / 't J> / x 


J 


2. \\ V" / V, V^ \ l~ ■ J. 


y i 


r 1 ^ 


k ^ j> f y v y ^ 


X 


^N "^ -t^ -f >? £ ^ <^ L. 1- 


/^ 


V 


EX. III. C. 33 — 55. 




i.\ 


\ \ r r /• ^ )• <r r j. j s 


> 


/<" < • . 


'• ^ ^ m ^ \ -i i / v. ') •) 


x 


2. \ 


l / / k. ( -) J J r .r ~\ 


x 


3. \ 


/- A 1" 1- Vi (- )' jr X J C ,<~ 


■\ 


X < 


x c x v i- f- a A "I 


-i 


-1 -( 


-) ') X ^ A : 1 X 




4. 'I 


•).' •> 7 r .) -\ -X ^ L 


-(- 




• 


! 






V, 



r r s- \ -I. I' x 



V 

\ ^ _*' ^ '.,-■ r\ r r a ^ "V 

-n- x_ _^ ._/ \ n X -( . 

7. '} -I .1 T r i T + i 

T'-T 1 _>- 1="+-; i ii i -f s 
EX. IV. C. 56-77. 

i. x x \ k v \ x r f -f .r :r j 



■r -f / / •/ / / 



c 



r r r r ^ ^ ^ -^ 



2. \ X \ 



%; ^ ?< v^r ,y 

* V X X X X X X X 



X 



X x x v i- I)" *- I' b 

/■ £ /• rf ^ i i I ■ 
^ W St Vb Vi, .w ') J > 



4- 4- I- tr 

k &y- ay ex •> 



c (? p vp <? i? r ^ > T ~l iz . _. _^ _*> 

T- *> ^~0 <^> ^-^ ^> "V >^= >> 

__!=> cp —f —f* - ^j* ^p 

A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 
3. J 3 •) ) ■). X_ J ') ") -) J 
J >- V L. L- X t, K > >•- 

4. ■ "^ "H) = Mrs. Na _j3 "\> (a )' )" T 

n~ a so\ ^ a o o ~> \. "o o - ^o 

5. 
6. 



Vb ^ Q A- -f -f 

U-^ GL^ .....^ <3L> 6>^ 



I l • 
I I /. 



\ I / \ I / 

x I. / 



v . 1 "I ') 



\ 



> s, L V 

> "I L 



T 



<t. C ( ^\...... ■&■ ™S -^r> -- /o. '. -o 

EX. V. C. 78-86. 

x ..../..= ; , I (!) '[!] i J' ? (?) [?] 

- ()■ [] ( 3 — "'--"■■ ' A 



■cr- q- {} 



t t 



.6 



1 , 



V 



S. X X 



EX. VI. C. 87-104. 

i. \ x <l c ^o r r r r ) v y c 



"S 



hi. 



"~s 



) 1 1 



W._J? 



f 



-r ,r 



i, a x,« x, ^ ^ r 

/" C ^ tr. 

3. V V I L -; -^ 

» <1 v3 V, V X* 

4. \< V \,< L l< b< 



y* ^/< 



«f 



r c err 
f... tf.. r t 
r n s* ■> > A 

r ^ ^ ^ 
< ^ 1 I. c 
c C ^ <: 



5. v -v ) 



it 



r \ )• 






\ 

\ 



T 



A 



EX. VII. C. 105-114. 

i. v.. c. \ ^ C S " v / 



c 



2 / x 



v_ t_ ^ < ^ x_ . } ^ 

K L_ 1^ ^V J- J^^\ - T ^ • ^7 
X\ X\ V r^ ^ ^ X~ X - 



•/ 



X 



r 



b 



__^ ^r ^ 



^ u 



X"X 



kx- 



x^\-l_ -xx_ n- 1 jj k L 

/_ 1 A ~ A i7 x~^ £^ G 
xX ^ /^ V X. P- 



^ ;> ^ > ^-> v - 

x -/ ~j xx r^' xi x' 

— xl, A / X \ \ 






£. 



L o 



^ 



xx 



5. X7 XxT 



-XT 7: 






e. 'V L \ 

^ i -^ P 



A 



i V W 



i v 



L 



7. [c 108] V \> \ V V. -' " 

109] x^. \ y y p K 



V 



8. IC. 



r 



:i. C. 115-125. 



t . A =wee "X "V ^ ^' 1 \ °>' °^ ■> *S 

^ ( 

hr V V\^ \^_^_^j ; r c c rr 
2. \ \ tz. . zz.. ^_ ■ ~_ "~ : ^ 1 -1 -1 1 1- 



•1 -l / 7 / V -v v k t ^ ^ 



V 



O . IS </. 



y= y y y -y 

- y r y r L 
T ^>t .^i ^ 



4. 1 



10 


■ 


EX. IX. C. 126-143. 


1. 1 i -{ =f «r r Ti l_ :. 


< ■ — * 


c c c 


n U L 


1' r 4* - J 1' f ±22 V» ^> 


f-7-— t-|- 


i K_ % v ^J} ( /- 




2. P ^ ^/" ±^*. _^ 


^ v^ 


i^ %y ^/ h," -u. ~~x ^ i vj<° 


3. l \ i 'i r n l l v v. 


\ N. 


4. ^^ £_^ ^ T V" ~^o, ,X__ _i 




EX. X. C. 144-149. 


i. -\ \ \ 1 -1 1 J 1 -1 1 ' 


1 -| -I -.r +r 


r ^ ^ =^ .r r ^ _y .( "( / „ 


' / J *-. _, 


_, ..= r ^ ■-> 1 ^ .^ ;::: ; 1 


/ . *> ^ -1 


a. ^ v- v "s ^ "S v 




3. ^ V- V "S ~S ~s v~ 


• 

[C. 147. R. a] 


4.'\ 1 "*l "- V , \ 1 1 V 


[C.148,R.l] 


5. .-<r r ^_ <x a ^ cf< 


- 


6. .i'" T <X = X ^>f = M 


~[C148,R.2] 



11 



7. 



<r^ 



a 



A 



'... [C.148,R.2] 
'* X X' A 



y\ s. 



r 



A) 



A 



v 






EX. XI 



l. ^ ^ ~Y 



A? >i A 



c. 


151 


-153. 


^ 


^ 


7\ 

\ 


1 


-1 


A 



< A\ A\ X\ A A - 



<4 A9 sO A) 



^ 



\ X 



^ ^ K ', k~*- 

A *~A A A A ; 






\ 



4. VVX/I/I^I/A- 



> 



.: 



L/ k y a- 



(*. 



EX. XII. C. 154-158. 

i. r ~r r re s° -c a r t a 

2. C\ A Af r r^ a.. A ■ ) r 

' AA A" A- ; G < - - 



12 



4. V \- V" V 



>Y 



■). 



>. 



</. 



■--r -v- 



k r r a- /- 
cr >- 'H y -y 

v~ ^k "V V 

~^T V Y °"l 



r? 



y. 



8. r ( c 



' v^ v- y 



10. 



I> l>- ty 'V V 



y 



EX. XIII. 0. 159-169. 
i. \ %, \> \ c :_ . ^ ^ ^< T. ^~ \ V 

i? .*■- ,.., -r v j<_ =_ ,_ !± 'L c \ 



X 



n x "i v v r r r 



v. .i t 



r- i 



^ 



I 



13 






r -i 






r 






'7 \ 

i; \ r\. ^i' ^i< 

i 

< 



5. v *l is, y - _ ^ _ k ' ••■ -> ^ A^ 



X 



s^_ / 



14 



1. 



EX. XIV. C. 170-173. 



\ c .r r ./ 



2. X X ' 



r .1 ii x v i 



t 



x 



^\ 



f 



- 1 \ f 1 \ 

3. J^ J^ ~X. X. ^ "1 



<s 



4. -X *i 



"i <C \_^ 4^ U 



t_ 



•1 "I //_-; 

], L X ; L ( ^ { L 

5. x^ x_ x^ x_ \; ^ ix "t_ ' L, V-- 
X L ^x X ^7 ^ 



EX. XV. C. 174-180. 

X X 1 T_ - 






XI V^ ^ 



<p- 



7 



^~> 









IS 



EX. XVI. C. 181-189. 



\ 



\. S. 



i r /■ 



s a 



x s. 



2. A \ 

i.'V \ J- 



K I- M' /• A _= _ 

s ^ V V v v 
K -\ \ *\ x ^ k \. \ 

j- j- j- j. i /• / ^, '^ 



3. <. x k= k, v, -v j 



"^ 



a a- 



;* 



I— 



» ; <rS' ~^S 3 S- (, J" I J 

x v t- ^- v r r?_ _. r* n 
J J- J- j ./ s- / / </ /' /" 

i H ^. /f V *v<° ^. n Xj _ 

^ A- A * \ ;* ."^ ~1 '\_- 

w ,-" X" x . 



10 



V3 \ V X" P" 1 



•V V V V- X- ^ ^ 

t — i L_c> L_p L_^ I t 



vy 



EX. XVII. C. 190-196, 



xfc ^ ^ ^ do M: ^b i^ ^ 



2. J- \ -^ -^ J ' 

J^ ^\ ^' •-, ^ v 



r**> 



v Lo .!_, 



- V ^ 



3. ^ 

4 . Is — 2> 



_<?. ^ ^ v ^> ^ -^ 

v" V-' .h, tp ^ -U ^ ^ 

i^> ^ ^ Na Is ^ _^ Y? \s 



17 



5. 'M v 



^r ^ \r Y 



■^_^ 



f 



u^ w 



J; J" J"" 

EX. XVIII. 



1 i \i ^e •- — =e — -aa ~, — e. 

"vp V>. \> TO. ,T> ;t N? 



3. 
4. 



I U\^ \ 1 



V C. (O 



■\. 



<X T\. I 'J, 



[C. 197, R. 2] 



j? $ 



1 - w > - v 

5. [C. 197, R.4J \ )>• / 



<$ v ^ ■--•- 



"^ 



U=^ 



i. 



EX. XIX. C. 204-206 



u 



^Ts 1 '-^b 



■^ 



*7 *s/ 



n 



"i ^) 



j 



^\ n i n * 



I- 



n- 



i • \ i 



18 



EX. XX. C. 207-211 



t 



"■A ^ 



v 



- ^b ., 



-o 



( t 



V 



J 

^ 5 



H3 



> ( ( 



3. 



n. rr vi' \. "i; 



5 ( f * ^ 



^ ^ 



i 



EX. XXI. C. 212-224. 



1. T Added 



v. - ^ <= 2 1 1 



2. D Added. 



\ 


. v L .1 


T ~3T 

. 


\ A 


\ 


X x "> 



I- I I. 



^ ^ 



N V 





h 1. 1: i i /v 


< 


/: / 


•/ 




r ~ 


i 


n] T 




_ .^ ki. V-.. Kj V< 


<L 


5.. L, 


^ £ 


•) 


o ..£ 


~. j. 


J. A J ..^ 4 




3. T Added. ..£ 


\/ 


<s^ cd- 


< \ v 


X 


\ 


\ v 


^ *< < 




^ pv , V y f- 


.... cr+- ...*... er 


c 


CL 


^ 


t_ 






^ ^< 9- 5- X j 


K 


* .* 


N 


\i 


r 




L i- j. t 






{ \J- 


Vo ........ 


r~s 


£■ 


1. r 


X 9 


s. s />■ 



L9 



^ vi? . v^ s- s ^- \- V M \ ..£ «* l I r u 



^ ; ........ 'Na 



V 



°** r= ,c 



4. D Aided. ...£.....?£. r . v - 



•\ . ^ .. _ ^ ^ ^ cv c. „ V f r> 1 



<v :... n <\ 



<v <\ f 



V 1- -1 



nv •* 

1 r L 



^ c 



c 



^ " A ."£.'"£ "v ">° *) > ,j $ ..£ 



^ v .^ \ v ..„•_. .1 j- £ .1 



^ ^- V3 



vl C J <? «r- 



r- r a 



/? "3 






~,. 



f-r$ ■ ~a 



"X --^ 5~ <* ■<-* -o t^] i 



\« v ^ *v «v n, <v , \ 



r ^ c ^ D- 



t r 



x 



3- 3- ..: 



°s X 



V 1 



20 


? 


5. r r c sr r l r: Y r r ... r ....r .,r r 


c ~> :> 


"> ^ .. ^ ^ ="^ ...J. — ^ ^ — ^ n 


. ^ °' 


.— .w ,— ,w _ ^ 


^* ^ y. 


<5T^ <s— ^ <n Qi. q_^ <*_• . •""ns /• 


• 
r^b <-p 


6. x « \o _o q_d ..'..;. . '\i D ^ ........ v . £s 


v v <* ^ 5......1. ~ ...! l..:\ .1 ^.::1 -*. J : 


~1 ^ /* 


r. V ^ .\ > L ^ L "^ I k ^ 


...^. "7* 


r~^y > = — v [c. 213, r. i] ,.n^.. O *0 


^ r" 


, V *\ % % c p 

c -) V^ ^-^ < -^^ p ^ \_ cf . ^ ~~^ h 


r 


Y..... "1 n^ ..l±. ^ y: ■> ^ ^ v^ 




'Ov .)^ ^ t^£, ^ru ^V ; V_ V 


/ ± 


^ J • X 


:< ■% ^ .:£. n, ...£ ^ IT... *l ..— 


^ ^^ 


^- ^ - - — V ,~^ ^ ^ •? 


^ n. ; 


(, % ^ ...a., u «si .:- i . 




8. I-, H; ^ X, ^ Xly I, 1, k^; 


1; 


9. [C. 220, i~] H- "~T ^ 'H' ^_ ~1- 


- H; 


*i \ ~i ; Z 1 ,n /i -n Z 1 ^i vi J 


ti \A '^l' "^1 /^1 M ; H X / ^1 ; 


1 1 


i 








1 

21 


A A A C A A 


a h c~\ r~\ ^\ r^ 


S H *s s ^ 




J A^ ^ A\' 


r— | *-^ -^ 


10. [c. 149, 5,R.2] A* A' A A' A A 


11. [C. 212, R..6] V V" \ V 1 ,~v- ^T 1 -T? ^Vi 


/?' /"^ r- ^ % "~" 1 \- 


> v > r - 1 i 1 \ 


- ^ _* ^ v 


vi ...~ ■^ 1 .. J r<~n /v 1 


s ^ °s ^ 


-^ >n ^ " 


EX. XXII 


. C. 225-230. 


l. "b I, ^5 V v ° 


^\ °V V. "^ \y A...:. IO 


l v 1* 1^ H ^ve 


"H- ~^i ~"S^ 'X.r^ 


-\f> T^T» ^^1. 1, 


^ ^< A: ^\. A£ "if. 


j ^_ xr a^ A 


A A ^ o^, V a. 


s-vi -X -^\ w ^ *~ 


<* w \ •, "Si A '.!Z*. ^~ 


T_.. . V-s -A n^ 


^ — \, ^^ Ln If 


->> T\-.*-\ f ^ 


a. i. J. j. ; "tlo "lip ~*\. 


«rA\. ~A, ~~^A- ~%^> 


\a 'v ; \ A^ A ^*A 


^ i n< i- ..rr.. ^ 


A / 1 ^"-. X ^ "v ^x 



22 



X. ^V ^ ^ V "V 



\ 



^^ 



■V— I 



U 



.::£. -^U I ■ • -Hi. 



-* 1 



]• 



, v, n r^ ^ 



o; 



-1- ^ -I- 



"1" 



*-^t 



•r -t- 



V 



^n J? 



£^ 



V >J 



EX. XXIII. C. 231-234. 



\ X ^ l ^- 



\ v 



^ s%« C i ^v 



,•: 



- o 






- ^— \ 

> /: l - -i <* 



_p' 



^ \o >7 y 'y 

4 ^ -V ^ ^ - 

A „ ^„ A- <A- 










23 


2. } } 


uT 1 




^ ^ ^ r ■ ) 


~r- , ^ . ' . 


/ ; L . 


i>. " "- v ^ v_ ^v i 




EX. XXIV. 


C. 235-241. 


1 . I^s \^"^ <7~V ^-6~n 


rS "V^ ^ o> t-2 


^r V 


V 


</■■ n>-^ ^ p 


QJ 1 

2. b J b 


I xt ^ . 




u ^ 


H L K 


\rV * 


3. XT/ - 


-V v" -a 


1 . V l ^N ; \ 


I— ^_p 


— i r^ 


^ L^ _^ 9 V 


^ \y z 


1.. In ,^ 


— — ^ 


4. r\ 


/I /I 1 ^ 


^ L, , ^ v^ "v^ 




^ ..1 ^ 


— CW 1 -^ 


n ^i *-i 


i 1- J" ~X_ . 


^ ^1 : 1 — 


5. 1 1 


/- 111V 




-, -^~ 


. ^ = /- ~~ 


V _ _ t 




EX. XXV. 


C. 242-249. 


t. ^n 


-'A " 


I 



24 



S>^ 



X 



li 



>../... r^ 



x_^? 



7; 



^ 



c 



C £ 



\ 



c ^ 



\ 



L- 



\ 



~^K$phorisnris oj t Re -c^hcierits^ 

(T x Sen. L 



<^ 



\ ... x Catc. 



V '• V 



, > 



<l 



1 A, ) ) 



V-P -> 



C y Cic 

I . ^,.x Cic. 
\ 



J 



Sen. 



Cic. 



^l x 



x Tei?. 



Tacit. 



r 



<L «S 



? p ? 



V * 



I 



25 



V ) ° '. ^f ' 



Tet. 



>. r 



Cie. 



c ■- — 



"C 



" >< ^n. ^C — \ ^ / ' j, X { - Cie : I ' 
' r / „ ^ ^ x ^ — a. , Cato. I ° ^ s fc ^ 

h " **> J ° ( r-a - \ > x vi_ x cic. v -v „ 

f ■ '*- y ~ ' { , \ ( < ° . ~ x Sen. 

x ( „ cic. . _ v r 

1 \ t 



i i 



\ J 

— -j x Ad Herrenn. 

' / -» ^ ~V j . V . di=. 

? I ) / o v_ 



H: 



V, 



) ; ( 
< ^ I . ^ 



i ^^ « V 



) 



Luc an 



■V /* 



~f 



. ) 



\ 



"A 



) 



< i x Cic. 



\ 



"i 






Cic. 



26 




;> 


p ^ 


' ' I- V, - ' 


■% ■ i^ 1. c V. ^ • c *- 


J , i , 


3 \ J ~ \ 


■^ /Hor. 1 ^ /\JT \ — , 


, ; s r 


^ s s $.., r 


_ ^ x Sen. _ ^ ) ' V ! 


V *- ( 


tf — n X/ U_^ x> x Cic. b c ( , . w . 1 


! 


O \w C_y 

> > 


r" ^ V^- x Hor. ^ 


r. L 


- • - X " 


| x Cic. ........... vy ^ 


4* i 


-Nj / ' .A. 




K 7 


( c ^ '- _ 


x ben. c/ , v_ a 3 

1 


^-^ ^> 


— , ^ > 


:) < ^ ^ -f '; I y -f 


N> x-jx. ^ ? (^ 


> Cj> 'si ^ -Y 1 * x Cic. 


i ~ \ 


\ r ^ ' 


r> ^1,1 n \ 1 , r\ 


-/* V 


3 H ^ s 


r ^ x Claud. J-^i ~'~T 5 .1 


Jy 


" ' \ x * ^ 


/^ ..(. " 1 VI' x Cic. 


~ » c 


, , . r, „ v. 


f^ ~\~ x Sen. ^ >4 \| 


'I. -~» - 


-— < / - 


J ^ x Cic. "V )* ) 




O- /*» - C^ , 


1 .^,/,.^ « r^ \ 


\^ ^ 


*-w ;)-/) , 


( 3 V x 


1 „ V l , 


^ N '. ~ - . 


, ' ,^_: r „ /£, t,p. 



27 



t, c \ 



( 



krV 



\ 



J 



N J x Pined. 

C , ' J ■ ^ 



ft . 



* ' ' V- 



I., x Cie. KA~ 



( y 

" » Cic. ° ) 

Jhe lol and the Cjoatv 

n - ^ — , " "> n k .- i ~~\ y ■ - 
■ -^ ~ J^ X sU\^ ' \ , ( h 'c 
^ i ^ - 1 r x ( ^ ^ l, ; v. 



! ~/r ^q ) 



. / 

X 



r 



^ 






) . /A [ 



< ^ 



, V n 



W~ - C 



v 



28 

j - V. . ( r v , >" ^ , i ( , V / N 
\ , ( .1 -v ^ < • , 4 - _ ^ ^1 , .^ 

't /TV ' ( ^ ^, /-^ ^ , I. 1,, S. ( 4 \ -| 
'Bqnaon ami ? i?yf]?uq.^- 

^ , ^ / > ^ v i- ^ _^ x - u ^ , ■ yi 

.^ \^. ^^)^r\,y , ) .17. l\ , , 

' Aj) , i *_*-, _> y~ A.s ) k • A , ) v| 
, / r u < / .,:r \j - u ...r. .?_,_>.. «* ^| - 

' V„ x * ^ / ^ ^ » /^— w I- I- ^~ 







\ 


<rv. • • , k- ^ h, , / v 


' 


. „ ^ \ L ; ^ _ 


( 

f ( 


> L V i > , 




^tit Jrue -Philosopher 




- 



-t k< 



\ *S 



V 



29 



^ 



\> 



v 



s 6 



<* K 



\^A / K 



K 



? ^ i 



•<u 



/' 



^ \ 



X . "1 // 



\ 



V 



\ < 



V h. x 



y , 






t> ^ 









v 



I 



"^ 



7^. 



c 



' > "\Jw 



V 



.. V. 



n 



r 



r 



c 1 



v v 



ir JoliTt Herscliell 



30 



Jcf'fje JJFo^f: 



' S r~\ %< - A ^ 
) ) v- > 1 , 

1 



> H I 



C <^ ^< > ^V^ 5 ^ b —^ 7 


i X 1 ^^ ( ) v 7 \ 


r ' V , V , ' V 




t <• ■, y. X 


' ^|V^-A 


> ^ ,< " / <N 


" w- / • r ( o- • , 


■■ .xwx j - s 


x < ^ .</; f ^ 


■ u * ^ v> 




( X ^ I ^, X w • 


v-NV> : ~ 



) - V ^ ' -^ N ^ ' 



f ( 



Harm all F. Goul 






31 



-Specimens of the -SRepo l^ii r^g J§^yte-^ 

^e Miseries of Wq r- _ . ., ^.Ss^r^ 






\ 



\ 









v 



\-J. O 



/-v. 



ai 



<C " ■ 



U 






^ f 



t_- 



.I. ^V^ 



r~ 



'&:i..Q$?. 2 >n 1 






% < 



.x .Chfelmeps.. 



*T 




De^e^ee oj" .-bocrqUs. 

L. V? Srf. .: I 






6 ..... / 






^ 



i 



v 1 



32 



Zh .3 



1 

' ...ZA 



K 



A * 



3 



\ L,A> 

i^ .... , A 



\ 



^ V 



J c 



y ..: a^ ^ 



\ 



L 



/ 



I 



v.\ 



\ 



< 



u 



1 ' T *t 



7 



r 



A/- y 



\ L- — -Aj 
Tfiie Qreqtriess. „ 

.za..C-^:~"a.aa 

^ A 



t 



L 



r 






s. , U ^ ^ ^ 

J- <~^T. Av 



^ a. v : '.:f 



7 



( 1 



. ^: .^i. V.//.I a^aa^ ^ 

L* C^/l .^A .^dA AV^A*|L ^ LA ( 



v-*. 






^ 



C tanning 



PHONOGRAPHIC 



WEITING "EXERCISES. 



PART FOURTH 



OF THE 



|an5r-§00li of Staniarb ffrjnwpagfrg. 



COPYRIGHT SECURED. 



PRELIMINARY REMARKS. 



The' object of this work is to furnish a series of progressive exercises in the prin- 
ciples of American or Standard Phonography. 

At the head of each exercise, reference is made to certain portions of the Com- 
pendium, which should be carefully studied before commencing to write the 
exercise. ^ 

The student who wishes to make sure and rapid progress in Phonography will 
continue to write each exercise until the form of each word in it can be readily and 
neatly written, and until the principles referred to are thoroughly understood and 
impressed upon the memory. 

When an exercise is too long to be written out for correction, the student may be 
directed to write a certain portion of each paragraph ; and then the remaining words 
may be pronounced as it were to a spelling-class, the pupils being required to orally 
indicate the outlines by means of the syllable-names. This process of indicating 
outlines may be appropriately called Phonographic Spelling. 

When a phonographic class is too large to permit the separate revision of the 
writing exercise of each pupil, the exercise should be correctly written by the 
teacher, say on a blackboard, with letters sufficiently large to be readily seen by all 
the members of the class, who should then compare their writing with the exercise 
thu3 presented, and make the necessary corrections. 

In most instances where the correct mode of writing is not quite obvious, the out- 
lines of words have been indicated by the mode of printing the words or by syllable 
names. This plan may seem objectionable, as not demanding sufficiently the exer- 
cise of the student's judgment as to the best outlines. But the writer will find that 
the efforts of memory in recalling consonant-signs, positions of vowels, etc., will 
leave little opportunity for the exercise of judgment as to outlines, even were he 
fully acquainted with the principles for the selection of the best word-forms ; and 
the benefits arising from such uncertain exercise of judgment would by no means 
compensate for the injury resulting from acquiring bad habits of writing. Faulty 
outlines, once familiarized, not only require considerable time and effort to displace 



IV FEELIMINAKY 11EMAEKS. 

them from the memory, but their analogy, being insensibly or purposely followed. 
to a greater or less extent, has a constant tendency to vitiate the style of writing. 
On the contrary, the student having familiarized a considerable number of correct 
forms, is guided by principles of analogy in the selection of outlines for corre- 
eponding words, and rendered practically familiar with principles which relieve 
him from the necessity of arbitrarily memorizing the forms for the words of the 
entire language, by enabling him to determine instantly and with great certainty 
the best outlines for new words as they are presented. 

While the plan of indicating outlines in doubtful cases, can not be objected to by 
pupils, the teacher will find that the judgment of the student is not left without a 
fair degree of exercise ; and if the student should not have the assistance of a 
teacher, he can but feel thankful that he is by this method guarded from serious 
errors. 

The author deems it so important that the phonographer should not have the 
injurious example and influence of a bad outline, that from first to last he has used 
great care to present no word to be written phonographically until the principles in 
accordance with which it may be correctly written have been explained. 

ANDKEW J. GEAHAM. 

Phonetic Depot, New Yoee, July 20th, 185$. 



PHONOGRAPHIC 



WRITING EXERCISES. 



EXEKCISE I. COMPENDIUM, 1-25. 

SINGLE CONSONANT-SIGNS. 

§ 1. Make the signs indicated by the following syllable-names: — Pee, Bee, Tee, 
Pee, Chay, Jay, Kay, Gay, Ef, Yee, Ith, Thee, Es, Zee, Ish, Zhay, Lay, Ar, Eay, 
Em, En, Ing, Way, Yay, Hay, Iss, Weh, Wuh, Yeh, Yuh ; Pee, Ef, Em, Way, Bee, 
Vee, Tee, Ith, Es, Lay, Ar, Eay, En, Yay, Dee, Thee, Zee, Cbay, Ish, Jay, Zhay, 
Kay, Ing, Hay, Gay, Weh, Yeh, Wuh, Yuh, h-dot, Iss. 

CONSONANT-SIGNS JOINED. 

§ 2. Write, as indicated by the syllable-names, the consonants of the words of the 
following paragraphs ; 

1. Straight Lines.— {a) Peck, pick, Pee-Kay— peg, Pee-Gay— pitch, Pee- Chay — 
page, Pee-Jay-pity, putty, Pee-Tee— Pedee, pay-day, Pee-Dee — pope, Pee-Pee. 

(b) Take, talk, Tee-Kay— Tioga, Tee-Gay — teach, touch, Tee-Chay — tattoo, Tee- 
Tee — tidy, Tee-Dee- type, top, Tee-Pee— tub, Tee-Bee. 

(c) Check, Chay-Kay— Chitty, Chay-Tee— cheap, Chay-Pee— chubby, Chay-Bee 
(tf)~Cook, cake, Kay-Kay— keg, Kay-Gay— catch, couch, Kay-Chay— cage, Kay 

Jay— Cato, Kay-Tee — Cady, Kay-Dee — keep, occupy, Kay-Pee — cub, Kay-Bee. 
(e) Eock, Eay-Kay— rag, Kay-Gay — ready, Kay-Dee — haughty, Hay-Tee. 

(a) Book, Bee-Kay— beg, Bee-Gay — beach, Bee-Chay — badge, Bee-Jay — beauty 
Bee-Tee— body, Bee-Dee— baby, Bee-Bee. 

(7i) Deck, Dee-Kay — dig, Dee-Gay — ditch, Dutch, Dee-Chay — dodge, adage, Dee 
Jay— Deity, data, oddity, Dee-Tee— Dido, Dee-Dee— deep, Dee-Pee— daub, debut, 
Dee-Bee. 

(i) Joke, Jay-Kay— jog, Jay-Gay-judge, Jay-Jay— Jeddo, Jay-Dee — Job, Jay- 
Bee — gew-gaw, Gay-Gay. 

2. /Straight Lines and Curves. — (a) Puffy, Pee-Ef— bevy, Bee- Vee— path, Pee 
Ith— bath, Bee-Ith — pious, Pee-Es — bias, Bee-Es-push, Pee-Ish— bush, Bee-Ish — 
pale, Pee-Lay — ball, Bee-Lay— bear, Bee-Ar — pair, Pee-Ar— palm, Pee-Em— balm 
Bee-Em— penny, Pee-En— pang, Pee-Ing— being, Bee-Ing— byway, Bee-Way. 

(b) Teeth, Tee-Ith— death, Dee-Ith— dizzy, Dee-Zee— dish, Dee-Shay— deal, doll 
Dee-Lay — dare, door, Dee-Ar— deem, Dee-Em— deny, Dee-En — tongue, Tee-Ing. 

(c) Chaffy, Chay-Ef— Java, Jay-Vee — Jessie, Jay-Es— chill, Chay-Lay— jail, Jay 
Lay— chair, Chay- Ar— jar, Jay-Ar— gem, Jay-Em— China, Chay-En— Jennie, Jay 
En. 

(d) Coffee, Kay-Ef— Goth, Gay-Ith— chaos, Kay-Es— gauzy, Gay-Zee -cash, Kay 



6 PHONOGRAPHIC WRITING EXEECISES. 

Ish-coal, Kay-Lay— gale, Gay-Lay— car, Kay- Ar— gore, Gay-Ar— calm, Kay -Em •« 
gum, Gay-Em — king, Kay-Ing— gong, Gay-Ing 

(e) Wrath, earth, Eay-Ith— wreathe, Eay-Thee— racy, Eay-Es— rosy, Ray-Zee— 
rash, Eay-Ish— rally, Kay-Lay— ruin, Eay-En— ring, wrong, Eay-Ing. 

(g) Heavy, Hay-Vee— hazy, Hay-Zee— halo, Hay-Lay— honey, Hay-En. 

(h) Fop, Ef-Pee— fatty, Ef-Tee - veto, Yee-Tee— effigy, Ef-Jay— voyage, Yee-Jay 
—fig, Ef-Gay— evoke, Vee-Kay— vague, Tee-Gay— fury, Ef-Eay— vary, Vee-Eay. 

(?") Ethiopia, Ith-Pee— thatch, Ith-Chay— thick, Ithaca, Ith-Kay — thorough, Ith- 
Bay. 

(j) Asp, Es-Pee — aside, Es-Dee— Osage, Es-Jay— -ask, Es-Kay— Isaac, Zee-Kay 
— Assyria, Es-Eay— Ezra, Zee-Kay. 

(7c) Shape, sheep, Ish-Pee— shabby, Ish-Bee- shady, Ish-Dee— chateau, Ish-Tee 
— shock, shake, Ish-Kay— shaggy, Ish-Gay. 

{I) Leap, Lay-Pee— elbow, Lay-Bee -lady, Lay-Dee— latch, Lay-Chay — ledge, 
Lay-Jay — lake, like, Lay-Kay— elk, alike, El-Kay - log, El-Gay— Laura, Lay-Kay. 

(m) Orb, Ar-Bee — ark, Ar-Kay — Argo, Ar-Gay — aurora, Ar-Kay. 

(n) Map, Em-Pee— mob, Em-Bee— mighty, Em-Tee— meadow, Em-Dee— match, 
Em-Chay— image, Em-Jay — mock, Em-Kay— mug, Em-Gay— merry, Em-Kay. 

(o) Nip, En-Pee— nib, En-Bee— into, knotty, En-Tee— needy, India, En-Dee— 
inch, En-Chay— enjoy, En-Jay— knock, Ionic, En-Kay— narrow, En-Kay— ink, Ing- 
Kay. 
/ (p) Await, Way-Tee -awoke, awake, Way-Kay. 

3. Curves.— (a) Fang, Ef-Ing — funny, Ef-En— Vienna, Vee-En— fame, Ef-Em— 
fear, four, fire, Ef-Ar — veer, Yee-Ar — fallow, Ef-Lay— villa, valley, Vee-Lay— file, 
foil, Ef-El-vile, vale, Yee-El-fish, Ef-Shay— fussy, Ef-Es— faith, Ef-Ith— fife, Ef- 
Ef— five, Ef-Yee. 

(b) Thong, Ith-Ing — theme, thumb, Ith-Em. 

(O Scion, assignee, Es-En— Zion, Zee-En — assume, Es-Em- assail, Es-Lay— zeal, 
easily, Zee-Lay- ossify, Es-Ef. 

(d) Oshawa, Ish-Way— Shawnee, shiny, Ish-En — shame, chamois, Isli-Em — 
shear, shore, Ish-Ar— shawl, shallow, shell, Shay-Lay — sheaf, Ish-Ef- shave, shove, 
Ish-Vee. 

(e) Alway, Lay-Way — long, lung, El-Ing-lion, El-En— lime, loom, Lima, Lay- 
Em — alum, elm, Alma, El-Em— lore, liar, Lay-Ar— loll, lily, Lay-Lay — lash, Lay- 
Shay — Lucy, Elias, lassie, also, Lay-Es— Louisa, Lizzie, lazy, Lay-Zee — lath, loth, 
Lay-Ith — lathe, Lay-Thee — laugh, loaf, leaf, Lay-Ef— live, leave, Lay-Yee. 

(g) Arm, Ar-Em— error, Ar-Ar— oral, Ar-Lay — Irish, Ar-Ish— heareth, Ar-Ith. 

(7i) Among, Em-Ing — many, money, Em-En — maim, Miami, Em-Em— mill, mail, 
mellow, Em-Lay— mush, mash, Em-Ish— massy, Em-Es— mazy, Em-Zee— moth, 
Em-Ith— muff, Em-Ef - move, Em-Vee. 

(i) Name, enemy, En-Em— nail, only, En-El— uneasy, En-Zee— Nassau, En-Es— 
'neath, Ianthe, En-Ith — enough, knife, En-Ef— nave, envy, En-Vee. 

4. Hay and C%a?/.— Reap, Kay-Pee— cheap, Chay-Pee— rooty, Kay-Tee — chatty, 
Chay-Tee— rich, Kay-Chay— chary, Chay-Kay— rage, Kay-Jay— jury, Jay-Ray— 
wreck, Kay-Kay— check, Chay-Kay— carry, Kay-Kay — catch, Kay-Chay— parry, 
Pee-Kay — peach, Pee-Chay — tarry, Tee-Ray— teach, Tee-Ch ay— narrow, En-Kay— 
inch, En-Chay— Laura, Lay-Kay — latch, Lay-Chay -rear, Kay-Kay — reach, Kay- 
Chay— merry, Em-Kay— match, Em-Chay. 

5. Several Consonants. — (a) Party, purity, Pee-Kay-Tee — period, parody, Pee- 
Kay-Dee— pink, Pee-Ing-Kay — bearer, Bee-Ray-Kay - bounty, bayonet, bonnet, 
Bee-En-Tee— became, Bee-Kay-Em— deputy, Dee-Pee-Tee— damage, Dee-Em- Jay 
— tiptoe, Tee-Pee-Tee — tomato, Tee-Em-Tee — Timothy, Tee-Em-Ith — charge, 
Chay-Kay Jay— Choctaw, Chay-Kay-Tee — Jamaica, Jay-Em-Kay— Jacob, Jay- 



PHONOGRAPHIC WRITING EXERCISES. 7 

Kay-Bee- Geneva, Jay-En- Yee— cabbage, Kay-Bee-Jay — cubic, Kay-Bee-Kay— 
.camera, Kay-Em-Eay— Canada, Kay-En-Dee— kicked, Kay-Kay-Tee- cogged, 
Kay-Gay-Dee— Gomorrah, Gay-Em-Eay- gagged, Gay-Gay-Dee— fifty, Ef-Ef-Tee 
fathom, Ef-Ith-Em— foliage, Ef-Lay- Jay— effect, fact, affect, Ef-Kay-Tee— fagot, Ef- 
Gay-Tee — variety, Yee-Bay-Tee— avenge, Vee-En-Jay — vacuum, Yee-Kay-Em— 
vacate, Yee-Kay-Tee-- authority, Ith-Eay-Tee— oceanic, Ish-En-Kay— Chicago. Ish- 
Kay-Gay— shank, Ish-Ing-Kay— Alabama, Lay-Bee-Em — Albany, Lay-Boc-En — 
Almira, El-Em-Eay— length, El-Ing-Ith— Alleghany, El-Gay-En— lashed, Lay-Shay- 
Tee— lank, El-Ing-Kay— rebuke, Ray-Bee-Kay— refugee, Eay-Ef-Jay— revenue, 
Eay-Yee-En — Eomish, Ar-Em-Ish— arrange, Eay-En-Jay— melody, Em-Lay-Dec— 
- milch, Em-Lay-Chay— March, Em-Eay-Chay— marriage, Em-Eay-Jay— marsh, Em- 
Ray-Ish— America, Em-Eay-Kay — monied, Em-En-Dee — month, Em-En-Ith — 
Mackinaw, Em-Kay-En — monk, Em-Ing-Kay — unpack, En-Pee-Kay- infamy, En- 
Ef-Em— nominee, pneumonia, En-Em-En — anathema, En-Ith-Em — iniquity, En- 
Kay-Tee— enigma, En-Gay-Em. 

(b) Popular, Pee-Pee-Lay-Ar— Pimlico, Pee-Em-Lay-Kay— Poughkeepsie, Tee- 
Kay-Pee-Es — ophthalmia, Ef-Ith-Lay-Em — effectual, Ef-Kay-Tee-Lay— dignify, 
Dee-Gay-En-Ef— admirer, Dee-Em-Eay-Eay — orang-outang, Eay-Ing-Tec-Ing- - 
ungenial, En-Jay-En-El— memento, Em-Em-En-Tee — Yictoria, Yee-Kay-Tee-Eay 
— Catholic, Kay-Ith-Lay-Kay. 

Rem. When the outlines indicated above can be readily and neatly made, the 
Btudent will derive considerable benefit from translating them into the words for 
which they were written. From the very outset, he should make it a rule to read 
over one or more times whatever he phonographs. 



EXERCISE II. C, 26-32. 

§ 3. "Write, as indicated by the syllable-names, the consonants for the words of the 
following paragraphs : 

1. Circles and Loops on the Straight Lines. — (a) Pace, Pees — base, buys, Bees — 
toys, Tees— dose, does, Dees— chase, choice, etches, Chays— joys, juice, Jays— case, 
ax, Kays — guess, gaze, Gays— race, rose, Pays — hiss, Hays. 

(b) Sip, spy, Spee— sob, Iss-Bee— sit, stay, Stee— said, Iss-Dee— such, Iss-Chay— 
siege, sage, Iss-Jay — sake, Skuy— sag, Iss-Gay. 

(c) Pieces, Pee'ses— bases, Beeses— teases, Teeses— adduces, Deeses — chases, 
choices, cheeses, Chay'ses— cases, axes, K ay 'ses— guesses, Gay'ses — races, roses, 
Eay'ses— hisses, Hay'ses. 

(d) Pieced, paste, Peest— beast, best, based, Beest— test, teased, Teest— adduced, 
Deest — chased, chest, Chayst— jest, just, Jayst— cased, cast, Kayst — guest, gazed, 
Gayst— raced raised, rest, Rayst— hissed, haste, Hayst. 

(e) Step, Steh-Pee— stab, Steh-Bee— state, Steh-Tee— steady, Steh-Dee— stitch, 
Steh-Chay— stage, Steh-Jay— stake, Steh-Kay — story, Steh-Eay. 

{g) Pastor, Pee'ster— boaster, Bee'ster— taster, Teester— duster, Deester- Ches- 
ter, Chayster— jester, juster, Jayster — coaster, castor, Kayster— roaster, Rayster— 
Hester, Hayster. 

(Ji) Space, Spees-sobs, Sbees— spaced, Speest— steps, Steh-Pees— states, Steh- 
Tees— studies, Steh-Dees— sages — Iss-Jays— success, Skayses - Sussex, Ses-Kays — 
stakes, Steh-Kays — stories, Steh-Eays- Cicero's, Ses-Eays— sorrows, Iss-Rays- 
sacks, Skays — sags, Iss-Gays — sages, Iss-Jays — suggest, Iss-Jayst. 



8 PHONOGRAPHIC WRITING EXERCISES. 

2. Circles and Loops on Curves— {a) Face, Efs— voice, Tees— cease, says, Es- 
Iss— shows, Ish-Iss — lace, lays, Lays— errs, oars, Ar-Iss — mace, Ems— nose, ounce, 
Ens — woes, ways, Ways— yeas, Yays. 

(p) Safe, Sef— save, Iss-Yee — sash, Iss-Ish - sale, slay, Slay— sore, Sar— size, seize, 
Iss-Zee— same, Sem— son, sane, Iss En — song, Iss-Ing— sway, Iss-Way. 

( ) Faces, Efses— vases, Yeeses— ceases, Es-Ses— losses, leases, laces, Layses— 
masses, Emses— ounces, Enses. 

(d) Faced, Efst— vest, Veest— ceased, Es-Steh— zest, Zeest— lest, last, Laytt— 
arrest, Ar-Steh — amazed, amassed, Ernst— nest, Enst — west, waste, "Wayst — yeast, 
Yayst. 

(e) Stale, steal, Steh-L ay— stare, store, Steh-Ar — stem, Steh-Em — stung, Steh-Ing. 
(g) Feaster, Efster— Mister, Yeester— Shaster, Ish'ster— Lester, luster, Layster — 

master, Emster — Nestor, Enster— waster, Wayster. 

(h) Safes, Sefs— saves, Iss-Yees— sizes, seizes, Iss-Zees — sashes, Iss-Ish~Iss— sales. 
Blays, Slays — steals, Steh-Lays— Sicily's, Ses-Lays- stems, Stems — sways, Sways- 
sliced, Slayst— sorest, Sarst— stores, stars, Stars— solaces, Slay ses— solaced, Slayst — 
sources, Sarses-sums, Sems— sense, Iss-Ens. 

3. Circles and Loops between Strolces. — (<7) Passive, Pees-Yee — baser, Bees-Ar 
— besom, Bees-Em — basin, Bees-En — bask, Bees-Kay— beset, Bees-Tee — beseech. 
Bees-Chay — dusty, Dees-Tee— deceive, Dees-Yee dusk, Dees-Kay — desire, Dees- 
Ar— cask, Kays-Kay — castle, Kays-Lay- gossip, Gays-Pee — evasive, Yees-Yee— 
vessel, Yees-El — society, Es-Stee — necessity, Enses-Tee — necessary, Enses-Eay — 
exist, Kayses-Tee- accessory, Kayses-Eay decisive, Deeses-Yee - massive, Ems- 
Yee— misseth, Ems-Ith — mason, Ems-En— facility, Ef-Slay-Tee— nasality, En-Slay- 
Tee— atheism, Ith-Sem. 

(I) Justify, Jayst-Ef— testify, Teest-Ef— destiny, DeesWEn. 

4. Jss Added to S&#j SteJi, and Ster. — Possesses, Peeses-Iss- diseases, Deeses-Iss 
—excesses, Kayses-Iss — lists, Laysts— Lester's, Laysters - masters, Emsters— suc- 
cesses, Skayses-Iss— fasts, Efsts— vests, Yeests — exercises, Kays-Rayses-Iss. 



PHONOGRAPHIC TYPE-KEYS. 



§ 4. A phonographic type-key is an entire word, or its consonants only, so printed 
as to indicate the consonant-outline or form. Type-keys, in this work, are formed 
in accordance with the following plan: 

1. A consonant-letter or group of consonant-letters to be represented by a stroke, 
and the letter or letters to be represented by an attachment (as a circle, loop, or 
hooks are separated from other consonant-letters by a hyphen or space. 

2. Different directions of the same sign, and different signs for the same sound, 
are distinguished by different modes of printing. For instance, letters to be repre- 
sented by a circle or loop are sometimes printed with italics. El and Ar are dis- 
tinguished from Lay and Eay by printing them with small capitals — l, r. Other 
distinctions will be pointed out as they are required. 

Examples. — Mason=ms-n=Ems-En ; pu-ri-ty=p-r-t=prt=:Pee-Eay-Tee ; aba- 
ence=bs-ns=bsns=Bees-Ens ; low-eE=l-E=lu=Lay-Ar ; rai-L=r-L= Kay-El. 



EXERCISE III. C, 33-55. 

SIMPLE-CONSONANT WOED-SIGNS. 

§5. Write the sign-words of the following paragraph with their proper signs; 



"PHONOGRAPHIC WRITING EXERCISES. 9 

write the outlines for the words preceded by a point ( . ) ; and write the remaining 
words in phonetic or common longhand. 

TJie Whistle. — "When I was a child about seven years of .age, my friends, on a 
.ho-li-day, filled my pocket with halfpence. I went directly towards a .shop (Ish- 
Pee) where .toys (Tees) were sold for children ; and being (Bee-Ing) charmed 
with the sound of a whistle that I met by the way, in the hands of another .boy, I 
voluntarily offered him ail my .money (Em-En) for it. I then came (Kay-Em) 
home, and went whistling over the .house (Hays), much pleased with my 
whistle, but disturbing all the .f-ami-ly. My brothers, and sisters, and .cous-ins, 
understanding the bargain I had made, told me I had given .fou-a times (Tee-Ems) 
as much for it as it was worth. This put me in mind of what good things I might 
have bought with the .rest of the .money (Em-En) ; and they laughed at me so much 
for my .folly (Ef-Lay) that I cried with vexation. My reflections on the subject 
gave me more chagrin than the whistle gave me pleasure. This little event, how* 
ever, was afterwards of use to me, the impression continuing on my mind : so that 
often, when I icas tempted to buy .some .unnecessary (n-nses-r) thing, I .said to 
myself Do not give too much for the whistle; and so I saved my .money. As I 
grew up, .came .into the world, and observed the actions of men, I thought I met 
with .many, very .many, who gave too much for the whistle. When I .saw any one 
too ambitious of court-favor, sacrificing Ms .time in attendance on .levees, his-.re- 
pose, his liberty, his virtue, and perhaps his friends, to attain it, I .said to myself 
Tills man gives too much fir his whistle. "When I .saw another fond of popular- 
ity, constantly employing himself in political .bustles (bs-ls), neglecting his oven 
.affairs (f-Rs), and ruining them by that neglect ; lie .pays indeed, .said I, too much 
for his whistle. — If I knew a .miser who gave up every kind of comfortable living, 
all the pleasure of doing good to others, all the esteem of 7iis fellow-citisens, and 
the .joys of benevolent friendship,. for the .sake of accumulating wealth ; .Poor man, 
.said I, you indeed .pay too much for your whistle. When I met a man of pleasure, 
sacrificing every laudable improvement of mind, or of fortune, to mere sensual 
gratifications ; Mistaken man ! .said I, you are providing pain for yourself, instead 
of pleasure; you give too much for your whistle. — If I .saw one fond of fine clothes, 
fine furniture, fine .equipage (k-p j), all .above his fortune, for which he contracted 
debts, and ended his .career in prison ; .Alas ! .said I, he has paid dear, very dear, 
for his whistle. In short, I conceived that a great part of the .miseries of mankind 
are brought upon them by the false estimate they .make of the value of things, and 
by their giving (Gay-Ing) too much for their whistles. — Dr. Franklin. 

As a further exercise on the word-signs, read § 109 of the Introduction to Phc- 
notypy and Phonography, and note the sign-words. 

§ 6. Vocalization. 

1. Pea, Pee, bee, pay, bay, bey, pa, baa, fee, Vee, fay, fa, tea, Tee, Dee, day, 
Thee, Cee," say, Zee, lee, Lay, la, lay, Pay, ray, gee (djj), chee, Chay, Jay, Shay, 
Zhay, Shah, wee, weigh, yea, ha, hey, hay; ape, eve, eat, eight, ait, aid, ace, ease, 
Aes, eel, ail, ale, ear, air, e'er, Ar, Aar, Aitch, age, ah ! 

2. Ebb, Ab, Ef, Et, Ed, Ith, Iss, Es, ell, ill, El, err, itch, etch, edge, Ish, ash, eh ! 

3. Paw, Poe, Po, pugh ! poh ! bow, faugh ! foh ! foe, toe, tow, Doe, dough, thaw, 
saw, sou, law, lo ! low, loo, woe, woo, yaw, chaw, jaw, Joe, shoo, show, Shaw, raw, 
Poe, row, haw, hoe, hoo ! — ope, oaf, aught, oat, awed, owed, oath, owes, ooze, awl, 
Orr, oar, o'er. 

4. Off, odd, ugh ! 

5. Opie, abbey, Eva, Effie, eighty, A-te, eddy, Adee, Ada, ado, Otho, Esau, essay, 

1* 



10 PHONOGRAPHIC WKITIJ3G EXERCISES. 

Asa, easy, Uzzah, ally, allay, Elite, Ella, Allah, era, Erie, airy, array, aerie (uri), 
arrow, itchy, ashy, aha ! 

6. Maw, May, mow, ma, knee, gnaw, neigh, nay, key, caAv, Kay, Coe coo, g;»y 
go ; aim, Amy, e'en, awn, eke, ache ; Em, Emma, inn, En, Enna, Ann, Anna, An- 
nie, anno, Ing. 

7. Lee, chee, law, chaw, jaw, la, Shah, raw, Shaw. 

8. Optional Vote el-Signs. — Air, airs, Ayers, add, adz, adds, alley, Allah, allay, 
ash, ashy, abbey, ax, err, errs, Erse, erst, earl, early, earth (Eay-Ith), ergo, myrrh 
(Em-Kay), omit, only (En-El), Otho, arrow. 

9. Ape, pay, ope, Po, ebb, bay, oaf, foe, eve, Vee, eat, tea, ate, toe, oat, aid, day, 
oath, thaw, ace, say, ease, Zee, eel, lea, ail, lay, Aitch, Chay, age, Jay, eh, ha ; aim, 
May, e'en, knee, En, neigh, eke, key, ache, Kay, Og, go. 

10. Nominal Consonant. — e, a, ah, i, a, an, 6, 66, 66, ii, 6, Si, oi, ioo, 6 66, e, ai(r), 
a(t), dfah! eh! 



EXEECISE IV. C, 56-77. 
§ 7. Initial Iss, Ses, Steh. 

1. Sip, steep, step, sop, stop, soap, snp, sap, soup, stoop, sob, stub, stab, seat, 
settee, sit, city, sought, sot, sate, state, set, stet, sat, soot, sooty, seed, steed, sawed, 
sod, sowed, sewed, soda, said, steady, study, sad, such, stitch, siege, sage, stage, 
sedge, seek, sick, stick, sake, stake, sock, stock, stalk, soak, stuck, stucco, sack, 
stack, soggy, sag, Sarah (Iss-Eay), sorrow, sorry, sirrah, story, starry, soh6. 

2. Safe, sofa, save, salve, seam, seem, steam, same, stem, some, sum, Sam., psalm, 
stith, seethe, stithy, saith, sooth, soothe, seize, seal, steal, steel, Selah, sill, still, silly, 
stilly, Sylla, Saul, stall, Sol, sail, stale, sale, solo, stole, sell, cell, Stella, soul, sully, 
stool, Sally, sallow, seer, steer, sore, store, sir, stir, stare, star, seen, sin, sane, sown, 
son, sun, sunny, soon, sash, sing, sting, song, sung, stung, sang. 

3. Spa, Spee, Smee, sma', Stee, stay, slay, slow, snow, Skay, Schay, sway. 

4. System, season, Sussex, Cicero, Sicily, schism, Ses-Tee, Ses-Pee, Ses-Dee 
sys'to-le, syz'y-gee (siz*idj.i), Sisyphus (Sisifus), Caesar, scissors, saucer, Sosthenes 
sausage. 

§ 8. Final Iss, Ses, Steh, Ster. 
1. Piece, apiece, appease, peas, pieced, pieces, appeased, appeases, pause, 
paused, pauses, pays, pace, paste, paces, pester, pesters, oppose, opposed, post, 
posts, opposes, posies, possess, possesses, poster, posters, pass, passed, past, pest, 
pests, passes, pastor, pastors, puss, bees, abyss, beast, beasts, abysses, Boz, boss, 
base, abase, bays, obeys, ebbs, Bess, based, beaux, abased, baste, best, boast, bastes, 
abscess, basis, bases, abases, Bess's, abscesses, boaster, boasters, odds, dose, doze, 
dosed, dozed, dust, dusts, dozes, doses, disease, diseases, duster, dusters, tease, eats, 
toss, oats, toes, Otis, teased, tossed, test, toast, attest, toasts, attests, teases, tosses, 
taster, tasters, toaster, cheese, chaws, chase, chess, etches, Aitches, chose, choose, 
chaste, chased, chest, chests, chases, chooses, cheeses, Chester, Chester's, jaws, aegis, 
ages, Jays, edges, gist, jest, just, jests, Jesus, Jesus's, Jay-Ses, jester, juster, Ross, 
race, raise, rose, wrist, raised, raced, roast, rest, wrest, rests, roasts, races, raises, 
roses, roaster, roasters, hiss, hoes, Huss, hawse, haze, Hays, haste, hist, hest, host, 
hosts, hisses, Huss r s, Hester, Hester's, keys, kiss, cause, ox, case, aches, oaks, Cass, 
ax, kissed, cast, cost, accost, cased, coast, coasts, casts, kisses, cases, Cass's, causes, 
excess, access, axis, axes, excesses, coaster, caster, castors, geese, gauze, gaze, guess, 



PHONOGRAPHIC WRITING EXERCISES. 11 

eggs, goes, gas, goose, Aug'ust, guest, guessed, ghost, gust, august', agast, ghosts, 
guests. 

2. Fees, phiz, office, face, efface, phase, foes, fuss, fuzz, Fez, feast, faced, effaced, 
fast, fist, feasts, fists, fasts, faces, offices, phases, fasces, Ephesus, effaces, feastcr, 
*bster, fester, faster, eaves, vase, vest, vast, vests, vases, vaster, mi.<s, amiss, maze, 
maize, amaze, mace, mess, mass, alms, moss, muss, missed, mist, amazed, mast, 
amassed, most, must, mists, masts, misses, maces, mazes, amazes, messes, masses, 
Moses, muster, master, masters, thaws, thesis, theses, cease, saws, sauce, siss, assess, 
assist, ceased, sauced, assessed, ceases, sauces, lease, Lee's, laws, loss, lace, lays, al- 
lays, ails, Ellis, else, less, lass, alas, Alice, alleys, loose, lose, least, lost, loosed, last, 
lest, laced, lasts, losses, looses, loses, laces, lasses, luster, Lester, Lester's, ears, airs. 
erase, arose, arrows, erased, arrest, arrests, niece, knees, gnaws, neighs, noose, hon- 
est, nest, noosed, nests, nieces, noses, nooses, Nestor, chaise, shows, ashes, shoes, 
chaises, Shaster, weighs, wooes, woes, waste, waist, west, wist, wastes, waster, yes, 
veas, yaws, yeast, yester. 

§ 9. Es and Zee. 

1. Ace, Asa, Es, asp, Asaph, acid, ask, Osage, Espy ; sower, se'eth. 

2. Saw, say, essay, posse, pussy, abbacy, fussy, mossy, Macy, massy, Tasso, Odessa, 
lessee, also, Lacey, lasso, lassie, racy, Eousseau (Euisb-), unsay, Nassau, Jesse, 
gassy Od'yssey, Gussie ; iEne'as, chaos. 

3. Ease, awes, owes, Ezra, ism, azote, azymous ; zany, czar, zeal, zero, Zera, 
Zeno, Zona. -" 

4. Posy, poesie, busy, boosy, fuzzy, Vesey, mazy, dizzy, daisy, lazy, razee', rosy, 
cozy, causey, hazy, huzza, huzzy. 

§ 10. Medial Ses. — Insist, exist, exhaust, necessary, excessive, possessed, resist, 
desist, accessory, diseased, Mississippi, necessity, possessor (Peeses-Pay), possessive, 
successive. 

§ 11. Yowel Word-Signs. 

1 . All, of, ought, on, already, or, awe, two, too, who, oh, whom, owe, to, should, 
but, the, a, and, an ; owing, owes, owed, awing, awes, awed. 

2. The The- Tick. —By the, at the, for the, in the, is the, as the, so the, if the, shall 
the, may the, know the, why the, are the, think the, have the, because the, give the, 
though the, which the, to the, of the, on the, all the, or the, but the, should the, 
ought the ; the first, the way. 

3. The A-n-d Tick. — By a-n, at a-n, for a-n, in a-n, is a-n, as a-n, so a-n, if a-n, 
shall a-n, may a-n, know a-n, why a-n, are a-n, think a-n, have a-n, be a-n, give 
a-n, though a-n, which a-n, to a-n, of a-n, on a-n, or a-n, but a-n, should a-n, 
ought a-n, by and, in and, and the, and a-n, and for, and by, and each, and they, 
and may, and so, and if, and shall, and should, and but, and who, and ought, and 
to, and on. 

EXERCISE ON THE SIMPLE-CONSONANT AND VOWEL WORD-SIGNS. 
§ 12. In the following paragraph, and in other connected reading hereafter pre- 
sented as writing exercises, an inverted accent (,) precedes words to be written in 
longhand. Of the other words, the sign-words are to be expressed by their signs, 
and the remainder, by the proper outlines. When sign-words are connected by a 
hyphen, their signs should be joined. 

The ^Trap-Door ,Spide7\—, r TherQ is-a curious spider /found in-the south of 
/France, and some /Other /places, which-is /sometimes /called the /trap-dooR /spider. 
It hollows out-a/den in-the earth, /generally /about an inch in width (Weh-Dee-Ith), 
and /from /one to two /feet in depth. The inside of this it first /covers /With a /kind 



12 PHONOGRAPHIC WRITING EXERCISES. 

of /mortar, and /then, as if it ,m8ant to /paper its /walls, hangs (alngs) all /Orel 
them a /beautiful /Silken web (Weh-Bee), which-is said to be smooth as /satin, and of 
dazzling (ds-L-ng) /Whiteness. But-the most curious /part of it is-a /trap-dooR /Over 
the /entrance, which it /perfectly /covers. This dooR is /made of /different layeR.9 
of web and earth, and /Covered 7 with /dried leaves /Closely /matted together, and-is 
so hung (iilng) at-the /upper /part as to /admit of being raised /when the animal 
passes in or out, /after which it /immediately /falls into its /place. The edg^s are 
curiously .fringed /with a /net-/vvork, which /conceals the /opening, and /renders it 
less /liable to be /discovered. ALong-the edge of this dooR, on-the inside, are-a 
/number of /little /holes, which are /Used by-the animal for /holding it /down /with 
its /daws /When it-is /attacked by-an enemy. — Life in-the /Insect , World. 



EXEKCISE V. C, 78-86'. 
§ 13. Punctuation, etc. 

1. Accent. — Arose, arrows, Au'gust, august, abyss', abbess, obey', Adee r , essay, 
essay', razee', r6sy, ad6, Eousseau'. 

2. Titles.— A. J. Ellis, A.B. E. G. Latham, M.D., F.E.S. n. U. Janson. 

3. Capitals. — Eome, America, James, Eoscoe, Smith. 

4. Emphasis. — " Then said the /high priest, are these things so?" 
" Paul /determined to sail by Ephesus." 

" It is /not so /difficult to talk /well as to live ,well."' /"We think less of the inju- 
ries /we do /than of those /we suffer (sf-R). 



EXEECIS3 VI. C, 87-104. 
§ 14. Close Diphthongs. 

1. Pie, pies, vie, vies, vice, vices, mice, wise, tie, ties, entice, entices, enticed, die, 
dye, dies, dice, sigh, sighs, lie, ally, lies, rye, wry, rise, rice, awry (a-Rr>, arise, 
arises, nigh, nice, Gneiss, shy, hie, hies, spy, spies, spice, spiced, spices, sky, 
sly, slice, sliced, slices— ire (C, 101), eyes, ice, icy, eyeing, (h)ighness, (h)eight, 
(h)igher, ivy, eyed — sight, cite, site, side, sighed, sign, sire, Cyrus, size, sizes, Silas, 
styles. 

2. Boy, boys, Boyce, voice, voices, toy, toys, alloy, alloys, annoy, annoys, noise, 
noised, noises, Eoy, Eoyce, choice, choices, joy, joys, Joyce, Joyce's, coy, coys, 
ahoy, hoist, hoists, hoister, Savoy, Sepoy; oil (C, 101), oily. 

3. Bow, bough, bows, boughs, vow, vows, avows, mow, mouse, Dow, Dow's, 
allow, allows, owl, owls, r5w, r5ws, rouse, roused, rouses, arouse, aroused, arouses, 
ounce, ounces, cow, cows, How, How's, house, housed, houses, south, slough, sour, 
scow. 

4. Pew, pews, abuse, abused, abuses, fuse, fused, effuse, view, views, mew, amuse, 
amused, amuses, dew, due, adieu, deuce, adduce, educe, adduced, adduces, sue, 
sues, lieu, rue, Luce, Luce's, rues, ruse, news, chew, chews, Jew, Jews, juice, juices, 
cue, cues, accuse, accused, accuses, yew, hew, hews, Hugh, Hugh's, spew, suit, 
Blew, sued, slew, skew. 



PHONOGRAPHIC WRITING EXEllCISES. 13 

OPEN DIPHTHONGS. 

§ 15. Deity, laity, aye, ayes, Cairo, Caughey, jawy, rawish, doughy, snowy, stoic, 
Noah, Goa, Genoa, boa, Alloa, Owen, Zoe, Noe, Louis, Toohey. 

CONCURRENT VOWELS. 

§ 16. Payee, boa, bayou (brra), avowee, iota, Toohey, idea, dewy, doughy, Douay 
^Duru), Iowa, Isaiah, Zoe, Leo, Leah, Louis, Owen, Noah, Noe, jawy. 

WOKD-SIGKS AND CONTRACTIONS. 

§ 17. I, eye, aye, [high,] how, highly, now, new, knew ; I am, I will, I shall, I do, 
I think, I was, I see, I hope, I wish. 



EXERCISE VII. C, 105-114. 
§ 18. Vowels Between Consonants. 

1. Pith, peach, pitch, peak, pique, pick, pike, pig, beam, beach, botch, Abijah, 
big, bog, fip, fop, fib, fob, fief, fife, five, Fitch, Fcjee, fish (Ef-Shay), fig, fog, vi've, 
vim, mob, miff, myth, moth, meek, mock, mica, tip, top, type, team, time, teeth, 
tithe, teach, tick, talk, deep, dip, deem, dim, dime, ditch, dodge, dish (Dee-Shay), 
dock, dike, dig, dog, ding, dong, thief, theme, thick, thong, nip, nib, knife, 'neath, 
niche, notch, nick, knock, cheap, chip, chop, chime, cheek, chick, chalk, gibe, job, 
j'gi j°g? sheep (Ish-Pee), shop, Sheba, sheaf, sheath, Shawnee, shiny, shock, keep, 
Kipp, copy, Cobb, coffee, chyme, kith, king, gang, leap, lip, lobby, leaf, life, leave, 
live, lime, Le'the, leech, liege, lodge, Elijah, leak, like, aLike, League, Long, aLong, 
Ream, Rim, Rhyme, reek (Ray-Kay), rick, rig, Riga, reap, rip, ripe, wreathe, peal, 
Paul, peeR, pyRe, feaR, tiRe. 

2. Poach, page, poke, back, both, foam, fame, evoke, vogue, vague, maim, make, 
tape, tame, tome, take, Davy, dame, tongue, dome, navy, knave, name, choke, 
shape, shake, cape, cope, came, comb, cage, game, lobe, lave, lame, loam, lathe, 
loathe, lake, Roam, rope, robe, pale, pole, bail, bowl, dale, dole, taRe, daRe, dooR, 
tory, Mary. 

8. Peck, peg, budge, beck, beg, bug, bung, fudge, muff, mesh, mush, Mecca, 
mug, among, tub, touch, tug, dum, death, doth, Dutch, deck, duck, thumb, enough, 
numb, neck, chum, check, chuck, gem, Shem, cup, gum, ledge, luck. 

4. Palm, puth, patch, pouch, push, pack, balm, boom, bath, batch, Booth, badge, 
back, book, bag, bang, fume, fag, fang, vouch, Mab, move, mouth, match, mash, 
tap, tube, tomb, tooth, attach, dupe, dam, dash (Dee-Shay), duke, thatch, nap, 
Numa, gnash, nook, chap, chaffy, jam, sham, cap, coop, cab, cube, ccdm, catch, 
couch, cash, gap, gash, lash (Lay-Shay). 

5. Apology, purify, party, parish (Pee-Ray-Ish), package, fifth, baggage, faRm, 
fact, effect, mimic, America, magic, topic, outrage, depth, authority, repeal, rebuke, 
Length, rarity, cubic, admirer (Dee-Em-Ray-Ray), dignify, cogency. 

6. See C, 109.— Poem, boyish, voyage, Moab, Miami, towage, Tioga, newish, 
coyish, voweL, fueL, loweR, coweR, dual, duel, toweR, fewen, avowaL, loweR, royaL, 
science, piano, showeR, poet, naiad, riot, Ryan, Lion. 

7. See C, 103.— Pacify, parage, obe-s-ity, bask, fasten (Efs-En), effusive, vassaL, 
vessel., mu*cle, rnusk, desk, dusk, lesseR, loos-eR, rasp, ensile, gasp* 

8. Prej$®ea and Affile*.— (a) Compile, compel, compaRC, commute (corn-Tee), 
comm-une, compass, compose, (b) Conceive, conceit, concede, concise (con-Es-Iss), 
condemn, conceal, confeR, confess, consume, contest, connive, convince (con-Vee- 



14: PHONOGRAPHIC WKiTING EXERCISES. 

Ens), console, conscious (con-Ish-Iss\ convey, commence, consist (con-Ses«Tee). 
(c) Accommodate, accompany, (d) Talking, making, seeking, asking, doing, keep- 
ing, lacking, saying, showing, dying, (e) Musings, doings, sayings, facings, risings, 
(g) Facing the, facing a-n-d, seeking the, seeking a-n-d, asking the, asking a-n-cl, 
laying the, laying a-n-d, showing the, showing a-n-d, doing the, doing a-n-d, 
making the, making a-n-d, catching the, catching a-n-d. 



EXERCISE YIII. C, 115-125. 
§ 19. Different Modes of Representing W and Y. 

1. Wee, woe, weigh, woo, Weh, Wuh, "Wise, weighs, woes, wooes, waist, west, 
wist, wast, waster, Wooster, Wistar, wisp, wasp, sway, sways, Swiss, sweep, swap, 
swoop, swab, swath, swallow, swell, swim, swum, swam, swing, swung, awoke, 
awake, Owego, Owasco, Iowa, await ; yaw, yaws, yea, yew,-yews, yes, yeas, yeast, 
yester, oyer, oyez. 

2. "Weep, web, wit, wot, wait, wet, weight, weed, widow, wad, weighed, wood, 
wade, watch, wage, witch, wedge, walk (Wuh-Kay), week, wake, woke, wax, 
waxed, wig, wag, waif, woof, weave, wave, wavy, wove, withe, wash, wing, un- 
weighed, unweave. [Sweat, sweet, Swede, swayed, switch. See C, § 124, E.] 

3. Wemyss (Wjmz), Wem, win, w T innow, wine, wan, wane, wen, weal, wall, wal- 
low, wile, wily, wail, wool, woolly, willow, Willis, Wallace, Wells, weary, wary, 
war, wear, wore, wire, wiry, worry, ware, swear, swore, twain, twine, Edwin, 
quire, choir, query, unwell, unwieldy, unworthy, unwearied, unwary, wince, 
winced, winces, wines, wears, worse, worst, Worcester. 

4. Yacht, Yates, yawl, yell, Yale, yellow, Yulee, yarrow, Uriah, yore, yawn, yon, 
yawns, Eunice, yams, yoke unyoke. 



EXERCISE IX. C, 126-143. 
§ 20. Different Modes of Expressing W and Y. 

1. (a) Sweet, sweat, Swede, swayed, switch, suage, switches, Swedish (Jss-Dee- 
Shay), suavity, dissuade, Ipswich, unswayed. (I) Twitch, tweak, twig, twang, 
thwack, equip, quick, quack, quake, quag, quaggy, equity, acquit, quota, bewail, 
dwell, twill, quail, quell, Aquila, quench, equinox, (c) Twist, twists, twisting, 
untwist, quest, inquest, bequest, (a) Youth, young, unity, unite, unison ; lawyer, 
folio, bilious. 

2. See C, 134 and 135.— Genii, Honeoye, maniac, ammoniac, insignia, scoria, 
opiate, barrier, carrier, superior, interior, anterior, idiom, odious, odium, copious, 
furious, various, envious, obvious, notorious, censorious, olio, foliage, Scipio, seirious, 
studious (Steh-Dees), piteous. 

3. Wipe, wight, wide, Dw.ight, quiet, quietus, quiesce (Kay-Es), quiescence 
(Kay-Ess-Ens), quietest, twice, wife, wives, buoy, buoys. 

4. See C, 139. — Ammonia, Xenia, scoria, nephew, argue, ague. 

§ 21. Determine which of Ew, Y66, and Y66 is denoted by u, eu, ew, ue, etc., in 
the following words. — Duty, union, unite, mute, pure, fury, unity, unique 7 , u'nison, 
universe, usurp, utility, Utopia, tune, rude, res'cue, argue, due, sue, rue, rued, 
ague, suit, bruise, bruit, feud, euphony, rheum, Eunice, euphonic Europe, eulogy 
eulogium adieu, dew, few, Ewing, nephew, Ewell, view, Hugh 



PHONOGRAPHIC WAITING EXERCISES. 15 

§ 22. Write, according to the directions of § 12, the following paragraph : 
The jGood Samaritan.— And /behold, a pertain lawyer /Stood up, and /tempted 
him, saying, " Master, what shall I-do to /inherit /eternal life ?" He said unto him, 
" "What is /Written in-the law ? how deadest thou ?" And he answering, said, 
"Thou shalt love the /Lord thy /God with all thy /heart, and-with all thy soul, and- 
with all thy /Strength, and-with all thy /mind ; and-thy /neighbor as thyself." And- 
he said unto him, "Thou hast ( l ) ,answcred right; this do, and-thou shalt live." 
But he, willing to justify (Jayst-Ef) himself, said unto Jesus (Jay'ses), " And-who is 
my /neighbor V" And Jesus answering, said, "A /Certain /man /went /down /from 
/Jerusalem to /Jericho, and /fell among thieve.?, who /Stripped him of-his /raiment, 
and /wounded him, and /departed, leaving him /half /dead. And-by /Chance /there 
came /down a /certain /priest /that way ; and when he saw him, he passed by on-the 
/Other side. — And likewise (Lay-Kay-Zee) a /Levite, when he was at-the /place, came 
and /looked on him, and passed by on-the ;other side But-a /Certain /Samaritan, 
as he Journeyed, came where he was ; and-when he saw him, he had /compassion 
on him, and/Went to him, and /bound up his /wounds, pouning in oil and wine, and 
set him cn-his own beast, and /brought him to-an inn, and took /care of him. And 
on-tbe morrow, when he /departed, he took out two /pence, and /gave them to-the 
host, and said unto him, 'Take/Careof him ; and /Whatsoever thou /Spendest /more, 
when I come /again, I-will repay thee.' Which now of these /three, thinkest (Ith- 
Steh) thou, was /neighbor unto him who /fell among thieves?" And he said, "Lie 
that /Showed mercy on him." /Then said Jesus unto him, " Go, and-do thou like- 
wise." 



EXERCISE X. C, 144-149. 
§ 23. Different Modes of Expressing H — Aspiration. 

1. (a) Heap, hop, hoop, whoop, half, halve, hem, home, ham, hum, heat, hot 
hut, hate, height, white, heed, hid, hod, hide, head, hood, heath, hath, heel, hill 
hall, Hoyle (See C, 101), hull, howl, hear, Horr, hire, hair, hitch, hatch, hutch 
hedge, huge, hush, hash, hawk, hook, hack, hog, Hague, hoax, hug, hang, hung 
highway. 

(b) See C, 146, R. 4. — Hedge, head, huge, horse, hem, hate. 

2. Write with the h-tick the following word3 : — Whiz, whisk, whistle, whist 
whey, whoa, wheeze, whew, awhile, wheezes. 

3. Aspirate the Yv r in the following words by placing the h-tick before the follow- 
ing vowel: — Whiz, whisk, whistle, whist, whey, whoa, wheeze, whew, awhile, 
wheezes. 

4. (a) Whip, whiff, whit, wheat, whig, whack. 

(h) See C, 148, It. 1.— Whip, whiff, whit, wheat, whig (Wuh-Gay), whack (Wuh- 
Kay). 

5. Wheel, whale, whir, whirL. 

G. Bee C, 14S , E. 2.— Wheel, whale, whir, whirL. 

7. («) Aspirate the Way-hook in the following words by prefixing the h-tick :— 
Whence, whin, whine, whim. 

{b) See C, 14S, E. 2.— Whence, whin, whine, whim. 

8. Ahoy, hoe, hay, haw, aha, Ohio, Ya'hoo, eh, oh, hue, hew, Hugh, hah, ho, hoy 

(l) The w >rds ' wert, hast, shalt,' and some other words belonging to what is called the solemn 
ptyle, may usually be expressed the same as the conespjnding ' were, has, sh«U/ etc., belonging to 
the usual style of speech. 



16 PHONOGRAPHIC YfEITIXG EXERCISES. 

ugh, Howe, liiss, house, hoist, Huss, hose, hoes, host, hisses, ahead, haughty, holy ' 
Harry, hairy, hurry, Harris, Horace, hazy, hasten, hasty, hosannah. 



EXEECISE XI. C, 151-153. 
§ 24. Different Modes of Representing R. 

1. (a) Ear, air, ore, err, Ayr, oar, ere (Br), era, Erie, Ira, ire, aura, arise, arisen 
(Ar-Sen), arose, erase, Iris, orris, Erse, erst, orb, harp, hark, ark, argue, harsh (Ar- 
Bhay), harm, Hiram, aroma, arm, ergo, Oreb, Arab, heareth, Irish (Ar-Ish). 

(Z>) Express E in the following words with Eay :— Arch, urge, aright, arrayed, 
earth, hearth, erroneous, arson, orison, Arnos. 

2. (a) Eay, raw, wry, row, rye, rue, row, Reese, R033, rice, rise, race, raise, rose, 
rouse, races, raises, roses, raced, rest, roaster ; reap, ripe, rob, robe, ruby, review, 
wreathe, wretch, ridge, rich, rush, rouge, rash, ready, rode, write, wrote, right, 
wrought, root, rude, rack, rock, rogue, ring, wrong, wring, rang ; reason, rosin, risk, 
rasp, Russell, wrestle. 

(b) Ream, num, rhyme, Rome, room, rheum, resume. 

S. (a) PeeK, beer, pair, fire, fear, four, veer, tire, tare, door, easier, essayer, 
nigher, ne'er, gnar, newer, cheer, char, jar, giaour idjour), cur, car, bore, gore, lower, 
lure, error, sere, seer, sore, sire, source, serious, Cyrus. 

(&) Express R with Ray in the following words: — Mar, myrrh, moor, amour, 
mire, Thayer, future, futurity, Shakspeare, rare, roar, rear, rarer, barrier, carrier, 
courier, wear, swear, yore. 

4. Perry, parry, Peru, borrow, bewray, bury, borough, Barry, berry, bureau, 
Bowery, fiery, fairy, Pharaoh (Etrro), ferry, furry, furrow, fury, ivory, vary, Imrab, 
miry, morrow, Mary, merry, emery, Murray, marrow, marry, Torrey, tyro, terra, 
tory, tarry, Tara, diary, dairy, Derry, Harrow, Douro (Duito), dowry, theory, 
thorough, Assyria, Ezra, narrow, Henry, Newry, chary, cherry, hedge-row, Jerry, 
jury, usury, sherry, Carey, Carrie, Cora, curry, carry, gory, Laura, Ellery, aurora, 
sorrow, sorrows, Sarah, yarrow, story, starry, Cicero. 



EXERCISE XII. C, 154-158. 
§ 25. Different Directions of the Stroke for L. 

1. Ill, ell, ale, awl, oil, owl, else, loss, losses, last, lists, Lester, Lester's, seal, steel, 
seals, slice, solaces, Sicily. 

2. («) Leap, lip, lap, loop, lobby, lobe, leaf, life, loaf, laugh, leave, Levi, live, Livy 
love, lava, Lima, limb, lime, lame, loam, lamb, lithe, loath, lath, lathe, loathe, leech, 
latch, liege, lodge, ledge, leak, lock, like, lake, luck, Luke, lack, look, lawyer, lyre, 
lore, lure, lower, Laura, Lyra, 15wery, laity, Lodi, lady, laddie. 

(5) League, log, lag, leg, long, lung, lion, Lynch, launch, lenity, lounge, luggage, 
link, lank, length, listen, lessen, loosen, lesson, Louisiana. 

8. (a) Alum, alma, Almira, alumni, alchemy, Hallam, hillock, alike, elk, alack 
Alleghany. , 

(b) El may be used for L in the following words :— Along, Alison, Eleusinia, Mi« 
nois, ulna, Helena. 



PHONOGRAPHIC WRITING EXERCISES. 17 

(c) Use Lay for Lin the following words: — Elcpe, Aleppo, Elba, elbow, alibi, elf, 
Alpha, aloof, Olivia, olive, Elva, Alva, health, allege, elegy, alight, elate, alto, al- 
lied, alloyed, allayed, allude, allowed, also, allure, Elisha (Lay-Shay), Ellas (Lay- 
Es), always, alliance, illness, Elihu (Lay-Hay). 

4. Peal, appeal, appellee, pill, pillow, Paul, Polly, Apollo, Poll, pile, ptfle, Paley, 
pole, opal, pool, happily, pull, pulley, bill, billow, billowy, ball, bile, boil, bail, Bai- 
ley, belay, bewail, bell, bellow, below, bowl, Buel, Beulah, tall, wittily, whitlow, 
outlie, tile, toil, tale, toll, tool, towel, tally, tallow, tallowy, outlaw, outlay, deal, 
Delia, ideal, Adelia, ideally, dill, doll, Dolly, oddly, dial, widely, Doyle, dale, daily, 
delay, dell, dwell, Headly, dale, dull, duel, duly, dally, dahlia (dA-lia, a plant named 
from Dahl=DAl, a Swedish botanist), dual, duello, assail, Osceola, Asahel, zeal, 
easel, easily, thill, Athalia, Thu'le, shawl (Shay-Lay), shallow, loll, lily, lull, Lola, 
oral, orally, earl, early, meal, mealy, mill, Amelia, Himmaleh, Moll, Molly, mile, 
Milo, mail, male, Malay, mellow, Emily, homily, mule, mallow, chill, chilly, gill 
(djil), jail, jolly, July, Joel, jole (cheek), jewel, jelly, Julia, swell, swallow, keel, key- 
hole, kill, quill, Aquila, chyle, coil, quail, quell, Kelly, coal, cull, cool, cowl, gill, 
gall, guile, gala, Goliah, gull, gully, ghoul (guil), galley, hilly, holly, hollow, Haw- 
ley, hallow, holy, halloo, halo. 

5. Feel, Ophelia, fill, Philo, folly, foil, fuel, fallow, fowl, veal, villa, vial, viol, 
volley, vail, avail, valley, vowel, avowal, reel, real, really, rill, royal, royally, rail, 
Baleigh, Eiley, Eolla, roll, rule, rally, ruly, unruly, rely, relay, whirl, wearily, 
(Wer-Lay), warily. 

6. Kneel, anneal, Nile, knell, Nelly, nail, inhale, knoll, null, annul, annual, an- 
nually, newly, only, kingly, wrongly, squall, squally, skull, scowl, scholia. 

7. Shawl, Shiloh, shyly, shell, Shelley, shale, shaly, shoal, shallow, Ashley, 
social. 

8. Elisha, eyelash, willowish, "Walsh, yellowish (Yuh-Lay-Shay), lash, lashed, 
slash, slush, polish, polished, abolish, abolished, relish, relished. 

9. Dash, dish, tissue, whitish, toyish, wettish, tush, sottish, sweetish, Swedish. 

10. Ash, issue, Shaw, wash (Weh-Ish), showy, hush, sash, bush, abash, push, 
Jewish, cash, gush, Irish (Ar-Ish), harsh (Ar-Shay), gnash, mush, fish (Ef-Shay), 
fishy (Ef-Ish). 



EXERCISE XIII. C, 159-169. 
§ 26. El, and Ar, Hook Signs. 

1. (a) Plea, hopple, ply, apply, play, apple, plow, blow, blew, blue, idle, idol, 
huddle, addle, hatchel, claw, cloy, clay, clayey, Chloe, eclat, clue, eagle, glee, 
higgle, glow, ogle, ugly, glue, gluey, flee, flea, flaw, offal, awfully, fly, flay, flow, flew, 
flue, evil, hovel, oval. 

(I) Please, applause, apples, plus, plays, plies, applies, place, bliss, hobbles, blues, 
blows, blaze, idols, idles, huddles, addles, hatchels, clause, close, claws, class, clues, 
higgles, glees, gloss, ogles, glaze, glows, glass, glues, fleece, flaws, flies, flays, flows, 
flues, evils, hovels, pleases, places, blesses, clauses, classes, glazes, fleeces. 

(c) Pleased, placed, blessed, blazed, blast, classed, closed, glossed, glazed. 

(c7) Plaster, bluster, blister, cloister, cluster, Gloucester (Glos'ter). 

(e) See C, 161, E. 2. — Only, analyze, unless, annals, enlist, annalist, analyzed, 
analogy, analogous, analysis. 

2. (a) Hopper, pry, pray, pro, prow, bray, brew, brow, tree, trio, eater, otter, try, 
Troy, hater, tray, trow, utter, hatter, outer, draw, dry, dray, aider, odor, adder, 
drew, cry, acre, ochre, crow, crew, eager, agree, augur, gray, grow, free, offer, fry, 



18 PHONOGRAPHIC WRITING EXERCISES. 

fray, affray, fro, Ophir, overawe, ether, author, throw, threw, hither, wisher, usher, 
Asher, azure, inner, honor, Homer, hammer, humor (ytumor). 

(b) Prize, apprize, price, praise, appraise, press, oppress, prose, prSws, breeze, 
brace, brass, bruise, brows, trice, tries, trace, truss, truce, dross, dress, address, 
cross, across, cries, craze, cruise, Greece, grease, egress, grace, gross, grows, grass, 
freeze, offers, fries, phrase, authorize, authors, thrice, honors, hammers. 

(c) Priest, priced, apprised, praised, pressed, oppressed, braced, bruised, Trist, 
traced, trust, dressed, addressed, crossed, Christ, crest, crust, crazed, cruised, grist, 
graced, grazed, frost, authorized, thrust. 

(d) Precise, process, praises, breezes, braces, bruises, brazes, tresses, trusses, 
dresses, addresses, Croesus, crises, crisis, crazes, greases, grazes, grasses. 

(?) Brewster, truster, thruster. 

8. An El-IIooh Sign Followed by a Primary Sign.— {a) Plumb, plume, Platea, 
Plato, Pluto, play-day, player, Pliny, pledge, plush, pluck, plague, blame, bloom, 
blithe, blush, bluish, bleach, blotch, oblige, block, bleak, black, idler, clip, club, 
clevy, climb, claim, acclaim, clam, cloudy, cloth, clothe, clear, Clara (Kel-Ray), 
clutch, clash, clayish, clique, click, clock, cloak, cluck, clack, clog, cling, clung, glib, 
globe, gleam, gloom, eagle-eyed, glossy, glassy, glare (Gel-Arj, glory. 

(h) Flip, flap, flabby, effluvia, flame, phlegm, flume, flighty, fluid, fleecy, flywheel 
(F el-El), flaiL, flier, Flora, flower, flowery, flare, fledge, flesh tjFel-Shay), flush, flash, 
fleshy (Fel-Ish), flake, flock, fluke, flog, flag, fling, flung. 

(c) The following words are written in the Reporting Style with Mel, Nel, Pel. 
See C, 161, R. 2. — Hemlock, unlatch, unlock, unlike, unlucky, relic, relish, relax, 
relapse, rail-road (Rel-Eay-Dee). 

4. An Ar-IIook Sign Folloiced by a Primary Sign. — (a) Prop, apropos, probe, 
prime, pretty, prowess, prosy, April, prowl, prior, prayer, prairie (prirri, not penrri), 
preach, approach, Prussia, Prague, bribe, bravo, brim, Brahma, broom, ebriety, 
Brady, broth, breath, breathe, breezy, broil, brier, brewer, brewery, brawny, briny, 
breach, broach, brooch, bridge, abridge, brush, brick, break, broke, brook, brag, 
bring, trip, trope, troop, tribe, trophy, trim, treaty, triad, Tracy, utterly, trial, trail, 
truly, truer, triune, trudge, trash, trachea, track, drip, drop, droop, drab, dream, 
dram, drouth (drouth, not drout), dressy, drowsy, drill, droll, drily, drear, dreary, 
drawer, drudge, drake, drug, creep, crop, croop, crib, cream, crime, crumb, create, 
crazy, crawl, cruel, crier (Ker-Ray), crayon, crouch, crush, crash, creek, croak, 
crook, crag, grip, grope, group, grab, groom, grotto, greedy, growth, grassy, eagerly, 
growl, gruel, grower (Ger-Eay), grudge, Greek, grog. 

(b) Frame, Friday, froth, freely, frail, friar, Phrygia, fresh (Fer-Ish), freak, Afri- 
ca, frog, throb, thrill, thrall, thrush (Ther-Shay), throng. 

5. A Primary Letter Folloiced, by an El-IIooJc Sign, — (a) Papal, people, pupil, 
employ, imply, maple, tipple, dapple, ripple (Kay-Pel), chapel, couple, payable, 
pebble, Bible, bubble, feeble, foible, fable, amiable, humble, table, audible, double, 
liable, lable, allowable, rebel, nibble, noble, enable, quibble, cable, gobble, total, 
tattle, chattel, shuttle, peddle, fiddle, model, tweedle, Mitchell, pickle, buckle, 
fickle, vehicle, vocal, Michael, meekly, tackle, tickle, thickly, ethical, likely, oracle 
(Eay-Kel), knuckle, nickel, chuckle, shackle (Shay-Kel), cackle, ankle, uncle, bog- 
gle, bugle, legal, illegal (El-Gel), regal, juggle, goggle, giggle, angle, baffle, muffle, 
lawful, shuffle, bevel, swivel, devil, youthful, cavil, gav'el, deathly, apishly, boyishly, 
bushel, facial, officially, rashly (Eay-Shel), hanshly, initial, uncial, hoggishly. » 

(b) Brief Way and an El-liooh Sign.— Whipple (Weh-Pel), whiffle, whittle, 
wheedle, waddle, weekly, waggle. 

(c) The following words are written in the Reporting Style with Mel, Nel, Eel: 
Pommel-ed (see C, 266, R. 8), enamel, animal, camel, penal, panel, finai-ly, venal, 



PHOXOGEAPIIIO WU1TINQ EXEIiCISES. 19 

tunnel, channel, kennel, barrel, barely, gnarl, coral, thoroughly, purely, son-in-law 
(Sen-Nel), neuralgia (En-Eel-Jay), manlike (Em-Xel-Kay), comely, calmly, sister- 
in-law (Ses-Ter-Nel), rural, floral, spiral, Xew Orleans (En-Eel'ens). 

6. (a) Pauper, paper, fiber, vapor, ember, imbrue, taper, Tabor, dipper, lep/er, 
labor, reaper, robber, harbor (Ar-Ber), neighbor, chopper, jobber, shipper," keeper, 
copper, sweeper (Sway-Per), poetry, powder, betray, tawdry, tutor, editor, daughter, 
withdraw, ultra, writer (see Comp., 164, E. 2), entry, Andrew, chowder, equator, ac- 
couter, gaiter, pitcher, butcher, badger, voucher, voyager, major, teacher, ditcher, 
dodger, lodger, ledger, richer, Eodger, archer (Ar-Cher), picker, baker, beggar-y, 
vicar, vigor, vagary, maker, meager, swagger, taker, Tucker, tiger, decree, dicker, 
degree, dagger, liquor, looker, leaguer, rigor, roguery, knocker, negro, choker, joker, 
shaker (Shay-Ker), sugar (Shay-Ger), quicker, quackery, cougar (kurgar), angry. 

(b) Fifer, favor, Humphrey, mover, laugher, loafer, lever, lover, knavery, Hano- 
ver, Shaffer (Shay-Eer), shiver, bather, feathery, ^Jethro, pusher, fisher, fishery, 
measure, leisure, rasher (Ray-Sher), harsher (Ar-Sher), erasure (Ar-Zher), Cheshire, 
Palmer, tamer, dimmer, rumor, rhymer, armor (Ar-Mer), enamor, culmer, banner, 
Abner, minor, tenor, dinner, ulnar, Eleanor. 

(e) Weeper (Wuh-Per), whipper, Webber, wager, watcher, witchery, wisher, win- 
ner (Weh-Ner). 

(d) Wafer (Weh-Ef-Ar), weaver, waver (Weh-Yee-Ar). 

7. See C, 169. — Fail, feel, fill, fell, appear, share, aver, converse, averse, term, 
firm, germ, shirk, pearl, nerve, person, chair, sharp, shark, dark, charm, bar- 
barous, barbarism, marvelous, calomel, collect, calcine, paralyze, engineer, pioneer, 
fail, follow, form, former (Fer-Mer), moral, George, Georgia, correct, burst, church, 
occurs, cursory, vulgar, courage, curb, course, recourse, fool, qualify, quality, deter, 
figure, require, feature, endure, procure, ignore, territory. 



EXERCISE XIV. C, 170-173. 
§ 27. A Circle oh Loop Prefixed to an El, or Ar, Hook Sign. 

1. (fl) Supply, supple, Sybil, sable, settle, subtle, sidle, saddle, satchel, sickle, sick- 
ly, cycle, suckle, civil, civilly. 

il>) Possible, possibly, peaceable, passable, feasible, fusible, visibly, disciple, dis- 
play, disable, adducible, causable, accusable, paschal, physical, vesicle, phthisical, 
peaceful, passively, unsocial, unsocially. 

(c) Plausible, blissful, briskly, traceable, classical, classically, crucible, graceful, 
taxable, noticeable, explore. 

2. (a) Sipper, spry, spray, supper, sapper, Cibber, saber, sober, Cyprus, cypres?, 
suppress, spruce, straw, satyr, stray, strow, setter, strew, suitor, cedar, cider, sadder, 
stress, sager, seeker, sicker, sucker, succor, sacker, scarce, Se'gar, Sea'ger, Se'cor, 
sister, Sestri, Sostra'tus (Ses-Ter-Tees). 

(b) Prosper, destroy, destroyer, distress, decider, dissiiader, outstrip, outstretch, 
disaster, disastrous, execrable, excrescence (Kay-Skers-Ens), excursive, excursus, 
subscribe (Sbee-Sker-Eee), prescribe, proscribe, disagree, descry, discourse, tasker, 
Jasper. 

(c) See C, 171, E. 3.— Subscribe (Sbee-Skay-Bee), subscriber, prescribe, pro- 
scribe, describe. 

3. A Sper-Sigii Preceded ly Other Signs— Caspar, gossiper, disappear, day- 
spring, lisper, rasper, whisper (Whay-Sper), pastry, pasture, posture, bowstring, 
shoestring, extreme, gastric, extra, mixture, tapestry, texture (teks-tyur), depositor, 



20 PHONOGRAPHIC WHITING EXERCISES. 

orchestra, apostrophe, mouse-trap, oversirew, beseecher, besieger, massacre, masker,' 
hemisphere (Ems-Fer), atmosphere, passover, dishonor, designer, poisoner, prisoner, 
listener (Els-Ner), signer (Iss-Ner), sooner, saner. 

4. (a) Stopper, stupor, stooper, stabber, stater, stutter, stouter, stitcher, stager, 
stalker, Stocker, stoker, stagger. 

(b) Stee and an El or Ar Hook Sign.— Stopple, stipple, steeple, staple, stable, 
stubble, stickle, stifle, stainer, stunner, stcner. 

(c) Sier and an El or Ar Hook Sign. — Stripling, strigil (stridj-il), strocal, straddle, 
straggle, strickle, strobil, struggle ; stripper, strapper, streamer, strainer, stretcher, 
striker, stroker, strutter, stridor. 

5. A Sper-Sign Followed by a Primary Letter.— Supreme, superadd, sprall, so- 
prano, sprig, spring, sprung, suburb, sobriety, strip, stripe, strap, satrap, Strabo, 
stream, strata, stroll, stretch, streak, stroke, struck, string, strong, scrape, scribe, 
scrub, scream, screech, scrawl, secrecy, scratch, scraggy. 

6. Two El-Hook Signs. — (a) Pliable, Blakely, blackly, glibly, playfully, flyblow, 
fulfill, fleshly, flashily, bluishiy. 

(b) In the Reporting Style — Unlikely, unluckily, plural, flannel, colonial, calomel. 

7. Two Ar-IIook Signs. — Proper, portray, prudery, preacher, perjure, perjury, 
bribery, breaker, broker, bragger, trooper, traitor, treachery, trickery, draper, 
drapery, drudgery, creeper, creator, croaker, cracker, Gregory, brother, brasier, abra- 
sure, pressure, frippery, framer, overdraw, overthrow, overgrow, trimmer, tremor, 
treasure, treasury, dreamer, drummer, shrubbery, crusher, crosier, grammar, grazier. 

8. An El-Rook, and an Ar-Hook, Sign. — Plummer, apple-tree, plethora, blubber, 
blamer, blotter, bleacher, obliger, blacker, clipper, clapper, clatter, glitter, flavor, 
flattery, Fletcher, flicker, clamor, glimmer, glazier. 

9. An Ar-Hook, and an El-Hook, Sign. — Prickly, briefly, frothily, fragile, freshly, 
freckle, frugal, verbal, overflow, triple, treble, trouble, trifle, trivial, travel, turtle, 
treacle, trickle, dribble, drivel, draggle, shrivel, cripple, cradle, crackle, grapple, 
agreeable. 



EXERCISE XV. C, 174-180. 
§ 28. In, Ler, and Eel, Hooks. 

1. (a) Inseparable, inseparably, insuperable, inspire, unsuppressed, insuppress- 
ible, ensober, instructor, unstring, unstrung, unscrupulous, inscribe, unscrew, inse- 
cure, insecurity, inscroll. 

(b) Enslave, unseemly, unsullied, unsurmised, enslaver, unceremonious, unso- 
licitous, unsolvable, insoluble, unsalable, insular, unswathe, unswayable. 

2. The following words may be written in the Eeporting Style with the Ler- and 
Pel- hook signs: — Blair, abler, April, trial, teller, control, Charles, settler, saddler, 
sabler, clear, ocular, color, collar, clerk, Clark, caloric, jocular, jugular, scholar, 
secular, haggler, moral, fuller, traveler, trifler, buckler, smuggler, straggler, cobbler, 
gambler, tippler, tattler, dabbler, corporal, territorial, editorial, clairvoyance, clergy, 
tolerable, stickler, sideral, sidereal, mackerel, pastoral, liberal, illiberal (El-Brel). 

§ 29. Write, according to the directions of § 12, the following paragraphs : 
The /Discontented, ,Pendnlum. — An /Old clock /that had /Stood for fifty years in-a 
farmer's /kitchen. /Without giving its owner any cause of /Complaint, early ome sum- 
mer's (Sem-Eays) /morning, /before the family (f-m-1) was stirring, /Suddenly /Stop- 
ped. /Upon this, the ,dial-,plate (if we may /Credit the fable) /Changed /Countenance 
with alasm ; the /hands /made a /vain /effort to continue their course ; the wheels 
/remained /motionless with surprise; the weights hung speechless (sp-ob-ls)* each 



PHONOGRAPHIC WRITING EXEIJCJSES. 21 

member ,felt disposed to lay tlie blame on-the others. At Length the dial /instituted 
a formal (fr-m-1) inquiry as to-the cause of-the /Stagnation, when /hands, wheels, 
weights, with one voice, /protested their innocence (ns-ns). 

But now a /faint tick was /heard below from-the /pendulum, who thus^ spoke :— 
**I confess myself to be-the sole cause of-the stoppage (s£p-j), and I-am willing, for- 
the /general /satisfaction, to /assign my reasons. The truth is, /hat I-am /tired of 
ticking." /Upon hearing this, the />ld clock became so /enraged /that it was on-the 
very /point of striking. 

"Lazy wire !" /exclaimed the dial~/plate, /holding up its /hands. "Very /good," 
/replied the /pendulum, "it is vastly (vs-l) easy for you, Mistress (ms-trs) Dial, who 
have always, as every body knows, set yourself up above me — it is vastly easy for 
you, I-say, to accuse other people of laziness (1 z ns) ! You, who have had nothing to 
do all-the days of your life but to stare (stn) people in the face, and to amuse your- 
self with watching all /that goes on in-the /Mtcheh ! Think, I beseech you, how you 
would like to be /Shut up for life in this dark closet, and to wag /backwards and /for- 
wards, year /after year, as I-do."— To be continued. 



EXEECISE XVI. C, 181-189. 
§ 30. Ef, Yee, and Ex, Hooks. ^ 

1. (a) Puff, beef, buff, tough, doff, deaf, chief, chafe, chaff, cough, coif, cuff, calf, 
quaff, Gough (Gof ), reef, rife, rough, roof, huff, hoof. 

(&) Set-off, staff, stiff, stuff, skiff, scoff, serf, surf. 

(c) Bluff, belief, cliff, clef. 

(d) Proof, brief, trough, gruff. 

(e) Pave, dive, dove, achieve, Jove, gyve, cave, cove, Gove, rive, arrive, rave, 
rove, heave, hive, hove. 

(g) Stave, stove, serve, swerve, starve. 

(7i) Believe, breve, brave, contrive, twelve, trave, derive, drive, drove, delve, 
cleave, clave, clove, crave, grieve, groove, grove, glove, glave ; strive, strove. 

2. (a) Pin, pawn, pine, opine, pain, pen, open, pun, pan, happen, oppugn, bean, 
bane, ebon, bone, bun, ban, boon, tin, ton, tan, tune, town, dean, Eden, din, hidden, 
dawn, don, dine, iodine, deign, den, Doane, Dan, chin, chain, Jane, June, John, 
join, Augean, keen, kin, cane, ken, can, con, cone, coon, kine, coin, rain, wren, ran, 
roan, run, Ehine, hen, Hun, hone, hewn. 

(b) Spin, spun, span, spoon, spine, Spain, supine, Sabine, stain, stun, stone, seton, 
Satan, satin, Sidon, sedan, sadden, sudden, sicken, sequin, skein, scan, Syrian. 

(c) Plain, plan, blain, blown, clean, clan, glean, glen. 

(d) Apron, prone, prune, brine, brain, bran, brown, drain, drawn, drone, drown, 
Adrian, train, crane, crone, crown, Akron, acorn, green, grin, grain, grown, groan. 

(e) Brief Way and an En-Hook Sign.— Weapon, waken, wagon, worn, sworn, 
warn, "Warren, whipper-in (Wuh-Pren). 

3. (a) The En-IIook on Cartes.— Fin, feign, fen, fan, fun, fawn, fine, Vaughn 
(Yon),vine, woven (Weh-Ven), oven, heaven, haven, van, Avon, Ethan, thin, thane, 
heathen, assign, sheen, Ossian, shin, ashen, shone, shown, ocean, shun, shine, lean, 
Lynn, lane, lawn, loan, loon, loin, line, alien, Ellen, Helen, Eolian, Allen, woolen, 
horn, iron, arraign, Aaron, earn, urn, mean, main, mane, moan, moon, omen, hu- 
mane, woman, women, yeoman, non, anon, onion, nine, noon, inane, noun, swain 
<Iss-Wayn), swine, swoon. 



22 PHONOGRAPHIC W BIT I KG EXERCISES. 

(b) Soften, syphon, seven, saline, slain, Solon, sullen, saloon, serene, syren, con- 
cern, seaman, Simon, summon, salmon. 

(c) Flynn, flown, Flen, Thlen, throne, shrine, Zhern, Nern, Mern, Tuern. 

4. See C, fc5.— Puff, puffy ; pen, penny ; buff, bevy ; ebon, ebony ; doff, Duffy, 
defy ; Dane, Dana, deny ; chaff, chaffy ; chin, China ; cough, coffee ; kin, Kinuey ; 
cone, coney ; reef, rive, review ; huff, huffy ; fin, fan, Finney, funny ; vine, viny, 
vein, veiny ; assign, assignee ; loan, Olney (El-En) ; rain, rainy ; main, many ; moan, 
money ; Swain, Sweeney. 

5. Puffs, paves, believes, braves, doves, droves, delves, achieves, Jove's, coughs, 
caves, cloves, Gove's, groves, gloves, arrives, swerves, heaves. 

6. (a) Pens, punster, bans, boons, spins, tense, tenses, dens, dense, condense, con- 
denses, condensed, chance, chances, chanced, John's, trance, entrance', entrances, 
entranced', cans, Kansas, canst, cleanse, cleansed, cleanses, instance, instances, in- 
stanced, rains, preference (Pref-Eens), preferences, glance, glances, glanced, appear- 
ance, appearances, spinster, spinsters, punsters. 

(b) See C, 1S6, E. 1, b.— Eansom, ransack, gainsayed. 

7. Fins, vines, veins, thins, thanes, assigns, shines, shuns, lines, loans, lanes, 
earns, Aaron's, urns, means, moans, moons, nines, nuns, nonce, swains, swoons. 

8. The Efllook in the Middle of Words. — Paphian, Buffon, buffoon, toughen, 
typhoon, Typhon, deafen, dauphin, define, divine, divan, Epiphany, Bavaria, be- 
fog, bivouac, outfit, outvote, defied, deified, edified, defer, devote, devotee, deviate, 
devout, divide, devoid, David, devour, reveal, arrival, rival, revel, revere, river, 
rover, rougher, reference, equivoke, heaver, hover, paver, puffer, beaver, tougher, 
diver, Dover, chaffer, Jeffrey, griever, coffer, cover, quaver, diph'thong, diverge, ad- 
vocacy, divinity, cacophony, defense, divorce, adverse, advance, roofless, spavin, 
beverage, believer, deliver, cleaver, clover, clever, prover, approver, brevier, 
bravery, braver, trover, driver, drover, graver, prophet, profit, grievance, behavior, 
extravagance, soporific. 

9. The En-Hook in the Middle of Words.— (a) Panic, penury, pinery, punish, 
banish, tonnage, tenth, eighteenth, Downing, canopy, coinage, candy, Candia, keen- 
eyed, Canary (Ken-Bay), quinsy, keenly, keeneR, coineE, economy, Canning, cun- 
ning, gunneR, gunnery (Gen-Eay), gainsay, rainbow, Eenwick, Ehenish (Een-Shay), 
runner, runaway, finer, finery, finely, finish, veneer, vainly, heavenly, vainer, ran- 
ish, atheneum, thinner, Athenian, heathenish (Tnen-Sbay), Lenox, Leonora, 
linear, lonely, lonesome, min'ute, humanity, Monday, manhood, moon-eyed, mean- 
ce, mineR (minor, Em-Ner), nunnery. 

(b) An En-LIook Sign and Two Primary Letters. — Monomania, mantilla, menial, 
moonbeam, phenomena, phenomenon (Fen-Em-Nen). 

(c) Barnwell (Bee-E en-Lay), benignly, piquancy, pecuniary, potency, paganish, 
buttonwood (Bee-Ten-Dee), button-hole, turnkey, diurnal, demeanor, occupancy, 
cabin-boy, vacancy, organic, millennium, malignly, maligner, milliner, millionaire, 
envenom, vernal. 

(d) Plenty, planet, plunge, blanch, brownish, furnish, French, fringe, frenzy, 
Greenwood (grn-d), primer, granary ^Gren-Eay), plainer, plenary, planner, cleaner^ 
gleaner, greenly, cleanly, plainLy. 

(e) Penurious (Pen-Rays), openness, penance, convenience, finance, evenness, 
fineness, thinness. 

(g) Synonym (Snen-Em), Saranac (Iss-Een-Kay), seminary (Smen-Eay), sponge, 
Spanish, spinner, staunch, stench, stingy, stanza, suddenly (Sden-El), schooner 
(Sken-Ar), scanner. 

(Ji) Moonshine (Men <Shen), organism. 

10. A Primary Letter and an En-Hook Sign.— Pippin, pinion, pennon, pigeon, 



PHONOGRAPHIC WRITING EXEECISES. 23 

pagan, bobbin, baboon, obtain, button, bidden, beacon, begin, born (Bee-Ren), burn, 
barn, bourne, Auburn, Byron, Bowman, benign, Bunyan, ottoman, outdone, Italy, 
turn (Tee-Ren), outrun, taken, token, deepen, domain, demon, adorn (Dee-Ren), 
deacon, cheapen, chicken, Japan, Julian, cabin, coffin, Koran, cannon, Canaan, 
kitchen, quicken, gammon, ripen (Ray-Fen), rapine, Reuben, orphan, refine, ruf- 
fian, roughen, ravine, raven, renown, region, origin, rejoin, regain, foeman, famine, 
half-moon, foreign (Ef-Ren), felon, violin, Thorne, Assyrian, aspen, Alpine (Lay- 
Pen), Albion, leaven, Lyman, lemon, illumine (El-Men), learn (Lay-Arn), linen (Ei- 
Nen), legion (Lay-Jen), liken, Arabian, Roman, Remain, ORgan, Oregon, Arragon, 
muffin, million, minion, imagine, machine, New-Haven, uneven, inhuman, Nathan, 
enjoin, engine. 

11. A Pel, or Per, Sign and an En-Hook Sign. — Plebeian, platoon, protean, ap- 
pertain, blacken, broken, Bremen, Britain, trepan, Tribune, triton, drayman, Dryden, 
dragoon, chairman, German, chlorine (Kel-Rea), clarion, Griffin, flagon, Phrygian, 
African, overrun, Mormon, Norman. 

§ 31. A final En-Es sound, preceded by a curve-sign consonant, is usually repre- 
sented by Ens instead of the En-hook and Iss, especially when derivative words 
require the En-stroke ; as, offense, Ef-Ens — offensive, Ef-Ens-Yee — offenses, Ef- 
Enses — convince, con-Vee-Ens — convinced, con-Vee Enst — convinces, con-Vee- 
Enses. The following paragraph contains nearly all the words written in accord- 
ance with this principle. 

(b) Fence, offense, evince, convince, Lance, Lense, mince, immense, announce, en- 
hance, .annoyance, denounce, romance, renounce, assurance (Sher Ens), affirmance 
(fr-m ns), penance (pn ns), finance (fn ns), .allowance (Lay Ens^, .alliance, .convey- 
ance, .affluence, pronounce. 

Rem. The words in the above paragraph which are preceded by a point (.) re- 
quire ihe n of the final syllable to be represented by a stroke, not only because the 
derivatives from them require the stroke, but because two concurrent vowels gen- 
erally demand that the preceding and following consonants should be represented 
by a stroke. See the Phonographic Orthographer, § 3, R. 2. 



EXEECISE XVII. C, 190-196. 
§ 32. The Shon axd Tiv Hooks. 

1. The Shon-IIooJc on Straight Signs. — (a) Passion, potion, option, compassion, 
Bashan, Titian, tuition, commutation, edition, addition, condition, accommodation, 
caution, auction, occasion, equation, action, connection, concussion, cushion, Goshen, 
ration, Hessian. 

(jb) Station, citation, situation, constitution (Steh-Teeshon), section, suction. 

(c) Collision, completion, conclusion, apparition, operation, oppression, Prussian, 
compression, abrasion, attrition, contrition, accretion, creation, Grecian, aggression. 

(cZj Seclusion, separation, inspiration, consideration, secretion, consecration. 

(e) Petition, optician, Parisian, potation, apportion, obtusion, aberration, adop- 
tion, diction, education, Egyptian, ejection, occupation, caption, quotation, irritation, 
Artesian, erudition, radiation, reaction, rogation, fiction, affection, variation, vaca- 
tion, vocation, assertion, hesitation (Zee-Tee'shon), libation, logician, locat ; on, 
CLection, eLocution, Legation, allegation (El-Gay'shon), eituption, iuRuption, eaec- 
tion, iRiugacion, aREOgation, imitation, mutation, mediation, magician, immersion, 
notation, intuition, inaction, negation. 

(#) Dec-eption, ob-trusion, ex-hibition, ven-eration, div-ersion, dis-cussion, ex- 



24 PHOKOGEAPHIC WEITING EXERCISES. 

pression, co-operation, pro-bation, pro-hibition, dir-ection, attr-action, con-sti- 
uction. 

2. (a) Combative, commutative, dative, talkative, active, connective, sedative, 
consecutive, constitutive, ablative, operative, creative, susceptive (Ses-Peetiv). 

(b) Effective, affective, conductive, adjective, vocative, elective, captive, inac« 
live, communicative, negative, inchoative, intuitive, imitative, optative, putative, 
appetative, fugitive, vegetive, comparative (Pee-Eaytiv), abortive, tortive, sport- 
ive, furtive, commemorative. 

(c) Applicative, attractive, directive, contractive ; significative, justificative, dupli- 
cative, explicative, suffocative, prov-ocative, recreative, prerogative (pr-r-g^y), 
speculative (sp-kl^), coagulative (k-gltv), preparative (pr-p-rta), lu-crative, co- 
operative, re-sto-rative, illus-trative, f i-gurative, rec-itative, autho-ri-tative, pre- 
servative, t-en-tative, stupef-active, p-utref-active, r-efr-active, ab-str-active, def- 
ective, in-eff-ective, in-f-ective, r-efl-ective, in-fl-ective, coll-ective, re-sp-ective, 
pros-p-ective, per-sp-ective,' corr-ective, in-v-ective, affli-ctive, re-stri-ctive, r-ed- 
uctive, pro-d-uctive, ob-str-uctive, de-str-uctive, instr-uctive, con-str-uctive, ex- 
pletive, dis-cretive, n-utritive, distributive (Deester-Bee'tiv), prec-eptive, exc-eptive, 
perc-eptive, dec-eptive, rec-eptive, eE-uptive, corr-uptive, assertive (Es-Eaytiv), 
div-er^e, ex-ecutive, ven-erative, re-sp-ective. 

3. The Shon-Hook on Curves.— {a) Fashion, Phocion, fusion, effusion, affusion, 
Veeskon, vision, evasion, ovation, confession, confusion, Ith'shon, Tneeshon, 
Es'shon, Zee'shon, Ish'shon, Thee'shon, Lay'shon, elision, Elysian, elation, lotion, 
illusion, elusion, allusion, halcyon, erasion, oration, erosion, mission, emission, 
omission, motion, emotion, nation, notion, unction, Way'shon, Yay'shon. 

(?>) Suffusion, solution, consolation, consummation, sanation, sanction, Sway'- 
shon, constellation. 

(c) Affiation, fruition, freshen, version, aversion, conversion, valuation (unvocal- 
ized Yelshon through the line ; see the Compendium, § 40, E. 2), convulsion, Thra- 
cian, cineration (Sner'shon). 

(d) Palliation (Pee-Lay / shon), pollution, pension, abolition, ebullition, tension, 
attention, Domitian, admission, dilation, adulation, dilution, delusion, donation, 
gentian, junction (Jay-Ingshon), coalition, ignition, affiliation, Phoenician, func- 
tion (Ef-Ing'shon), volition, violation, evolution, Yenetian, vitiation (Yee-Shay'- 
shon), ascension, alienation (Lay-En'shon), monition, munition, mention, mansion, 
infusion, invasion, animation, inhaLation, inanition, nunnation, initiation (En- 
Ish'shon). 

(e) Population, abomination, demolition, domination, dimension, nomination, 
invention, accumulation, machination, Rumination, iLLumination. 

4. Passions, editions, actions, rations, Hessians, stations, sections, collisions, 
operations, aggressions, considerations, operatives, adjectives, captives, fugitives, 
prerogatives, restoratives, expletives, perceptives, executives, fashions, visions, illu- 
sions, orations, emotions, nations, solutions, constellations, conversions, attentions, 
donations, functions, revisions. 

5. See C, 195. — Optional, passionary, Passion week (Peesbon-Kay), passionate 
(Peeshon-Tee), additional, conditional, occasional, auctioneer, rational, missionary, 
Visionary, attractiveness, active-ness, activ-ity, c-aptiv-ity, con-secutive-ness, talka- 
tiveness, f-urtive-ly, com-p-arative-ly. 

6. See C, 191, E. 2. — Ocean, ashen, commission, session, scission, concession, 
attenuation, diminution, admonition. 



PHONOGRAPHIC WRITING EXERCISES 



25 



EXERCISE XVIII. C, 197-203. 
§ 33. The Small Hook foe, Shox. 

1. Opposition, possession, position, apposition, abscission, obsession, decision, 
dissuasion, excision, acquisition, accession, accusation, causation, cassation, reci- 
gion, recession, physician, secession, cessation, association, incision, compensation, 
condensation, succession, supposition, precision, procession, persuasion, conversa- 
tion, authorization, transition. 

2. Division, devotion, diffusion, abbreviation, aggravation, profession, deriva- 
tion. 

3. See C, 197, E. 2. -Division, devotion, diffusion, abbreviation, aggravation, 
profession, derivation. 

4. (a) Possessions, decisions, acquisitions, accusations, physicians, associations, 
incisions, persuasions, conversations, successions. 

(b) Transitional, devotional, professional, conversational. 

5. In accordance with the principle of the Compendium, 197, E. 4, write the fol- 
lowing words :— Taxation, specification, transaction, prosecution, justification, so 
licitation, devastation, classification. 

§ 34. Write, in accordance with the directions of § 12, the following : 

A TEMPERANCE ADDRESS. 



BY J. N. HUME, 



Ye /riends of /moderation, 
Who think a r-efor-mation, 
Or moral r-eno-vation, 
Would /benefit our nation ; 
Who deem /intoxication, 
With all its dissipation, 
In every rank and station, 
A cause of degradation, 
Of which your observation 
Gives /ample demonstration ; 
Who see-the ruination, 
Distrust and desolation, 
The open violation 
Of moral obligation, 
The /Wretched habitation, 
/Without accommodation, 
O any regulation, 
For common susten-tation, 
A scene of deprivation 
/Unequaled in creation ; 
The /frequent desecration 
Of Sabbath ordination ; 
The crime and depredation, 
Defying legislation ; 
The awful prof-anation 
Of common conversation ; 
The mental aberration, 
The dire infatuation, 
With every sad gradation 
Of maniac desperation ;— 



M.D. 

Ye who with consternation 
/Behold this devastation, 
And utter con-d-em-nation 
Of all inebriation, 
Why sanction its duration, 
Or show disapprobation 
Of any combination 
For its extermination ? 
We deem a declasation 
/That offers no temptation 
By any palliation 
Of this abomination, 
The only sure foundation ; 
And /under this persuasion 
/Hold no communication 
With noxious emanation 
Of brewer's fer-mentation, 
Or poisonous preparation 
Of /spirits' distillation, 
Nor any vain libation 
Producing stimulation. 
To this determination 
We call consideration, 
And /Without hesitation 
/Invite co-operation, 
/Not /doubting imitation 
Will raise your /estimation. 
And by continuation 
/Afford you consolation ; 
For in /participation 



26 PHONOGRAPHIC WRITING EXERCISES. 

"With this association, And-may each indication 

You may by /meditation Of such regeneration 

Insure the preservation Be the theme of exultation 

Of-a future g-eneration Till its final consummation. 

From all con-t-amination. 



EXEECISE XIX. C, 204-208. 
§ 35. The Widened Em. 

1. Imp, hemp, hump, humpy, samp, stomp, pomp, Pompey, Pompeii (see C, 134), 
pump, bump, dump, dumpy, damp, champ, jump, camp, vamp, mump, Limp, 
Lump, Lamp, Eomp, namp, shampoo, swamp, swampy, impose, impious, imposed, 
im'post, imposition, impostor, impatience, impiety, impute, impede, impale, impel, 
ample, amply, empire, umpire, impair, empower, impure, impeach, impish, imperi- 
ous, imperative, simple,, sample, ensample, example, exemplify, primp, tramp, 
trump, crimp, cramp, plump, clamp, clump. 

2. Emboss, embosses, imbue, imbues, Sambo; ambush, ambitious, ambiguous, 
imbibe, embalm, embody, somebody, steamboat, embellish, embassy, embezzle, 
embassador, embarrass, embark, embargo, embank, ambition, humbug. 

3. See C, 204, E. 4. — Exemption, assumption, co-emption, presumption, pre- 
emption, empty, temptation, pumpkin, Sampson, Simpson. 

§ 36. Write, in accordance with the directions of § 12, the following paragraphs : 

The Discontented Pendulum— Continued from §29. — "As to /that," said the 
dial, "is there /not a window in your house, on purpose (Pee-Eay-Pees) for you to 
look through ?" " For all /that," /resumed the /pendulum, " it-is very dark here ; 
and, although (' all'-Thee) there-is-a window, I dare /not stop, even for-an /instant, 
to look out at it. Besides, I-am really /tired of my way of life ; and-if you wish, 
I'll tell you how I took this disgust at my /employment. I /happened this morning 
to be /calculating how many times I should-have to tick in-the course of only the 
next twenty-four hours ; perhaps (pr-ps) some of you above there can give me the 
/exact sum." 

The minute-/hand, being quick at figures, /presently /replied, " Eighty-six /thou- 
sand four /hundred [86,400] times." "/Exactly so," /replied the /pendulum. " Well, 
I appeal to you all, if the very /thought of this was /not enough t© fatigue one ; and- 
when I began to /multiply the strokes of one day by those of months and years, really 
it-is no /wonder if I /felt /discouraged at-the /prospect ; so, /after a /great deal of 
reasoning and hesitation, /thought I to myself, I'll stop." 

The dial /could scarcely (Skers-Lay) keep its /Countenance during this harangue 
(h-r-ng) ; but resuming its gravity (gr-v-t), thus /replied : " Dear Mr. /Pendulum, 
I-am really /astonished /that such-a useful, industrious person as yourself should* 
have been overcome (Ver^Kay) by this sudden action. It-is true, you have done a 
.great deal of work in your time; so have we all, and are likely to do; which 
although it may fatigue us to think of, the question (Kays-Ten) is, /Whether it will 
fatigue us to do. Would you now do me the favor to give /about half a-dozen 
strokes to /illustrate my /argument ?" 

The /pendulum /Complied, and /ticked six times at its usual pace. "Now," /re- 
sumed the dial, "may I be allowed to inquire if /that exertion (ks-rshn) was at all 
fatiguing or disagreeable to you ?" "/Not in-the least," /replied the /pendulum, " it- 
is /not of six strokes /that I complain, nor of sixty, but-of millions." " Yery /good,*' 
/replied the dial ; " but recollect (r-kl-k-t) /that though you may think of-a million 



PHONOGRAPHIC WRITING EXERCISES. 27 

strokes in-an /instant, you are /required to /execute but one; and /that, however 
often you may here/after have to swing, a /moment will always (1-w.s) be given you 
to swing in." "/That consideration staggers me, I confess," said-the /pendulum. 
,; Then I-hope," /resumed the dial-/plate, " we shall all /immediately /return to our 
duty : for-the /maids will lie in /bed if we /Stand idling thus." 

Upon this the weights, who had never been accused of /light /conduct, /used all 
Iheir influence in urging him to proceed; when, as with one /Consent, the wheels 
began to turn, the /hands began to move, the /pendulum began to swing, and to its 
/credit, /ticked as /loud as ever ; while a red beam of-the rising sun which /Streamed 
through-a hole in- the kitchen, shining full upon-the dial-/plate, it /brightened up, 
as if nothing had been-the /matter. 

When-the farmer came down to breakfast /that morning, upon looking at-the 
clock, he /declared /that his watch had /gained half-an hour in the /night. 

Moral.— A. /celebrated /modern writer says, "Take care of-the minutes, and-the 
hours will take care of themselves." This-is-an ad-mi-ra-ble remark, and /might 
be very seasonably (ssn-bl) /recollected when we begin to be "weary in well- 
doing," from-the /thought of-having much to do. The /present /moment is all we 
have to do with, in any sense ; the past is irrecoverable (n-kv-r-bl), the future is 
/uncertain ; nor is it fair to bur-den one /moment with-the weight of-the next. 
/Sufficient unto-the /moment is-the trouble thereof. If we had to walk a /hundred 
miles, we should still have to step but one step at a time, and this process continued 
would in-falli-bly bring us to our jour-ney's /end. Fatigue generally begins, and-is 
always increased by /calculating in-a minute the exertion of hours. 

Thus, in looking /forward to future life, /let us recollect /that we have /not to sus- 
tain all its toil, to endure (n-dr) all its sufferings (sf-r-ngs), or /encounter all its 
crosses at once. One /moment comes laden with its own /little burdens, then flies, 
and-is /succeeded by /another no heavies than-the last : — if one /could be borne, so 
can /another and /another. 

It seems easier to do right to-morrow than to-day, merely because we/oiget 
/that when to-morrow comes, then will be now. Thus life passes with many, in 
resolutions for-the future, which-the /present never fulfills. It-is /not thus with those 
who, " by /patient conti-n-uance in well-doing, seek for glory, honor, and /immor- 
tality." Day by day, minute by minute, they /execute the /appointed task, to which- 
the requisite measure of time and strength is /proportioned; and thus, having 
/worked while it was /Called day, they at Length rest from their labors, and-their 
works " follow them." /Let us then, " whatever our /hands /find to do, do it with all 
our /might, recollecting /that now is-the proper and /accepted time." — Jane Tayloe. 



EXEECISE XX. C, 207-211. 
§ 37. Lengthened Curves. 

1. (a) Anchor, hanker, sinker, thinker, winker, rancor, lanker, banker, drinker, 
clinker, anchorage, handkerchief. 

(b) Anger, younger, longer, linger, stronger, languor, monger. 

2. («) Fitter, fetter, fatter, fighter, voter, theater, Astor, Easter, Esther, oyster, shat- 
ter, shutter, shooter, litter, letter, latter, later, loiter, lighter, altar, halter, hurter, meter, 
mater, mutter, miter, enter, hunter, niter, neuter, water, highwater, whiter, waiter, 
wetter, softer, sifter, psalter, slaughter, Walter, smatter, smiter, center, saunter, 
winter, neutral, central, concentration, alteration, flatter, filter, falter, fritter, shorter, 
eccentric, nostrils, nostrum, rostrum, intrinsic, swelter, subaltern, imbitter. 



28 PHONOGRAPHIC WRITING EXERCISES. 

(b) Feeder, fodder, shudder, leader, louder, elder, alder, older, holder, ladder, 
ardor, harder, order, Eeeder, madder, wider, wilder, sunder, wonder, molder, 
smoulder, wilderness, bewilder, modern, moderation, moderate, federal, thunder, 
tender, slender, slander, render. 

(c) Luther, lather, Arthur, anther, anthral, phil-anthr-opy, anthracite. 

(d) Feather, father, thither, the-other, leather, lather, mother, Mather, smoother, 
neither, wither, weather. 

3. See C, 208, 2, £.— Angry, hungry, ultra, sultry, feathery, watery, sundiy, 
iaundry, sentry, leathery. 

4. See C, 211. Let thr equal ' there, their, they are.'— If thr, for thr, few thr, 
have thr, view thr, from thr, over thr, value thr, however thr, think thr, thank thr, 
they thr, though thr, either thr, they are thr, there thr, other thr, they will thr, see 
thr, so thr, was thr, use thr, wish thr, shall thr, usually thr, sure-ly thr, will thr, 
while thr, well thr, hear thr, here thr, may thr, am thr, we may thr, remark thr, 
more thr, in thr, know thr, when thr, one thr, near thr, nor thr, why thr, way thr, 
whenever thr, wherever thr, from their own, in their own, when their own, over 
their own. 

§ 38. "Write, according to the directions of § 12, the following paragraphs. 

Sayings of Confucius. 

"We can /not observe the necessary rules of life if there be /wanting these three 
virtues : /Wisdom, which makes us discern /good from evil ; universal love, which 
makes us love all men who are virtuous ; and /that resolution which makes us /con- 
stantly persevese in-the adherence to /good, and-in-the aversion to evil. But lest 
some fearful persons, /not well versed in morality, should imagine /that it-is impos- 
sible for them to acquire these three virtues, they should know /that there-is no» 
person incapable of acquiring them ; that the impo-tence of man is /voluntary. 
However dull and inexperienced a man may be, if he desire to learn, and grow 
y not weary in-the study of virtue, he is /not very far from /Wisdom. If-a man, al- 
though full of /self-love, endeavor to per-for-m /good actions, /behold him already 
very near /that universal love which urges him to do /good to all. If-a man feel a 
/Secret shame when he hears impure and-unchaste discourses, if he can y not for- 
bear blushing thereat, he is /not far from /that resolution of /spirit which makes him 
/Constantly seek /after /good, and have an aversion for evil. 

He who in-his studies wholly applies himself to labor and exercise, and neglects 
(n-gl-k-ts) /meditation, loses his time ; and he who only applies himself to /medita- 
tion, and neglects /experimental exercise, does only wander and lose himself. The 
first can never know anything /exactly ; his knowledge will always be /intermixed 
with /doubts and obscurities ; and-the last will only p-ur-sue shadows (Shay-Dees) ; 
his knowledge will never be /certain and solid. Labor, but /Slight y not /meditation. 
/Meditate, but /Slight /not labor. 

Eiches and honors are /good. The desire to possess them is /natural to all men ; 
but if these agree /not with virtue, the wise man ought to contemn, and generously 
to renounce them. On the contrary, poverty and ignominy (Gen-Em-En) are 
evils ; man /naturally /avoids them. If these evils attack the wise man, it-is right 
/that he should rid himself of them, but y not by-a crime. 

"Wouldst thou learn to die well ? learn first to live well. Acknowledge thy /ben- 
efits by the /return of other /benefits, but never revenge injuries. 

Labor to purify thy /thoughts ; if thy /thoughts are /not ill, neither will thy 
actions be so. 

The /great /secret to acquire true knowledge is to /cultivate and polish the reason, 
and to /get a knowledge of things rather than /words, by unceasing (Enses-Ing) 
per-seve-rance. 



PHONOGRAPHIC WRITING EXERCISES. 29 

EXERCISE XXI. C., 212-224. 
§ 39. The Halving Principle. 

1. T Added.— Peat, pit, pate, pet, pat, apt, aped, pot, pout, beat, bit, bate, bait, 
bet, bat, habit, bought, boat, Bute, boot, tat, taught, tote, tut, toot, tight, date, 
debt, dot, dote, doubt, doit, cheat, chit, etched, chat, chit-chat, Choate, jet, jut, jot, 
kit, eked, quit, coit, kite, caught, act, ached, coat, cut, cute, quote, got, gate, get, 
goat, gout, feet, fit, fought, oft, fight, fate, fat, aft, foot, vat, vote, east, iced, highest, 
out, shot, shout, shoot, shut. 

2. D Added. — Pawed, pod, pied, paid, pad, bead, bid, bade, bed, bad, bide, 
buoyed, bayed, bode, bud, bowed, Todd, tweed, tide, toyed, towed, did, deed, died, 
dead, chid, chawed, chide, chewed, jawed, joyed, jade, aged, edged, Jude, kid, 
quid, quod, Cade, code, cud, cooed, goad, gad, feed, fade, fed, food, feud, vied, 
avoid, void, vowed, viewed, thawed, eased, oozed, shod, shied, shade, shed, showed, 
shad, hoed, hied. 

3. T Added to Hook-Signs.— {a) Wilt, welt, wart, Wirt, went, wont. 

(b). Plot, plight, plate, plat, bleat, blot, built, blight, bloat, delight, cleet, clot, 
guilt, gloat, glut, fleet, flit, flight, fault, felt, flat, flute, flout, athlete. 

(c) Operate, prate, Pratt, brought, bright, brat, brute, treat, trite, trait, tret, trout, 
adroit, drought, Crete, concrete, court, greet, grit, girt, fraught, fright, affright, 
freight, fret, effort, fruit, overt, threat, throat, shirt. 

(d) Puffed, abaft, tuft, doffed, deft, chafed, chaffed, coughed, cuffed, quaffed, 
gift, reft, raft, heft, hoofed, huffed, bluffed, cleft, profit, prophet ( J ), drift, draught, 
craft, graft. 

{e) Pint, point, appoint, paint, pent, pant, bent, tint, taint, tent, content, dint, 
dent, daunt, chant, jaunt, Kent, cant, rent, rant, faint, fount, font, vent, vaunt, as- 
sent, sha'n't, lent, lint, arrant, mint, meant, mount, amount, anoint, warrant, pli- 
ant, plaint, plant, blent, blunt, flint, flaunt, print, brunt, Brant, Trent, grunt, grant, 
front, affront ; patient, quotient, ancient, transient (Ter'shont). 

(g) Split, sprite, separate, sprout, sprat, street, straight, strut, secrete, consecrate, 
skirt, spent, stuffed, constant, constituent (con-Steh-Tent 1 ), consistent (con-Ses-Tent), 
consequent, scoffed, silent, slant, cement, consonant, sonant, supplant, suppliant. 
" 4. D Added to Rook-Signs. — {a) "Warred, ward, weird, wired, wield, wild, 
walled, wailed, weld, willed, wind, wind, waned, wend, wand, wSund. 

(b) Plead, applaud, plod, plied, applied, played, plaid, ploughed, bleed, build, 
hobbled, blade, bled, bold, blood, idled, addled, huddled, hatcheled, child, clawed, 
clod, Clyde, clad, cloud, clewed, higgled, glade, glowed, ogled, glad, haggled, glued, 
gold, filled, field, followed, flawed, failed, flayed, fled, flowed, flood, yield. 

(c) Appeared, prayed, preyed, prude, breed, broad, abroad, bride, braid, bred, 
brad, bird, brood, brewed, treed, trod, tried, trade, tread, uttered, hatred, dried, 
deride, dread, cheered, creed, cried, crowed, acrid, occurred, accrued, crowd, crude, 
agreed, grade, guard, haggard, fraud, freed, offered, afraid, averred, thread, third, 
shred, ushered, shroud, shrewd, shared, assured, hammered, humored, honored. 

(d) Paved, dived, achieved, gyved, caved, arrived, raved, heaved, hived, believ- 
ed, beloved, approved, proved, braved, delved, derived, contrived, cleaved, gloved, 
grieved, grooved, craved, staved. 

(<?) Pinned, pawned, pond, pined, pained, penned, append, opened, happened, 
pound, compound, oppugned, bond, bind, combined, bend, band, bound, abound, 
tinned, tined, heightened, attained, tend, attend, toned, atoned, tanned, tuned, 

-1 Prophet and profit may be written by the advanced writer with Preft instead of Preft-Tee, the 
form given in a preceding section. 



30 .PHONOGRAPHIC WRITING EXERCISES. 

attuned, dinned, dawned, donned, dined, deigned, dunned, chained, joined, conned, 
coined, gained, rind, rained, rend, round, honed, fiend, fawned, fond, find, con- 
fined, feigned, fend, offend, fund, fanned, found, confound, convened, vend, thin- 
ned, assigned, ascend, shunned, commissioned, leaned, Lind, lined, island, high- 
land, lend, loaned, land, horned, ironed, arraigned, errand, earned, around, mend, 
amend, moaned, manned, mound, wound (to hurt), impugned, impend, planned, 
pruned, blonde, blind, blend, brained, brand, trained, drained, drowned, cleaned, 
crowned, gleaned, gland, grinned, grind, groaned, grand, ground, aground, friend, 
frowned, throned, warned. 

(g) Passioned, conditioned, cautioned, occasioned, cushioned, fashioned, mo- 
tioned. 

(h) Supplied, sabled, sidled, saddled, sickled, seclude, spread, sabred, sobered 
stride, strayed, strode, strewed, sodered, sacred, succored, secured, spend, spanned, 
stand, saddened, sickened, scanned, second, conceimed, summoned, swooned, 
sprained, strained, screened, suspend, sustained, sanctioned, stationed. 

5. T Added to Light, and D to Heavy, Signs. — (a) Lit, lid, leet, lead, light, lied, 
Lloyd, oiled, hilt, hilled, heeled, lot, laud, halt, hauled, late, laid, lade, Let, led, 
hailed, held, load, Holt, hold, old, hulled, lad, lute, lewd, lout, loud, howled, eared, 
hurt, erred, art, heart, hard, hired, aired, meat, mete, mead, mit, mid, amid, mite, 
mate, maid, aimed, hemmed, mote, mode, mud, hummed, mat, mad, moot, mood, 
mute, mewed, neat, need, knit, hint, naught, nod, gnawed, night, hind, net, end, 
neighed, note, node, hunt, aunt, ant, gnat, haunt, hand, knout, hound. 

(b) Slight, slide, styled, sold, concealed, sort, seared, sword, soared, smite, seem- 
ed, smote, consumed, saint, send, sand, sound, consent. 

(c) See C, 213, R. 4. — Muzzled, embezzled, whistled. 

6. Half-Lengths Followed, by Iss. — (a) Peats, pits, pates, pets, beads, bids, buds, 
deeds, cheats, chats, Jude's, kites, quits, acts, goads, fights, fits, fates, shuts, lights, 
halts, lutes, leads, holds, loads, hurts, meets, maids, nights, notes, needs, ends. 

(b) Spites, spouts, sects, sifts, slights, slides, swords, smites, cents, saints, sends. 

(c) Plots, plods, bleeds, blots, clods, clouds, glades, fleets, floods*, prates, brideSj 
brutes, treats, trades, dreads, creeds, grades, efforts. 

(d) Splits, sprites, streets, strides, secludes, secrets. 

(e) Points, paints, bends, tints, attends, dents, chintz, chaunts, jaunts, counts, 
rends, rents, finds, vends, ascends, lends, errands, mounts, anoints. 

{g) Complaints, prints, blends, brands, grinds, grants, glands, warrants, friends, 
flints. 

(h) Spends, stands, students, seconds, slants, cements, consonants, sonants. 
(i) Gifts, tufts, hafts, rifts, rafts. 

7. Half-Lengths Preceded' by a Full- Length.— Appetite, pitched, paged, packed, 
epithet, pushed, upshot, pelt, polite, appealed, uphold, compelled, part, compared, 
pumped, bodied, budged, baked, begged, befit, obviate, bethought, bathed, biased, 
abashed, bullet, ballot, behold, beard, bard, beamed, tipped, outbid, hotbed, 
touched, attached, ticket, talked, toothed, tithed, tilt, toiled, tart, tarred, outward 
(Tee-Ard), tempt, dipped, debate, ditched, adequate, conduct dashed (Dee-Shay t), 
adult, delayed, dulled, dart, adored, condemned, chipped, checked, chilled, 
chimed, Egypt, jobbed, eject, jogged, jilt, jeweled, jarred, gemmed, jumped, kept, 
occupied, caged, cashed, acquiesced, killed, camped, aconite," gapped, gushed, 
gummed, fidget, officiate, fort, comfort, fumed, vapid, vouched, vivid, violate, 
availed, avert, convert, vomit, vamped, thatched, theft, ice-boat, associate, isolate, 
assailed, assort, assumed, shipped, shocked, shaft, sheared, ashamed, leaped, al- 
leged, Lagged, lift, loved, luLLed, limit, alienate (Lay-Net), repeat, robbed, rigid, 
requite, ragged, refute, rushed, relate, railed, Remit, ORbit, aRmed, matched, 



PHONOGRAPHIC WRITING EXERCISES. 31 

mocked, moved, method, emaciate, malt, mild, melt, mailed, merit, mart, Mahom- 
et, maimed, nipped, notched, hinged, unfit, invade, initiate, kneLt, nailed, inurea, 
named, winked. 

8. Half-Lengths Followed by Full-Lengths. — Potato, pottage, optic, potash, •. t- 
ly, epit'onie, beautify, badly, habitual, bitter, better, bottom, detail, deadly, detach, 
dotage, detection, deduction, agitate, kettle, cattle, cotton, cottage, Godhead, gradu- 
ate, graduation (Gred-Shen), fatal, avidity, esteem, history, wisdom (Zed^Eim, little, 
lately, lottery, Retail, heartily, written (Eet^En), retain (Eet 2 -En), writing (Eet 1 - 
Ing), Redeem, hardly, reader (Ard^Ar; Arder in an advanced style), notify, entity, 
antique, indict, needle, intimation, metal, modify, medium, madam, midway, med- 
itation. 

9. Two Half- Lengths Preceded by a Full-Lengih — Capitulate, candidate (Kend- 
Det in an advanced style), fortified, fortnight, fortunate, ascertained, legitimate 
mortified^), ascendant (Es-Nent in the Reporting Style;, left-hand, rectified, recti 
tude, inaptitude, infatuated, unindebted, multitude. 

10. Two LLalf-Lengths. — Abdicate, abduct, beautified, obdurate, detached, detect, 
deduct, agitated, actuated, cutlet, affidavit, foothold, evident, estimate, esteemed, 
eastward (Est-Ard), astound, ultimate, ill-timed, latitude, Retaliate, Retailed, right- 
hand, redeemed, haRdened,. retained, redound, modified, meditate, mitigate, mid- 
night, maddened, sentiment, handmaid, indicted, indebted, undoubted, handled, 
windward (Wend-Werd 1 ), intact, indent, intend, indicate, induct, untold, intimate, 
entailed, intent, protect, tradewind, chartered, cultivate, curtailed, curtained, grati- 
fied, gratitude, graduated, flattened, frightened, verdict, threatened, superintend 
(Sprent-Xed), inordinate. 

11. See C, 213, E. 1. — Lard, lured, allured, lowered, lowered, alert, feared, fared, 
conferred, suffered, ford, afford, fired, veered, card, cord, curd, cured, geared, 
gored. 

12. See C, 218. — (a) Deeded, dated, doubted, situated, unedited, undated, ant- 
edated, imitated, meditated, freighted, defrauded, dreaded, instituted, radiated, 
awaited, escheat, emphatic, methodic, critic, athletic. 

(b) See C, 218, E. — Thinnest, finest, vainest, meanest, leanest, keenest, fashionist, 
Yisionist, communionist, factionist, eLOCutionist, canonist. 

13. See C, 220, b.—(a) Pity, body, tattoo, duty, Chitty, equity, Cato, gayety, veto, 
into, notice, window. 

(b) Unite, avowed, abed, edit, acute. 

(c) Hallowed, allied, alloyed, allude, elude, solid, sallied, rallied, relied, married, 
borrowed, buried, tarried, torrid, narrowed, moneyed, monad, renewed, annoyed, 
winnowed, accompanied. 

(d) Quiet, poet, Biot, Jewett, naiad. 

(<?) Write, right, reed, rid, red, read, wrought, wrote, road, rode, rood, rude, root. 

(g) Peeped, popped, piped, judged, kicked, quaked, cooked, gagged, roored, 
reared, effect, affect, fact, fagot, fagged, evict, convict, vacate, evoked, locate, liquid, 
propped, bribed, correct, collect, aggregate, afflict, slacked, navigate (Nef-Get in 
the Reporting Style). 

14. Hay and a Half-Length.- See C, 149, 5, E. 2.— Heaped, hopped, hoped, 
hooped, whooped, heated, heeded, hated, headed, hooted, hitched, hatched, hedged 
hawked, hooked, hacked( 2 ). 

(1 The advanced writer of the Corresponding Style and the reporter may write vvrrtifij and its de- 
rivatives thus : Mortify, Mert-Ef— mortified, Mert-Fed— mortification, Mert-Efshon. 

(2) In the Reporting Style, it will be better to write this class of words without Hay whenever iti 
use would prevent writing a desirable phrase-sign, as in writing ' it has been hoped,' Tees-Ben-Pet— 
' baa been heaped,' Iss-Een-Pet. 



32 PHONOGRAPHIC WRITING- EXERCISES. 

14. See C, 212, R. 6. — Part, parted; beard, bearded; dart, darted; start, started; 
melt, melted; mold, molded; rent, rented; land, landed; slant, slanted; paint, 
painted; bound, bounded ; print, printed ; brand, branded ; plant, planted : blend, 
blended; treat, treated ; dread, dreaded ; trade, traded ; indicate, indicated ; antici- 
pate, anticipated ; note, noted ; need, needed ; mate, mated ; locate, located ; effect, 
effected; affect, affected; navigate, navigated; solicit, solicited; elicit, elicited. 

§ 40. Write, according to the directions of § 12, the following paragraphs: 

ECONOMY OF TIME AND /SELF-IMPROVEMENT. 

There may be economy of time as well as in spending of money. Time, in fact, 
is money, or money's worth. Few reflect deeply (d-pl) on this truth. Young per- 
sons in particular throw away a vast deal of leisure time in-a way often worse than 
useless. Much they spend in silly gossip with acquaintances, much in frivolous 
amusements, much in perfect vacancy of thought. In many country towns, a great 
amount of time is spent in lounging at doorways or in-the street. If all this idle 
time, exclusive of what should be properly devoted to open-air exercise, were spent 
in-the acquisition of some kind of useful knowledge, what-a difference there would 
be in-the lot of some young persons. 

We say to-the young, devote your leisure hours to some useful purpose. And 
what are your leisure hours? Spare hours in the winter evenings afier-the labors 
of-the day are over, and-also hours in-the morning, particularly during summer. 
Rising at an early hour— for instance, at 4 or 5 o'clock— may be made-the means of 
self-culture [see C, 228, 14] to-a very considerable extent. Science or history may 
be studied ; languages may be learned. Early rising is perhaps considered by many 
to be-a very vulgar practice. Those who say so have perused the biographies of 
great men with little attention. It is indisputable (nds-pt-bl) that few ever lived 
to-a great age, and fewer still ever became distinguished, who were not in the 
habit of early rising. You rise late, and of course get about your business at-a late 
hour, and-every thing goes wrong all day. Eranklin says that "Who rises late, 
must trot all day, and-not overtake his business at night." Dean Swift avers " that 
he never knew a-man come to greatness and* eminence (Men-Ens) who lay in bed 
of-a morning." We believe that with other degenerations of our days, history will 
prove that late rising is-a very prominent (pr-mn-nt) one. There seems to be now 
a tend-en-cy to turn day into night— to breakfast late, dine late, and go to bed late, 
and consequently (con-sknt 1 -!) to rise late. All this is most pernicious both to 
health and morals. To a certain extent, people must do as others do ; nevertheless, 
every one is less or more able to act with something like ind-epend-ence of princi- 
ple ; the young— those who-have every-lhing (vr 2 -ng) to learn — can at least act upon- 
a plan, rising at-an early hour. 

In order to arise early, we would /recommend an early hour for retiring. There 
are many other reasons for this ; neither your eyes nor your health are so likely to 
be destroyed. Nature seems to-have so fitted things that we ought to rest in-the 
early part of-the night. A professor used to tell his pupils that "one hour of sleep 
before midnight is worth more than two hours after that time." Let it be a rule 
with you, and-if possible adhered to, that you be at home, and-have your light ex- 
tinguished by ten o'clock in the evening. You may then rise at 5, and-have seven 
hours to sleep, which-is about what nature requires. It may be most confidently 
affirmed that he who from-his youth is in-the habit of rising early, will be much 
more likely to live to old age, more likely to be-a distinguished and useful man, and. 
more likely to pass a-life that-is peaceful and pleasant. Eead-the life of Franklin, 
and see what he accomplished, both as respects economizing of time, and-the culti- 
vation of-his own capacious mind. In connection with self-improvement, let us say 
a-word on-the duty of professional diligence. It-is-a fact that you can not be toe 






PHONOGRAPHIC WRITING EXERCISES. 33 

well made aware of, that^a man may distinguish himself, or at least attain grea^re- 
spectability in any profession which-is really honorable and socially useful. What- 
ever you do, learn to do it well. Do not be discouraged by difficulties, nor vex 
yourselves with what may be the final results of your efforts. Just go on quietly and 
diligently, seizing hold of every occasion for improvement, and acquire habits of 
industry, which will form your character, and stick to you through life. The likeli- 
hood is, that by this simple but persevering course— a course unmarked by any 
great effort- you will pass the idle, the dissipated, and-the timorous, realizing those 
rewards which usually wait on well-directed enterprise. — Chambers'* Miscellany— 
A Present to an Apprentice. 



EXERCISE XXII. C., 225-230. 
§ 41. Prefixes. 

1. (a) Accommodation, accompany, accomplish. 

(b) Combat, combative, comfort, comm-and, comm-end, comm-ingle, comm-ence, 
comm-ission, comm-unicate, comm-ute, com-pare, compassion, compute ; conceit, 
concesn, conciliate (con-sit), conclusion, confuse, conn-ection, conn-ive ; cognate. 

(c) Circumference, circumlocution, circumstance, circumscribe, circumvention, 
circumflex, circumjacent. "" 

(d) Contravene, contraband, contradict, contradistinction; controvert, contro- 
versy ; counterfeit, countersign, countermand, countermine, countercheck. 

(e) Decompose, discomfort, discommode, discontent, discontinue, disconn-ect, 
disconsolate. 

(g) Forefather, fore-finger, fore-foot, foreseen, forestall. 

(70 Incognito ; incommode, incomparable, incompatible, incompressible, incom- 
plete, inconstant, inconclusive. 

(i) Interpose, interr-upt, interr-ogate, intromission, introduce, interchange. 

( j) Irreconcilable, irreconciliation. 

(Jc) Magnanimous, magnify, magnitude. 

{I) Miscomputation, miscompute, misconduct, misconstrue. 

(m) Nonconducting, nonconformist (noncon-Fer-Emst), noncompliance (-Plens), 
noncomm-ittal. 

(n) Recognize, reconcile, reconciliation, reconn-oiter ; recompense, recombine, 
recomm end, recomm-it, recomm-ence. 

(o) Self-respect, self-evident, selfish, self-accused, self-knowledge, self-improve- 
ment. 

(p) Uncondemned, unconquerable, unconscious ; uncompressed, uncomm- 
issioned. 

(q) Unrecognized, unreconciled, unrecompensed. 

2. See C, 223, E. 1-16.— Incumbent, recumbent, compass, conquer, reconquer, 
magne tic, magne-sia, uncircumscribed, unselfish, undecomposed, uncontradicted, 
uncontroverted, uninterrupted, uninterpreted, unforeseen, disencumber, disinterest- 
ed, unaccomplished ; accomplish, accompany, accomplice ; circumstance, circum- 
ference, circumscribe (Ses-Ker-Bee) ; conic, comity, commissary, commiserate, com- 
motion, commerce, comrade ; concomitant, concomitance ; in conjunction, in com- 
parison, in conclusion, in connection, in conversation, small compensation ; common 
consent; in contradistinction, in countermanding, in countersigning ; contribution, 
contribute, contributor; forever, forward, forewarn, forsooth, forswear; foretell 

2* 



34 PHONOGRAPHIC WRITING EXERCISES. 

(Fer-Tel), forgave, forget, forsake ; foreland (f-E-lnd), forelock, foreman, foremast, 
foremost, forerun, foresale; enterprise, entertain, interchange, intercourse, inter- 
dict, interest, interfere, interjacent, interjection, interpolate, interpose, interpret, 
interrogate, interrupt, intersect, intertwine, interval, intervene, interview, inter* 
weave, introduce, introspect, introvert ; incompetent, incomprehensible, inconceiv- 
able, in consequence, in-considerable, inconsistent, in-convenient, iu consideration ; 
misconduct, misconjecture ; self-esteem, selfish, unselfish (Ins-Ish), self-same, self- 
conceit, self-condemnation ; unconcern, unconditional, unconstitutional. 

3. Altogether, although, almost, almighty, all-sufficient, to-day, to-morrow, to- 
night, afternoon, afterthought, undertake, undersigned, understand, undergo ; ai- 
way, always, also. 

4. Ambition, ambulate, ambiguous, antedate, antecedent, antepast, antidote, 
antipathy, antagonist, astronomy, benefit, benevolent, benediction, catalogue, cat- 
alysis, centiped, centage, centennial, chirography, chironomy, collect, college, col- 
league, correct, corrupt, correspond, heptachord, heptarchy, hydropathy, hydrome- 
ter, hyperbole, hypercritic, jurisdiction, jurisconsult, metathesis, metaphysics, 
multiply, multitude, octennial, October, octant, philippic, philosophy, paragraph, 
paradox, perfection, perverse, periphery, periscopic, polyglot, polygamy, retrospect, 
retrograde, stereotype, stereometer, subterfuge, subterranean, superfine, superla- 
tive, supramundane, suspect, sustain, susceptible, system, systole, systemize, with- 
draw, withhold, withstand, postpone, transact. 



EXERCISE XXIII. C, 231-234. 
§ 42. Affixes. 

1. {a) Sensible, profitable, forcible, insurmountable (Ins-Ar-Ment-Bee), attain- 
able, accountable. 

(Z>) Knowableness, feebleness, teachableness, questionableness, indispensable- 
ness, serviceableness ; lawfulness, watchfulness, sinfulness, skillfulness, carefulness, 
faithfulness. 

(c) "Wherefore, therefore. 

(d) Seeking, trying, keeping, eating, dying, doing ; seeking a-n-d, trying a-n-d, 
which having a-n, of having a-n, trying the, seeking the, doing the, of having the, 
which having the. 

(e) Charmingly, lovingly, blushingly, knowingly, amazingly. 
(g) Meetings, offerings, doings, prancings, musings. 

(Ji) Artlessness, lawlessness, carelessness, thoughtlessness, groundlessness, bound- 
lessness, harmlessness, listlessness, thanklessness. 

(i) Frugality, rascality, legality, prod-igality, congeniality, animalitr, formality, 
principality, disability, credibility (Kred-), risibility, expansibility, instability, 
plausibility ; popularity, disparity, prosperity, posterity. 

(j ) Feeble, feebly, noble, nobly, humble, humbly, sickly, homely, calmly, dimly, 
completely, keenly, womanly, meanly, manly. 

(k) Ornamental (Een-), supplemental, regimental, elemental, experimental 
(Kays-Per-), detrimental, monumental (Men 1 -), instrumental, fundamental, instru- 
mentality. 

(I) Zoology, tautology, osteology, philology, etymology, demonology, phrenology, 
physiology, theology ^ chronology. 

(m) Myself, himself, ourself, herself, thyself, yourself, themselves, yourselves, 
ourselves, one's-self, our own self, our own selves, man's self. 



PHONOGRAPHIC WRITING EXERCISES. 35 

(n) Hardship, lordship, fellowship (Fel-), apprenticeship, wardship, courtship, 
friendship, partnership, township (Ten-Ish). 

(o) Irksomeness, wearisorneness, gladsomeness, fulsomeness, loathesomencss, 
burdensomeness. 

(P) "Whatsover, whensoever, whencesoever, wheresoever, whosoever, whom- 
soever ; whithersoever, whosesoever, howsoever. 

2. See C, 232, E. 1-10. — Theologian, phrenological, phrenologist, principalities, 
sensibilities ; possibility, sensibility, disparity, detrimental ; genealogy, mineralogy ; 
one's-self, my own self (Em-En- or Men), my single self; joyful-ly, truthful-ly, care- 
ful-Iy, deceitful-ly, hateful-ly; native, positive-ly ; vagrancy, despondency, validity, 
verbosity, Christianity. 

3. Thereafter, hereafter; thereto, whereto, hitherto, onto, into, unto, hereinto, 
hereunto, thereinto, thereunto, whereinto % w hereunto, thitherto ; thereon, "hereon, 
whereon, hanger-on, looker-on ; thereof, hereof, untalked-of, unheard-of, unthought- 
of, whereof ; therein, wherein, herein, hereinafter, hereinbefore; whatever, which- 
ever, whoever, whenever, wherever, forever, soever (Es-Vee). 



EXERCISE XXIY. C, 235-241. 
§ 43. Omission of Consonants. 

1. (a) Tempt, pumped, bumped, jumped, camped, vamped, thumped, limped, 
romped, stamped, prompt, cramped, exempt, exemption, consumption, pre-emption, 
co-emption, pumpkin. 

(]j) P may be sometimes omitted when it precedes s.— Sampson, Simpson, 
Thompson. 

(c) Anxious, anxiety, sanction, distinction, function, junction, unction, conjunc- 
tion, injunction, compunction. 

(d) Mostly, honestly, tasteless, restless, mistrustful, priestly, post-paid, postmark, 
post-office, postpone, pasteboard (ps-brd), breast-plate, breast-pin, boastful, mistake, 
testimony, New Testament, destitute, pestilent, combustible, Christopher, contesta- 
ble, adjustable. 

2. («) Instruction, destruction, construction, infraction, refraction, restriction, de- 
traction, reduction, production, affliction, conviction. 

(?>) Intelligent, intelligence, knowledge, iadulge, devolve (Def-Yee), develop 
(Def-Pee), intellect (Net^Ket). 

(c) Atonement, attai?iment, husba?zdman, merchandise, demonstrate, identical, 
transact, transcend, transfer, transfuse, transient ^Tershont), transit, translate, 
translucent (trs-LS-nt), transmute, transmit, tra?*splant, transport, transpose. 

(c7) Capable, capability. 

(e) Describe, proscribe, subscribe, surprise, manuscript, priestcraft (Pers-Keft), 
transcribe, proportion. 

(g) Investigation, justification. See C, 197, E. 4. 

§ 44. Omission of Vowels. 

1. Unaccented Vowels Omitted. — Rotary, capital, artless, undoubted, indebted, 
reasons, possible, traceable, soluble, promised, solitary, America, prominence, anat- 
omy, enemy. 

2. All the Vowels Omitted.— Length, along, among, beautiful, doubtful, distinc- 
ti^Pr necessary, expressirvx forcible, intended, always, ink* *««*»i« pm********* 



36 PHONOGRAPHIC W KITING- EXERCISES. 

sometimes, harmony, memory, industry, danger, luxury, temperance, indignation, 
govern, experience, judgment, reflect, sufficient, purpose (Pee-Ray-Pees), reason- 
able, sanguine, escape, philosopher, character, inquire, relation, movement, effectual, 
change, suddenly, disbelief, proposal, work, honorable, example, moderation, al- 
teration, collect, correct. 

3. See C, 239, K. 2. — Labor, lady, ready, dread, later, enter, essence, pity ; sci- 
ence, pre-emption, redemption (Ard-Em'shon), argument, conquer, intention. 

4. See C, 239, R. 3.— Perry, bury, fury, tarry, carry, jury, cherry, folly, valley, 
fancy, rosy, racy, massy, penny, money, many, chaffy, bevy, body, pity, mighty, 
hungry, angry, entry, ultra, needy, windy. 

5. See C, 239, Eems. 4 and 5. — Ask, assign, awake, awoke, oyer, argue, alum, 
elm, alike, older (see C, 20T, R. 2), elder, avowed, annoyed ; idea, argue, nephew. 

6.— See C, 240.— Eyed, hide, highly, oil, wide, whiten, white, ivy, ice, hire, bow, 
sprout, trout, loud, glue, ammonia, mania, scoria, nephew, ague, argue, con- 
tribute. 



EXERCISE XXV. C, 242-249. 

§ 45. Phrase-Writing. 

1. The position of the signs for the following phrases is determined by the first 
word. 

All men, all the, and a, and the, are you sure, as it has been, as good as, as great 
as, as it should be, as soon as, as the, as a, as well as, at last, at one time, at some 
time, at such, because it is, by every means, by many persons, by me, by my, by 
some means, by the way, by them, by this time, by which, can do, can not be, could 
not be, could be, do they, ever has been, every man, every thing, for his own sake, 
for a-n, for the, for this is the, for which, for you are, for your, from many, from 
them, from this time, from you, from your, give me, give my, give that, give you, 
has been, has done, has had, has it been, has made, have been, have done, have not, 
have they (them), he has, he is, he has been, he has done, he is not, he has not, how 
could you, how many, how must, how will they, I agree, I am certain, I am glad, I 
am, I am not, I am quite sure, I am very glad, I am very happy, I can, I can not, I 
may, I may as well, I may nevertheless, I may not be, I mus(t) be, I mus(t) say, I 
need, I need not, I will do so, I will not be, I will say, if a-n, if his, if it be, if it had, 
if it is necessary, if it is not so, if the, if they, if there be, if there should be, if we, 
if you are, if your, in your own in a-n, in all, in all his, in his, in any, in his opin- 
ion, in many particulars, in my opinion, in order that, in order to, in the way, into 
a-n, into the, into this, is-a-n, is the, is to, it is (has), it is (has) a-n, it is (has) the, 
it is (has) not, it has been, it is (has) always, it is important, it is impossible, it is 
my opinion, it is necessary, it is not so, it is now, it is plain, it is rather, it is right, it 
is said, it is (has) the, it may be, it may not be, it will be said, it will do, it would 
be, it would have, let it be, let us now, let us proceed, manner in which, may ap- 
pear, may as well, may be, may have, may they, may try, might not be, might 
seem, mos t) likely, mus(t) admit, mus(t) be, mus(t) come, mus(t) do, mus(t) not be, 
never be, never may, nevertheless it is, no man, no more, of a-n, of course^ of his 
own, of importance, of many (of) them, of me (my), on a-n, on account of, on the, on 
my (me), on you, or a-n, or the, ought not, quite agree, quite as well, should a-n, 
should be, should not be, should not do, should not have, should the, should they, 
should think, since a-n, since the, so as to, so as to appear, so as to make, so as to 
receive, so little, so that, so the, so there is, some one, something has been, such has 



PHONOGRAPHIC WRITING EXERCISES. 37 

(is\ such has been, such may be, take care, take occasion, take pains, take part, take 
place, takes part, takes place, that a-n, that are (Tnet 1 -Kay), that are not (Tiiet 1 - 
Bent), that has been, that have, that is it, that is so, that may, that might not be, that 
such, that this, that will, that you are, that your, there are, there can be, there could 
not, there is nothing, there may be, therefore a-n, therefore the, therefore thr, they 
do, they had, they may be, they were, they were not, this advantage, this day, this 
is (has) done, this place, though a-n, though the, to a-n, to as many as, to be a-n, to 
be the, to his own, to it, to many (of) those who, to some extent, to the, to think, to 
which you are, to you, to your, under a-n, under his, under that, upon a-n, upon 
tliis, upon the, upon them, upon which, very certain, very good, very great, very 
many, very soon, was as, was good, was not so, we are aware, we are bound, we are 
never, we have, we have seen, we were, were a-n, were the, were they, were this, 
what can be, what could be, what the, when we are, when we may, when there is 
not, whenever a-n, where are they (Wer 2 -Eay-Thee), wherever a-n, wherever the, 
which a-n, which can be, which could be, which is (has), which may be, which 
should be, which the, which-may not be, which will be, which you are, which you 
can^ which you will, who are, who can be, who is (has) the, who may be, who may 
not, will be, will be found, will find, without which, would be the, would come, 
would do, would have, you are, you are not, you can be, you can not be, you may 
think, you must, you mus(t) not, you will be, you will find, you will understand^ you 
will do. 

2. The position of the signs for the following phrases is determined by the position 
of the second word. 

All its, all which, all principles, all these, all this, all those, all truths, all yours, 
and as, and but, and should, and who, and were, and with, and do you mean, and 
if, and for, and feAv, and ever, and have, and however, and either, and there, and 
other, and these, and this, and thus, and those, and this is the, and we, and we 
may, and when the, as if, as if it were, as if there were, as for, as few, as much as, as 
each, as that, as without, as these, as this, as those, give it, give out, give these, give 
this, give those, I hope that, I wish, I shall, I think, I thank, I did not, I do not, I 
had not, I do, I had, I never, I suppose, I shall be, I think there is, I think they, 
in it, in its, in itself, in each, in which, in much, in every respect, in part, in this 
instance, in these, in this, in those, in this respect, in your, is so, is that, is without, 
might be, might think, of its, of each, of which, of much, of these, of this, of those, 
of which you will, on its, on each, on which, on much, on his part, on her part, on 
either, on their, on other, the first, the way, the man, what are, what if, what for, 
with it, with each, with which, with much, with these, with this, with those, with 
which you are, is no, his own. 

§ 46. Words Omitted. 

1. (a) The loss of the money— the subject of the letter — the day of the week — the 
advantages of the system— the close of the day — love of the truth — fear of the injury 
—the meaning of the word — the nature of the subject— one of the most— attribute 
of the soul — love of the world— in every part of the world— condition of the body. 

(6) Shall have been, there have been, must) have been, can not have been, we 
have been, you have been, will have been, never have been, may have been, to 
have been; can not have done, mus(t) have done, shall have done, may have 
done, we have done, you have done; which have been, which have done, I have 
been, I have done, they have been, they have done, they have had. 

2. la) Word of God, kingdom of heaven ; I hope to be, I wish to be. 

(b) For a moment, such a one, in a word, for a long time, in such a case, by and 
by, wise and good, more and more, over and over, over and above, rich and poor, 



3S PHONOGRAPHIC WEITING EXERCISES. 

through and through, from day to day, from hour to hour, from place to place, hand 
in hand, on the other hand, on the one side, on the other side, more or less, sooner 
or later, greater or less, one or the other, on the contrary, in the world, it seems to 
me, it seemed to me, in conjunction with, in connection with, variety of causes, to 
us, to say, to it, to do, to you, to whom, to come, to go, to have gone, to have 



§ 47. If the directions for study and practice should be faithfully followed up to 
this point, the student can not but be possessed of such a thorough knowledge 
of principles and also of outlines as to render phonographic writing easy, pleasura- 
ble, and useful. The Reading Exercises from the end of Ex. 25 to the Specimens 
of the Reporting Style, should next be read and copied several times. Thereafter, 
until your writing becomes faultless, criticise all your writing in accordance with 
the plan of criticism given in the following sections. 



PLAN OF PHONOGRAPHIC CRITICISM. 

§ 43. In criticising phonographic writing, let answers be made to questions — 

I. As to Contracted Words — 

1. Have the primary sign-words been represented by their proper signs in the 
proper position ? 

2. Have the derivative sign-words and other contracted words been represented 
by their proper signs in the proper positions ? 

II. As to Other Words— 

1. Have they, in respect of their consonants, been correctly analyzed? 

2. May any of the consonants be omitted in accordance with the general princi- 
ples for the omission of consonants ? 

3. Have the consonants to be expressed been written with the best outline and in 
the proper position ? 

4. To what extent do they require vocalization ? and have the vowels to be ex- 
pressed been correctly denoted ? 

5. Have the prefixes and affixes been properly written ? or have they been written 
when they might have been omitted ? 

III. As to Joining "Words or Parts of Words — 

1. Have prefixes or affixes been joined in allowable case? ? 

2. Have initial and final vowel-signs been joined according to § 240 of the 
Compendium ? 

8. Have words been joined in phrase-signs when they might be according to 
§ 242-246 of the Compendium ? 

4. Have the phrase-signs been written in their proper positions ? 

IV. As to the Omission of Words— 

Have words been omitted which might be according to § 245-249 of the Com- 
pendium ? 

V. As to the General Appearance of the Writing — 

Can the general appearance of the writing be improved in respect of the size or 
the junction of the letters, or in any other respect? 

Rem. 1. Iu determining the best outlines for words, reference should be made to 
The Phonographic Orthographer,' and the portions of the Compendium specifying 
the cases for the use of the different letters and different principles of writing. 



PHONOGRAPHIC WRITING EXERCISES. 39 

§ 49. KEY TO THE 'SPECIMENS OF REPORTING. 

1. Miseries of War. 

Oh ! tell me, if there be any relentings of pity in your bosom, how could you 
endure it to behold the agonies of the dying man as, goaded by pain, he grasps the 
•cold ground in convulsive energy, or faint with the loss of blood, his pulse ebbs 
low, and the gathering paleness spreads itself over his countenance, or wrapping 
himself round in despair, he can only mark by a few feeble quiverings that life still 
lurks and lingers in his lacerated body, or lifting up a faded eye, he casts on you a 
look of imploring helplessness for that succor which no sympathy can yield him. It 
may be painful to dwell thus in imagination on the distressing picture of one indi- 
vidual; but multiply it ten thousand times— say how much of all this distress has 
been beaped together on a single field. Give us the arithmetic of this accumulated 
wretchedness, and lay it before us with all the accuracy of official computation, and, 
strange to tell, not one sigh is lifted up among the crowd of eager listeners as they 
stand on t'ptoe and catch every syllable of utterance which is read to them out the 
registers of death ! Oh ! say what mystic spell is that which so blinds us to the 
suffering of our brethren ; which deafens to our ear the voice of bleeding human- 
ity when it is aggravated by the shriek of dying thousands ; which makes the very 
magnitude of tSie slaughter throw a softening disguise over its cruelties and its 
horrors ; which causes us to eye with indifference the field that is crowded with the 
most revolting abominations, and arrests that sigh which each individual would 
singly have drawn from us, by the report of the many that have fallen and breathed 
their last in agony along with him.— Chalmers. 

2. The Defense of Sochates. 

No man knows what death is, yet men fear it as if they knew well that it was tho 
greatest of all evils ; which is just a case of that worst of all ignorance, the conceit 
of knowing what you do not really know. For my part, this is the exact point on 
which I differ from most other men — if there be any one thing in which I am wiser 
than they. As I know nothing about Hades, so I do not pretend to any knowledge ; 
but I do know well that disobedience to a person better than myself, either God or 
man, is both an evil and a shame ; nor will I ever embrace evil certain, in order to 
escape evil which may, for aught I know, be a good. Perhaps you may feel indig- 
nant at the resolute tone of my defense ; you may have expected that I should do 
as most others do in less dangerous trials than mine ; that I should weep, beg, and 
entreat for my life, and bring forward my children and relatives to do the same. I 
have relatives, like other men, and three children ; but not one of them shall ap- 
pear before you for any such purpose. Not from any insolent disposition on my 
part, nor any wish to put a slight upon you, but because I hold such conduct to be 
degrading to the reputation which I enjoy; for I have a reputation for superiority 
among you, deserved or undeserved as it may be. It is a disgrace to Athens when 
her esteemed men lower themselves, as they do but too often, by such mean and 
cowardly supplications ; and you, Judges, instead of being prompted thereby to 
spare them, ought rather to condemn them the more for so dishonoring the city. 
Apart from any reputation of mine, too, I should be a guilty man if I sought to 
bias you by supplications. My duty is to instruct and persuade you, if I can ; but 
you have sworn to follow your convictions in judging according to the laws, not to 
make the laws bend to your partiality ; and it is ymir duty so to do. Far be it 
from me to habituate you to perjury ; far be it from you to contract any such habit. 
Bo not, therefore, require of me proceedings dishonorable in reference to myself, a 3 



4:0 PHONOGRAPHIC WRITING EXERCISES. 

well as criminal and impious in regard to you ; especially at a moment when I am 
myself rebutting an accusation of impiety advanced by Melitus. 

3. True Greatness. 

Grandeur of character lies wholly in force of soul, that is, in force of thought, 
moral principle, and love ; and this may be found in the humblest condition of life. 
A man brought up to an obscure trade, and hemmed in by the wants of a growing 
family, may in his narrow sphere perceive more clearly, discriminate more keenly, 
weigh evidence more wisely, seize on the right means more decisively, and have 
more presence of mind in difficulty, than another who has accumulated vast stores of 
knowledge by laborious study ; and he has more of intellectual greatness. It is force 
of thought which measures intellectual, and so it is force of principle which meas- 
ures moral, greatness — that highest of human endowments, that brightest manifesta- 
tion of the Divinity. The greatest man is he who chooses the right with invincible 
resolution, who resists the sorest temptations from within and without, who bears 
the heaviest burdens cheerfully, who is calmest in storms, and most fearless under 
menace and frowns, whose reliance on truth, on virtue, on God is most unfaltering. 
—Channikg. 






THE 



PHONOGRAPHIC 



R T II G R A P H E R : 



AN 



EXPOSITOR OF PRINCIPLES 



FOR THE 



ASCERTAINMENT OF THE BEST PHONOGRAPHIC OUTLKIa 



PART FIFTH 



OF THE 



8tt&-$jorjoffe of Sianfcari flffttogntpjrg 



COPTRianT SEOITE«D. 






PRELIMINARY REMARKS. 



The previously unsettled state of phonography, in respect of the outlines or words, 
may be very properly compared with the chaotic condition of English spelling when 
each writer spelled to suit his own taste, good sense, or whims. English orthography 
has finally been made to depend, not upon the observance of natural principles of 
representing language, but upon the authority of lexicographers. To this method 
of settling English spelling corresponds precisely the attempted method of settling 
phonographic orthography by the authority of " phonographic vocabularies." The 
writer, without the guidance of general principles, feels himself continually subject- 
ed to the restraint of authority, even when he has reason to doubt its correctness. 
Even rules of writing which are dictated by an author's phonographic exp/^ence 
ana taste, are felt to be little better than arbitrary authority, until their dependence 
upon general principles can be perceived ; and even then they must be regarded as 
statements of their author's opinion of the results or demands of such general prin- 
ciples, rather than as imperative laws. 

The object of this treatise is to furnish a statement of certain laws of speed, vocal- 
ization, and legibility, by reference to which phonographers will be enabled to de- 
termine for themselves the best phonographic outlines, and free themselves from 
the drudgery of thumbing " vocabularies." 

The selection of outlines by reference to these principles, may at first seem slow 
and irksome ; but after a short time, the mind, having become accustomed to the pro- 
cess, seems no longer to consider particulars, to compare different modes of writing 
and estimate their differences, but it soon arrives, without exertion apparently, at 
results which will, as a general thing, withstand the severest criticism. The pho- 
nographer thus furnished with criteria of judgment and taught self-reliance, is pre- 
pared to receive the suggestions of a phonographic vocabulary, or of other phonog- 
raphers, in respect of phonographic outlines, without liability of injury to his writing, 

ANDEEW J. GEAHAM. 

Phonetic Depot, New York, July 2jth> 1S53. 



THE 



PHONOGRAPHIC OETHOGRAPHEE, 



§ 1. Phonographic Orthography Defined. — The term Orthography (de- 
rived from the Greek opQog, correct, and ypacpyj, writing) is used to 
signify the writing of words with the proper letters. In the common 
orthography, the propriety of the use of the letters is determined to a 
great extent by arbitrary custom, and not, as woulcT be the case in a 
rational orthography, by the fixed and invariable values of letters. 
The term Phonographic Orthography is here used to signify the writing 
of those outlines which, all things considered, are found to be best. 

§ 2. Conditions of Phonographic Orthography . — A careful investigation 
has shown that Phonographic Orthography depends upon the require- 
ments or laws of vocalization, speed, and legibility, which will next 
be considered. 



REQUIREMENTS OF VOCALIZATION. 

§ 3. The requirements of vocalization are — 

1. That, in case of there being an initial or final vowel, the conso- 
nant next following the former, or the consonant next preceding the 
latter, shall be so written as to permit the easy expression of such 
vowel in its proper order and relation to the consonant ; thus, Es-Kay, 
ask — Zee-Ray, Ezra — Ray-Es, racy — Way-Kay, awake — Yay-Ar, oyer — 
Hay-Dee, ahead — Pee-En, penny — Chay-Ef, chaffy — En-Ter, entry — 
Sen-Der, sundry — En-Dee, needy— En-Tee, into. 

2. That generally such outlines shall be employed as will permit the 
easy and distinct expression of the principal medial vowels ; thus, Bee- 
Lay, ball, bail, below, Ballou, etc. — Dee-Lay, deal, dull, dally, dahlia, 
etc. — Kay-Tee, quiet — Kay-Es, chaos, acquiesce — Es-Ens, science— 
Tee-En-Shen, continuation. 



6 THE PHOIOGEAPHIC OETHOGEAPHEE. 

Rem. 1. The first requirement of vocalization is absolute in the Corresponding ; 
(Style ; and a departure from it in the Eeporling Style is allowable in those cases only 
where a stroke may be saved by, and illegibility not result from, expressing the last 
consonant so that a final vowel could not be written after it ; as in writing Pret 2 for 
pretty; Bed 1 for body. 

Rem. 2. The second requirement of vocalization demands that a stroke-sign should 
be used for both the consonant preceding and the one folio wing two concurrent 
vowels which can not be expressed by a single sign ; as ao in chaos, io in Hon, ua 
in continuation, ewe in Jeicett. This is to secure two strokes between which the 
vowels may be divided, instead of both having to be written in a confused maimer 
beside one. 



REQUIREMENTS OF SPEED. 



§ 4. Speed of writing rjhonographically depends chiefly upon the 
following-mentioned conditions : 

1. The use, if permitted by other principles, of the briefest signs 
for the expression of sounds. 

2. The use, so far as allowed \>j other principles, of the most readily 
made junctions. 

3. Accordance with the laws of analogy. 

4. The use, so far as possible, of signs which can be readily joined to 
a preceding or a follwing word ; that is, accordance with the require- 
ments of phrase-writing. 

5. The use of forms favoring lineality of writing. 

Rem. 1 . By the briefest letters or signs are to be understood those simple or group 
consonant signs which require for their execution the least time. A following table 
shows the comparative brevity of different modes of expressing given sounds, by 
reference to which table, when the opportunity for a choice is presented, the writer 
may determine w T ith mathematical precision the most rapid signs. Another table 
furnishes a statement of the comparative speed and ease with which different kinds 
of joinings between letters may be effected. By reference to that statement a choice 
as to the best joining may be readily made. 



REQUIREMENTS OF LEGIBILITY. 

§ 5. Legibility, in addition to good penmanship, depends chiefly 
upon the following-specified conditions : 

1. Writing the consonants, so far as possible, in a manner to denote 
the vowel-relations of the words. 

2. Accordance with the laws of analogy. 

3. Distinguishing between words of the same consonants and of like 
or different significations. 

4. The number 'and relation of the consonants. 

5. The relation of the words to the sentence ; that is, the context. 



LAWS OF ANALOGY. 7 

Eem. 1. The first requirement of legibility is complied with to nearly its fullest ex- 
tent by observing the laws of vocalization and speed ; these securing such distinctions 
as the following : Es-Pee-Shel, especial— Spee-Shcl, special ;— Eay-Zee, rosy— Eays, 
rose ;— Em-Es, massy— Ems, mass ;— Kay-Es, chaos— Kays, case ;— Es-Ens, science, 
essence ;— Sens, signs, sense, etc. ;— Way-Kay, awoke— Wuh-Kay, woke ;— Tay-Ar, 
oyer— Yuh-Eay, yore ;- Hay-Dee, ahead— h-tick-Dee, head ;— Chay-Ef, chaffy- 
Chef, chaff;— Pee-En, penny— Pen, pen, pain, etc.;- Em-Pee, map, etc.— Emp, 
hemp, etc. ;— En-Ter, entry— Enter, enter;— En-Dee, needy— Ned, need, etc. ;— En- 
Tees, notice— Nets, notes, (b) In some other cases, it is necessary, or at least ad- 
vantageous, to resort to other methods of indicating the different Vowel-relations 
of such words as 'hot, haughty; Hague, Hugo (see the Compendium, § 149,3); 
night, unite ; bed, abed ; foot, afoot ; caught, acute (see the Compendium, § JS20, ~b> 
2) ; led, allied , sold, solid ; rolled, rallied ; marred, married ; ruined, renewed (see 
the Compendium, § 220, &, 3) ; quite, quiet ; pad, poet ; Jude, Jewett' (see the Com- 
pendium, § 220, &, 4) ; in which cases a distinction is naturally effected by giving a 
short form to the shorter word, and a longer form to the word of the greater number 
of syllables, (c) The fact that the stroke-signs for I and r may or must be written in 
different directions, may be availed of to considerable advantage, when these conso- 
nants are represented by strokes, to indicate the different vowel-relations in such 
words as l like, alike ; lime, alum ; rail, rely ; vale, valley ; ark, rack ; air, ray ;^fire, 
fury.' The plan of, and cases for, making this distinction are particularly stated in 
the Compendium, §§ 152-156, and in general terms, in the following remarks (2 and 3). 

Eem. 2. Uses of El and Lay. — Z, when it is the first or last consonant of a word, 
and when it is to be expressed by a stroke, may be represented — 

(a) Sy Lay, when it commences a word, or precedes a final vowel. 

(5) By El, when it ends a word, or follows an initial vowel, and is not the only 
stroke-consonant in the word. 

Eem. 3. Uses of Ar and Ray.—B, when it is the first or last consonant in a word, 
and when it is to be expressed by a stroke, may generally be represented — 
(a) By Eay, when it begins a word, or precedes a final vowel. 

(6) By Ar, when it ends a word, or follows an initial vowel. 

Eem. 4. The required distinction between words of the same consonants is se- 
cured in most cases by the indication of the vowel-relations of words, in accordance 
with the first requirement of legibility. In other cases, a distinction may usually 
be made by observing the rule of position, especially in the Eeporting Style, though 
in a very few instances there must be a resort to vocalization. See the Compendium, 
§ 269 ; 256-261. 

Eem. 5. Analogy of writing is of so much importance as a condition of both speed 
and legibility, that it will be fully defined and its laws stated in subsequent sections. 

Eem. 6. As a general rule, the greater the number of consonants in a word, the 
greater its legibility ; for the number of chances that a given word should contain 
the same consonants as some other word is inversely proportioned to the number 
of its consonants. The chances are still further lessened in proportion to the pecu- 
liarity of the relation of the consonants. Hence, of words of the same number of 
consonants, those which are composed in part of common prefixes or affixes are, as 
a general thing, less legible than the others. 



LAWS OF ANALOGY. 



§ 6. Analogy Defined. — Analogy may be defined as an agreement or 
likeness between things in certain respects, when they are otherwise 



8 THE PHONOGRAPHIC O RTHOGE APHEE. 

entirely different. To illustrate — there is an analogy, in respect of the 
principal portion of the forms or outlines, between the outline of one 
and of any other of the following words : Def-En, define — Def-Enshon, 
definition— Def-En-Tef, definitive— Def-Net, definite— Def-En-Ar, de- 
finer ; but there is want of such analogy between Def-Net, definite, 
and End-Ef-Net, indefinite. So there is an analogy between Pen-Ens, 
openness, and Bees-Ens, baseness — in respect of the mode of expressing 
the terminations ; and between Pers-Vee, perceive, and Perf-Ket, per- 
fect — in respect of the mode of expressing their initial parts. 
§ 7. The laws of analogy are the three following : 

1. Derivatives, as a general rule, should be written in analogy with 
the form of the primitive. 

2. Generally, the forms of compound words should follow the anal- 
ogy of the component words. 

3. Generally, classes of words agreeing in certain particulars should 
be written in analogy in respect of those particulars. 

Eem. 1. The demands of analogy are so strong that the form of the primitive is 
sometimes determined with reference to the convenience of writing the derivatives, 
even in violation of some other principle of speed. To illustrate — to secure an 
analogical and convenient mode of writing comforted, the primitive must be writ- 
ten ' com'-Ef-Eet, instead of Fret, which would be best for speed. The first form is 
also required by considerations arising from another principle of legibility. In the 
Corresponding Style, invert, convert, must be written En-Vee-Eet, con-Yee-Eet, on 
account of inverted, converted, which are most conveniently written En-Yee-Eay- 
Ted, con-Vee-Eay-Ted ; but on the other hand, considerations of speed, overruling 
the law of analogy, require that inversion, conversion, should be written En-Yer- 
shon, con-Yershon, instead of En-Yee-Eayshon, con-Yee-Eayshon. In the Eeport- 
ing Style, where the past tense or perfect participle is expressed if more convenient 
by the form of the present tense, the laws of both analogy and speed are more 
fully complied with by writing En-Yert, invert-ed— En-Yershon, inversion ;— con- 
Yert, convert-ed — con-Yershon, conversion. 



COMPAEATIYE BEEYITY. 



§ 8. By the comparative brevity of a sign is understood its brevity 
as compared with another sign of equivalent signification. The com- 
parative brevity of the Tiv-hook, for instance, is its brevity as com- 
pared with equivalent signs for the same sounds, as Tee-Vee, Tee-Ef, 
Tef, or Ef or Yee with the preceding t expressed by halving. 

Eem. 1. The terms tcrief and brevity refer adjectivcly and substantively to short- 
ness in respect of either space or time. They are here applied to signs with respect 
to the time occupied in their formation ; and not with reference to the space occu- 
pied by them, for it is not invariably true, though nearly so, that the briefest signs 
in respect of space are also briefest in respect of time. Brief Way and Yay are 



COMPARATIVE BREVITY. 9 

properly designated thus, because they are briefer than the Way and Tay stroke as 
to both space and time, 

Eem. 2. Faster Than, As Fast As.— If A can be written once and a half while B 
is being written once, then A is once and a half as fast as, but only one half faster 
than, B. If A can be written four times while B is being written once, then A is 
four times as fast as, but only three times faster than, B. 

The words as fast as express the proportion between the signs, either as to the 
number of times that each may be written in the same period of time, or as to the 
amount of time occupied in writing each the same number of times. The words 
faster than express the proportion of gain by the faster over the slower sign, either 
as to the number of times that the signs may be written in a given period of time, 
or as to the time occupied in writing them a certain number of times. 

Rem. 3. (a) The first column of figures in the fallowing tables of Comparative 
Brevity shows in units and hundredths how many times the first sign compared may 
be written while the second is being written once, or, the separatrix (.) being omit- 
ted, how many times the first sign may be written while the second sign is being 
written one hundred times. The gain in times of the first over the second sign may 
be ascertained by subtracting from the numbers of the first column 1.00 or 10'\ 
according as the numbers are taken with or without the decimal point, (b) QThe 
second column of figures in the following tables shows in units and hundredths 
what proportion of the time is required to write the first sign as many times as the 
second. The percentage of time gained by the first over the'second sign may be 
ascertained by subtracting the numbers of the second column from 1.00 or 100, 
according as they are taken with or without the decimal point. 

§ 9. TABLE SHOWING THE COMPARATIVE BREVITY OF DIFFERENT PHONO- 
GRAPHS. 

Straight and Curved Lines. Times.. Time. 

Tee, Chay, Kay— Ith, Es, Ish, Em 1.06 .95 

Light and Heavy Lines. 
Tee, Chay, Kay, Ef— Dee, Jay, Gay, Vee 1.06 .95 

Downward and Upward Lines. 
Chay, Ish, El— Ray, Shay, Lay 1.10 .92 

Modes of Representing S, St, Str. 

Iss-Tee, Tee-Iss— Es-Tee, Tee-Es 1.14 .88 

Ses-Tee, Tee-Ses— Es-Iss-Tee, Tee-Iss-Es, Tee-Es-Iss 1.16 .86 

Steh-Pee, Steh-Kay, Steh-Em, Peest, Kayst, Teest— Stee- 

Pee, Stee-Kay, Stee-Em, Pee-Stee, Kay-Stee, Tee-Stee 1.28 .78 
Bee'ster, Dee'ster, Kay'ster — Bees-Tee- Ar, Dees-Tee-Ar, 

Kays-Tee-Ar 1.46 .68 

Bee'ster, Dee'ster, Kay'ster — Bees-Ter, Dees-Ter, Kays-Ter 1.14 .88 

Modes of Eepresenting L and Lr. 

Pel, Tel, Fel— Pee-Lay, Tee-Lay, Ef-Lay 1.25 .80 

Pier, Tier, Eler— Pel-Ar, Tel-Ar, Fel-Ar 1.75 .57 

Modes of Eepresenting E and El. 

Per, Ter, Ker— Pee-Ar, Tee-Ar, Kay-Ar 1.31 .76 

1* 



10 THE PHONOGEAPHIC OKTHOGEAPHEE. 

Times. Tim© 

Per, Ter, Ker— Pee-Ray, Tee-Kay, Kay-Bay 1.22 .83 

Prel, Trel, Frel— Per-Lay, Ter-Lay, Fer-Lay 1.75 .57 

Modes of Eepresenting Initial Ins, Ens, and Uns. 

In-Sper, In-Ster, In-Sker— En-Sper, En-Ster, En-Sker ... 1.67 .60 

Ins-Lent— Ens-Elent . . .00 .00 

In-Slay-Vee— En-Slay- Yee 1.22 .83 

Modes of Eepresenting P and V. 
Pef, Tef, Chef, Kef— Pee-Ef, Tee-Ef, Chay-Ef, Kay-Ef . . . 1.44 .70 
Pef, Tef, Kef— Pee-Vee, Tee- Yee, Kay-Vee 1.33 .75 

Modes of Eepresenting N, Hs, Nss, Nst, Nstr. 
Pen, Ten, Chen, Ken, Fen, Len, Men — Pee-En, Tee-En, 

Chay-En, Kay-En, Ef-En, Lay-En, Em-En 1.37 .73 

Pens, Tens, Kens, Fens — Pee-Ens, Tee-Ens, Kay-Ens, Ef- 

Ens 1.31 .76 

Pen'ses, Ten'ses, Ken'ses — Pee-En'ses, Tce-En'ses, Kay- 

En'ses 1.31 .76 

Penst, Tenst, Chenst, Kenst — Pee-Enst, Tee-Enst, Chay- 

Enst, Kay-Enst 1.40 .71 

Penster, Tenster, Chenster, Kenster — Pee-Enster, Tee- 

Enster, Chay-Enster, Kay-Enster 1.40 .71 

Modes of Eepresenting -Tion, Cian, etc. 
Peeshon, Teeshon, Kayshon, Efshon — Pee-Shen, Tee- 

Shayn, Kay-Shen, Ef-Shen 1.67 .60 

Modes of Eepresenting Tiv. 
Peetiv, Deetiv, Kaytiv — Pee-Tee-Vee, Dee-Tee- Yee, Kay- 

Tee-Yee 2.00 .50 

Peetiv, Deetiv, Kaytiv— Pet- Yee, Det-Yee, Ket-Yee 1.70 .58 

Peetiv, Deetiv, Kaytiv— Pee-Tef, Dee-Tef, Kay-Tef 1.40 .71 

Modes of Eepresenting Mp and Mb. 

Emp— Em-Pee 1.40 .71 

Emb— Em-Bee 1.51 .66 

Modes of Eepresenting Ter, Der, Ther, and Tner. 
Layter, Emter, Efter, Enter— Lay-Tee-Ar, Em-Tee-Ar, 

Ef-Tee-Ar, En-Tee-Ar 2.18 .46 

Layter, Emter, etc. — Lay-Ter, Em-Ter, etc 2.00 .50 

Layter, Emter, etc. — Let-Ray, Emt-Ray, etc 2.08 .48 

Layter, Emter, etc. — Lay-Dee-Ar, Em-Dee-Ar, etc 2.32 .43 

Layter, Emter, etc. — Lay-Der, Em-Der, etc 2.18 .46 

Layter, Emter, etc. — Eld-Ar, Emd-Ray, etc 1.92 .52 

Lay ther, Emther, etc.— Lay-Ther, Em-Ther, etc 2.08 .48 



SPECIFIC BEEVITY. 11 

Times. Time. 
Pet, Tet, Ket, Fet, etc.— Pee-Tee, Tee-Tee, Kay-Tee, Ef- 

Tee,etc ^ - 52 

Ped, Ted, Ked, Fed— Pee-Dee, Tee-Dee, Kay-Dee, Ef-Dee 2.18 .46 
Bet, Det, Get, Vet— Bee-Tee, Dee-Tee, Gay-Tee, Yee-Tee 2.00 .50 
Bed, Ded, Ged, Yed— Bee-Dee, Dee-Dee, Gay-Dee, Yee-Dee 1.78 .56 

Eem. 1. The estimates in the preceding table have been made from the data fur- 
nished by numerous and laborious experiments by different writers. Though slight 
discrepancies may be discovered, it is believed that the estimates are very near the 
exact truth. The advantages here shown are averages. In some cases they are 
much greater, and in other cases much less, than Jiere stated. 

PvEM. 2. In accordance with the directions of a following section, the phonog- 
rapher may determine for himself many other questions of brevity in the Corre- 
sponding or Eeporting Style. The mode of determining speed here pointed out 
might be employed to demonstrate mathematically the great superiority of Standard 
Phonography over any other system of stenography, phonetic or otherwise. 

§ 10. TABLE SHOWING THE COMPARATIVE BREVITY OF DIFFERENT JOININGS. 

With and Without Angles. Times. Time. 

Ef-Ar, En-Em, Lay-Ar— Ef-Ef, En-En, Lay-Lay .. .^ .... 1.31 .76 

En-Bay— En-Kay .......... 1.25 .80 

Tee-Tee— Tee-Kay 2 - 00 -^° 

Average l-^ •«■*■ 

With Acute or Paght Angles. 

Kay-Chay, Chay-Fvay— Bay-Pee, Chay-Pee 1.44 .70 

Bay-Tee, Chay-Kay— Bay-Pee, Chay-Pee 1.22 .83 

With Pvight or Obtuse Angles. 
Tee-Kay— Tee-Chay, Tee-Pee, Pee-Kay 1.31 .76 

Kem. 1. Variation of Inclination and Curvature— The ease of junction may fre- 
quently be increased considerably by varying the inclination of the sloping letters 
and the curvature of the curve-signs. See the Compendium, § 25. 

MODE OF DETERMINING COMPARATIVE BREVITY. 

§ 11. The comparative brevity of different signs may be determined 
thus. Determine the utmost number of times that each of the signs 
to be compared may be written in 100 seconds. Say that the briefer 
sign is written A times and the other B times. Then B divided by A 
will give, in hundredths, the proportion of time required for making 
A as many times as B. And A divided by B will give, in units and 
hundredths, the number of times that A may be written while B is 
being written once. 



SPECIFIC BREVITY. 



§ 12. The specific brevity of a sign is its brevity as compared with 
that of some other sign, as Pee, Tee, Chay, or Kay, taken as a stand- 



12 THE B5I0N0GEAPHIC OBTHOGK APHEE. 

ard of measurement. Specific brevity is determined thus. "Write Tee 
or Chay and the sign to be compared with it, each 100 seconds. Say that 
Tee or Chay is written A times, and that the other is written B times. 
Then A divided by B gives the specific temporal brevity of the sign 
compared with the Tee or Chay ; that is, shows what proportion of 
time is required to write it as many times as Tee or Chay. B divided 
by A gives the specific numerical brevity of the sign compared with 
the Tee or Dee ; that is, shows how often it may be written while Tee 
or Chay is being written once. 

§ 13. TABLE SHOWING THE SPECIFIC BREVITY OF CERTAIN SIGNS. 

Times. Time 

Tee, Pee, Chay, or Kay — the standard of measurement . . 1.00 1.00 

Dee, Bee, Jay, or Gay 95 1.06 

Tee-Tee, Pee-Pee 95 1.06 

Tet, Pet, Chet 1.06 .95 

Ith, Es, etc 95 1.06 

Rem. 1. Large and Small Writing. — The difference between Tee and Tee-Tee 
shows that very much may be lost in respect of speed by making the consonant- 
strokes too long. The best length for the primary strokes (Pee, Tee, etc.) is about 
one eighth of an inch. This enables them to be distinguished easily and certainly 
from the half-lengths on one side, and from the double-lengths on the other ; and 
without making the half-lengths so short as to render them illegible, and without 
requiring inconveniently long and ungainly double-lengths. 

Rem. 2. The difference between Tee and Dee shows that it is a disadvantage to 
write with a heavy hand— that the heavy lines should be barely distinguished from 
the light lines, which should be made very light. 



OETHOGKAPHICAL PAESING. 



§ 14. Orthographical Parsing is of two kinds — 1. Determining, hy 
reference to the conditions or principles of Phonographic Orthography, 
the best outlines for words. 2. Determining whether a given form 
is the best one for the word for which- it has been employed. The 
former is called Orthographical Synthesis ; the latter, Orthographical 
Analysis. 

EXAMPLES OF ORTHOGRAPHIC SYNTHESIS. 

§ 15. Determine the forms for 'bear, brow, burned, blind. 

1. Bear. — The second principle of vocalization demands two conso- 
nant-strokes. The first principle of speed suggests Ray as the sign of 
the r as being six per cent, faster than Ar ; but the third principle of 
speed and the first principle of legibility require Ar. Therefoie the 
best form for this word is Bee-Ar. 

2. Brow. — The requirements of vocalization are met by any possible 



ORTHOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS. 13 

outline ; that is, by Bee-Ray, Bee-Ar, or Ber. Speed demands Ber, be- 
cause of its being faster than Bee-Ar or Bee-Ray, and this form meet- 
ing the requirements of legibility, is the best outline for this word. 

3. Burned. — The second principle of vocalization demands that the 
second consonant should be expressed by a stroke. The three conso- 
nants following the vowel may be most readily expressed by Rend. 
Therefore, the principles of legibility not contradicting, the best out- 
line for burned is Bee-Rend. 

4. Blind. — The briefest sign for the consonants of this word is Blend. 
This meets the second requirement of vocalization, and the require- 
ments of legibility, and is therefore the best form for this word. 

EXAMPLES OF ORTHOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS. 

§ 16. Determine whether or not the best outlines for indicate, activity, 
render are End-Ket, Ket-Vee-Tee, Ray-Ender. 

1. End-Ket. — This form as an outline fox indicate consists of the brief- 
est signs of the consonants expressed, permits the proper expression of 
the vowels, and conflicts with none of the principles^ legibility. It 
must therefore be approved as the outline for the word indicate. 

2. Ket- Vee-Tee. — This form as an outline for activity complies with the 
requirements of vocalization, but it violates analogy, not being analo- 
gous to Kaytiv, the best form for the primitive word ; and it also vio- 
lates the second requirement of speed. Kay'tiv-Tee meeting all the 
requirements of orthographic principles, is the best form for this word. 

3. Ray-Ender. — This form is the briefest for the consonants of render, 
and complying with the requirements of vocalization and legibility, it 
must be approved as the best outline for that word. 



ilfor. I, T8C0. 



GRAHAM'S HAND-BOOK 

OP 

STANDARD OB AffflSOAN PHONOGRAPHY. 



OPINIONS OF THE PRESS. 

From a long review in the New York Evening Post. 
"The system presented in this work is Pitman's Phonography, greatly im- 
proved, perfected, and Americanized. Mr. Graham has long been known as an 
accomplished verbatim reporter, and a successful teacher of Phonography, and he 
has manifestly bestowed a large amount of labor and research in perfecting this 
work. lie has reduced the art to a complete science, perfect in all its details, 
Imving used the English plionography only as a basis for his own system/ 7 

From the Knickerbocker Magazine. 
* * We have found an examination of this book quite as suggestive as the his- 
tory of the telegraph or of any other of the recent triumphs of art and physical 
science. It illustrates finely an age which is very fast, in an intellectual, if 
not in a moral sense. Beginning with first principles, it proposes to write the 
English language as it is sounded. It then, by a series of most remarkable 
reductions, which as a matter of intellectual curiosity would delight any man, 
compresses the written language to such brevity that it can be written as rapidly as 
spoken. Everything becomes short as well as quick ; a dot or a curve takes the 
place of words ; a line contains the printed matter of an ordinary page ; and a 
big old folio tome, such as monks used to spend a lifetime in writing, would, in 
reporting short-hand style, make a liandsonw little volume to be carried in the 
pocket, and to be read of an evening. Every great improvement suggests new 
ideals. The ideal world of phonography and stenography is a time when written 
words shall be as obedient to thought as speech is now ; when reading shall cease 
to be slow, and books unwieldy ; when all the news of the newspaper can be writ- 
ten on the space of a thumb-nail, and read at a glance; wlien a scholar shall be 
able to carry the whole Alexandrian library in his pockets, and when our present 
fashion of penmanship shall be as antiquated as a stage-coach is now. The work 
of Mr. Graham contains all the information on the subject, whether for a person 
desiring to learn the new art, or for one wlio is only cuiious about it." 

From the New York Daily News. 
•' T/ie present volume is an Encyclopedia of the principles and practice of 
this admirable system of writing Phonography. By easy steps the student is 
conducted from the elements of Phonography to those refinements and niceties 
which are required for the purposes of the finished reporter. ° ° The whole 
forms an entire system of Standard Plionography. ' ' 



2 OPINIONS OF THE PKESS. 

From a very extended and favorable review in the Canadian Phonetic Pioneer. 

* * The l Hand-Book of Standard Phonography, ' it will be seen, is a compen- 
dium of iive whole system. It commences sooner, and goes farther than any other 
ivork ever issued. It, in fact, begins at the beginning and ends at the ending. 
The size of the book results from its completeness— from the plain 
and familiar manner in which it goes into every principle of the 

SYSTEM." 

From the Missouri Republican, St. Louis. 

1 ' So manifold are its merits that, within tlie compass of a book-notice, we can 
not even enumerate, much less dilate upon them. The realization in the ' Hand- 
Book' of all that has been hoped for by tlie most sanguine adherent of the cause 
of orthographic and chirographic reform, must be a source of gratification to the 
phonographic public. ' ' 

From the New York Dispatch. 

" From some knouiedge of Phonography and insight into the principles and 
arrangement of the work before us, we do not hesitate to pronounce it the best and 
completest yet published. Thai it admits of no improvement, as some experienced 
reporters seem to think, wc are not prepared to grant. A more intimate acquaint- 
ance with Phonography might probably make us as enthusiastic as any of them ; 
but, though it should appear perfect to us, the comparative youth of this science, 
and the history of everything around us, would cause us to hesitate about pro- 
nouncing Mr. Graham's work perfection. To say it is the best, and is complete, 
is enough, bat no more, perhaps, than it deserves. It is so simple and thor- 
ough THAT ALL CAN UNDERSTAND IT, AND EASILY LEARN FROM IT TO SUC- 
CESSFULLY write in phonographic characters, all of which are of the 
most natural kind. Children could learn this system much more readily than 
they can the jagged scrawl in which we pen this note — albeit ice write what the 
compositors call a legible hand. We hope the merit of Mr. Graham's work may 
secure it an introduction into all our common schools, so that it may be taught to 
every child. Then would follow phonotypy in text-books and newspapers, and 
then adieu to plodding scribbling and barbarous spelling. The prospect of the 
future is decidedly encouraging and refreshing, although we may never live to 
enjoy its fruits. Still, let us commend the good and useful, the progressive and 
harmonizing, and thai will make up somewhat for the lack of realization." 

From the Boston Atlas and Daily Bee. 
" Mr. Graham is widely known as a practical phonographer , author, and 
teacher. In each of these departments he has achieved success. , The work which 
Mr. Graham has now produced is the result of years of labor, study, and. prac- 
tice. So far as we can judge — and we have examined all the leading works upon 
the subject — it is inferior to none extant, and in many respects supe- 
rior to all other works of this character. Hitherto, different authors 
have had tlieir pet characters and word-letters, each claiming special merit for Ins 



OPINIONS OF THE PRESS. , 3 

own distinctive system. The result has been a want of system among those who 
were pursuing a common subject. Students were perplexed, and many gave up in 
despair. The need has been for some one competent to the purpose, to introduce a 
correct system. The Hand-Book of Mr. Graham embraces, in our view, such a 
system. The fad that it is meeting the approbation of the best phonographers 
and educators in the country is the best attestation of Us merit which can be given." 

From the Scientific American. 
" To all who wish to attain a knowledge of the art of Phonography this book 
will be a valuable companion, and the already proficient will find in it many hints 
by which they may profit in reporting. It is, ice think, a successful attempt to 

SYSTEMATIZE PHONOGRAPHY, AND PLACE IT BEYOND THE CHANCE OF FUTURE 

change, so that any person acquiring it now will not have to be continually alter- 
ing, correcting, and unlearning what he has already acquired. This book will, 
tee have no doubt, be largely sold to the flying artillery of the press (reporters), 
who will thank Mr. GraJiam for its production and Hie lessons it teaches. ' ' 

From the New York Spiritual Telegraph. 
' ' This is, we believe, the largest and best work upon Phonography ever pub- 
lished. Both the ' Hand-Book' and the system which it explains {and which is 
said to be a great improvement upon the old phonography) are highly commended 
by many of the best and most experienced phonographic teachers and reporters ; 
and we are not surprised to learn that the old phonography and the works devoted 
to it are being rapidly superseded by this excellent work and its American Pho- 
nography. ' ' 

From the New York Christian Intelligencer. 

" It would be folly in us to undertake to frame an opinion of a booh whose 
principal parts are to the uninitiated perfectly unintelligible. But, as ice know 
the aicthor of this careful and elaborate work to be one of the best reporters in thfi 
world, and that the perfection of his reports is due to the superiority of this very 
phonographic system which he has now published, we can have no hesitation in 
recommending it to the attention of all who desire to gain a reliable knowledge of 
the science and art of Phonography. This Hand- Book is so thoroughly prepared 
and arranged in every particular, that we should think it a comparatively easy 
matter for a student of it to master its principles and details without the aid of a 
private tutor. As an unfolding of the philosophy of verbal sounds and corre- 
sponding signs, this manual is worthy the attention of all who are careful to study 
the structure and capacities of languages. ' ' 

From the Methodist Quarterly Eeview, edited by Prof. B. D. Wheedon, D.D. 

" This work is the production of a gentleman who is at the head of his pro- 
fession as a phonographer, and has done much for the diffusion of that beautiful 
art. It furnishes perhaps the best aid extant for a full acquirement, by easy 
steps and lucid explanations, of the entire principles. Mr. Graham has fur- 
nisJied some modifications of Pitman s system, by which, as wc are informed by 



4 OPINIONS OF THE PRESS. 

high professional authority, the contractions are rendered more effective, and tJie 
rapidity of the reporter's performance is greatly accelerated. If we are rightly 
informed, the improvements are practically so self- demonstrative as to secure their 
immediate acceptance by practical reporters, 

1 ' Mr. Graham has, we are gratified to say, established a Phonetic Depot at 
848 Broadway, at which the best furnishings for the phonographer, as blank 
1 note-books, 1 pens, and books, can be procured," 

Prom Hie Democratic Age. 

" Whoever cares enough about intellectual .matters to value ideas, and to value 
them highly when nobly and pithily expressed, ivill at once see the benefit of a 
system with which he can get them down at the spur of the moment, and under 
the weight of the thought. And after that age in a man's life has arrived when 
he begins to look back at what he has done, instead of looking with youthful hope 
into the future, what a field of gratification and sweet remembrance would his 
note-books afford ! We venture there would be less complaining of the time that 
has fled by, which we know not how to account for, and less wailing over a mis- 
spent life.' 7 

1 ' In the first place, the author of this book deserves some credit for his perse- 
verance in his cause; and, secondly, the work he has brought out is a comprehen- 
sive and able one, and the largest and most exhaustive treatise that we have seen on 
the subject. So far as the plot of the work and the foundation principles are 
concerned, it is the most scientific that we know. Besides being printed 
in a style that pleases the eye, the engraved portion by Chauncey B. Thome is 
very excellent, and the price is quite liberal, when we consider the vast deal of 
labor that must have been spent upon it. ' ' 

From the New York Atlas. 
il A clear, systematic treatise on the very valuable art of Phonography. Mr. 
Graham is well known from the many improvements and additions lie has made; 
he Juts indeed almost elevated short-hand writing to the rank of a science. To 
professional and literary men, and all others to whom the shortest possible method 
of committing, to writing their oicn thoughts or the luords of others is of import- 
tance, this l Hand-Book' will be of great value, as giving in the briefest 

SFACE THE FULLEST AND MOST LUCID EXPOSITION OF THE SUBJECT." 

Prom the Freeman's Journal. 
1 ' Everybody now-a-days ivho reads, or ivho listens — in short, everybody is 
under obligations to the art of Reporting. The ability to record on the spot 
uttered thought is the necessary addendum to the art of printing itself, to which it 
furnishes so considerable a part of its material. As v:e recollect the old system 
of short-hand, the characters were of three classes — right lines, sectioivS of a cir- 
cle, and hooked forms, to which were added a limited number of conventional 
signs. The principle was, to spell the word after the manner of its sound {pay- 
ing no attention to its ordinary spelling) , and to employ consonantal dements 






OPINIONS OF THE PRESS. ■ 5 

almost solely. This system was hard to write, and still harder to read. Pho- 
nography must be a great expansion and improvement upon the former system ; 
and it has now become so endlessly applied and ramified, that at some future day 
it seems not an improbability that it will modify and simplify the existing slow 
and fatiguing * long-hand' — a system which is very far short of perfection. 
Without Phonography the knowledge of public affairs in our immense country — 
a knowledge indispensable to the theory and working of such a government — could 
not be communicated adequately to the people. Its practice has constituted a new 
avocation, as the introduction of books, railroads, and the magnetic telegraph have 
likewise done ; and it seems to us that making the art an elementary study would 
aid materially in the acquisition of language, and forward and facilitate all that 
belongs to recording and expression. 

" Mr. Graham's work is the fullest and most thorough exposition of this novel 
and important art which has ever come under our notice. ' ' 

From the New York Century. 
' ' The l Iland-Book of Standard or American Phonography, ' by Andrew J. 
Graham, is an elaborate presentation of this novel science, prepared by the author 
with no little expenditure of money and brain-work. 

From the Boston Zion's Herald. 
1 * We are fully persuaded that a thorough knowledge of Phonography is of 
great value, and should be regarded as an essential part of a prac- 
tical education. To such of our readers as wish to obtain a thorough under- 
standing of Phonography in its most improved form, we confidently recommend 
this book." 

From the New York Tablet. 

1 ' The work is an elaborate exposition of a system of phonetic short-hand, which 
is regarded by those fully competent to judge as a great improvement upon the Old 
or English Phonography, especially for reporting purposes. By very clear and 
full explanation, by ample illustration, and by other valuable and novel features 
— among which is a series of carefully prepared questions on the text — the ' Hand- 
Book' is fully suited to the wants of the schoolroom, and eminently adapted 
to the purposes or self-instruction. In this respect, Mr. Graham's book 
secures a valuable advantage for the large number of persons who, though desiring 
to avail themselves of the important benefits of the rapidly -spreading art of Pho» 
nography, have found the old text-books insufficient in many respects to convey an 
adequate knowledge of the desired art. We advise our readers who wish to learn 
Phonography to secure this work, which, while it does an honor to its author, 
becomes the most valuable assistant to the cause of Phonography. 

From the New York D ay-Book. 
The immense value of the system of phonetics is conceded by every one, and 
Graham's system of teaching this science, and the improvements he has introduced 
while preserving the principles of English Phonography, render his work to-day 



6 OPINIONS OF THE PEESS. 

the most valuable extant Graham s system is the only American system ever 
introduced. It is concise, full, and complete, and is an unmistakable improvement 
upon Pitman's introduction, which was made in 1837, and which, up to 1857, 
had undergone no less than nine modifications or cJianges. [fffT*] Graham's 
1 Hand-Book of Standard Phonography' may be strongly recommended for the 
use of schools, as the art either in the business world or the literary world is indis- 
pensable, and the education of youth would be incomplete without it. To those who 
would desire to take up the subject and teach themselves, this work will be found 
particularly serviceable. The work is admirably gotten up — the stenographic 
illustrations by Thome— paper and typographical character unexceptionable." 

From the Poughkeepsie Gazette. 

* ' This volume makes its appearance very opportunely as a standard work, 
when Phonography has again become unsettled in consequence of proposed im- 
provements and alterations [by the Messrs. Pitman]. The ' Hand- Book' is a 
work of more character and completeness than any previous work on this subject^ 
carrying the student progressively from the first elements of the language, as rep- 
resented by PJionography, to the briefest reporting style. The books heretofore 
published have fallen far short of being complete expositors of reporting, from 
the fact that all reporters have resorted to expedients not recognized by the English 
Phonography, to insure success. The author's great experience as a practical 
reporter has suggested many valuable improvements, and enabled him to reduce 
these various expedients to settled principles. [ ^°] This system of American 
Phonography is capable of recording speech one third faster than the old or English 
Phonography, thus enabling many, to become masters of this much envied art, 
who could not hope to become such without it. 

' ' But Phonography is not for reporters only — it is for the people ; and with- 
out discussing its merits as an educational system, it may be used to great advan- 
tage in all mercantile and professional pursuits where it is desirable to economize 

time. 1 ' 

Prom the Home Journal. 

" The want of a complete illustrated work on the subject of Phonography has 

long been felt by the great body of reporters in every branch of their business. 

This work will supply the requirement." 

From the New York Sunday Courier. 
' ' It has every appearance of being a most comprehensive and excellent treatise 
on phonographic writing." 

From the New York Leader. 
' ■ The old and clumsy systems of stenography have been improved upon and 
crowded away, by the working of the phonetic alphabets, and to no man in 
America is the phonetic student more indebted than to Andrew J. Graham. As 
may be supposed, the i Hand-Book' is a full and carefully prepared digest of 
the whole matter, valuable to all, as a means of research into the science, and 



OPINIONS OF THE PRESS, , 7 

indispensable to students of the art — to reporters who wish to be reliable, and 
writers who realize the advantages of rapid and condensed expression." 

From the Brother Jonathan. 

u It is the most elaborate work of the kind in the United States, or probably in 
the world. To persons who desire to perfect themselves in the art of writing down 
a speech, a debate, or the proceedings of a public meeting, this book will be invalu* 
able. With the aid of this work, a person needs only the necessary practice to 
become a proficient phonographic writer. Besides the ample rudiments explaining 
everything necessary — writing exercises, etc. — tJiere are thirty pages of engraved 
examples for practice. Nothing appears to be wanting to make this book A 
complete instructor in the art of writing short-hand." 

From the Christian Advocate and Journal. 

PHONOGRAPHY — IMPROVEMENTS. 

1 ' Some time since the inquiry was made in the Advocate with reference to the 
advantages of the best system and the best instruction-books in Phonography. ^In 
reply to these inquiries several communications appeared, speaking highly of the 
advantages, and recommending Pitman's system and boohs as being the best. 
Since that time, however, there has been a change, and an improvement of Pitman's 
system has been brought to our notice, in which some changes that had been recom- 
mended for trial have been tested and incorporated, together with some other 
changes resulting from the introduction of these improvements. This new system 
is styled ''Standard or American Phonography,' to distinguish it from the Old, 
Pitman, or English Phonography, and it seems to be well adapted to the pro- 
gressive age in which we live ; and being founded on the same principles {more 
fully developed) as Pitman's system, it becomes a very easy matter for one who 
has studied the old to become acquainted with the new, while, at the same time, one 
who studies the new system can read the old as readily as the new, consequently no 
disadvantages result from studying the new system, 

" The fact becomes self-evident to any phonographer who investigates the mat- 
ter, that the American is decidedly preferable to the English system. c ° We do 
not wish to be understood as finding fault with Mr. Pitman ; on the contrary, he 
is entitled to great credit for what he has done, and what he is still doing in the 
cause; but we think that our American friend, Andrew J, Graham, of New 
York, has better succeeded in reducing it to a standard system. 

1 * We wish, howevei % , to speak of the instruction-book as being the best adapted 
tor self-instruction, as well as for classes, of any ever issued, Mr. 
Graham styles his work l The Hand- Book of Standard or American Phonography,' 

AND TREATS THE SUBJECT IN SUCH A LUCID AND SCIENTIFIC MANNER THAT 
ANY PERSON POSSESSING ORDINARY INTELLIGENCE CAN NOT FAIL TO COMPRE- 
HEND THE PRINCIPLES UPON WHICH THIS BEAUTIFUL ART IS FOUNDED, AND 
TO ACKNOWLEDGE THAT IT IS ENTITLED TO TAKE HIGH RANK AMONG TH$ 



8 OPINIONS OF REPORTERS AND TEACHERS. 

arts and sciences. In support of what I have said, I quote from the Janu- 
ary number of the Quarterly Review, the editor of which is a practical pho- 
nographer. Speaking of the l Hand-Book," he says: [See the notice from the 
Quarterly Review on a preceding page.] This commendation, coming 

FROM SUCH HIGH AUTHORITY, IS ENTITLED TO, AND WILL HAVE, GREAT 

Weight with all who read it. It is unnecessary to add more, perhaps ; 
but allow me to say, in conclusion, that I have been able to write with accelerated 
speed by adopting Mr. Graham's system, and can and do heartily recommend it 
to all my brother preachers and others as the best system of rapid writing extant, 
and recommend them to send to Mr. Graham, 848 Broadway, and to procure a 
copy of his work, which will furnish complete instruction in both the correspond- 
ing and reporting styles." W. 
"Wilton, Jan., 1859. 

From the Constellation, edited by Park Benjamin, Esq. 
1 l 3Ir. Andrew J. Graham has published a work of great ability, entitled 
1 The Hand-Book of Standard or Jbnerican Phonography. ' % <* Mr. Gra- 
ham claims for his system, that it is capable of representing with accuracy the 
sounds of the English language, and of ihe principal languages quoted by English 
writers and speakers ; that it secures considerable speed of writing, with ample 
legibility, so as to answer all the purposes for which long-hand is employed; that 
it secures, for reporting purposes, ample speed of writing, without illegibility ; 
and that order and simplicity are observed in every department. Mr. Graham 
also claims for his system a superiority to all others. These claims seem to 
us to be completely substantiated by the book, which is admirably 

MADE UP, AND IS, NO DOUBT, BY EAR THE MOST COMPLETE GRAMMAR OF 
THE ART WHICH HAS EVER BEEN PUBLISHED. "WE .PREDICT, THAT 

THE DAY IS NOT FAR DISTANT WHEN PHONOGRAPHY, AS 
WELL AS SIMPLE CHIROGRAPHY, WILL BE TAUGHT IN" OUR 
COMMON SCHOOLS, AND THIS BOOK WILL HASTEN THAT 
DAY." 

From Life Illustrated. 

1 'WORTHY OF ALL PRAISE." 



OPINIONS OP REPORTERS AND TEACHERS. 

From Mr. Chas. B. Collar, Phonographic Reporter : for several years one of ihe 
Official Reporters in Congress; and Reporter of the Constitutional Conventions 
of Massachusetts, Virginia, Ohio, and Iowa, and now a Law Reporter in New 
York. 

11 ' The Hand-Book of Standard Phonography,' in my opinion, is by far 
the completest work on Phonetic Short-Hand, ever published. The system it pre- 
sents I regard as a great improvement upon the Old or English Phonography. 



OPINIONS OF EEPOBTERS AND TEACIIEFvS. 9 

The phonographic public have now, a three-fold insurance against the 

PERPLEXING CHANGES TO WHICH THEY HATE HITHERTO BEEN SUBJECTED; 

first, in the 'Hand-Book ' itself, which has been produced at great expense ; 
second, in the system, whose completeness and standard elements render 
further change unnecessary; third, in the conservative character of its 
author. Mr. Graham's great experience as a practical reporter, and his 
ability as an author, should assure the public that his work possesses emi- 
nent advantages over any phonographic text-booh heretofore published:'' 

From Mr. A. J Marsh, Reporter for the Few York Evenly ^ i/ l' me fl f r ^ e r 
porterfofihe Boston Atlas, and Congressional Reporter for the National Intel- 
li^eDcer. 

"I have examined carefully and thoroughly Mr. Graham's 'Hand-Book 
of Standard Phonography! and find in it everything to commend, and 
nothing to condemn. / think I hazard nothing in the prediction, that 

ULTIMATELY EVERY GOOD REPORTER IN THE UNITED STATES WILL WRITE THE 

system as it is taught in the ' Hand-Book.' Mr. Graham has departed 
from the Pitman system only where some positive advantage was toJ>e 
gained, and this fact especially commends Standard Phonography to those 
who have already become phonographers. What I most highly value in the 
system of the ' Hand-Book" is its skillful avoidance of the lifting of the 
pen or pencil, which has always been a great tax upon the time of the 
' short-hand writer. Next, perhaps, to this in importance are the rules for 
forming contractions, and the valuable list of ivord-signs and contractions. 
J shall adopt Standard Phonography in its entirety; and I firmly believe 
that no further improvement can be made in Steno-Phonography without 

an injury of legibility." 

From Mr Felix G. Fontaine, for several years one of the Official Reporters of the 

United States Senate, the Official Reporter of several State Conventions, and at 

present a Law Reporter in Ntw liorh. 

"A word in regard to your new 'Hand-Book of Phonography: I have 
given this work a most careful examination, have tested and adopted, with- 
out exception, all the improvements suggested, and do not hesitate to pro- 
nounce it the most valuable and perfect treatise on short-hand that has 
come under my observation. To the learner it must prove a useful acqui- 
sition in simplifying the process by which he is to arrive at a complete 
knowledge of the art ; and to the reporter, if I may speak from my own ex- 
perience, it furnishes, in the shape of your novel and beautiful contractions 
andphraseograms, the most important auxiliaries to rapid, legible, and per- 
fect writing. Indeed, it was only recently that I heard a friend say that he 
was enabled to report nearly a third faster with your improvements than 
without them, a result which, I doubt not, will be the experience of every 
short-hand writer. With my best wishes for your success, and with hearty 
co-operation, lam truly yours, F. G. Fontaine." 



10 OPINIONS OF REPORTERS AND TEACHERS. 

From Mr. Wm. Anderson, Reporter of the New York Herald. 

"Jfr. Graham'' s ' Hand- Book of Standard Phonography ' es, in my 

opinion, the most elaborate, thorough, and able exposition of phonetic 

short-hand that lias ever been issued, and I think I have perused every work 

that has emanated from the phonographic press." 

From Mr. T. J. Ellinwood, an experienced PJwnograpliic Reporter and, Teacher, 

New York. 

''''After a thorough examination of Mr. Graham 1 s 'Hand-Book of Stan- 
dard Phonography,' 1 I have no hesitation in pronouncing it the ?nost com- 
plete exposition of phonetic short-hand that has ever been presented to the 
world. It refects great credit upon its indefatigable author. I am con- 
vinced, from the use I have already made of his improvements in Phonog- 
raphy, that they, hi no small degree, enhance the value of the art. The 
1 Compendium ,' which constitutes one of the five parts of which the book is 
composed, is of itself worth the price of the whole. The advantages arising 
from its superior arrangement can not be over-estimated either by the 
teacher or the learner. I predict for this excellent work a very extensive 
circulation, and believe it is destined, in a short time, to be adopted in this 
country as the standard on the subject of which it treats." 
From Mr. Finlay Anderson, Phonographic Reporter for the N. Y. Daily News. 

"By Mr. Graham 's excellent work, i The Hand- Book of Standard Phonog- 
raphy, 1 the pupil is easily conducted from the elements of speech, through the 
corresponding style, to the briefest kind of phonographic writing. The sys- 
tem it presents is free from the inconsistencies of the Old Phonography, and 
by securing much greater speed than the Pitman Phonography, and by other 
features, it arrives at residts which Mr. Pitman has laboriously but unsuc- 
cessfully endeavored to effect." 

From Mr. Henry B. Brown, Reporter, and, Teacher of Phonography in the Wes- 
leyan University, Middletown, Conn. 

u I cannot speak of the i Hand-Book" 1 in too high terms of commendation, 

* * It is far beyond any other work which has been published" 

From a Review in the Liberator, oy J. M. W. Yerringion, Esq., an accomplished 
Phonographic Reporter of Boston, 3lass. 

u The author of this work is a widely -known and very skillful phono- 
graphic reporter and teacher, who has embodied in it the fruits of a careful 
and thorough investigation of the principles on which Phonotypy and Pho- 
nography are based, and of many years 1 experience as a reporter. We re- 
gard it as BY FAR THE MOST COMPLETE AND COMPREHENSIVE WORK ON THESE 

subjects that has yet been published. The five parts into- which it is di- 
vided are — 1. An Introduction to Phonotypy and Phonography. 2. The 
Compendium of Standard Phonography. 3. Phonographic Reading Ex- 
ercises. 4. Phonographic Writing Exercises. 5. The Phonographic Or- 



OPINIONS OF REPORTERS AND TEACHERS. 11 

thoarapher ; an Expositor of Principles for the Ascertainment of the best 
Phonographic Outlines. The matter embraced in the several parts is pre- 
sented in a clear and intelligible form, and with a careful adherence to sci- 
entific principles. The student of Phonography will find in thorn all 
that he needs, so far as any book can give it, to perfect himself in the 
art ; while to the advanced writer, and even to the experienced reporter, the 
information and suggestions with regard to the best methods of attaining 
speed and legibility of writing will be found to be of great service. ^There 
is nothing without labor, ,' and the art of reporting, like any other valuable 
art, is not learned in a day, or a month; but by the aid of this book, with 
time and patience — which the Eastern proverb says, ' turn the mulberry leaf 
into satin ' — the student may hope-to attain a degree of skill that will abun- 
dantly repay him for his efforts. To all interested in the subject, 

AVE HEARTILY RECOMMEND THIS VOLUME." 

From Mr. Charles Segar, Phonographic Reporter for Messrs. Fowler & Wells, and 
formerly Teacher of Phonography at the Providence Conference Seminary. 

"The Pland-Book of Standard Phonography" 1 is, among phonographic 
works, whether English or American, without a rival. ^ As a text-book for 
phonographic teachers or self-learrters, and those who woxdd become compe- 
tent phonographic reporters, I can recommend it, without qualification or 
exception, as the best. As a standard work among phonographers, it must 
be, is, and will be. I regard Mr. GrahanHs improvements upon the Pitman 
system as of great value" 

From Mr. Wm. H. Orr, Phonographic Reporter, and Publisher of Phonographic 

works for Canada. 

"It is worth almost all the other phonographic books which have ever been 

published put together. The phonographic world must thank you heartily 

for such a splendid production. * * I pjrize it more than all the dusty 

old relics of phonography which I have collected together from the birth and 

infancy of the cause down to the present time." 

From Mr. JUT. F. Ethell, Phonographic Reporter for Messrs. Fowler & Wells. 

"I have examined nearly every work that has been published on the sub- 
ject of Phonography, and can say, without hesitation, that Mr. Grahaxrfs 
'•Hand-Book of Standard Phonography ' is the best and completest book yet 
presented to the American people. I can safely recommend it to all who 
wish to make themselves thorough and rapid short-hand writers. I am 
gradually adopting its principles, and find from their use a great accelera- 
tion in my speed of writing" 

From Mr. Wilbur F. Whitney, Teacher of Phonography in the W lib raham Semi- 
nary, Mash. 

"The best book of the kind now published." 



12 OPINIONS OF REPORTERS AND TEACHERS. 

From Rev. Chas. 31. Powell, Wilton, Conn. 
"The Hand-Book of Standard Phonography ' is the ?nost scientific work 
on phonetic short-hand ever issued from the press. The changes made from 
the old system are decided improvements. For clearness op elucidation, 
as ivell as for conciseness and simplicity, it is a work that lean heartily 
recommend to any and all who desire to understand the principles on 
which this art is founded." 

From C7ias. If. Plumh, Esq , Holly, 2T. Y. 
"I think I know enough of the merits of the Hand-Book" 1 to speak ad- 
visedly, and I do so when I say that it is not only immeasurably superior to 
any and every other phonographic instruction-hook, but so perfectly sys- 
tematic, so definite in detail, as to be a perfect treasure, not only to the 
phonographer, but to every student — to the elocutionist and the literary ama- 
teur." 

From Wm. T. Harris, Esq., St. Louis, Mo. 

tl I have carefully examined the Hand-Book of Standard Phonography,'' 
and do not hesitate to say that Standard Phonography is as great an improve- 
ment upon the Pitman Phonography as that ivas upon the old stenographies. 
To the reporter it is indispensable. Phonographic reporting may now be said 
to have become a science. What was formerly anomalous, now gives place 
to general principles ; and the materials which previously were prese?ited 
in a confused, chaotic way, are now reduced to the order of science." 

From James A. Kirhpatrick, Esq, Professor of Civil Engineering, and Teacher 
of Phonography in the Central High School, Philadelphia. 

u I have carefully examined your Hand-Book,' and have been so delighted 
toith its clearness and completeness, that I have taken the necessary steps to 
have it introduced as the text-book in the Philadelphia High School. I am 
well pleased ' with the appearance of the book, paper, type, and everything else." 

From Prof. G. F. Comfort, Fort Plain Seminary, Fort Plain, 27. Y. 
il Iam about to organize a class in Phonography in the Seminary here, 
and have decided to introduce as the text-book your Hand-Book of Stan- 
dard Phonography.'' " 

From Bev. Aaron Rittenhouse, Teacher of Phonography in the New York Con- 
ference Seminary, Charlottesville, 2T. Y. 

U I am very much pleased with the Hand-Book.'' It exceeds my highest 

expectations in very many respects. I did not think there could be so many 

decided improvements, nor that a work of its size could be sold at such a 

low price. I have introduced it into my classes here, and find it superior 

as A text-book. JVo one can know ivhat phonography is until he has made 

himself acquainted with Standard Phonography." 



OPINIONS OF THE PEESS. 13 

OPINIONS OF THE PRESS, CONTINUED. 



From the United States Journal, New York. 
This manual of Phonograph y is most welcome. It is the whole science 
compressed in covers, so that he who reads may learn. In these fast 
days short-hand writing has become an actual necessity, and it should 
form a part of our common-school education as much as penmanship and 
grammar. The difficulties hitherto have been that no well-digested sys- 
tem of Phonography was available for schools, although enough of the 
science had long been in existence to enable rapid writers and intelligent 
men to become good reporters. But order has at length come from 
confusion ; and here we have the desideratum, in a very fine volume, 
adapted to every ordinary emergency, and to the fullest development of 
the rapid and sure short-hand writer or reporter. Would that it had 
come ten years sooner, to have saved our own failure to become" an 
expert in short-hand writing. Mr. Graham has evidently made Pho- 
nography a life-study, has digested, philosophized, simplified, until a 
Hand-Book contains rudiments, elements, and results as clearly set forth 
as geometrical formula. We commend it to those who desire an insight 
into the Hysterics of writing as rapidly as speech itself can utter — to 
authors, editors, ministers, lawyers — all who would save themselves the 
drudgery of the tedious and debilitating process of ordinary composition. 

From the National Standard^ New Jersey. 

A New Work on Phonography. — The Hand - Book of Standard 
or American Phonography. — We have examined the work with the 
above title, published by Andrew J. Graham, Phonetic Depot, New York, 
and pronounce it, unhesitatingly, to be the most elaborate and the most 
comprehensive work upon the subject that we have ever met with This 
new system is denominated " Standard or American Phonography," in 
order to distinguish it from the*old Pitman or English Phonography, and 
is admirably adapted to our progressive age. The author has remedied 
many defects which existed in previous works, and, with the improve- 
ments, offers his present work as a standard, since it embodies every- 
thing requisite for the easy acquisition of a knowledge of Phonography. 
The subject is treated in such a manner that any one possessed of ordinary 
intelligence can master the art in a very short time, as the lessons are of 
an inductive nature, and intended to obviate the necessity of an oral 



14 OPINIONS OF THE PEESS. 

teacher ; an important consideration to those who are situated where a 
preceptor can not be afforded or obtained. Mr. Graham has evidently 
written his book with the view of placing his knowledge of the subject 
— obtained by long and successful experience in the office of instructor — 
in the possession of every one who is disposed to exert himself in any 
way proportionate to the good he desires. The editor of the Quarterly 
Review, who is a practical phonographer, in a notice of Mr. Graham's 
work," in the January number of that magazine, says : " This treatise is 
the production of a gentleman who stands at the head of his profession 
as a phonographer, and has done much for the diffusion of that beautiful 
art. It furnishes, perhaps, the best aid extant for a full acquirement, 
by easy steps and lucid explanations, of the entire principles. Mr. Gra- 
ham has furnished some modifications of Pitman's system, by which, we 
are informed by high professional authority, the contractions are rendered 
more effective, and the rapidity of the reporter's performance is greatly 
accelerated." Such commendation, from high authority, will do much to 
introduce the book to the public. While the art may be so easily and 
certainly acquired by those willing to apply themselves, we see no reason 
why Mr. Graham's work should not meet with a large demand, especially 
when it is considered what benefits a knowledge of Phonography confers 
upon the possessor. To those who desire the best work upon this highly 
useful art, we say, inclose $1 25 in a letter, and direct to "Andrew J. 
Graham, Phonetic Depot, New York," and you will receive a copy by 
return of mail. 

From ILdVs Journal of Health, Jfeio York. 
A book on this subject [Phonography], able, systematic, comprehensive, 
and clear, has long been a want, which the author has fully met. 



AMERICAN PHONOGRAPHY vs. ENGLISH PHONOGRAPHY. 

Part of a communication from the author to Ifessrs. Fowler & Wells' Life 

Illustrated. 

I. The Standard or American Phonography attains a very important 
function, a capability, which the English or Pitman Phonography could 
not produce— it enables the practiced writer of it to report verbatim the 
most rapid speakers. Or, to state this matter in a different light, if it be 
claimed untruly that the more rapid speakers could be reported absolutely 
verbatim by a very few of the best writers of the old system, without 
resorting to devices which would not be recognized as belonging to that 



OPIXIOXS OF THE PHESS. ' 15 

system, then I say that Standard Phonography will place that ability 
within the reach of thousands who otherwise could not hope for it, and 
render the reporting of fast speakers a far less difficult and lifo-exhaust- 
ing task. There is no use of attempting to conceal the fact that the Old 
Phonography was a reporting system for a very select taw, for too many 
writers of it have been made painfully conscious of that fact by then- 
failures after most persevering effort. In respect of speed, Standard 
Phonography exceeds the English Phonography more than that surpasses 
the best of the old systems of Stenography. And all this is capable of 
mathematical demonstration. It can be sufficiently demonstrated to any 
reporter by the Old Phonography by less than five minutes' examination 
of the Reporting Style of Standard Phonography. 

II. Standard Phonography recognizes details less, and general princi- 
ples more, than the English or Pitman Phonography. It is constructed 
fully in accordance with the fourth foundation principle of a standard 
system, namely, that " order and simplicity should be observed in every 
department.'' If you could afford the space for it, the demonstration of 

I this proposition could be readily afforded by a comparison of the two 
systems in respect of their rules, etc. In regard to this second point, 
the advantage obtained by the American over the English Phonography 
is a very valuable one ; for, of course, the greater the order and simplicity 
of a system, the more easily is it impressed upon, and the more securely 

j retained by, the mind, whose first law, intellectually at least, is Order. 
In Standard Phonography it will be found that even details arrange them- 
selves into Orders, Groups, and Classes, and that Exceptions obey a Law. 

III. Standard Phonography is capable of being applied with coarr- 
nience to the representation of the principal foreign languages, the sign* 
for the foreign elements being chosen in accordance with certain general 
principles, which not only distinguish the native from the foreign sounds, 
but teach with precision the pronunciation of the foreign elements. In 
all these respects English Phonography is unlike, and inferior to, the 
American Phonography. 

IV. The system of Phonography presented in the "Hand-Book" 
comes in the nick of time as a standard system — a system of harmony 

a ground of repose from the numerous and perplexing change 9 <>t' 

Pitman's system. 



jjr^f" For Catalogue of Phonorjrajyhic Books } etc., sec close of (he 
"Hand-Book." 









* 



A 750 



